GIFT  OF 


f 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/coursewpracticalOOmonsricli 


A 


PRACTICAL   COURSE 


SPANISH   LANGUAGE. 


ON  WOODBURY'S  PLAN  WITH  GERMAN. 


H.  M.  ^ONSANTO,  A.M., 

LATE  ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  NAVAL  ACADEMY 
AT   ANNAPOLIS, 

AND 

LOUIS  A.  LANGUELLIER,  LL.D., 

LATE  TUTOR  IN  THE  COLLEGE  OF  THE  CITY  OF  NEW  YORK. 


"Pocos  preceptos  y  mucha  practica.' 


lYISON,  BLAKEMAN,  TAYLOR,  &  CO. 
NEW  YORK  AND   CHICAGO. 


PRESERVATION 
COPY  ADDED 


/V9ff 


Copyright,  1875. 
Bx  H.  M.  MONSANTO  and  LOUIS  A.  LANGUELLIEU 


PEEFAOE, 


In  preparing  the  present  work  it  has  been  the  aim  of  the 
authors,  wliile  excluding  nothing  of  practical  value  which  has 
already  been  placed  before  the  public,  to  combine  with  the  best 
features  of  the  most  approved  methods  the  results  of  their  own 
experience.  Wliile  endeavoring  to  render  this  work  a  valuable 
assistant  in  the  class-room,  they  have  sought  at  the  same  time 
to  adapt  it  to  the  purposes  of  private  instruction,  and  in  so 
doing  have  availed  themselves  to  a  great  extent  of  the  admi- 
rable plan  presented  in  Woodbury^s  Practical  Course  with  the 
German  Language.  Accordingly  the  lessons  are  arranged  in 
the  following  order  :  — 

1.  The  Subjects  of  the  Lesson. 

2.  Examples,  accompanied  by  their  nearest  English  equiv- 
alents," and  made  to  illustrate  the  grammatical  and  idiomatic 
principles  which  are  involved  in  the  Lessons. 

3.  Yoga BUL ARIES  placed  before  the  Exercises,  the  masculine 
and  feminine  names  being  grouped  separately,  and  other  parts 
of  speech  arranged  alphabetically  for  convenience  of  reference. 

4.  Spanish  Exercises.  The  sentences  in  Spanish  require 
only  the  application  of  the  instructions  contained  in  the  Les- 
son, or  in  the  preceding  ones,  for  their  translation  into  Eng- 
lish. 

5.  English  Exercises.  The  analogous  sentences  in  English 
are  presented  in  immediate  connection  with  the  preceding 
ones  in  Spanish.  The  principles  applied  in  the  Spanish  Ex- 
ercises are  thus  made  a  most  convenient  and  effective  auxiliary 


IV  PREFACE. 

in  the  still  more  advanced  and  difficult  work  of  translating 
English  into  Spanish. 

6.  Grammatical  and  Idiomatic  Principles.  This  division 
may  be  employed  by  means  of  the  references  either  in  connec- 
tion with  the  preceding  instructions,  or,  when  not  thus  re- 
quired, may  be  applied  both  as  a  test  of  the  pupil's  previous 
deductions,  and  at  the  same  time  as  an  appropriate  and  impres- 
sive review. 

The  rules  on  pronunciation  will,  it  is  hoped,  be  found  as 
complete  as  possible,  and  the  selection  of  sentences  in  the 
Exercises  an  improvement  on  those  of  many  former  methods. 
The  conjugation  of  all  the  irregular  verbs  in  general  use  will 
be  found  at  the  end  of  the  book,  together  with  a  brief  sketch 
on  the  formation  of  the  Spanish  language,  and  also  a  com- 
plete dictionary  of  all  the  words  used  in  the  different  Exer- 
cises. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  book  does  not  contain  a  Second 
Part  devoted  to  a  systematic  rearrangement  of  the  grammati- 
cal facts  contained  in  the  several  lessons.  Such  a  Second 
Part  is,  we  believe,  seldom  used  by  students,  and  we  have 
been  careful,  as  far  as  possible,  in  the  construction  of  our 
lessons  to  insert  together  all  the  facts  pertaining  to  each  part 
of  the  subject.  So  the  course  of  our  book  corresponds  very 
nearly  to  that  which  would  be  adopted  in  a  systematic  gram- 
mar. 

While  respectfully  presenting  this  work  to  the  public,  the 
authors  indulge  the  hope  that  it  may  prove  a  welcome  auxil- 
iary to  the  acquisition  of  the  Spanish  language. 

H.  M.  MONSANTO. 
LOUIS  A.  LANGUELLIER. 
New  York,  July,  1875. 


CONTENTS. 


Pages 

Preface iii 

Index vii 

Introduction .13 

§  1.    Letters  and  Sounds.  —  Alphabet 13 

§  2.    Pronunciation 14 

1.  Vowels 14 

2.  Diphthongs 14 

3.  Triphthongs 15 

§  3.   Consonants      .........     15 

§  4.    Double  Letters    . 19 

§5.   Syllables 19 

§  6.   Accent 20 

§7.    Punctuation 22 

§  8.   Exercises  in  Pronunciation 22 

Lessons  : 

I.    Article,  different  Forms 25 

II.    Plural 28 

III.  Contraction  of  Preposition  with  Article         .         .         .         .32 

IV.  Pronouns 35 

V.    Verbs  ser  and  estar 40 

VI.    Use  of  the  Prepositions  de  and  para .         .         .         .         .         46 

VII. -The  Negative 49 

VIII.    Adjectives,  Formation  of  the  Feminine     ....  54 

IX.    Place  of  Adjectives 59 

X.    Diminutive  and  Augmentative  Nouns        .         .         .         .         64 

XI.    Adjectives.  Comparative  and  Superlative  Relative  .         .     70 

XII.    Superlative  Absolute.     Adjectives  and  Adverbs         .         .  76 

XIII.  Possessive  Adjectives .81 

XIV.  Possessive  Pronouns 86 

XV.    Demonstrative  Adjectives 91 

XVI.    Demonstrative  Pronouns 94 

XVII.    Auxiliary  Verb  haber 99 

XVI 1 1.    AuxiXmry  Yerhhaiber  (continiced) 103 

XIX.    Present  Participle,  or  Gerund 107 

XX.    Cardinal  Numbers    .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .112 

XXI.    Ordinal  Numbers 117 

XXII.    Pronouns  in  Simple  Tenses       ......        122 


CONTENTS. 


XXX. 

XXXI. 

XXXII. 

XXXIII. 

-     XXXIV. 

XXXV. 

XXXVI. 

XXXVII. 

XXXVIII. 


XU. 

XLII. 
XLIII. 
XLIV. 

XLV. 
XLVI. 


XLIX. 

L. 

LI. 

LI  I. 

LIII. 

LIV. 

LV. 

LVL 

LVII. 

LVin. 


XXIII.  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns      .         .         .         .129 

XXIV.  Auxiliary  Verbs,  haber,  tener   .         .         .         .         .         136 
XXV.    Idiomatic  Uses  of  tener 143 

XXVI.    Auxiliary  Verbs,  ser,  estar 149 

XXVII.    Haber  and  ser  used  as  Impersonal  Verbs        .         .         .156 

XXVIII.    The  Time  of  the  Day,  etc 161 

XXIX.    Use  of  the  Article .         .165 

Personal  Pronouns  with  Prepositions  and  Verbs  .  171 

The  Respective  Place  of  Pronouns 176 

Regular  Verbs,  Present  Indicative      .         .         .         .  180 

Irregular  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjug.,  Present  Indicative  183 
Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjug.,  Present  Indicative  188 
Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjug.,  Present  Indicative     193 

Imperfect  Tense,  Indicative  Mood 199 

The  Past  Definite  or  Preterite,  and  the  Past  Indefinite         203 

Irregularities  of  the  Preterite 209 

XXXIX.    The  Past  Anterior  and  the  Pluperfect  (Indicative)      .  215 

•XL.    The  Future  and  Future  Anterior  ■ 218 

Imperative  Mood 223 

Subjunctive  Mood,  Present 228 

Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  (Subjunctive)      ,         .         .  236 

Coifditional  and  Potential  (Subjunctive)         .         .         .     243 
Subjunctive  Future  and  Future  Perfect      ...  251 

Infinitive  Mood     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .253 

XLVI  I.    The  Infinitive  governed  by  Prepositions      .         .         .         261 

XLVIII.    The  Gerund  or  Present  Participle 264 

The  Past  Participle   . 269 

The  Past  Participle  (contimccd) 274 

The  Passive  Verb 278 

Reflective  Verbs 282 

Reflective  Verbs  {contmued) 288 

Periphrastic  Verbs 292 

Impersonal  Verbs 298 

Government  of  Verbs 301 

Government  of  Adjectives  .....  304 

The  Adverbs 308 

LIX.    The  Preposition 313 

LX.    Defective  Verbs 319 

LXI.    Agreement  of  the  Verb  with  its  Subject      .         .         .  321 

-.^^^LXII.  Conjunctions  and  Interjections  .....  324 
Tablk  of  Terminations  of  the  Three  Regular  Conjugations,  327,  328 
List  of  the  Principal  Irregular  Verbs  ....  328-369 
Formation  of  the  Spanish  Language  ....  370-372 
General  Vocabulary  . 373-398 

1.  Spanish-English 373 

2.  English-Spanish 386 


INDEX. 


The  heavy-face  figures  refer  to  the  Lessons,  the  light-face  figures  to  the  Rules  ;  as, 
for  instance,  3.  1-3  denotes  Lesson  3,  Rules  1-3,  &c.  When  page  or  section  is  referred 
to,  p.  or  §  is  given  with  the  figures. 


A. 

A  or  An,  1.  3. 

A,  3.  1.  When  used  with  active  verbs, 
18.  3.  When  not  used  with  an 
active  verb,  18.  4  ;  20.  6  ;  23.  2. 
When  used  with  el  cual  {la  cual, 
etc. ),  23.  6.  When  used  before  a 
following  Infinitive,  46.  p.  254,  3. 
Used  after  volver,  48.  9  in  fine. 
Used  with  some  Periphrastic  verbs, 
54.  1-6.  Complement  of  another 
Preposition,  59.  p.  314.  Its  use, 
59.  1. 

Ablative  absolute,  49.  5. 

Accent,  p.  20,  §  6. 

Accusative  case,  22.  6;  23.  2-6; 
30.  1  ;  31.  1,  2,  4. 

Active  verb,  51.  1,  2.  Becoming  a 
Reflective  Verb,  52.  1.  When  be- 
coming an  Impersonal  Verb,  55.  2. 

Adjectives,  repeated  before  nouns,  1. 
4.  Plural  formed  as  with  nouns, 
2.  8.  Formation  of  the  Feminine, 
8.  1-5.  Referring  to  two  nouns  in 
the  singular,  8.  6.  Referring  to 
two  nouns  of  different  genders,  8.  7. 
Place  of  Adjectives,  9.  1-4.  Used 
also  as  nouns,  9.  5.  Comparative 
and  Superlative  Relative,  11.  Gov- 
ernment of  Adjectives,  57.  1-7. 
Used  as  adverbs,  58.  9. 


A  donde.    See  donde. 

Adverbs,  Comparative  and  Superla- 
tive, 11.  12  ;  13.  9,  Rem.  3.  Differ- 
ent sorts  of  Adverbs,  58.  pp.  308, 
309.  Their  place,  58.  1.  Their  for- 
mation, 58.  2.  Used  diminutively 
or  augmentatively,  58.  8. 

Ago,  its  translation,  27.  p.  157. 

Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  sub- 
ject, 61. 

Al,  3.  1. 

A  la,  3.  1. 

Alas,  3.  1. 

Algo,  when  used  with  tener,  25.  3. 

Algun.     See  alguno. 

Alguno  (algunos,  alguna,  algunas), 
4.  8  ;  7.  11,  and  Obs. ;  9.  6,  Rem.  1. 

AUi  esta  and  hay,  p.  158. 

A  los,  3.  1. 

Alphabet,  p.  13,  §  1. 

An  or  A,  1.  3. 

Andar,  when  it  may  be  used  instead 
of  ir,  48.  4. 

Ante,  its  use,  59.  2. 

Anos,  used  with  tenor,  25.  4. 

Any,  4.  8. 

Aquel,  aquella ;  este,  esta ;  ese,  esa. 
Their  different  meaning,  15. 1 ;  16.  2. 

Aquello,  eso  and  esto,  their  difference 
of  meaning,  16.  1,  3-5. 

Article,   Definite,         1.      Indefinite, 


Vlll 


INDEX. 


1.  3.  13.  9,  Rem.  2.  Not  sepa- 
rated from  the  Demonstrative  or 
.Relative  Pronoun,  16.  8.  When 
omitted,  23.  7.  Its  use,  29.  1-10 
and  1-8.  When  used  with  an  In- 
finitive, 46.  13,  14. 
Augmentative  nouns  and  adjectives, 
9.  1-4.  Sometimes  accented  dif- 
ferently, R.  4,  General  Obs. 


Buen.    See  Bueno. 
Bueno,  9.  6,  Rem.  1. 


Can,  44.  11,  L 

Cardinal  numbers,  20.  When  end- 
ing in  OS  and  as,  20.  2.  When  used 
with  y,  20.  3.  When  used  instead 
of  the  ordinal  numbers,  21.  4,  Obs. ; 
R.  5,  6. 

Ch,  p.  16,  §  3. 

Cien.    See  Ciento. 

Ciento,  when  becoming  cien,  20.  4. 
Used  with  mil,  20.  8. 

Collective  noun,  when  put  in  the  sin- 
gular o?'  in  the  plural,  61.  8. 

Collective  numbers,  21. 

Collective  partitive,  61.  8. 

Como,  when  governing  the  Infinitive 
mood,  47.  2. 

Compound  tenses,  in  Reflective  Verbs, 
52.  5. 

Comparative,  its  formation,  11.  1-9. 

Comparative  and  Superlative,  11, 12. 

Compound  gerund,  48.  6,  8. 

Compound  nouns,  1.  5  ;  General  Obs, 

Con,  when  used  before  a  following  In- 
finitive, 46.  p.  255,  R.  8  ;  48.  5,  2, 
Note.  Complement  of  an  Adjec- 
tive, 57.  4.     Its  use,  59.  3. 

Conditional,  44. 

Conjunctions,  requiring  the  Subjunc- 


tive mood,  44.  2-4,  7,  10.  List  of 
the  Principal  Conjunctions,  62. 

Conjunctive  expressions,  requiring 
the  Subjunctive  mood,  42.  10.  List 
of  Conjiinctive  expressions,  62. 

Conmigo,  30.  10. 

Conocer  and  Saber,  14.  9. 

Consigo,  30.  10. 

Contigo,  30.  10. 

Consonants,  p.  15,  §  3. 

Contents,  pp.  v,  vi. 

Could,  44.  11,  2. 

Cual,  when  used  with  tal,  23.  7  c. 
Cual  and  que,  23.  9. 

Cual,  Interrogative  Pronoun,  23.  11. 

Cuando,  used  with  Subjunctive  future, 
45.  1. 

Cuanto  {cuanta,  cvxintos,  cuantas),  how 
translated,  23.  13. 

Cuyo,  its  uses,  23.  8.  As  an  Interro- 
gative Pronoun,  23.  11. 


D,  when  suppressed  in  Reflective  Verbs, 
52.  7. 

Dative  case,  30.  1 ;  31.  1,  2,  4. 

Days  of  the  week,  20. 

De,  3.  1,  2  ;  6.  1-3.  Used  with  the 
Definite  Article  before  nosotros, 
14.  6.  Used  with  ser,  14.  8.  Used 
with  tener,  25.  2.  When  used  be- 
fore a  following  Infinitive,  46.  p .  254, 
R.  2  note,  5  and  note,  9  and  note, 
10,  3,  11.  Used  after  a  Past  Parti- 
ciple, 49.  7.  Used  with  some  Peri- 
phrastic Verbs,  54.  1,  5,  6.  Pre- 
ceded by  a  verb,  56.  1,  2.  Comple- 
ment of  an  Adjective,  57.  1-4,  7. 
Complement  of  another  Preposition, 
59.  p.  314.  Its  use,  59.  4.  Used 
after  a  partitive  noun,  61.  8. 

De  and  de,  p.  20,  §  6,  1. 

Deber,  18.  2. 

Defective  verbs,  60. 

Definite  article,  1. 1 ;  13.  5,  7.   Used 


INDEX. 


IX 


with  de  before  nosotros,  14.  6. 
Used  with  verbs  expressing  moral 
or  phj'sical  properties,  25.  6  andObs. 
When  used  to  translate  on,  28.  3. 
Its  iise,  29.  1-10  and  1-8.  When 
omitted,  29.  8.     Exceptions,  1-5. 

Del,  3.  1. 

De  la,  3.  1. 

De  las,  3.  1. 

De  los,  3.  1. 

Demonstrative  adjectives,  15.  1-4. 
Generally  precede  the  noun,  15.  2. 
Must  be  repeated  before  every  noun, 
15.  3. 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  16.  1-10. 

Descriptive  Tense,  36.  3. 

Diminutive  nouns  and  adjectives, 
10.  1-4.  Sometimes  accented  dif- 
ferently, R.  4,  General  Obs. 

Diphthongs,  p.  14,  §  2.  2. 

Direct  object,  52.  1,  2,  4. 

Direct  pronouns,  30.  1-12. 

Divisions  of  the  day,  20.  p.  113 ;  28. 
p.  162. 

Doble.  See  p.  118  (Multiplicative 
Numbers)  and  21.  8. 

Don,  9.  6. 

Dona,  9.  6. 

Donde,  when  preceded  by  a  (a  donde), 
and  by  en  (en  donde),  15.  4.  Used 
as  a  Relative  Pronoun,  23.  10.  When 
goveniing  the  Infinitive,  47.  2. 

Double  letters,  p.  19,  §  4.  See  also 
ch  and  11. 

E 

E  and  y,  18. 

El,  1.  1.     Used  (by  euphony)  instead 

of  la,  2  ;  13.  4. 
El  de  el  {or  de  ella,  de  ellos,  de  ellas). 
^  Used  instead  of  el  suyo,  la  suya,  etc. 
El,  4.  6  ;  13.  5. 
El  and  el,  p.  20,  §  6.  1  ;  4.  6. 
El  {or  la,  los,  las,  lo)  de  V,  14.  4. 
El  cual  {la  ciial,  etc. )    When  used  and 

how,  23.  6. 


Ella,  4.  6  ;  13.  5. 

Ellas,  4.  6  ;  13.  5. 

Ello,  used  instead  of  eso,  16.  9.  Cor- 
responding to  it,  16.  9. 

Ellos,  4.  6  ;  13.  5. 

El  suyo,  la  suya,  used  instead  of 
tmestro,  vuestra,  14.  3. 

En,  used  with  a  Present  Participle, 
19.  8  and  Obs.  When  used  before 
a  following  Infinitive,  46.  p.  254, 
R.  7.  Its  use  as  a  Preposition, 
59.  5. 

En  donde.    See  Donde. 

English-Spanish  Vocabulary,  p.  386. 

Ese,  esa ;  este,  esta  ;  a%uel,  aquella ; 
their  different  meaning,  15.  5. 

Eso,  esto  and  aquello,  their  difference 
of  meaning,  16.  1,  3-5. 

Estar,  used  with  a  Past  Participle, 
18.  1.  Used  with  a  Present  Parti- 
ciple, 19.  3.  Not  used  with  ser, 
ir,  venir,  19.  4.  Its  Present  Parti- 
ciple often  preceding  another  Pres- 
ent Participle,  19.  9.  Used  instead 
of  tener,  25.  1,  Obs.  a,  h,  c.  Its' 
conjugation,  26. 

Estar  and  ser,  5.  1-3.  Used  instead 
of  tener,  25.  1,  Obs.  a,  h,  c.  Their 
conjugations,  26. 

Este,  esta  ;  ese,  esa  ;  aquel,  aquella ; 
their  different  meaning,  15.  1 ;  16.  2. 

Esto,  eso,  and  aquello,  their  differ- 
ence of  meaning,  16.  1,  3-5. 

Exclamation-point  (;),  p.  22,  §  7,  2. 

Exclamatory  phrases,  62. 


Feminine  gender,  1.  1. 

Formation  of  the  Spanish  language, 
pp.  370-372. 

Fractional  numbers,  21. 

Future  anterior,  40.  6. 

Future  perfect,  45.  1. 

Future  tense,  30.  5,  Obs.  Its  forma- 
tion, 40.  1-4.     When  used  instead 


INDEX. 


of  the  Imperative,  40.  5.     Subjunc- 
tive future,  45.  1. 
Futuro  perfecto,  42.  5,  a. 

G. 

Genders,  1.  1  and  General  Ob». 

General  Vocabulary,  Spauisli-Eng- 
lish,  p.  373.     English-Spanish,  386. 

Genitive  case,  30.  12. 

Genitive  partitive,  46.  5  and  Note. 

Gerund.     See  Present  Participle. 

Government,  of  Verbs,  56.  Of  Ad- 
jectives, 57.  Of  Adverbs,  58.  6. 
Of  Prepositions,  59.  1-7. 

Gran.    See  Grande. 

Grande,  9.  6,  Rem.  3  and  note. 

H. 

Haber,  17.  1,  2.  Cannot  be  separated 
from  the  principal  verb,  R.  1.  Its 
conjiigation,  24.  Used  as  Imper- 
sonal Verb,  27.  1,  and  translated  by 
ago,  there  to  be,  since,  this,  there, 

,^  etc.,  27.  2.  Expressing  an  action 
"^r  a  state  which  still  continues, 
p.  157.  Expressing  measure  or  dis- 
tance, p.  157.  Used  with  que  be- 
fore an  Infinitive,  27.  3.  Used  im- 
personally, 55.  p.  298. 

Haber  and  tener,  17.  1.  Their  con- 
jugations, 24. 

Haber  de,  18.  2. 

Hacer,  Avlien  used  instead  of  haber, 
27.  2,  Obs.  When  followed  by  an 
Infinitive,  46.  12.  Used  imperson- 
ally, 55.  p.  298. 

Hay  and  alii  esta,  p.  158. 

Hijos  mios  !  13.  9. 

Holidays,  28.  p.  162. 

How  exclamatory,  rendered  by  que, 
23.  12. 

I. 

Imperative  mood,  41.  1-7.  Used 
with  pronouns,  41.  p.  224,  3,  6.  Of 
Reflective  Verbs,  62.  7. 


lm-p&T2itive-affirmative,  31.  p.  177 ; 
41.  1-7.  -Negative,  31.  p.  177 ; 
41.  5,  c,  6. 

Imperfect,  of  the  Indicative,  its  for- 
mation, 36.  p.  199  ;  its  use,  36. 1-3. 
General  Obs.  on  the  Imperfect  of  the 
Indicative,  37.  7.  Of  the  Subjunc- 
tive, its  three  forms,  43.  1  ;  its  use, 
43.  2,  4,  5. 

Imperfect  conditionals,  44.  2. 

Impersonal  verbs,  55.  1-4.  Essen- 
tially or  Accidentally  Impersonal 
Verbs,  55.  2.  Peculiarities  of  some 
Impersonal  Verbs,  55.  4. 

Indefinite  article,  1.  3.  When  omit- 
ted, 5.  4  and  Obs.  ;  29.  8.  Excep- 
tions, 1-5. 

Indicative  mood.  Present,  32.  35. 
Imperfect,  36.  Preterite  or  Past 
Definite,  37.  Past  Anterior,  39. 
Pluperfect,  39.  Future  and  Future 
Anterior,  40. 

Indirect  object,  52.  1,  2,  4. 

Indirect  pronouns,  30.  1,  2,  9-12. 

Infinitive  mood,  46,  47.  When  used 
as  a  noun,  46.  13  ;  with  or  without 
the  Article,  14.  Governed  by  Prep- 
ositions, 47.  1  ;  by  the  conjunctions 
como,  que,  the  adverb  donde,  or 
an  Interrogative  Pronoun,  2  ;  ren- 
dered by  the  Present  Indicative  or 
the  Subjunctive  Mood,  3.  When 
may  be  used  instead  of  the  Gerund, 
48.  3,  5,  Note.  When  used  with 
con,  48.  5,  2,  Note. 

Infinitive,  preceded  by  que  and  ha- 
ber, 27.  3. 

In  order  to,  46.  6. 

Interjections,  62. 

Interjectional  phrases,  62. 

Interrogation-point  (i),  p.  22,  §  7, 1. 

Interrogative  pronouns,  23.  When 
governing  the  Infinitive,  47.  2. 

Interrogative  sentence,  4.  7. 

Ir,  not  used  with  estar,  19.  4.     Used 


INDEX. 


XI 


with  an  adverb,  35.  7.  Used  with 
por,  35.  7,  Obs.  Imperfect  Indica- 
tive, 36.  pp.  199,  200.  When  it  may 
be  nsed  instead  of  andar,  48.  4. 
When  it  may  be  used  instead  of 
estar,  51.  7. 

Irregular  verbs,  tirst  conjugation, 
33.  1-4;  second  conjugation,  34. 
1  - 10  ;  third  conjugation,  35.  1-9. 

Irregular  verbs,  list  of  the  principal 
Irregular  Verbs,  pp.  328-369. 

Irse,  53.  p.  288. 

It,  sometimes  not  rendered  in  Span- 
ish, 16.  10.  Different  ways  of  trans- 
lating it,  22.  6. 

Its,  13.  6. 

J. 

Jamas,  used  with  no,  7.  3.  Jamas 
and  nunca,  3-5. 

L. 

La,  1.  1  -  2  ;  13.  4.  As  a  Pronoun  in 
Simple  Tenses,  22.  1-2.  In  com- 
pound tenses,  22.  3.  Joined  with 
the  Infinitive  and  Gerund,  22.  4  and 
p.  124.  Placed  after  the  verb,  p.  124. 
When  translated  by  it,  22.  6.  Used 
witli  una  to  translate  one  o'clock, 
28.  1. 

Las,  2.  1  ;  13.  4.  As  a  Pronoun  in 
Simple  Tenses,  22.  1,  2.  In  Com- 
pound Tenses,  22.  3.  Joined  with 
the  Infinitive  and  Gerund,  22.  4  and 
p.  124.  Placed  after  the  verb,  p.  124. 
When  translated  by  them.  Used 
with  a  numeral  to  indicate  the  time 
of  the  day,  28.  1. 

Le,  used  in  Simple  Tenses,  22.  1,  2. 
In  Compound  Tenses,  22.  3.  Joined 
with  the  Infinitive  and  Gerund,  22. 
4  and  p.  124.  Placed  after  the  verb, 
p.  124.  When  translated  by  it,  22. 
G.  Used  with  a  pronoun  and  V.  or 
V.  v.,  30.  7. 


Les,  grammatical  translation  of  to 
them,  22.  6. 

LI,  p.  17,  §  3. 

Lo,  1.  1,  2  and  Rem.  1,  2.  Used  with 
Possessive  Pronoun,  14.  7.  As  a 
Pronoun  in  Simple  Tenses,  22.  1,  2. 
In  Compound  Tenses,  22.  3.  Joined 
with  the  Infinitive  and  Gerund,  22. 
4  and  p.  124.  Placed  after  the  verb, 
p.  124.  Declinable  and  undeclin- 
able, p.  125  ;  22.  5.  When  trans- 
lated by  it,  22.  6. 

Los,  2.  1 ;  13.  4.  As  a  Pronoun  in 
Simple  Tenses,  22.  1,  2.  In  Com- 
pound Tenses,  22.  3.  Joined  with 
the  Infinitive  and  Gerund,  22.  4  and 
p.  124.  Placed  after  the  verb,  p. 
124.  When  translated  by  them, 
22.  6. 


M. 

Mai.     SeeMalo. 

Malo,  9.  6,  Rem.  1.  W 

Mandar,  when  followed  by  an  Infini- 
tive, 46.  12. 

Mas  de,  20   7. 

Masculine  gender,  1.  1. 

May,  44.  11,  /. 

Medio  (media),  used  to  indicate  the 
time  of  the  day,  28.  1. 

Medio  and  mitad,  21.  7. 

Menos,  used  to  indicate  the  time  of 
the  day,  28.  2. 

Menos  de,  20.  7. 

Mi  and  mi,  p.  20,  §  6,  1. 

Might,  11,  2,  3. 

Might  have,  44.  11,  7. 

Mil,  when  used  in  the  plural,  20.  5. 
Used  with  ciento,  20.  8. 

Mio,  13.  9. 

Mismo,  misma,  used  with  a  Posses- 
sive Pronoun,  14.  2.  Used  with  a 
Demonstrative  Pronoun,  16.  5. 

Mitad  and  medio,  21.  7. 


Xll 


INDEX. 


Months  of  the  year,  21. 

Moods,  Indicative,  32-40.  Impera- 
tive, 41.  Subjunctive,  42-45.  In- 
finitive, 46-50. 

Multiplicative  numbers,  21. 


Kada  used  with  ni,  7.  6.  Meaning 
not  anything,  7.  11,  Obs.  When 
used  with  tener,  25.  3. 

Nadie  used  with  ni,  7.  6.  Meaning 
not  anybody,  7.  11,  Obs. 

Narrative  tense,  37.  7. 

Negative,  7.  Double  negative,  7.  2. 
Two  negatives  after  the  verb,  7.  7. 

Neuter  article,  1.  1  and  Rem.  1,  2. 

Neuter  gender,  1.  1  and  Rem.  1,  2. 

Neuter  verb,  when  becoming  a  Reflec- 
tive Verb,  52.  1.  When  becoming 
Impersonal  Verb,  55.  2,  3. 

Ni  used  with  jamas,  nunca,  nada, 
nadie,  etc.,  7.  6.  Requiring  the 
plural,  61.  2. 

Ningun.     See  ninguno. 

Ninguno  (ningunos,  ninguna,  nin- 
gunas),  7.  9  and  Obs. ;  9.  6,  Rem.  1. 

No,  put  before  the  verb,  7.  1.  When 
omitted,  R.  2,  Obs.,  R.  3.  Used  by 
emphasis  with  an  affirmative  sen- 
tence, 7.  8  and  Note.  Put  at  the 
end  of  a  sentence,  R.  10, 

Nos,  when  becoming  no,  30.  8. 

Not  anybody,  7.  11,  Obs. 

Not  anything,  7.  11,  Obs. 

Nouns  ending  in  o,  a,  cion  or  tion, 
tad  or  dad.  See  1.  5,  General  Obs. 
Having  ho  plural,  2.  9.  Having  no 
singular,  2.  9. 

Nos  and  nosotros,  4.  2. 

Nosotros  and  nos,  4.  2. 

Numbers.  See  Cardinal,  Ordinal, 
Collective,  Fractional,  and  Mul- 
tiplicative numbers. 

Nunca  used  witli  no,  7.  3.  Nunca 
and  jamas,  R.  3,  Obs. 


N,  p.  17,  h  3. 


N. 


0. 


0,  when  requiring  the  Plural,  61.  2. 

6  and  u,  18.  p.  104. 

Object  before  the  subject,  4.  5.  Pre- 
ceded by  a  cardinal  number,  20.  6. 

O'clock,  its  translation,  28.  1. 

On,  when  translated  in  Spanish  by  the 
Definite  Article,  28.  3. 

One,  1.  3. 

Ordinal  numbers,  21.  Agree  in  gen- 
der and  number  with  the  noun,  21.  1. 
When  used  without  the  Article, 
21.  4.  When  used  instead  of  a  Car- 
dinal Number,  21.  5. 

Otro,  16.  4. 

P. 

Para,  6.  3.  When  used  before  a  fol- 
lowing Infinitive,  46.  j).  254,  6.  Its 
use,  59.  6. 

Para  siempre  used  with  jamas,  7.  5. 

Participio  absolute,  30.  3. 

Participio  de  Preterite,  48.  6.     * 

Participio  pasivo,  49.  3. 

Participles  actives,  48.  1. 

Participles  de  presente,  48.  1. 

Participle.  See  Present  Participle 
and  Past  Participle. 

Passive  verb,  51.  1-7. 

Past  Anterior,  its  foraiation,  39.  1. 
Its  use,  R.  2  and  Obs.  1,  2. 

Past  Definite.    See  Preterite. 

Past  Indefinite,  37.  1,  5-7. 

Past  Participle,  ends  in  Regular  Con- 
jugation, viz,  in  ado  for  the  first 
conjugation,  and  in  ido  for  the  sec- 
ond and  third  conjugations,  17.  5  ; 
49.  1.  Irregular  Past  Participles, 
18.  Agrees  with  its  subject,  when 
accompanied  by  estar,  18.  1.  Al- 
ways formed  regularly  in  the  Irregu- 
lar Verbs  of  first  conjugation,  33.  3. 


INDEX. 


Xlll 


In-egular  Participle,  49.  p.  269. 
Having  sometimes  an  active  mean- 
ing, 49.  p.  269.  Considered  as  an  Ad- 
jective, 49.  2,  4.  Invariable  when 
joined  with  haber,  49.  3.  Used  as 
an  abbreviation  of  the  Gerund,  49.  5, 
6,  and  Note.  Preceded  by  a  prepo- 
sition, 49.  6,  and  Note.  Requiring 
after  them  de  or  por,  49.  7.  Hav- 
ing an  active  and  a  passive  meaning, 
49.  8.  Used  as  feminine  nouns, 
49.  9.  Verbs  having  two  past  par- 
ticiples, one  regular  and  one  irregu- 
lar. Their  different  uses,  50.  p.  274 
and  R.  I.  When  invariable,  51.  5, 
6.  Used  as  adjective  governs  de  or 
por,  57.  6. 

Perfect  of  the  subjunctive,  42.  12. 

Periphrastic  verbs,  54. 

Pero  and  sine,  18.  5. 

Personal  pronouns,  used  with  prepo- 
sitions, 30.  1  -  3,  9  - 11.  Used  with 
verbs,  30.  1  - 12.  Used  with  Reflec- 
tive Verbs,  52.  1,  2. 

Plural  of  nouns,  2.  2-9.  Of  adjec- 
tives, 8.  Used  with  verbs,  61.  1  -  3,  6. 

Pluperfect,  of  the  Indicative,  39.  3, 
andObs.  Of  the  Subjunctive,  43.  2, 
Obs.,  6;  44.  9. 

Ponerse,  53.  2. 

Por,  used  with  ir,  35.  7,  Obs.  Used 
with  comenzar,  empezar,  and  aca- 
bar,  46.  4.  Meaning  on  account  of 
or  because;  meaning  insteadof,  47. 1. 
Used  after  a  Past  Participle,  49?  7. 
Used  after  an  adjective,  57.  4.  Its 
use,  59.  7. 

Por  siempre  used  with  jamas,  7.  5. 

Possessive  adjectives,  their  agree- 
ment, 13.  1.  Repeated  before  every 
noun,  2.     Not  used  after  a  noun, 

13.  9. 

Possessive  pronouns,  14.  Their  agree- 
ment, 14.  1.  Used  empliatically  with 
mismo,   misma,    propio,    propia, 

14.  2.     Used  witli  lo,  14.  7. 


Postrer.    See  Postrero. 

Postrero,  9.  6,  Rem.  1  ;  21.  2. 

Potential,  46.  11. 

Preface,  pp.  iii,  iv. 

Prepositions,  30.  1-3,  7,  9, 10.  Must 
be  repeated  before  every  pronoun, 
30.  11.  Preceding  a  Past  Partici- 
ple, 49.  6,  and  Note.  Following  a 
verb,  56.  1,  2.  Following  an  adjec- 
tive, 57.  1-7.  Preceded  by  an  ad- 
verb, 58.  6.  Requiring  de  after 
them,  59.  p.  314.  Requiring  a  after 
them,  59.  p.  314. 

Prepositional  phrases,  requiring  de 
after  them,  59.  p.  314. 

Present  indicative,  31.  1-5.  Used 
instead  of  the  Future,  32.  2.  Used 
instead  of  the  Past  Tense,  32.  2. 
Its  formation  in  Regular  Verbs,  32. 
4,  5  ;  in  Irregular  Verbs  of  First  Con- 
jugation, 33.  1,  2,  4 ;  in  Irregular 
Verbs  of  Second  Conjugation,  34. 
1-10;  in  Irregular  Verbs  of  Third 
Conjugation,  35.  1-9.  When  used 
concurrently  with  the  Present  Sub- 
junctive, 42.  6,  9.  May  govern  the 
Conditional,  44.  8.  When  used  in- 
stead of  the  Present  Indicative,  47.  3. 

Present  Participle,  or  Gerund,  ends 
(in  Regular  Verbs)  in  ando  for  the 
first  conjugation,  and  in  iendo  for 
the  second  and  third  conjugation, 
19.  1.  Present  Participle  of  verbs 
ending  in  eer  and  uir,  19.  2.  Used 
with  estar,  19.  3.  Its  use,  19.  5-7. 
Used  with  en,  19.  8,  and  Obs.  Used 
with  the  Present  Participle  of  estar, 
19.  9.  Used  instead  of  an  adverb, 
conjunction,  or  preposition,  19.  10. 
Always  formed  regularly  in  the  Ir- 
regular Verbs  of  First  Conjugation, 
33.  3.  When  used  after  another 
verb,  46.  4  and  Note,  8  and  Note. 
Has  two  forms,  the  one  in  ante  or 
ente  and  the  second  in  ando  or 
iendo,  48.  1.     When  used  concur- 


XIV 


INDEX. 


rently  with  the  Infinitive,  48.  3. 
When  transhited  in  English  by  the 
conjunctions  as,  since,  if,  and  the 
adverbs  when,  while,  whilst,  48. 
7,  and  by  como,  luego  que,  cuando, 
asi  que,  7,  Note.  Its  use,  48.  1-8. 
When  ending  in  endo,  48.  9.  Con- 
si<lered  as  an  adjective,  49.  2. 

Present  subjunctive,  its  formation, 
42,  p.  229.  Its  use,  42.  1-11. 
When  used  concurrently  with  the 
Present  Indicative,  42.  6,  9,  or  witli 
the  Imperfect  Subjunctive,  43.  3,  4. 

Preterite  or  past  definite,  its  forma- 
tion, 37.  p.  203.  Its  use,  37.  1-4, 
7.  Its  irregularities,  38.  1-5.  Used 
with  the  Past  Anterior,  39.  2,  Obs. 

1.  When  requiring  the  subjunctive 
mood,  44.  9. 

Preterite  perfocto,  42.  5,  a. 

Primer.    See  Primero. 

Primero,  wlien  becoming  primer,  21. 

2.  When  used  instead  of  uno,  21.  6. 
Primo,  when  used  instead  of  primero, 

21.  3. 

Pronombres  incliticos,  30. 1,  2,  4-6, 
9  ;  31.  2. 

Pronombres  indirectos,  30.  1,  2. 

Pronouns  left  out  in  conjugating  a 
verb,  4.  6.  Their  respective  places, 
31.  1-3.  Accompanying  Reflective 
Verbs,  52.  p.  282. 

Pronunciation,  p.  14,  §  2.  Exercises, 
p.  22,  §  8. 

Propio,  propia,  used  with  a  Posses- 
sive Pronoun,  14.  2. 

Punctuation,  p.  22,  §  7. 


Que  as  a  Relative  Pronoun  when  used 
as  a  subject,  23.  1.  When  used  as 
an  Accusative,  22.  2.  When  accom- 
jianied  by  el  (or  la,  los,  las,  lo),  23. 3. 
Is  never  suppressed,  23.  4.  May 
precede  the  person  or  object,  23.  4, 


Obs.  When  preferable  to  quien, 
23.  5,  Obs.  Used  as  an  exclama- 
tion, 23.  12.  Used  with  haber  and 
an  Infinitive,  27.  3^  Can  never  be 
understood,  and  must  be  repeated 
before  every  subordinate  verb,  42.  4 
and  Obs.  When  use;l  with  the  Pres- 
ent Indicative,  46.  1.  When  gov- 
erning the  Infinitive,  47.  2. 

Que  and  cual,  23.  9. 

Que,  Interrogative  Pronoun,  23.  11. 

Quedar,  when  may  be  used  instead  of 
ser,  51.  7. 

Qu6  de,  when  used,  23.  13. 

Quien,  used  histead  of  que,  16.  7.  Re- 
lating only  to  pe7-sons,  23.  5. 

Quien,  Interrogative  Pronoun,  23.  11, 

Quienes.    See  Quien. 

Quitarse,  53.  2. 

R. 

Reciprocal  or  mutual  action,  52.  6. 

Reflective  verbs,  52.  1-9.  Being 
conjugated  with  two  Personal  Pro- 
nouns, 52. 1.  Essentially  Refiective 
Verbs  and  Accidentally  Reflective 
Verbs,  52.  2,  8.  Their  different 
meaning,  52.  8,  9.  Verbs  being  Re- 
flective in  Spanish  and  not.  in  Eng- 
lish, 52.  3.  Being  conjugated  with 
another  verb,  52.  p.  283  and  R.  4. 
Expressing  a  reciprocal  or  mutual 
action,  52.  6.  Referring  to  parts  of 
the  body,  53.  p.  288,  and  R.  1.  Re- 
quiring de  after  them,  56.  2. 

Regular  verbs,  table  of  their  termi- 
nation, p.  328,  329.     See  Verbs. 

Relative  pronouns,  23.  When  re- 
quiring the  Subjunctive  Mood,  42.  9. 

S. 

S,  when  suppressed  in  Reflective  Verbs, 

52.  7. 
Saber  and  conocer,  14.  9. 


INDEX. 


XV 


San.    See  Santo. 

Santo,  9.  6,  Rem.  2  and  Obs. 

Se,  31.  3,  4.  Used  with  a  passive  sen- 
tence, 51.  3. 

Se  and  se,  p.  20,  §  6,  1. 

Ssasons,  21. 

Senor,  9.  6. 

Ssiiora,  9.  6. 

Ser,  used  to  express  possession,  14.  8. 
Used  without  adjective,  is  accom- 
]>anied  by  de,  14.  8.  Not  used  with 
estar,  19.  4.    Used  instead  of  tener, 

25.  1,  Obs.  «,  h,  c.     Its  conjugation, 

26.  Used  as  Impersonal  V^erb,  27. 
1.  Imperfect  Indicative,  36.  pp.  199, 
200.   Used  with  Passive  Verbs,  51.  1. 

Ser  and  estar,  5.  1-3.  Used  instead 
of  tener,  25.  1,  Obs.  a,  b,  c.  Their 
conjugations,  26. 

Ser  de  mas  edad,  25.  4,  Obs. 

Should,  44.  U,2,l 

Should  have,  44.  7. 

Should  like  to,  44.  11,  5. 

Si,  when  used  in  tlie  subjunctive  (or 
conditional),  44.  2-4  ;  45.  1. 

Singular,  wlien  the  subject  is  put  in 
the  singular,  61.  4-8. 

Sine  and  pero,  18.  5. 

Solamente,  when  used  instead  of  sino, 
18.  6. 

Some,  4.  8.   ■ 

Si  and  si,  p.  20,  ^6,1. 

Spanish-English  Vocabulary,  p.  373. 

Su,  13.  3,  6. 

Subject  or  nominative,  52.  1.  When 
subjects  are  not  of  the  same  person, 
61.  4.  Composed  of  two  Infinitives, 
61.  5. 

Subjunctive  mood,  42-45.  Present, 
42.  Imperfect,  43.  Pluperfect,  43. 
Conditional,  44.  Potential,  44.  11. 
Future,  45.  Future  Perfect,  45. 
When  used  instead  of  the  Infinitive, 
47.  3.  Required  after  some  prepo- 
sitions, 57.  2. 


Superlative  and  comparative,  11, 12. 
Superlative  absolute,  its  formation, 

11.  1-9. 
Sus.     See  Su. 
Suyo,  13.  9. 
Syllables,  p.  19,  §  5. 

T. 

Tal,  when  used  with  cual,  23.  7,  c. 

Tener,  9.  5 ;  17.  1,  3.  Its  conjuga- 
tion, 24.  Its  idiomatic  uses,  25.  1, 
2-5,7,8. 

Tener  and  haber,  17.  1.  Tlieir  con- 
jugations, 24. 

Tener  algo  malo,  25.  5. 

Tener  mas  edad,  25.  4,  Obs. 

Tener  que,  18.  2 ;  25,  8. 

Tercer.  See  Tercero. 

Tercero,  9.  6,  Rem.  1  ;  21.  2,  Obs. 

Tercio,  when  used  instead  of  tercero, 
21.  3. 

That  of,  16.  6. 

That  which,  16.  7. 

Them,  Iiow  to  translate  it,  22.  6. 

The  one  which,  16.  7. 

There  to  be,  how  translated,  27.  2. 

They,  sometimes  not  rendered  in  Span- 
ish,. 16.  10. 

Those  of,  16.  6. 

Those  which,  16.  6. 

Time  of  the  day,  how  indicated,  28. 
1-2. 

To,  meaning  in  order  to,  46.  6. 

To  be  wrong,  25.  2,  Obs. 

Todos,  27.  p.  158. 

To  them,  how  to  translate  it,  22.  6. 

Transitive  verb,  51.  1,  2. 

Triphthongs,  p.  15,  §  2,  3. 

Triple.  See  p.  118  (Multiplicative 
Numbers)  and  21.  8. 

Tu,  4.  1. 

Tuyo,  13.  9. 

TJ  and  o,  18. 
Tin.     See  Uno. 


XVI 


INDEX. 


Uno,  una,  1.  3 ;  9.  6,  Rem.  1.  Their 
plural,  20.  1.  When  dropping  its 
0,  1.  3  ;  20.  4.  Una  used  with  la 
to  indicate  one  o'clock,  28.  1. 

Usted  (or  V.),  4.  3  and  Note,  R.  6 ; 
13.  3,  4.     Used  with  le,  30.  7. 

Ustedes  {V.  V.),  4.  3  and  Note,  R.  6 ; 
13.  3,  4.     Used  with  le,  30.  7. 


Ve  and  ve,  p.  20,  ^  6,  1. 

Venir,  not  used  with  estar,  19.  4. 

Venir  por,  35.  5,  Obs.,  R.  7,  Obs. 

Ver,  Imperfect  Indicative,  36.  pp.  199, 
200. 

Verbs,  conjugated  interrogatively,  4. 
4,  5.  Conjugated  without  pronouns, 
4.  6.  First  conjugation  ending  in 
ar,  second  conjugation  in  er,  third 
in  ir,  17.  4.  Present  Indicative, 
32  -  35.  Imperfect  Indicative,  36. 
Past  Definite  or  Preterite,  37.  Past 
Indefinite,  37.  Past  Anterior,  39. 
Pluperfect  Indicative,  39.  Future 
and  Future  Anterior,  40.  Impera- 
tive Mood,  41.  Subjunctive  Mood, 
42-45.  Infinitive  Mood,  46,  47. 
Gerund  or  Present  Participle,  48. 
Past  Participle,  49,  50.  Passive 
Verb,  51.  Reflective  Verbs,  52,  53. 
.  Periphrastic  Verbs,  54.  Impersonal 
Verbs,  55.  Government  of  Verbs, 
56.  Requiring  no  preposition  be- 
fore the  following  Infinitive,  46. 
p.  253,  R.  1, 10, 1.  Requiring  a  be- 
fore the  following  Infinitive,  46. 
p.  254,  R.  3,  10,  2.  Requiring  de 
before  the  following  Infinitive,  46. 
p.  254,  R.  2,  Note,  5  and  Note,  9 


and  Note,  10, 3, 11.  Requiring  para 
before  the  following  Infinitive,  46. 
p.  254,  R.  6.  Requiring  en  before 
the  following  Infiijiitive,  46.  p.  254, 
R.  7,  10,  4-  Requiring  con  before 
a  following  Infinitive,  46.  p.  255, 
R.  8,  10,  5.  When  used  before  a 
Gerund,  46.  4  and  Note.  Having 
a  different  meaning  according  to  the 
following  preposition,  46.  9  and 
Note.  Verbs  having  two  Past  Par- 
ticiples, one  regular,  the  other  Ir- 
regular. Their  different  use,  50. 
p.  274  and  R.  1.  Defective  verbs, 
CO.  Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its 
subject,  61.  1-8.  Table  of  Termi- 
nations of  the  three  Regular  Verbs, 
p.  326,  327.  List  of  the  principal 
Irregular  Verbs,  pp.  328  -  369. 

Vocabulary,  Spanish-English,  p.  373. 
English -Spanish,  p.  386. 

Volver  a,  48.  9,  in  fine. 

Vos,  4.  3,  and  Note. 

Vosotros,  4.  3  and  Note  ;  41.  6. 

Vowels,  p.  14,  §  2,  1. 

Voz  pasiva,  51. 

Vuestro,  vuestra,  13.  3. 


W. 

We,  4.  2. 

Would,  44.  11,  2,  6. 


Y  and  e,  18.  When  used  with  Cardi- 
nal Numbers,  20.  3.  Used  to  indi- 
cate the  time  of  the  day,  28.  2. 

Ya,  58.  10. 

You,  4.  3  and  Note. 


PRACTICAL    SPANISH    COURSE. 


INTRODUCTION. 


§  1.    Letters  and  Sounds. 


The  Alphabet 

El  Alfabeto. 

1,   The  usual  Spanish  alphabet  contains  twenty-seven  letters. 

The  letters  have  the  following  names  : 

Ixtters. 

Names. 

Letters,             Names. 

Letters.              Names. 

A,    a. 

All. 

I,     i.       Ue. 

Q,   q.     Coo. 

B,    b. 

Bay. 

J,     j  (^''0  equivalent). 

R,    r.     Ur'ay. 

C,    c. 

Thay. 

L,     1.       Ai'lay. 

S,    S.     Us' say. 

CH,ch. 

Tchay. 

LL,  11.      Ai'lyay. 

T,    t.      Tay. 

D,    d. 

Day. 

M,   m.      Ai'may. 

XT,   u.     U  (in  hull). 

E,    e. 

Ay. 

N,    n.      Ai'nay. 

V,    V.      Vay. 

F,    f. 

Alfa?/. 

N,    n.      Ai'nyay, 

X,   X.     Ay' kiss. 

G,    g. 

Hmj. 

0,    0.       Oh. 

Y,    y.     Eegreeaygah. 

H,   h. 

Ah' tchay. 

P,    p.       Pay. 

Z,    z.      Thai'tah. 

Kemark.  —  Th6  letter  k  does  not  belong  to  the  Spanish  alphabet,  and 
is  only  found  in  a  few  foreign  words,  as  Kirie  eleison,  Konisberga,  etc.  The 
same  may  be  said  of  the  letter  w.     Ex. :  Washington,  Newton,  etc. 

2.  All  these  letters  are  of  the  feminine  gender.  Ex. :  una  h, 
iinajota,  etc. 

3«  They  are  divided,  as  in  English,  into  Yowels  and  Conso- 
nants. 


14  INTRODUCTION. 


§  2.    The  Pronunciation.        La  Pronunciacion. 

The  Spanish  language  does  not  present  in  its  ^pronunciation 
the  same  difficulties  as  the  English  language.  We  may  say,  in 
fact,  that  Spanish  is  pronounced  as  it  is  written,  and  written  as 
it  is  pronounced,  all  the  letters,  with  very  few  exceptions,  heing 
sounded  in  the  words.  The  following  rules  on  the  way  of  pro- 
nouncing the  Yowels  and  consonants,  together  with  those  refer- 
ring to  the  accentuation  of  the  words,  and  to  diphthongs  and 
triphthongs,  will,  we  trust,  enable  the  students  of  the  Spanish 
language  to  acquire  a  correct  pronunciation  in  a  comparatively 
limited  time. 

1.     Vowels.        Vocales. 

The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  y.     They  are  sounded : 
a  like  a  in  far :  Malaga,  papa,  bata. 
e  like  ay  in  ma^ :  elemento,  padre,  come. 
i  like  ee  in  see :  mira,  libra,  ira. 
0  like  0  in  no :  obra,  dorado,  mono. 
U  like  00  in  food :  muro,  uno,  comun. 
y  as  a  vowel  like  the  Spanish  ^ ;  voy,  doy,  soy. 

Remark.  —  The  y  is  considered  as  a  vowel  when  it  stands  by  itself,  as  in 
y,  and;  at  the  end  of  a  word,  as  in  rey,  king;  or  of  a  syllable  immediately 
followed  by  a  consonant.  But,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  y  is  generally 
considered  as  a  consonant,  as  in  ya,  already  ;  yerj)a,  hci'h. 

The  custom  of  using  the  letter  i  instead  of  y  is,  however,  becoming  more 
general. 

2.     Diphthongs.         Diptongos. 

Besides  the  simple  sounds,  there  are  in  Spanish  compound 
sounds,  in  which  the  two  sounds  are  distinctly  heard  by  a  single 
emission  of  the  voice.  The  sounds  of  Diphthongs  are  produced 
by  the  rapid  utterance  of  the  vowel  sounds  of  which  they  are 
composed. 


CONSONANTS. 

The  Diphthongs  are  sixteen  in  number  : 

( dabais,  you  gave  ; 
ai  or  av  *  \ 

^  *  ( hay,  there  is,  there  are. 

io 
iu 

precio,  price. 
ciudad,  city. 

au :   pausa,  patise. 

oe 

heroe,  hero. 

veis,  gou  see  ; 
ea :   linea,  line. 

oi  or  oy 
ua 

{ sois,  you  are  ; 
( voy,  /  go. 
fragua,  forge. 

eo  :   virgineo,  virginal. 

ue 

duefio,  master. 

eu :   deuda,  debt. 
ia :   gracia,  grace. 
ie :    cielo,  heaven. 

ui  or  uy : 
uo 

(ruido,  noise; 
(niuy,  very. 
arduo,  arduous 

15 


Remark.  —  There  are  some  of  these  combinations,  however,  which  are 
not  always  diphthongs,  as  ai  and  ei,  which  are  diphthongs  in  baile,  hall ; 
ley,  4aw  ;  but  not  in  raiz,  root ;  lei,  /  read  ;  rei,  /  laughed  ;  etc. 

This  is  also  the  case  with  ia,  io,  ua,  which  are  diphthongs  in  gracia, 
grace  ;  vicio,  vice  ;  fragua,  forge  ;  but  not  in  varia,  he  varies  ;  brio,  brio  ; 
efectua,  he  effectuates  ;  etc. 

In  fact,  whenever  in  these  combinations  the  i  and  u  are  accented  (i,  u), 
each  vowel  forms  a  distinct  syllable. 

3.     Triphthongs.         Triptongos. 
There  are  four  Triphthongs  in  Spanish  : 
iai :  preciais,  you  value. 
ieis :  vacieis,  you  may  empty. 
uai :  santiguais,  you  bless. 
uei  or  uey :  averigueis,  you  may  search  ;  buey,  ox. 


§  3.     Consonants.        Consonantes. 

Many  of  the  Consonants  sound  as  in  English. 

The  following  are  the  rules  referring  to  those  which  differ  in 
the  two  languages. 

C  has  two  sounds,  as  it  has  in  English. 

1.  Before  the  vowels  e  and  i  (ce,  ci)  it  has  nearly  the  sound 
of  the  English  th  in  thick,  thin,  etc.  : 

cena,         cima,         decente,         recibe,         dice. 


16  INTRODUCTION. 

2.  Before  the  vowels  a,  O,  and  U  (ca,  co,  and  cu),  and  before 
Consonants,  it  sounds  like  k  in  English  : 

cola,         cabo,         cuna,         criado,         clamor. 

CH  is  considered  by  the  Spanish  Academy  as  a  distinct  letter, 
double  in  figure,  but  simple  in  value.  It  has  the  same  sound  as 
the  English  ell  in  church,  chair,  chin,  etc. : 

macho,         mucho,         chupa,         rancho,         dicha. 

Kemark.  —  In  editions  anterior  to  1808,  ch  is  found  followed  sometimes 
by  a  Consonant,  as  in  Chris  to,  Christ;  Chris  tianismo,  Christianity;  and 
sometimes  by  a  vowel  with  a  circumflex  accent,  as  in  chimica,  cJiemistry  ; 
chimera,  chimera;  in  both  of  which  cases  the  ch  has  the  sound  of  k. 
Nowadays  the  h  is  dropped  in  those  words  in  which  the  ch  was  followed 
by  a  Consonant,  while  in  those  words  in  which  the  ch  was  followed  by  a 
vowel  marked  with  a  circumflex  accent  the  letters  qu  (pronounced  like  k) 
have  been  substituted  for  ch.  We  therefore  write  to-day :  Cristo,  Cristi- 
anismo,  quimera,  quimica. 

G  has  two  sounds,  as  it  has  in  English. 

1.  Before  a,  O,  U,  1,  r  it  sounds  as  in  English  : 

gato,         gorro,         gusano,         gloria,         grito. 

2.  Before  e  and  i  it  sounds  like  the  English  h  aspirated  : 

gente,         gigante,         ingenio,         agilidad,         ginete. 

3.  Before  m  and  n  it  has  the  Latin  and  English  pronunciation : 

digno,        indigno,         ignorante,         enigma. 

4.  To  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  g  before  e  and  i  the  vowel 
U  (gu)  must  be  inserted  before  them  : 

guerra,         guia,         guineo,         guirlanda,         guitarra. 

Note.  —  In  this  case  the  n  is  silent.  When,  however,  the  u  is  to  be  pro- 
nounced after  the  g,  and  before  the  letters  e  and  i,  a  dimresis  {")  must 
be  placed  over  the  u  (ii) : 

antigiiedad,        argiiir,         agiiero,         magiieto. 

H  is  mute,  and  only  lightly  aspirated  before  ue : 

hombre,         horca,         alharaca,         hora,  honor, 

hueso,  huevo,        hueco,  huerto,        vihuela. 

Observation.  —  The  letter  h  has  been  retained  in  many  words,  though 
not  pronounced,  and  in  many  cases  it  has  taken  the  place  of  the  letter 


CONSONANTS.  '  17 

f,  formerly  used.     Tluis  fijo,  son;  facer,  to  do;  fermosura,  beauty,  are 
now  written  hijo,  hacer,  heriiiosura,  etc. 

J  is  pronounced  guttural  before  all  the  vowels,  that  is  to  say, 
like  the  Spanish  g  before  e  and  i : 

paja,        jabon,         caja,         cajita,        jefe. 

Observation.  —  Some  of  the  modern  writers  have  adopted  the  j  instead 
of  the  g  when  this  letter  comes  before  the  vowels  e  and  i.  Thus  they 
write  yc?icmZ,  jirafa,  instead  of  general,  general;  girafa,  giraffe;  etc., 
but  this  change  has  not  yet  been  generally  sanctioned. 

LL  is  liquid,  and  pronounced  as  in  the  English  words  William, 

brilliant : 

llaga,         calle,         Hover,         caballo,         polio. 

S"  has  a  liquid  sound,  and  is  pronounced  nearly  like  ni  in 
minion,  or  like  the  gn  in  French  : 

senor,         ensenar,         niiio,         sueno,         anadir. 

Note.  —  The  mark  over  the  n  (~)  is  called  tilde  in  Spanish. 

Qi,  is  always  followed  by  u  and  another  vowel,  and  has  the 
sound  of  k  or  hai-d  C  (the  u  being  silent): 

parque,         aqui,         querido,         despique,         queja. 

Observation.  —  According  to  modern  orthography,  whenever  the  diph- 
thongs ua,  ue,  uo  follow  immediately  the  q,  and  the  u  is  sounded,  the  q 
is  replaced  by  a  c:  cuadro,  cuervo,  acuoso  (instead  of  quadro,  quervo, 
aquoso,  etc.). 

B  is  trilled  more  than  in  English,  but  with  less  force  between 
two  vowels  or  in  the  middle  of  a  word.  When  double,  both 
letters  must  be  distinctly  heard  : 

rosa,  pintura,       lirio,  cara,  perla, 

carro,         guerra,         cerrajo,         perro,         carrera. 

S  has  always  the  hissing  sound,  like  ss  in  English,  as  in 
assembly : 

sabio,         famoso,         paseo,         pesadumbre,         rosa. 

Observation.  —  S  is  only  doubled  in  Spanish  in  compound  words. 
Those  words,  derived  from  the  Latin,  which  were  formerly  written  with 

9 


18  *  INTRODUCTION. 

double  ss,  as  santissimOf  missa^  are  now  written  with  one  s :  santisimOf 
misa,  etc. 

Neither  is  the  s  ever  foDowed  by  a  consonant  when  commencing  a  word, 
as  in  the  Latin  words  sdeiitia,  Scipio  ;  and,  in  order  to  avoid  this  liquid  s, 
the  Spanish  write  ciencia  (suppressing  the  s)  or  Escipion  (having  it  preceded 
by  an  e). 

V  is  pronounced  as  in  English  : 

velo,         valor,         voluntad,         bravo,         ave. 

Eemakk.  —  Spaniards  often  give  to  this  letter  the  sound  of  b,  but  the 
Academy  disapproves  of  it. 

X  sounds  like  CS  or  ks  in  English,  as  in  wax  : 
axioma,         examinar,         reflexion,         exagerar,         exuberancia. 

Observations. — 1.  The  x  had  formerly  the  sound  of  the  Spanish  j, 
or  g  before  e  and  i,  but  according  to  the  modern  orthography  the  x  is 
replaced  by  a  g  or  a  j  whenever  it  has  the  guttural  sound.  Thus, 
the  following  words  Which  were  formerly  written  xe/e,  xergon,  baxeza, 
baxar,  baxo,  etc.,  are  written  to-day  gefe  or  jefe,  jergon,  bajeza,  bajar, 
bajo,   etc. 

Finally,  in  those  words  in  which  the  x  precedes  a  consonant  and  ends  a 
syllable,  as  in  extrangerOy  cxtorsioiiy  extremo,  etc.,  the  x  is  generally  re- 
placed by  an  s,  as  estrangero,  estorsion^  cstremo ;  and,  although  the  Acad- 
emy does  not  approve  of  this  modification,  many  Spanish  writers  and 
grammarians  have  adopted  it.  In  those  words  in  which  the  x  is  followed 
by  an  h,  the  x  is,  however,  preserved.  Thus  we  write  exhortar,  exhalar 
(and  not  eshortar,  eslialar). 

2.  The  X  at  the  end  of  such  words  as  relox,  carcax,  ahnaradux,  etc., 
which  formerly  changed  the  x  into  j  for  the  plural,  as  relojes,  carcajcs,  etc., 
is  now  replaced  by  a  j ;  and  these  words  are  written  now  reloj,  carcajy 
almaradiij,  etc. 

3.  In  such  words  as  salsifrax\  in  which  the  x  is  changed  into  c  for 
the  plural,  as  salsifraceSy  some  writers  replace  the  x  by  a  c  and  others 
by  a  z. 

Z  is  pronounced  like  the  English  th  in  the  word  thin,  or  like 
the  Spanish  c  before  e  and  i.  This  letter  precedes  the  vowels 
a,  0,  and  U  {za,  zo,  and  zu)  : 

zapato,         tizon,         zumo,         zorra,         corazon. 


DOUBLE   LETTEES.  .         19 

§  4.    Double  Letters.        Duplicacion  de  las  letras. 

The  Spanish  Academy,  conforming  to  the  pronunciation,  has 
suppressed  double  consonants  when  one  alone  is  pronounced. 
In  the  Spanish  books  printed  nowadays  the  double  letters  tt,  ss, 
if,  bb,  etc.,  are  no  longer  found,  and  CC,  nn,  and  rr  only  when 
both  consonants  are  sounded,  as  in  the  words  acceso,  emiohlecer, 
harro.  Double  1  (II)  is  to  be  considered  only  as  a  letter  of  the 
alphabet,  and  not  as  a  double  consonant.  Most  words,  ending 
in  English  in  ction,  change  in  Spanish  the  t  into  C,  as  accion, 
action  ;  produccion,  production.  This  is  also  the  case  with  the 
derivatives  of  these  words. 

§  5.    Syllables.        Silabas. 

There  are  four  rules  in  Spanish  for  the  division  of  words  into 
Syllables  : 

1.  In  compound  words  formed  from  prepositions  and  other 
parts  of  speech  the  preposition  forms  a  separate  syllable,  as  in  : 

ab-ne-^a-cion,         ab-ro-ga-cion,         con-ca-vi-dad,         sub-ver-sion. 

Observation.  —  Whenever  the  preposition  is  accompanied  by  an  s,  this 
letter  must  not  be  separated,  however,  from  the  preposition, 
cons-tru-ir,         ins-pi-rar,         pers-pi-ca-cia. 

2.  Vowels  forming  a  diphthong  or  triphthong  must  not  be 
separated  : 

gra-cio-so,         a-pre-cian,         pre-ciais. 

3.  Whenever  a  consonant  is  found  between  two  vowels,  it  is 
joined  to  the  vowel  which  follows  it : 

a-mor,        -le-cho,  •       a-gua,         flu-xion,         co-fre. 

4.  The  letters  ch  and  11,  although  simple  in  their  pronuncia- 
tion, must  not  be  divided  : 

cha-le-co,         chi-co,         ca-lle,         co-che,         ca-ba-Uo. 

Observation.  —  When  "double  c,  double  n,  and  double  r  occur  in  r. 
word,  one  of  these  letters  is  placed  in  each  syllable  : 

ac-cion,         en-no-ble-ce,         per-ra. 


20  INTRODUCTION. 

§  6.    Accent.        Acento. 

1,  Accent  in  its  common  acceptation  is  but, a  sign  placed  over 
syllables  to  show  that  they  must  be  uttered  more  forcibly  than 
the  others.  The  Spaniards  have  but  one  accent,  the  acute  (^); 
in  Spanish  acento  agudo.  It  is  often  used  to  mark  the  distinc- 
tion between  words  otherwise  written  alike,  but  never  changes 
the  sound  of  the  vowel.  Thus  we  accent  el,  he;  mi,  me ;  si, 
yes,  one's  self ;  de,  se,  and  ve  (from  the  verbs  dar,  to  give ;  saber, 
to  know ;  ser,  to  be ;  ver,  to  see)  to  distinguish  these  monosyl- 
lables from  el,  the  (article) ;  mi,  my  (possessive  adjective) ;  si,  if 
(conditional  particle)  ;  de,  of  (preposition) ;  se,  himself  (pro- 
noun) ;  and  ve,  go  thou. 

The  vowels  a,  e,  o,  and  U  must  also  be  accented  when  stand- 
ing alone  or  forming  parts  of  speech,  so  that  they  may  not  be 
pronounced  as  if  belonging  to  the  preceding  or  the  following 
word  : 

Juan  e  Ignacio,  a  la  ida  6  a  la  vuelta,         John  and  Ignatius,  on  their  trip 
veran  a  Madrid,  u  otro  punto  in-  to  and  fro,  will  see  Madrid  or 

mediate,  some  other  neighboring  place. 

The  student  will  consequently  have  to  give  a  greater  stress  of 
voice  on  the  accented  syllables  or  vowels  when  reading  Spanish  : 


valido. 

azucar, 

rubi, 

linea. 

cutaneo, 

crisis, 

agil, 

alferez, 

musica. 

cafe. 

oilografia. 

continua. 

hablo, 

nispero. 

Maria. 

2.  Every  word  has,  however,  in  Spanish  its  unwritten  accent, 
because  there  is  always  a  syllable  on  which  the  voice  must  chiefly 
dwell.  This  inflection  of  the  voice,  this  rhythmic  accent,  is  the 
most  difficult  to  be  acquired  by  foreigners,  because  harmony  can- 
not be  expressed  by  written  words,  and  yet  harmony  is  to  a  lan- 
guage what  color  is  to  a  picture.  By  observing  the  following 
simple  rules,  however,  the  student  will  be  enabled  to  obtain  a 
correct  pronunciation : 


ACCENTS.  21 

1.  Unaccented  words  of  two  or  more  syllables  ending  with  a 
vowel  are  accented  on  the  penultimate  syllable  : 

cabo,  cola,  curioso,  Cristianisrno,        constante, 

eiicargo,  lluvia,         tr^edia,         conquista,  guerrero. 

2.  Unaccented  words  ending  with  a  consonant  are  accented  on 
the  last  syllable,  and  the  last  consonant  is  sounded  strongly  if 
the  word  has  but  one  syllable  : 

general,         pan,  dar,  senor,         significar, 

pasion,  papel,         verdad,        cruz,  zumbon. 

Exceptions. — 1.  Words  in  the  plural  retain  the  accent  of  the  same 
words  in  the  singular. 

hombre,  man;  hombres,  men.  aguila,  eagle;  aguilas,  eagles. 

general,  general ;  generales,  generals,     mio,  mhu  (sing.);  mios,  mine  (pi.) 

Note.  —  But  the  plural  caracteres  is  accented  differently  from  the 
singular  :   caracter,  character. 

2.  In  the  conjugation  of  verbs,  the  penultimate  syllable  is  accented 
unless  a  wi'itten  accent  is  placed  on  one  of  the  syllables. 

tomo,  /  take.  tomamos,  toe  take. 

tomas,  thou  takest.  tomais,  you  take. 

\  toma,  he  takes.  toman,  tJicy  take. 

Note.  —  Thus  tomd,  he  took^  is  not  sounded  in  the  same  way  as  tomOi 
I  take. 

3.  In  patronymic  names  ending  in  z  the  penultimate  syllable  is  always 
long  : 

Perez,         Sanchez,         Fernandez,         Rodriguez,         Jimenez. 

3.  Unaccented  words  ending  in  ia,  ie,  io  follow  Rule  1,  except 
when  they  are  monosyllables,  or  when  they  are  found  in  the 
conjugation  of  verbs  where  the  accent  rests  on  the  i : 

Monosyllables :  dia,  rio,  mio,  tio,  rie. 

Verbs:  tenia,         coraeria,         tomarian,         dirias,         serian. 

General  Remark.  —  The  foregoing  rules  on  the  accented  and  unac- 
cented words  will,  we  think,  be  found  sufficient  to  enable  students  to 
obtain  a  correct  pronunciation.  In  accented  words,  of  course,  the  rules 
given  for  unaccented  words  have  to  be  set  aside,  and  the  written  accent  is 
to  be  the  supreme  guide  of  the  reader.  When  writing  under  dictation  it 
will  be  easy  to  distinguish  by  the  intonation  jof  the  speaker  whether  any 


22  INTRODUCTION. 

accent  is  to  be  placed  on  the  words  or  not.  The  Spanish  Academy  does 
not  consider  it  a  mistake  to  put  an  accent  wherever  it  is  superfluous,  and 
even  adopts  it  in  interrogations  or  exclamations  to  give  more  stress  to  the 
sentence :  >^ 

I  Que  me  (juieres  ?  JFhat  do  you  loish  from  me  ? 

I  Cuando  te  vas  ?  When  are  you  going  away  ? 

'  i  Como  llueve  !  Hoiv  it  rains  ! 

\  Quien  lo  creyera  !         Who  would  believe  it ! 

§  7.    Punctuation.        Funtuacion. 

!•  Punctuation  is  in  Spanish  the  same  as  in  English.  How- 
ever, as  it  often  happens,  in  the  Spanish  language,  that  punctua- 
tion alone  indicates  the  interrogative  sense  of  the  sentence,  and 
that,  if  the  period  be  long,  the  reader  is  informed  too  late  of  the 
interrogation,  the  Spanish  Academy  sometimes  makes  use  of  a 
reversed  sign  of  interrogation  (^)  at  the  beginning  of  the  sen- 
tence, besides  the  regular  sign  (?)  at  the  end  of  the  same  : 

i  Seran  perdidos  tantos  ejemplares  Are  all  those  examples  and  expc- 
y  escarmientos  como  presencia-  '  riences  which  we  daily  scCy  and 
mos  cada  dia  para  persuadirte  a  which  oiigJit  to  persuade  you  to 

mudar   de  vida  y   entrar  en  la  cliange   your  life  and  enter  the 

senda  del  honor  y  de  la  virtud  ?  path  of  honor  and  virtue^  to  he 

lost  on  you  ? 

2«  The  same  rule  is  observed  in  long  periods  with  regard  to 
the  exclamation-point,  and  an  inverted  sign  (i)  is  placed  at  the 
beginning  of  a  long  exclamative  sentence  : 

I  Cuanta  debio  ser  la  confusion  y  What  must  have  been  the  confusion 

el  sentimiento  de  los  que  creyen-  and  regrets  of  those  who  thought 

do  encontrar  el  oro  a  montones  they  would  find  gold    in   large 

no  encontraron  sino  hambre,  pe-  quantities,  and  met  only  hunger, 

nalidades  y  peligros  !  sufferings,  and  dangers  I 

§  8.    Exercises  in  Pronunciation. 

El  Universo. 

I. 

Con  el  nombre  de  universo  se  designa,  cuanto  existe  en  el  niundo 
entero,  es  decir,  el  sol,  las  estrellas,  la  tierra,  cuanto  nuestra  vista 


EXERCISES   IN   PRONUNCIATION.  23 

alcanza  en  las  profundidades  del  aire,  y  cuanto  hay  todavia  mas  alia 
de  lo  que  podemos  ver;  Por  mas  pequenos  que  seamos,  y  por  mas 
debil  que  nuestra  vista  sea,  podemos  admirar  una  parte  de  este  in- 
menso  espcctaculo.  El  sol,  en  medio  de  esos  numerosos  globos  que 
brillaii,  en  toda  la  boA^eda  celeste,  es  entre  todas  las  obras  de  Dios  la 
que  se  presenta  con  mayor  lucimiento  y  majestad,  es  una  eterna  lum- 
brera  colocada  en  el  centro  del  mundo  para  esparcir  la  luz  por  todas 
partes,  y  a  una  distancia  que  no  nos  es  posible  determinar.  Es  como 
el  rey  de  los  astros. 

II. 

El  sol,  que  nos  parece  tan  pequeno,  a  causa  de  la  suma  distancia 
suya,  es,  segun  los  astronomos,  mil  y  cuatrocientas  veces  mayor  que  la 
tierra. 

Su  figura  es  la  de  un  globo  ;  y  el  calor  y  la  luz  que  el  esparce  en  el 
universo,  nos  dan  a  conocer  que  su  materia  es  el  fuego  mismo  6  que 
esta  inflamada  de  continuo.  Le  vemos  parecer  todas  las  maiianas  en 
el  oriente,  elevarse  en  el  cielo  hasta  medio  dia,  bajar  despues  y  desa- 
parecer  del  horizonte  por  el  occidente.  El  sol  no  muda  de  sitio,  y 
permanece  en  el  centro  del  mundo  para  dar  luz  a  cuanto  le  rodea.  Se 
ban  notando  ciertas  manchas  sobre  este  cuerpo  tan  reluciente,  y  se  ha 
descubierto  que  vl  giraba,  sobre  si  mismo  como  giraria  una  bala  atra- 
vesada  con  un  asador.  Estas  manchas  se  descubren  desde  luego  en 
una  estremidad  de  este  astro,  se  adelantan,  se  ven  despues  en  la  otra 
estremidad,  y  desaparecen  finalmente  por  detras  para  volver  a  parecer 
de  nuevo  de  alii  a  algun  tiempo.  Se  ha  observado  que  para  volver  al 
punto  de  que  ellas  partieron,  le  son  necesarios  veinte  y  siete  dias, 
tiempo  necesario  al  sol  por  consiguiente  para  dar  una  vuelta  completa 
sobre  el  eje  suyo.  Se  valua  que  el  sol  dista  de  nosotros  treinta  y 
cuatro  millones  trescientas  cincuenta  y  siete  mil  cuatrocientas  y 
ochenta  leguas. 

III. 

Se  distinguen  estos  tan  numerosos  astros  en  estrellas  fijas,  porque 
no  las  vemos  mudar  de  lugar,  y  en  plan  etas  6  estrellas  errantes,  porque 
giran  en  mayor  6  menor  tiempo  alrededor  del  sol.  Se  presume  que 
las  estrellas  fijas  son  unos  globos  luminosos  semejantes  al  sol,  y  que 
dan* luz  a  varios  mundos  muy  remotos  para  que  nuestra  vista  pueda 
alcanzarlos  a  ver.  Si  las  estrellas  nos  parecen  mas  pequeiias  que  el 
astro  que  nos  dispensa  el  dia,  nace  de  que  ellas  estdn  infinitamente 


24  INTRODUCTION. 

mas  apartadas  de  nosotros.  Juzgad  de  su  niagnitud  e  inmensa  dis- 
tancia  por  la  que  esta  mas  inmediata  a  la  tierra,  y  que  se  llama  Sirio  : 
se  cree  que  esta  estrella  fija  dista  de  nosotros  cuatrpcientas  mil  veces 
mas  que  el  sol,  y  que  su  diametro  6  anchura  es  de  treinta  y  tres  millo- 
nes  de  leguas. 

Los  planetas  son  en  mimero  de  siete  y  se  diferencian  de  las  estrellas 
fijas,  a  causa  de  que  giran  alrededor  del  sol,  y  no  tienen  luz  de  si 
misnios:  aquella  con  que  brillan,  les  viene  del  sol.  Se  presume  que 
estos  iumensos  globos  son,  al  modo  de  la  tierra,  unos  mundos  habi- 
tados.  I 

IV. 

La  tierra  es  redonda  como  una  bola.  Sus  montanas  y  valles,  que 
nos  i)arecen  tan  considerables,  pueden  compararse,  cuando  mas,  con 
las  desigualdades  que  se  ven  en  la  cascara  de  una  naranja,  y  que  no 
impiden  que  este  fruto  tenga  una  figura  redonda. 

Ella  gira  sobre  si  misma  como  una  bola  que  esta  atravesada  con  un 
asador  de  hierro.  Este  movimiento,  que  se  llama  rotacion,  le  propor- 
ciona  alternativamente  el  dia  y  la  noche  ;  es  decir,  que  la  parte  que 
esta  vuelta  hacia  el  sol  goza  de  la  luz,  mientras  que  la  parte  opuesta 
esta  en  la  obscuridad.  Pero,  como  la  tierra  da  esta  vuelta  sobre  si 
misma  en  veinte  y  cuatro  horas,  resulta  de  esto,  que  ella  tiene  en  este 
espacio  de  tiempo  el  dia  y  la  noche. 

La  tierra,  adenias  de  este  movimiento  de  todos  las  dias,  tiene  otro 
que  se  ejecuta  en  un  aiio  ;  ella  da  una  vuelta  inmensa  alrededor  del 
sol.  Este  ultimo  movimiento  produce  las  diferentes  estaciones  del 
aiio. 


ARTICLES,   DIFFERENT   FORMS. 


25 


Leccion  I.  Lesson  !• 

ARTICLES,   DIFFERENT  FORMS. 


XTn, 

Una,  ^  ^'  ^^'  ^^^* 


Ejemplos. 

El  liombre  tiene  el  libro. 
La  inujer  tiene  la  mesa. 
I  Quieu  tiene  la  pluma  ? 
El  padre  tiene  un  caballo. 
La  madre  tiene  una  casa. 
El  general  es  prudente. 
La  seiiora  es  amable. 


Examples. 

The  man  has  the  book. 
The  woman  has  tlie  table. 
Who  has  the  pen  ? 
The  father  has  a  horse. 
The  mother  has  a  house. 
The  general  is  prudent. 
The  lady  is  amiable. 


Vocabulario. 

El  amigo,  the  friend. 
El  caballo,  the  horse. 
El  caballero,,^Ae  gentleman. 
^^-^El  dinero,  the  money. 
El  hermano,  the  brother. 
El  hijo,  the  son. 
El  jar  din,  the  garden. 
El  libro,  the  hook. 


Vocabulary. 


El  nino,  the  child. 
El  panadero,  tlie  baker. 
El  tio,  the  unde. 
La  casa,  the  house. 
La  hermana,  the  sister. 
La  hija,  the  daughter. 
^^^^k^  Have,  the  key. 
Carlos,  Charles. 


Es,  is. 

Luisa,  Louisa. 
Mi,  my. 
Muy,  very. 
Pobre,  poor. 
Quien,  who,  who'm,, 
"Tiene,  has. 
Y,  and. 


Exercise  1. 

1.  EI  nino  tiene  un  libro.  2.  Carlos  es  mi  hermano.  3.  LuLsa  es 
mi  hermana.  4.  [  Quien  tiene  la  Have  ?  5.  Mi  amigo  tiene  la  Have 
y  la  pluma.  6.  El  caballo  es  grand e.  7.  Mi  tio  es  pobre.  8.  La 
casa  es  grande.  9.  El  panadero  tiene  un  hi  jo  y  una  bija.  10.  Mi 
amigo  tiene  una  casa  y  un  jardin.  11.  El  jardin  es  muy  grande. 
12.   El  caballero  tiene  el  dinero. 


26  LESSON    1. 


Exercise  2. 


1.  My  house  is  very  large.  2.  My  brother  has  a  horse.  3.  The 
gentleman  has  a  house.  4.  The  baker  is  my  friend.  5*.  The  general 
is  very  poor.  6.  Charles  has  my  pen.  7.  My  table  is  very  large. 
8.  My  uncle  is  very  prudent.  9.  The  daughter  has  a  house,  and  the 
son  has  a  garden.  10.  The  woman  is  very  amiable.  11.  My  brother 
is  a  child.     12.  The  book  is  very  large. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1 ,  There  are  three  genders  in  the  Spanish  language  :  the 
masculine,  the  feminine,  and  the  neuter. 

The  definite  article  has  in  the  singular  a  distinct  form  for 
each  gender :  masculine,  el ;  feminine,  la ;  neuter,  lo  : 

El  padre,  thefatlier.        La  inadre,  the  mother,        Lo  bueno,  the  good. 

Remarks.  —  1.  The  neuter  gender  is  only  applicable  to  adjectives 
(numeros  adjetivos)  taken  in  an  unlimited  or  indefinite  sense,  as :  lo 
bueno,  tJie  good  or  what  is  good  ;  lo  peor,  tlic  loorst  or  what  is  worst ;  etc. 

This  NEUTER  GENDER,  which  has  no  plural,  is  therefore  never  applied 
to  persons  or  things,  but  only  to  adjectives  taken  substantively,  and  to  sub- 
stantives taken  adjectivehj :  Todo  era  grande  en  San  Luis,  lo  rey,  lo  santo, 
lo  capitan,  everything  was  great  in  St.  Louis  (Louis  IX.),  tlie  king,  the 
saint,  the  captain. 

2.  The  neuter  article  is  not  placed  indifferently  before  all  adjectives 
taken  substantively.  Thus,  in  the  following  sentences  :  El  malo  sera 
castigado,  tlw  wicked  shall  he  punished  ;  El  azul  de  este  pano  es  demasia- 
do  oscuro,  tlie  blue  of  this  cloth  is  too  dark  ;  —  we  could  not  make  use  of 
the  neuter  article  lo,  because  those  adjectives  are  taken  substantively  and 
are  sufficiently  determinate.  It  is  evident,  in  fact,  that  in  the  first  sen- 
tence, the  word  hombre,  man,  is  understood,  before  malo,  wicked;  and 
in  tlie  second  sentence,  the  Avord  color,  color ;  before  azul,  blue. 

2.  Although  the  article  el  belongs  only  to  the  masculine  gen- 
der, it  may  be  placed,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  before  feminine 
nouns  beginning  with  a  long  a,  that  is  to  say,  whenever  the  stress 
of  voice  rests  on  that  initial  letter  :  el  agua,  the  water ;  el  alma, 
the  soul ;  el  ala,  the  wing  ;  el  aguila,  the  eagle  ;  el  ave,  the  bird. 
It  must  be  observed,  however,  that  this  change  of  article  is  only 


ARTICLES,   DIFFERENT   FORMS.  27 

admitted  in  the  singular,  and  that  we  must  say  in  the  plural,  las 
aguas,  las  almas,  las  alas,  etc. 

Adjectives  accompanying,  the  singular  of  such  nouns  must  be 
placed  in  the  feminine  :  el  agua  es  fria,  the  water  is  cold  ;  etc. 

The  same  rules  are  to  be  observed  in  reference  to  words  begin- 
ning with  an  h,  as :  el  hacha  es  pesada,  the  ax  is  heavy ;  las 
hachas,  the  axes ;  etc. 

Nouns  like  America,  America;  abeja,  hee ;  alegria,  yoy;  habitacion, 
Imhitation ;  etc.  take  the  feminine  article  la,  because  the  first  a  is  not 
accented  :  La  America,  la  habitacion,  etc. 

3.  The  Indefinite  Article  a,  an,  or  the  numeral  one,  is  ren- 
dered by  un  before  a  masculine  noun  (the  0  of  uno  being  dropped 
before  a  noun),  and  by  una  before  a  feminine  noun  : 

Un  herraano,  a  brother,  Una  hermana,  a  sister, 

Un  libro,  a  hook.  Una  mesa,  a  table. 

4 1  Adjectives  should  always  be  repeated  before  the  nouns 
they  qualify  : 

El  padre  y  la  mad  re.  The  father  and  {the)  mother. 

La  casa  y  el  jardin.  The  house  and  (tlic)  garden. 

El  bUen  lapiz  y  la  buena  pluma.      The  good  pencil  and  {the  good)  pen. 

Note.  —  Some  writers  do  not  always  observe  this  rule. 

General  Observations  on  the  Genders. — ^The  Gender  of 
nouns  is  generally  known  by  their  terminations  : 

1.  Nouns  ending  in  0  are  masculine  : 

Except  mano,  hand  ;  and  nao,  vessel. 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  a  are  generally  feminine. 

Those  expressing  rank,  titles,  and  professions,  as  papa,  pope  ;  profeta, 
2)rophet,  etc.,  and  those  ending  in  ma  derived  from  the  Greek,  as  clima, 
climate;  idioma,  idiom;  poema,  poem;  dilema,  dilemma;  diploma, 
diploma;  dogma,  dogma;  etc.,  and  some  others,  are,  however,  of  the 
mascuUne  gender. 

A  few  of  these  words  may  be  used  either  as  masculine  or  as  feminine. 

3.  Xouns  ending  in  cion  or  tion  are  of.  the  feminine  gender, 
as  cuestion,  question ;  meditacion,  meditation ;  etc. 


28  LESSON    2. 

These  words  are  the  same  in  both  languages,  except  that,  in  Spanish, 
the  t  of  the  termination  Hon  of  the  English  word  is  changed  into  a  o 
whenever  it  has  the  sound  of  sh. 

4.  Nouns  ending  in  Spanish  in  tad  or  dad,  ■■ —  terminations 
which  correspond  to  the  Latin  termination  tas,  and  to  the  Eng- 
lish termination  ty, — are  of  the  feminine  gender,  as  humanidad, 
humanity  ;  puridad,  purity  ;  adveisldad,  adversity  ;  etc. 

General  Rule  for  Latin  Scholars.  —  Nouns  derived  from  the  Latin 
preserve  in  Spanish  the  same  gender  they  have  in  Latin,  with  this  excep- 
tion that  those  which  are  neuter  in  Latin  are  masculine  in  Spanish. 

5.  Compound  nouns  take  the  gender  of  the  second  word  if  the 
same  is  in  the  singular.  Thus,  the  words  aguamiel,  honey  and 
water ;  contrahaz,  wrong  side ;  are  feminine ;  whilst  archilaud, 
a  hind  of  lute  ;  and  portafasil,  gun-belt ;  are  masculine. 

6.  Compound  words  of  which  the  second  word  is  in  the  plu- 
ral are  always  masculine,  even  if  the  second  word  is  feminine, 
as :  cortaplumas,  pen-hnife ;  mondadientes,  tooth-pick ;  saca- 
botas,  hoot-jack;  etc. 

Observation  on  other  Terminations.  —  Nouns  having  other  termi- 
nations are  suhject  to  so  many  exceptions  that  it  is  impossible  to  establish 
satisfactory  rules  in  regard  to  them. 

Thus,  mar,  sea,  is  of  both  genders,  but  words  compounded  with  mar 
are  always  feminine,  as  bajamar,  low -tide ;  pleamar,  high-tide.  Mar, 
joined  to  a  proper  noun,  should  be  in  the  masculine,  as  el  mar  Baltico,  the 
Baltic  sea,  etc. 


Leccioii  II.  Lesson  II. 

PLURAL. 

Los,  plural  of  el,  >  ,, 
Las,  plural  of  la,  > 

Bjemplos.  Examples. 

El  caballo  es  grande.  The  hoi-se  is  large. 

Los  caballos  son  grandes.  The  horses  are  large. 

Enrii^ue  tiene  un  libro.  Henry  has  a  book. 


PLURAL. 


29 


Maria  tiene  dos  libros. 

Mi  tio  tiene  tres  casas. 

El  general  tiene  cuatro  caballos. 

Las  sehoras  son  amables. 

Los  ninos  tienen  dos  plumas. 

El  general  es  rico. 
Los  generales  son  ricos. 
El  reloj  es  hermoso. 
Los  reloj  es  son  hermosos. 
El  Ingles  es  bueno. 
Los  Ingleses  son  buenos. 
El  paraguas  es  grande. 
Los  paraguas,  son  grandes. 
El  juez  es  justo. 
Los  jueces  son  justos. 

Vocabulario. 
El  abanico,  the  fan. 
El  Americano,  the  American. 
El  centavo,  the  cent. 
El  cuarto,  the  room. 
El  Frances,  the  Frenchman. 
El  Ingles,  the  Englishman. 
El  lapiz,  the  pencil. 
El  muchaclio,  the  hoy. 
El  oro,  the  gold. 
El  pajaro,  the  bird. 
El  psrro,  the  dog. 
El  sombrero,  the  hat. 
El  teatro,  the  theatre. 
La  ciudad,  the  city. 
La  muchacha,  the  girl. 


Mary  has  two  books. 
My  uncle  has  three  houses. 
The  general  has  four  horses. 
The  ladies  are  amiable. 
The  children  have  two  pens. 

The  general  is  rich. 
The  generals  are  rich. 
The  watch  is  fine. 
The  watches  are  fine. 
The  Englishman  is  good. 
The  Englishmen  are  good. 
The  umbrella  is  large. 
The  umbrellas  are  large. 
The  judge  is  just. 
The  judges  are  just. 

Vocabulary. 
Cnatro,  four. 
De,  of 
Dos,  two. 
Enrique,  Henry. 
Hermoso,  handsome,  fine. 
Industrioso,  industrious. 
Jdven,  young. 
Juan,  John. 
Negro,  black. 
Fequeno,  sinall,  little. 
Son,  are. 
Tienen,  have. 
Tres,  three. 
Vigilante,  watchful. 
Ya,  already. 


Exercise  3. 

1.  Carlos  y  Enrique  son  los  amigos  de  mi  hermano.  2.  El  general 
tiene  tres  hermosos  caballos. .  3.  Los  sombreros  son  negros.  4.  Los 
muchachos  tienen  dos  centavos.  5.  Las  seiioras  tienen  un  abanico. 
6.  Los  Franceses  y  los  Ingleses  son  amigos.  7.  Los  pajaros  son  her- 
mosos. 8.  La  sefiora  tiene  dos  hijos  y  tres  hijas.  9.  Mi  amigo  tiene 
dos  hermanas.  10.  Los  Americanos  son  industriosos.  11.  Los  dos 
amigos  son  pobres.  12.  Las  tres  muchachas  son  amables.  13.  Los 
perros  son  vigilantes.     14.  Los  lapices  son  de  oro.     15.  [  y  uieu  tiene 


30  LESSON    2, 

los  libros  ?  16.  Juan  tiene  los  libros  y  las  plumas.  17.  Las  hijas 
de  mi  amigo  son  jovenes.  18.  Los  cuartos  de  la  casa^on  pequenos. 
19.  Las  hijas  de  mi  tio  son  ya  grandes.  20.  Los  teatros  de  la  ciudad 
son  hermosos. 

Exercise  4. 
1.  The  two  horses  are  black.  2.  The  brothers  of  my  friend  are 
young.  3.  The  two  gentlemen  are  English.  4.  Henry  has  two  hand- 
some dogs.  5.  The  friends  of  my  brother  are  very  poor.  6.  The  city 
has  three  theatres.  7.  Charles  and  John  are  friends.  8.  The  Ameri- 
can has  two  brothers  and  three  sisters.  9.  My  vmcle  has  four  houses. 
10.  The  two  Frenchmen  are  very  amiable.  11.  The  fans  of  the  ladies 
are  very  fine.  12.  The  English  have  handsome  horses.  13.  The  houses 
of  the  city  are  very  large.  14.  The  generals  are  very  prudent.  15.  The 
hats  are  black.  16.  The  boys  have  three  pencils.  17.  John  and  Henry 
are  small.  18.  The  rooms  of  my  house  are  large.  19.  The  bakers 
are  poor.     20.  Charles  has  two  pencils. 

Gram&tica.  Grammar. 

1 ,  The  plural  of  the  article  el  is  los,  and  that  of  the  article  la 
is  las. 

2.  Nouns  ending  with  an  unaccented  vowel  form  their  plural 
by  adding  S : 

El  hermano,  (he  brother  ;  La  hermana,  the  sister. 

Los  hermanos,  the  brothers  ;  Las  hermanas,  the  sisters. 

3«  Nouns  ending  with  a  consonant,  or  with  an  accented  vowel, 
form  their  plural  by  adding  es  : 

El  general,  the  general ;  Los  generales,  the  geiurals. 

La  mnjer,  the  woman  ;  Las  mujeres,  the  wonun. 

El  aleli,    tlie  gilliflower  ;  Los  alelies,  the  gillifiowcrs. 

El  albala,  the  certificate  ;  Los  albaldes,  the  certificates. 

Observation.  —  The  few  Spanish  words  ending  with  an  accented  e,  6  and 
u,  form,  however,  their  plural  by  the  addition  of  an  s.  Thus,  pie,  foot ; 
cafe,  coffee ;  t^,  tea;  fricandd,  fricandeau ;  tisii,  tissue;  etc.,  become  in 
the  plural  pies,  cafes,  tes,  fricandos,  tisus. 

Fapd,  'pajm  ;  mama,  mamma  ;  sofi,  sofa,  likewise  take  s  for  the  plural. 

Maravedi,  maravedi,  forms  its  plural  in  three  ways,  and  is  written 
maravedies,  maravedis,  and  maravedises. 


•      PLURAL.  31 

4#  Nouns  ending  in  s,  of  which  the  last  syllable  is  short , 
remain  unchanged. 

Those  which  have  the  last  syllable  long  add  es : 

El  lunes,  tlw  Monday  ;  Los  liines,  tlie  Mondays. 

La  hipotesis,  ilie-  hypotliesis  ;  Las  hipotesis,  the  hypotheses,  (pi.) 

El  Frances,  the  Frenchman  ;  Los  Franceses,  the  Frenchmen. 

El  Ingles,  the  Englishman  ;  Los  Ingleses,  tlie  Englishmen. 

5«  Nouns  ending  in  Z  change  this  letter  into  C,  and  add  es 
for  the  plural : 

E\  juezy  tJie  judge  ;  hos  jneces,  the  judges. 

La  luz,  the  light ;  Las  luces,  the  lights, 

Obseua^ation.  —  Some  writers  do  not  admit  this  'change  of  the  z  into  c, 
and  simply  add  es  to  form  the  plural  of  these  nouns  ending  in  2. 

6«    Proper  nouns  follow  the  same  rules  as  common  nouns : 
Los  Cervantes  y  los  Mendozas,  The  Cervantes  and  Mendozas. 

7t  Although  in  a  few  compound  nouns,  as  casamata,  case- 
mate ;  ricohome  or  ricohombre,  a  Spanish  nobleman  in  the  Mid- 
dle Af/es ;  each  of  the  words  takes  the  plural  form,  making 
casasmatas,  ricos  hombres ;  in  most  other  words  the  last  word 
only  is-  put  in  the  plural,  as  barbacana^  an  outwork  in  a  fort  ; 
aguachirle,  a  sort  of  drink;  which  make  barbacanas,  agpia- 
chirles,  etc.,  in  the  plural. 

8.  Adjectives,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter,  agree  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  nouns  which  they  qualify. 

The  Plural  of  Adjectives  is  formed  like  the  plural  of  nouns  : 
El  muchacho  es  bueno.  The  boy  is  good. 

Los  muchachos  son  buenos,  The  boys  are  good. 

9,  In  Spanish,  as  well  as  in  English,  there  are  nouns  which 
are  only  used  in  the  singular,  and  others  which  have  no  singular, 
as  :  albricias,  presents ;  angarillas,  cruet-stands ;  viveres,  pro- 
visions i  trebedes,  tripods ;  etc. 

Note.  —  Tliere  are  a  few  words  which  have  or  have  not  any  singular 
according  to  their  meaning,  as  esposas,  hand-cuffs;  which  is  not  the  plural 
of  esposa,  wife  ;  grilles,  irontis  ;  which  is  not  the  phiral  of  grillo,  cricket ; 
and  a  few  others. 


32 


LESSON    3. 


Leccion  III. 


Lesson  III. 


CONTRACTION  OF  PREPOSITION  WITH  ARTICLE. 


De.  of,  from. 

A,  to,  at. 

Del,  masc.  sing.    ] 

De  la,  fern.  sing,    of  the, 

Al,  masc.  sing. 

A  la,  fern.  sing. 

to  the, 

De  los,  masc.  pi.    from  the. 

A  los,  masc.  pi. 

at  the. 

De  las,  fern.  pi.    . 

A  las,  fem.  pi.   . 

Declinacion. 

Masculine  Singular. 
El  hombre,  the  man. 
Del  hombre,  of  oy  froKn  the  mem. 
Al  hombre,  to  or  at  the  man. 


Declension. 

Masculine  PluraL 
Los  hombres,  the  men. 
De  los  hombres,  of  or  from  the  men. 
A  los  hombres,  to  or  at  the  men. 


Feminine  Singular.  Feminine  Plural. 

La  mujer,  the  woman.  Las  mujeres,  the  women. 

De  la  mujer,  of  or  from  the  woman.  De  las  mujeres,  of  or  from  the  women. 

A  la  mujer,  to  or  at  the  luoman.  A  las  mujeres,  to  or  at  tJie  women. 


Ejemplos. 

El  sombrero  del  muchacho  es  nuevo. 

La  hermana  de  mi  amigo  es  pobre. 

El  padre  <le  Juan  es  rico. 

Los  libros  de  los  muchachos  son  buenos. 

Las  puertas  de  las  casas  son  grandes. 

Carlos  sale  de  la  casa. 

El  cazador  viene  del  bosque. 

La  Uuvia  viene  de  las  nubes. 

El  rico  da  dinero  al  pobre. 

La  madre  escribe  a  la  hija. 

El  general  habla  a  los  soldados. 

La  senora  habla  d  las  muchachas. 

El  hombre  llama  a  la  puerta. 

Juan  habla  del  hombre  y  de  la  mujer. 

Enrique  escribe  al  padre  y  a  la  madre. 


Examples. 

The  boy's  hat  is  new. 

My  friend's  sister  is  poor. 

John's  father  is  rich. 

The  boys'  books  are  good. 

The  doors  of  the  houses  are  large. 

Charles  comes  out  of  the  house. 

-7*" — ' 

The  hunti^r  comes  from  the  wood. 
The  rain  comes  from  the  clouds. 
The  rich  give  money  to  the  poor. 
The  mother  writes  to  the  daughter. 
The  general  speaks  to  the  soldiers. 
The  lady  speaks  to  the  girls. 
The  man  knocks  at  the  door.. 
John  speaks  of  the  man  and  woman. 
Henry   writes   to   the    father    and 
mother. 


CONTRACTION   OF  PREPOSITION  WITH  ARTICLE. 


33 


Vocabulario. 

El  arbol,  the  tree. 

El  bosque,  the  v)ood. 

El  buque,  the  vessel,  the  ship. 

El  carnicero,  the  butcher. 

El  carpintero,  the  carpenter. 

El  cazador,  the  hunter. 

El  comerciante,  the  merchant. 

El  consejo,  tJie  advice. 

El  dependiente,  tJie  clerk. 

El  dinero,  the  money. 

El  habitante,  the  inhabitant. 

El  medico,  the  physician. 

El  Norte,  the  North. 

El  padre,  tJiefatJier. 

El  principe,  the  prince. 


Vocabulary. 

La  came,  the  meat. 
La  cereza,  tlie  cherry. 
La  cocinera,  the  cook. 
La  madre,  the  motJier. 
La  manzana,  the  apple. 
Con,  loith. 
Da,*  gives. 
Dulce,  sioeet. 
Escribe,  writes. 
Habilj  skillful. 
Nuevo,  new. 
Sico,  rich. 

Sale,  goes  or  com£s  out. 
Verde,  green. 
Viene,  conies. 


Exercise  5. 

1.  El  medico  del  prlncipe  ^  mi  hermano.  2.  La  senora  de  la  casa 
es  mi  heriiiana.  3.  La  madre  da  un  consejo  a  la  hija.  4.  i  Quien  tiene 
el  libro  de  Carlos  ?  5.  El  hijo  del  panadero  tiene  el  libro  y  la  plnma 
de  Carlos.  6.  [Quien  tiene  la  Have  de  la  casa  ?  7.  Mi  padre  tiene  la 
Have  de  la  casa  y  del  jardin.  8.  La  casa  del  padre  de  Juan  es  muy 
grande.  9.  Los  habitantes  de  la  ciudad  son  industriosos.  10.  El 
Ingles  es  el  padre  de  las  muchachas.  11.  Los  caballos  de  los  Fran- 
ceses son  hermosos.  12.  El  cazador  sale  del  bosque  con  los  perros. 
13.  Los  hermanos  del  general  son  pobres.  14.  El  dependiente  escribe 
al  conierciante.  15.  Los  muchachos  del  Frances  tienen  manzanas. 
16.  Las  cerezas  del  jardin  son  dulces.  17.  El  carnicero  vende  la  came 
a  las  cocineras.  18.  El  buque  viene  del  Norte.  19.  Los  Americanos 
son  amigos  de  los  Franceses.  20.  La  hija  del  carpintero  escribe  a  las 
amigas  de  mi  madre.  21.  La  madre  del  carpintero  es  cocinera  en  la 
casa  del  comerciante.  22.  La  madre  del  medico  da  dinero  al  carni- 
cero. 23.  Los  buques  de  los  Americanos  son  nuevos.  24.  El  padre 
del  principe  es  rico.  25.  El  dependiente  da  cerezas  a  mi  hijo. 
26.  I  Quien  da  dinero  al  carpintero  ?  27.  El  comerciante  da  di- 
nero al  hermano  del  carpintero.  28.  Las  manzanas  del  Norte  son 
dulces. 


3 


34  LESSON   3. 


Exercise  6. 


1.  Charles's  brother  is  my  father's  clerk.  2.  Louisa  writes  to 
my  father  and  mother.  3.  The  hbrses  of  the  Englishmen  are  large. 
4.  The  apples  of  the  garden  are  sweet.  5.  Henry  writes  to  the  two 
friends.  6.  The  dog  comes  [out]  of  the  garden.  7.  The  sons  of  the 
physician  are  clerks.  8.  The  generals  of  the  prince  are  very  prudent. 
9.  The  horses  of  the  general  are  black.  10.  Who  gives  money  to  the 
sons  of  the  Frenchman  1  11.  My  father  gives  money  to  the  sons  and 
(to  the)  daughters  of  the  Frenchman  and  of  the  Englishman.  12.  The 
trees  of  the  forest  are  green.  13.  The  merchants  of  the  city  are  very 
rich.  14.  The  ship  of  Charles's  father  is  new.  15.  The  sailors 
of  the  vessel  are  skillful.  16.  My  friend's  sisters  are  very  young. 
17.  My  uncle  has  the  key  of  the  houses.  18.  Charles  and  Henry  are 
the  friends  of  the  two  Americans.  19.  Who  has  the  fans  of  the 
ladies  ?  20.  Louisa's  sisters  have  the  fans.  21.  The  advice  of  the 
physician  to  the  merchant  is  good.  22.  The  carpenter  is  the  brother 
of  the  butcher.  23.  The  mother  gives  money  to  the  cook  for  (para) 
the  butcher.  24.  The  dog  of  the  hunter  is  good.  25.  The  brothers 
of  the  clerk  are  rich. 

Gram&tica.  Grammar. 

1 .  Of  the,  from  the,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  in  the  masculine 
singular  by  del  (instead  of  de  el),  while  to  the,  at  the,  also  in 
the  masculine  singular,  are  rendered  by  al  (instead  of  a  el)  : 

El  hbro  del  inuchacho,  TJie  boy's  book  (the  book  of  the  boy). 

El  general  habla  al  soldado,         The  general  speaks  to  the  soldier, 

2.  Nouns  undergo  in  Spanish  no  change  of  form  in  the  Pos- 
sessive Case,  possession  being  indicated  by  placing  the  name  of 
the  object  possessed  before  de,  of ;  and  the  name  of  the  possessor 
after  it : 

El  Hbro  de  Carlos,  Charles's  book  {i\iQ  book  o/ Charles). 

La  pluma  de  la  muchacha,  The  girVs  pen  (the  pen  of  the  girl). 

La  casa  del  hijo  del  me-  The  physician  s  son's  hoitse  (the  house  of  the 
dico,  son  of  the  physician). 


PRONOUNS. 


35 


leccion  TV.  Lesson  lY. 

PRONOUNS. 

Verb,  tener,  to  have. 


Yo,    /. 

Tu,  thou. 
El,  he,  it. 
Ella,  shey  it. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

Nosotros,  nosotras,  nos,  we. 

Vosotros,  vosotras,  vos  (usted,^  ustedes^),  ^ou. 

EUos,  thef/,  masc. 

Ellas,  thej/,  fern. 

Present  Tense  of  tener,  to  have. 

First  Form. 


Aflarmatively. 
Yo  tengo,  /  have. 

Tii  tienes,  thou  Imst. 

El  tiene,  he  has. 

Ella  tiene,  she  luis. 

Nosotros  tenemos,  we  have. 
Vosotros  teneis,  you  have. 
EUos  tieiien,  they  (masc. )  have. 

Ellas  tienen,  they  (fern.)  have. 


Interrogatively. 
Tengo  yo  ?  have  I? 

Tienes  tii  ?  hast  thou  ? 

Tiene  el  ?  has  he  ? 

Tiene  ella  ?  has  she  ? 

Tenemos  nosotros  ?  have  we  ? 
Teneis  vosotros  ?      have  you  ? 
Tienen  ellos  ?  have  tliey  (masc. )? 

Tienen  ellas  ?  have  they  (fem.)? 


Second  Form. 

Third  Form. 

Tengo, 

/  have. 

Tengo, 

/  have. 

Tienes, 

thou  hast. 

Tienes, 

thou  hast. 

Tiene, 

he  has,  she  has. 

Tiene, 

he  has,  she  has. 

Tenemos. 

,             we  have. 

Tenemos, 

we  have. 

Teneis, 

you  have. 

listed  tiene. 

you  (sing.)  have. 

Tienen, 

they  have. 

Ustedes  tienen, 

you  (pi.)  have. 

Tienen, 

tliey  have. 

Ejemplos. 

Examples. 

I  Tiene  el  hombre  dinero  ?" ) 
i  Tiene  dinero  el  hombre  ?  ) 

Has  the 

man  money  ? 

1  Usted,  sing.,  ustedes,  pi.,  were  abbreviated  in  the  following  way  :  V"*- 
Vmd.  orV*-  (for  the  singular),  and  V""-  V»d»-  or  ^^  (for  the  pluml)  ;  but  at 
present  usted  is  represented  by  V.,  and  ustedes  by  V.  V. 


36 


LESSON   4. 


El  tiene  dinero  y  credito. 

i  Que  tiene  V.  ? 

Tengo  oro  y  plata. 

I  Que  tiene  la  niujer  ? 

Ella  tiene  manzanas  y  peras. 

i  Que  tienen  V.  V.  ? 

Tenemos  pan  y  queso. 

i  Tienen  fusiles  los  soldados  ? 

Tienen  fusiles  y  sables. 

i  Tengo  yo  vino  ? 

V.  tiene  poco  vino. 

i  Quien  tiene  las  plumas  ? 

Las  mueliaohas  tienen  las  plumas. 


He  has  money  apd  credit. 

What  have  you  ? 

I  have  gold  and  silver. 

What  has  the  woman  ? 

She  has  apples  and  pears. 

What  have  you  ? 

We  have  bread  and  cheese. 

Have  the  soldiers  any  guns  ? 

They  have  guns  and  sabers. 

Have  I  any  wine  ? 

You  have  little  wine. 

Who  has  the  pens  ? 

The  girls  have  the  pens. 


Interrogative  Form  used  Aflarmatively. 


Tiene  V.  un  hermoso  caballo. 
Tienen  los  Ingleses  njuchos  buques. 
Tiene  la  senora  dos  hijos. 
Tiene  Carlos  un  laj^iz  y  una  pluma. 


You  have  a  fine  horse. 
The  English  have  many  ships. 
The  lady  has  two  sons. 
Charles  has  a  pencil  and  a  pen. 


Vocabulario. 
El  amigo,  the  friend. 
El  credito,  the  credit. 
El  fusil,  the  yun. 
El  hombre,  the  man. 
El  pan,  tJie  Irrcctd. 
El  polio,  the  chicken. 
El  queso,  the  cheese. 
El  sable,  tlw  saber. 
El  vino,  the  wine. 


Vocabulary. 


La  mesa,  the  table. 
'  La  pera,  the  pear. 
La  plata,  the  silver. 
Algo,  something,  anything. 
Aqui,  here. 
Bueno,  good. 
Con,  vnth. 
En,  in. 
Hoy,  to-day. 


Mucho,  a,  iiuich. 
Muchos,  as,  many. 
No,  no. 
Pero,  but. 
Poco,  adv.,  little. 
Que,  ivhat. 
Seuor,  sir,  Mr. 
Si,  yes. 
Sobre,  on,  upon. 


Exercise  7. 

1.  [Tiene  V.  algo  sobre  la  mesa?  2.  Si,  senor,  tengo  im  lil)ro 
sobre  la  mesa.  3.  i  Tiene  carne  el  carnicero  1  4.  Tiene  came  y  pol- 
ios. 5.  [  Tiene  el  Ingles  una  casa  en  la  ciiidad  ?  6.  El  tiene  dos  casas 
aqui.  7.  I  Tienen  V.  V.  mucho  dinero  1  8.  Tenemos  poco  dinero,  pero 
mucho  credito.  9.  i  Que  tiene  la  hija  del  panadero  ]  10.  Ella  tiene 
manzanas  y  peras.  11.  [Que  tienen  los  muchachos  ?  12.  Tienen 
cerezas.  13.  [  A  quien  escribe  Carlos  1  14.  El  escribe  a  mi  amigo. 
15.  I  Habla  V.  d  los  muchachos  ]     16.  No,  senor,  mi  hermano  habla 


PRONOUNS.  37 

a  los   miichachos  y  a  las  miichachas.      17.   [  Con  quien  sale  V.  1 

18.  Con  mi  padre  y  mi  madre.      19.   i  Tiene  el  general  nn  hijo  ? 

20.  El  tiene  un  bijo  y  dos  hijas.  21.  Los  conierciantes  tienen 
l)ueiios  dependientes.  22.  i  Que  da  V.  al  pobre  liombre  ?  23.  Pan 
y  dinero.  24.  Los  cazadcn-es  tienen  buenos  perros.  25.  [Tienen 
buenos  fusiles  ?     26.    Si,  tienen.  , 

Exercise  8. 

1.  Have  the  generals  good  horses  ?  2.  They  have  very  good 
horses.  3.  Has  the  Englishman  much  money  1  4.  He  has  ver}^  little. 
5.  Have  the  merchants  much  wine  ?  6.  They  have  very  little  wine. 
7.  Are  you  Charles's  friend  ?  8.  No,  Charles  is  my  brother's  friend. 
9.  Have  you  (any)  chickens  to-day  i  10.  Yes,  sir,  we  have  chickens 
and  meat.  11.  The  English  have  many  ships,'  and  the  French 
have  many  soldiers.  12.  My  brother  has  a  horse,  and  I  have  a  dog. 
13.  We  have  a  very  fine  theater  in  the  city.  14.  Has  my  brother 
(any)  books  on  the  table  i  15.  Yes,  sir,  he  has  books,  pens,  and  pen- 
cils on  the  table.  16.  Do  you  go  out  to-day  ?  17.  No,  sir,  but  my 
brother  goes  out  with  my  sister.     1 8.  What  do  you  give  to  Charles  ? 

19.  A  handsome  hat.     20.  The  baker's  sons  have  a  room  in  my  house. 

21.  To  whom  do  you  write  I  22.  To  Henry's  brother.  23.  We 
have  two  dogs  in  the  garden.  24.  Have  the  children  a  book  ? 
25.  They  have  two. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  pronoun  tii,  thou,  is  used  more  frequently  in  Spanish 
than  in  English.  It  indicates  familiariti/,  affection,  intimacy, 
and  is  therefore  frequently  used  among  relations,  intimate  friends, 
and  older  persons  when  addressing  children,  etc.  : 

^  Que  tienes  tii,  Juanito  ?         What  have  you,  Johnny  ? 

2.  We  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  nos  and  nosotros,  masc; 
nosotras, /ew. ;  but  nos  is  used  in  the  nominative  case  only  by 
sovereigns,  dignitaries,  and  tribunals  in  Church  and  State,  in 
their  official  capacity  : 

Nos,  D.  N.,  Obispo  de  N...  IFe,  D,  N.,  Bishop  of  N... 

Nos  los  Inquisitores...  We  ths  Inquisitors... 

Note.  — In  the  usual  style,  nosotros,  masc,  nosotras,  fern.,  is  always  used. 


38  LESSON   4. 

3,  You  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  vos,  vosotrQiS)  masc,  VOSO- 
tras,  fem. ;  and  also  by  usted  (or  V.)  for  the  singular  of  both 
genders,  and  ustedes  (or  V.  V.)  for  the  plural. 

Vos  is  used  only  in  elevated  style,  or  when  addressing  the 
Deity,  saints,  kings,  and  sovereigns  when  the  title  of  Majesty 
is  omitted : 

De  vos  espero  alivio,  Senor,  Fro7n  thee  I  expect  relief,  0  Lord. 

A  vos  elevo  mis  siiplicas,  Eey  y  To  thee  I  raise  my  prayers,  King  and 

Senor,  Lord, 

Vos,  Seftor,  podeis  remediar  mi  Thou,  0  Lord,  canst  relieve  my  misery, 

desgracia, 

Vosotros  is  used  by  orators  and  speakers  when  addressing 
their  auditors. 

Usted  and  ustedes  are  used  in  the  usual  style  and  conversa- 
tion ;  the  first  being  used  for  the  singular  and  the  second  for  the 
plural.  Usted  being  a  contraction  of  vuestra  merced,  ^our 
Lordship,  and  ustedes  a  contraction  of  vuestras  mercedes, 
7/o2ir  Lordships,  always  require  the  verb  in  the  third  person  sin- 
gular or  plural,  as  would  be  the  case  in  English,  should  we  use 
the  same  way  of  addressing  persons. 

Thus,  tiene  usted  ?  (which  is  the  abbreviation  of  tiene  vues- 
tra merced  ?  and  is  generally  written  tiene  V.  ?)  means  in 
reality  :  has  your  Lordship  ?  and  tienen  ustedes  ?  (which  is  the 
abbreviation  of  tienen  vuestras  mercedes?  and  is  generally 
written  tienen  V.  V  %)  means,  have  your  Lordships  ?  Accordingly, 
in  Spanish  as  well  as  in  English,  the  verb  in  these  two  sentences, 
or  others  alike,  is  put  in  the  third  person  singular  with  the  Jirst 
sentence,  and  in  the  third  person  plural  with  the  seco7id. 

It  will  therefore  be  sufficient  for  the  student  to  know  the  third 
person  singular  and  the  third  person  plural  of  the  different  tenses 
of  a  verb  to  be  able  to  use  usted  and  ustedes  correctly.  Thus, 
instead  of  expressing  himself  as  in  English,  that  is,  instead  of 
employing  the  second  person  and  saying,  for  instance  :  VOSOtros 
teneis,  you  have ;  vosotros  sois,  you  are ;  vosotros  salis,  you  go 
out ;  vosotros  dais,  you  give  ;  vosotros  escribis,  you  write  ;  etc., 
he  will  say  : 


PRONOUNS.  39 

"With  listed  when  addressing  one  person  : 

TJsted  tiene,      literally  your  Lordshi'p  has,  for  you  {sing.)  have, 

listed  es,  "  your  Lordship  is,  "  you  {sing.)  are. 

Ustei  sale,  "  your  Lordship  goes  outy    **  you  (sm^.)  go  out. 

listed  da,  **  your  Lordship  gives,         '*  you  {sing.)  give. 

listed  escribe,        •*  your  Lordship  writes,       '*  you  (sm^.  write. 

With  ustedes  when  addressing  ttvo  or  more  persons  : 

Ustedes  tienen,      literally  your  Lordships  have,    for  you  {pi.)  have. 

Ustades  son,  **        your  Lordships  are,        **    you  (j[>Z.)  are. 

Ustedes  salen,  **        your  Lordships  go  out,  **    you  (pi.)  go  out. 

Ustedes  dan,  *'        your  Lordships  give,       **    yow  {pi.)  givQ. 

Ustedes  escriben,        **        your  Lordships  u^te,    **    you  (^/.)  write. 

Note.  —  We  use,  in  fact,  the  same  form  of  expressing  ourselves  in  Eng- 
lish when  we  say,  speaking  to  a  Judge,  an  Archbishop,  etc. :  Your  Honor 
hiows  ... ;  your  Grace  is  ...;  etc.,  instead  of  the  plain  and  usual :  You  know 
... ;  you  are  ... ;  etc.  In  conjugating  verbs  the  student  will  use  vosotros  as 
given,  but  when  addressing  a  person  or  persons  will  use  usted  and  ustedes. 

4»  Verbs  are  conjugated  interrogatively  by  placing  the  verb 
before  its  subject.  This  takes  place  in  all  cases  of  interrogation, 
as  is  the  case  with  to  have,  to  be,  to  will,  etc.: 

i  Tengo  yo  ?  Have  I? 

i  Tiene  el  hombre  ?  Has  the  man  ? 

I  Sabe  el  padre  ?  Does  the  father  Jcnow  (lit.  knows  the  father)  ? 

i  Van  los  muchachos  ?  Do  the  hoys  go  ? 

I  Que  dice  la  senorn  ?  What  docs  the  lady  say  ? 

I  Que  decian  los  hombres  ?  Wliat  did  the  men  say  ? 

i  Sabe  V.  cuando  viene  mi  Do  you  know  when  my  father  coraes  (lit. 
padre  ?  v^hen  comes  my  father)  ? 

5.  In  interrogative  sentences  it  is  considered  an  elegant  way 
of  expressing  one's  self,  to  place  the  object  before  the  subject 
when  the  latter  is  not  a  pronoun  :  ^ 

i  Tiene  dinero  el  hombre  ?        Has  tlie  man  any  money  ? 

i  Es  bueno  el  vino  ?  Is  the  wine  good  ? 

6t  Each  person  of  the  verb  having  generally  in  Spanish,  as 
in  Latin,  a  different  termination,  the  accompanying  pronouns 
may  be  and  are  generally  left  out  in  conversation,  and  even  in 
the  conjugation,  when  the  sentence  is  otherwise  sufficiently  clear. 


40  LESSON   5. 

But  usted  and  ustedes  should  not  be  left  out"  however,  as  they 
accompany  the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular  and  third  per- 
son plural,  as  well  as  el,  he ;  ella,  she ;  and  ellos  (masc),  ellas 
(fern.),  they,  and  as  their  omission  might  create  confusion  : 

Teiigo,  /  have.  Tenemos,  we  have. 

Tienes,  thou  hast.  Tienen,  they  have. 

Sale,  he  or  she  goes  out.         Salen,  they  go  out. 
Observation.  —  In  interrogative  sentences  it  is  also  better  to  preserve 
the  pronouns. 

7i  As  a  sentence  may  be  construed  in  different  ways  in  Span- 
ish, as  will  be  seen  hereafter,  the  interrogative  form  may  often  be 
found  in  affirmative  sentences  : 

Tiene  V.  razon,  You  are  right. 

Es  V.  muy  bueno,  You  are  very  kind. 

Habla  V.  muy  bien,  You  speak  very  well. 

8»  Some  or  any,  before  nouns,  are  either  left  out  or  rendered 
by  algun,  alguna,  algunos,  algunas.  When  standing  alone, 
alguno,  alguna,  algunos,  algunas  are  used  : 

i  Tiene  V.  vino  or  algun  vino  ?         Have  you  (any)  wine  ? 
Tengo  alguno,  I  have  some. 


Leccion  V.  Lesson  Y. 

Verbs  ser  and  estar,  to  he. 
Present  Tense  of  ser,  to  he. 


Affirmatively. 

Interrogatively. 

Yo  soy,                 /  am. 

Soy  yo  ?                 am  I? 

Tii  eves,                 thou  art. 

Eres  tii  ?                art  thou  ? 

El  es,                    he  is. 

Es  el  ?                     is  lie  ? 

p]lla  es,                  she  is. 

Es  ella  ?                 is  she  ? 

Nosotros  somos,  we  are. 

Somos  nosotros  ?  arc  tve  ? 

Vosotros  sois,         > 

Sois  vosotros  ?         % 

Es  usted  {sing.)  ?     [  arc  tjou  ? 

Usted  es  {sing.),     \yoit  are. 

Ustedes  son  (jt??.),  J 

Son  ustedes  (i?Z.)?  J 

Ellos  son,              they  (masc.)  are. 

Son  ellos  ?             are  they  (masc.)  ? 

Ellas  son,             they  (fem.)  are. 

Son  ellas  ?              are  they  (iem.)  ? 

VERBS   SER  AND   ESTAR. 


41 


Ejemplos. 

La  vida  es  corta. 
Somos  mortales. 
Mi  padre  es  medico. 
Mis  hermanos  son  pintores. 
Carlos  es  bueno. 
Juan  y  Enrique  son  malos. 
El  profesor  es  muy  docto. 
V.  es  muy  alto. 
Los  muchachos  son  pequeiios. 
Maria  es  mi  hermana. 
La  madre  es  vieja. 
El  padre  es  ciego. 
La  mucliacha  es  bonita. 
La  leche  es  blanca.^ 
El  plomo  es  pesado. 
El  reloj  es  de  oro. 
Los  candeleros  son  de  plata.  . 
El  dinero  es  mio. 
La  casa  es  del  medico. 
Este  vino  es  de  Espaiia. 
La  flor  es  para  mi  hermana. 
La  maquina  es  para  copiar  cartas. 
i  Quien  es  V.  ? 

El  amor  de  Dios  es  el  principio  de 
la  sabiduria. 


Examples. 

Life  is  short. 
We  are  mortal. 
My  father  is  a  physician. 
My  brothers  are  painters. 
Charles  is  good. 
John  and  Henry  are  bad. 
The  professor  is  very  learned. 
You  are  very  tall. 
The  boys  are  small. 
Mary  is  my  sister. 
The  mother  is  old. 
The  father  is  blind. 
The  girl  is  pretty. 
Milk  is  white. 
Lead  is  heavy. 
The  watch  is  of  gold. 
The  candlesticks  are  of  silver. 
The  money  is  mine. 
The  house  belongs  to  the  physician. 
This  wine  is  from  Spain. 
The  flower  is  for  my  sister. 
The  machine  is  to  copy  letters. 
Who  are  you  ? 

The  love  of  God  is  the  beginning 
of  wisdom. 


Present  Tense  of  estar,  to  he. 


Affirmatively. 
Yo  estoy,  /  am. 

Tii  estas,  thou  art. 

El  esta,  he  is. 

Ella  esta,  sJie  is. 

Nosotros  estamos,  we  are. 
Vosotros  estais,         ^ 
Usted  esta  (sing.),     y  you  are. 
XJstedes  estan  (pL),  J 
EUos  estan,  they  (masc.)  are. 

Ellas  estan,  they  (fem.)  are. 


Interrogatively. 
Estoy  yo  ?  arn  I  ? 

Estas  tii  ?  art  thou  ? 

Esta  el  ?  is  he  ? 

Esta  ella  ?  is  she  ? 

Estamos  nosotros  ?  are  we  ? 
Estais  vosotros  ?       ^ 
Esta  usted  {sing. )  ?    V  are  you  ? 
Estan  ustedes(^^.)?  J 
Estan  ellos  ?  are  tliey  (masc.)  ? 

Estan  ellas  ?  are  they  (fem.)? 


1  See  L.  8. 


42 


LESSON  5. 


Ejemplos. 

Mi  hermana  esta  triste. 

Yo  estoy  muy  coutento. 

El  cafe  esta  Mo. 

La  carne  esta  asada. 

Los  muchachos  estan  en  la  calle. 

Mi  aniigo  esta  en  Paris. 

Carlos  esta  enfermo. 

I  Donde  esta  mi  sombrero  ? 

El  sombrero  esta  de  moda. 


Examples. 

My  sister  is  sad. 

I  am  very  pleased. 

The  coffee  is  cold. 

The  meat  is  roasted. 

The  boys  are  in  the  street. 

My  friend  is  in  Paris. 

Charles  is  sick. 

Where  is  my  hat  ? 

The  hat  is  in  the  fashion. 


Ser  and  estar  compared. 

Ser  bueno,  to  he  good.  Estar  bueno,  to  he  well  (in  health). 

Ser  malo,  to  be  bad  (wicked).  Estar  malo,  to  be  ill  (sick). 

Ser  vivo,  to  be  lively.  Estar  vivo,  to  be  alive. 

Ser  cansado,  to  be  tiresome.  Estar  cansado,  to  be  tired. 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  abogado,  the  lawyer. 
El  campo,  the  country. 
La  calle,  the  street. 
La  puerta,  tlie  door. 
Agrio,  sour. 
Ahora,  now. 


Bueno,  good,  well. 
Cerrado,  closed,  shut. 
Contento,  pleased,  satisfied. 
Donde,  where. 
Gracias,  thank  you. 
Jdven,  young. 


Lejos,/ar. 
Ldndres,  London. 
Malo,  had,  ill. 
Nadie,  nobody,  no  one. 
Triste,  sad. 
Sabe  V.  1  do  you  know  I 


Exercise  9. 

1.  Los  dos  hermanos  de  Carlos  estan  ahora  en  Paris.  2.  i  Quien 
es  V.  ?  3.  Soy  el  hijo  del  medico.  4.  [  Donde  estan  los  libros  ? 
5.  Estan  sobre  la  mesa  en  mi  cuarto.  6.  i  Es  V.  medico  ?  7.  No, 
seiior,  soy  abogado.  8.  i  Es  bueno  el  vino  ?  9.  Esta  agrio.  10.  Las 
mnchachas  estan  en  el  jardin,  y  los  muchachos  estan  en  la  calle. 
11.  La  hija  del  panadero  es  muy  joven.  12.  Juan  y  Maria  estan  en 
la  casa  del  general.  13.  Mi  casa  esta  muy  lejos  de  aqui.  14.  Los  dos 
medicos  son  Franceses.  15.  ^  Es  V.  Americano  ?  16.  No,  senor,  soy 
IngU's.  17.  I  Es  V.  de  Londres  ?  18.  Si,  senor,  soy  de  Londres,  y 
mi  padre  es  de  Livei^ool.  19.  Los  dos  hijos  del  carpintero  estan  muy 
malos.  20.  i  Donde  esta  Juan  1  21.  Esta  con  mi  hermano.  22.  El 
cafe  es  bueno,  pero  esta  frio.  23.  i  Estan  V.  V.  contentos  ?  24.  Esta- 
mos  muy  contentos  ahora.    25.  i  Quien  esta  en  mi  cuarto  ?    26.  Nadie, 


VERBS  SER  AND   ESTAR,  43 

el  cuai-to  esta  cerrado.     27.  La  hija  del  general  es  muy  amable. 

28.  I  Con  quien  evSta  mi  madre  ?     29.  Ella  esta  con  mis  (my)  dos  her- 
manas.     30.  Los  cazadores  estan  en  el  bosque. 

Exercise  10. 

1.  Do  you  know  where  the  book  is  (where  is  the  book)?  2.  The 
book  is  on  the  table.  3.  Where  is  the  father  now  1  4.  He  is  in 
London.  5.  Is  he  well  ?  6.  He  is  very  well,  thank  you.  7.  Are 
the  Americans  and  the  English  friends?  8.  They  are  friends 
now.  9.  Who  are  you  ?  10.  I  am  Charles's  friend.  11.  Where  is  he  ? 
12.  He  is  in  the  country.  13.  The  two  sons  of  the  physician  are 
small,  but  they  are  very  bad.  14.  Here  is  my  book.  15.  Is  the  cheese 
good  ?  16.  The  cheese  and  the  bread  are  veiy  good.  17.  Is  the  baker 
an  Ameiican  ?  18.  No,  sir,  he  is  a  Frenchman.  19.  The  two  hunt- 
ers are  brothers.  20.  Are  you  pleased  here  ?  21.  Yes,  we  have 
money,  and  we  ar»  pleased.  22.  My  brother's  friend  is  a  lawyer. 
23.  Who  is  at  the  door?  24.  A  boy  with  apples.  25.  John  and 
Henry  are  in  the  city.  26.  Where  are  the  chickens  ?  27.  The 
chickens  are  now  in  the  garden.      28.   The  wine  is  sour  and  bad. 

29.  Who  is  sa4?     30.  Nobody  is  sad  here. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  Although  the  two  Spanish  verbs  ser  and  estar  are  both 
rendered  in  English  by  the  verb  to  be,  they  cannot  be  used 
indifferently  one  for  the  other,  and  there  is  perhaps  no  greater 
difficulty  for  the  English  student  than  the  one  attending  the 
proper  use  of  these  verbs. 

Ser  is  used  when  the  attribute  is  inherent  or  essential  to  the 
subject,  while  estar  is  to  be  used  when  the  attribute  is  only  acci- 
dental or  temporary.  This,  however,  will  be  more  clearly  shown 
by  the  following  rules  : 

Ser  is  used : 

1.  To  express  the  condition,  trade,  profession,  employment, 
rank,  dignity  of  persons,  etc.  : 

Ser  pintor,  to  he  a  painter.  Ser  general,  to  he  a  general. 

Ser  juez,  to  he  a  judge.  Ser  rey,  to  he  a  king. 

Ser  librero,  to  he  a  hookseller.         Ser  soldado,  to  be  a  soldier. 


44  LESSON  5. 

2.  To  express  the  qualities  pertaining  to  the  mind,  the  soul, 
the  heart,  and  disjjosition  : 

Ser  virtuoso,  to  be  virtuous.         Ser  tierno,  to  he  tender, 
Ser  habil,  to  he  skillfal.  Ser  alegre,  to  he  merry. 

3.  To  express  the  qualities  and.  defects  of  persons  and  things 
when  deemed  permanent : 

Ella  es  bonita,  she  is  pretty.         El  hombre  es  sordo,  the  man  is  deaf. 
El  es  feo,  he  is  ugly.  Pedro  es  ciego,  Peter  is  hlind. 

4.  To  express  general  truths  : 

La  vida  es  corta,  life  is  short.^       La  muerte  es  terrible,  death  is  terrihle. 

5.  To  indicate  the  size,  volume,  etc.,  of  persons  or  things  : 

Ser  chico,  to  he  small.         Ser  grueso,  to  he  stout,  thick,  etc. 
Ser  grande,  to  he  tall. 

6.  To  express  the  number  of  persons  or  things  : 

Los  enemigos  eran  diez  mil,  y  noso-         The  enemies  were  ten  thousand,  and 
tros  eramos  solo  cinco  mil,  we  were  only  five  thousand. 

7.  To  express  the  natural  qualities  of  substances  : 

La  miel  es  dulce,  honey  is  sweet.         El  plomo  es  pesado,  lead  is  heavy, 

8.  In  connection  with  the   materials  of  which   objects   are 
made  : 

El  reloj  es  de  oro.  The  watch  is  of  gold. 

Los  candeleros  son  de  hierro,         The  candlesticks  are  of  iron. 

'  9.  To  indicate  possession,  origin,  destination,  aptness,  etc. : 

El  libro  es  mio,  Tlie  hook  is  mine. 

Este  vino  es  de  Francia,  This  wine  is  from  France. 

Este  muchacho  es  de  Madrid,  This  hoy  is  from  Madrid. 

El  libro  es  para  V.,  The  hook  is  for  you. 

El  no  es  para  trabajar,  He  is  not  fit  to  work. 

10.  When  to  be  means  to  happen  : 

I  Cuando  sera  eso  ?         Wlien  will  that  he  (happen)  ? 

11.  When  speaking  of  day,  night,  time,  etc.  : 

Es  de  dia,  it  is  day.  Es  tarde,  it  is  late. 

Es  de  noche,  it  is  nigJit.         Es  temprano,  it  is  early. 

~  1  See  L.  29,  p.  169. 


VERBS   SER   AND   ESTAR.  45 

12.  When   used   impersonally  and  governing  the   following 
infinitive  with  the  preposition  de : 
Es  de  desear  que  llegue  hoy,        It  is  desirable  that  lie  sJwuld  arrive  to-day. 

2,   Estar  is  used  : 

1.  To  express  the  state  of  health : 

Estar  hue  no,  to  he  welL   .     Estar  malo,  to  he  ill, 

2.  To  express  existence  in  a  locality  : 

Estar  en  el  campo.  To  he  in  the  country. 

El  estaba  a  la  puerta,         He  luas  at  the  door. 

3.  When  joined  to  certain  adjectives  to  express  a  state^  a  way 
of  being  J  or  feelings  and  emotions  : 

Estar  alegre,  To  he  merry. 

Estar  contento.  To  he  pleased. 

El  agna  esta  caliente,         The  water  is  warm. 

4.  As  auxiliary  to  conjugate  a  verb  in  the  gerund  : 

Estoy  comiendo,  /  am  eating.        El  esta  leyendo,  he  is  reading,  etc. 

5.  Before  adverbs  or  adverbial  expressions  denoting  condition : 

Mi  sombrero  esta  de  nioda.  My  hat  is  in  the  fashion. 

Estamos  de  priesa,  TFe  are  in  a  hurry. 

La  casa  esta  bien  fabricada,         TJie  house  is  well  huilt. 

6.  To  express  intention,  luillingness,  readiness,  and  to  express 
that  a  thing  is  not  completed  : 

Yo  estoy  para  salir,  /  intend  to  go  out. 

Yo  estaba  por  echarle  de  casa,         I  wished  to  pat  hiin  out  of  the  house. 

La  casa  esta  por  acabar,  The  hoicse  is  not  yet  finished. 

7.  To  express  occupation  or  disposition  of  the  body  or  mind  : 

Hoy  estoy  de  guardia,         To-d/iy  I  am  on  duty. 
El  estaba  de  rina.  He  felt  like  quarreling. 

8.  When  speaking  of  dignities  and  offices  temporarily  held, 
estar  may  be  used  with  the  preposition  de : 

El  general  H.  esta  de  gobernador  de         General  H.  is  (acting)  governor  of 
la  isla  de  Cuba,  the  island  of  Cuba, 


46  LESSON   6. 

It  would,  however,  be  perfectly  correct  to  say  : 

El  general  H.  es  gobernador  de  la  isla  de  Cuba, 

the  first  sentence  being  only  a  more  elegant  way  of  expressing 
one's  self. 

3.    Ser  and  estar  compared  : 

Ser  alegre  means  to  be  of  a  merry  disposition,  whilst  estar 
alegre  means  to  he  merry  at  a  certain  moment^  etc.  These  ex- 
amples, which  might  be  multiplied  indefinitely,  will  be  found 
sufficient  to  explain  the  difference  which  exists  in  Spanish 
between  ser  and  estar »  when  the  attribute  is  inherent  in  the 
subject,  or  when  it  is  only  accidental.     (See  Examples.) 

4#  The  Indefinite  Article  is  omitted  before  words  indicating 
professions  or  nationality,  unless  they  are  preceded  by  adjectives  : 

Este  hombre  es  soldado,         This  man  is  a  soldier. 
Es  un  buen  soldado.  He  is  a  good  soldier. 

El  es  Frances,  He  is  a  Frenchman. 

Observation.  —  The  Indefinite  Article  may  be  omitted,  however,  when 
the  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  adjective,  especially  when  adjective  and 
noun  express  but  one  inseparable  idea :  El  es  buen  miisico,  he  is  a  good 
mimcian. 


Leccion  VI.  Lesson  VI. 

USE  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS  DE  AND  PARA. 

Ejemplos.  Examples, 

T>  1 1    ,  •                 1-1               )  Paul  has  a  eold  watch  (a  watch  of 

Pablo  tiene  un  reloi  de  oro.     >  °                   ^ 

)  gold). 

Tenemos  dos  mesas  de  marmol.  We  have  two  marble  tables. 

i  Tienen  V.  Y.  plumas  de  acevo  ?  Have  you  any  steel  pens  ? 

Tenemos  plumas  de  oro  y  de  acero.  We  have  gold  and  steel  pens. 

Adolfo  tieue  un  chaleco  de  seda.  Adolphus  has  a  silk  waistcoat. 

•El  medico  tiene  una  casa  de  madera.  The  physician  has  a  wooden  house. 


Los  muchachos  tienen  un  tintero  j 
de  plomo.  : 


The  boys  have  a  leaden  inkstand. 


DE  AND   PARA. 


47 


Tenemos  una  maquina  de  lavar. 

Compaiiia  de  Relojes  de  Nueva  York. 

Carruages  de  prim  era  clase. 

Una  bomba  de  vapor. 

Agiia  de  Florida. 

Un  maestro  de  escuela. 

Una  maquina  de  coser. 

Mesas  para  comedor.    | 

Tinte  para  el  pelo. 

Polvos  para  insectos. 

Efectos  para  marineros.  / 


Vocabulario. 
El  algodon,  the  cottonTl 
El  almacen,  the  store.  J  . 
El  arce,  the  maple. ^ 
El  azucar,  the  sugar. 
El  billar,  the  billiard. 
El  cuchillo,  the  knife. 
El  extinguidor,  the  extinguisher. 
El  fabricante,  the  inanvfaciurer. 
El  fuego,  the  fire. 
El  hierro,  the  iron. 
El  instrumento,  the  instrument. 
El  joyero,  the  jeweler. 
El  pedazo,  the  piece. 
El  plomo,  the  lead. 
El  tiempo,  the  time. 
El  tintero,  the  inkstand. 
El  vapor,  the  steam. 
El  vidrio,^  the  glass. 


We  have  a  washing-macliine. 

New  York  Watch  Company. 

First-class  carriages. 

A  fire-engine. 

Fjiirida  water. 

A  schoolmaster. 

A  sewing-machine. 

Dining-room  tables  (tables  for  din- 
ing-rooms). 
Hair-dye  (dye  for  the  hair). 
Insect  powders  (powder  for  insects). 
Sailors'  goods  (goods  for  sailors). 


Vocabulary. 

La  caja,  the  safe,  the  box. 

La  cana,2  the  cane. 

La  caoba,  the  tnahogany. 

La  cerveza,  the  beer. 

La  hacienda,  the  estate. 

La  seda,  the  silk. 

AUi,  there. 

Champana,  Champagne, 

Celebre,  celebrated. 

Desde,  si^ice. 

Escribe,  T  write. 

Para,  for. 

Quiere  V.  1     Will  you  have  ?    Do  you 

icish  1 
Quiero,  /  wish,  I  will  have. 
Senor,  sir. 

Seuora,  madam,  Mrs. 
Vende,  sells. 


Exercise  11. 

1.  [  Que  vino  tiene  V.  en  la  casa  ?    2.  Tengo  vino  de  Champana. 
3.  Las  plumas  de  acero  de  Spencer  son  muy  celebres.     4.  Tenemos 

1  Vidrio,  glass,  refers  only  to  the  substance  called  glass,  while  vaso  is 
used  for  a  glass  to  drink  in. 

2  Cana,  cans,  does  not  refer  to  a  walking-stick,  which  is  un  baston. 


48  LESSON   6.  • 

una  caja  cle  hierro  en  el  almacen.  6.  Tenemos  tambien  nn  extingui- 
dor  de  fuego.    6.  i  Tienen  V.  V.  una  mesa  de  billar  ?    7.  Tenemos  dos. 

8.  Mi  hermano  vende  instrumeutos  para  joyeros.  9.  ^  Y  que  vende 
v.?  10.  Soy  fabricante  de  mesas  para  comedor.  11.  Mi  hermano 
es  dependiente  en  la  Compania  de  Manhattan.  12.  i  Tienen  Y.  Y.  una 
maquina  de  vapor  en  la  hacienda?  13.  Si,  seiior,  tenemos  una  desde 
mucho  tiempo  (a  long  time).  14.  i  Quiere  Y.  un  paraguas  de  seda  6 
de  algodon  ?  15.  Quiero  uno  de  seda.  16.  El  padre  de  Enrique 
tiene  una  casa  de  campo.  17.  Mi  hermana  tiene  un  traje  de  seda. 
18.  Tenemos  una  mesa  de  caoba.  19.  ^  Quiere  Y.  aziicar  de  caiia  ? 
20.  Quiero  aziicar  de  arce. 

Exercise  12, 

1.  What  will  you  have  ?  2.  I  wish  a  piece  of  bread.  3.  Do  you 
write  with  a  gold  pen  ?  4.  No,  sir,  I  wTite  with  a  steel  pen.  5.  In 
what  company  are  you  (a)  clerk  ?  6.  In  the  New  York  Watch  Com- 
pany.    7.  What  does  your  (sn)  brother  sell  ?     8.  He  sells  silk  hats. 

9.  Have  you  a  glass  inkstand  ?  10.  No,  sir,  I  have  a  leaden  ink- 
stand. 11.  What  knife  will  you  have  1  12.  I  wish  a  butcher's  knife. 
13.  What  hat  has  Henry?  14.  He  has  a  hunter's  hat.  15.  Does  the 
merchant  sell  wine  ?  16.  He  sells  wine  and  beer.  17.  With  whom 
are  the  hunters  in  the  wood  ?  18.  They  are  there  with  the  young 
soldier.     19.  Have  the  ladies  a  fan  ?    20.  They  have  two  fans. 

Gramatiea.  Grammar. 

It  The  material  of  ivhich  a  thing  is  made  is  indicated  by  the 
preposition  de,  of,  from,  between  the  name  of  the  thing  and  that 
of  the  material  : 

Un  sombrero  de  seda,         A  silk  hat  (lit.  a  hat  of  silk). 
Un  reloj  de  oro,  J  gold  watch  {a  watch  of  gold). 

2,  The  word  representing  the  nature,  species,  locality/  or  qtial- 
ity^of  a  thing,  which  in  English  is  placed  first,  comes  second  in 
Spanish,  and  is  joined  to  the  first  noun  by  de,  of,  from  : 

Un  traje  de  verano,  A  slimmer  dress. 

Agua  de  Ihivia,  Rain-water. 

Vino  de  Burdeos,  Bordeaux  wine,  claret, 

Azucar  de  cana,  Sugar-cane. 


THE   NEGATIVE. 


49 


3«  The  word  representing  a  particular  use,  appendage,  pur- 
pose^ physical  or  moral  property,  place  ivhere  things  are  kept, 
etc.,  comes  second  in  Spanish,  and  is  generally  joined  to  the  first 
noun  by  the  prepositions  para, /or;  or  de,  of,  from: 

Maquina  para  gas,  Gas-machine. 

Jaulas  para  pajaros,  Bird-cages. 

Estante  para  sombreros,  Hat-stand. 

Maquinas  de  coser,  Sewing-machines, 


Leccion  Til. 


Lesson  VII. 


THE  NEGATIVE. 


No  tener,  not  to 
Negatively : 
Yo  no  tengo  (no  teugo),  I  have  not. 


Tu  no  tienes, 
El  no  tiene, 
Ella  no  tiene, 
Nosotros  no  tenemos, 
Vosotros  no  teneis, 
listed  (sing.)  no  tiene, 
Ustedes  {pi.)  no  tienen, 
Ellos  no  tieneu, 
Ellas  no  tienen. 


thou  hast  not. 
he  has  not. 
she  has  not. 
we  have  not. 

you  have  not. 

they  (masc.)  have  not. 
they  (fern.)  have  not. 


Negatively  and  Interrogatively: 


No  tengo  yo  ? 
No  tienes  tu  ? 
No  tiene  el  ? 
No  tiene  ella  ? 
No  tenemos  nosotros  ? 
No  teneis  vosotros  ? 
No  tiene  usted  (sing.)  ? 
No  tienen  ustedes  (pi.)  ? 
No  tienen  ellos  ? 
No  tienen  ellas  ? 
4 


have  I  not  ? 
hast  thou  not  ? 
has  hs  not  ? 
has  she  not  ? 
have  we  not  ? 

have  you  not  ? 

have  they  (masc.)  not  ? 
have  tJicy  (fern.)  notl 


50 


LESSON    7. 
Ser  and  estar,  to  he. 


Negatively : 
Yo  no  soy, 
Yo  no  estoy, 

etc. 


/  am  not. 
etc. 


Negatively  and  Interrogatively : 
No  soy  yo  ? 
No  estoy  yo  ?  j 
etc. 


am  I  not  ? 
etc. 


Jamas,  never,  ever. 
Nada,  nothing^  not  anything. 
Nadie,  nobody ,  not  anybody. 
Ni,  neither,  nor. 


Negative  with 

Ninguno,  (sing.)  \  no  one,  none,  no, 
Ningunos,  (pi.)    \      not  any. 
Nunca,  never. 


Yo  no  tengo  nada,  or  nada  tengo.    \ 

Yo  no  qniero  ninguno,  or  ninguno  ) 
quiero.  J 

El  no  esta  jamas  en  casa,  or  jamas 
esta  el  en  casa. 
^    i\  no  tiene  nunca  dinero,  or  nun- 
ca tiene  el  dinero. 

No  sale  nadie,  or  nadie  sale. 

No  tengo  ni  pan  ni  queso,  or  ni 
pan  ni  queso  tengo. 


I  have  nothing  ;  I  don't  have  any- 
thing. 

I  don't  wish  any. 

He  is  never  at  home. 

He  never  has  any  money. 

Nobody  goes  out. 

I  have  neither  bread  nor  cheese. 


Ejemplos. 

i  Es  pobre  el  hombre  ? 

No  es  pobre,  es  rico. 

i  No  tiene  V.  dinero  ? 

Ni  dinero  ni  credito  tengo. 

i  No  quiere  V.  pan  ? 

Nada  quiero  hoy. 

I  No  sale  mi  padre  hoy  ? 

El  no  sale. 

Luisa  no  es  am  able. 

i  Vende  sombreros  el  comerciante  ? 

El  no  vende  ningunos. 

i  Que  tiene  V.  en  la  caja  ? 

Nada  tengo. 

Nadie  sabe  la  leccion. 

Isabel  no  es  dichosa. 

Ni  libros  ni  plumas  tengo. 
I 


Examples. 

Is  the  man  poor  ? 

He  is  not  poor,  he  is  rich. 

Have  you  no  money  ? 

I  have  neither  money  nor  credit. 

Don't  you  wish  any  bread  ? 

I  don't  wish  anything  to-day. 

Does  not  my  father  go  out  to-day  ? 

He  does  not  go  out. 

Louisa  is  not  amiable. 

Does  the  merchant  sell  hats  ? 

He  does  not  sell  any. 

What  have  you  in  the  box  ? 

I  have  nothing. 

Nobody  knows  the  lesson. 

Isabel  is  not  happy. 

I  have  neither  books  nor  pens. 


THE  NEGATIVE. 


51 


Vocabulario. 

El  aceite,  the  oil. 
La  lampara,  the  lamp. 
La  leccion,  the  lesson. 
La  luz,  the  light. 
Abajo,  down  stairs. 
Alguno,  some,  any,  some 

one,  any  one,  somebody, 

anybody. 
Aquello,  that,  that  thing. 


Vocabulary. 


Compra  V.  1  do  you  buy  ? 
Compro,  /  buy. 
Esto,  this,  this  thing. 
Jamas,  never,  ever. 
Lis  to,  ready. 

Nada,  nothing,  not  anything. 
Nadie,  nobody,  not  anybody. 
Ni,  neither,  nor. 
Ninguno,  not  any,  none,  no. 


Nunca,  never. 
Porque I  why  t 
Porque,  because. 
Sabe  V.  T    do    you 

know  ? 
Yo  se,  /  know. 
Sin,  without. 
Todavia,  yet. 
Vendo,  /  sell. 


Exercise  13. 

1.  I  Tiene  V.  dinero  hoy  ?  2.  Tengo  dinero,  pero  no  tengo  pan  en 
la  casa.  3.  j  Esta  malo  el  muchacho  ?  4.  No  esta  nialo  hoy,  esta 
muy  bueno.  5.  [  Esta  aqiii  el  panadero  ?  6.  El  panadero  no  esta 
aqui,  pero  el  carnicero  esta  aqiii.  7.  i  Es  V.  el  amigo  de  Carlos  ? 
8.  No,  senor,  soy  el  amigo  de  Enrique.  9.  i  Quiere  V.  un  pedazo  de 
pan  con  queso  ?  10.  Quiero  pan,  pero  sin  queso.  H.  [  Quiere  V.  el 
dinero?  12.  Todavia  no.  13.  [Donde  esta  Juan?  14.  Noestaaqui, 
esta  abajo.  15.  [.  No  esta  la  casa  del  general  en  la  calle  de  Madrid  ? 
16.  El  general  no  tiene  casa  aqui.  17.  i  Quiere  V.  esto  6  aquello  ? 
18.  Quiero  esto,  pero  no  aquello.  19.  [  Tienen  pan  los  muchachos  ? 
20.  Tienen  pan,  pero  no  tienen  carne.  21.  [No  tiene  V.  oro ? 
22.  No  tengo  oro,  pero  tengo  plata.  23.  i  Porque  no  esta  V.  en  el 
jardin  con  los  muchachos  ?  24.  Porque  no  quiero.  25.  i  Es  rico  el 
medico'f  26.  No  es  rico,  pero  tiene  una  casa  en  Nueva  York. 
27.  I  Porque  no  tiene  V.  luz  en  el  cuarto  ?  28.  Porque  no  tengo 
aceite  para  mi  lampara.  29.  i  Compra  V.  vino  6  cerveza  ?  30.  No 
compro  ni  vino-  ni  cerveza  ;  no  quiero  nada.  31.  Nunca  sabe  V.  la 
leccion.     32.  i  Tiene  alguno  mi  libro  ?    33.  Nadie  tiene  el  libro. 

Exercise  14. 

1.  Have  you  a  silk  umbrella  ?  2.  I  have  two  umbrellas,  but  not 
of  silk.  3.  Are  you  a  physician  ?  4.  No,  sir,  I  am  a  merchant. 
5.  Have  you  not  a  store  in  Broadway  ?  6.  No,  sir,  my  store  is  not  in 
Broadway.  7.  Are  you  not  ready?  8.  No,  sir,  not  yet.  9.  The 
Frenchman  and  the  Englishman  are  not  friends.  10.  Have  the  sol- 
diers any  guns  ?  11.  They  have  no  guns,  but  they  have  sabers. 
12.  The  wine  is  not  good  ;  do  you  know  why?     13.  I  don't  know 


52  LESSON    7. 

why.  14.  Have  you  a  theater  in  the  city  ?  15.  We  have  no  theater  yet. 
16.  Who  is  in  the  garden?  17.  Nobody  is  in  the  garden.  18.  Have 
you  anything  for  my  brother  '?  19.  I  have  nothing  to-day.  20.  Has 
John  any  friends  ?  21.  He  has  neither  friends  nor  money.  22.  Do 
you  know  the  lesson  to-day  ?  23.  Nobody  knows  the  lesson. 
24.  Why  not  ?  25.  Because  we  are  sick.  26.  Are  the  boys  in  the 
room  I  27.  The  boys  are  not  in  the  room,  but  the  girls  are  there. 
28.  What  do  you  sell  to  Henry  ?  29.  I  don't  sell  anything  to  any- 
body. 30.  The  trees  of  the  garden  are  not  green.  31.  Is  Charles 
with  any  one  in  the  room?     32.  No,  sir,  with  no  one. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1 ,    In  negative  sentences,  no  is  placed  before  the  verb  : 

Yo  no  tengo,  /  Jiave  not. 

i  No  quiere  el  ?  ^Does  he  not  wish  ? 

i  No  es  V.  ?  Are  you  not  ] 

El  no  quiere,  He  does  not  wish. 

2#  The  Spaniards  use  a  double  negative  to  render  the  nega- 
tion stronger : 

No  quiero  nada,  I  wish  for  nothing  ;  I  donH'icish  anything. 

No  tengo  ninguno,         /  have  none. 
No  le  hablo  nunca,         /  never  speak  to  him. 
Observation.  —  The  adverb  no  is,  however,  omitted  when  we  j)lace  the 
other  negative  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence  : 

Nada  quiero.         Ninguno  tengo.         Nunca  le  hablo. 

3.  Jamas  and  nunca  have  the  same  meaning  in  the  nega- 
tive, and  are  generally  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence, 
without  the  adverb  no : 

Jamas  vi  tal  cosa,  or  nunca  vi  tal  cosa,  /  never  saiu  such  a  thing. 
Observation.  —  Jamas  seems,  however,  preferable  in  the  Present  Tense, 
and  nunca  in  the  Past  Tense.     It  would,  therefore,  be  more  correct  to  say: 
•  Nunca  tuvo  amigos^  he  never  had  any  friends  ;  but  jamas  tiene  dinero,  he 
never  has  any  money. 

4i  Jamas  and  nunca,  or  nunca  and  jamas,  are  often  con 
nected  to  give  more  expression  to  the  sentence: 

Nunca  jamas  lo  dire,  I  shall  luver  tell  it. 

No  le  olvidare  por  nunca  jamas,         I  slmll  never  forget  him. 


THE  NEGATIVE.  53 

5.   Jamas  is  often  connected  with  por  siempre,  or  para 
siempre,  for  ever  ;  and  means  quite  the  opposite  of  nunca : 
Por  or  Para  siempre  jamas  me  acordare  de  el,     /  shall  remember  him  forever. 

I^OTE.  — Jamas,  "when  not  accompanied  by  no,  and  not  at  the  beginning 
of  the  sentence,  means  ever  : 

I  Ha  vis  to  V.  jamas  tal  cosa  ?         Have  you  ever  seen  such  a  thing  ? 

6i  The  negative  ni  may  precede  the  adverbs  jamas,  nunca, 
and  even  the  other  negatives,  as  nada,  nadie,  etc.  : 

No  conozco  su  casa,  ni  nunca  I  don't  know  his  houses  nor  shall  I  ever 

ire,  go. 

Ni  nunca  le  vi,  ni  le  vere,  /  tiever  saw  him,  nor  will  I  see  him. 

Eso  no  es  verdad,  ni  nadie  lo  It  is  not  true,  nor  will  any  one  say 

dira,  so. 

Ni  yo,  ni  ninguno  de  mis  ami-  Neither  I  nor  any  of  my  friends  will 

gos  iremos  alia,  go  there. 

7.  Two  negatives  may  come  after  the  verb  : 

No  quiero  tampoco  nada,        /  don't  wish  anything  either. 
El  no  quiere  jamas  nada.         He  never  wishes  for  anything. 

8.  Although  no  is  used  to  form  the  negative,  it  is  used  some- 
times to  give  more  strength  to  the  affirmative  : 

Mejor  es  el  trabajo  que  no  la  ociosidad,         Labor  is  preferable  to  idleness. 
Observation.  —  In  sentences  like  the  above,  no  might  be  omitted  with- 
out altering  the  sense,  and  should  in  fact  be  omitted,  if  its  addition  should 
give  rise  to  any  doubtful  meaning. 

9.  Ninguno  (of  which  the  feminine  is  ninguna,  and  the 
plural  ningunos,  7nasc.,  ningunas,  fem.)  drops  the  last  letter 
before  a  masculine  noun  in  the  singular : 

No  tengo  ningun  libro,         I  have  no  book. 

The  same  word  is  used  for  the  English  no  (meaning  not  any) 
before  a  noun : 

Ningun  hombre,  no  man.  Ninguna  mujer,  no  ivoman. 

Ningunos  hombres,  no  men.  Ningunas  mujeres,  no  wonnen. 

When  standing  alone  it  means  none,  no  one,  etc. 

Observation.  —  Have  you  no  book  ?  may  be  rendered  in  Spanish  by  : 
jNo  tiene  V.  nn  libro  1  or  by:  iNo  tiene  V.  ningun  libro  I    The  same 


54  LESSON    8. 

rule  holds  good  for  the  plural :  Have  you  no  hooks  ?    [  No  tiene  V.  libros  1 
i  No  tiene  V.  ningunos  libros  ? 

10.  No,  connected  with  a  pronoun,  an  adverb,  and  even  with 
other  parts  of  speech,  is  generally  placed  last : 

Yo  no,  not  I.  Asi  no,  not  so. 

Eso  no,  not  so.  Todavia  no,  not  yet. 

Hoy  no,  not  to-day. 

1 1 ,  Alguno  (of  which  the  feminine  is  alguna,  and  the  plural 

algunos,  masc,  algimas,  fem.),  meaning  some^  <^ny,  some  one^ 

any  one,  somebody,  anybody,  drops  the  last  letter  (like  ninguno) 

before  a  masculine  noun  in  the  singular,  and  may  either  come  in 

the  sentence  or  be  omitted  : 

Tiene  V.  algun  dinero  ?  or  ) 

j  Tiene  V.dinero?  \         Have  ym  any  money  ? 

Observation.  —  The  student  should  be  careful  never  to  translate  not 
anything  by  no  algo,  nor  not  anybody  by  no  algimo,  —  a  mistake  which 
is  very  common  among  beginners.  Nada,  nadie,  or  ninguno  must  be  used- 
in  these  cases. 


leccion  YIII.  Lesson  YIII. 

ADJECTIVES.    FORMATION  OF  THE  FEMININE. 

Ejemplos.  Examples. 

El  muchacho  es  bueno.  The  boy  is  good. 

La  muchacha  es  buena.  The  girl  is  good. 

El  caballo  es  hermoso.  The  horse  is  fine. 

La  casa  es  hermosa.  The  house  is  fine. 

El  hijo  es  feo.  The  son  is  ugly. 

La  hija  es  bonita.  The  daughter  is  pretty. 

El  caballero  es  Frances.  The  gentleman  is  French. 

La  senora  es  Inglesa.  The  lady  is  English. 

Antonio  es  holgazan.  Anthony  is  lazy. 

Cristina  es  holgazana.  Chnstina  is  lazy. 

Jose  es  trabajador.  Joseph  is  industrious. 

Juana  es  trabajadora.  Jane  is  industrious. 


ADJECTIVES.      FORMATION    OF   THE   FEMININE. 


55 


El  padre  es  grave. 
La  madre  es  alegre. 
El  aziicar  es  dulce. 
La  yerba  es  verde. 

El  trabajo  es  facil. 
La  flor  es  azul. 
Fernando  es  joven. 
Julia  es  cortes. 


The  father  is  grave. 
The  mother  is  lively. 
The  sugar  is  sweet. 
The  grass  is  green. 

The  work  is  easy. 
The  flower  is  blue. 
Ferdinand  is  young. 
Julia  is  polite. 


Agreement  of  Adjectives. 


I  Es  GuilleiTno  bueno  6  malo  ? 
iEs  Isabel  buena  6  mala  ? 
El  tio  y  el  padre  son  viejos. 
La  tia  y  la  madre  son  viejas. 
El  tio  y  la  tia  son  ricos. 


Is  William  good  or  bad  ? 

Is  Isabel  good  or  bad  ?. 

The  uncle  and  the  father  are  old. 

The  aunt  and  the  mother  are  old. 

The'  uncle  and  aunt  are  rich. 


El  pobre. 

El  jDobre  viejo. 

La  pobre  vieja. 

Un  ciego.  —  Una  ciega. 

El  sabio  es  prudente. 

El  grande.  —  La  grande. 


Adjectives  used  Substantively. 


The  poor  man. 

The  poor  old  man. 

The  poor  old  woman. 

A  blind  man.  —  A  blind  woman. 

The  wise  man  is  prudent. 

The  large  one(masc.). — The  large  one(fem.). 


Vocabulario. 
El  cafe,  the  coffee. 
El  conde',  the  count. 
El  criado,  the  servant,  m. 
El  primo,  the  cousin,  ni. 
El  rey,  the  king. 
El  te,  the  tea. 
El  trabajo,  the  tvork. 
El  traje,  the  dress 
La  condesa,  the  countess. 
La  criada,  the  servant-girl. 
La'isla,  the  island. 
La  legumbre,  tJie  vegetable. 


Vocabulary. 


La  mujer,  the  woman,  wife. 
La  prima,  the  cousin,  f. 
La  reina,  the  queen. 
La  tone,  the  tower. 
Agradable,  agreeable. 
Alegre,  lively. 
Aleman,  German. 
Alto,  high. 
Benito,  pretty. 
Ciego,  blind. 
Dificil,  difficitlt. 
Enfermo,  sick,  ill. 


Facil,  easy. 
Feliz,  happy. 
Fee,  ugly,  homely. 
Fiel,  faithful. 
Infeliz,  unhappy. 
OrguUoso,  proud. 
Sabio,  wise. 
Sordo,  deaf. 
Timido,  timid. 
Valiente,  brave. 
Viejo,  old. 
Tonto,  stupid. 


Exercise  15. 

1.  El  hijo  de  Juan  es  muy  tonto.     2.  Las  dos  hijas  del  panadero 
son  muy  bonitas.     3.  El  padre  del  comerciante  es  todavia  muy  joven. 


56  LESSON    8. 

4.  Los  solclados  del  principe  son  muy  valientes.  5.  Mi  leccion  es 
muy  dificil.  6.  El  primo  y  la  prima  son  feos.  7.  La  mujer  {tcife) 
de  Pedro  es  sorda.  8.  El  pobre  viejo  esta  malo.  9.  i  Que  pedazo 
quiere  V.  ? — Quiero  el  grande.  10.  Las  dos  senoras  son  alemanas. 
11.  Los  caballos  de  mi  tio  son  negros.  12.  La  torre  es  muy  alta. 
13.  El  conde  es  orgulloso,,  pero  la  condesa  es  muy  amable.  14.  El  her- 
mano  de  Luisa  es  muy  feliz.  15.  Las  dos  muchachas  son  liermanas. 
16.  [  Cuantos  criados  tiene  V. '?  17.  Tengo  dos  criados  y  ties  criadas. 
18.  Mi  hermana  tiene  un  hermoso  traje  de  seda.  19.  El  rey  de  la 
isla  es  viejo,  pero  la  reina  es  joven.  20.  El  general  tiene  una  her- 
mosa  casa  en  el  campo.  2L  ^  Es  bueno  el  cafe  1  22.  El  cafe  es  bueno, 
pero  el  te  es  malo.  23,  i  Que  vende  la  mujer  1  24.  Vende  buenas 
manzanas.  25.  i  Porque  esta  V.  triste  1  26.  Porque  mi  padre  esta 
enfermo.  27.  La  ciudad  es  pequeiia,  pero  muy  agradable.  28.  El 
perro  es  fiel.  29.  i  Estan  V.  Y.  contentas,  senoras  ?  30.  Estamos 
muy  contentas  ahora.    31.  Las  cerezas  no  son  dulces. 

Exercise  16. 

1.  Are  the  horses  good?  2.  They  are  good,  but  small.  3.  Have 
you  (any)  flowers  in  the  two  gardens  ?  4.  We  have  flowers  in  the 
little  one,  and  vegetables  in  the  large  one.  5.  Why  are  you  so  sad, 
madam  ?  6.  Because  the  children  are  sick.  7.  The  French  women 
are  lively  and  amiable.  8.  The  houses  of  New  York  are  high. 
9.  The  English  women  are  handsome.  10.  The  general's  sister  is 
happy,  but  his  (su)  brother  is  unhappy.  11.  The  father,  mother,  and 
children  are  sick.  12.  The  houses  of  the  city  are  large.  13.  Are 
the  two  ladies  American  ?  14.  No,  sir,  they  are  German.  15.  Is  the 
woman  blind  ?  16.  She  is  deaf.  17.  Is  the  baker's  daughter  pretty? 
18.  She  is  very  homely,  but  very  amiable.  19.  My  work  is  easy,  but 
my  brother's  work  is  very  difficult.  20.  Louisa  and  Mary  are  cousins. 
21.  Mary  is  very  lively,  but  Louisa  is  very  timid.  22.  Charles's 
father  is  wise  and  prudent.  23.  Henry's  brother  is  very  rich,  but  he 
is  not  proud.  24.  Julia  and  Mary  are  the  good  friends  of  my  sister. 
25.  Have  you  (any)  wine  in  the  house  ?  26.  We  have  no  wine,  but 
we  have  very  good  beer. 


ADJECTIVES.      FoWa^x'ON^^I^^IIE  FEMININE.  57 


Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  Adjectives  agree  in  Spanish,  as  in  almost  all  other  lan- 
guages, in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  which  they 
qualify. 

Adjectives  ending  in  0  form  their  feminine  by  changing  0 
into  a,  as  : 

Bueno  (m.),  buena  (/.),  good ;        Malo  (m.),  mala  (/.),  had ; 
Alto  (m.),  alta  (/.),  high  ;  etc. 
The  same  rule  applies  to  nouns  having  a  feminine : 

Un  piinadero,  a  baker  ;  una  panadera,  a  {female)  haker,  or  a  baker's  wife. 

Un  criado,  a  (inale)  servant ;  una  criada,  a  {female)  servant. 

Un  tio,  an  uncle  ;  una  tia,  an  aunt. 

Wi  priino,  my  {male)  cousin  ;  mi  prima,  my  (fcDiale)  cousin. 

^li  hermano,  my  brotlier  ;  mi  hermana,  my  sister. 

Un  viudo,  a  widovxr  ;  luia  viuda,  a  widow. 

Un  cocinero,  a  {male)  cook ;  una  cocinera,  a  {female)  cook. 

Observations.  —  Augmentatives  and  Diminutives  ending  in  ete  or  ote 
also  change  the  last  letter  into  a  for  the  feminine : 

Eegordete  {m.),  regordeta  (/.),  small  and  stout ; 
Altote  (m.),  altota  (/.),  very  tall ;  etc. 

2.  Adjectives  ending  in  n  add  an  a  for  the  feminine  : 
Holgazan,  m.,  idle;  holgazana, /.  Haron,  in.,  lazy  ;  harona, /. 

Exceptions.  —  Ruin,  contemptible  ;  comun,  common  ;  and  all  Adjectives 
ending  in  en,  as  j  oven,  young  ;  remain  unchanged. 

3.  Adjectives  referring  to  the  nationality  and  ending  with  a 
consonant  add  a  for  the  feminine  : 

Frances,  m.,  French;  francesa, /. 

Ingles,  m.,  English;  inglesa, /. 

Aleman,  m.,  German;  alemana, /. 

Irlandes,  m.,  Irish;  irlandesa, /. 

Espanol,  ni.,  A^jmnish ;  espanola, /. 

Note.  —  Among  the  Adjectives  of  this  last  class,  some  are  found  that 
terminate  in  a,  and  do  not  undergo  any  change  in  the  feminine,  as  peraa, 
Persian;  moscovita,  Moscovite ;  etc. 


58  LESSON    8. 

4*    Adjectives  ending  in  or  also  add  a  for  the  feminine  : 

Trabajador,  m.,  indicstriouSy  diligent;        trabajadora, /. 
Traidor,  111.,         treacherous;  traidora, /. 

Mayor,  greater;  menor,  smaller ;  and  a  few  others,  like  anterior,  ante- 
rior; etc.,  form  an  exception  to  this  rule. 

Note.  —  Most  of  the  Adjectives  ending  in  or  are  often  used  substan- 
tively : 

Un  trabajador  (m.),  una  trabajadora  (/.),  a  worker  ; 
Un  traidor,  a  traitor;  una  traidora,  a  traitress. 

5«    Those  Adjectives  which  end  in  the  masculine  with  any 
other  letter  do  not  change  in  the  feminine  : 

Un  hombre  cortes,  a  polite  man  ;  una  mujer  cortes,  a  polite  woman. 
Un  hombre  grave,  a  grave  man  ;  una  materia  grave,  a  grave  matter. 
El  trabajo  es  facil,  the  work  is  easy  ;  la  cosa  es  facil,  the  thing  is  easy. 

6*    When  an  Adjective  relates  to  two  or  more  nouns  in  the 
singular,  it  must  be  put  in  the  plural : 

El  padre  y  el  hijo  son  buenos.         The  father  and  son  are  good. 

An  Adjective  qualifying  two  or  more  nouns  of  different  gen- 
ders is  put  in  the  masculine  plural : 

El  padre  y  la  madre  son  ricos,        The  father  and  mother  are  rich. 

Observation.  —  When,  however,  the  Adjective  stands  near  a  feminine 
noun  in  the  plural  it  must  agree  with  the  feminine  noun,  but  such  con- 
structions must  be  avoided  as  much  as  possible,  and  it  is  preferable  to 
qualify  each  noun  by  an  Adjective  having  a  corresponding  meaning,  or 
select  an  Adjective  having  but  one  termination  for  both  genders  : 
Los  caudales  y  la  hacienda  eran  The  capital  and  the  property  were 

grandes,  large. 

El  general  tiene  un   valor  mara-  The  general  has  a  wonderful  hrav- 

villoso  y  una  constancia  por-  ery  and  persistence  (is  wonder- 

tentosa,  fully  brave  and  persistent). 

!•    Adjectives  are  often  used  substantively  either  in  the  sin- 
gular or  plural  : 

El  bueno  y  el  malo,  The  good  and  the  bad  one. 

Los  ricos  y  los  pobres,  T?ie  rich  and  the  poor. 


PLACE   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


59 


Leccion  IX. 


Lesson  IX. 


PLACE  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

Ejemplos.  Examples. 

Adjectives  preceding  the  Noun. 


Mateo  es  un  buen  muchacho. 

Carolina  es  una  hermosa  muchacha. 

i  Que  escelente  vino  ! 

I  Donde  esta  la  joven  Agata  ? 

Tengo  un  bonito  libro. 

El  pulpero  tiene  dulce  miel. 

Mi  amigo  tiene  un  gran  caballo. 

Domingo  es  mi  grande  amigo. 


Matthew  is  a  good  boy. 
Caroline  is  a  handsome  girl. 
What  an  excellent  wine  ! 
Where  is  young  Agatha  ? 
I  have  a  pretty  book. 
The  grocer  has  sweet  honey. 
My  friend  has  a  famous  horse,  m. 
Dominic  is  my  great  (good)  friend. 


Adjectives  following  the  Noun. 


Tenemos  un  caballo  bianco. 

Tengo  un  libro  frances. 

Aprendo  la  lengua  espanola. 

Tengo  una  mesa  redonda. 

El  juez  es  un  hombre  justo. 

Vivo  en  la  calle  nueva. 

Pedro  es  un  hombre  viejo. 

Octavio  es  un  muchacho  feo. 

El  comerciante  es  un  hombre  muy  rico. 


We  have  a  white  horse. 

I  have  a  French  book. 

I  learn  the  Spanish  language. 

I  have  a  round  table. 

The-judge  is  a  just  man. 

I  live  in  the  new  street. 

Peter  is  an  old  man. 

Octavius  is  a  homely  boy. 

The  merchant  is  a  very  rich  man. 


Vocabulario. 
El  animal,  the  animal. 
El  buque,  the  ship,  the  vessel. 
El  capitan,  the  captain. 
El  disciptilo,  the  pupil. 
Eli)ficial,  the  officer. 
El  pano,  the  cloth. 
El  puerto,  the  port. 
El  rio,  the  river. 
El  sastre,  the  tailor. 
El  tomo,  the  volume. 
La  escuela,  the  school. 
La  historia,  the  history. 
La  rosa,  the  rose. 
La  vaca,  the  cow. 
Azul,  hlv^. 


Vocabulary. 
Blanco,  white. 

Buenos  dias,  good  morning,  good  day. 
Colorado,  red. 
Dichoso,  happy. 
Era,  loas. 

Escelente,  excellent. 
Espanol,  Spanish,  Spaniard. 
Ingla terra,  England. 
Inteligente,  intelligent, 
Mismo,  same. 
Obediente,  obedient. 
Primero,  first. 
Huso,  Russian. 
Si,  if. 
tltil,  useful. 


60  LESSON    9. 

Exercise  17. 

1.  [  Tien  en  listed  es  una  vaca?  2.  Si,  tenemos  una  vaca  negra  y 
blanca.  3.  El  peiro  es  un  animal  fiel  y  util.  4.  Don  Juan  es  un 
hombre  muy  amable.  5.  Los  dos  ninos  estan  enfernios,  la  pobre 
madre  esta  muy  triste.  6.  La  seiiora  con  el  traje  negro  es  la  hermana 
del  oficial  ingles.  7.  i  Quiere  V.  pan  bianco  6  pan  negro  ?  8.  No  qui- 
ero  pan.  9.  El  hijo  del  general  es  un  joven  inteligente.  10.  [  Sabe 
V.  si  el  comerciante  tiene  paiio  azul?  11.  El  no  tiene  paiio  azul, 
pero  tiene  escelente  pano  negro.  12.  [  Tiene  V.  el  primer  tonio  de  la 
Historia  de  Inglaterra  ?  13.  Tengo  los  dos  primeros  tomos.  14.  El 
hermano  de  Maria  es  nmy  rico,  tiene  dos  casas  grandes  y  bermosas 
en  la  calle  nueva.  15.  i  Donde  esta  el  buque  ruso  ?  16.  Esta  en 
el  puerto  nuevo.  17.  [Buenos  dias,  seiiora,  donde  esta  la  criada? 
18.  Esta  en  el  cuarto  grande.  19.  [  Quien  es  el  primer  discipulo  de 
la  escuela?  20.  Yo  no  se  quien  es  el  primero.  21.  El  sastre  tiene 
un  hijo  ciego.  22.  El  capitan  es  un  buen  soldado.  23.  El  padre  de 
Enrique  es  dichoso,  porque  tiene  un  bijo  obediente.  24.  Napoleon 
era  un  gran  general.  25.  i  Donde  esta  el  Rio  Colorado  ?  26.  Yo 
no  se. 

Exercise  18. 

1.  The  English  drink  (hehen)  beer,  good  wine,  and  excellent  tea. 
2.  We  have  good  friends  in  the  city.  3.  Mary's  mother  is  already  an 
old  woman.  4.  The  general  is  a  prudent  soldier.  5.  The  two  Eng- 
lish captains  have  large  ships.  6.  We  have  white  roses  in  the  gar- 
den. 7.  The  children  are  sick  because  they  eat  (comen)  green  apples. 
8.  Louisa's  mother  is  an  unhappy  woman.  9.  The  butcher  has  good 
meat  to-day.  10.  Have  you  French  or  English  money?  11.  We 
have  neither  French  nor  English  money,  we  have  American  gold. 
12.  The  lesson  of  to-day  is  a  difficult  lesson.     13.  Paris  is  a  large  city. 

14.  The  count  is  a  proud  man,  but  the  countess  is  an  amiable  lady. 

15.  The  island  of  Cuba  is  a  line  island.  16.  Do  you  sell  French 
wines?  17.  I  sell  French  and  Spanish  wines.  18.  My  uncle  has  a 
fine  estate  in  Cuba.  19.  The  sons  and  daughters  of  the  merchant  are 
small.  20.  Who  is  the  tall  gentleman  in  the  garden  ?  21.  The  gen- 
tleman with  the  white  hat  is  my  uncle.  22.  Are  you  the  brother  of 
the  Russian  captain  ?  23.  No,  sir,  I  am  the  cousin  of  the  German 
captain.  24.  Has  the  captain  a  new  ship  ?  25.  No,  sir,  he  has  the 
same  old  ship.- 


PLACE   OF  ADJECTIVES.  61 


Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  Adject'ives  in  Spanish,  as  in  French,  are  either  placed 
before  the  noun  which  they  qualify,  or  after  it ;  but  not  in  such 
a  way  as  to  leave  their  position  to  the  discretion  of  the  speaker 
or  writer.  There  are  many  cases,  in  fact,  where  the  adjective 
could  not  be  placed  before  the  noun.  It  is  not  always  possible 
to  give  a  satisfactory  reason  why  certain  adjectives  should  some- 
times precede,  and  at  other  times  follow  the  noun ;  but,  gener- 
ally, they  appear  to  be  more  emphatic  when  placed  before  the 
noun.  The  Spaniards  consult  taste,  elegance,  and  harmony  in 
their  collocation,  whilst  perfection  in  this  regard  can  only  be 
acquired  by  the  reading  of  good  authors. 

The  following  rules  may,  however,  be  followed  in  most  cases. 

2t    Adjectives  generally  placed  before  the  noun  are  : 

1.  The  numeral  Adjectives  when  accompanied  by  the  article  : 
El  primer  tomo,  the  first  volume.         La  tercera  casa,  the  third  house. 

2.  Adjectives  expressing  a  quality  pertaining  to  the  very 
nature  of  the  noun  which  they  qualify : 

Un  poderoso  emperador,         A  2micerful  emperor. 
Un  rico  banquero,  A  rich  hanker. 

3.  Adjectives  when  taken  figuratively  : 

Un  delicioso  viaje,         A  delightful  journey, 

4.  Adjectives  used  in  exclamatory  sentences  : 

j  Admirable  accion  !         Admirable  action  ! 

5.  Adjectives  used  emphatically  : 

Gran  valor  ha  sido  el  de  Pedro,         Peter's  valor  has  been  great. 

6.  Adjectives  expressing  a  special  and  essential  property  : 

Dulce  miel,  sweet  honey.         Amarga  adelfa,  hitter  oleander. 

Note.  —  Should  we  say  miel  dulce,  adelfa  amarga,  it  might  imply  that 
there  exist  honey  and  oleander  of  a  different  taste. 


62  LESSON    9. 

Observation.  —  Those  Adjectives  which  are  placed  hefore,  the  noun  may 
generally  be  placed  after  it  without  any  incorrectness,  as  : 

Un  buen  hombre,  or  un  hombre  bueno,  a  good  man. 

Una  casa  hemiosa,  or  una  hermosa  casa,  a  fine  house  ;  etc. 

There  are  cases,  however,  when  the  Adjectives  have  different  meanings 
according  to  their  place  hefore  or  after  the  noun  : 
Una  cierta  cosa,  A  certain  thing. 

Una  cosa  cierta,  A  sure  thing. 

Un  pobre  hombre,      A  poor  man  (poor  in  wits). 
Un  hombre  pobre,      A  poor  man  (poor  in  money). 

3«    In  most  other  cases  Adjectives  are  placed  after  the  noun. 
They  are  more  specially  so  : 

1.  When  the.  Adjective  denotes  color ,  nationality,  shape,  and 
taste: 

Un  caballo  bianco,  a  white  horse.         Un  libro  ingles,  an  English  hook. 
Una  mesa  redonda,  a  round  tahle.        Vino  agrio,  sour  ivine. 

2.  When  the  Adjective  has  the  form  of  the  Past  Participle 

of  a  verb : 

Una  ventana  cerrada,         A  closed  window, 
Una  puerta  abierta,  An  open  door. 

3.  Wlien  the  Adjective  may  be  used  substantively : 

Un  hombre  justo,  |  ^  .^^^  ^^^         Un  hombre  malvado,  )  ^  ^  .^^^^  ^^^ 
Un  justo,  )  Un  malvado,  ) 

4.  When  the  Adjective  does  not  express  a  special  or  essential 
property  pertaining  to  the  noun  : 

Una  calle  ancha,  A  hroad  street. 

Un  hombre  feo.  An  ugly  man. 

Una  casa  vieja,  An  old  house. 

4«    When  two  or  more  Adjectives  qualify  the  same  noun,  it  is 
preferable  to  place  them  after  the  noun  : 

Es  un  hombre  sabio,  justo  y  pode-        He  is  a  wise,  just,  and  powerful 
roso,  man. 

5«    The  Spaniards  use  the  same  word  to  designate  Englishman 
and  English,  Frenchman  and  French,  Spaniard  and  Spanish,  etc.; 


PLACE   OF   ADJECTIVES.  63 

but  they  write  the  word  with  a  capital  letter  when  used  substan- 
tively, and  with  a  small  letter  in  other  cases  : 

Un  Espanol,  a  Spaniard  ;         un  libro  espauol,  a  SiJanish  hook. 
Un  Ingles,  an  Englishman  ;     un  buque  ingles,  an  EnglisJi  ship. 

0*  The  Spaniards  use  instead  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.,  Don,  m.,  and 
Dona,/.,  before  Christian  names,  and  el  Senor,  m.,  la  Senora,/., 

before  family  names  : 

Don  Juan,  Mr.  John.  El  Senor  Hernandez,  Mr.  Hernandez. 

Doha  Maria,  Mrs.  Mary.         La  Senora  Smith,  Mrs.  Smith. 
El  S°'-  D°*  Carlos  Marty,  Mr.  Charles  Marty. 

Remarks  on  certain  Adjectives.  —  1.  Alguno,  any  one,  anybody, 
some  one,  somebody ;  bueno,  good ;  malo,  bad,  ill ;  uinguno,  none,  no  one, 
nobody;  postrero,  last;  primero,  fii^st ;  tercerd,i  third;  uno,  a,  an,  one; 
drop  the  o  before  a  masculine  noun  in  the  singular  : 

Buen  amo,  good  master.  El  primer  hombre,  the  first  man. 

Ningun  libro,  no  book.  Un  habil  medico,  a  skillful  phijsician  ;  etc. 

But  if  they  come  after  the  noun,  they  preserve  the  o  : 

Un  hombre  malo,  a  bad  man.         Libro  tercero,  third  book  ;  etc. 

The  0  is  also  preserved  whenever  the  noun  referring  to  the  Adjective  is 
not  expressed  : 

Es  bueno,  ffe  is  good. 

'  El  primero  de  todos.  The  first  of  all. 

Uno  de  estos  sehores,         One  of  these  gentlemen;  etc. 

2.  Santo,  saint,  drops  the  last  syllable  before  proper  names  of  saints  : 

San  Pedro,  St.  Peter  ;         San  Juan,  St.  John  ;  etc. 

Observation.  —The  names  Domingo,  Dominic ;  Tomas,  Thomas ;  Tome, 
Torribio,  are  excepted  from  this  rule  ;  we  say,  therefore, 

Santo  Domingo,  >S'^.  Dominic  ;        Santo  Tomas,  St.  Thomas. 

However,  when  speaking  of  the  island  of  St.  Thomas,  we  say,  la  isla  de 
san  Tomas,  without  any  special  reason  for  this  deviation. 

3.  Grande  drops  the  last  syllable  before  a  masculine  noun  beginning 

1  Tercero,  third,  may  preserve  the  o  in  all  cases,  and  we  may  say  :  el 
tercer  dia,  or  el  tercero  dia,  the  third  day. 


64 


LESSON   10. 


with  a  consonant,  whenever  it  means  great  in  merit  or  qualities,  celebrated 

or  famous : 

Una  gran  mujer,  A  distinguished  woman, 

Un  gran  poeta,  A  great  2>oet. 

Un  gran  caballo,  An  excellent  or  f<^mous  horse. 

Note.  —  If  the  noun  begins  with  a  vowel -or  an  h,  grande  or  gran  may- 
be used  indisciiminately. 

Grande  preserves  the  last  syllable  if  it  only  expresses  extent  or  dimension, 
and  is  then  placed  preferably  after  the  noun  : 

Una  casa  grande,  a  large  house.         Un  campo  grande,  a  large  field. 
El  teatro  grande  de  Burdeos  es         Tlie  large  theatre  in  Bordeaux  is  a 
un  gran  teatro,  splendid  theatre. 


Leccion  X. 


Lesson  X. 


DIMINUTIVE  AND  AUGMENTATIVE  NOUNS. 


Ejemplos. 

Juanito  tiene  un  perrito. 

i  Que  bonita  casita  ! 

I  Donde  esta  mi  hermanita  ? 

Esta  con  la  mujercita. 

El  caballito.de  mi  hermanito  es  un 

bonito  animalito. 
Dos  lamparitas  ardian  en  el  cuar- 

tito. 
Hay  pececitos  en  el  rio. 
El  pobrecito  esta  malo. 
El  liombrecillo  quiere  dinero. 
Yo  no  quiero  ese  perrillo. 
Mi  mesa  es  muy  chiquita. 
Tenemos  un  jardincito  en  el  cam- 

El    sehorito   y   la    senorita    estan 

aqui. 
Eniique   es   un  muchachon  y  su 

padre  un  hombronazo. 
La  hermana  de  Pedro  es  una  mu- 

jerona. 


Examples. 

Johnny  has  a  little  dog. 

What  a  pretty  little  house  ! 

Where  is  my  little  sister  ? 

She  is  with  the  little  woman. 

My  little  brother's  little  horse  is  a 
pretty  little  animal. 

Two  small  lamps  were  burning  in  the 
little  room. 

There  are  little  fishes  in  the  river. 

The  poor  little  fellow  is  sick. 

The  miserable  little  man  wantsmoney. 

I  don't  wish  that  ugly  little  dog. 

My  table  is  very  small. 

We  have  a  little  garden  in  the  coun- 
try. 

The  young  gentleman  and  the  young 
lady  are  here. 

Henry  is  a  big  itit  boy  and  his  father 
a  big  strong  man. 

Peter's  sister  is  a  big  stout  woman. 


DIMINUTIVE   AND   AUGMENTATIVE  NOUNS. 


Vocabulario. 

El  autor,  the  author. 

El  bastonazo,  the  blow  (with  a  stick). 

El  gusto,  the  pleasure. 

El  ladron,  the  thief. 

El  pajaro,  the  bird. 

El  patio,  the  yard. 

El  picaro,  the  rogue. 

El  puei)lo,  the  town,  milage. 

El  ricachon,  the  very  rich  man. 

El  talento,  the  talent. 

Los  contomos,  the  suburbs. 

La  boca,  the  mouth. 

La  callejuela,  the  lane. 

La  cara,  the  face. 

La  cruz,  the  cross. 


Vocabulary. 
La  especulacion,  the  speculation. 
La  flor,  the  jiower. 
La  legua,  the  league. 
La  mano,  the  hand. 
La  pelea,  the  fight. 
La  pieza,  the  piece. 

La  punalada,  the  stab  (with  a  poniard), 
Aqui,  here. 
Arriba,  up  stairs. 
Chiquito,  little. 
Ignorante,  ignorant. 
Solo,  alone. 
Su,  his,  her. 
Todo,  all. 
Vive,  lives. 


Exercise  19. 

1.  La  hermanita  de  Carlos  esta  mala.  2.  i  Que  tiene  el  muchachito  ? 
3.  El  no  tiene  nada.  4.  El  conierciante  tiene  una  casita  de  campo  en 
los  contornos  de  la  ciudad.  5.  i  Donde  esta  Juanito  ?  6.  Esta  en  el 
jardin  con  su  amiguito.  7.  i  Donde  estan  las  dos  senoritas  ?  8.  Estan 
en  el  cuartito  arriba.  9.  i  Estaba  V.  {were  you)  solo  en  el  cuarto  ? 
10.  Si,  senor,  yo  estaba  (i/;as)  solito.  11.  [  Quien  es  el  hombrecito  ? 
12.  Es  el  hermano  de  Luisita.  13.  Maria  tiene  una  crucecita  de  oro. 
14.  Los  Urboles  del  jardin  son  todavia  chiquititos.  15.  El  amigo  de 
Enrique  es  un  picaron.  16.  Y  Enrique  es  un  ladronzuelo.  17.  El 
perro  recibio  {received)  dos  bastonazos.  18.  Mi  aniigo  recibio  dos 
puiialadas  en  la  pelea.  19.  El  general  es  un  hombrachon.  20.  Los 
dos  jovencitos  son  primos.  21.  Tenemos  tres  pajaritos  en  el  jardin. 
22.  I  Quiere  V.  un  pedazito  de  carne  ?  23.  Si,  senor,  con  mucho 
gusto.  24.  Pedro  vive  en  una  callejuela  de  la  ciudad.  25.  ;  Pon^ue 
no  tiene  el  ricachon  una  casa  grande  ?  26.  Porque  tiene  todo  su  di- 
nero  en  grandes  especulaciones.  27.  La  hermana  del  panadero  es  una 
niujercilla  muy  fea.     28.  Los  pollitos  estan  en  el  patio. 

Exercise  20. 

1.  The  little  boy  and  the  little  girl  are  sick.     2.  The  little    tailor 
is  very  ignorant.     3.  The  brothers  Ramirez  have  two  small  houses  in 
the  city.     4.  Who  is  in  the  little  garden?     5.  Louisa  and  my  little 
5 


66  LESSON    10. 

friend.  6.  The  merchant's  sons  have  two  small  horses.  7.  The  little 
child  has  a  pretty  little  face.  8.  There  are  (hay)  many  birds  on  (en) 
the  small  island.  9.  With  whom  were  you  in  Paris  ?  10.  With  my- 
little  brother.  11.  Charles  has  an  ugly  little  dog.  12.  The  general's 
brother  is  a  very  rich  man.  13.  Little  John  and  little  Louisa  are  in 
the  country  now  (desde)  two  days.  14.  Here  is  a  pretty  little  book 
for  you.  15.  What  a  pretty  little  flower  !  16.  Is  Henry  an  author? 
17.  Yes,  but  a  miserable  author  without  talent.  18.  Mary  has  a 
pretty  little  mouth  and  pretty  little  hands.  19.  Julia  is  a  pretty 
young  lady.  20.  The  baker  is  a  big  stout  man,  but  his  sister  is  a 
very  small  woman.  21.  My  aunt  has  a  very,  very  small  dog.  22.  The 
banker's  children  are  yet  very  small.  23.  Where  do  you  live  now  ? 
24.  In  a  yery  pretty  little  town  not  far  from  here.  25.  Charles  re- 
ceived (recibio)  a  short  letter  from  his  friend.  26.  The  captain  of  the 
small  vessel  is  an  ugly  little  man.  27.  Have  you  a  table  in  your 
room?     28.  Yes,  sir,  I  have  a  very  small  table. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  Spanish  language  abounds  in  Diminutives  and  Au^- 
mentatives. 

2.  The  Diminutives  serve  to  decrease  or  soften  the  significa- 
tion of  the  word  from  which  they  are  derived. 

Those  most  in  use  end  in  ico,  illo,  cillo,  ito,  cito,  uelo,  ejo, 
and  zuelo,  for  the  masculine,  as  :  hombrecico,  hombrecillo,  hom- 
brecito,  hombrezuelo,  little  man;  and  in  ica,  ilia,  cilia,  ita, 
cita,  zuela,  eta,  eja,  for  the  feminine,  as :  mujercilla,  mujer- 
cita,  mujercica,  mujerzuela,  little  woman ;  etc. 

1.  Diminutives  ending  in  ZUelo  always  denote  contempt  or 
irony. 

2.  Diminutives  ending  in  cillo  and  illo  often  express  contempt, 
pity,  or  ugliness ;  while  those  in  ito  generally  express  affection, 
gentleness,  or  beauty : 

Mujercilla,  Contemptible  little  woman. 

Pobrecillo,  Poor  little  fellow. 

Hijito  mio,  My  dear  little  son. 

Pobrecito,  Poor  good  little  fellow. 


DIMINUTIVE   AND   AUGMENTATIVE  NOUNS.  67 

Note.  —  Some  Spanish  words  have  the  termination  of  the  diminutive, 
without  being  diminutive,  as  : 

Acerico,  needle-cushion.         Anzuelo,  fish-hook,  etc. 

3.  The  Diminutives  ito,  ita,  may  be  used  with  different  parts 
of  speech  to  give  a  special  expression  to  the  words  : 

Vengo  soHto,         /  come  quite  alone. 

4.  Diminutives  in  ete,  ejo,  etc.,  are  comparatively  little  used. 

3.  The  Augmentatives  serve  to  increase  the  signification  of  the 
words  from  which  they  are  derived.  They  end  in  on,  achon, 
azo,  onazo,  or  ote  for  the  masculine ;  and  in  ona,  aza,  onaza,  or 

ota  for  the  feminine,  as  : 

Homhron,  hombrachon,  hombronazo  (from  homhrCy  man),  bigj  strong  'man. 
Grandon,  grand  ote,  grandazo,  grandonazo  (from  grande,  large),  very  large, 
Mujerona,  mujeraza,  mujeronaza  (from  mujer,  woman),  large,  strong  woman, 

1.  There  are  many  words,  however,  ending  in  azo,  which  ex- 
press an  action,  motion,  or  result,  and  are,  therefore,  not  Aug- 
mentatives : 

Fusil,  rifle,  gun  ;        fusilazo,  a  shot  from  a  rifle. 
Pistola,  'pistol ;  pistoletazo,  a  shot  from  a  pistol. 

Canon,  gun  ;  canonazo,  a  shot  from  a  gun. 

2,  Words  which  express  a  blow  struck  with  a  blunt  instrument 
or  object  also  end  in  azo,  as  bastonazo  or  garrotazo,  bloiv  with  a 
stick ;  while  those  expressing  a  wound  made  by  a  sharp  instru- 
ment or  weapon  end  in  ada,  as  : 

Punalada,  stab  with  a  dagger  ;        lanzada,  a  wound  frmn  a  lance  ;  etc. 

Exceptions.  —  Hacha,  ax;  machete,  cutlass;  and  sable,  saber ;  form, 
however,  hachazo,  machetazo,  and  sablazo.  Lanzazo,  from  lanza,  lance, 
is  also  used,  etc. 

4.  Formation  of  Diminutives  and  Augmentatives.  —  1. 
Words  ending  in  0  or  a  drop  the  last  letter  and  add  ito,  ita ; 
ico,  ica ;  illo,  ilia ;  according  to  their  gender  : 

Herman-ito,  herman-ico,  herman-illo,  little  brother ;  from  hermano,  brother. 
Cas-ita,  cas-ica,  cas-illa,  little  house ;  from  casa,  hmcse. 


68  LESSON    10. 

Note.  — Words  ending  in  go,  besides  dropping  the  o,  insert  a  u  after 
the  g  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  this  letter  : 

Un  amigo,  a  friend;        un  amiguito,  a  little  frieind. 
Those  ending  in  co  change  the  c  into  qu,  also  to  preserve  the  hard  sound 
of  the  c  : 

Un  bareo,  a  ship ;        un  barquito,  a  little  ship. 

A  few  words  ending  in  o  and  a,  after  dropping  the  last  letter,  add,  how- 
ever, the  termination  ecico,  ecillo,  etc.  : 

Un  huevo,  an  egg;  un  huevecillo,  o.  small  egg. 

Una  mano,  a  hand;        una  manecita,  a  sinall  Imnd. 

2.  Monosyllables  ending  with  a  consonant  form  their  Dimin- 
utive by  adding  ecito,  ecico,  ecillo,  or  ezuelo : 

Una  flor,  a  floiver  ;  una  fiorecita,  a  little  flower. 

Una  cruz,  a  cross ;  una  crucecita,  a  little  cross. 

Un  pez,  a  fish  ;  un  pececito,  a  little  fish. 

Un  rey,  a  king  ;  un  reyezuelo,  a  king  (with  a  small  kingdom). 

Note.  —  Observe  that  cruz  and  pez  change  the  z  into  c. 

3.  Words  of  two  or  more  syllables  ending  with  a  consonant 
form  their  Diminutive  by  adding  ito,  ico,  illo,  ejo : 

Un  papel,  a  paper  ;         un  papelito,  a  small  paper. 
Un  reloj,  a  watch  ;  un  relojito,  a  small  watch. 

4.  Words  of  two  syllables  ending  Avith  an  e,  and  those  of 
several  syllables  ending  with  an  n  or  a  Z,  add  cito,  cico,  ciUo, 
or  zuelo : 

Un  sastre,  a  tailor  ;  un  sastrecillo,  a  little  tailor. 

Una  nube,  a  cloud  ;  una  nubecilla,  a  little  cloud. 

Un  capitan,  a  captain;  un  capitancillo,  a  little  captain. 

Un  autor,  an  author  ;  un  autorzuelo,  an  insignificant  author, 

Una  mujer,  a  woman;  una  mujercita,  a  little  woman. 

Exceptions.  —  Juanito,  from  Juan,  John;  volcanejo,  from  volcan,  vol- 
cano; and  all  words  ending  in  in,  form  an  exception  to  this  rule,  the 
latter  adding  ito,  etc.     Thus  : 

Jardin,  gardeyi ;        ruin,  worthless. 
Rocin,  jade  ;  serafin,  seraph. 

form  in  the  Diminutive  jardinito,  rocinito,  ruinito,  and  serafinito.    Jar- 
dincito  is,  however,  often  used. 


DIMINUTIVES   AND   AUGMENTATIVES.  69 

5.  Diminutives  may  be  yet  decreased  in  the  following  way  : 

From  cliico,  small :  clu(|iiillo  or  chiquito,  chiquitillo,  cliiquitito,  chiqui- 
tuelo,  chiquitilluelo,  ehiquitillito,  chiquirritin,  chiquimtito,  cMquirritillo, 
chiquirrituelo,  etc. 

The  EngHsh  would  say  in  such  cases,  very^  very  small. 

Even  Augmentatives  may  be  decreased  in  the  same  way  ; 
Picaron,  big  rogue  ;        picaronzillo  or  picaronzuelo,  little  rogue;  etc. 

6.  Many  Diminutives  as  well  as  Augmentatives  drop  or  pre- 
serve the  letter  i  in  the  diphthong  ie : 

Un  ciego,  a  blind  mwrni ;      un  cieguecillo  or  ceguecillo,  a  little  blind  man. 
Un  diente,  a  tooth  ;  un  dientecillo  or  dentecillo,  a  small  tooth. 

Una  piedra,  a  stone  ;  una  piedrezuela  or  pedrezuela,  a  small  stone. 

7.  Other  words  change  the  diphthong  ue  into  o  or  remain 
unchanged  : 

Un  huey,  an  ox;  un  bueyecillo  or  buyecillo,  a  small  ox. 

Un  hueso,  a  bone  ;        un  huesecillo  or  osecillo,  a  small  bone. 

8.  There  are  words  in  Spanish  with  Diminutive  and  Augmen- 
tative terminations,  which  may  have  been  used  formerly  as  such, 
but  which  at  present  have  a  determined  signification : 

Maton,  bravo,  cut-throat.  IsHlla,  side. 

Cegato,  short-sighted.  Peluquin,  wig. 

Espadin,  sword  of  the  state  ;  etc.,  etc. 

9.  Augmentatives  are  formed  by  adding  the  terminations  given 
in  Eule  2  to  the  word,  when  the  same  ends  with  a  consonant : 

Leon,  lion;         leonazo,  big  lion  ;  etc. 

When  the  words  end,  however,  with  a  vowel,  the  latter  is 
dropped  before  adding  the  given  termination  : 

Gigante,  giant  ;        gigantazo,  large  giant. 
Libro,  book ;  librote,  large  book. 

General  Observations.  —  The  words  pequeno,  small,  and 
grande,  large,  may  be  used  at  all  times  with  the  noun,  but  in 
many  cases  they  would  not  answer  to  the  genius  of  the  Spanish 
language,  which  would  require  the  Diminutive  or  Augmentative. 
This  is  specially  the  case  with  the  Diminutives. 


70 


LESSON   11. 


The  pronunciation  of  Diminutives  or  Augmentatives  is  gen- 
erally different  from  that  of  the  word  from  which  they  are  de- 
rived, and  the  written  accent  of  the  primitive  word  is  left  out  in 
the  derived  word,  as  : 

Arbol,  tree  ;  arbolito,  small  tree. 

Pajaro,  bird  ;        pajarito,  small  bird  ;  etc. 

5,    Verb  tener,  to  have. 

The  verb  tener  is  often  rendered  in  English  by  to  be  some- 
thing the  matter  : 

I  Que  tiene  V.  ?  What  is  tJie  matter  with  you  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  nada,         Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 


Leccion  XI. 


Lesson  XI. 


ADJECTIVES.    COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE. 
Adjectives  compared  regularly: 

Positive.  Comparative.  .  Superlative. 

lleTmoso y  m.  )^hand-       msiS  hermosOj  ^i  hand-       el  mas  hermoso,  Uhehand- 
Ilermosa,  f.  )  some  ;       mas  hermosa,  )  somer  ;     la  mas  hermosa,  )  somest. 
Prudente,  m.  -i  mas  prudente,  |^  more         el  mas  prudente,  \the  most 

Prudente,  f.  i^  ^  mas  prudente,  );?rMcfc7i^;  la  mas  prudente,  ip-2/(Zc7i^. 

Hico,  m.         )    ^  mas  rico,  )     ,  el  mas  rico,         \  the 

Pica,  f.  )         '        mas  rica,  3  -'     la  mas  rica,         )  richest. 

Utiles,  pi.  useful ;  mas  utiles,  more  useful ;  losmas utiles,  m.  ythe  most 

las  mas  utiles,  f. )  useful. 
mas  facil,  easier  ;  lo  mas  facil,  the  easiest  thing. 


Fiicil,  n.  easy  ; 


Adjectives  compared  irregularly: 


Bueno,  good; 
Malo,  had; 
Grande,  great,  large; 
Pequeno,  small ; 
Bnjo,  low  ; 
Alto,  high  ; 


mejor,  better  ; 

peor,  wm-se  ; 

mayor,  greater,  larger  ; 

menor,  less,  smaller ; 

inferior,  lower  ; 

superior,  higher  ; 


optimo,  best. 

pesimo,  vjorst. 

maxim 0,  greatest,  largest. 

minim o,  smallest. 

infimo,  lowest. 

supremo,  highest. 


ADJECTIVES.      COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE.      71 


Bien,  well ; 
Mai,  hady  badly; 
Poco,  little; 
Mucho,  much; 


Adverbs : 
mejor,  better; 
peor,  worse; 
menos,  less; 
mas,  more; 


lo  mejor,  the  best. 
lo  peor,  the  worst, 
lo  menos,  the  least, 
lo  mas,  the  most. 


Duro,  m. 
Dura, 


Comparative  of  Inferiority 
menos  duro,  )  ^      ^      ,      el  menos  duro. 


►,  m.  )  menos  auro,  \  el 

n      (hard;  _,        •,  \  less  hard;   ■, 

-,  1.     )  '  menos  dura,  )  '    la 


menos  dura,  J'''^'-''^''''^''^- 


Fuertes,  pL  strong ;  menos  fuertes,  less  strong;  los  menos  fuertes,m.  \tlie  least 

las  menos  fuertes,  f.  )  strong. 
Bien,  well ;  menos  bien,  less  well ;      lo  menos  bien,  the  least  well. 

menos  ...  que  ...,         less  ov  fewer  ...  than  ... 
No  tanto,  m — como. ..\not  so  much     no  tantos,  m.  ...como...  ^  not  so  many 
No  tanta,  /.. . . .como. . . )      ...as...  no  tantas,  /. . . . .como. . . )      . ..as. . . 

no  tan. ..como...,         not  so. ..as... 


Comparative  of  Equality: 


Tanto,  m....como...)  tantos,  m. ...como...) 

Tanta,  /. . ...como...  I'*^  mu^h...as...   ^^^^^^^  ^  .  ...como... T*  "'"^Z/-"*- 


tan...  como. 


as... as... 


Cuanto   mas tanto  mas... 

Cuantos  mas tantos  mas... 

Cuanta   mas tanta  mas... 

Cuantas  mas tantas  mas... 

'Cuanto  menos tanto  menos... 

Cuanto  mas tanto  menos. . . 

Cuanto  menos tanto  mas . . . 


'  the  more . . .  the  more . . . 


the  less... the  less... 
the  more... the  less... 
the  less... the  more... 


Ejemplos. 

Carlos  es  rico,  Juan  es  mas  rico  ;  pero 

Enrique  es  el  mas  rico  de  los  tres 

bermanos. 
Luisa  es  mas  joven  que  Maria. 
Paris  es  mas  grande  que  Nueva  York. 
Juan   liabla   bien,    pero   su  bermano 

habla  mejor. 
Soy  mas  vie  jo  que  V. 
Julia  es  la  menos  bonita  de  las  her- 

manas. 


Examples. 
Cbarles  is  rich,  John  is  richer  ; 

but  Henry  is  the  richest  of  the 

three  brothers. 
Louisa  is  younger  than  Mary. 
Paris  is  larger  than  New  York. 
John  speaks  well,  but  his  brother 

speaks  better. 
I  am  older  than  you. 
Julia  is  the  less   pretty  of  the 

sisters. 


72 


LESSON   11. 


Tenemos  menos  dinero  que  el. 
No  tengo  tanto  tiempo  como  V. 
Ellas  no  tieuen  tantas  amigas  como 

nosotras. 
Yo  no  hablo  tan  bien  como  V. 
El  medico  no  es  tan  viejo  como  el 

abogado. 
Soy  tan  grande  como  V. 
Tengo  tantas  plumas  como  lapices. 
Cuanto  mas  virtuosos  son  los  hombres, 

tanto  mas  felices  son. 
Cuanto  mas  sale,  tanto  menos  estu- 

dia. 
Cuantos  mas  amigos  tenga  Y.  tanto 

mas  poderoso  sera. 


We  have  less  money  than  he. 
I  have  not  as  much  time  as  you. 
They  have  not  so  many  friends 

as  we. 
I  do  not  speak  as  well  as  you. 
The  physician  is  not  so  old  as 

the  lawyer. 
I  am  as  tall  as  you. 
I  have  as  many  pens  as  pencils. 
The  more  virtuous  men  are,  the 

happier  they  are. 
The  more  he  goes  out  the  less  he 

learns. 
The  more  friends  you  have  the 

more  powerful  you  will  be. 


Vocabulario. 
El  amo,  the  master. 
El  banquero,  the  hanker. 
El  merito,  the  merit. 
El  regimiento,  the  regiment. 
La  clase,  the  class. 
La  suerte,  the  hick. 
La  escuela,  the  school. 
La  fruta,  the  fruit. 
La  parte,  the  part. 


Vocabulary. 


Atento,  attentive . 
Deme  V.,  give  me. 
Dulce,  sioeet. 
Eduardo,  Edward. 
Estudioso,  studious. 
Felipe,  Philip. 
Fresco,  cool. 
Frio,  cold. 
Fuerte,  strong. 


Gana,  earns. 
Gasta,  spends. 
Habla,  speaks. 
Otro,  other. 
Pasado,  past,  last. 
Soberbio,  haughty. 
Temprano,  early. 
T  onto,  foolish. 
Todo,  all. 


Exercise  21. 

1.  Carlos  es  mas  rico  y  Felipe  mas  pobre  que  Juan.  2.  El  hijo  es 
mas  joven  que  la  hija.  3.  El  amo  no  tiene  tantos  amigos  como  el 
criado.  4.  El  hermano  es  tan  habil  como  la  hermana,  y  la  madre  no 
menos  que  el  padre.  5.  El  tiene  mas  suerte  que  merito.  6.  El  prin- 
cipe  no  es  tan  soberbio  como  el  conde.  7.  El  comerciante  no  tiene 
tanto  dinero  como  el  banquero,  pero  tiene  mas  amigos  que  aquel 
(the  latter).  8.  Mi  hermano  es  mas  estudioso  y  mas  atento  que  yo. 
9.  ^  Tiene  y.  un  buen  cuarto  ?  10.  Tengo  el  cuarto  mas  frio  en  la 
casa.  11.  Tenemos  la  casa  mas  grande  de  la  ciudad.  12.  Maria  es 
mas  amable  que  Luisa.  13.  Julia  es  menos  atenta  que  mi  hermana. 
14.  Mi  amigo  tiene  la  casa  mas  hermosa  de  la  calle.  15.  Deme  V. 
algo  mejor.     16.  No  tengo  nada  mejor.     17.  Eduardo  es  mas  peque- 


ADJECTIVES.      COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE.      73 

no  que  su  hermano,  pero  es  mas  fuerte  que  el.  18.  Maria  es  la  mejor 
amiga  de  mi  hermana.  19.  Carlos  y  Enrique  son  los  mas  grandes, 
pero  los  menos  atentos  de  la  clase.  20.  Cuanto  menos  dinero  gana, 
tan  to  mas  gasta.  21.  ^  Es  la  hija  tan  grande  como  el  padre  ?  22.  Es 
menos  grande  que  el  padre,  pero  es  mas  grande  que  la  madre.  23.  La 
liija  no  es  tan  amable  como  la  madre.  24.  Las  manzanas  no  son 
menos  dulces  que  las  peras.  25.  El  hermano  de  Felipe  es  el  hombre 
mas  rico  de  la  ciudad.  26.  [  Habla  V.  espanol  tan  bien  como  su  her- 
mano ]    27.  El  habla  mejor  que  yo. 

Exercise  22. 

1.  The  more  money  he  earns  the  less  he  spends.  2.  Charles  is  a 
bad  boy,  but  Henry  is  the  worst  boy  in  the  school.  3.  The  son  is  as 
rich  as  the  father  ;  he  has  four  houses  in  the  best  part  of  the  city. 
4.  Is  Edward  attentive?  5.  He  is  more  attentive  than  the  other 
boys.  6.  Are  you  well  now  1  7.  I  am  better  in  the  country  than  in 
the  city.  8.  My  mother  is  not  so  old  as  my  aunt.  9.  Philip  is  the 
youngest  officer  of  the  regiment.  10.  He  is  not  less  brave  than  the 
old  officers.  11.  I  have  as  many  books  as  my  brother.  12.  The 
small  room  is  cooler  than  the  large  one.  13.  The  green  apples  are 
not  so  sweet  as  the  others.  14.  We  have  not  so  much  fruit  this  (este) 
year  as  last  year.  15.  Henry,  Peter,  and  John  are  three  good  boys, 
but  John  is  the  best  of  alL  16.  The  dog  is  the  most  faithful  of  all 
animals.  17.  Is  your  daughter  young  ?  18.  She  is  younger  than  my 
son.  19.  Have  you  any  flowers  in  the  garden  1  20.  We  have  the 
most  beautiful  flowers  in  the  city.  21.  The  new  theater  is  much 
larger  than  the  old  theater.  22.  The  French  baker  has  the  best  bread 
here.  23.  Will  you  have  a  piece  of  bread  ?  24.  Give  me  the  small- 
est piece.  25.  We  are  less  rich  than  the  English,  but  we  are  as 
happy  as  they.  26.  Do  you  go  out  earlier  than  1 1  27.  Yes,  much 
earlier.     28.  Here  is  the  largest  house  in  the  city. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  Comparative  is  usually  formed  in  Spanish  by  means 
of  adverbs,  and  not,  as  in  many  cases  in  English,  by  a  change 
of  termination  : 

V.  es  mas  rico  que  yo,         You  ore  richer  than  L 


74  LESSON   11. 

2.  The  Comparative  of  Superiority  is  formed  by  placing  mas, 
more,  before  the  Positive,  and  que,  than,  after  it : 

Es  mas  habil  que  su  hermano,         He  is  more  skillful  than  his  brother. 
El  tiene  mas  libros  que  yo,  He  has  more  hooks  than  I. 

3.  The  Comparative  of  Inferiority  is  formed  by  placing  me- 
nos,  less,  fewer,  before  the  Positive,  and  que,  than,  after  it : 

Es  menos  prudente  que  V.,  He  is  less  prudent  than  you. 

Tengo  menos  libros  que  V. ,         /  have  feiccr  hooks  than  you. 

1.  If  the  comparison  refers,  however,  to  a  verb,  de  lo  que  may 
take  the  place  of  que  alone  : 

El  tiene  menos  dinero  de  lo  que  V.  cree,         He  has  less  money  than  you 

think. 

2.  If  the  Comparative  of  Inferiority  is  expressed  by  no. .  .tanto 
(or  tanta,  tantos,  tantas),  or  by  no... tan,  then  the  second  part 
of  the  comparative  is  rendered  by  como : 

El  no  tiene  tanto  dinero  como  V. ,  He  has  not  so  much  money  as  you. 

EUos  no  tienen  tanta  plata  como  nosotros,    7'hey  have  not  as  much  silver  as  ive. 
El  no  es  tan  joven  como  yo,  He  is  not  so  young  as  I  am. 

4.  The  Comparative  of  Equality  is  expressed  by  tanto  (or 
tanta,  tantos,  tantas,  according  to  the  gender  and  number  of 
the  noun)  and  como,  as;  or  by  tan...conio  with  an  Adjective 
or  an  adverb  : 

El  hijo  es  tan  docto  como  el  padre,  The  son  is  as  learned  as  the  fatlier. 

El  obra  con  tanta  prudencia  como         He  acts  with  as  much  jrrudence  as 
valor,  courage. 

1.  Not  less  than  is  always  translated  by  no... menos  que...  : 

Yo  no  trabajo  menos  que  V.,         I  do  not  icork  less  than  you. 

2.  In  regard  to  verbs,  as  much  as  is  rendered  either  by  tanto 
como  or  by  tanto  cuanto : 

Pago  tanto  como  or  tanto  cuanto  vale,         I  pay  as  much  as  it  is  worth. 

Observation.  —  From  the  above  examples  it  will  be  seen  that  menos  is 
always  invariable,  whilst  tanto  and  cuanto  agree  in  gender  and  number 
w-ith  the  noun  to  which  they  refer. 

Cuanto,  the  same  as  tanto,  drops  the  last  syllable  before  an  adjective  or 
adverb  and  becomes  cuan. 


ADJECTIVES.      COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE.      75 

5t    When  several  nouns  or  adjectives  follow  each  other,  it  is 
sufficient  to  use  the  words  mas,  menos,  tan,  or  tantO  before  the 
first  Adjective  only  : 
Enrique  es  mas  joven,  timido  y  ere-         Henry  is  younger,  more  timid,  aiid 

dulo  que  su  hermano,  inore  credulous  than  his  brother. 

Note.  —  It  would  not  be  a  mistake,  however,  to  repeat  the  adverb  be- 
fore every  Adjective  in  order  to  give  more  expression  to  the  sentence. 

6.  The  Superlative  Eelative  which  generally  ends  in  English 
in  est  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  adverbs  mas  or  menos  joined 
to  the  positive  and  accompanied  by  the  definite  article,  a  posses- 
sive adjective,  or  a  personal  pronoun  : 

El  mas  hennoso  hbro  or  )  ^,    ,       ,  ,     , 

-r,,  ,.,  ,  \  The  handsomest  ooofc. 

El  hbro  mas  hermoso,       ) 

El  muchacho  menos  obediente,         TJie  least  obedient  boy. 

Su  mas  interesante  obra,  His  niost  interesting  work. 

Observation.  —  The  Superlative  Eelative  of  those  adjectives  which  are 

placed  before  the  noun  may  come  in  the  Superlative  before  or  after  the 


3  or  )  ' 

I  The  prettiest  hoy. 


El  mas  bonito  muchacho  or  \ 
El  muchacho  mas  bonito, 
But  in  the  case  of  those  adjectives  which  are  placed  after  the  noun,  the 
Superlative  must  also  come  last : 

El  clima  mas  frio.         The  coldest  climate. 

7»  When  the  Superlative  Eelative  is  an  adverb  modifying 
the  verb,  it  is  expressed  by  the  adverbs  mas  or  menos  without 
the  definite  article  : 

^  Que  estrella  luce  mas  ?  Which  star  shines  tlie  most  ? 

Yo  creo  que  Venus  luce  mas,         /  think  Venus  shines  the  most. 
Observation.  — These  Superlative  Relatives  do  not  properly  belong  to 
the  Spanish  language,  although  they  are  always  considered  as  Comparatives, 
and  they  require  a  cultivated  ear  to  be  used  correctly. 

8t  The  Comparativa  of  the  adjectives  bueno,  good ;  malo, 
bad;  grande,  large;  pequeno,  little,  small ;  bajo,  loio ;  alto, 
high  ;  which  is  irregular,  may  also  be  formed  regularly  by  means 
of  the  adverb  mas,  more  : 

Bueno,  good ;  mas  bueno,  better. 

Grande,  large  ;         mas  grande,  larger. 


76  LESSON    12. 

Observation.  —  When  speaking,  however,  of  the  differences  of  ages  of 
two  persons,  mayor  and  menor  must  be  used  : 

La  hija  mayor,  tlw  eldest  daughter  ;         el  hijo  menor,  the  youngest  son. 

Inferior  and  menor  are  never  used  when  speaking  of  physical  size,  that 
is,  of  the  volume  or  size  of  the  objects. 

9,  Cuanto  mas . . .tanto . . . ,  the  more. ..t/ie...;  cuanto  menos . . . 
tanto...,  the  less... the,..,  used  adjectively,  must  agree  in  geudei 
and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer  : 

Cuantas  mas  refiexiones  hace,  tan-         The  more  he  reflects  (he  makes  reflec- 
tas  mas  faltas  comete,  tions)  the  more  mistakes  he  makes. 

Note.  —  Instead  of  cuanto  mas...,  mientras  mas  may  be  used. 


Leccion  XII.  Lesson  XII. 

SUPERLATIVE  ABSOLUTE.    ADJECTIVES  AND  ADVERBS. 

Formation  of  the  Superlative  AbiBoIute* 

Pequeno,  small ;  pequeriisim-o»m.,  a,/,  or  ) 

muy  pequen-o,  m.,  a,/.,  j  ^^-Z  *"^'^"'  *™«"^«- 
Prudente,  ^rw(£e7i^ ;        prudentisimo,  very  pricdent. 
Feliz,  ha'pijy  ;  feHcisimo,  xery  haijpy. 

CorteSy  polite  ;  cortesisimOy  very  polite. 

Adjectives  ending  in  co  and  go: 
Eico,  rich;  riquisimo,  very  rich. 

Vago,  vague ;  vaguisimo,  very  vague. 

Adjectives  ending  in  ble: 
Amable,  amiable;  amabilisimo,  or  muy  amable,  very  amiable. 

Afable,  affable  ;  afabilisimo,  or  muy  afable,  very  affable. 

Adjectives  ending  in  iente: 

Ardiente,  ardent :  ardentisimo,  very  ardent. 

Yervientey  fervent ;  ferventisimo,  very  fervent. 

Luciente,  shining;,  lucenti'simo,  very  shilling, 

Valiente,  brave;  A'alentisimo,  very  brave. 

Adjectives  ending  in  io: 
Limpio,  clean;  limpisimo,  very  clean. 

Sucio,  dirty  ;  sucisimo,  very  dirty. 


ADJECTIVES.      SUPERLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


Irregular  Superlatives. 


Acre,  hitter  ; 
Amigo,  friendly  ; 
Aspero,  raw  ; 
Bueno,  good; 
Fiel,  faithful ; 
Fuerte,  strong  ; 
Antigno,  ancient; 
Benefico,  benevolent ; 
Venefico,  poisonous  ; 
Celebre,  celebrated; 
Integro,  upright; 
Libre,  free  ; 

Magnifico,  magnificent ; 
Misero,  miserable  ; 
Nuevo,  new; 
Pobre,  poor  ; 
Sagrado,  sacred; 
Salubre,  healthy; 
Sabio,  wise; 


Diilcemente,  sweetly  ; 
Sabiamente,  wisely  ; 
Amablemente,  amiably  ; 


acerrimo,  very  bitter. 
amicisirno,  very  friendly. 
asperisimo  or  asperrimo,  very  raw, 
bonisimo,  very  good. 
fidelisimo,  very  faithful. 
fortisimo,  very  strong. 
antiquisimo,  very  atwient. 
beneficentisimo,  very  benevolent. 
veneficeiitisimo,  very  poisonoics. 
celeberrimo,  ve7^y  celebrated. 
integerrimo,  very  upright. 
libenimo,  very  free. 
magnificentisimo,  very  magnificent. 
miserrimo,  very  miserable. 
novisimo,  very  new. 
pauperrimo,  very  poor. 
sacratisimo,  very  sacred. 
saluben-imo,  very  healthy. 
sapientisimo,  very  wise. 

Adverbs* 

dulcisimamente,  very  or  most,  sweetly. 
muy  sabiamente,  very  tvisely. 
amabilisimamente,  7nost  amiably. 


'  Ejemplos. 
Pedro  es  rico,  pero  Juan  es  riquisinio. 
Paris  es  una  ciudad  muy  hermosa. 
El  comerciante  es  honradi'simo. 
La  madre  de  Maria  es  viejisima. 
La  tovre  es  altisima. 
El  maestro  es  sapientisimo. 
El  caballero  es  cortesisimo, 
El  general  es  prudentisimo. 
La  senora  es  hermosisima. 
Es  segurisimo. 
El  camino  es  larguisimo. 
El  clima  es  friisimo. 
Luisa  es  amabilisima. 

Mi  hermana  dibuja  hennosisimamente. 
El  obra  prudentisimamente. 


Examples. 

Peter  is  rich,  but  John  is  ver}^  rich. 

Paris  is  a  very  handsome  city. 

The  merchant  is  very  honest. 

Mary's  mother  is  very  old. 

The  tower  is  very  high. 

The  teacher  is  very  wise. 

The  gentleman  is  very  polite. 

The  general  is  very  prudent. 

The  lady  is  very  handsome. 

It  is  very  sure. 

The  road  is  very  long. 

The  climate  is  very  cold. 

Louisa  is  very  amiable. 

My  sister  draws  most  beautifully. 
He  acts  very  prudently. 


78, 


LESSON   12. 


Vocabulario. 
El  amor,  the  love. 
El  camino,  th^  road. 
El  clima,  the  climate. 
El  comportamiento,  the  behavior. 
El  leon,  the  lion. 
El  maestro,  the  teacher. 
El  pozo,  tlie  well. 
La  accion,  the  action. 
La  aldea,  the  village. 
La  comedia,  the  comedy. 
La  hormiga,  the  ant. 
La  iglesia,  the  church. 
La  Uuvia,  the  rain. 
Afable,  affable. 
Agrio,  sour. 
Benefico,  benevolent. 
Comun,  ordinary,  low. 


Vocabulary. 
Contento,  satisfied. 
Femenil,  effeminate. 
Filial,  filial. 

Gloriosamente,  gloriously. 
Honrado,  honest. 
Inteligente,  intelligent. 
Interesante,  interesting. 
Largo,  long. 
Lejos,/ar. 
Paternal,  paternal. 
Pio,  pious. 
Prof  undo,  deep. 
Sabiamente,  wisely. 
Salubre,  healthy. 
Sucio,  dirty. 
Valiente,  brave. 


Exercise  23. 

1.  Los  dos  hermanos  del  general  son  riquisimos,  pero  el  general  es 
muy  pobre.  2.  La  torre  de  la  iglesia  es  altisima.  3.  Liiisa  y  Maria 
son  amabilisimas.  4.  Los  caminos  estan  malisimos  desde  la  lluvia. 
5.  El  oficial  es  un  valentisimo  soldado.  6.  El  clima  de  la  isla  es 
saluberrimo.  7.  El  hombrecito  tiene  nna  casa  grandisima.  8.  La 
hermana  de  Juan  es  hermosisima.  9.  Las  comedias  de  Moratin  son 
muy  hermosas.  10.  Socrates  era  sapientisimo.  11.  Las  primas  de 
Enrique  son  muy  pias.  12.  Las  calles  de  la  ciudad  son  larguisimas. 
13.  El  panadero  tiene  una  hija  muy  bonita.  14.  Las  hormigas  son 
pequenisimas.  15.  Juan  es  muy  femenil.  16.  El  maestro  habla  muy 
sabiamente.  17.  Su  (su)  amor  es  muy  filial.  18.  El  principe  es  muy 
benefico.     19.  El  vino  del  comerciante  no  es  bueno  ;  esta  muy  agrio. 

20.  Los  habitantes  de  la  aldea  son  muy  industriosos  y  muy  afables. 

21.  El  padre  y  la  madre  de  Pedro  son  viejisimos.  22.  Las  dos  seiioras 
son  muy  jovenes.  23.  El  soldado  murio  (died)  muy  gloriosamente. 
24.  Su  comportamiento  es  muy  comun.  25.  El  monumento  es  anti- 
quisimo  {very  ancient). 

Exercise  24, 

1.  The  merchant  is  a  very  honest  man.  2.  My  father  is  very 
benevolent.     3.  My  brother's  friends  are  very  poor.     4.  His  action  is 


ADJECTIVES.   SUPEELATIVE  ABSOLUTE.        79 

very  paternal.  5.  His  love  is  very  filial.  6.  The  banker's  house  is 
very  large.  7.  New  York  is  a  very  rich  city.  8.  The  physician  has 
very  good  sons.  9.  The  climate  of  the  island  is  very  cold.  10.  The 
lion  is  very  strong.  11.  Henry's  sister  is  very  amiable,  but  his  cousin 
{fern.)  is  more  affable.  12.  The  apples  are  very  sweet.  13.  The 
rooms  in  {de)  the  house  are  very  small.  14.  The  river  is  very  deep. 
15.  The  trees  in  the  {del)  garden  are  very  green.  16.  The  two  boys 
are  very  sick.  17.  We  have  now  a  very  good  servant.  18.  The  water 
ill  the  well  is  very  cold.  19.  Mary's  brothers  are  very  intelligent. 
20.  I  am  very  happy  to-day.  21.  The  two  Frenchmen  are  very  far 
from  here.  22.  The  soldiers  of  the  general  are  very  brave.  23.  The 
streets  are  now  very  dirty.     24.  My  book  is  very  interesting. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  Superlative  Absolute  is  either  formed  by  placing  the 
adverb  muy,  very,  before  the  Positive,  or  by  adding  to  the  same 
the  termination  isimo  (isima,  isimos,  isimas,  according  to  the 
gender  and  number  of  the  noun  to  which  the  adjective  refers)  if 
it  ends  with  a  consonant. 

If  the  Positive  ends  with  a  vowel,  however,  this  last  letter  is 
dropped  and  the  same  terminations  added  : 

Grande,  large  ;        muy  grande,  or  grandisimo,  very  large. 
Cortes,  polite  ;         muy  cortes,  or  cortesisimo,  very  polite. 

2,  Adjectives  ending  in  CO  and  go  form  their  Superlative  in 
quisimo  and  gnisimo  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  c  and  g, 
which  they  have  in  the  Positive  : 

Rico,  rich;  riquisimo,  very  rich. 

Vago,  vague  ;         vaguisimo,  very  vag'^ne. 

3,  Adjectives  ending  in  ble  change  this  last  syllable  into 
bilisimo : 

Amahle,  amiable  ;        amabilisimo,  very  amiable. 
Afable,  affable  ;  afabilisimo,  very  affable. 

4.  Adjectives  ending  in  iente  drop  the  i  in  the  Superlative, 
and  change  the  termination  iente  into  entisimo : 

Ardiente,  ardent  ;        ardentisimo,  very  ardetU. 
Valiente,  brave  ;  valentisimo,  very  brave. 


80  LESSON    12. 

5.  Adjectives  ending  in  io  drop  these  two  letters  to  avoid  the 
repetition  of  the  i,  and  add  isimo : 

Limpio,  clean  ;        hmpisimo,  very  clean. 

Exceptions.  —  The  Adjectives  frio,  cold,  and  pio,  pious,  make,  how- 
ever, friisimo  and  piisimo  in  the  Superlative. 

6t  The  Superlative  Absolute  of  Adverbs  ending  in  mente  is 
also  formed  by  placing  the  adverb  inuy,  ver^,  before  them,  or  by 
changing  the  termination  emente  or  amente  into  isimamente : 

Dulcemente,  sweetly  ;  dulcisimamente,  very  or  most  sweetly. 

Amahlementey  amiably  ;        SLmahilisimamentej  very  or  7nost  am,iably. 

7«  It  must  be  observed  that  the  Superlative  formed  with  the 
termination  isimo  is  stronger  than  that  formed  with  the  adverb 
muy,  ver?/.  Eiquisimo  expresses,  therefore,  a  higher  degree 
than  muy  rico,  ver^  rich.  Elegance  requires  also  the  termina- 
tion isimo  instead  of  the  adverb  muy  when  the  Superlative  is 
preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  un,  uno,  una.  Therefore,  es 
un  valentisimo  soldado,  he  is  a  very  brave  soldier,  is  preferable 
to  es  un  muy  valiente  soldado. 

8.  Certain  adjectives  and  adverbs  do  not  admit  of  the  termi- 
nation of  the  Superlative.  This  is  more  especially  the  case  with 
those  ending  with  1,  i,  n,  and  a  few  with  r,  as  : 

Paternal,  paternal;  maternal,  maternal ;*fA\^,  filial;  femenil,  effemi- 
nate ;  igual,  equal ;  varonil,  manly ;  turqui,  dark  blue ;  ruin,  low ;  co- 
mun,  ordinary. 

In  case  of  doubt  the  student  will,  therefore,  adopt  preferably 
the  adverb  muy. 

9.  Some  adjectives  form  their  Superlative  most  irregularly, 
as  is  seen  by  the  list  given  above. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES. 


81 


Leccion  XIII. 


Lesson  XIII. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Mi, 

mis; 

my. 

Tu, 

tus; 

thy. 

Su, 

sus; 

his,  her,  its. 

Nuestro, 

nuestra, 

nuestros. 

nuestras ; 

our. 

Vuestro, 

vuestra,  su, 

vuestros. 

vuestras,  sus ; 

;  your. 

Su, 

sus; 

their. 

Mio, 

mia, 

mios. 

mias ; 

my. 

Tuyo, 

tuya, 

tuyos. 

tuyas ; 

thy. 

Suyo, 

suya. 

suyos. 

suyas ;  ^ 

his,  her,  its. 

Nuestro, 

nuestra, 

nuestros, 

nuestras; 

our. 

Vuestro, 

vuestra, 

vuestros. 

vuestras ; 

your. 

Suyo, 

suya. 

suyos, 

suyas ; 

their. 

Ejemplos. 

Mi  padre  es  bueno. 
Mi  madre  es  buena. 
Tn  herm^no  es  pequeno. 
Tu  hermana  es  peqiiena. 
Su  hermano  es  grande. 
Su  hermana  es  gi-ande. 
Nuestro  tio  es  bueno. 
Nuestra  tia  es  buena. 
Su  amigo  es  joven.  ^ 

Su  amigo  de  V.  es  joven.  >- 
El  amigo  de  V.  es  joven.  ) 
Su  casa  es  grande.  \ 

Su  casa  de  ellos  es  grande.  ) 
Mis  amigos  son  felices. 
Sus  hermanos  son  ricos. 
Sus  libros  estan  aqui. 
Sus  libros  de  V.  estan  aqui. 
Los  libros  de  V.  estan  aqui. 
6 


Examples. 

My  father  is  good. 
My  mother  is  good. 
Thy  brother  is  small. 
Thy  sister  is  small. 
His  or  her  brother  is  tall 
His  or  her  sister  is  tall. 
Our  uncle  is  good. 
Our  aunt  is  good. 

Your  friend  is  young. 

Their  house  is  large. 

My  friends  are  happy. 

His  (her  or  their)  brothers  are  rich. 

Your  books  are  here. 


82 


LESSON    13. 


Mi  hermano  y  mi  hermana  son  jo-  i 
venes.  ) 

Sii  tio,  su  tia  y  sus  primos  estan 
malos. 

Aqui  esta  iino  de  mis  amigos. 

El  peiTO  esta  con  su  amo. 

El  arbol  pierde  sus  hqjas. 

Deme  V.  la  mano. 

El  tiene  su  sombrero  en  la  mano. 

El  soldado  ha  perdido  el  brazo. 


My  brother  and  sister  are  young. 

His  (or  her)  uncle,  aunt,  and  cous- 
ins are  sick. 
Here  is  one  of  my  friends. 
The  dog  is  with  its  master. 
The  tree  loses  its  leaves. 

Give  me  your  hand. 

He  has  his  hat  in  his  hand. 

The  soldier  has  lost  his  arm. 


Su,  his,  her, 

your,  their. 

Su  libro  or  el  libro  de  el. 

His  book. 

Su  libro  or  el  libro  de  ella. 

Her  book. 

Su  (or  el)  libro  de  V.,  sing.     \ 
Su  (or  el)  libro  de  V.  V.,  pi.   \ 

Your  book. 

Su  (or  el)  libro  de  ellos,  masc.    \ 
Su  (or  el)  libro  de  ellas,  fern.     \ 

Their  book. 

Sus  libros  or  los  libros  de  el. 

His  books. 

etc.                  etc. 

etc. 

Adios,  padre  mio. 

Good  by,  father. 

Si,  madre  mia. 

Yes,  mother. 

No,  hijo  mio. 

No,  my  son. 

Son  amigos  nuestros. 

They  are  our  friends. 

Son  enemigos  suyos. 

They  are  his  enemies. 

Un  amigo  mio. 

A  friend  of  mine. 

Un  criado  nuestro. 

A  sei-vant  of  ours. 

Un  amigo  suyo. 

A  friend  of  his. 

Vocabulario. 
El  baston,  the  cane. 
El  boUo,  the  cake. 
El  condiscipulo,  the  fellow-scholar . 
El  discipulo,  the  scholar. 
El  ejemplo,  the  example. 
El  marido,  the  husband. 
El  padrino,  the  godfather. 
El  papel,  the  paper. 
El  privilegio,  the  privilege. 
La  familia,  the  family. 
La  leche,  the  milk. 
La  libertad,  the  liberty. 


Vocabulary. 
La  madrina,  the  godmother. 
La  pizarra,  the  slate. 
La  propiedad,  the  property. 
La  riendai  the  h'idle. 
La  silla,  the  saddle. 
Al  contrario,  on  tlie  contrary. 
Caliente,  warm. 
En  casa,  at  home. 
Mas,  7nore. 
Sagrado,  sacred. 
Siguen,  folloio. 
Tambien,  too,  also. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES.  83 

Exercise  25. 

1.  Mi  hermano  y  mi  hermana  estan  en  casa.  2.  Mis  padres  {'par- 
ents) estan  en  el  jardin.  3.  Nuestras  casas  son  hermosas.  4.  i  Quien 
tiene  mi  papel,  mi  pluma  y  mis  lapices  1  5.  No  tenemos  ni  el  papel, 
ni  la  pluma  ni  los  lapices  de  V.  6.  La  mujer  de  niiestro  medico  es 
la  hermana  de  mi  banquero.  7.  i  Tienen  los  discipulos  sus  libros  ? 
8.  Tienen  sus  libros  y  sus  pizarras.  9.  El  marido  de  mi  prima  esta  en 
Paris.  10.  [Buenos  dias,  tia,  donde  estan  mis  primos?  11.  Estan  en 
el  jardin.  12.  [Donde  estas,  hijo  mio  ?  13.  Estoy  aqui  en  el  cuarto. 
14.  Mi  amigo  es  pobre,  pero  un  hermano  suyo  es  muy  rico.  15.  Nues- 
tro  tio  quiere  comprar  la  casa  de  mi  amigo.  16.  i  Donde  esta  su  padre 
de  V.  ahora?  17.  Yo  no  se  donde  esta.  18.  Los  sombreros  de  V.  V. 
son  muy  pequenos.  19.  Nuestro  cuarto  esta  caliente.  20.  Las  casas 
de  ellos  son  muy  grandes.  21  [  Es  Y.  mi  amigo  ?  22.  Si,  senor,  soy 
el  amigo  de  Y.  y  de  toda  su  familia.  23.  Los  primos  de  Juan  son  los 
condiscipulos  de  mi  hermano.  24.  i  Quien  quiere  un  pedazo  de  mi 
bollo?  25.  Yo,  denie  Y.  un  pedazito.  26.  [Que  tiene  Y.  en  la  mano? 
27.  Tengo  un  bastoncito.  28.  Los  hijos  siguen  el  ejemplo  de  su 
padre.  29.  Nuestra  libertad,  nuestra  propiedad  y  nuestros  privilegios 
son  sagrados.     30.  Adios,  amigo  mio. 

Exercise  26. 

1.  Where  is  your  cousin  (/)?  2.  She  is  with  her  husband.  3.  Where 
is  your  slate  ?     4.  My  slate  is  on  the  table.     5.  Who  is  your  godfather? 

6.  Mr.  Harris   is   my   godfather,   and   his   sister  is  my  godmother. 

7.  Who  is  in  your  father's  room  ?  8.  A  friend  of  his.  9.  Give  me 
your  hand,  my  friend.  10.  Is  Henry  the  friend  of  your  brothers  ? 
11.  He  is  their  friend.  12.  Is  your  physician  tall  or  little  ?  13.  Our 
physician  is  very  tall.  14.  Who  is  up  stairs  in  our  room  ?  15.  No- 
body is  in  your  room,  but  some  one  is  in  your  brother's  room. 
16.  With  whom  are  your  children  ?  17.  They  are  with  their  mother. 
18.  Is  your  father  at  home  ?  19.  He  is  in  his  store  (tienda).  20.  Are 
the  little  boys  wdth  their  aunt  ?  21.  They  are  with  their  uncle  and 
aunt.  22.  My  sister's  friend  (/)  is  very  amiable,  and  her  brothers  too. 
23.  Our  physician  is  already  an  old  man.  24.  Will  you  have  more 
milk  in  your  coffee  ?  25.  On  the  contrary,  give  me  more  coffee. 
26.  Who  is  in  the  garden  1  27.  My  father  and  mother.  28.  Have 
you  the  saddle  of  my  horse  ?     29.  I  have  its  bridle,  but  not  its  saddle. 


84  LESSON    13. 


Gram^tiea.  Grammar. 

1.  Possessive  Adjectives  do  not  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  antecedent  or  possessor,  as  in  English,  but  with  the 
object  possessed.  Every  Possessive  Adjective  must,  therefore, 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers. 

Mi  hbro,  my  hook.        Kuestra  mesa,  our  table.        Mis  amigos,  my  friends. 

2.  The  Possessive  Adjective  must  be  repeated  with  every 
noun,  unless  it  refers  to  the  same  person  or  object : 

Mi  padre,  mi  madre,  y  mi  hermana        My  father ,  motJier,  and  sister  are 

estan  malos,  sick. 

Seilor  mio  y  amigo,  Sir  and  friend. 

3.  The  Possessive  Adjective  vuestro,  masc.  sing.,  vuestra, 
feih.  sing.,  vuestros,  inasc.  pZ.,  vuestras,  fern.  pL,  your,  is  only 
used  in  the  elevated  style,  or  when  addressing  the  divinity,  the 
saints,  or  persons  in  elevated  situation  : 

Principe,  imploro  vuestro  amparo,         Prince,  I  implore  your  2^rotection. 

In  place  of  vuestro  the  Spaniards  use  in  the  usual  style  the 
Possessive  Adjective  SU,  which  also  means  his,  her,  their.  Vues- 
tro may,  in  fact,  be  compared  with  the  personal  pronoun  VOSO- 
tros,  instead  of  which  we  use  usted,  sing.,  and  ustedes,  pL,  with 
the  verb  in  the  tliird  person  singular  or  plural.  In  the  same 
way,  instead  of  vuestro,  the  Spaniards  use  the  Possessive  Adjec- 
tive in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural. 

Su  sombrero,  your  hat,  is  therefore  used  instead  of  vuestro 
sombrero ;  but  as  it  might  also  be  translated  by  his  hat,  her  hat, 
their  hat,  the  expression  de  V.  is  added  after  the  noun,  and  we 
would  therefore  have  to  say  SU  sombrero  de  V.  This  addition 
of  de  v.,  or  de  V.  V.  may,  however,  be  left  out  when  the  sense 
of  the  sentence  sufficiently  indicates  to  what  person  SU  refers  : 
i  Tiene  V.  su  sombrero  ?        Have  you  your  hat? 

Remark.  — The  omission  of  de  usted  when  addressing  respectable  per- 
sons is,  however,  considered  vulgar  and  impoUte. 


POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES.  85 

4.  Instead  of  su  or  sus,  el,  la,  los,  or  las  may  be  used  with 
de  usted,  de  ustedes ; 

El  libro  de  V.,  your  hook.  La  mesa  de  V.,  your  table. 

Los  libros  de  V.,  your  hooks.         Las  mesas  de  V.,  your  tahles. 

S»  In  order  to  avoid  the  ambiguity  which  might  arise  from 
the  use  of  SU  and  SUS,  the  definite  article  is  used  with  de  el,  de 
ella,  de  ellos,  de  ellas : 

El  libro  de  el,  his  hook.  La  casa  de  ellos,  their  (m.)  house. 

El  libro  de  ella,  her  hook.         La  casa  de  ellas,  their  (f.)  house. 

6.  The  Possessive  its  must  be  rendered  by  su  or  sus  accord- 
ing to  the  number  of  the  following  noun  : 

Mi  padre  tieiie  iin  hermoso  caballo,         My  father  has  a  2Jretty  horse,  its 

su  color  es  negro,  color  is  black. 

El  arbol  pierde  sus  hojas,  The  tree  loses  its  leaves. 

7.  The  definite  article  is  substituted  in  Spanish  for  the  Pos- 
sessive Adjective  whenever  the  sense  of  the  sentence  sufficiently 
indicates  who  the  possessor  is.  This  is  more  especially  the  case, 
when  parts  of  the  body  are  mentioned  : 

Tengo  algo  en  el  ojo,  /  Jmve  something  in  my  eye. 

Que  tiene  V.  en  la  mano,  JVhat  have  you,  (got)  in  your  Jiand. 

8.  Whenever  addressing  a  relative  or  friend,  the  Spaniards 
use  the  noun  alone,  as  in  English,  or  with  the  Possessive  after 
the  same  : 

Buenos  dias,  padre  (or  padre  mio).         Good  morning,  fathsr. 
Hijo  (or  hijo  mio),  ven  aqui,  So^i,  come  here. 

9.  The  Possessive  Adjectives  mi,  tu,  su,  etc.,  when  coming 
after  the  noun  are  replaced  by  mio,  tuyo,  suyo,  masc.  sing. ; 
mios,  tuyos,  suyos,  masc.  pi. ;  mia,  tuya,  suya,  fein.  sing. ; 
mias,  tuyas,  suyas,  fem.  pi.  : 

i  Padre  mio  !  my  father  !        Madre  mia,  mij  motJier  ;  etc. 

These  Adjectives  are  placed  after  the  noun  : 

1.  In  the  vocative:  hijos  mios!  my  sons  I     If,  however,  an 

adjective  or  a  participle  precedes  the  noun,  both  forms  may  be 

used  : 

Mi  querido  padre  or  querido  padre  mio,         My  dear  father. 


86^  LESSON    14. 

2.  When  an  article  precedes  the  noun  : 

El  caballo  tuyo  es  mayor  que  el  mio,     Thy  {your)  horse  is  larger  than  mine, 
Un  criado  mio  or  uno  de  mis  criados,      A  servant  of  mine. 

3.  When  an  adverb  precedes  the  noun  : 

Tan  amigos  nuestros  se  mostraron,         They  showed  themselves  so  much  our 

friends. 


Leccion  XIV.  Lesson  XIV. 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masculine.      Feminine.  Masculine.  Feminine. 

El  mio,       la  mia,       los  mios,       las  mias,       mine,  my  oivn. 
El  tuyo,      la  tuya,      los  tuyos,      las  tnyas,      thine,  thy  own. 
El  suyo,     la  suya,     los  suyos,      las  suyas,      his,  her,  its,  (own). 
Elnuestro,  lanuestra,  los  nuestros,  las  nuestras,  ours,  our  own. 
El  vuestro,  lavuestra,  los  vuestros,  las  vuestras,  j 


_,  _  ,  ,  i  yours,  your  own. 

El  suyo,      la  suya,      los  suyos,      las  suyas,     ) 

El  suyo,      la  suya,      los  suyos,      las  suyas,      theirs,  their  own. 

El  de  el,  la  de  el,  los  de  el,  las  de  el,  his. 

El  de  ella,  la  de  ella,  los  de  ella,  las  de  ella,  hers. 
El  de  nosotros,  la  de  nosotros,  los  de  nosotros,  las  de  nosotros,  ours. 
El  de  usted,  la  de  usted,  los  de  usted,  las  de  usted,^ 
El  de  ustedes,  la  de  ustedes,  los  de  ustedes,  lasdeustedes,^ 
El  de  ellos,  la  de  ellos,  los  de  ellos,  las  de  ellos,^  ) 
El  de  ellas,     la  de  ellas,      los  de  ellas,      las  de  ellas,^  ) 

Declension. 

Masculine  Singular.  Feminine  "Singular. 

El  mio,  mine ;  la  mia,  mine. 

Del  mio,  of  mine  ;         de  la  mia,      of  mine. 

Al  mio,  to  mine ;  a  la  mia,         to  mine. 

1  Singular.        ^  Plural.         ^  Masculine.         *  Feminine. 


J  yours, 
theirs. 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


87 


Masculine  Plural. 
Los  mios,        mine  ; 
De  los  mioS)  of  mine ; 
A  los  inios,    to  mine  ; 

ETC.,  etc., 


Feminine  Plural. 
las  mias,        mine. 
de  las  mias,  of  mine. 
a  las  mias,    to  mine. 
ETC.,  etc. 


Ejemplos, 
Mi  padre  y  el  tnyo  son  amigos. 
Tu  hermano  y  el  mio  estan  aqui. 
Tengo  el  libro  de  Y.  y  el  mio. 
Mi  lapiz  y  el  de  V.  son  de  oro. 
Su  amigo  de  V.  y  el  nuestro  son  altos. 
Su  caballo  de  V.  y  el  de  ellos  son 

negros. 
Mi  casa  y  la  suya  (la   de  el)   son 

niievas. 
Su   jjluma   (la  pluma   de   el)   y  la 

nuestra  son  de  acero. 
Mis  libros  y  los  suyos  son  hermosos. 
Nuestros  amigos  y  los  de  V.  estan 

en  Francia. 
Nuestras  sillas  y  las  de  ellos  son  de 

caoba. 
I  Tiene  el  mi  lapiz  ?  —  Tiene  el  suyo. 

I  Tiene   ella  mi   libro  ?  —  Tiene   el 

suyo. 
I  Tiene  V.   mi  pluma  ?  —  Tengo  la 

mia. 
I  Tiene   ella   su   aguja  ?  —  Tiene   la 

suya. 

Hablo  de  mi  padre  y  del  suyo  (del 

de  v.). 
Escribo  a  mi  madre  y  a  la  de  V. 
El  habla  de  mis  hermanos  y  de  los 

suyos. 
Escribimos   a  nuestros  amigos  y  a 

los  de  ellos. 
Quiero  lo  mio. 
Cada  uno  quiere  lo  suyo. 


Examples. 
My  father  and  thine  are  friends. 
Thy  brother  and  mine  are  here. 
I  have  your  book  and  mine. 
My  pencil  and  yours  are  of  gold. 
Your  friend  and  ours  are  tall. 
Your  horse  and  theirs  are  black. 

My  house  and  his  are  new. 

His  pen  and  ours  are  of  steel. 

My  books  and  his  are  handsome. 
Our  friends  and  yours  are  in  France. 

Our  chairs  and  theirs  are  of  ma- 
hogany. 

Has  he  my  pencil  ?  —  He  has  his 
own. 

Has  she  my  book  ?  —  She  has  her 
own. 

Have  you  my  pen  ?  —  I  have 
mine. 

Has  she  her  needle  ?  —  She  has 
her  own. 

I  speak  of  my  father  and  of  yours. 

I  ^yrite  to  my  mother  and  to  yours. 
He  speaks  of  my  brothers  and  of 

his. 
We  write  to   our  friends  and  to 

theirs. 
I  wish  for  what  is  mine. 
Every  one  wishes  for  what  is  his. 


LESSON  14. 


Vocabulario. 
El  baile,  the  ball. 
El  cocinero,  the  cook. 
El  guante,  the  glove. 
El  maestro,  the  teacher. 
Jfcl  profesor,  the  professor. 
La  escritura,  the  writing. 
La  familia,  the  family. 
Alguna  parte,  somewhere,  anywhere. 
A  lo  menos,  at  least. 
Alto,  tall. 
Gomo,  how. 


Vocabulary. 
i  Conoce  V.  ?    Do  you  knoio  ?  are  you 

acquainted  with. 
Conozco,  I  know,  1  am  acquainted  ivith. 
i  De  quien  ?  whose  1 
I  Escribe  V.  ?  do.you  write  1 
Escribo,  /  write. 
I  Habla  V.  ?  do  you  speak  t 
Hablo,  /  speak. 
Magnifico,  splendid. 
Otra  cosa,  something  else. 
Que,  which. 


Exercise  27. 

1.  [Tiene  V.  mi  libro  ?  2.  No,  senor,  no  tengo  el  de  V.  3.  [Como 
son  los  caballos  1  4.  El  mio  es  negro,  y  el  de  el  es  bianco.  5.  Los 
hermanos  de  V.  son  altos,  y  los  mios  son  pequenos.  6.  Los  Ingleses 
ricos  tienen  cocineros  franceses,  los  de  ellos  no  son  tan  bnenos. 
7.  La  familia  de  su  madre  de  V.  es  rica,  pero  la  familia  de  la  mia 
es  pobre.  8.  [  Conoce  V.  los  jardines  de  los  Ingleses  ?  9.  Conozco 
sus  jardines  y  sus  casas.  10.  Nuestros  jardines  son  hermosos,  pero 
los  de  ellos  son  magnificos.  11.  [Habla  V.  de  mi  casa?  12.  No 
hablo  de  la  suya,  hablo  de  la  mia.  13.  [  Quiere  Y.  un  pedazo  de 
boUo  ?  14.  Si,  deme  V.  un  pedazo  del  suyo.  15.  [  Para  quien  son 
las  manzanas,  para  su  hermano  de  V.  6  para  el  mio  ?  16.  Las  man- 
zanas  son  para  el  mio,  tengo  otra  cosa  para  el  de  V.  17.  [  Escribe  V. 
a  mis  amigos  1  18.  Escribo  a  los  mios,  a  los  de  Y.,  y  a  los  de  el. 
19.  I  Quien  tiene  nuestros  libros  ?  20.  El  profesor  tiene  los  de  Y.  y 
los  nuestros.  21.  La  hermana  de  Y.  es  joven,  y  la  mia  tambien. 
22.  La  madre  de  Y.,  y  la  de  el,  estan  en  el  jardin.  23.  i  Tiene  Y.  mi 
lapiz  ?     24.  No,  senor,  tengo  el  mio,  el  de  Y.  esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

25.  Don  Carlos  Marty  es  mi  maestro  de  escritura,  quien  es  el  de  Y.  ? 

26.  Es  tambien  el  mio.  27.  Enrique  es  el  amigo  de  Y.,  pero  no  es  el 
mio.  28.  [  De  quien  es  la  casa  1  29.  La  casa  pequeiia  es  mia,  y  la 
grande  es  de  mi  hermana.  30.  La  casa  es  pequena,  pero  a  lo  menos 
es  mia. 

Exercise  28. 

1.  Who  has  my  piece  of  cake?  2.  I  have  mine,  but  not  yours. 
3.  Where  are  your  gloves  1    4.  Mine  are  here ;  where  are  yours  ? 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS.  89 

5.  Mine  are  somewhere  in  the  room.  6.  Do  you  wish  the  large  or 
the  small  hat  I  7.  I  wish  mine.  8.  Have  I  your  hat  ?  9.  No,  you 
have  your  own.  10.  You  have  no  inkstand,  will  you  have  mine  ? 
11.  No,  thank  you,  I  don't  wish  yours.  12.  Is  your  house  large? 
13.  Our  house  is  very  large.  14.  My  book  is  French,  yours  is 
English,  and  his  is  German.  15.  Do  you  speak  of  our  friends  I 
16.  I  speak  of  yours  and  of  mine.  17.  Who  is  in  our  room  .^ 
18.  Your  brother  is  in  yours,  and  my  sister  is  in  mine.  19.  Mr. 
Smith's  children  (hijos)  are  taller  than  ours.  20.  My  brother's  house 
is  large,  but  mine  is  larger.  21.  The  large  book  is  mine,  and  the 
small  one  is  his.  22.  Which  pens  are  the  best,  yours  or  mine  ? 
23.  Mine  are  the  best.  24.  My  sister  and  yours  are  at  {en)  the  ball. 
25.  Is  the  slate  yours  ?  26.  The  slate  is  mine,  but  the  pencil  is  not 
mine.  27.  Do  you  write  to  your  father  1  28.  I  write  to  mine  and  to 
yours.  29.  Have  you  two  tables  in  your  room  ?  30.  I  have  one 
table  in  my  room,  but  my  brother  has  three  tables  in  his.  31.  Are 
the  tables  his  ?  32.  Two  are  his,  and  one  is  mine.  33.  All  the  books 
are  ours. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  Possessive  Pronouns,  like  the  Possessive  Adjectives, 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  object  possessed,  and  not, 
as  in  English,  with  the  'possessor  : 

Mi  hermano  y  el  suyo,  3fy  brother  and  his  (or  hers). 

Mi  madre  y  la  suya,  My  mother  and  his  (or  hers). 

Mis  libros  y  los  suyos,  My  hooks  and  his  (or  hers). 

Nuestras  amigas  y  las  suyas,  My  lady  friends  and  his  (or  liers). 

2i  More  expression  can  be  given  to  these  pronouns  by  adding 
to  them  the  words  mismo,  masc,  misma,  fem.,  very  same;  and 
propio,  masc,  propia,  fem.,  oivu  : 

El  mio  mismo,  My  own. 

La  suya  misma,         His  (her  or  yoiir)  own. 

El  suyo  propio,  His  {her  or  yotir)  own. 

3«  Instead  of  el  vuestro,  la  vuestra,  los  vuestros,  las  vuesti^as, 
the  Spaniards  use  el  suyo,  m.  «.,  la  suya,/.  s.,  which  really  mean 


90  LESSON   1 4. 

his  or  hers,  when  the  meaning  of  the  sentence  is  sufficiently 
clear : 

Hablo  de  mi  padre  y  del  siiyo,         I  speak  of  my  father  and  of  yours. 

Qiiiero  mi  phima  y  la  suya,  /  want  my  pen  and  yours. 

4,  When,  however,  the  sentence  is  not  sufficiently  clear,  el 
(la,  los,  las,  lo)  de  V.  is  used  for  yours  : 

Mi  libro  y  el  de  V.,         My  hook  and  yours,  sing. 
Mi  casa  y  la  de  V.V.,      My  house  and  yours,  pi. 

5i  In  the  same  way  if  we  wish  to  indicate  clearly  the  differ- 
ence hetween  his,  hers,  or  theirs,  we  use  el  de  el,  el  de  ella,  el  de 
ellos,  and  el  de  ellas,  instead  of  el  suyo,  la  suya,  etc. : 

Aqui  esta  mi  casa  y  alia  esta  la  de        Here  is  my  house  and  there  is 

ellos,  theirs. 

La  mesa  es  de  el,  The  table  is  his. 

6#    The  definite  article  may  also  be  used  with  the  preposition 
de  before  nosotros,  etc.,  instead  of  el  nuestro,  la  nuestra,  etc. : 
Los  libros  de  ellos  y  los  de  nosotros,         Their  hooks  oMd  ours. 

7.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  also  used  with  the  neuter 
article  lo,  and  mean  the  property  of,  what  belongs  to,  etc. : 


r  Thine  and  mine  (tuum  et  meum). 
Thy  property  and  mine. 
What  helongs  to  thee  and  to  me. 


Lo  tiiyo  y  lo  mio,    -{   Thy  property  and  mine. 


8.  The  verb  ser,  to  he,  with  or  without  the  adjective  mio,  m., 
mia,/. ;  tuyo,  m.,  tuya,  /. ;  suyo,  m.,  suya,  /. ;  and  nuestro, 
m.,  nuestra,/.,  is  frequently  used  to  express  possession.  When 
used  without  the  adjective,  it  is  accompanied  by  the  preposi- 
tion de : 

El  libro  es  mio,  The  hook  is  mine. 

La  casa  es  suya,  The  house  is  his  {hers  or  yours). 

El  caballo  es  nuestro,  The  horse  is  ours. 

El  libro  es  de  mi  hermano,         Tlu  hook  is  my  brother's. 

9.  Conoce  V.  ?  (from  conocer),  and  sabe  V.  ?  (from  saber)  both 
mean  do  you  know?  but  COnocer  means  rather  to  know  by  the 


DEMONSTRATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


91 


senses,  while  saber  means  more  properly  to  knoiv  hy  the  mind,  to 
he  versed  in.  Conocer,  besides,  is  applied  to  persons  and  things, 
while  saber  is  said  only  of  things,  and  may  precede  another 

yerb  : 

Yo  conozco  al  hombre,  ^  /  know  the  man. 

i  Conoce  V.  mi  casa  ?  Do  you  know  my  house  ? 

i  Sabe  V.  su  leccioii  ?  Do  you  know  your  lesson  ? 

i  Sabe  V.  leer  ?  Do  you  know  hovj  to  read  ? 

Conozco  or  se  el  ingles,  /  know  the  English  language. 


leccion  XV.  Lesson  XV. 

DEMONSTRATIVE  ADJECTIVES. 


Singular. 

Masculine.         Femimne. 

Este,  e^ta,  this  ; 
Ese,  esa,  that  ; 
Aquel,    aquella,  that; 


Plural. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

estos,         estas,       these, 
esos,  esas,         those. 

aquellos,    aquellas,  those. 


Ejemplos. 

Este  hombre  es  rico. 
Esta  miijer.es  jo ven. 
Ese  libro  y  esa  pluma  son  mios. 
Aquel  soldado  es  valiente. 
Aquella  mujer  es  pobre. 
Estos  hombres  son  Yieos. 
Estas  mujeres  son  jovenes. 
Aquellos  muchachos  son  jovenes. 


Sxamples.  '' 

This  man  is  rich. 

This  woman  is  young. 

That  book  and  that  pen  are  mine. 

That  soldier  is  brave. 

That  woman  is  poor. 

These  men  are  rich. 

These  women  are  young. 

Those  boys  are  young. 


Adverbs  and  Adjectives  of  Quantity. 


Cuanto,  m. ,  cuanta,  f. ,  how  much. 
Poco,  m.,  poca,  f.,  little. 
Tanto,  m.,  tanta,  f.,  so  much. 
MuchOf  m.,  miLcha,  f.,  much. 
Demasiado,  m.,   demasiada,  f.,  too 

muchy  too. 
Unos  cuantos,  algunos,  some. 
Bastaate,  s.,  bastantes,  pi.,  enough. 


Cuantos,  m.,  cuantas,  f.,  how  many. 
Pocos,  m.,  pocas,  f.,few. 
Tanto  s,  m.,  tantas,  f.,  so  many. 
Muchos,  m.,  muchas,  f.,  many. 
Demasiados,  m.,  demasiadas,  f.,  too 

many,  too. 
Unos  pocos,  a  few. 


1  See  p.  106,  R.  3. 


92  LESSON    15. 


Vocabulario.  Vocabulary. 


El  haul,  the  trunk. 
El  clavel,  the  pink. 
El  pais,  the  country. 
La  carta,  the  letter. 


La  experienoia,  the  experience. 
La  fiesta,  the  holy  day. 
La  ropa,  the  clotJies. 
A  casa,  to  the  house. 

Exercise  29. 


Ahi,  there. 
Londres,  London. 
i  Va  V.  1  are  you  going  1 
Voy,  /  am  going. 


1.  [  Quien  es  esta  senora  ?  2.  Esta  senora  es  mi  madre,  y  este 
caballero  es  mi  padre.  3.  i  A  donde  va  V.  esta  maiiana  ?  4.  Voy  a 
casa  de  mi  primo.  5.  [  Quiere  V.  esta  rosa  6  aquel  clavel  ?  6.  No 
quiero  ninguna  flor.  7.  Este  muchachito  es  mi  hermano,  y  esta 
muchachita  es  mi  hermana.  8.  El  general  es  el  padre  de  estos  mu- 
chachos.  9.  i  Son  bonitas  aquellas  senoritas  ?  10.  Son  jovenes,  pero 
no  son  niuy  bonitas.  11.  ^Habla  frances  aquel  hombre  ?  12.  Habla 
ingles,  pero  no  habla  frances.  13.  Ese  Ingles  es  el  amigo  de  aquel 
Frances.  14.  Aquel  oficial  es  hermano  de  esta  senora.  15.  El  capi- 
tan  de  este  buque  es  joven,  pero  tiene  mucha  experiencia.  16.  [  Es 
pobre  esta  mujer?  17.  Esta  mujer  es  pobre,  pero  aquella  mujer 
es  rica.  18.  ^  Son  franceses  esos  muchachos  %  19.  Son  alemanes. 
20.  I  Que  tiene  V.  en  aquellos  baules  %  21.  Tengo  todos  mis  libros 
en  el  pequeno  haul,  y  mi  ropa  en  el  grande.  22.  ^  Son  para  V. 
estas  cartas  ?  23.  No,  sen  or,  son  para  mi  padre.  24.  i  Quien  vive 
en  esa  casa?  25.  El  padre  de  esos  muchachos  vive  ahi.  26.  Este 
hombre  es  el  padre  de  aquellos  muchachos,  y  esta  mujer  es  la  madre 
de  aquellas  muchachas.     27.  Esta  senora  es  de  Paris,  y  su  prima  de 


Londres. 


Exercise  30. 


1.  Is  the  book  yours  1  2.  This  book  is  mine,  but  that  book  is  my 
brother's.  3.  Who  is  that  little  boy  ?  4.  He  is  ( the )  son  of  that 
lady.  5.  This  gentleman  and  that  lady  are  French.  6.  Are  you  the 
brother  of  these  ladies  ?  7.  I  am  their  cousin.  8.  Give  me  a  piece 
of  that  cake.  9.  That  cake  is  not  mine.  10.  This  book  and  pencil 
are  for  your  brother.  11.  This  house  is  higher  than  that  church. 
12.  Where  are  you  going  this  afternoon  ?  13.  I  don't  know  yet. 
14.  These  flowers  are  most  beautiful.  15.  Are  these  two  gentlemen 
l)rothers?  16.  They  are  not  brothers,  they  are  friends.  17.  Do  you 
know  that  country?  18.  I  know  all  these  countries.  19.  Is  this 
gentleman  the  husband  of  that  lady  ?     20.  No,  he  is  her  brother. 


DEMONSTRATIVE   ADJECTIVES.  93 

21.  This  house  is  too  small  for  us.  22.  How  many  children  has  that 
man  ?  23.  He  has  three  or  four.  24.  Have  you  money  enough 
(enough  money)?  25.  I  have  not  much,  but  I  have  enough. 
26.  Have  you  much  money  ?  27.  I  have  very  little.  28.  You 
speak  too  much. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Este,  m.,  esta,/.,  designate  the  person  or  object  nearer  to 
the  speaker;  ese,  m.,  esa, /.,  the  person  or  object  nearer  to  the 
person  spoken  to ;  while  aquel,  m.,  aquella,  /.,  designate  the 
person  or  object  equally  distant  from  the  speaker  and  the  person 
who  is  addressed  : 

Este  hornbre.  —  Ese   libro.  —  Aquel  -     This  man.  —  That  hook.  —  TJutt 

lapiz.  ^^c?ici7. 

Esta  mujer.  —  Esa  pluma.  —  Aquella  This  woman.  —  That  pen.  —  That 

cosa.  thing. 

The  same  rule  is  applicable  to  the  plural  of  these  Demonstra- 
tive Adjectives  : 

Estos  hombres.  —  Esos  libros.  —  Aquellos  These  men.  —  Those  hooks.  — 

1dpi  ces.  Those  pencils. 

Estas  mujeres.  —  Esas  plumas.  — Aquellas  These  women.  —  These  pens. — 

cosas.  Those  things. 

2.  Although  the  Demonstrative  Adjectives  precede  the  nouns, 
they  are  placed  sometimes  after  them  to  express  contempt,  anger, 
or  irony  : 

Al  picaro  ese  le  hare  yo  castigar,         /  will  have  this  rogue  jnmished. 

3t  The  Demonstrative  Adjective  must  be  repeated  before 
every  noun  : 

Este  hornbre,  esta  mujer  y  este  muchacho         This  man,  womaii,  and  child 
estan  malos,  are  sick. 

4 1  Donde,  lohere,  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  a  when  the 
verb  expresses  motion,  and  by  en  when  it  expresses  position  or 
situation.  A  donde  and  en  donde  correspond  in  fact  to  the 
English  whither  and  xvherein  : 

I  A  donde  va  V.  ?  Wliere  are  you  going  to .? 

i  En  donde  esta  V.  ?         Where  are  you  / 


94  LESSON    16. 

Leccion  XYI.  Lesson  XVI. 

DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masculine.  Masculine. 

Este,  this  one,  the  latter  ;  estOS,  these,  the  latter. 

Ese,  that  one  ;  esos,  those, 

Aquel,  that  one,  the  former  ;  aquellos,  those,  the  former. 

Feminine.  Feminine. 

Esta,  this  one,  the  latter  ;  estas,  these,  the  latter, 

Esa,  that^  one  ;  esas,  those. 

Aquella,  that  one,  the  former  ;  aquellas,  those,  the  former. 

Neuter. 
Esto,  this,  this  thing. 

Eso,  ) 

AqueUo,  r^'^^' ^'^^^  ^^^''^^- 

El,  la,  los,  las,  lo,  as  Pronouns. 

El  de,  —  la  de,  That  of. 

Los  de,  —  las  de,  Those  of. 

El  or  la  de  hierro,  The  iron  one  (that  of  iron). 

Los  or  las  de  ore,  The  gold  ones  (those  of  gold). 

El  or  la  que  yo  tengo.  The  one  I  have  (that  which  I  have). 

Los  or  las  que  yo  tengo.  Those  I  have  (those  which  I  have). 

El  que,  la  que,  los  que,  las  que,  lo  que. 

El  que  esta  aqui,  The  one  who  is  here  (he  who  is  here). 

La  que  esta  alli,  The  one  who  is  there  (she  who  is  there). 

Los  que  dicen  eso,  Those  who  say  that  (they  who  say  that). 

Las  que  hahlan,  Those  (fern.)  who  speak  (they  (fern.)  who  speak). 

Lo  que  yo  tengo,  IFJiat  I  have  (that  which  I  have). 

Es  hueno,  it  is  good.  Son  buenos,  theij  arc  good. 

Es  muy  hermoso,  it  is  very  pretty.  Son  muy  hermosos,  they  are  very  pretty. 

Es  mi  libro,  it  is  my  hook.  Son  mios,  they  are  mine. 

Que  es  ?  what  is  it  ?  Esta  listo  ?  is  it  ready  ? 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


95 


Ejemplos. 

Mi  lapiz  y  el  de  mi  hermano. 

Mis  lapices  y  los  de  mi  hermano. 
Mi  pluma  y  la  de  mi  hermana. 
Mis  plumas  y  las  de  mi  hermana. 
Mis  libros  y  los  de  mi  amigo. 
Mis  casas  y  las  de  mi  hermano. 


Este  es  grande,  aquel  es  pequeno, 
m.  sing. 

Esta  es  grande,  aquella  es  pequena, 
/.  sing. 

Estos  son  buenos,  aquellos  son  ma- 
los,  m.  pi. 

Estas  son  buenas,  aquellas  son  ma- 
las,  /.  pi. 

Esto  es  mio,  aquello  es  suyo. 


e  Que  libro   quiere   V.  ?  —  Este   6 

aquel. 
i  Que  pluma  quiere  V.  ?  —  Esta  6 

aquella. 
i  Que  libros  quiere  V.  ?  —  Estos  6 

aquellos. 
I  Que  plumas  quiere  V.  ?  —  Estas 

6  aquellas. 
[  Que  quiere  V.  ?  —  Eso. 

i  Que  cuchillo  veude  V.  ?  —  El  de 

hieiTO. 
I  Que  casas  compra  V.  ?  —  Las  de 

madera. 
Esto  es  bueno,  aquello  es  malo. 
Deme  V.  eso. 
Lo  que  tengo  es  bueno. 


Examples. 

My  pencil  and  my  brother's  (that  of 

my  brother). 
My  pencils  and  my  brother's  (those 

of  my  brother). 
My  pen  and  my  sister's  (that  of  my 

sister. ) 
My  pens  and  my  sister's  (those  of 

my  sister). 
My  books  and  my  friend's  (those  of 

my  friend). 
My  houses  and  my  brother's  (those 

of  my  brother. 

This  one  is  large,  that  one  is  small. 

This  one  is  large,  that  one  is  small. 

These  are  good,  those  are  bad. 

These  are  good,  those  are  bad. 

This  (thing)  is  mine,  that  (thing)  is 
his. 

What  (which)  book  will  you  have  ?, 

—  This  one  or  that  one. 

What  (which)  pen  will  you  have  ? 

—  This  one  or  that  one. 

What  (which)  books  will  you  have  ? 

—  These  or  those. 

What  (which)  pens  will  you  have  ? 

—  These  or  those. 

What  w^ill  you  have  ?  —  That. 

What  knife  do  you  sell  ?  —  The  iron 

one. 
What  houses  do  you  buy  ?  —  The 

wooden  ones. 
This  is  good,  that  is  bad. 
Give  me  that. 
What  I  have  is  good. 


96 


LESSON   16. 


I  Que  es  eso  ? 

I  Qiiien  es  ?  —  Soy  yo. 

i  Quien  habla  ?  —  Es  ella. 

El  es  Ingles. 

Ellas  son  Francesas. 

Su  hermano  es  sastre. 


What  is  that  ? 

Who  is  it  ?  —  It  is  I. 

Who  speaks  ?  —  It  is  she. 

He  is  English. 

They  (fern.)  are  French. 

His  brother  is  a  tailor. 


I  V.  tieue  dinero,  no  es  verdad  ? 
I  El  esta  malo,  no  es  verdad  ? 
i  V.  habla  ingles,  no  es  verdad  ? 
I  V.  quiere  comprar  la  casa,  no  es 

verdad  ? 
I  V.  puede  venir,  no  es  verdad  ? 
I  V.  salio,  no  es  verdad  ? 


You  have  money,  have  you  not  ? 
He  is  sick,  is  he  not  ? 
You  speak  English,  do  you  not  ? 
You  wish  to  buy  the  house,  do  you 

not  ? 
You  can  come,  can  you  not  ? 
You  went  out,  did  you  not  ? 


Vocabulario. 
El  haul,  the  trunk. 
El  papel,  thex^aper. 
El  paquet9,  the  package. 
El  pulpero,  the  grocer. 
El  vaso,  the  glass. 
La  plata,  the  silver. 
Las  tijeras,  the  scissors. 
Ayer,  yesterday. 


Vocabulary. 
De  este  modo,  in  this  way. 
Demasiado,  too,  too  much,  too  many. 
Dice,  says. 

Hace  V.  ?  do  you  do  ? 
Julio,  Julius. 
Limpio,  clean. 
Por  supuesto,  of  course. 


Exercise  31  • 

1.  Tiene  V.  mis  tijeras  ?  2.  Tengo  las  de  su  hermana.  3.  [  Quiere 
V.  este  pedazo  de  pan  6  aquel  ?  4.  Deme  V.  ese.  5.  [  Donde  estan 
mis  libros  ?  6.  Los  de  V.  estan  en  mi  cuarto,  pero  los  de  su  hermano 
estan  aqui.  7.  i  Quiere  V.  el  reloj  de  oro  6  el  de  plata  ?  8.  Quiero 
el  de  oro,  por  supuesto.  9.  Carlos  y  Eduardo  ya  tienen  sus  baules,  el 
de  Carlos  es  muy  grande,  pero  el  de  Eduardo  es  demasiado  pequeiio. 
10.  Deme  V.  otra  pluma,  la  que  tengo  es  muy  mala.  11.  El  que  dice 
eso,  es  im  hombre  malo.  12.  ^  Tiene  V.  la  pluma  de  Enrique  ? 
13.  Tengo  la  de  Julio.  14.  Aqui  esta  el  libro  de  mi  hermano  y  el 
mio  ;  este  es  mas  bonito  que  aquel.  15.  Las  manzanas  de  hoy  son 
mejores  que  las  de  ayer.  16.  i  Quiere  V.  este  vaso  6  aquel  1  17.  Deme 
V.  el  que  V.  tiene  ;  el  que  esta  alii  no  estd  limpio.  18.  [  Sabe  V.  lo 
que  tengo  ?  19.  Yo  se  muy  bien  lo  que  V.  tiene.  20.  i  Que  quiere 
V.  aqui  ?    21.  Yo  quiero  lo  que  es  mio.     22.  [  Que  es  eso  ?     23.  Es 


DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS.  97 

im  pedazo  de  papel.  24.  Estos  dos  hombres  son  hermanos,  el  que 
tiene  el  sombrero  negro  habla  frances.  25.  i  Quien  esta  a  la  puerta  ? 
26.  Es  im  muchacho  con  un  paquete.  27.  j  Es  un  paquete  grande  1 
28.  No,  es  un  paqnete  niuy  pequeno.  29.  [  Es  aquello  para  ustedes  ? 
30.  No,  es  para  mi  liermano. 

Exercise  32. 

1.  I  have  two  pencils  ;  this  one  is  for  you  and  that  one  for  your 
sister.  2.  These  gentlemen  are  French,  and  those  are  English  ;  the 
latter  are  rich,  but  the  former  are  poor.  ^  3.  Are  the  apples  good  ? 
4.  Those  of  our  grocer  are  very  good.  5.  Is  this  package  for  you  ? 
6.  No  ;  not  this  one,  but  that  one.  7.  What  pen  will  you  have  ? 
8.  Give  me  the  gold  one.  9.  My  house  is  small,  but  my  brother's  is 
much  smaller.  10.  Give  me  that.  11.  I  want  this,  but  not  that. 
12.  Is  this  well  1  13.  This  is  well,  but  that  is  not  so  well.  14.  Are 
those  gentlemen  English  ?  15.  They  are  French.  16.  Who  is  at  the 
door  l  is  it  Edward  1  17.  No,  sir,  it  is  Henry.  18.  What  is  that  ! 
19.  It  is  a  little  box.  20.  For  whom  is  that  1  21.  It  is  for  your 
brother.  22.  Is  it  good  1  23.  It  is  not  good.  24.  How  do  you  do 
that  ?  25.  In  this  way  ;  it  is  very  easy.  26.  Do  you  speak  English 
or  French  ?  27.  I  speak  English,  but  not  French.  28.  Who  is  the 
man  at  the  door  1  29.  It  is  not  a  man,  it  is  a  woman.  30.  Will 
you  have  this  or  that  ?  31.  I  don't  wish  anything.  32.  Who  is  it  1 
33.  It  is  I. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  In  the  foregoing  lesson  the  difference  between  este,  ese, 
and  aqnel  has  been  sufficiently  explained.  The  same  rule  (L. 
15,  E.  I)  is  applicable  to  the  neuter  esto,  eso,  and  aquello,  that 
is  to  say,  that  esto  refers  to  the  object  nearer  to  the  speaker ; 
eso  to  the  object  nearer  to  the  person  spoken  to,  and  aquello  the 
object  equally  distant  from  the  speaker  and  the  person  who  is 
addressed  : 

Esto  es  bueno,  eso  es  inalo  ;         This  (thing)  is  good,  that  one  is  had  ;  hut 
pero  aquello  es  peor,  that  one  there  is  worse. 

2.  When  there  are  two  objects  in  the  sentence  to  which  ref- 

7 


98  LESSON    16. 

erence  is  to  be  made,  aquel  is  used  for  the  first  one  mentioned, 
and  este  for  the  last  mentioned. 

The  same  rule  is  applicable  to  the  feminine,  the  j)lural,  and 
the  neuter : 

Carlos  era  grande,  Federico  ambi-         Charles  teas  great,  Frederic  amhi- 
cioso  ;    este    (Federico)  valiente,  tious ;  the  latter  brave,  the  former 

aquel  (Carlos)  poderoso,  powerful. 

3«  Esto  is  also  used  when  referring  to  something  which  the 
speaker  has  already  mentioned  ;  and  eso  when  referring  to  some- 
thing mentioned  by  the  person  who  is  addressed  : 

Esto  que  yo  digo,  es  cierto,  TFhai  I  say  is  certain. 

Eso  que  V.  dice,  no  es  verdad,  What  you  say  is  not  true. 

4,  When  a  fourth  object  is  referred  to,  the  adjective  otro, 
other,  is  added  to  the  adjective,  or  to  the  pronoun : 

Aquel  otro  libro,         That  other  hook. 
Aquel  otro,  That  other  one. 

5 1    The  word  mismo  is   often  added  to  the  Demonstrative 
Pronouns  to  call  attention  more  especially  to  them : 
Este  mismo,  Tliis  very  or  same  one. 

Aquel  mismo,  Tlmt  very  or  same  one. 

6*    That  of  is  rendered  by  el  de  or  la  de,  and  those  of  by  los 

de  or  las  de  according  to  the  gender  of  the  noun  referred  to. 
The  English  formation  of  the  possessive  does  not  exist  in 
Spanish  : 

Mi  libro  y  el  de  mi  amigo.  My  hooTc  and  my  friend! s. 

Nuestra  casa  y  la  de  nuestros  amigos,         Our  house  and  our  friends'. 

Mis  amigos  y  los  de  V.  My  friends  and  yours. 

Sus  libros  de  V.  y  los  de  Juan,  Your  books  and  John's. 

7t  That  which,  the  one  which,  are  rendered  by  el  que  or  la 
que,  and  those  wMch  by  los  que  or  las  que. 

ftuien,  who,  may  be  used  instead  of  que  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence  when  speaking  of  a  person  : 

El  que  w  el  quien  habla  mal  de  He  who  {ivhoever)  speaks  ill  of  his 

su  projimo,   no  sera  admitido  neighbor  shall  not  be  admitted  in 

en  mi  casa,  my  house. 


AUXILIARY   VERB  HABER,  99 

8.  The  article  and  the  Demonstrative  or  Relative  Pronoun 
should  never  be  separated  in  Spanish,  and  when  this  separation 
takes  place  in  English  a  different  construction  must  be  adopted  : 

Yeri*an  los  que  dicen  eso,         Those  are  'mistaken  who  say  thai. 

9.  Ello  is  often  used  for  eso,  and  corresponds  also  to  the  Pro- 
noun it : 

Hablamos  de  ello,  ^Fe  speak  of  it, 

10.  The  Pronoun  it  and  its  corresponding  they  for  the  plural, 
when  the  subjects  of  a  sentence,  are  generally  suppressed  in 

Spanish  : 

Es  bueno,  it  is  good;  Son  buenos,  they  are  good. 

Esta  aqui,  it  is  here  ;  Estan  alia,  they  are  there. 


XVII. 

Lesson  XYII 

AUXILIARY  VT:RB  HABEB,  to  have. 

Yohe, 

I  have. 

Tu  has, 

thou  JiasL 

Elba, 

he  has. 

Ella  ha, 

she  has. 

Nosotros  hemos. 

we  have. 

Vosotros  habeis,  -^ 

V.  ha, I 

you  have. 

V.V.han,...  J 

Ellos  (m.)  ban. 

they  have. 

Ellas  (/.)  ban. 

they  have. 

Begular  Verbs, 

Verhs  of  the  \st  Conjugation,  ending  in  ar : 
Hablar,  hablado,  to  speak,  spoken. 

Cortar,  cortado,  to  cut,  cut. 

Tomar,  tornado,  to  take,  taken. 

Coraprar,  comprado,         to  buy,  bought. 

Verhsrof  the  2d  Conjiigation,  ending  in  er: 
Coiner,  comido,  to  eat,  eaten. 

Beber,  bebido,  to  drink,  drank. 

Vender,  vendido,  to  sell,  sold. 

Temer,  temido,  to  fear,  feared. 


100. 


LESSON   17. 


^ 


Verbs  of  the  3d  Conjugation,  ending  in  ir:  - 

Recibir,  recibido,  to  receive,  received. 

Subir,  subido,  to  ascend,  to  go  up;  ascended^  gone  up. 

Partir,  partido,  to  divide,  divided. 


Sjemplos. 

i  A  quien  ha  hablado  V.  ? 

He  hablado  a  este  hombre. 

Mi  hermano  ha  vendido  su  casa. 

Los  muchachos  ban  comido  el  pan. 

l  Han  recibido  V.  V.  dinero  ? 

Hemos  recibido  un  poco. 

i  Donde  ha  estado  V.  ? 

He  estado  eu  la  casa. 

i  Quien  ha  tornado  mi  sombrero  ? 

Nadie  ha  tornado  su  sombrero. 

Hemos  sido  muy  felices. 

i  Quien  ha  salido  ? 

Nadie  ha  salido. 

No  he  comprado  nada. 

He  dado  un  pedazo  de  pan  al  pobre. 


Examples. 

To  whom  have  you  spoken  ? 
I  have  spoken  to  this  man. 
My  brotlier  has  sold  his  house. 
The  boys  have  eaten  the  bread. 
Have  3^ou  received  any  money  ? 
We  have  received  a  'little. 
Where  have  you  been  ? 
I  have  been  in  the  house. 
Who  has  taken  my  hat  ? 
Nobody  has  taken  your  hat. 
We  have  been  very  happy. 
Who  has  gone  out  ? 
Nobody  has  gone  out. 
I  have  not  bought  anything. 
I  have  given  a  piece  of  bread  to  the 
poor  man. 


Vocabulario. 

El  cajon,  the  drawer. 

El  campo,  the  country,  i 

El  pais,  the  countrjj.^ 

El  panuelo,  the  handkerchief. 

El  peso,  the  dollar. 

El  tiempo,  the  time. 

La  cosa,  the  thing. 

Las  mercancias,  the  goods. 

La  sopa,  the  soup. 

Aprender,  to  learn. 

Castig-ar,  to  punish. 

Dar,  to  give. 

Desobediente,  disobedient. 


Vocabulary. 

Estar,  to  he. 
Eiiropa,  Europe. 
~-  Hallar,  to  find. 
Malo,  umvell. 
Otro,  another. 
Perder,  to  lose. 
Porque,  because. 
Salir,  to  go  out. 
Ser,  to  be. 
Tener,  to  have. 
Todo  el  mundo,  ererij 
Varies,  as,  several. 
Vivir,  to  live. 


1  Campo  refers  to  the  country  contrasted  with  the  city,  while  pais  means 
a  tract  of  land  inhabited  by  a  nation. 


AUXILIARY   VERB   HABER.  101 

Exercise  33. 

1.  Los  muchachos  han  comido  todas  las  maiizanas  del  jardin. 
2.  I  Ha  dado  V.  el  cafe  al  caballero  1  3.  No,  seiiora,  pero  he  dado 
el  te  a  la  senora.  4.  [  Ha  comprado  V.  una  mesa  ?  5.  Si,  senor,  he 
comprado  una  mesa  de  caoba.  6.  [  En  donde  ha  hallado  V.  esto  1 
7.  En  nuestro  jardin.  8.  i  Quien  ha  tomado  dinero  de  mi  cajon  I 
9.  Su  hermano  de  V.  ha  tomado  dinero  y  papeles.  10.  Que  sopa  han 
tenido  V.  V.  ?  11.  Hemos  tenido  una  sopa  muy  buena.  12.  |  Que 
han  comprado  V.  V.  hoy  1  13.  Hemos  comprado  muchisimas  cosas. 
14.  I  Que  ha  perdido  su  hermanade  V.  1  15.  Ha  perdido  supanuelo. 
16.  I  Han  comprado  V.  V.  manzanas  ?  17.  No,  senor,  hemos  com- 
prado peras.  18.  [Ha  recibido  V.  algo  de  su  padre?  19.  He  reci- 
bido  varias  cosas.  20.  i  Ha  estado  Y.  malo  ]  21.  Si,  senor,  he 
estado  bastante  malo.  22.  [  Quien  ha  estado  en  la  casa  \  23.  Nadie 
ha  estado  en  la  casa,  pero  alguno  ha  estado  en  el  jardin.  24.  i  Por- 
que  no  ha  comprado  V.  la  casa  del  medico,  V.  que  es  tan  rico  ? 
25.  Nunca  he  sido  rico.  26.  i  Ha  aprendido  Y.  su  leccion  ?  27.  To- 
davia  no,  no  he  tenido  tiempo.  28.  i  De  quien  ha  hablado  Y.  ? 
29.  He  hablado  de  mis  buenos  amigos.  30.  Mi  hermano  ha  vendido 
su  caballo,  pero  ha  comprado  otro  mas  grande. 

Exercise  34. 

1.  The  soldier  has  given  an  apple  to  the  child.  2.  My  sister  has 
received  'two  letters  from  Paris.  3.  The  children  have  been  in  the 
garden  with  their  little  friends.  4.  Have  the  boys  eaten  the  cheese  ? 
5.  They  have  eaten  the  bread.  6.  Has  the  general  bought  a  house  ? 
7.  He  has  bought  a  house  in  our  street.  8.  Have  you  had  any 
money  ?  9.  I  have  had  two  dollars.  10.  Where  have  you  been, 
John?  11.  I  have  been  in  the  country.  12.  Have  you  bought  your 
silk  dress  in  that  large  store  ?  13.  I  have  bought  no  dress.  14.  Who 
has  been  sick  at  your  house  ?  15.  Every  body  has  been  sick. 
16.  Charles  has  been  disobedient  and  he  has  been  punished.  17.  The 
merchant  has  received  many  goods  from  Europe.  18.  Have  you 
found  anything  in  the  drawer  1  19.  I  have  not  found  anything  in 
it  {en  ^l).  20.  Why  has  not  your  brother  gone  out?  21.  Because 
he  has  not  been  well.  22.  Have  you  bought  anything  for  the  chil- 
dren 1  23.  Yes,  I  have  bought  something  useful  for  them  ( ellos ). 
24.  Have  you  lived  in  that  country  1     25.  No,  sir,  I  have  never  been 


102  LESSON   17. 

in  that  country.  26.  Have  you  eaten  enough,  my  friend  1  27.  Yes, 
sir,  I  have  eaten  and  drank  enough.  28.  Has  your  father  gone  out  ? 
29.  He  has  not  gone  out  yet.  30.  The  soldiers  have  received  less 
bread  than  meat. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1 ,  The  verb  to  have  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  two  different 
verbs,  tener  and  haber. 

Tener,  of  which  we  have  already  spoken  (L.  lY.,  P.  35),  is 
used  as  an  active  verb  to  indicate  a  material  or  immaterial  pos- 
session, and  generally  means  to  possess,  to  hold,  as  : 

Yo  tengo  dinero,  I  have  money.  El  tiene  tiempo,  he  has  time. 

El  tiene  un  haston,  he  Ims  a  stick.  Tenemos  pan,  we  have  bread. 

Haber  is  used  as  an  auxiliary  verb  preceding  the  past  parti- 
ciple as  : 

He  recibido  dinero,  /  have  received  money. 

Hemes  comido  pan,  We  have  eaten  bread. 

Haber  cannot  be  separated  from  the  principal  verb  as  is  the 
case  in  English  in  interrogative  sentences.  Thus  :  Have  you 
given  ?  must  be  rendered  by  ^ha  dado  V.  ?  and  has  he  come  ?  by 
jha  venido  dl? 

2.  Haber  was  formerly  used  as  an  active  verb,  and  had  then 
the  following  Imperative  : 

He  tu,  thou  shalt  have  ;  hayamos,  we  shall  have. 

Haya  el,  he  shall  have  ;  habed,  you  shall  have. 

hayan,  they  shall  have. 

It  may  be  used  even  now  in  sentences  with  the  Infinitive  : 

Aprovechare  cuantos  medios  yo  puedo  /  will  use  all  the  means  I  may 

haber,  have. 

El  empleo  cuanta  influencia  pudo  ha-  He  used  all  the  influence  he  could 

her,  com,mand  (have). 

3«  The  verb  tener  may  be  used  sometimes  as  auxiliary,  and 
the  sense  of  the  sentence  would  be  but  slightly  altered.     In  this 


AUXILIARY   VERB   HABER.  103 

case  the  participle  would  have  to  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  noun  : 

Tengo  escritas  las  cartas,  /  have  the  letters  {all)  written, 

Tenemos  el  dinero  contado,  We  have  the  money  counts. 

This  way  of  expressing  one's  self  ought,  however,  to  be  avoided  by  all 
tliose  not  perfectly  familiar  with  the  language,  as  it  might  lead  to  mistakes 
in  style. 

4#    All  verbs  in  Spanish  end  in  ar,  er,  or  ir. 

Verbs  ending  in  ar  belong  to  the  1st  Conjugation,  as : 

A  mar,  to  love  ;        dar,  to  give  ;        hablar,  to  speak. 
Verbs  ending  in  er  belong  to  the  2d  Conjugation,  as : 
Comer,  to  cat ;        beber,  to  drink  ;        correr,  to  run  ;        tener,  to  ham. 

Verbs  ending  in  ir  belong  to  the  3d  Conjugation,  as  : 
Recibir,  to  receive  ;       huir,  to  flee;       dividir,  to  divide  ;      salir,  to  go  out, 

3,  All  regular  verbs  of  the  1st  Conjugation  end  in  the  Past 
Participle  in  ado,  and  those  of  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugation  in 
ido.  The  same  may  be  said  of  nearly  all  the  irregular  verbs  in 
the  three  Conjugations  :  amar^  amado ;  coger^  COgido ;  atribuirf 
atribuido ;  etc. 


Leccion  XVIII.  lesson  XVIII. 

VERB  HABER,  to  have  (continued). 
Irregular  Participles. 

Abrir,  to  open  ;  abierto,  opened. 

Cubrir,  to  cover  ;  cubierto,  covered. 

Dscir,  to  say,  to  tell;  dicbo,  said,  told. 

Escribir,  to  lorite  ;  escrito,  written. 

Hacer,  to  make,  to  do;  hecho,  'inade,  done, 

Morir,  to  die  ;  muerto,  died. 

Voner,  toput;  puesto,  ;?w^. 

Ver,  to  see  ;  visto,  seen. 

Volver,  to  return  ;  vuelto,  returned. 


104 


LESSON   18, 


Haber  de  and  tener  que : 


I  Que  he  de  hacer  ? 

i  Que  tengo  que  hacer  ? 

V.  ha  de  estudiar,         \ 

V.  tiene  que  estudiar,  { 

I  Que  hemos  de  decir  ? 

l  Que  teiiemos  que  decir, 

V.  V.  han  de  decir  la  verdad, 

V.  V.  tienen  que  decir  la  verdad,. 


What  am  I  to  do  ? 
You  must  study. 
Wliai  are  we  to  say  ? 
You  must  tell  the  truth. 


Preposition  a  and  Active  Verbs : 


i  A  quien  ha  visto  V.  ? 
He  visto  d  su  padre  de  V. 
Amo  d  mis  aniigos, 
Juan  ha  perdido  d  su  padre. 
El  medico  cura  al  enfermo, 

Pero  and 

No  tengo  oro,  i)ero  tengo  plata. 
No  tengo  oro,  sino  plata, 
El  es  joven,  pero  es  muy  prudente. 
No  tenemos  hermanos,  sino  hermanas, 
No  hablo  ingles,  sino  espanol, 
El  no  habla  ingles,  pero.habla  es 
paiiol, 


JVhom  have  you  seen  ? 

I  have  seen  your  father. 

I  love  my  friends. 

John  has  lost  his  father. 

The  physician  cures  the  patient. 

sino : 

/  have  not  gold,  hut  I  have  silver. 
I  have  not  gold,  hut  silver. 
He  is  young,  hut  he  is  very  prudent. 
We  have  no  hrothers,  hut  sisters. 
I  don't  speak  Eiiglish,  hut  Spanish. 
He  does  not  speak  English,  hut  he 
speaks  Spanish. 


O  and  11,  or ;  Y  and  e,  and : 


El  6  yo, 

Uno  u  otro  (hefore  o), 

Tio  y  sobrino, 

Verano  e  invierno,  \  hefore  i 

Padre  e  hijo,  \    or  hi. 


He  or  I. 
One  or  the  other. 
Uncle  and  nephew. 
Summer  and  winter. 
Father  and  son. 


Vocabulario. 
El  criado,  the  servant. 
El  dueiio,  the  owner. 
El  maestro,  the  teacher. 
El  rincon,  the  corner. 
El  teatro,  the  theater. 
El  viaje,  the  journey. 
La  batalla,  the  battle. 
La  carta,  th^  letter. 
'L2i.  manana,  the  morning. 


Vocabulary. 


La  nieve,  the  snow. 
La  tierra,  the  earth. 
La  ventana,  the  windov). 
Alguien,   alguno,   some- 
body, anybody. 
Asi,  thus. 
Con,  with. 
Desde,  since. 
Dos,  two. 


Enfermo,  ill,  sick. 
Escribir,  3.  to  write. 
Espana,  f.  Spain. 
Europa,  f.  Europe. 
Francia,  f.  France.  • 
Italia,  f.  Italy. 
Sino,  hut. 
Tres,  three. 
Viajar,  1.  to  travel. 


AUXILIARY   VERB    HABER.  105 


Exercise  35. 


1.  I  Quien  ha  abierto  la  ventana  ?  2.  Creo  quo  es  el  criado.  3.  ^  A 
quieii  ha  visto  V.  en  el  teatro  ?  4.  He  visto  a  toclos  mi«  amigos. 
5.  [  Quien  ha  dicho  eso  ]  6.  El  panadero  ha  dicho  eso  a  mi  hermano. 
7.  I  Como  ha  hecho  V.  eso  !  8.  Asi.  9.  i  Ha  escrito  V.  a  su  padre  ? 
10.  No,  seiior,  no  he  escrito  todavia  a  nadie.  11.  [Ha  vuelto  su 
fainilia  del  campo  ?  12.  Toda  la  familia  ha  vuelto  a  la  ciudad  desde 
tres  dias.  13.  j  Quien  ha  muerto  en  esa  casa  ?  14.  Nadie  ha  muerto, 
pero  todo  el  raundo  esta  enfermo.  15.  i  Donde  ha  puesto  V.  mi  bas- 
ton  1  16.  Esta  en  el  rincou.  17.  i  A  quien  ha  hablado  V.  en  aquella 
casa?  18.  He  hablado  al  dueiio  de  la  casa.  19.  [Ha  conocido  V.  a 
mi  padre  1  20.  He  conocido  a  su  padre  y  a  sVi  madre  de  V.  en  Fran- 
cia.  21.  [Han  comprado  V.  V.  buenas  manzanas?  22.  Las  manzanas 
que  hemos  comprado  no  son  muy  buenas.  23.  [  Ha  visto  V.  a  mi 
hermana  ?  24.  No  he  visto  a  nadie.  25.  [  Que  tiene  V.  que  hacer '? 
26.    Tengo   muchisimo   que  hacer.      27.    j  Tiene  V.   oro   6  papel? 

28.  No  tengo  oro,  pero  tengo  papel.     29.  Este  caballero  no  habla 
sino  ingles. 

Exercise  36. 

1.  Have  you  seen  anybody  in  the  garden?  2.  I  have  seen  Mr. 
Rojas  and  his  son.  3.  Why  have  you  said  that  ?  4.  I  have  not  said 
anything,  I  have  not  spoken.  5.  Is  the  door  open  ?  6.  The  door  and 
the  window  are  closed.  7.  Have  you  written  to  your  father  ?  8.  I 
have  written  to  my  father,  mother,  and  sisters.  9.  AVho  has  put  my 
cane  in  the  other  room  ?  10.  I  don't  know,  no  one  has  been  here 
since  this  morning.  11.  Has  your  friend  returned  from  Europe? 
12.  He  has  not  returned  yet.  13.  Is  this  gentleman  your  brother  ? 
14.  He  is  not  my  brother,  but  my  cousin.  15.  Where  must  you  go 
this  afternoon?  16.  I  have  to  go  out  with  my  father.  17.  The  gen- 
eral has  died  in  the  battle.  18.  Where  have  the  children  been  this 
morning  ?  19.  They  have  been  in  the  house.  20.  With  what  have 
you  written  that  ?  21.  I  have  written  all  that  with  a  pencil.  22.  Do 
you  know  what  the  teacher  has  said  ?  23.  I  know  very  well  what 
he  has  said.  24.  Is  your  uncle  rich?  25.  He  has  been  rich,  but  he 
is  poor  now.  26.  Have  the  children  written  their  letters  ?  27.  They 
have  w^ritten  two  or  three  letters.     28.  Do  you  know  this  gentleman  ? 

29.  I  know  his  brother. 


106  LESSON    18. 


Gram&tica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  Past  Participle  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  its 
subject  when  accompanied  by  the  verb  estar,  to  he. 

It  remains  invariable  when  used  with  the  auxiliary  haber,  to  have. 

He  comido.  —  Hemos  comido,  I  have  eaten.  —  We  have  eaten. 

Ellos  {or  ellas)  han  comido,  They  have  eateri. 

La  carta  esta  esciita,  The  letter  is  written. 

Las  cartas  estaii  escritas,  Tlie  letters  are  loritten. 

Los  caminos  estan  cubiertos  de  nieve,  The  roads  are  covered  with  snow. 

2.  The  verb  haber  is  also  us.ed  to  express  obligation,  and  is 
then  followed  by  the  preposition  de  and  the  Infinitive  of  the 
principal  verb.  The  verb  tener  followed  by  que  is  used  in  the 
same  way,  and  both  verbs  correspond  then  to  the  English  verb 
must.     The  active  A^erb  deber  has  also  the  same  meaninpj : 


He  de  ir  a  la  ciudad,         -^ 

dad  J 
Debo  ir  a  la  ciudad, 


Tengo  que  ir  a  la  ciudad,  V  I  must  go  to  the  city. 


3«  The  object  of  an  active  verb  requires  the  preposition  a  be- 
fore it  when  this  object  is  a  person,  a  rational  being,  or  a  thing 
personified  : 

Yeo  d  un  hombre,  I  see  a  man. 

Vemos  a,l  hombre,  We  see  the  man. 

Conocemos  d  estos  caballeros,  We  knoiv  these  gentlemen. 


? 


I  A  quien  conoce  Y .  ?  Whmn  do  you  know  ? 

4.  The  preposition  ft,  which  is  not  translated  in  English,  must, 
however,  be  left  out  in  Spanish  after  an  active  verb  and  a  per- 
son, if  by  the  addition  of  this  preposition  the  sentence  should 
not  be  clearly  expressed  : 

Envio  el  hijo  al  padre  (not  :  envio  al  hijo  al  /   send    the    son    to    tlie 

padre),  father. 

Han  robado  un  niiio.  They  have  stolen  a  child. 

Han  robado  d  un  nino  would  mean  They  have  robbed  a  child. 

Quiero  im  criado,  **         **  I  want  a  servant. 

Quiero  d  un  criado,  **         **  Hove  a  servant. 


PRESENT  PAETICIPLE,   OR  GERUND. 


107 


5*  Pero  and  sino  are  both  rendered  by  hut.  Pero  is  used 
when  a  verb  is  expressed  in  the  second  part  of  the  sentence, 
while  sino  is  used  when  the  first  part  of  the  sentence  is  nega- 
tive and  no  verb  is  expressed  in  the  second  part. 

Sino  has  also  the  meaning  of  except,  and  is  used  with  the 
nefifative  : 


Hablo  frances,  pero  no  hablo  ingles, 

No  hablo  frances  sino  ingles, 
El  no  habla  sino  aleman, 


I  speak  French  J  hut  I  do  not  speak 

English. 
I  don't  speak  French^  hut  English. 
He    speaks    nothitig    hut    {except) 

German, 


6i    Solamente,  only,  hut^  may  be  used  instead  of  sino  in  the 
affirmative  : 
No  tengo  oro,  tengo  solamente  papel,        /  have  no  gold,  I  have  only  paper. 


Leccion  XlX* 


Lesson  XIX. 


THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE,   OR  GERUND. 


Amar  ;  amando, 
Hablar;  hablando, 
Comprar;  coniprando, 
Tomar ;  tomando. 


Comer;  comiendo, 
Beber ;  bebiendo, 
Hacer  ;  haciendo, 
Perder ;  perdiendo. 


Recibir  ;  recibiendo, 
Salir  ;  saliendo, 
Partir  ;  partiendo, 
Subir  ;  subiendo. 


\st  Conjugation: 
to  love  ;  loving, 
to  speak  ;  speaking, 
to  huy  ;  huyinjg. 
to  take  ;  taking. 

2d  Conjugation : 

to  eatj  to  dine  ;  eating, 
to  drink  ;  drinking, 
to  do,  to  make  ;  doing, 
to  lose  ;  losing. 


^d  Conjugation: 

to  receive  ;  receiving, 
to  go  out ;  going  out. 
to  divide  ;  dividing, 
to  ascend,  to  go  out ;  ascending,  going  out. 


108 


LESSON    19. 


Leer  ;  leyendo, 
Instruir  ;  instruyendo, 


Decir  ;  diciendo, 
Dormir  ;  diirmiendo, 
Morir;  muiiendo, 
Pedir ;  pidieiido, 
Poder ;  pudiendo, 
Sentir ;  sintiendo. 


Verbs  in  eer  and  uir : 

to  read  ;  reading. 

to  instruct ;  instructing. 

Irregular  Verbs. 

to  say,  to  tell ;  saying^  telling. 

to  sleep;  sleeping. 

to  die  ;  dying. 

■to  ask  for  ;  asking  for. 

to  he  able,  can  ;  being  able. 

to  feel,  to  hear  ;  feeling,  hearing. 


Sjemplos. 

\  De  que  esta  V.  liablando  ? 

Estoy  liablando  del  tiempo. 

Los  muchachos  estaii  jugaiido. 

I  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ? 

Estqy  escribiendo  una  carta. 

i  Que  estan  diciendo  estos  h ombres  ? 

Ko  estan  liablando. 

Mi  inadre  esta  durmiendo. 

Los  ninos  vienen  llorando. 

He  esta  do  leyendo  todo  el  dia. 

Aprendo  estudiando  y  le3^endo. 

I  Que  estan  V.  V.  leyendo  ? 

Estamos  leyendo  un  libro  frances. 


Examples. 
Of  what  are  you  speaking  ? 
I  am  speaking  of  the  weather. 
The  boys  are  playing. 
What  are  you  doing  ? 
I  am  writing  a  letter. 
What  are  these  men  saying  ? 
They  are  not  speaking. 
My  mother Tis  sleeping. 
The  children  are  coming  crying. 
I  have  been  reading  the  whole  day. 
I  learn  by  studying  and  reading. 
What  are  you  reading  ? 
We  are  reading  a  French  book. 


Vocabulario, 
El  albaiiil,  the  tnason. 
El  barco,  the  vessel. 
El  capitan,  the  captain. 
El  gusto,  the  pleasure. 
El  vaso,  the  glass. 
La  fonda,  the  hotel. 
La  tarde,  the  afternoon. 
La  noche,  the  night. 
Abierto,  opened. 
Alemania,  f.  Germany. 
Almorzar,  1.  to  breakfast. 
Bebo,  /  drink. 


Vocabulary. 


Can  tar,  1.  to  sing. 
Concluir,  3.  to  finish. 
Conocer,  2.  to  know. 
Correr,  2.  to  run. 
Estudiar,  1.  to  study. 
Hasta,  until. 
Importante,  important. 
Jugar,  1.  to  play. 
Llegar,  1.  to  arrive. 
Llorar,  1.  to  cry,  to  weep., 
Mandar,  1.  to  send. 


Muchas  gracias,  /  (or 

ive)  thank  you. 
Nosotrcs,  us. 
Pasar,  1,  to  pass. 
Por,  through,  by. 
Pre  star,  1.  to  lend. 
Tarde,  late. 
Tomar,  1.  to  take. 
Va,  goes. 

Venir,  3.  to  corm, 
Ya,  already. 


PRESENT  PARTICIPLES,  OR  GERUND.         109 

Exercise  37. 

1.  I  Que  estan  haciendo  los  muchachos  en  el  cuarto  ?  2.  Estan 
jugando  con  sus  amiguitos.  3.  [  Quien  esta  cantando  en  la  calle  ? 
4.  Una  pobre  mujer  esta  cantando.  5.  Mi  hermano  esta  leyendo,  y 
mi  hermana  esta  escribiendo.  6.  i  Ha  hablado  V.  al  capitan  ?  7.  Yo 
no  he  hablado  a  nadie,  he  estado  en  mi  ciiarto  hasta  ahora.  8.  i  A 
quien  ha  prestado  V.  dinero  ?  9.  He  prestado  dinero  a  su  hermaiio 
de  V.  10.  [Sabe  V.  si  el  general  esta  en  casa  ?  11.  Esta  en  su 
cuarto,  pero  esta  durmiendo.  12.  El  muchacho  va  corriendo  por  las 
calles.  13.  [  De  que  esta  V.  hablando  ?  14.  Estoy  hablando  de  una 
cosa  muy  importante.  15.  [  Quiere  V.  comer  hoy  con  nosotros  ? 
16.  Con  mucho  gusto.  17.  i  En  que  pais  ha  vivido  V.?  18.  He 
vivido  dos  anos  en  Francia,  y  tres  aiios  en  Alemania.  19.  [  Cuantas 
cartas  han  escrito  V.  V.  ?  20.  Hemos  escrito  dos  6  tres.  21.  [  Quiere 
V.  tomar  un  vaso  de  vino  ?  22.  Muchas  gracias,  yo  no  bebo  vino. 
23.  I  Que  ha  dicho  el  medico  ?  24.  No  se  lo  que  ha  dicho,  porque  ha 
hablado  con  mi  hermano.  25.  [  Porque  esta  llorando  ese  muchacho  ? 
26.  El  llora  por  nada.  27.  He  estado  escribiendo  desde  esta  maiiana, 
y  todavia  no  he  concluido  mis  cartas.  28.  [  Donde  ha  pasado  V.  la 
noche  ?  29.  He  pasado  la  noche  en  la  fonda,  no  conociendo  a  nadie 
aqui.  30.  i  Porque  no  ha  venido  V.  a  mi  casa  ?  31.  Porque  no  sabia 
(7  did  not  know)  donde  Y.  vivia  {lived). 

Exercise  38. 

1.  Where  are  the  children  ?  2.  They  are  playing  in  the  garden. 
3.  Have  they  studied  their  lessons  ?  4.  They  have  been  studying  all 
the  morning.  5.  With  whom  were  you  (estaba  V.)  speaking  in  the 
garden  ?  6.  I  was  speaking  with  a  French  gentleman.  7.  Were  you 
sleeping  this  afternoon  ?  8.  No,  I  was  writing  in  my  room.  9.  Who 
is  crying  in  the  other  room  ?  10.  The  little  boy  is  crying.  11.  What 
is  your  brother  doing  now  ?  12.  I  don't  know  where  he  is  now. 
13.  Where  are  you  going  to  ?  14.  T  am  going  home.  15.  T\Tiy  have 
you  eaten  my  bread  ?  16.  Because  I  had  (hahia)  not  eaten  anything 
since  this  morning.  17.  Has  your  father  gone  out?  18.  No,  sir,  he 
is  in  the  house  ;  he  is  breakfasting.  19.  The  masons  are  building  a 
splendid  house  in  our  street.  20.  What  was  (estaba)  that  man  say- 
ing ?  21.  He  was  speaking  of  the  w^eather.  22.  Why  are  you  run- 
ning 1     23.  Because  it  is  already  late.     24.  Have  you  sent  the  money 


110  LESSON   19. 

to  the  tailor  ?  25.  Not  yet,  I  have  not  received  my  money.  26.  This 
poor  boy  has  lost  his  father  and  mother.  27.  Do  you  know  if  the 
vessel  has  arrived  ?  28.  Yes,  sir,  it  has  arrived  ;  I  have  spoken  to 
the  captain.  29.  Who  has  been  in  my  room  this  morning  1  30.  Your 
brothers  and  sisters  have  been  here  and  have  opened  your  room. 
31.  What  is  that  man  asking  for?    32.  He  is  asking  for  money. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1  •  The  Present  Participle  (Gerund)  ends  in  Spanish  in  ando, 
for  the  1st  conjugation  ;  and  in  iendo  for  the  2d  and  3d  conju- 
gations. These  terminations  are  added  to  the  Present  of  tlie 
Infinitive  after  suppressing  the  terminations  ar,  er,  and  ir. 

This  is  the  case  in  regular  verbs  and  also  in  most  of  the  ir- 
regular verbs  :  the  termination  never  changes,  but  the  radical 
part  of  a  few  irregular  verbs  undergoes  a  slight  change  : 

Hablar,  hablando  ;  to  speak,  speaking. 

Comer,  comiendo  ;  to  eat,  eating. 

Escribir,  escrihiendo  ;       to  write,  writing. 

Tedir,  pidiendo  ;  to  ask  for,  asking  for. 

Dormir,  durmiendo  ;        to  sleep,  sleeping. 

2.    Verbs  ending  in  eer  and  uir  change  the  i  into  y : 
Leer,  leyendo  ;  to  read,  reading. 

Instruir,  instruyendo  ;         to  instruct,  instructing. 

3«    The  Present  Participle  used  with  the  verb  estar,  to  he^ 

corresponds  to  the  progressive  form  in  English,  and  expresses 
the  action  of  the  verb  as  continuing  and  unfinished : 

Estoy  leyendo,  /  am  reading. 

I  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ?  What  are  you  doing  ? 

Esta  lloviendo,  It  is  raining. 

El  estaha  escribiendo,  He  was  writing. 

He  estado  leyendo  todo  el  dia,         /  have  been  reading  the  whole  day. 

4,  The  verb  estar  is  not  used  with  the  Present  Participle  of 
the  verbs  ser,  to  he  ;  ir,  to  go  ;  venir,  to  come.  Thus  w^e  would 
not  say  :  estoy  yendo,  /  am  going ;  but  voy,  /  go ;  nor  esta 
viniendo,  he  is  coming,  but  viene,  he  comes  ;  etc. 


PRESENT   PARTICIPLES,   OR   GERUND.  Ill 

5,  When  other  verbs  are  used  as  auxiliaries  of  the  Present 
Participle,  they  sufficiently  explain  themselves  : 

El  nino  sigue  durniiendo,         The  child  continues  sleeping. 
El  viene  corriendo,  He  comes  running. 

6f    The  Present  Participle  indicates  a  certain  continuation  of 
the  action  : 
Andan  entrando  y  saliendo,         They  continioe  coming  in  and  going  out. 

7.  The  Present  Participle  is  also  used  to  express  the  way  in 

which  a  thing  happens  : 

La  tos  se  cura  sudando,  Coughing  is  cured  by  perspiring. 

Se  aprende  estudiando,  Oiie  learns  by  studying. 

8.  It  is  also  used  with  the  preposition  en,  in ;  and  refers 
then  to  the  action  of  the  other  verb  : 

En  acabando  ira,  WJien  he  has  finished  he  will  go. 

Observation.  —  The  preposition  may,  however,  be  left  out  in  most  cases, 
without  altering  the  sense  of  the  sentence. 

9.  The  Present  Participle  of  the  verb  estar  often  precedes 
that  of  another  verb  : 

Estaudo  comiendo,  recibio  la  carta,  Whilst  he  was  dining  he  received 

the  letter. 

10.  The  Present  Participle  is  used  very  frequently  in  Span- 
ish for  the  sake  of  brevity  and  euphony,  and  in  cases  where  the 
English  use  adverbs,  conjunctions,  and  prepositions,  as  :  when, 
as,  while,  whilst,  since,  if,  by,  etc. : 

Habla  durmiendo.  He  talks  while  he  sleeps. 

Se  aprende  leyendo,  One  learns  by  reading. 

Siendo  asi,  no  quiero  ir.  Since  it  is  so,  I  shall  not  go. 

Dandole  yo  licencia,  saldra,  If  I  give  him  permission^  he  will  go  out. 

Viendo  que  su  hermano  no  When  he  saw  tlmt  his  brother  was  not  com- 
venia,  se  fue.  i7ig,  he  went  away. 


112 


LESSON    20. 


Leccion  XX. 


Lesson  XX. 


CARDINAL  NUMBERS. 

The  Cardiual  Numbers  are  : 


Uno,  m.,  una,  /. 

Dos, 

Tres, 

Cuatro, 

Cinco, 

Seis, 

Siete, 

Ocho, 

Nueve, 

Diez, 

Once, 

Doce, 

Trece, 

Catorce, 

Quince, 

Diez  y  seis,^ 

Diez  y  siete, 

Diez  y  ocho, 

Diez  y  nueve, 

Veinte, 

Veinte  y  uno, 

Veinte  y  dos, 

Veinte  y  tres, 

Veinte  y  cuatro, 

Veinte  y  cinco, 

Veinte  y  seis, 

Veinte  y  siete, 

Veinte  y  ocho, 

Veinte  y  nueve, 

Treinta, 

Treinta  y  uno, 

Cuarenta, 

Cincuenta, 


One. 

Two. 

Three. 

Four. 

Five. 

Six. 

Seven. 

Fight. 

Nine. 

Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Nineteen. 

Twenty. 

Twenty-one. 

Twenty-two. 

Twenty-three. 

Twenty-four. 

Twenty-five. 

Twenty-six. 

Twenty-seven. 

Twenty-eight. 

Twenty-nine. 

Thirty. 

Thirty-one. 

Forty. 

Fifty. 


1  These  numbers  are  also  written  in  one  word,  as  :  Dieziseis,  veintiuno, 
treintaiuno,  etc. 


CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 


113 


Sesenta, 

Setenta, 

Ochenta, 

Noventa, 

Ciento,! 

Ciento  y  uno, 

Ciento  y  diez, 

Doscientos  (-as,  /.), 

Trescientos  (-as,  /.), 

Cuatrocientos  (-as,  /.), 

Quinientos  (-as,/.), 

Seicientos  (-as,/.), 

Setecientos  (-as,  /. ), 

Ochocientos  (-as,  /.), 

Novecieiitos  (-as,/.) 

Mil, 

Mil  y  ciento. 

Mil  y  doscientos  (-as,/.) 

Dos  mil, 

Cien  ^  mil, 

Doscientos  (-as,  /.)  mil, 

Un  millon, 

Dos  millones, 

Zero  (cero). 


Sixty. 

Seventy. 

Eighty. 

Ninety. 

One  hundred. 

One  hundred  and  one. 

One  hundred  and  ten. 

Two  hundred. 

Three  hundred. 

Four  hundi'ed. 

Five  hundred. 

Six  hundred. 

Seven  hundred. 

Eight  hundred. 

Nine  hundred. 

One  thousand. 

One  thousand  one  hundred. 

One  thousand  two  hundred. 

Two  thousand. 

One  hundred  thousand. 

Two  hundred  thousand. 

One  million. 

Two  millions. 

Zero  or  cipher. 


Dies  de  la  semana. 


Days  of  the  "week. 


Domingo, 

Liines, 

Martes, 

Miercoles, 

Jueves, 

Viernes, 

Sabado, 


Sunday. 

Monday. 

Tuesday. 

Wednesday. 

Thursday. 

Friday. 


El  domingo, 

Los  liines. 

El  martes  por  la  manana. 

El  miercoles  por  la  noche. 

El  jueves  proximo,    ) 

El  jueves  que  viene,  ( 


Saturday.  El  sabado  pasado, 


On  Sunday. 
On  Mondays. 
Tuesday  morning. 
Wednesday  evening. 

Next  Thursday. 

Last  Saturday. 


Divisiones  del  dia. 

La  manana, 
El  dia. 
La  tarde, 


Divisions  of  the  day. 

The  morning. 
The  day. 
The  afternoon. 


1  Ciento   drops  the   syllable  to  before  another  word.      Cien  hombres, 
One  hundred  inen. 
8 


114 


LESSON   20. 


La  noche, 

Manatia  por  la  manana, 
Manana  por  la  uoche, 
De  dia, 
De  noche, 
Buenos  dias, 
Buenas  tardes, 
Buenas  noches. 


The  evening,  the  night. 

To  -morro w  inorn ing. 

To-morrow  evening. 

In  day-time. 

In  the  evening,  at  night. 

Good  morning,  good  day. 

Good  afternoon. 

Good  evening,  good  night. 


Vocabulario. 
El  ailo,  the  year. 
El  banco,  the  bank. 
El  bocoy,  the  hogshead. 
El  correo,  tJie  post-office. 
El  dia,  the  day. 
El  hotel,  the  hotel. 
El  mes,  the  month. 
El  minuto,  the  minute. 
El  saco,  the  bag. 
La  biblioteca,  the  library. 
La  caballeria,  the  cavalry. 
La  caballeriza,  the  stable. 
La  carne  de  vaca,  the  beef. 
La  estacion,  the  season. 
La  bora,  the  hour. 
La  libra,  the  pound. 
La  persona,  the  person. 
La  semana,  the  week. 


Vocabulary. 
La  tripulacion,  the  crew. 
Anocbe,  last  night. 
Como,  about,  how. 
Contar,  to  count, 
Contiene,  contains. 
Convidar,  to  invite. 
Cuando,  when. 
En  casa,  at  home. 
Lo  siento,  /  am  sorry  for  it. 
Mas,  more. 
Matar,  to  kill. 
i  Puede  V.  ?  can  you  ? 
Puedo,  /  can. 
Necesitar,  to  need. 
Nosotros,  us. 
Publico,  public. 
Solamente,  only. 
TInos  pocos,  a  few. 


Exercise  39, 

1.  He  comprado  doscientos  bocoyes  de  aziicar  y  trescientos  sacos  de 
cafe.  2.  [  Que  ban  comprado  V.  V.  hoy  ?  3.  Hemos  comprado  diez 
polios  y  cincuenta  libras  de  carne  de  vaca.  4.  i  Cuanto  dinero  ha 
recibido  V.  1  5.  He  recibido  cuatrocientos  y  noventa  y  niieve  pesos. 
6.  [  Y  porque  no  quinientos  ?  7.  Porque  hemos  pagado  un  peso  en 
el  correo.  8.  Un  mes  tiene  yeinte  y  ocho,  veinte  y  nueve,  treinta,  6 
treinta  y  un  dias.  9.  El  dia  tiene  veinte  y  cuatro  boras  ;  la  bora 
tiene  sesenta  minutos.  10.  Un  ano  tiene  trescientos  sesenta  y  cinco, 
6  trescientos  sesenta  y  seis  dias.  11.  [  Cuando  va  V.  a  casa  de  su  her- 
mano  1  12.  Voy  los  miercoles.  13.  EI  general  tenia  (had)  cincuenta 
mil  bombres  de  infanteria  y  diez  mil  bombres  de  caballeria.     14.  Esta 


CAKDINAL  NUMBERS.  115 

aldea  no  tiene  sino  dos  calles.  15.  El  principe  tiene  mas  de  cincuenta 
caballos  en  sus  caballerizas.  16.  i  Cuando  esta  V.  en  casa  ?  17.  Estoy 
en  casa  todos  los  dias  por  la  noche.  18.  Hemos  matado  mas  de  veinte 
pajaros  en  el  jardin.  19.  Una  semana  tiene  siete  dias,  ciento  y  sesenta 
y  ocho  horas,  y  diez  mil  y  ochenta  minutos.  20.  Un  ano  tiene  cin- 
cuenta y  dos  semanas,  doce  meses,  y  cuatro  estaciones.  21.  i  Ha 
contado  V.  todo  el  dinero  ?  22.  He  contado  tres  mil  JDesos  en  oro,  y 
dos  mil  pesos  en  papel.  23.  i  A  cuantas  personas  ha  convidado  V. 
para  el  domingo  1  24.  No  he  convidado  todavia  a  nadie  ?  25.  i  Ha 
perdido  soldados  el  general  1  26.  Ha  perdido  dos  mil  de  sus  me j ores 
soldados.  27.  [  Cuanto  dinero  quiere  V.  ?  28.  Deme  V.  doscientos 
y  cincuent-a  pesos.  29.  [Es  bastante?  30.  Es  bastante  con  los 
ochenta  pesos  que  yo  tengo. 

Exercise  40, 

1.  Our  city  has  now  twenty  thousand  inhabitants  ;  in  1860,  it  had 
(tenia)  only  a  few  houses,  and  about  five  hundred  inhabitants.  2.  The 
vessel  has  a  crew  of  twenty-two  men.  3.  Charles's  father  is  one  of 
the  richest  men  in  (de)  our  town  ;  he  has  at  least  two  millions  of  dol- 
lars. 4.  Have  you  bought  apples  or  pears  1  5.  I  bought  a  hundred 
apples,  but  no  pears.  6.  Washington  was  born  {nacio)  in  1732,  and 
died  (murio)  in  1799.  7.  Where  are  you  going  on  Monday  next? 
8.  I  don't  know  yet.  9.  I  go  to  school  on  Mondays,  Tuesdays,  Wed- 
nesdays, Thursdays,  and  Fridays  ;  on  Saturdays  I  go  to  the  country, 
and  on  Sundays  to  church.  10.  Do  you  work  in  day-time  or  in 
the  evening  ?  11.  I  always  work  in  the  evening.  12.  Can  you  come 
to-morrow  morning?  13.  No,  but  I  can  come  to-morrow  evening. 
14.  Have  you  any  money  for  us  1  15.  I  have  twenty-five  dollars  for 
you,  and  fifty  dollars  for  your  brother.  16.  It  is  not  enough  ;  I  need 
twelve  dollars  more.  17.  I  am  sorry  for  it,  but  I  have  not  one  dollar 
more.  18.  Mr.  Felix  Ronda  has  more  than  twenty  houses  in  the 
city.  19.  This  hotel  has  more  than  two  hundred  rooms.  20.  We 
have  a  hotel  in  our  city  which  (que)  contains  three  hundred.  21.  How 
many  dollars  do  you  need  to  (para)  buy  that  horse  ?  22.  I  need  one 
hundred  and  twenty  dollars,  having  already  one  hundred  and  eighty 
dollars  in  the  bank.  23.  My  father  has  given  five  hundred  pounds 
of  meat  to  the  poor.  24.  There  are  (hay)  more  than  twenty  thou- 
sand volumes  in  our  Public  Library.  25.  There  were  (habia)  at  least 
four  thousand  persons  at  (en)  the  theater  last  night. 


116  LESSON    20. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1 ,  Uno,  one,  a,  an,  has  for  feminine  una.  Both  add  s  in  the 
plural  when  used  substantively  : 

Los  iinos  y  los  otros,  m.,  ) 

Las  Unas  y  las  otras,  /.,    j  ^^'  ^^^  ^^^^  ^^  '^^'''''' 

2.  From  dos,  tivo,  up  to  ciento,  hundred,  the  numbers  are 
plural  and  common  to  both  genders ;  but  from  doscientos,  two 
hundred,  to  novecientos,  7iine  hundred,  the  termination  OS  is 
changed  into  as  for  the  feminine  : 

Tres  hombres  y  cuatro  mujeres,  Three  ivomen  and  four  men, 

Doscientos  hombres  y  trescientas         Two  hundred  tiicn  and  three  hundred 
nnijeres,  women. 

3t  The  conjunction  y,  and,  is  placed  only  before  the  last 
number  : 

Doscientos  noventa  y  ocho,         Two  hundred  and  ninety -eight. 

4.  Ciento  drops  the  last  syllable  before  a  noun.  [In  the 
same  way  uno  drops  also  the  0  before  a  noun.] 

Cien  hombres  y  cien  mujeres,       One  hundred  mtn  and  mie  hundred  women, 
Veinte  y  un  muchachos,  Twenty -o^ae  hoys. 

5,  Although  mil,  one  thousand,  has  neither  gender  nor  num- 
ber, it  may  be  used  in  certain  cases  in  the  plural,  as  in  English, 
and  is  then  a  noun  : 

Este  hombre  ha  gastado  muchos  miles,  This  man  has  spent  many  thousaiids. 

6*    The  preposition  a  is  left  out  after  an  active  verb  when  the 
object  of  the  sentence  is  preceded  by  a  cardinal  number : 
He  visto  veinte  hombres  (not  a  veinte  hombres),        Iliave  seen  twenty  men. 

7.  More  than,  less  than,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  mas  de, 
and  menos  de  before  a  cardinal  number : 

Mas  de  cien  pesos,  More  than  a  hundred  dollars. 

Menos  de  tres  dias.         Less  than  three  days. 

8.  Eleven  hundred,  twelve  hundred,  thirteen  hundred,  etc., 
cannot  be  expressed  as  in  English,  but  must  be  translated  : 

Mil  y  ciento.  One  thousand  one  hundred. 

Mil  y  doscientos,  One  thousand  two  hundred. 

Mil  y  trescientos.         One  thousand  three  hundred. 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 


117 


Leccion  XXI. 


Lesson  XXI. 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 


Primero  or  primo, 

Segundo, 

Tercero  or  tercio, 

Cuarto, 

Quinto, 

Sesto, 

Septimo, 

Octavo, 

Nono  or  uoveno, 

Decimo, 

Undecimo, 

Duodecimo, 

Decimo  tercio,^ 

Decimo  cuarto, 

Decimo  quinto, 

Decimo  sesto, 

Decimo  septimo, 

Decimo  octavo, 

Decimo  nono, 

Vigesimo, 

Vigesimo  primo, 

Vigesimo  segundo, 

Vigesimo  tercio,  etc. 

Trigesimo, 

Cuadragesimo, 

Quincuagesimo, 

Sexagesimo, 

Septuagesimo, 

Octagesimo, 

Nonagesimo, 

Centesimo, 

Centesimo  primo, 

Centesimo  undecimo, 

Ducentesimo, 


First 

Sccotid. 

Third. 

Fourth, 

Fifth, 

Sixth. 

Seventh. 

Eighth. 

NiTith. 

TentJi. 

Eleventh. 

Twelfth. 

Thirteenth. 

Fourteenth. 

Fifteenth. 

Sixteenth. 

Seventeenth, 

Eighteenth. 

Ivineteenth. 

Twentieth. 

Tweyity-flrst. 

Twenty-second. 

Twenty -third. 

Thirtieth. 

Fortieth. 

Fiftieth. 

Sixtieth. 

Seventieth. 

Eightieth. 

Ninetieth. 

Hundredth. 

Hundred  and  first. 

Hundred  and  eleventh. 

Two  hundredth. 


1  These  numbers  are  also  written  in  one  word,  as  decimo  tercio,  deoi- 
mocuarto,  etc. 


118 


LESSON  21. 


Trecentesimo, 

Cuadragentesirao, 

Q  uingentesimo, 

Sesceutesimo, 

Septengeiitesimo, 

Octogentesimo, 

Nonagentesimo, 

Milesimo, 

Dumilesimo, 

Diezmilesimo, 

Millonesimo, 


Three  hundredth. 
Four  hundredth. 
Five  hundredth. 
Six  huTidredth. 
Seven  hundredth. 
Fight  hundredth. 
Nine  hundredth. 
Thousandth. 
Two  thousandth. 
Ten  thousandth. 
Millionth. 


Niimeros  fraccionarios. 


La  mitad, 
Un  medio, 
Un  tercio, 
Dos  tercios, 
Un  cuarto, 
Tres  cuartos, 
Un  quinto, 
Un  sesto  or  ) 
Un  seisavo,  ) 
Un  septimo, 
Un  octavo, 
Un  noveno, 
Un  decimo. 


The  half. 
One  half. 
One  third. 
Two  thirds. 
One  fourth. 
Three  f our  tJis. 
One  fifth. 

One  sixth. 

One  seventh. 
One  eighth. 
One  ninth. 
One  tenth. 


Un 
Un 
Un 
Un 
Un 
Un 
Un 


Un 
Un 
Un 
Un 


Fractional  numbers. 

undecimo  or  onzavo.  One  eleventh. 


dozavo, 
trezavo, 
catorzavo, 
quinzavo, 
diez  y  seisavo, 
diez  y  sietavo, 

etc.         etc. 

veintavo, 
treintavo, 
centavo, 
milavo. 


One  twelfth. 
One  thirteenth. 
One  fourteenth. 
One  fifteenth. 
One  sixteenth. 
One  seventeenth. 

etc. 

One  twentieth. 
One  thirtieth. 
One  hundredth. 
One  thousandth. 


Collective  Numbers. 

Un  par,  .A  pair.  Una  quincena,       Fifteen. 

Una  docena,      A  dozen.  Una  sesentena,       Sixty. 


Multiplicative  Numbers. 


Simple,  Single. 

Doble,  Double. 

Triple,r  Treble. 

Cuadruple  or  cuadruplo,  Quadruple. 
Quintuple  o?'  quintuplo,  Quintuple. 

Una  vez,  once. 
Dos  veces,  twice. 
Tres  veces,  three  times. 


Sestuple  or  sestuplo,  Sextuple. 

Septuple  or  septuplo,  Septuple. 

Octuple  or  octuplo,  Octuple. 

Decuple  or  decuplo,  Decuple. 

Centuple  or  centuplo.  Centuple, 

Esta  vez,  this  time. 
Aquella  vez,  that  time. 
Todas  las  veces,  every  time. 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 


119 


Varias  veces,  several  times, 
Algunas  veces,  sometimes. 
La  priraera  vez,  tJie  first  time. 
La  ultima  vez,  the  last  time. 


Cada  vez,  each  time. 
Muchas  veces,  many  times, 
Otra  vez,  anotlier  time. 
La  pr6xima  vez,  next  time. 


Meses 

del  ano. 

Months  of  the  year. 

Enero, 

January. 

Julio, 

Jidy. 

Febrero, 

February. 

Agosto, 

August. 

Marzo, 

March. 

Setiembre, 

September. 

Abril, 

Aiwil. 

Octubre, 

October. 

Mayo, 

May. 

Noviembre, 

November. 

Junio, 

June. 

Dicieinbre, 

December. 

Las 

estaciones. 

The  Seasons. 

La  prima  vera,  the  spring. 

El  verano  or  el  estio,  the  summer. 


El  otoho,  the  autumn,  the  fall. 
EI  invierno,  the  winter. 


Ejemplos. 

i  Que  dia  del  mes  tenemos  ?a 
I  Que  dia  es  hoy  ?  V 

I  A  cuantos  estamos  ?  J 

Hoy  es  el  priniero. 
Mariana  es  el  cinco. 
Estamos  a  dos  de  Febrero. 
Naci  el  quince  de  Mayo. 
El  vapor  sale  el  diez  de  este  mes. 

I  Que  tomo  tiene  V.  ? 
Tengo  el  primer  tomo. 
Enrique  es  el  quinto  en  la  clase. 


Examples. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

To-day  is  the  first. 

To-morrow  is  the  fifth. 

It  is  the  second  of  February, 

I  was  born  on  the  fifteenth  of  May. 

The  steamer  leaves  on  the  tenth  of 

this  month. 
Which  volume  have  you  ? 
I  have  the  first  volume. 
Henry  is  the  fifth  in  the  class. 


Vocabulario. 

El  almuerzo,  the  breakfast. 

El  capitulo,  the  chapter. 

El  cuaderno,  the  copy-book. 

El  emperador,  the  emperor. 

El  huevo,  the  egg. 

El  ingenio,  the  genius. 

El  jamon,  the  ham. 

El  pavo,  tlie  turkey. 

El  periddico,  the  newspaper. 


Vocabulary. 


El  vapor,  the  steamer. 
La  onza,  the  ounce. 
La  parte,  the  part. 
Asi,  therefore.^ 
Cada,  each. 
Comer,  to  eat. 
Cor  to,  short. 
Cuando,  when. 
Dar,  to  give. 


Despues  de,  after. 
Leer,  to  read. 
Pedro,  Peter. 
Pertenece,  belongs. 
Saro,  rare. 
Rusia,  Russia. 
Sale,  leaves. 
Siempre,  always. 
Viene,  comes. 


120  LESSON   21. 

Exercise  41. 

1.  Febrero  es  el  segundo  mes  del  ano.  2.  Enrique  y  Eduardo  son 
los  dos  primeros  discipulos  de  la  clase.  3.  [  Cuando  ha  escrito  V.  a 
sii  padre  ?  4.  He  escrito  la  primera  vez  el  tres  de  Enero  de  mil  ocho- 
cientos  sesenta  y  cinco,  y  la  segunda  vez  en  el  mes  de  Mayo  del 
mismo  aiio.  5.  i  Ha  dado  V.  libros  a  los  muchachos  de  la  primera  clase  ? 
6.  He  dado  libros  y  cuademos  a  los  de  la  segunda  clase.  7.  El  mes 
de  Julio  tiene  tantos  dias  como  el  mes  de  Agosto.  8.  [Cuando  ha 
recibido  V.  sus  cartas  1  9.  He  recibido  una  el  dos  de  Abril,  y  la  otra 
el  cinco  de  Setiembre.  10.  Hemos  tenido  mucha  lluvia  el  treinta  de 
Octubre.  11.  [  Que  pan  ban  comprado  V.  V.  ?  12.  Hemos  comprado 
cinco  libras  y  media  de  pan  frances.  13.  Cada  soldado  ha  recibido 
media  libra  de  came.  14.  Estaremos  {we  shall  he)  en  nuestra  casa 
nueva  el  primero  de  Mayo  proximo.  15.  El  muchachito  ha  dado  la 
mitad  de  su  almuerzo  al  pobre.  16.  He  comprado  una  docena  de 
polios,  y  mi  hermano  ha  comprado  media  docena  de  pavos.  17.  [A 
cuantos  estamos  1  18.  Estamos  a  once  6  doce.  19.  Carlos  Quinto 
fue  (was)  un  gran  emperador.  20.  i  Cuantas  veces  ha  sido  V.  el  pri- 
mero en  su  clase  ?  21.  He  sido  dos  veces  el  primero  ;  tres  veces,  el 
segundo  ;  y  cuatro  veces,  el  tercero.  22.  [  No  ha  sido  V.  nunca  el  ulti- 
mo 1  23.  No,  senor,  mi  primo  es  siempre  el  ultimo.  24.  j  Que  mes 
viene  despues  del  mes  de  Abril  ?  25.  El  mes  de  Mayo,  por  supuesto. 
26.  I  Es  frio  el  invierno  en  este  pais  1  27.  El  invierno  es  frio,  pero 
corto. 

Exercise  42. 

1.  Have  you  read  the  newspaper  of  the  first  of  December  ?  2.  No, 
but  I  read  that  of  the  thirtieth  of  November.  3.  My  brother  will  be 
(esturd)  here  in  July  or  (in)  August.  4.  What  day  of  the  month  is 
it  ]  5.  It  is  the  thirteenth.  6.  One  half  and  one  third  are  Qiacen) 
five  sixths.  7.  This  poor  woman  is  sick  for  the  third  time  this 
month.  8.  The  Seventh  Eegiment  is  a  fine  regiment.  9.  How  many 
chapters  have  you  read  ?  10.  I  have  read  the  first  two  (tw^o  first). 
11.  December  is  the  last  month  of  the  year.  12.  That  child  is  in  his 
sixth  year.  13.  Have  you  been  sick  here  ?  14.  I  have  been  very 
sick  the  first  month,  but  I  am  very  well  now.  15.  A  half  ounce  is 
the  thirty-second  part  of  a  pound  ;  therefore,  eight  ounces  are  the 
half,  and  four  ounces  the  fourth  part  of  a  pound.  16.  One  third  of 
the  money  belongs  to  the  father  ;  one  sixth,  to  the  children  ;  and  one 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS.  121 

Lalf,  to  the  mother.     17.  I  have  bought  a  dozen  hams  and  sixty  eggs. 

18.  Peter  the  First,  emperor  of  Russia  had   {tenia)  a  rare  genius. 

19.  When  does  the  steamer  leave  1  20.  It  leaves  on  the  twenty-third 
of  this  month.  21.  How  many  times  have;  you  been  in  Paris  ?  22.  I 
have  been  once  in  Paris,  and  twice  in  London.  23.  Has  your  father 
bought  another  horse  l  24.  He  bought  three  horses.  25.  When  are 
you  going  to  the  country  1  26.  I  go  in  the  month  of  June.  27.  Give 
me  the  half  of  your  bread.  28.  I  cannot,  I  have  eaten  all  the  bread. 
29.  Where  is  your  house  ?  30.  My  house  is  the  seventh  house  after 
the  church. 

Gr^matica.  Grammar. 

I  •    Ordinal  numbers  are  considered  as  adjectives,  and  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer  : 

Este  muchacho  es  el  primero,  This  hoy  is  the  first. 

Estas  muchachas  son  las  primeras,         These  girls  are  the  first. 
La  quinta  avenida,  The  fifth  avenue. 

2.    Primero,  first,  and  postrero,  last,  drop  the  o  in  the  singu- 
lar when  they  precede  the  noun  : 

El  primer  hombre,  The  first  man. 

El  postrer  discipulo,         The  last  scholar. 
Observation.  — Tercero,  third,  either  drops  or  retains  the  o  : 
-  El  tercer  dia  or  el  tercero  dia,         The  third  day. 

3*    Primo  and  tercio  are  used  instead  of  primero  and  tercero, 
after  another  ordinal  number  : 

Vigesimo  primo,  twenty-first.         Trigesimo  tercio,  thirty-third. 
But  we  say  : 

El  primero  de  los  oficiales,         The  first  among  the  ojficers. 

4.    Ordinal  Numbers  are  used  in  Spanish  as  in  English  after 
the  names  of  sovereigns,  but  without  the  article  : 

Fernando  segundo,         Ferdinand  the  Second. 
Felipe  cuarto,  Philip  the  Fourth. 

Observation.  —  The  Spaniards  generally  use,  as  being  shorter,  the  Car- 
dinal Numbers  after  the  names  of  sovereigns  when  their  order  of  succession 
exceeds  ten.     Thus,  they  prefer  to  say  : 
Luis  Catorce,  Louis  the  Fourteenth.         Carlos  Doce,  Charles  the  Twelfth. 


122  LESSON   22. 

5«  After  the  number  eleven  .the  Cardinal  or  Ordinal  Numbers 
may  be  used  with  equal  propriety  to  indicate  the  divisions  of  a 
book  or  other  works  : 

Capitulo  quince  or  decimo  quinto,         Fifteenth  chapter. 

Pagina  veinte  or  vigesima,  Twentieth  page. 

6«  In  Spanish  the  Cardinal  I^umbers  are  used  by  abbreviation 
before  the  names  of  months.  Primero,  first,  forms,  however,  an 
exception,  and  must  be  used  instead  of  uno  : 

El  primero  de  Enero,  The  first  of  January. 

El  cinco  6  seis  de  Mayo,         The  fifth  or  sixth  of  May, 

7i    Mitad  is  synonymous  with  medio,  half ;  but  medio  is  an 

adjective,  while  mitad  is  a  noun. 

Medio  and  the  other  fractions  take  the  feminine  form  when ' 
speaking  of  libra,  pound,  vara,  yard,  etc.,  even  if  these  nouns 
are  not  expressed  : 

Media  libra  de  aziicar,  A  half  pound  of  sugar. 

Una  cuarta  de  arroz,  A  quarter  pound  of  rice. 

Media  vara  de  pano,  Half  a  yard  of  cloth.    . 

Tres  cuartas  de  muselina.         Three  fourths  of  a  yard  of  muslin. 

8t  The  endings  0,  a  in  multiplicative  numbers,  as  dtiplo,  dupla, 
double ;  triplo,  tripla,  treble ;  although  often  used,  are  not  con- 
sidered as  correct  as  those  given  above. 


Leccion  XXII.  Lesson  XXII. 

LO,  LE,  LA,  LOS,  LAS,  AS  PRONOUNS  IN  SIMPLE  TENSES. 

Yo  lo  {or  la)  tengo,  I  have  it. 

Tu  lo  {or  la)  tienes,  thou  hast  it. 

El  lo  {or  la)  tiene,  he  has  it. 

Ella  lo  {or  la)  tiene,  she  has  it. 

Nosotros  lo  {or  la)  tenemos,  loe  have  it. 

Vosotros  lo  {or  la)  teneis,  you  have  it. 

Ellos  lo  {or  la)  tienen,  they  (masc.)  have  it. 

Ellas  lo  {<yr  la)  tienen,  they  (fern.)  have  it. 


PRONOUNS  IN  SIMPLE  TENSES. 


123 


Yo  no  lo  (or  la)  tengo, 

/  have  it  twL 

Tu  no  lo  (or  la)  tienes, 

thoic  hast  it  not. 

El  no  lo  (or  la)  tiene, 

he  has  it  Twt. 

Ella  no  lo  (or  la)  tiene, 

she  has  it  not. 

Nosotros  no  lo  (or  la)  tenemos, 

we  have  it  not. 

Vosotros  no  lo  {or  la)  teneis, 

yovj  ham  it  not. 

Ellos  no  lo  {or  la)  tienen. 

iJiey  (masc.)  have  it  not. 

Ellas  no  lo  {or  la)  tienen, 

they  (fern.)  have  it  noL 

I  Lo  {or  la)  tengo  yo  ? 

have  I  it  ? 

etc. 

etc. 

i  No  lo  (or  la)  tengo  yo  ? 

have  I  it  not? 

etc. 

etc 

Yo  los  (or  las)  tengo. 

I  ham  them. 

Tu  los  (or  las)  tienes, 

thou  hast  thein. 

El  los  {or  las)  tiene. 

he  has  them. 

Ella  los  (or  las)  tiene, 

she  has  them^ 

Nosotros  los  (or  las)  tenemos, 

toe  have  tJiem. 

Vosotros  los  (or  las)  teneis. 

yoic  have  them. 

Ellos  los  (or  las)  tienen. 

they  (masc.)  Jiave  therru 

Ellas  los  (or  las)  tienen. 

they  (fem.)  have  them. 

Yo  no  los  {or  las)  tengo, 
Tu  no  los  (or  las)  tienes. 
El  no  los  {or  las)  tiene, 
Ella  no  los  (or  las)  tiene, 
Nosotros  no  los  (or  las)  tenemos, 
Vosotros  no  los  (or  las)  teneis, 
Ellos  no  los  {or  las)  tienen, 
Ellas  no  los  (or  las)  tienen, 


/  have  them  not. 

thou  hast  tJiem  noL 

he  has  them  not. 

slie  has  them  not, 

we  have  them  not, 

you  have  tJiem  not, 

they  (masc.)  have  them  noL 

they  (fem.)  have  them  not. 


I  Los  {or  las)  tengo  yo  ? 
etc. 


have  I  them  ? 
etc. 


i  No  los  {or  las)  tengo  yo  ? 
etc. 


have  I  them  not  ? 
etc. 


Lo,  le,  la,  los,  las,  ow  Pronouns  in  Compound  Tenses, 
Yo  lo  (or  la)  he  tenido,  /  have  had  it  ? 


etc. 


etc. 


124  LESSON    22. 

I  Lo  (or  la)  he  tenido  yo  ?  have  I  had  it  ? 
etc.  etc. 

Yo  no  lo  (w  la)  he  tenido,  I  have  not  had  it, 

etc.  etc. 

I  No  lo  (or  la)  he  tenido  yo  ?  ham  I  not  had  it  ? 
etc.  etc. 

Yo  los  {or  las)  he  tenido,  I  have  had  them, 
etc.  etc. 

Yo  no  los  {or  las)  he  tenido,  /  have  not  had  them, 
etc.  etc. 

I  Los  (or  las)  he  tenido  yo  ?  Aave  /  ^a^  ^^m  7 
etc.  ete. 

I  No  los  (w  las)  he  tenido  yo  ?  Aa2?e  /  ?w)^  had  ihem  ? 
etc.  gte. 

Lo,  le,  la,  los,  las,  joined  with  the  Infinitive  and  the  Gerund, 

Tenerlo,  tenerla,  to  have  it. 

Tenerlos,  tenerlas,  to  have  them. 

Teniendolo,  teniendola,  having  if. 

Teniendolos,  teniendolas,  having  them. 

Lo,  le,  la,  los,  las,  placed  after  the  Verb, 

Tengolo,  tengola,  /  have  it. 

Tengolos,  tengolas,  /  have  them. 

Ejemplos.  Examples. 

i  Quien  tiene  mi  lihro  ?  Who  has  my  book  ? 

Yo  lo  tengo.  I  have  it.  ' 

I  Ha  visto  V.  mi  lapiz  ?  Have  you  seen  my  pencil  ? 

Lo  he  visto.  I  have  seen  it. 

i  Tiene  V.  mis  plumas  ?  Have  you  my  pens  ? 

Las  tengo.  I  have  them. 

i  Ha  tenido  V.  mis  plumas  ?  Have  you  had  my  pens  ? 

Las  he  tenido.  I  have  had  them. 

i  Vende  V.  su  casa  ?  Do  you  sell  your  house  ? 

La  vendo.  I  sell  it. 

i  Quien  ha  tornado  mis  papeles  ?  Who  has  taken  my  papers  ? 


PRONOUNS  IN  SIMPLE  TENSES. 


125 


Nadie  los  ha  tornado. 

I  Lo  tiene  su  amigo  de  V.  ? 

El  no  lo  tiene. 

i  Los  tienen  sus  amigos  ? 

Ellos  no  los  tienen. 

I  Lo  tiene  la  senora  ? 

Ella  no  lo  tiene. 

I  Los  tienen  las  seiioritas  ? 

Ellas  no  los  tienen. 

I  Quien  los  tiene  ? 

Nadie  los  tiene. 

i  A  quien  lo  da  V.  ? 

1^0  doy  a  mi  amigo. 

I  Lo  sabe  V.  ? 

Lo  se. 

Tomelo  V. 

No  lo  tome  V. 


Nobody  has  taken  them. 
Has  your  friend  it  ? 
He  has  it  not. 
Have  your  friends  them  ? 
They  have  them  not. 
Has  the  lady  it  ? 
.  She  has  it  not  ? 
Have  the  young  ladies  them  ? 
They  have  them  not. 
Who  has  them  ? 
Nobody  has  them. 
To  whom  do  you  give  it  ? 
I  give  it  to  my  friend. 
Do  you  know  it  ? 
I  know  it. 
Take  it. 
Do  not  take  it. 


Lo,  Declinable  and  Undeclinable. 


i  Esta  V.  mala,  senora  ? 

Lo  estoy. 

i  Es  V.  la  enferma  ? 

La  soy. 

i  Estan  V.  V.  satisfechos  ? 

Lo  estamos. 

i  Son  V.  V.  los  hijos  del  Senor  Pablo  ? 

Los  somos: 

i  Son  V.  V.  las  hijas  de  Maria  ? 

Las  somos. 

Vocabulario. 
El  armario,  the  closet 
El  boton,  the  button. 
El  zapato,  the  shoe. 
El  zapatero,  the  shoeTnaker. 
La  bodega,  the  cellar. 
La  cama,  the  bed. 
La  cocina,  the  kitcJien. 
La  gallina,  the  foiol,  the  chicken. 
La  lavandera,  the  loasherwoinan. 
La  mauana,  the  morning. 
La  sabana,  the  sheet. 
Aun,  even. 


Are  you  sick,  madam  ? 

I  am  (so). 

Are  you  the  patient  {fern.)  ? 

I  am  (she). 

Are  you  pleased  ? 

We  are  (so). 

Are  you  the  sons  of  Mr.  Paul  ? 

We  arer  (they). 

Are  you  the  daughters  of  Mary  ? 

We  are  (they). 

Vocabulary. 
Ansente,  absent. 
Bien,  well. 
Donde,  where 
Bemasiado,  too,  too  much. 
Necesitar,  to  need. 
No... mas,  no... more. 
Tampoco,  not  either,  neither. 
Tarde,  late. 
Traer,  to  bring. 
i  Ve  V.  ?  do  you  see  ? 
Veo,  T  see. 
i  Vende  V.  ?  do  you  sell  t 


126  LESSON  22. 


Exercise  43. 


1.  I  Carlos,  tiene  V.  mis  botones  de  oro  ?  2.  Yo  no  los  tengo  ;  sii 
hermano  de  V.  los  tiene.  3.  i  Porque  los  ha  tornado  el  1  4.  Yo  no 
lo  se.  5.  I  Eduardo,  sabe  V.  su  leccion  1  6.  Yo  no  la  se  miiy  bien. 
7.  [  Ha  visto  V.  el  caballo  de  mi  tio  ?  8.  i  Que  caballo  ?  9.  Su  ca-  * 
ballo  bianco.  10.  Lo  he  visto  esta  maiiana.  11.  i  Tiene  su  hermano 
todavia  su  casa  ?  12.  No  la  tiene  mas  ;  la  ha  vendido.  13.  i  Ha 
tenido  V.  mi  libro  ?  14.  No  lo  he  tenido  ;  V.  lo  ha  tenido  V.  mismo. 
15.  [  Tiene  su  hermana  de  V.  mis  cuadernos.  1  16.  Si,  ella  los  tiene 
en  su  cuarto.  17.  [  Donde  tienen  Y.  Y.  sus  gallinas  1  18.  Las  tenemos 
en  el  patio.  19.  i  No  las  tienen  Y.  Y.  en  el  jardin  ?  20.  No,  no  las 
tenemos  alii  desde  que  tenemos  flores  y  legumbres.  21.  i  Quien  tiene 
sus  zapatos  de  Y.  ?  22.  El  zapatero  los  tiene.  23.  [  Tiene  el  tambien 
los  mios  ?  24.  El  no  los  tiene.  25.  [  Quien  los  tiene  ?  26.  Yo  no  se 
quien  los  tiene.  27.  Nadie  los  tiene,  estan  en  el  cuartito.  28.  i  Tiene 
Y.  mis  plumas  ?  29.  Las  he  tenido,  pero  no  las  tengo  mas.  30.  i  Las 
tiene  su  hermano  ?  31.  No  las  tiene  tampoco.  32.  i  Ha  visto  Y.  a 
Carlos  ?  33.  Le  he  visto  en  el  jardin.  34.  [  Ha  traido  la  lavandera 
la  ropa  ?  35.  Todavia  no.  36.  [  Porque  no  la  ha  traido  ?  37.  Porque 
la  ha  recibido  demasiado  tarde.  38.  i  Esta  Y.  malo  1  39.  Lo  estoy 
siempre.     40.  [  Estan  Y.  Y.  malos  ?    41.  Lo  estamos. 

Exercise  44. 

1.  Has  the  cook  the  vegetables  ?  2.  She  has  them.  3.  Has  she 
(got)  them  in  the  kitchen  ?  4.  No,  sir,  she  has  them  in  the  closet. 
5.  Where  have  you  your  wine  ?  6.  We  have  it  in  the  cellar.  7.  The 
sheets  are  on  the  bed.  8.  Yes,  madam,  I  know  it.  9.  Have  you 
my  knife?  10.  I  have  it  not.  11.  Has  your  brother  it?  12.  Yes, 
sir,  he  has  it.  13.  Do  you  sell  your  house?  14.  I  do  not  sell  it. 
15.  Where  is  the  little  boy?  16.  He  is  in  the  garden.  17.  Do  you 
see  my  hat  ?  18.  I  don't  see  it.  19.  Are  you  sick  ?  20.  I  am  (so). 
21.  Have  you  had  my  book  ?  22.  I  have  had  it  this  morning,  but  I 
do  not  have  it  now.  23.  Have  you  found  your  copy-book  ?  24.  I 
have  found  it  in  your  room.  25.  Do  you  wish  it  ?  26.  I  don't  wish 
it.  27.  Where  have  you  bought  this  sugar  ?  28.  I  have  bought  it  at 
(en)  your  store.  29.  Have  you  seen  my  father  ?  30.  I  have  seen  him 
this  morning.  31.  Have  you  the  money  to-day  ?  32.  No,  sir,  I  have 
it  not.     33.  Do  you  see  those  men  ?     34.  Yes,  sir,  I  see  them.     35.  Is 


PRONOUNS  IN  SIMPLE  TENSES. 


127 


your  sister  absent  ?  36.  She  is  not  (so),  she  is  in  my  mother's  room. 
37.  Why  have  you  taken  my  books  ?  38.  I  have  not  taken  them  ;  I 
have  not  even  seen  them.  39.  If  you  want  my  book,  take  it.  40.  I 
don't  want  it.  41.  Do  you  need  this  piece  of  paper  ?  42.  Yes,  I  need 
it ;  do  not  take  it. 


Gramatica. 


Grammar. 


1 ,  Lo,  le,  masc,  la,  fem.y  meaning  ^Y,  kirrij  her^  or  «o,  and  los, 
masc.y  las, /em.,  meaning  thenif  they,  are  generally  placed  before 
the  verb,  except  in  the  Imperative  affirmative,  the  Infinitive,  and 
the  Present  Partici/ple,  or  Gerund. 

In  these  three  cases  the  pronouns  are  placed  after  the  verb, 
and  joined  to  it  so  as  to  form  one  word  : 


Yo  lo  tengo, 

El  lo  dice, 

Los  compramos, 

I  Quien  los  quiere  ? 

Yo  no  los  quiero, 

Yo  le  vendo  mi  caballo, 

Ella  lo  sahe, 

i  Esta  el  malo  ? 

Lo  esta, 

Tomelo  Y. 

No  lo  tome  V. 

Yendala  V. 

Traigalos  Y., 

Delas  v., 

No  las  de  Y., 

Sabiendolo,  lo  hare, 

Yendiendolo,  tendre  dinero. 

No  quiero  verlo. 

No  puedo  hacerlo, 

Se  decirlo. 


I  have  it. 

He  says  so. 

We  buy  them. 

Who  wants  them. 

I  don't  wish  them. 

I  sell  him  (or  her)  my  horse. 

She  hnows  it. 

Is  he  sick  ? 

He  is. 

Take  it. 

Do  not  take  it. 

Sell  it  (fem.). 

Bring  them. 

Give  them  (fem.). 

Do  7iot  give  them. 

Knowing  it,  I  vnll  do  it. 

By  selling  it,  I  will  have  money. 

I  do  not  wish  to  see  it. 

I  cannot  do  it. 

I  knxrw  how  to  say  it. 


2.  The  same  pronouns  may  also  be  placed  after  the  verb, 
forming  one  word  with  it.  But,  in  this  case,  the  personal  pro- 
noun must  be  left  out. 

This  way  of  expressing  one's  self,  although  rarely  used  in 


128  LESSON    22. 

conversation,  is  considered  elegant  in  writing,  and  is,  therefore, 
often  used  by  good  writers  : 

Tengolo,  /  have  it. 

Diolo  a  su  hermano,  He  gave  it  to  his  brother. 

Vendiolas  ayer,  He  sold  them  (fern.)  yesterday. 

Comprolos  todos,  He  bought  them  all. 

Vile  ayer,  /  saw  him  yesterday, 

3»  These  pronouns,  when  used  with  Compound  Tenses,  are 
placed  before  the  auxiliary  : 

Yo  lo  he  tenido,  /  have  had  it. 

Los  hemos  visto,  We  have  seen  them. 

El  lo  ha  comprado,         He  has  bought  it. 

4.  In  sentences  containing  an  Infinitive  besides  the  principal 
verb,  the  same  pronouns  may  be  placed  either  after  the  Infini- 
tive or  before  the  principal  verb.  The  first  form  is,  however, 
the  one  mostly  used  : 

Yo  quiero  comprarlo  or    y  ,       ,       . 

,^    ,         .  }  I  wish  to  buy  it. 

Yo  lo  quiero  comprar,       )  '^ 

El  ha  querido  venderlo  or 


ts,  ,    ,  .J  J  [He  has  wished  to  sell  it. 

El  lo  ha  quendo  vender, 

5i    Lo  remains  invariable  when  it  can  be  translated  by  50, 
either  expressed  or  understood  : 

i  Es  V.  viuda  ?  —  Lo  soy,  Are  you  a  widow  ?  —  I  am  (so). 

i  Estan  Y.  Y.  enfermos  ?— Lo  estamos,     Are  you  sick  ?  —  We  are  (so). 
i  Podemos  entrar  ?  —  Y.  Y.  lo  pueden,     May  we  come  in  ?—  You  may  (do  so). 

But  lo  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  which  it  repre- 
sents, when  the  noun  is  used  in  a  determinate  sense,  i.  e.  when 
accompanied  by  the  article,  or.  a  possessive  or  demonstrative 
adjective  : 

i  Es  Y.  la  viuda  ?  —  La  soy,  Are  you  the  widow?—  I  am  (she). 

i  Son  Y.  Y.  los  hijos  de  Manuel  ?—        Are  you  the  sons  of  Manuel  ?—  We 
Los  somos,  are  (they). 

6«    Observations  on  lo,  le,  a^id  la. 

Opinions  are  divided  about  the  rendering  of  the  pronoun  it,  when  refer- 
ring to  a  masculine  noun. 


KELATIVE   AND   INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  129 

Some  grammarians  do  not  admit  that  lo  should  be  used  when  referring 
to  a  noun,  and  are  in  favor  of  le.     According  to  them  we  should  say  : 
I  Tiene  V.  el  libro  ?  —  Si,  yo  le  tengo,    Have  you  the  book  ? —  Yes^  I  have  it. 
Lo  should  be  used  only  when  referring  to  the  complement  of  a  verb,  as  : 
i  Sabe  V.  que  su  hermano  esta  aqui  ?        Do  you  know  tluit  your  brother  is 

—  Si,  yo  lo  se,  here  ?  —  Yes,  I  know  it. 

This  opinion  is  opposed  by  others,  who  consider  le  as  the  dative  case, 
either  masculine  or  feminine,  and,  therefore,  use  lo  for  it  or  him. 
Yo  lo  veo,  /  see  it  (or  him). 

Yo  le  vendo  mi  caballo,         I  sell  him  (or  her)  my  horse. 

We  have  adopted  the  last  rale,  which  ajjpears  to  us  to  have  most  follow- 
ers, but  would  add,  that  in  presence  of  conflicting  opinions,  we  consider 
thut  either  le  or  lo  may  be  used  with  equal  propriety. 

According  to  the  rule  laid  down  by  us,  los,  las  must  be  used  in  the  accu- 
sative case  for  tlicm  ;  and  les  in  the  dative  case  for  to  them.  We  find,  how- 
ever, la  and  las  used  in  the  dative  feminine  instead  of  le  and  les  by  classic 
authors,  but  the  Academia  Espafiola  does  not  approve  of  this. 


leccion  XXIII.  Lesson  XXIII. 

RELATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
Relative, 
ftue,  ivho,  ivhom,  which ^  that,  what. 

ftuien,  sing.,  quienes,  pi.,  who,  whom,  whoever,  whomsoever,  he  who. 
El  cual  or  cual,  ivho,  which,  that  which,  which  ones. 
Cuyo,  m.  s.,  cuya,  f.  s.,  cuyos,  m.  pL,  cuyas,  f.  pi.,  ivhose,  of  which. 

Cual  declined. 
Singular.  Plural. 

Masculine.    Feminine.  Masculine.  Feminine. 

El  cual,    la  cual,       los  cuales,       las  cuales,  who,  whom,  which, 

.    which  one,  which  ones. 
Del  cual,  de  la  cual,  de  los  cuales,  de  las  cuales,  of  whom,  from 

whom,  whose,  of  which  one,  of  which  ones. 
Al  cual,   a  la  cual,    a  los  cuales,    a  las  cuales,   to    whom,    to 
which,  to  which  one,  to  which  ones. 
9 


130 


LESSON    23. 


Interrogative* 

ftuien?    who?  Cual?    which  ?  which  one ? 

ftue?    what?  which?  Cuyo?    ivhose? 


Ejemplos. 
El  caballero  que  vive  aqui,  es  Frances. 

El  hombre  a  qiiien  hablo  es  pobre. 

l  De  quieii  habla  V.  ? 

El  libro  que  el  tiene,  es  luio. 

i  Que  quiere  V.  ? 

i  Que  bonito  es  ! 

Pedro  es  el  que  lo  ha  diclio. 

He  encontrado  a  Pedro,  el  cual  me 

dio  una  carta. 
Este  es  el  hombre  al  cual  Y.  debe 

dinero. 
Yo  se  cual  es  la  causa  de  esto. 

1  Cual  de  los  dos  habla  mejor  ? 
El  hombre,  cuyo  hijo  esta  aqui. 
La  casa,  cuyas  ventanas  vemos. 

2  A  cual  de  mis  amigos  ha  dado  Y. 

el  libro  ? 
I  De  quien  {or  cuyo)  es  este  perro  ? 
I  De  quien  {or  cuyas)  son  estas  tijeras  ? 
i  Quien  es  esa  mujer  ? 
i  Quienes  son  aquellos  hombres  ? 


Examples. 
The  gentleman  who  lives  here  is  a 

Frenchman. 
The  man  to  whom  I  speak  is  poor. 
Of  whom  do  you  speak  ? 
The  book  which  he  has  is  mine. 
What  do  you  wish  ? 
How  pretty  it  is  ! 
Peter  is  the  one  who  said  it. 
I  met  Peter,  who  gave  me  a  letter. 

This  is  the  man  to  whom  you  owe 

money. 
I  know  what  is  the  cause  of  this. 
"Which  of  the  two  speaks  better  ? 
The  man  whose  son  is  here. 
The  house  of  which  we  see  the 

windows. 
To  which  of  my  friends  have  you 

given  the  book  ? 
"Whose  dog  is  this  ? 
"Whose  scissors  are  these  ? 
"Who  is  that  woman  ? 
"Who  are  these  men  ? 


Vocabulario, 
El  padrino,  the  godfather. 
El  puente,  the  bridge. 
La  fruta,  the  fruit. 
La  prima,  the  cousin  (f.). 
La  tia,  the  aunt. 
La  vida,  the  life. 
Aqui,  here. 
Bien,  good. 
Canta,  sings. 
Contento,  pleased. 
Cortado,  cut. 
Dado,  given. 


Debe,  owes. 
Deseamos,  we  loish. 
Dicho,  said. 
Dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 
Ensena,  teaches. 
Gana,  earns. 
Hablan,  they  speak. 
Hecho,  done. 
Inteligente,  intelligent. 
Loco,  insane. 
Llora,  weeps. 
Muerto,  died. 


Vocabulary. 
Murio,  died. 
Necesito,  /  need. 
Fagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Farecen,  seem. 
Frobablemente,  probably. 
Fuesto,  put. 
Rie,  laughs. 
Sabe,  knows. 
Tan,  so. 

Trabaja,  works. 
Viajar,  1.  to  travel. 
Vis  to,  seen. 


RELATIVE  AND   INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  181 

Exercise  45. 

1.  Juan  es  un  hombre  que  sabe  mucbo.  2.  Es  una  cosa  de  que 
hablan  mucbo.  3.  Mi  bermano,  mi  tia  y  mis  primas  que  ban  venido 
ayer,  estan  en  mi  casa.  4.  He  visto  al  mucbacbo  que  V.  ensena. 
5.  EI  es  quien  ba  dicho  esto.  6.  He  estado  en  el  campo,  lo  que  me 
ba  becbo  mucbo  bien.  7.  Me  ba  pagado,  con  lo  que  estoy  contento. 
8.  He  visto  a  Pedro,  el  cual  me  ba  dicbo  mucbas  cosas.  9.  Estos 
b ombres  parecen  locos  :  cual  {one)  llora,  cual  canta  y  cual  rie. 
10.  Estas  frutas  son  tales  cuales  {such  as)  las  deseamos.  II.  El  es 
a  quien  V.  debe  la  vida.  12.  El  bombre,  cuya  mujer  ha  niuerto,  esta 
muytriste.  13.  El  que  no  trabaja,' no  gana  dinero.  14.  He  estado  en 
la  casa  en  la  cual  be  visto  a  su  padre  de  V.  15.  Veo  la  casa  cuyas 
ventanas  son  tan  grandes.  16.  El  comerciante  cuya  familia  esta  aqui, 
es  muy  rico.  17.  [  A  cual  de  mis  amigos  ba  dado  V.  el  libro  1  18.  No 
lo  be  dado  a  ninguno.  19.  La  casa  que  tiene  mi  padre  es  muy 
grande.  20.  Aqui  esta  el  cuarto  en  el  cual  murio.  21.  [Con  que  ba 
becbo  V.  esto  1  22.  Con  un  lapiz.  23.  i  Tiene  V.  lo  que  V.  necesita  ? 
24.  Si,  senor,  tengo  todo  lo  que  necesito.  25.  La  casa  que  V.  tiene, 
es  mas  pequeiia  que  la  que  yo  tengo. 

Exercise  46. 

1.  The  gentleman  to  whom  you  have  written  has  not  received  your 
letter.  .2.  Is  it  you  who  have  written  this  letter  ?  3.  It  is  I. 
4.  Here  is  the  knife  with  which  I  have  cut  the  bread.  5.  I  have 
found  an  umbrella,  it  is  probably  the  one  you  have  lost.  6.  Here  is 
the  book  of  which  you  have  spoken.  7.  The  bridge  on  which  we  are 
is  the  largest  in  the  city.  8.  The  trunk  in  which  I  have  put  my 
clothes  is  not  large  enough  (enough  large)  for  me.  9.  How  intelligent 
that  child  is  (is  that  child)  !  10.  The  house  which  you  have  is  not 
as  good  as  the  house  which  your  brother  has.  11.  The  gentleman 
whose  sister  you  have  seen  is  a  friend  of  my  father.  12.  Have  you 
all  that  you  want  1  13,  No,  I  want  many  things  yet.  14.  The  month 
in  which  we  are  is  the  coldest  of  the  year.  15.  The  boy  for  {para) 
whom  I  have  bought  this  book  is  sick.  16.  Have  you  seen  the  trunk 
with  which  I  have  been  travelling?  17.  No,  where  is  it?  18.  It  is 
in  the  room  in  which  I  slept.  19.  The  gentleman  of  whom  I  received 
this  book  is  my  godfather.  20.  Whose  apples  are  these  ?  21.  They 
are  mine.     22.  Which  horse  have  you  bought  ?     23.  I  bought  the  one 


1S2  LESSON    23. 

you  saw  yesterday.  24.  Here  are  all  the  books  which  we  have. 
25.  Your  brother  is  in  the  room.  26.  In  which  one?  27.  In  the 
large  one.  28.  Of  what  are  you  speaking  %--  29.  I  am  speaking  of 
many  things.     30.  We  are  speaking  of  my  aunt. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1.  ftue,  as  a  subject  or  nominative,  is  used  for  persons  as 
well  as  for  things,  and  may  refer  to  several  nouns  of  different 
number  and  gender  : 

Es  un  hombre  que  sabe  mucho,  He  is  a  man  who  knows  much. 

Es  una  cosa  de  que  hablan  mucho,  It  is  a  thing  of  which  they  speak  a 

great  deal. 
Su  herniano,  sus  tias  y  sus  hermanas        His  brother,    his  aunts,  and  his 
que  ban  venido  ayer,  se  van  hoy,  sisters  who  came  yesterday,  are 

going  away  to-day. 

2.  flue,  relating  to  an  accusative,  does  not  require  the  prepo- 
sition a,  even  when  referring  to  a  person  : 

He  visto  el  nino  que  V.  enseha  {not        I  have   seen   the   child  that  you 
a  que  V.  ensena),  teach. 

3i  The  relative  que  is  accompanied  by  the  article  el,  la,  los, 
las,  lo,  according  to  gender  and  number. 

a.  To  avoid  ambiguity  when  the  Relative  is  separated  from 
the  noun  : 

Pidio  la  libertad  de  su  hijo,  la  que        He  begged  for  the  liberty  of  his  son, 
coiisiguio,  and  obtained  it  (lit.  which  he  ob- 

tained). 

h.  When  the  Relative  que  serves  to  complete  the  action  of 
the  verb  : 

Pedro  es  el  que  lo  ha  dicho,         Peter  is  the  one  who  said  so. 

c.  When  the  Relative  que  refers  to  a  whole  sentence  : 

He  estado  en  el  campo,  lo  que  me  ha        /  have  been  in  the  country,  which 
hecho  mucho  bien,  has  done  rae  much  good. 

d.  When  the  Relative  is  accompanied  by  a  preposition  : 

Me  ha  pagado,  cou  lo  que  estoy        He  has  paid  me,  and  1  am  pleased  with 
coiitento,  it  (lit.  with  which  I  am  pleased). 


RELATIVE   AND    INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  133 

4.  ftue  is  never  suppressed  like  its  con-esponding  English 
pronoun,  but  must  be  repeated  before  every  verb  that  fol- 
lows it  : 

La  casa  que  tenemos,  The  house  {which)  we  have. 

El  libro  que  el  tiene,  .      The  hook  (which)  he  has. 
El  caballo  que  yo  vendi  y  que  volvi      "  The  horse  which  I  have  sold  and 
a  comprar,  bought  again. 

Observation.  —  Que  may  precede  the  person  or  object  to  which  it  re- 
lates : 

La  cancion  que  cantaba  Maria,         TJie  song  which  Mary  sang. 

La  herida  que  tenia  el  soldado,         The  wound  which  the  soldier  had. 

5.  Quien,  quienes,  for  both  genders,  relate  only  to  per- 
sons : 

El  es  a  quien  debo  la  vida,         It  is  to  him  I  owe  my  life. 

Observation.  —  When  the  Relative  Pronoun  follows  immediatel)^  the 
noun  to  which  it  relates,  it  is  preferable  to  use  que,  even  when  referring  to 
persons.     It  would  be  better,  therefore,  to  say  : 

Este  es  el  hombre  que  me  dio  el  libro, 
instead  of 

Quien  me  dio  el  libro.         This  is  the  man  who  gave  me  the  hook. 

"We  could  say  with  as  much  propriety  : 

Este  es  el  hombre  a  quien  or  a  que         This  is  the  man  to  whom  you  owe 
V.  debe  la  vida,  qjour  life. 

because  the  preposition  stands  between  the  noun  and  the  Relative  Pronoun. 

6.  The  relatives  el  cual,  la  cual,  lo  cual,  los  cuales,  las 
cuales  have  but  one  termination  for  the  different  genders,  and 
relate  as  well  to  persons  as  to  things.  In  the  accusative  they 
take  the  preposition  a  when  they  relate  to  persons  : 

He  encontrado  a  Pedro  con  su  mujer,  /  met  Peter  with  his  wife,  and  he 
el  cual  me  ha  contado  much  as  co-  (who)  told  me  many  things. 

sas. 

Este  es  el  hombre  al  cual  V.   debe  This  is  the  man  to  whmn  you  imist 
entregar  la  carta,  deliver  the  letter. 


134  LESSON   23. 

7.    The  article  is  omitted  : 

a.    When  the  relative  is  separated  from  the  noun  by  a  verb 
and  completes  the  action  of  another  verb  : 
La  prision  le  habia  abierto  los  ojos,         The  prison  had  opened  his  eyes,  and 

y  conocio  cual  ei-a  la  verdadera  he  knew  which  was  the  real  cause 

causa  de  su  desgracia. — Padre  of  his  misfortunes. 

DE    ISLA. 

h.   When  the  pronoun  may  be  used  as  partitive  : 

Estos  hombres  parecen  locos  :  cual  These  men  appear  to  he  insane :  one 
llora,  cual  canta,  y  cual  rie,  weeps,  another  sings,  and  still  an- 

other laughs. 

Es  dificil  decir  cual  de  los  dos  canta  It  is  difjicidt  to  say  which  of  the  two 
mejor,  sings  best. 

c.    Cual  is  also  used  instead  of  the  comparative,  with  tal,  both 
words  agreeing  in  number  with  the  noun  : 

Estas  frutas  son  tales  las  deseamos,  or  )       These  fruits  are  jitst  as  we  wish 
Estas  frutas  son  cuales  las  deseamos.     )  them. 


8.  Cuyo  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  which  it 
precedes  : 

La  amiga  cuyo  hermano  esta  enfermo,  The  friend  whose  brother  is  sick. 

El  hombre  cuya  mujer  ha  muerto,  The  man  whose  wife  has  died. 

El    principe    cuyos    caballos    hemos  Th^  prince  whose  horses  we  have 

visto,  se&ti. 

Ciceron,   de   cuyo  grande  orador  he  Cicero,    the  great    orator,    whose 

leido  las  obras,  works  I  have  read. 

9.  ftue  and  cual  may  in  many  cases  be  used  with  equal  pro- 
priety when  accompanied  by  prepositions  : 

He  estado  en  la  casa  en  que  (or  en  /  have  been  in  the  house  in  which 

la  cual)  murio,  (where)  he  died. 

Este  es  el  cuchillo  con  que  (or  con  This  is  the  knife  with  which  he 

e^cual)  mato  la  gallina,  killed  the  lien. 

^10.    Donde  is  used  also  in  Spanish,  when  the  relative  which 
may  be  replaced  in  English  by  the  adverb  where  : 

He  estado  en  el  pueblo  en  donde  era        /  have  been  in  the  village  where  tJie 
la  feria,  fair  was. 


RELATIVE   AND  .  INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS.  135 

11,  The  Relative  Pronouns  que,  cual,  quien,  cuyo  are  also 
used  as  Interrogative  Pronouns  (que,  cual,  quien,  taking  then 
an  accent),  and  mean  : 

Que,  which,  what.  Quien,  who,  whom. 

Cual,  which,  which  one.  Cuyo,  whose. 

Eocamples. 

I  A  cual  de  mis  amigos  ha  dado  V.         To  which  of  my  friends  have  you 

ellibro?  given  the  hook  ? 

Que  profesion  tieue  V.  ?  What  is  your  profession  ? 

Cual  es  su  merito  ?  What  {which)  is  his  merit  ? 

Cuales  son  sus  amigos  ?  Which  are  his  friends? 

Que  hay  en  la  mesa  ?  Wliat  is  there  on  the  table  ? 

De  quien  habla  V.  ?  Of  whom  do  you  speak  ? 

Quien  es  aquel  ?  Who  is  that  ? 

Quienes  son  aquellos  hombres  ?  Who  are  those  men  ? 

Quien  es  esa  mujer  ?  Who  is  that  woman  ? 

I  A  quien  escribes  esa  carta  ?  '         To  whom  do  you  write  that  letter  ? 

Observation.  —  The  expressions  : 

I  Cuyo  es  este  perro  ?  Whose  dog  is  this  ? 

i  Cuyas  son  estas  tijeras  ?         Whose  are  these  scissors  ? 

although  of  frequent  use,  are  hardly  correct,  and  it  is  preferable  to  use  de 
quien,  etc.,  as  ide  quien  es  este  perro?  ide  quien  son  estas  tijeras?  etc. 

12,  ftue  is  also  used  as  ai^  exclamation  corresponding  to  the 
English  how : 

i  Que  bonito  es  eso  !         Row  pretty  that  is  ! 
i  Que  feliz  es  V.  !  How  happy  you  are  ! 

13,  ftue  de  may  also  be  used  for  cuanto,  cuanta,  cuantos, 
cuantas,  how  much  !  hoio  many  : 

i  Que  de  cosas  or  cuantas  cosas  podria        How  many  things  I  could  say  ! 
decir ! 


136  LESSON   24. 

leccion  XXIV.  lesson  XXIV. 

t    ERBOS  AUXILIARES,        AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

Haber,  to  have. 

MODO   INFINITIVO,        INFINITIVE  MOOD, 

Haber,  to  have. 

Haber  habido,  to  have  had. 

Gerundio,  gerund. 

Habiendo,  having. 

Habiendo  habido,  having  Imd. 

Paxticipio  pasivo,  'past  participle. 
Habido,  had. 

TiEMPOS  SIMPLES,  Simple  Tenses. 
MODO   INDICATIYO,        INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Presente,  present. 

Yohe, 

I  have. 

Tii  has, 

thou  hast. 

El  ha, 

he  has. 

Ella  ha, 

she  has. 

Nosotros  hemos, 

we  have. 

Vosotros  habeis, 

yoio  have. 

Ellos  han. 

they  (masc.)  have. 

Ellas  han. 

they  (fern.)  have. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 

Habia, 

I  had  (Ivas  havirig,  I  used  to  have). 

Habias, 

thou  hadst. 

Habia, 

he  had  or  she  had. 

Habiamos, 

we  had. 

Habiais, 

you  had. 

Habian, 

they  had. 

AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


137 


Preterite  perfecto  definido,  preterite, 

Hube,  /  had  {did  have), 

Hubiste,  thou  hadst, 

Hubo,"  he  had, 

Hubimos,  we  had. 

Hubisteis,  you  had. 

Hubieron,  they  had. 

Future,  future. 

Habre,  /  shall  or  will  have. 

Habras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  have, 

Habra,  he  shall  or  will  have. 

Habrenios,  we  shall  or  will  have. 

Habreis,  yoiv  shall  or  tvill  have. 

Habran,  they  shall  or  will  have. 


MODO   SUBJUNTIVO,         SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Presente,  present. 

Haya,  /  may  have. 

Hayas,  thou  mayest . 

Haya,  he  7na.y  have. 

Hayamos,  we  trmy  have. 

Hayais,  you  may  have. 

Hayan,  they  may  liave, 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 


Hubiera,  habria,  hubiese  ; 

Hubieras,  habrias,  hiibieses ; 
Hubiera,  habria,  hubiese  ; 
Hubieramos,  habriamos,  hubiesemos; 
Hubierais,  habriais,  hubieseis  ; 
Hubieran,  habriau,  hubiesen  ; 


/  {might,  could,  would  or)  should 

ha-ve. 
thou  shouldst  have, 
he  should  have, 
we  should  have, 
you  should  have, 
they  should  have. 


Future,  future. 
{Cuando  or  Si)  Hubiere,        (wlien  or  if)  /  shall  or  will  have. 

Hubieres,  thou  shall  or  xcilt  have. 

Hubiere,  he  shall  or  will  have. 

Hubieremos,  v^e  shall  or  will  have. 

Hubiereis,  you  shall  or  will  have. 

Hubieren,  they  shall  or  will  have. 


138  LESSON   24. 

TiEMPos  COMPUESTOS,   Compoicnd  Tenses. 
MODO   INDICATIVO,        INDICATIVE  MOOD. 
Perfecto,  perfect. 
He  habido,  I  have  had. 

Has  habido,  .    thou  hast  had. 

Ha  habido,  he  has  had. 

Hemos  habido,  we  have  had. 

Habeis  habido,  you  have  had. 

Han  habido,  they  have  had. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 

Habia  habido,  /  had  had. 

Habias  habido,  thou  hadst  had. 

Habia  habido,  he  had  had. 

Habiamos  habido,  vje  had  had. 

Habiais  habido,  you  had  had. 

Habian  habido,  they  had  had. 

Preterite  anterior,  past  anterior. 

Hube  habido,  /  had  had. 

Hubiste  habido,  thou  hadst  had. 

Hubo  habido,  he  had  had. 

Hubimos  habido,  we  had  had. 

Hubisteis  habido,  you  had  had. 

Hubieron  habido,  they  had  had. 

Future  anterior,  future  anterior. 

Habre  habido,  /  shall  or  will  have  had. ' 

Habras  habido,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  have  had. 

Habra  habido,  he  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Habremos  habido,  we  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Habreis  habido,  you  shall  or  will  have  had. 

Habran  habido,  they  shall  or  luill  have  had. 

MODO   SUBJUNTIVO.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  perfect. 

Haya  habido,  /  may  have  had. 

Hayas  habido,  thou  mayest  have  had. 

Haya  habido,  he  may  have  had. 
Hayamos  habido,  we  may  have  had. 

Hayais  habido,  you  may  have  had. 

Hayan  habido,  they  inay  have  had. 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


139 


Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 


Hubiera,  habria  or  hubiese  habido, 

Hubieras,  habrias  or  hubieses  habi- 

do, 
Hubiera,  habria  or  hubiese  habido, 

Hubieramos,  habriamos  or  hubiese- 
mos  habido, 

Hubierais,  habriais  or  hubieseis  habi- 
do, 

Hubieran,  habrian  or  hubieseu  habi- 
do, 


/  mighty  couldj  should  or  would 

have  had. 
thou  mightestf  couldst,  shouldst  or 

wouldst  have  had. 
he  mighty  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 
we  migM,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 
you  might,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 
they  raight,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 


Future,  future. 


(Si)  Hubiere  habido, 
Hubieres  habido, 
Hubiere  habido, 
Hubieremos  habido, 
Hubiereis  habido, 
Hubieren  habido. 


(if)  /  shall  or  will  have  had. 
thou  shalt  or  wilt  have  had. 
he  shall  or  will  Jiave  had. 
we  slmll  or  will  have  had. 
you  shall  or  will  Jiave  had. 
they  shall  or  will  have  had. 


Tener,  to  have. 
MODO   INFINITIVO,        INFINITIVE  MOOD, 


Tener, 
Haber  tenido, 


to  have, 
to  have  had. 


Gerundio,  gerund. 
Teniendo,  having. 

Habiendo  tenido,  having  had. 

Participio  pasivo,  past  participle, 
Tenido,  had. 

TiEMPOS  SIMPLES,  Simple  Tenses. 

MODO  INDICATIVO,        INDICATIVE  MOOD, 


Presente,  present. 

Tengo, 

I  have. 

Tenemos, 

we  have. 

Tienes, 

thou  hast. 

Teneis, 

you  have. 

Tiene, 

he  ha^. 

Tienen, 

they  have. 

140 


LESSON   24. 

Imperfecto, 

imjperfect. 

Tenia, 

I  had  (I  was  having ,  I  used  to  have). 

Tenias, 

thou  hadst. 

Tenia, 

he  Jiad, 

Teniamos, 

we  had. 

Teniais, 

you  had. 

Tenian, 

they  had. 

Preterite  perfecto  definido,  preterite. 

Tuve,  I  had  {did  have), 

Tuviste,  thou  hadst. 

Tuvo,  he  had. 

Tuvimos,  we  had. 

Tuvisteis,  you  had. 

Tuvieron,  they  had. 


Future, 

future. 

Tendi-e, 

I  shall  or  icill  ham. 

Tendras, 

thou  shalt  or  wilt  have. 

Tendra, 

he  shall  or  will  have. 

Tendremos, 

we  shall  or  will  have. 

Tendreis, 

you  shall  or  will  have. 

Tendran, 

they  shall  or  will  have. 

Imperative, 

Imperative. 

Ten  tii, 

have  {have  thou). 

Tenga  el, 

let  him  have. 

TengaV., 

have  {have  you,  sing.). 

Tengamos, 

let  us  have. 

Tened, 

have  {have  you). 

Tengan, 

let  them  have. 

Tengan  Y.  V., 

have  {have  you,  pi.). 

MODO  SUBJUNTIVO, 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOI 

Presente, 

present. 

Tenga, 

I  moAj  have. 

Ten  gas. 

thou  mayest  have. 

Tenga, 

he  may  have. 

Tengamos, 

we  may  have. 

Tengais, 

you  may  have. 

Tengan, 

they  may  Jiave. 

AUXILIARY  VERBS.  141 

Imperfecto,  imperfect, 
Tuviera,  tendria,  tuviese ;  /  {might,  could,  would  or)  should 

liave. 
Tiivieras,  tendrias,  tuvieses  ;  thou  shouldst  have. 

Tuviera,  tendria,  tuviese  ;  he  should  have. 

Tuvierarnos,  tendriamos,  tuviesemos ;        we  should  have. 
Tuvierais,  tendri'ais,  tuvieseis  ;  you  should  have. 

Tuvieran,  tendrian,  tuviesen  ;  they  should  have. 

Future,  future. 

{Cuando  or  Si)  Tuviere,        (when  or  if)  /  shall  or  will  liave. 

Tuvieres,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  have. 

Tuvi6re,  he  shall  or  will  have. 

Tuvieremos,  we  shall  or  will  ha,ve. 

Tuviereis,  you  shall  or  will  have. 

Tuvieren,  they  shall  or  will  have, 

TiEMPOs  COMPUESTOS,  Compound  Tenses. 
MODO   INDICATIVO,        INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Perfecto,  perfect 

He  tenido, 

.  I  have  had. 

etc. 

etc. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 
Habia  tenido,  /  had  had. 

etc.  etc. 

Preterite  anterior,  past  anterior. 
Hube  tenido,  /  had  had. 

etc.  etc. 

Future  anterior,  future  anterior. 
Habre  tenido,  I  sliall  or  will  have  had, 

etc.  etc. 

MODO  SUBJUNTIVO,        SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  perfect. 
Haya  tenido,  /  may  have  had, 

etc.  etc. 


142 


LESSON    24. 


Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 
Hubiera,  habria  or  liubiese  tenido,  /  migJd,  could,  should  or  would 

have  had. 
etc.  etc.  etc. 

Future,  future. 
(Si)  Hubiere  tenido,  (if)  I  shall  or  will  have  had. 

etc.  etCf  etc. 


Vocabulario. 


Vocabulary. 


El  buey,  the  ox. 

El  valor,  the  courage. 

La  esperanza,  the 

La  fortuna,  the  fortune. 

La  hacienda,  the  estate. 

La  nocbe,  the  night. 

La  paciencia,  the  patience. 

La  suerte,  the  fate. 


La  vez,  the  time. 
Acabar,  1.  to  finish. 
Almorzar,  1.  tobreakfast. 
Bastante,  enough. 
Dejar,  1.  to  leave. 
Escrito,  written. 
Eso,  that. 
Guardar,  1.  to  keep. 


Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do. 
Heredar,  1.  to  inheHt. 
Lie  gar,  1.  to  arHve. 
Mis  mo,  same, 
Oir,  3.  to  Jiear. 
Tener,  2.  to  hold,  to  have. 
Todavia,  yet. 
Vis  to,  seen. 


Exercise  47. 

1.  Tengo  un  hermano  en  Paris.  2.  i  Han  recibido  V.  V.  cartas  hoy  1 
3.  Si,  senor,  hemos  recibido  una  carta  de  nuestro  padre.  4.  i  Ha  visto 
V.  al  Presidente  ?  5.  Le  he  visto  varias  veces.  6.  [  Cuando  tendra 
V.  dinero  ?  7.  Tendre  cien  pesos  maiiana.  8.  [  Que  tenia  su  her- 
mano en  su  cuarto  1  9.  No  tenia  nada,.  10.  Te^ga  V.  paciencia, 
aniigo  mio.  11.  [  Quien  tendra  el  valor  de  {to)  hacer  eso  ?  12.  Todos 
tendremos  ese  valor.  13.  [  Tenian  los  muchachos  sus  libros  esta 
nianana  ?  14.  No  los  tenian.  15.  [Cuando  habra  acabado  V.? 
16.  Habre  acabado  en  una  hora.  17.  [  Tenian  V.  V.  amigos  en  aquella 
ciudad  ?  18.  Teniamos  varios.  19.  i  Quien  ha  heredado  de  la  for- 
tuna del  general  ?  20.  El  general  no  ha  dejado  ninguna.  21.  [  Ten- 
dran  V.  V.  libros  franceses  el  mes  que  viene  {next  month)  1  22.  Ya 
.tenemos  muchos  libros  franceses  e  ingleses.  23.  [  Porque  no  habia 
escrito  V.  a  su  j)adre  1  24.  Porque  yo  habia  escrito  a  mi  hermano. 
25.  I  Habia  V.  hablado  a  este  hombre  1  26.  Yo  le  habia  hablado  dos 
6  tres  veces.  27.  [  Ha  almorzado  todo  el  mundo  1  28.  El  caballero 
aleman  no  ha  almorzado  todavia.  29.  i  Con  que  dinero  ha  comprado 
V.  esto  1  30.  Con  ninguno,  no  lo  he  pagado  todavia.  31.  [  Tendria 
V.  el  valor  de  salir  solo  1  32.  No,  yo  no  tendria  ese  valor.  33.  i  Tiene 
V.  las  Haves  de  la  casa  1    34.  Las  tendre  esta  tarde.     35.  [  Ha  visto 


IDIOMATIC   USE   OF   TENER.  143 

V.  al  seiior  Palacio  ?  36.  Le  he  visto  en  su  almacen.  37.  El  padre 
de  Carlos  ha  perdido  toda  su  fortuna.  38.  Si  V.  no  es  prudente,  V. 
tendra  la  misma  suerte.  39.  [  Ha  hallado  V.  algo  ?  40.  He  hallado 
una  Have  de  reloj.     41.  Es  mia. 

Exercise  48. 

1.  Why  have  you  not  spoken  to  the  gentleman  ?  2.  I  have  not 
seen  him.  3.  Shall  you  have  finished  your  work  this  evening  1  4.  I 
shall  have  finished  it  in  two  hours.  5.  Had  {imperf.)  you  many  horses 
when  you  were  (estaba)  in  the  country?  6.  I  had  four,  and  my 
brother  had  five.  7.  Have  patience,  my  friend,  you  will  have  the 
money  to-morrow.  8.  Have  you  money  enough  for  the  voyage  ? 
9.  I  have  not  much,  hut  I  have  enough.  10.  Had  you  lost  all  hope  ? 
11.  I  had  lost  all  my  money  ;  and,  with  my  money,  all  hope.  12.  The 
mother  has  given  good  advice  to  her  daughter.  13.  We  had  bought 
many  oxen  for  our  estate.  14.  How  long  have  you  been  in  that  coun- 
try ?  15.  I  have  been  there  five  years.  16.  Have  you  written  all 
your  letters  ?  17.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  had  time.  18.  Has  your 
brother  written  his?  19.  He  has  not  written  them  either.  20.  Have 
the  children  gone  to  {a  la)  school  ?  21.  No,  madam,  they  are  break- 
fasting. 22.  Has  your  father  sold  his  houses  ?  23.  He  has  sold  the 
large  one,  and  he  has  kept  the  small  one.  24.  Do  you  know  if  the 
gentleman  has  goije  out  ?  25.  He  had  gone  out  when  I  was  up  stairs. 
26.  What  did  you  hold  (tenia)  in  your  hand  ?  27.  I  held  (tenia)  the 
key  of  the  garden.  28.  Have  you  spoken  to  your  father  about  (de) 
that  ?  29.  Not  yet,  my  father  is  not  in  (en  la)  town.  30.  I  have 
heard  that  the  vessel  has  arrived. 


Leccion  XXY.  Lesson  XXV. 

IDIOMATIC  USES  OF  TENER. 

Tener  calor,  to  be  warm. 

Tener  frio,  to  be  cold. 

Tener  hamhre,  to  be  hungry. 

Tener  sed,  to  be  thirsty. 

Tener  suefio,  to  be  asleep. 

Tener  vergUenza,  to  be  ashained. 


144 


LESSON    25. 


Tener  miedo, 
Teller  gaiia, 
Tener  razon, 
No  tener  razon,  -j 
Estar  errado,        )■ 
Hacer  mal,  J 

Tener  algo, 
No  tener  nada, 
Tener  diez  anos, 
Tener  los  ojos  negros, 
Tener  diez  pies  de  largo, 
Tener  diez  pies  de  ancho, 
Tener  diez  pies  de  profundo, 
Tener  cien  pies  de  alto, 
Tener  las  manos  Mas, 
Tener  algo  que  hacer, 
Tener  los  ojos  malos, 
Tener  el  dedo  malo. 


to  be  afraid, 
to  have  a  mind, 
to  be  right. 

to  be  wrong. 

to  be  something  the  matter. 

to  be  nothing  ilie  matter. 

to  be  ten  years  old. 

to  have  blax^k  eyes, 

to  be  ten  feet  long. 

to  be  ten  feet  ivide. 

to  be  ten  feet  deep. 

to  be  a  hundred  feet  high. 

to  have  cold  hands. 

to  have  something  to  do. 

to  have  sore  eyes. 

to  have  a  sore  finger. 


Ejemplos. 

i  Tiene  V.  calor  ? 

No  tengo  calor,  tengo  frio. 

I  Quien  tiene  hainbre  ? 

Tenemos  hambre  y  sed. 

i  Tenia  V.  vergiienza  ? 

Si,  senor,  yo  tenia  vergiienza. 

Teniaraos  sneno. 

Tendremos  frio  en  el  cnarto. 

El  clima  de  aquel  pais  es  muy  frio. 

El  cuarto  estd  frio. 

I  No  tiene  V.  vergiienza  ? 

Tengo  vergiienza  de  hablar. 

I  Quien  tiene  sueiio  ? 

Todos  tenemos  suefio. 

i  De  quien  tiene  V.  miedo  ? 

Tengo  miedo  de  este  hombre. 

I  Tiene  V.  gana  de  salir  ? 

No  tengo  gana. 

I  Quien  tiene  razon  ? 

Yo  tengo  razon  y  V.  esta  errado. 


Examples. 

Are  you  warm  ? 

I  am  not  warm,  I  am  cold. 

Who  is  hungry  ? 

We  are  hungry  and  thirsty. 

Were  you  ashamed  ?  " 

Yes,  sir,  1  was  ashamed. 

We  were  sleepy. 

We  will  be  cold  in  the  room. 

The  climate  of  that  count ly  is  very 

cold. 
The  room  is  cold. 
Are  you  not  ashamed  ? 
I  am  ashamed  to  speak. 
Who  is  sleepy  ? 
We  are  all  sleepy. 
Of  whom  are  you  afraid  ? 
I  am  afraid  of  this  man. 
Have  you  a  mind  to  go  out  ? 
I  have  no  mind  (to  go  out). 
Who  is  right  ? 
I  am  right  and  you  are  wrong. 


IDIOMATIC   USE   OF   TENER. 


145 


j-Tengo  yo  razon  de  comprar  esta 

casa  ? 
V.  hace  mal  de  comprarla. 
i  Que  tiene  V.,  amigo  mio  ? 

Nada  ten  go. 

i  Que  tiene  ei  ? 

El  no  tiene  nada. 

i  Que  edad  tiene  V.  ? 

i  Cuantos  ahos  tiene  V. 

Tengo  veinte  anos. 

I  Que  edad  tenia  el  ? 

Tenia  cincuenta  ahos. 

I  Mi  hermano  tendra  maiiana  diez  y 

ocho  anos. 
Esta  senora  tiene  los  ojos  azules. 
La  mesa  tiene  seis  pies  de  largo. 
i  Tiene  V.  las  manos  frias  ? 
Tengo  las  manos  y  los  pies  frios. 
I  Que  tiene  V.  que  bacer  ? 
Tengo  que  escribir  dos  cartas. 


Am  I  right  in  buying  that  house  ? 

You  are  wrong  in  buying  it. 
What  is  the  matter  with  you,  my 

friend  ? 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 
"What  is  the  matter  with  him  ? 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  bin. 

How  old  are  you  ? 

I  am  twenty. 
How  old  was  he  ? 
He  was  fifty. 

My   brother  will  be   eighteen   to- 
morrow. 
This  lady  has  blue  eyes. 
The  table  is  six  feet  long.    , 
Are  your  hands  cold  ? 
My  hands  and  feet  are  cold. 
What  have  you  to  do  ? 
I  have  two  letters  to  write. 


Vocabulario. 

El  bosqne,  the  wood. 

El  comedor,  the  dining-room. 

El  dolor  de  cabaza,  the  headache. 

El  gusto,  tJie  pleasure. 

El  ojo,  the  eye. 

El  pelo,  the  hair. 

El  pie,  the  foot. 

La  cerveza,  the  heer. 

La  conducta,  the  conduct. 

La  edad,  the  age. 

La  noche,  the  night. 

Asi,  so. 


Vocabulary. 

Azul,  blue. 
Bailar,  1.  to  dance. 
Bailo,  /  dance. 
Bajar,  1.  to  come  down. 
Buenas  noches,  good  night. 
Conmigo,  ivith  me. 
Decir,  3.  to  tell,  to  say. 
Llorar,  1.  to  cry,  to  weep. 
Rubio,/(Z^V,  blond. 
Trabajar,  1.  to  work. 
Venir,  3,  to  cmne. 
Ya  no,  no  longer. 


Exercise  49. 

1.  Teniamos  frio  en  nuestro  cuarto  y  hemos  bajado  aqui.     2.  i  Tiene 

V.  miedo  del  perro  ?     3.  No,  seiior,  no   tengo  miedo  de   el  {him). 

4.  I  Tiene  hambre  el  muchacho  ?     5.  No  tiene  hambre  ;  tiene  sueno. 

6.  Siempre  tiene  hambre.     7.  El  tiempo  esta  frio  hoy.     8.  i  De  qiiien 

10 


146  LESSON    25. 

tiene  Y.  miedo  ?  9.  No  tengo  niiedo  de  nadie.  10.  i  Quien  tiene 
razon,  su  hermana  6  V.  ?  11.  Es  ella  que  esta  errada.  12.  [  No  tiene 
V.  verglienza  de  bailar  a  (at)  su  edad  1  13.  Yo  no  bailo  desde  mucho 
tiempo.  14.  [  Tiene  Y.  gana  de  ir  al  teatro  esta  noche  ?  15.  Si,  si 
Y.  quiere  venir  conmigo.  16.  Con  mucho  gusto.  17.  [  Tiene  Y. 
liambre  todavia  ?  18.  Yo  no  tengo  hambre,  pero  tengo  todavia  sed  ; 
tiene  Y.  vino  en  la  casa?     19.  No  tengo  vino,  pero  tengo  cerveza. 

20.  [  Los  muchachos   estan  en   el  bosque,  no  tienen   ellos  miedo  ? 

21.  Estan  con  los  criados  de  su  padre.  22.  [  Que  tienes,  Julia  ? 
23.  Tengo  dolor  de  cabeza.  24.  Esta  casa  tiene  sesenta  pies  de  alto  ; 
no  es  asi  1  25.  Tiene  a  lo  menos  ochenta  pies.  26.  i  Que  edad  tiene 
ese  muchacho  ?  27.  Tendra  seis  anos  en  un  mes.  28.  i  Tiene  Y.  las 
manos  frias  ?  29.  No  tengo  las  manos  frias,  pero  tengo  los  pies  frios. 
30.  Emilio  tiene  los  ojos  negros  y  el  pelo  rubio.  31.  [  Tiene  Y.  algo 
que  hacer  ?  32.  Tengo  que  acabar  mis  cartas.  33.  i  Porque  ha  llo- 
rado  Y.  1    34.  No  he  llorado,  tengo  los  ojos  malos.     35.  Y  yo  tambien. 

Exercise  50. 

1.  Who  is  wrong  ?  2.  Nobody  is  wrong.  3.  Have  you  a  mind  to 
go  to  the  ball  ?  4.  Yes,  I  have  a  mind  to  go.  5.  Have  you  time  to 
(de)  write  a  letter  for  (para)  my  brother  1  6.  I  have  no  time  now, 
but  I  shall  have  time  this  evening.  7.  Is  not  your  brother  ashamed 
of  his  conduct  1  8.  He  is  ashamed  of  nothing.  9.  You  have  no 
money,  and  you  have  not  the  courage  to  (de)  work.  JO.  You  are 
wrong  to  say  that,  I  have  worked  five  days  this  week.  11.  I  have  a 
mind  to  write  to  my  father.  12.  I  have  already  written  to  mine. 
13.  What  is  the  matter  with  you  to-day  1  14.  Nothing  is  the  matter 
with  me.  15.  What  has  your  brother  to  do  ?  16.  He  has  a  great 
deal  (rtiucMsimo)  to  do.  17.  How  old  is  he  now  ?  18.  He  is  twenty- 
five.  19.  Is  anything  the  matter  with  your  sister?  20.  She  has  the 
headache.  21.  Is  Clara  pretty  ?  22.  She  is  very  pretty,  she  has  blue 
eyes  and  black  hair.  23.  How  old  were  you  at  (en)  that  time  ?  24.  I 
was  five  years  old.  25.  Are  your  feet  cold  ?  26.  My  feet  are  always 
cold.  27.  Is  your  dining-room  very  large  ?  28.  It  is  thirty  feet  long 
and  twenty  feet  wide.  29.  What  is  the  matter  with  that  child  1  30.  I 
don't  know  what  (lo  que)  is  the  matter  with  him.  31.  Of  what  were 
you  afraid?  32.  We  were  not  afraid,  but  the  ladies  were  afraid. 
33.  Good  night,  I  am  going  (me  voy)  home,  I  have  never  been  so 
(tanto)  sleepy. 


IDIOMATIC   USE   OF    TENER,  147 


Gram&tica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  verb  tener,  to  have,  is  used  in  Spanisli  instead  of  the 
verb  to  he,  with  the  words  calor,  warm,  warmth,  heat,  frio,  cold, 
hambre,  hunger,  sed,  thirst,  sueno,  deep,  verg^enza,  shame, 
miedo,  fear,  razon,  right,  etc.,  used  substantively,  so  that  in 
order  to  express  :  I  am  warm,  he  is  thirsty,  we  are  ashamed, 
etc.,  the  Spaniards  say  :  /  have  heat,  he  has  thirst,  we  have  sliame, 
etc.  It  follows,  therefore,  that  the  verb  to  be  has  to  be  ren- 
dered in  Spanish  by  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  verb  tener, 
to  have  : 

Tengo  hambre,  /  am  hungry. 

Tenia  or  tuve  hambre,  /  was  hungry. 

Tendre  hambre,  /  shall  he  hungry, 

Tendria  hambre,  /  would  he  hungry. 

Que  yo  tenga  hambre,  That  I  may  he  hungry^ 

Que  yo  tuviese  hambre,  That  I  might  he  htmgry. 

He  tenidd  hambre,  etc.,  I  ham  heen  hungry,  etc. 

Observation.  —  a.  The  verbs  ser  or  estar,  to  he,  are,  however,  used  in 
Spanish  with  the  word  frio,  cold^  when  the  English  verb  is  not  used  in  the 
sense  of  to  feel,  to  experience.  ITius,  we  should  not  say :  el  hielo  tiene 
frio  J  but  el  hielo  es  frio,  ice  is  cold ;  nor  el  dia  tiene  frio,  but  el  dia  esta 
frio,  the  day  is  cold. 

Instead  of  calor,  the  Spaniards  use  in  the  same  cases  the  adjectives 
caliente,  calido,  etc.  La  sopa  esta  caliente  (and  not  la  sopa  tiene  calor), 
the  soup  is  warm. 

h.  The  adjectives  hambriento,  hungry ,  famished,  sediento,  thirsty ,  dry, 
vergonzoso,  ashained,  hashful,  miedoso,  timid,  ^timorous,  afraid,  are  used 
as  in  English  with  the  verb  to  be,  estar  or  ser  : 

Estamos  hambrientos,  We  are  famished. 

El  es  miedoso.  He  is  afraid. 

2,  Tener  vergiienza,  tener  Iniedo,  tener  razon,  tener  gana, 

etc.,  require  the  preposition  de  to  follow  them  when  coming 
before  a  verb  : 

Tengo  gana  dc  escribir,  /  have  a  mind  to  write. 

Tenemos  miedo  de  salir,  We  are  afraid  to  go  out. 

V.  tiene  razon  de  hacer  eso,         You  are  right  to  do  thai. 


148  LESSON   25. 

Observation.  —  The  Spaniards  have  no  equivalent  for  to  be  wrong,  and 
are  therefore  obliged  to  use  : 

No  tener  razon.  Not  to  he  rigM. 

Estar  errado,  To  he  mistaken. 

Hacer  mal,  To  do  wrong. 

3«  The  verb  tener  is  used  idiomatically  in  Spanish  with  tlie 
words  algO,  something,  anything,  and  nada,  nothing,  not  any- 
thing;  and,  when  thus  connected,  it  has  often  the  meaning  of 
to  he  something  the  matter  with,  to  ail : 

i  Que  tiene  V,  ?  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 

Tengo  algo,  SmnetJiing  is  the  matter  with  me. 

'119  \^^  anything  the  mxttter  with  him  ? 

^    '  I  Does  anything  ail  him  ? 
EI  no  tiene  nada,  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  him. 

4«  The  verb  tener  is  also  used  in  Spanish  to  express  the  age ; 
and,  in  inquiring  about  the  age  of  a  person,  they  say  : 

i  Que  edad  tiene...  ?  What  age  has...  1 

i  Cuantos  anos  tiene...  ?        How  many  years  has...  ? 

The  word  anos,  years,  must  not  be  left  out  either  in  the  question 
or  in  the  answer,  unless  expressed  in  the  first  part  of  the  sen- 
tence : 

i  Cuantos  anos  tiene  V.  ?  How  old  are  yon.  ? 

Tengo  veinte  anos  y  mi  hermano  diez        /  am  twenty  and  my  hr other 

y  ocho,  eighteen. 

Observation. — Tener  mas  edad,  ser  de  mas  edad  is  used  for  older, 
when  comparing  the  age  of  persons  who  are  not  really  old  : 
Este  nino  tiene  mas  edad  que  aquel,  This  child  is  older  than  that  one. 

5.  Tener  algo  malo  means  to  have  a  pain,  a  sore,  or  ache 
somewhere,  and  is  used  in  Spanish  with  the  definite  article  : 

Tengo  el  ojo  malo,  I  have  a  sore  eye. 

Tenemos  los  pies  malos,      •       We  have  sore  feet. 
El  tiene  la  rodilla  mala.  He  has  a  sore  knee. 

6«  The  definite  article  is  also  used  before  verbs  expressing 
moral  or  physical  properties  : 

Tiene  los  ojos  azules.  He  Ms  hlue  eyes. 

Tienen  los  pies  grandes,         Tliey  have  large  feet. 


AUXILIARY   VERBS.  149 

Observation.  — The  same  article  is  used  in  the  singular ,  when  speaking 
of  several  persons,  if  the  property  spoken  of  is  single  in  each  person  : 
El  tiene  la  nariz  larga,  He  has  a  long  nose, 

Ellos  tienen  la  nariz  larga,         They  have  long  noses. 

7t    In  speaking  of  the  dimensions  or  size  of  objects,  the  Span- 
ish use  the  verb  tener,  to  have : 

Este  arbol  tiene  cien  pies  de  alto.  This  tree  is  a  hundred  feet  high. 

La  calle  tiene  cincuenta  pies  de  ancho,         The  street  is  fifty  feet  wide. 

8t    The  verb  tener  is  used  before  an  Infinitive  with  the  con- 
junction que  when  obligation  or  necessity  is  expressed  : 

Tengo  que  escribir  cartas,         /  have  letters  to  tvrite. 
Tenemos  que  salir,  ,    TFe  have  to  go  out. 


Leccion  XXVI.  Lesson  XXVI. 

VERBOS  AUXILIARES.       AUXILIARY  VERBS. 
Ser,  to  be. 

MODO   INFINITIVO,        INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Ser,  to  he. 

Haber  sido,  to  have  been. 

Gerundio,  gerund. 
Siendo,  being. 

Habiendo  sido,  having  been. 

Participio  pasivo,  past  participle. 
Sido,  been. 


T I  EM  PCS   SIMPLES, 

Simple  Tenses. 

Presente, 

preseni. 

Soy, 

lam. 

Eres, 

thou  art. 

Es, 

he  (or  she)  is. 

Somos, 

we  are. 

Sols, 

you  are. 

Son, 

they  are. 

150 


LESSON 

26. 

Imperfecto, 

imperfect. 

Era, 

I  was  (/  used  to  he). 

Eras, 

thou  wast. 

Era, 

he  was. 

Eramos, 

we  were. 

Erais, 

you  were. 

Eran, 

they  were. 

Preterite  perfecto  definido,  preterite. 

Fui,  /  was. 

Fuiste,  (hoit  vMst. 

Fue,  he  teas. 

Fuimos,  we  were. 

Fuisteis,  you  ivere. 

Fueron,  they  were. 


Future, 

future. 

Sere, 

I  shall  or  will  be. 

Seras, 

thou  shall  or  wilt  he. 

Sera, 

he  shall  or  will  he. 

Seremos, 

we  shall  or  vnll  he.. 

Sereis, 

you  shall  or  will  he. 

Seran, 

they  shall  or  will  he. 

Imperativo, 

imperative. 

Se  tu, 

he  (be  thou). 

Sea  el  or  ella, 

let  him  (or  her)  he.  . 

No  seas  tu, 

he  thou  not. 

Sea  v., 

he  {be  you,  sing.). 

Seamos, 

let  us  he. 

Sed, 

he  {he  you). 

No  seais. 

he  ye  not. 

Sean  V.  v.. 

he  {he  you,  pi.). 

Sean  alios. 

let  them  he. 

MODO  SUBJUNTIVO, 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Presente. 

,  present. 

Sea, 

I  may  he. 

Seas, 

thou  mayest  he. 

Sea, 

he  may  he. 

Seamos, 

we  may  he. 

Seais, 

you  inay  he. 

Sean, 

they  may  he. 

AUXILIARY  VERBS.  151 

Imperfecto,  imperfect, 
Fuera,  seria,  fuese  ;  /  {mightf  could^  would  or)  stiould 

he. 
Fneras,  serias,  fueses  thou  shouldst  he. 

Fuera,  seria,  fuese  ;  he  should  he. 

Fueramos,  seriamos,  fuesemos  ;  we  should  he. 

Fuerais,  serials,  fueseis  ;  you,  should  he. 

Fueran,  serian,  fueseu  ;  they  should  he. 

Futuro,  future. 

{Cuando  or  Si)  Fuere,  (when  or  if)  /  shall  or  will  he, 

Fueres,  thou,  shalt  or  will  he. 

Fuere,  he  shall  or  will  he, 

Fueremos,  we  shall  or  will  he. 

Fuereis,  you  shall  or  xuill  he. 

Fueren,  they  shall  or  will  he. 

TiEMPOS  COMPUESTOS,  CoTiipownd  Tenses, 
MODO   INDICATIVO,        INDICATIVE  MOOD, 


Perfect,  perfect. 

e  sido. 

I  have  heen. 

etc. 

etc. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect, 
Habia  sido,  /  had  heen, 

etc.  etc, 

Preterito  anterior,  past  anterior, 
Hube  sido,  /  had  heen. 

etc.  etc. 

Future  anterior,  future  anterior. 
Habre  sido,  /  slmll  or  will  have  heen, 

etc.  etc. 

MODO   SUBJUNTIVO,        SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD, 


Perfecto,  perfect. 

aya  sido, 

I  may  have  heen. 

etc. 

etc. 

152  ,  LESSON    26. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 
Hubiera,  habria  or  hubiese  sido,  /  mighty  could,  would  or  should 

have  been. 
etc.         .  etc. 

Futnro,  fiUtire. 
(Si)  Hubiere  sido,  (if)  I  shall  or  will  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 


Estar,  to 


MODO   INFINITIVO,  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Estar,  to  be. 

Haber  estado,  to  have  been. 

Gerundio,  gerund. 

EstaDdo,  being. 

Habiendo  estado,  having  been. 

Participio  pasivo,  past  participle. 

Estado,  been. 

TiEMPOs  SIMPLES,  Simple  Tenses. 

MODO   INDICATIVO,  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Presente,  present. 

Yo  estoy,  /  am. 

Tu  estas,  thou  art. 

El  or  ella  esta,  he  ov  she  is. 

Nosotros  estamos,  we  are. 

Vosotros  estais,  you  are. 

Ellos  or  ellas  estan,  they  are. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 

Estaba,  /  was  {I  used  to  be). 

Estabas,  th^u  wast. 

Estaba,  he  or  she  was. 

Estabamos, "  we  were. 

Estabais,  you  were. 

Estaban,  they  were. 


AUXILIARY   VERBS. 


153 


Preterito  perfecto  definido,  preterite, 

Estuve,  I  was. 

Estuviste,  thou  loast, 

Estuvo,  he  was. 

Estuvimos.  we  were. 

Estuvisteis,  you  were. 

Estuvieron,  "                       they  were. 


Future,  future. 

Estare,  /  shall  or  will  be. 

Estaras,  thoic  shalt  or  wilt  he. 

Estara,  he  shall  or  will  he, 

Estaremos,  we  shall  or  ivill  he. 

Estareis,  you  shall  or  ivill  he. 

Estaran,  they  shall  or  will  he, 

Imperativo,  imperative. 


Esta  tii, 
No  estes, 
Este  el  or  ella, 
Este  v., 
Estemos, 
Estad, 
No  esteis, 
Esten  V.  Y., 
Est  en  ell  OS, 


he  (he  thou), 
he  {thou)  not. 
let  him  or  hei'  he. 
he  (he  you), 
let  us  he. 
he  {he  you), 
he  {you)  not. 
he  {he  you,  pi.). 
let  them  he.    • 


MODO  SUBJUNTIVO,        SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Presente, 

present. 

Este, 

I  may  he. 

Estes, 

thou  mayest  he. 

Este, 

he  may  he. 

Estemos, 

we  may  he. 

Esteis, 

you  may  he. 

Esten, 

they  may  he. 

Imperfecto,  imperfect. 
Estuviera,  estaria,  estuviese  ;         I  (might,  could,  would  or)  should  he. 


etc. 


etc. 


154  LESSON   26. 

Future,  futwre. 
(Cuando  or  Si)  Estuviere,     (when  or  if)  /  shall  or  will  he. 

Estuvieres,  thou  shall  or  wilt  he. 

Estuviere,  he  shall  or  will  he. 

Estuvieremos,  we  shall  or  will  he, 

Estuviereis,  you  shall  or  will  he. 

Estuvieren,  they  shall  or  will  he. 

TiEMPOS  coMPUESTOS,  Compowid  Tenses. 

MODO   INDICATIVO,        INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  perfect. 
He  estado,  /  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 
Habia  estado,  /  had  heen. 

etc.  etc. 

Preterite  anterior,  past  anterior. 
Hube  estado,  I  had  heen. 

etc.  etc. 

Future  anterior,  future  anterior. 
Habre  estado,  /  shall  or  will  have  been. 

etc.  etc. 

MODO  SUBJUNTIVO,        SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Perfecto,  perfect. 
Haya  estado,  /  may  have  heen. 

etc.  etc. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  pluperfect. 
Hubiera,  habria  or  hubiese  estado,  /  (might,  coxCld,  should  or)  would 

have  heen. 
etc.  etc. 

Future,  future. 
(Si)  Hubiere  estado,  (if)  /  shall  or  ivill  have  heen. 

etc.  etc. 


AUXILIARY   VERBS.  155 


Vocabulario.  Vocabulary. 


El  carpintero,  the  carpenter. 
El  enfermo,  the  patient. 
El  parque,  the  park. 
El  precio,  the  price. 
La  batalla,  the  battle. 
Amado,  loved. 
Carolina,  Caroline. 
Comprado,  bought. 
Conocido,  known. 
Creo,  /  believe. 
Demolido,  pulled  down. 
Excepto,  except. 


Francia,  f.  France. 
Hasta,  till,  until,  as  far. 
Herido,  wounded. 
Impaciente,  impatient 
Ir,  3.  to  go. 

Mucho  tiempo,  long  time. 
Pero,  but. 
Pocos,  few. 
Posible,  possible. 
Pues,  for,  as. 
Tarde,  late. 
Vendido,  sold. 


Exercise  51. 

1.  [  Esta  su  padre  en  casa  ?  2.  No  esta  ahora,  pero  estara  esta 
noche.  3.  [  Donde  estaba  V.  esta  manana  ?  4.  Estuve  en  mi  ciiarto 
todo  el  tiempo.  5.  i  Quien  estaba  con  V.  ?  6.  Mis  dos  hermanos 
estaban  conmigo.  7.  Esta  manzana  no  es  tan  buena  como  las  otras. 
8.  Si  V.  esta  aqui  manana  temprano,  tendra  V.  dinero.  9.  [  Cuando 
estara  Y.  en  casa?  10.  Estare  temprano  esta  noche.  11.  Seamos 
amigos.  12.  [  No  es  V.  el  amigo  de  ese  hombre  1  13.  Yo  era  su 
amigo,  pero  ya  no  lo  soy.  14.  [  Estaria  Y.  contento  si  sii  hermana 
estuviese  {were)  aqui  1  15.  Estaria  lo  mas  contento.  16.  Y.  sera 
siempre  'el  mismo,  amigo  mio ;  Y.  es  demasiado  impaciente.  17.  Lo 
se.  18.  I  Donde  estaba  Y.  cuando  Y.  era  joven  ?  19.  Estuve  en 
Francia  hasta  la  edad  de  veinte  aiios.  20.  [  Ha  estado  Y.  hoy  en  la 
calle  ?  21.  He  estado  en  la  casa  todo  el  dia.  22.  i  Quien  estara  en 
su  casa  esta  noche  1  23.  No  se  todavia.  24.  i  Estara  ahi  la  seiiorita 
Luisa  ?  25.  Si,  senor,  y  la  senorita  Carolina  tambien.  26.  [  Es  boni- 
ta  la  seiiorita  Carolina  ?  27.  Ha  sido  muy  bonita,  pero  ya  no  es 
joven.  28.  i  Quiere  Y.  ser  mi  amigo  ]  29.  Sere  su  amigo,  si  Y.  es  el 
mio.  30.  [  Que  edad  tenia  Y.  cuando  estaba  en  Inglaterra  ]  31.  Yo 
tenia  doce  anos,  y  mi  hermano  quince.  32.  i  Es  Y.  pobre  1  33.  No 
soy  ni  rico  ni  pobre.  34.  Estos  dos  hombres  eran  muy  buenos  ami- 
gos, pero  ahora  son  enemigos.  35.  i  Estara  aqui  el  carpintero  mana- 
na 1  36.  Estara,  pero  tarde.  37.  i  Es  habil  este  medico  ?  38.  Lo  es. 
39.  [Esta  Y.  mala,  senora?  40.  Lo  estoy  un  poco.  41.  Este  autor 
toda^da  no  es  conocido  ;  pero  lo  sera  un  dia,  pues  tiene  mucho 
talento. 


156  LESSON.  27. 

Exercise  52. 

1.  Are  you  sick,  my  little  friend  ?  2.  I  am  not,  but  my  brother  is. 
3.  Is  this  hat  yours  or  your  brother's  ?  4.  It  is  neither  his  nor  mine. 
5.  Are  the  horses  sold  ?  6.  All  the  horses  are  sold  except  one.  7.  Is 
Charles's  mother  old  ?  8.  She  is,  but  she  is  pretty  yet.  9.  Are  you 
the  lady  of  the  house  ?  10.  I  am  not,  I  am  her  sister.  11.  Are  those 
gentlemen  friends  1  12.  They  are,  for  a  long  while.  13.  Is  your 
letter  written  ?  14.  It  will  be  written  very  soon.  15.  Do  you 
know  if  the  patient  is  better?  16.  He  was  (imperf.)  much  better 
this  morning.  17.  Good  morning,  sir  ;  is  your  brother  at  home  1 
18.  I  believe  that  he  is.  19.  When  will  you  be  ready  to  (para)  go 
with  me  ?  20.  I  will  be  ready  in  a  few  minutes.  21.  This  child  is 
loved  by  (de)  every  body.  22.  These  books  have  been  bought  in 
Paris.  23.  When  will  you  be  the  first  in  your  class  ?  24.  I  am 
always  the  first.  25.  Where  were  (imperf.)  you  this  morning  ?  26.  I 
w^as  in  the  park  with  my  two  sisters.  27.  Is  the  park  far  from  here  ? 
28.  It  is  not  very  far.  29.  Are  those  gentlemen  friends  1  30.  They 
were  (imperf.)  friends,  but  I  don't  know  if  they  are  now.  31.  The 
general  was  (pret.)  wounded  in  the  battle.  32.  Three  houses  have 
been  pulled  down  in  our  street.  33.  How  is  that  possible  ?  34.  It  is 
very  possible.  35.  The  boys  were  (imperf)  playing  in  the  yard  when 
I  was  (pret.)  at  their  house.  36.  The  goods  have  been  sold  at  a  very 
good  price. 

Observation.  —  All  the  rules  on  the  verbs  ser  and  estar,  to  be,  having 
been  given  in  Lesson  V.,  we  refer  the  student  to  the  same,  and  would 
recommend  a  review  of  the  important  rules  therein  contained. 


Leccion  XXTII.  Lesson  XXVII. 

HABEB  AlO)  SEB  USED  AS  IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 
Haber,  there  to  he. 

Hay,  theo'e  is,  there  are,  it  is. 

Habia, 


TT  1         V  there  was,  there  were. 

Habra,  there  shall  or  will  he. 

Hubiera,  habria  or  hubiese,  there  should  or  would  he. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS    IIABER   AND   SER. 


157 


Ha  habido,  there  has  been,  there  have  been, 

Habia  habido,  there  had  been. 

Habra  habido,  there  shall  or  will  have  been. 

Hubiera,  habria  or  hubiese  habido,  there  should  or  would  have  been. 


^Hay? 

i  Habia  ?  \ 

i  Hubo  ?  ( 

I  Ha  habido  ? 

No  hay, 

No  habia,    i 

No  hubo,    ) 

No  ha  habido, 

No  habia  habido, 

j  Que  hay? 

I  Que  hay  de  nuevo  ? 

Ejemplos. 
Hay  una  carta  para  V. 
i  Hay  pan  en  la  casa  ? 
No  hay. 

I  Habia  mucho  pescado  en  la  plaza, 
Habia  mucho. 
Hay  diez  mil. 
I  Habra  un  baile  mafiana  ? 
Ha  habido  uno  ayer. 


is  there  ?  are  there  ?  is  it  ? 

was  there  ?  were  there  ? 

has  (or  have)  there  been  ? 
there  is  not,  there  are  not. 

there  was  not,  there  were  not. 

there  has  (or  have)  not  been, 
there  had  not  been, 
what  is  the  matter  ?  what  is  thei^e  ? 
what  is  the  news  ? 

Examples. 
There  is  a  letter  for  you. 
Is  there  any  bread  in  the  house  ? 
There  is  none. 

Was  there  much  fish  in  the  market  ? 
There  was  much. 
There  are  ten  thousand. 
Will  there  be  a  ball  to-morrow  ? 
There  has  been  one  yesterday. 


Haber  translated  by  ago  : 
Mi  hermano  llego  hay  tres  dias,         ) 

Hay  tres  dias  q«e  mi  hermano  llego,  \  ^^V  ^'"■^''  "■'^''""^  ^'^'""^  ^'J'  "^°- 
Murio  hay  mucho  tiempo,  He  died  a  Icmg  time  ago. 

Haber  expressing  an  action,  or  a  state  which  still  continues  : 
Hay  dos  aiios  que  esta  malo.  He  has  been  sick  these  two  years. 

Hay  mucho  tiempo  que  estoy  aqui,         /  have  been  here  a  long  while, 
i  Cuanto  (tiempo)  hay  que  V.  esta        How  long  have  you  been  here  ? 

aqui  ? 

Haber  used  to  express  measure  of  distances  : 
i  Cuanto  hay  de  Paris  a  Londres  ?  How  far  is  it  from  Paris  to  London  ? 

No  hay  lejos.  It  is  not  far. 

Hay  cinco  minutos  de   aqui  a  la        It  is  five  minutes' walk  from  here  to 
iglesia,  the  church. 


158 


LESSON   27. 


Ser  used  impersonally  : 
Es  verdad  que  es  pobre,         It  is  trice  thai  he  is  poor. 
Es  iniitil  decir  eso,  It  is  useless  to  say  that. 

Sera  tiempo  de  ir  alia,  It  will  he  time  to  go  tliere. 

Hay  aud  alii  esta  compared: 
Hay  un  honibre  a  la  puerta,  There  is  a  man  at  the  door. 

Alii  esta  el  hombre  que  vende  pan.  There  is  the  man  (pointing  out)  who 

sells  bread. 


Todos, 

Todos  los  dias,  every  day. 
Todos  los  meses,  every  mmith. 
Todas  las  mafianas,  every  monting, 
Todas  las  tardes,  every  afternoon. 
Todas  las  noclies,  every  evening. 
Todas  las  semanas,  every  loeek. 
Todos  los  ahos,  every  year. 
Todos  los  liines,  every  Monday. 

Vocabulario. 
El  Aleman,  the  GermoM. 
El  baile,  the  hall. 
El  conocido,  the  acquaintance. 
El  estrangero,  the  foreigner. 
El  ferro  carril,  the  railroad. 
El  incendio,  the  confUigmiion. 
El  parque,  the  park. 
El  periddico,  the  newspaper. 
El  peso,  the  dollar. 
La  gente,  tlie  people. 
La  milla,  th^  mile. 
La  persona,  the  person. 


every: 

Todo  el  dia,  the  whole  day. 
Todo  el  mes,  the  whole  month. 
Toda  la  manana,  the  whole  morning. 
Toda  la  tarde,  the  whole  afternoon. 
Toda  la  noche,  the  whole  night. 
Toda  la  semana,  the  whole  week. 
Todo  el  alio,  the  whole  year. 
Todo  el  mundo,  every  hody. 

Vocabulary. 

La  semana  que  viene,  next  week. 

La  vez,  the  time. 

Cerca  de,  nearly. 

Esperar,  1 .  to  wait. 

Hecho,  done. 

Inutil,  useless. 

Muerto,  died. 

Tambien,  also,  too. 

Todo,  all,  every  thing. 

Quiere,  wishes. 

"Ultimo,  last. 

Ver,  2.  to  see. 


Exercise  53. 

1.  [Hay  cartas  para  mi  {me)  hoy  ?  2.  Hay  una  para  V.,  y  dos  para 
su  hermano.  3.  i  Habia  mucha  gente  en  el  baile  ?  4.  Habia  mas  que 
la  ultima  vez.  5.  [  Cuanto  hay  de  aqui  d  la  ciudad  1  6.  Hay  muy 
lejos,  pero  ahora  tenemos  un  ferro  carril.  7.  [  Cuanto  tiempo  hay 
que  ha  muerto  el  general  ?    8.  Habrd  un  ano  manana.     9.  [  Quien 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS   HA  BEE.   and   SER.  159 

estaba  en  el  baile  ?  10.  Habia  muchos  de  nuestros  conocidos.  11.  Es 
inutil  decir  eso,  todo  el  muiido  lo  sabe.  12.  [  Hay  mucho  tiempo  que 
V.  esta  aqui  esperaiido  1  13.  Hay  a  lo  menos  dos  horas.  14.  [  Que 
ha  hecho  V.  todo  el  tiempo  1  15.  He  leido  los  periodicos.  16.  [  Que 
ha  habido  en  Boston?  17.  Ha  habido  un  incendio  muy  grande. 
18.  [Cuantos  centavos  hay  en  un  peso?  19.  V.  sabe  muybien  que 
hay  cien  (centavos).  20.  i  Que  hay  de  nuevo  en  la  ciudad  ?  21.  No 
hay   nada  de   particular.      22.    [  Cuanto   hay  de   Berlin  a  Viena  ? 

23.  Hay  cerca  de  cien  millas.  24.  [  Cuanto  tiempo  hay  que  el  esta  en 
America  1     25.  No  se  cuanto  tiempo  hay. 

Exercise  54. 

1.  Is  there  any  one  up  stairs  ?  2.  There  is  nobody  up  stairs,  but 
there  is  somebody  down  stairs.  3.  How  long  have  you  been  here  ? 
4.  I  have  been  here  these  three  hours.  5.  Do  you  know  if  there 
were  (imperf.)  any  letters  for  me  (mi)  ?  6.  There  were  none  this 
morning.  7.  Is  there  anybody  at  the  door?  8.  There  is  nobody. 
9.  There  are  some  very  pretty  birds  in  the  park.  10.  Was  there  any- 
thing for  you?  11.  There  was  nothing  for  me  {mi\  all  was  for  my 
brother.  12.  Were  there  many  people  at  the  theater?  13.  There 
were  more  than  two  thousand  persons.  14.  Are  there  many  foreign- 
ers in  that  country  ?  15.  Yes,  there  are  many  Germans,  Spaniards, 
and  Frenchmen.  16.  Has  your  brother  arrived?  17.  He  arrived 
(llego)  three  days  ago.  18.  There  are  many  persons  (muchos)  who 
think  (jpiensan)  that  I  am  rich,  but  I  am  not.  19.  What  is  the  mat- 
ter, my  friend  ?  20.  I  don't  know  what  the  matter  is.  21.  If  you 
are  a  good  boy,  there  wull  be  something  for  you  too.  22.  Is  there 
anything  to  be  done  (que  hacer)  ?     23.  There  is  nothing  to  be  done. 

24.  There   will  be   a  great   ball    at   (en)   the    theater  next   week. 

25.  There  is  one  every  week.  26.  What  is  the  news  to-day  ?  27.  I 
don't  know  (of)  anything.  28.  There  is  a  man  at  the  door  who 
wishes  to  see  you. 


160  LESSON  27. 


Gramatica.  Grammar. 

J,  The  verbs  haber  and  ser  become  sometimes  impersonal 
verbs,  and  are  then  only  used  in  the  third  person  singular,  even 
when  referring  to  a  plural : 

Hay  un  hombre  a  la  puerta,  Tlure  is  a  man  at  the  door. 

Hay  dos  hombres  abajo,  There  are  two  men  down  stairs. 

Habia  algimo  arriba,  There  was  somebody  iip  stairs. 

Habia  miicha  gente  en  el  teatro,  There  were  many  people  at  the  theater. 

2.  Haber  forms  a  great  variety  of  idiomatical  expressions, 
and  can  be  translated  by  there  to  he,  ago,  since,  this,  or  these,  etc. 

Henios  coraprado  esta  casa  hay  {or  We  bought  this  house  two  years 

hace)  dos  anos,  ago. 

Ha}^  {or  hace)  inuclio  tiempo  que  no  /  have  not  seen  your  brother  for 

he  visto  a  su  hermano,  (since)  a  long  while. 

Hay  cinco  anos  que  murio,  He  died  five  years  ago. 

i  Cuanto  hay  de  aqui  a  la  ciudad,  How  far  is  it  from  here  to  the  city  ? 

Observation.  —  The  verb  hacer,  when  referring  to  time,  may  be  used 
instead  of  haber. 

Remark.  —  Observe  the  difference  between  the  following  sentences  : 

I  Cuanto  tiempo  hay  {or  hace)  que  How  long  have  you  heen  in  New 

V.  esta  en  Nueva  York  ?  York  ? 

i  Cuanto    tiempo    ha    estado  V.   en  How  long  were  you  in  New  York 

Nueva  York  ?  (formerly)  ? 

In  the  first  sentence,  the  residence  in  New  York  still  continues  ;  while  in 
the  second,  a  residence  at  a  former  period  is  alluded  to. 

3,  Haber  governs  the  Infinitive  with  que,  and  not  with  a 
preposition. 

Hoy  hay  mucho  que  hacer,  There  is  much  to  do  to-day. 

Manana  habra  mucho  que  hacer,        There  will  be  much  to  do  to-morrow. 


THE   TIME  OF  THE  DAY,  ETC. 


161 


Leccion  XXYIII.  lesson  XXYIII. 

THE  TIME  OF  THE  DAT,  ETC. 


n.  ) 


Ejemplos. 

I  Que  hora  es  ? 

Es  la  mm. 

Son  las  dos. 

Son  las  tres. 

Son  las  doce. 

Las  doce  son. 

Es  la  una  y  media. 

Son  las  dos  y  cuarto. , 

Son  las  tres  menos  cuarto. 

Son  las  doce  del  dia. 

Es  mediodia. 

Son  las  doce  de  la  noche. 

Es  median  oclie. 

Las  cuatro  de  la  manana. 

Las  tres  de  la  tarde. 

Las  siete  de  la  noche. 

I  A  que  hora  ? 

A  la  una. 

A  las  dos  menos  cuarto. 

A  las  dos  menos  veinte. 

Son  mas  de  las  cinco. 

Son  menos  de  las  seis. 

Son  las  siete  en  punto. 

Ya  son  las  diez. 

No  son  todavia  las  once. 

No  es  mas  que  la  una  y  media. 

Van  a  dar  las  tres. 

Son  cerca  de  las  cuatro. 

Son  las  siete  dadas. 

Las  once  estan  dando. 

Han  dado  las  tres. 

Faltan  algunos  minutos. 

Eran  las  tres. 

Seran  las  cuatro. 


Examples. 

What  time  is  it  ?     What  o'clock  is  it  ? 
It  is  one  o'clock. 
It  is  two  o'clock. 
It  is  three  o'clock. 

It  is  twelve  o'clock. 

It  is  half  past  one. 

It  is  a  quarter  past  two. 

It  is  a  quarter  to  three. 

It  is  twelve  o'clock  in  the  day. 

It  is  noon  (mid-day). 

It  is  twelve  o'clock  in  the  night. 

It  is  midnight. 

Four  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon. 

Seven  o'clock  in  the  evening. 

At  what  o'clock  ? 

At  one  o'clock. 

At  a  quarter  to  two. 

At  twenty  minutes  to  two. 

It  is  more  than  five  o'clock. 

It  is  less  than  six  o'clock. 

It  is  precisely  seven  o'clock. 

It  is  already  ten  o'clock. 

It  is  not  yet  eleven  o'clock. 

It  is  only  half  past  one. 

It  is  going  to  strike  three  o'clock. 

It  is  nearly  four  o'clock. 

It  is  past  seven  o'clock. 

It  is  striking  eleven  o'clock. 

It  has  struck  three  o'clock. 

It  wants  a  few  minutes. 

It  was  three  o'clock. 

It  will  be  four  o'clock. 


11 


162 


LESSON   28. 


Divisions 

Un  aho, 

Un  mes, 

Una  semana, 

Una  hora, 

Una  media  hora, 

Un  cuarto  de  hora, 

Ti'es  cuartos  de  hora, 

Una  hora  y  media, 

Un  siglo, 

Un  minute, 

Quince  dias, 

Un  segnndo, 

Un  rato  or  un  momento, 

Un  instante, 

Una  hora  y  cuarto, 

El  aho  que  viene  (proximo). 

El  ano  pasado. 

La  semana  que  viene. 

La  semana  pasada. 


of  Time. 

a  year. 

a  month, 

a  week. 

an  hour. 

half  an  hour. 

a  quarter  of  an  hour. 

three  qioarters  of  an  hour. 

an  hour  and  a  half. 

a  century. 

a  minute. 

a  fortnight. 

a  second. 

a  moment. 

an  insta^it. 

an  hour  and  a  quarter. 

next  year. 

last  year. 

next  week. 

last  week. 


Divisions  of  the  Day. 

El  dia,  the  day. 

El  amanecer,  the  dawn,  break  of  day. 

La  manana,  the  morning. 

El  mediodia,  mid-day. 

La  tarde,  the  afternoon. 

La  noche,  the  evening,  the  ni^ht 

Un  dia  de  trabajo,  a  work-day. 

La  vispera,  the  eve. 

El  salir  del  sol,  sunrise. 

El  ponerse  del  sol,  sunset. 

El  anochecer,  nightfall. 

Medianoche,  midnight. 

Un  dia  de  fiesta,  a  holiday. 

Una  Jornada,  a  day's  work. 

Holidays. 

El  dia  de  ano  nuevo.  New  Years  Day. 

El  dia  de  reyes.  Twelfth  Day. 
El  martes  de  carnestolendas.      Shrove  Tuesday. 


THE  TIME  OF  THE  DAY,  ETC. 


163 


El  miercoles  de  ceniza, 

El  domingo  de  ramos, 

Pascua  de  resurieccion, 

Dia  de  todos  los  santos, 

El  dia  de  San  Miguel, 

Navidad, 

La  nochebuena, 

La  cuaresma, 

La  semana  santa, 

Viernes  santo, 

Pentecostes, 

Las  vacaciones  or  las  fiestas, 


Ash-  Wednesday. 

Palm  Sunday. 

Easter. 

All  Saints'  Day. 

Michaelmas. 

Christmas. 

Christmas  eve. 

Lemit. 

Holy  week. 

Good  Friday. 

Whitsuntide. 

vacatioTis,  the  holidays. 


Vocabulario. 

El  concierto,  the  concert. 
El  fin,  the  end. 
A  menudo,  often. 
Antes  de,  before. 
Gansado,  tired. 
Cerca,  near. 


Vocabulary. 


Cerrado,  closed. 
I  Come  V.  ?  do  you  dine  'i 
Comemos,  we  dine. 
Conmigo,  with  me. 
Encontrara,  toillfind. 
Entre,  between. 


Jamas,  ever. 

Llega,  arrives. 

i  Sale  V.  1  do  you  go  out  ? 

Trabajar,  1.  to  work. 

Volver,  2.  to  return. 

Vuelva  v.,  return. 


Exercise  55. 

1.  [  Que  hora  es  ahora?  2.  Es  temprano  todavia.  3.  [  Son  ya  las 
siete  ?  4.  Todavia  no,  no  son  mas  que  las  seis  y  media.  5.  i  A  que 
hora  estara  V.  en  casa  esta  noche  ?  6.  Estare  entre  las  siete  y  las 
ocho.  7.  I  Esta  lejos  de  aqui  la  casa  de  su  tio  ?  8.  Esta  cerquita. 
9.  I  Cuanto  tiempo  bay  que  V.  esta  aqui  1  10.  A  lo  menos  tres 
cuailos  de  hwa.  11.  [A  que  hora  sale  V.  de  la  escuela?  12.  A  las 
doce  en  punto.  13.  i  Estaran  V.  V.  aqui  temprano  ?  14.  Estaremos 
aqui  a  las  siete.  15.  [  Puede  V.  volver  en  media  hora?  16.  No, 
seiior,  no  puedo  volver.  17.  Eran  las  nueve  cuando  yo  estaba  en  el 
almacen.  18.  i  Cuantas  vacaciones  tendran  Y.  V.  al  fin  del  ano  ? 
19.  Tendremos  tres  meses.  20.  [A.  que  bora  llega  la  gente  1  21.  Todo 
el  mundo  estara  aqui  antes  de  las  ocho.  22.  Si  V.  no  estd  aqui  a  me- 
dianocbe,  encontrara  la  puerta  cerrada.  23.  Estare  aqui  a  las  once. 
24.  I  Cuantas  semanas  bay  todavia  antes  de  la  semana  santa  ?  25.  Hay 
todavia  tres  semanas.  26.  Vuelva  V.  d  la  una  y  media  6  d  las  dos. 
27.  [  Va  V.  a  la  iglesia  todos  los  domingos  ?  28.  Voy  dos  veces. 
29.   [Cuantas  horas  bay  en  un  dia?     30.    Hay  veinte  y  cuatro. 


164  LESSON    28. 


Exercise  66. 


1.  What  time  is  it  by  {por)  your  watch  1  2.  It  is  only  ten  o'clock 
by  mine.  3.  Were  (imperf.)  you  here  last  year  1  4.  No,  I  was  in  the 
country.  6.  How  many  minutes  are  there  in  one  hour  1  6.  There 
are  sixty.  7.  Will  you  be  here  at  seven  o'clock  ?  8.  No,  not  at 
seven,  but  at  half  past  seven.  9.  When  will  you  be  ready  ?  10.  In 
half  an  hour.  11.  ^.t  what  time  are  you  going  to  the  concert? 
12.  At  half  past  eight  :  will  you  be  there  ?  13.  I  shall  be  there  at  a 
quarter  past  nine.  14.  We  have  worked  until  three  o'clock  in  the 
morning,  and  we  are  very  tired.  15.  Have  you  ever  seen  the  rising 
of  the  sun  ?  16.  Very  often  w^hen  I  was  in  the  country.  17.  What 
a  beautiful  sunset !  18.  Is  your  father  in  town?  19.  He  is  still  in 
the  country.  20.  We  have  no  vacation  on  (el)  'New  Year's  day. 
21.  Why  not?  22.  We  never  have  any  on  that  day.  23.  Will  you 
go  out  wdth  me  ?     24.  At  what  time  ?    25.   At  a  quarter  to  four. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  To  indicate  the  hour  or  the  time,  the  Spaniards  do  not 
use  the  words  o'clock.  They  use  the  article  la  before  una  (one 
o'clock)  and  las  before  the  other  hours  : 

La  una,         one  o'clock ;      '      Las  dos,         two  o'clock ;  etc. 
The  word  hora,  hour,  being  understood,  and  being  feminine, 
the  adjective  half  is  translated  by  media,  feminine  of  medio. 

2,  After  the  full  hour,  instead  of  the  equivalent  of  the  word 
past,  the  Spaniards  use  the  conjunction  y,  and  : 

Son  las  tres  y  cuarto,         It  is  a  quarter  past  three. 
The  w^ord  menos,  less,  is  used  on  the  other  hand,  when  the 
hour  is  not  yet  completed  : 

La  una  menos  cuarto,         A  quarter  to  mie. 

3,  The  preposition  on,  which  in  English  is  placed  before 
days  of  the  week,  days  of  the  month,  and  a  few  holidays,  is 
rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  Definite  Article  : 

El  dia  de  aho  nuevo,  07i  New  Year's  day. 

El  domingo,  On  Sunday. 

Los  limes,  On  Mondays. 


USE  OF  THE  ARTICLE, 


165 


leccioii  XXIX, 


Lesson  XXIX, 


USE  OF  THE  ARTICLE. 


The  Definite  Article  is  used  in  Spanish : 

1.    Before  masculine  and  feminine  geographical  names : 

La   Francia  es  mas  grand  e  que  la        France  is  larger  than  Italy. 

Italia, 
La   Inglaterra  tiene    posesiones   en 

India, 
El  Canada  esta  al  Norte  de  los  Esta- 

dos  Unidos  de  America, 
La  Irlanda  es  una  isla, 
Los  Alpes  y  los   Pirineos  son  muy 

altos. 
El  Vesuvio  es  un  volcan, 
El  Danubio  es  un  rio  grande, 


England  has  possessions  in  India. 

Canada  is   north    of  the    United 

States  of  America, 
Ireland  is  an  island. 
The   Alps  and  (lie  Pyrenees  are 

very  high. 
Vesuvius  is  a  volcano. 
The  Danube  is  a  large  river. 


2.    Before  names  of  days  and  seasons  : 

Sunday  is  a  day  of  rest. 


El  domingo  es  un  dia  de  descanso, 
El   sabado   es  el  ultimo   dia   de  la 

semana, 
El  invierno  es  muy  frio  en  este  pais, 

3.    Before  abstract  nouns  : 

La  juventud  es  imprudente, 

Laf  virtud  es  amable. 

La  esperanza  sostiene  al  hombre, 


Saturday  is  the   last  day  of  tlie 

week. 
Winter  is  very  cold  in  this  country. 


Youth  is  imprudent. 
Virtue  is  amiable. 
Hope  sustains  man. 


4.    Before  names  of  metals,  colors,. substances,  elements,  digni- 
ties, systems  of  doctrines,  arts^  and  sciences  : 


El  oro  y  el  plomo  son  metales. 
El  bianco  y  el  negro  son  colores, 
El  fuego  y  el  agua  son  elementos. 
La  geogi-afia  es  la  descripcion  de  la 

tierra, 
El  aziicar  es  dulce. 
La  musica  y  la  dansa  son  hermanas. 
El  catolicismo  y  el  protestantismo, 


Gold  and  lead  are  metals. 
White  and  black  are  colors. 
Fire  and  waier  are  dements. 
Geography  is  tlie  description  of  tlie 

earth. 
Sugar  is  sweet. 

Music  and  dancing  are  sisters. 
Catholicism  and  Protestantism. 


166  LESSON   29. 

5.  Before  Adjectives,  or  other  parts  of  speech,  used  substan- 

lively  : 

Los  ricos  y  los  pobres,  The  rich  and  tlw  poor. 

El  comer  y  el  beber,  Eating  and  drinking. 

El  si  y  el  no,  Yes  and  no. 

El  pro  y  el  contra.  Pro  and  con. 

El  bien  y  el  mal.  Good  and  evil. 

6.  Before  nouns  representing  a  whole  species  of  objects,  and 
before  every  noun  taken  in  a  general  sense  : 

El  hombre  es  mortal,  Man  is  mortal. 

La  vida  es  corta,  Life  is  short. 
El  tiempo  es  precioso.  Time  is  precious. 

Los  peiTos  son  fieles,  Dogs  are  faithful. 

Los  sombreros  redondos  son  de  moda,  Round  hats  are  in  fashimi. 

Las  flores  son  el  adorno  de  la  natu-  Flowers  are  the  ornament  of  na- 
raleza,  ture. 

7.  Before  titles  prefixed  to  names  : 

El  emperador  Don  Pedro,  Emperor  Don  Pedro. 

El  rey  Luis  Catorce.  King  Louis  the  Fourteenth. 

El  prmcipe  Poniatowski,  Prince  Poniatowski. 

El  presidente  Lincoln,  President  Lincoln. 

El  general  Washington,  General  Washington. 

El  senor  May,  Mr.  May. 

8.  Before  proper  names  preceded  by  adjectives  : 

El  pequeno  Juan,  Little  John. 

La  vieja  Maria,  "     Old  Mary. 

9.  Before  nouns  specifying  quantity  or  measure : 

Tres  pesos  la  libra.  Three  dollars  a  pound. 

Un  peso  la  vara.  One  dollar  a  yard. 

10.  Before  the  four  Cardinal  Points  : 

El  Norte,  North. 

El  Sur,  sud  or  mediodia,  South. 

El  Este  or  Oriente,  East. 

El  Oeste,  Poniente  or  Occidente,  West. 


USE  OF  THE  ARTICLE. 


167 


Countries. 


Europa, 

Asia, 

Africa, 

America, 

Australia, 

Espaiia, 

Fraiicia, 

I  nglaterra, 

Turquia, 

Grecia, 


Madrid, 

Paris, 

Londres, 


Europe. 

Asia. 

Africa. 

America. 

Australia, 

Spain. 

France. 

England. 

Turkey. 

Greece. 


Madrid. 

Paris. 

London. 


Alcmania, 

Holanda, 

Prusia, 

Belgica, 

Sajoiiia, 

Ungria, 

Austria, 

Italia, 

Suecia, 

Suiza, 


Cities. 


Lisboa, 

Estocolmo, 

Bruselas, 


Germany. . 
Holland. 
Prussia. 
-Belgium. 
Saxony. 
Hungary. 
Austria. 
Italy. 
Sweden. 
Switzerland. 


Lisbon, 

Stockholm. 

Brussels. 


Espanol, 

Frances, 

Ingles, 

Holandes, 

Aleman, 

Prusiano, 


National  Names. 

Spaniard.  Ruso, 

,  Frenchman.  Austriaco, 

Englishman.  Suizo, 

Dutch.  Turco, 


German. 
Prussian. 


Griego, 
Sueco, 


Russian. 

Austrian. 

Swiss. 

Turk. 

Greek. 

Swede. 


Vocabulario. 
El  coronel,  the  colonel. 
El  dibujo,  the  drawing. 
El  hierro,  the  iron. 
El  invierno,  the  lointer. 
El  tigre,  the  tiger. 
La  -caridad,  the  charity. 
La  danza,  tlie  dancing. 
La  docena,  the  dozen. 
La  fe,  the  faith. 
La  musica,  the  music. 
La  no  vela,  the  novel. 
La  ocasion,  tJie  occasion. 
La  paz,  the  peace. 
La  pintura,  the  painting. 
Laprimavera,  the  spring. 
La  tierra,  the  earth. 
La  verdad,  the  truth. 


La  virtud,  the  virtue. 
Admitido,  admitted. 
Aprender,  2.  to  learn. 
Aprendido,  learned. 
Bajo,  under. 
Conocido,  known. 
Consul tado,  consulted. 
Cuanto,  how  much. 
Durado,  lasted. 
En  casa,  at  {the  hnnse  of). 
Estudiado,  studied. 
Estudiamos,  we  study. 
i  Estudian  V.  V.?  do  you 

study  ? 
Etsrno,  eternal. 
Feliz,  happy. 
Interesante,  interesting. 


Vocabulary. 

Ir,  3.  to  go. 

i  Le  gusta  a  V.  ?  do  you 
like  ? 

Me  gnsta,  /  like,  I  am 
fond  of. 

Leido,  read. 

Peligroso,  dangerous. 

i  Piensa  V.  ?  do  you  in- 
tend I 

Pobre,  poor. 

Prdximo,  next. 

Servido,  served. 

Teologal,  theological. 

Trasparente,  transpar- 
ent. 


168  LESSON    29. 

Exercise  57, 

1.  [  Ha  conocido  V.  al  general  Piedras  1  2.  He  conocido  a  su  hijo, 
el  doctor  Piedras.  3.  i  Cuantas  veces  ha  visto  V.  al  presidente  Grant  1 
4.  [  Le  he  visto  varias  veces  en  Washington  1  5.  Este  soldado  ha 
servido  con  el  coronel  Martin.  6.  i  Que  ha  aprendido  V.  en  esta 
escuela  l  7.  He  aprendido  la  geografia  y  la  historia.  8.  El  pobre 
Carlos  ha  muerto  en  Cuba.  9.  La  verdad  es  eterna.  10.  La  fortuna 
es  inconstante.  11.  Los  inviernos  son  muy  frios  en  este  pais. 
12.  [  Quiere  V.  un  pedazo  de  jamon  ?  13.  No,  gracias,  no  me  gusta 
el  jamon.  14.  i  Que  color  le  gusta  a  V.  ?  15.  Me  gusta  el  azul. 
16.  [Ha  escrito  V.  al  Doctor  Nelson?  17.  He  escrito  al  profesor 
Ventura.  18.  [  Es  este  joven,  hijo  del  abogado  Arroyo  ?  19.  El 
Senor  Arroyo  no  tiene  hijo.  20.  i  Que  estudian  Y.Y.I  21.  Estu- 
diamos  el  frances  y  el  ingles.  22.  |  Por  cuanto  ha  vendido  V.  su 
vino  ?  23.  He  vendido  todo  a  cuatro  pesos  la  docena. '  24.  Londres 
es  la  capital  de  Inglaterra.  25.  Este  muchacho  tiene  los  ojos  negros, 
y  su  hermana  los  tiene  azules.  26.  El  comer  demasiado  es  peligroso. 
27.  El  emperador  Napoleon  Primero  murio  (died)  a  la  edad  de  cin- 
cuenta  y  dos  anos.  28.  Los  ricos  no  son  siempre  mas  felices  que  los 
pobres.  29.  i  Ha  leido  Y.  muchas  novelas  en  ingles  ?  30.  Si,  senor, 
las  novelas  inglesas  son  muy  interesantes. 

Exercise  58. 

1.  Glass  is  transparent.  2.  Faith,  hope,  and  charity  are  the  three 
theological  virtues.  3.  Peace  has  never  lasted  long  on  the  earth. 
4.  We  were  (imperf.)  yesterday  at  Captain  Martin's.  5.  Were  your 
brothers  there  ?  6.  Yes,  they  were  there  too.  7.  Under  what  generals 
have  you  served  ?  8.  I  served  (servi)  under  Generals  Grant  and  Sher- 
man. 9.  When  do  you  intend  to  go  to  Italy  ?  10.  This  winter  or  next 
spring.  11.  Iron  is  more  useful  than  gold.  12.  Poor  little  Charles 
is  sick.  13.  Will  you  have  some  beef?  14.  No,  I  don't  like  beef. 
15.  Have  you  seen  any  tigers  in  that  country  ?  16.  No,  never,  there 
are  none.  17.  Have  you  studied  history?  18.  I  have  studied  history 
and  geography.  19.  Where  is  your  sister  now  ?  20.  She  is  in  France. 
21.  Have  you  ever  been  in  Europe  ?  22.  Yes,  I  have  been  in  the 
South  of  Europe.  23.  We  have  .consulted  Doctor  Hener  on  (en)  this 
occasion.  24.  Dogs  are  not  admitted  in  the  park.  25.  Will  you 
have  some  ajjples,  my  little  friend  ?     26.  Yes,  sir  ;  have  you  any  ? 


USE   OF  THE  ARTICLE.  169 


Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  Definite  Article  may  also  be  used  before  a  whole  sen- 
tence, when  the  latter  serves  as  the  subject  of  another  sentence  : 

Mucho  me  alegra  el  que  venga  V. ,         /  am  very  glad  that  you  come. 

2.  When  several  nouns  follow  each  other,  the  Article  is  placed 
before  every  one  of  thern,  to  give  more  expression  to  each  one, 
and  when  they  are  of  different  genders  : 

Cuando  la  justicia,  la  fidelidad,  el  When  justice,  fidelity,  honor,  com- 

honor,  la  compasion,  la  vergiien-  passion,  modesty,  and  all  feelings 

za,  y  todos  los  sentimientos  que  which  can  move  a  generous  hearty 

pueden  mover  un   corazon  gene-  etc. 
roso,  etc.     Jovellanos. 

3«  It  may  occur  that  the  article  is  separated  from  its  noun  by 
several  other  words,  as  in  these  sentences  : 

La  nunca  bastante  ponderada  virtud,        The  never  sufficiently  praised  virtue. 
El  sobrado  paseo,  etc.  Excessive  walking,  etc. 

4.  The  Definite  Article  ma'y  either  be  placed  before  the  names 
of  countries,  or  the  latter  may  be  used  without  the  article.  The 
Article  must  not  be  omitted,  however,  if,  when  speaking  of  a 
country,  we  designate  its  government  or  people : 

La  luglaterra  ha  maridado  tropas  a        England  has  sent  troops  to  India. 
India. 

Observation.  —  Countries  out  of  Europe,  and  in  fact  remote  countries, 
preserve  the  Definite  Article  even  when  accompanied  by  prepositions. 

5.  The  Definite  Article  is  placed  before  titles  or  other  desig- 
nations preceding  proper  names  : 

El  Exmo  (excelentisimo)  senor  duque  de...      His  Excellency  the  duke  of... 
If  the  word  SU  precedes  the  honorific  designation,  the  Article 
is  placed  before  the  title  : 

Su  Excelencia,  el  duque  de...         His  Excellency  the  duke  of... 

6.  The  Definite  Article  is  likewise  placed  before  the  names  of 
a  few  Italian  poets  and  painters  : 

El  Taso,  Tasso.         El  Ariosto,  Ariosto.         El  Corregio,  Correggio, 


170  LESSON    29. 

7,  In    describing   the   characteristic  features   of  persons   or 
things,  the  Definite  Article  is  also  used  : 

Carlos  tiene  los  ojos  negros,        Charles  has  black  eyes. 
Luis  tiene  la  nariz  grande,  Lewis  lias  a  large  nose. 

8.  A  few  cities  also  take  the  Definite  Article  : 

La  Habaiia,  Havana.         La  Coruna,  Corunna.         El  Ferol,  Ferol. 

Exceptions. 
The  Definite  Article  (and  in  some  cases,  the  Indefinite  Article) 
is  omitted.  - 

1.  When  the  name  of  the  country  figures  as  the  place  of  ori- 
gin, or  is  preceded  by  a  preposition  : 

He  recibido  una  carta  de  Francia,  I  have  received  a  letter  frora  France. 

Mi  hermano  esta  en  Alemania,  My  brother  is  m  Germany. 

La  reina  de  Inglaterra  es  viuda,  The  queen  of  England  is  a  widow. 

Este  vino  es  de  Espana,  This  wine  is  from  Spain. 

2.  Before  names  of  countries  the  capital  of  which  has  the  same 
name  as  the  country  itself : 

Napoles,         Naples.  Mejico,         Mexico. 

3.  Before  a  few  locutions,  as  : 

Voy  a  casa  —  a  misa  —  a  palacio,         /  am  going  home  —  to  mass  —  to 

etc.  the  palace f  etc. 

Voy  a  casa  de  mi  amigo,  /  am  going  to  my  friend's  house. 

4.  With  a  substantive  in  apposition  with  a  preceding  sub- 
stantive : 

Juan,  hermano  de  Enrique,  John,  the  brother  of  Henry. 

Paris,  capital  de  Francia,  Paris,  the  capital  of  France. 

Alejandro,  emperador  de  Rusia,  Alexander,  the  emperor  of  Russia. 

Hablamos  de  Pedro,  hombre  de  gran  We  speak  of  Peter,  a  man  of  great 
talento,  talent. 

5.  Before  titles  of  hooks,  headings  of  chapters,  etc  : 

Vida  de  Cervantes,  The  Life  of  Cervantes. 

Historia  de  Roma,  A  History  of  Pi.ome. 

Capitulo  tercero,  Third  Chapter, 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS  AND  VERBS.       171 


Leccion  XXX. 


Lesson  XXX. 


Mi, 

me. 

Ti, 

tliee. 

&, 

him. 

Ella, 

lier. 

EUo, 

it. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS,  AND  WITH  VERBS. 


Witli  Prepositions. 

Nosotros,  m.,  nosotras,  f.,  us. 

Vosotros,  m.,  vosotras,  f.,  V.  sing.,  V.  V.  pL,  you, 

Ellas,  f.    J 


Si,         on^s  self,  himself,  herself  themselves,  itself 

Witli  Verbs. 

Me,  me,  to  me,  Nos,  us,  to  us, 

Te,  thee,  to  thee.  Os,  a  V.,  a  V.  V.,  you,  to  you, 

Le,  him,  her,  to  him,  to  her,  Les,  them,  to  them. 

Lo,  la,  le,  it,  him,  her.  Los,  las,  them, 

Se,  one's  self,  himself,  herself  themselves,  itself,  each  other. 


Ejemplos. 

Esta  carta  es  para  mi. 
Yo  hablo  de  el  y  de  ella. 
Juan  va  con  nosotros. 
Teiigo  algo  para  ellos. 
Yo  hablo  de  ello. 
Cada  uno  para  si. 
Pienso  en  el. 

El  me  ama  y  yo  le  amo. 

Yo  la  veo,  pero  ella  no  me  ve. 

^Queleda  Y.?  — Nada. 

i  Que  les  da  Y.  ? 
Yo  les  doy  dinero. 
Yo  no  quiero  verle. 
El  quiere  vernos. 
El  nos  quiere  ver. 
Viendolos  alli,  les  hable. 
i  Quiere  Y.  oomprarlo  ? 


Examples. 

This  letter  is  for  me. 

I  speak  of  him  and  of  her. 

John  goes  with  ns. 

I  have  something  for  them. 

I  speak  of  it. 

Every  one  for  himself. 

I  think  of  him. 

He  loves  me  and  I  love  him. 

I  see  her,  but  she  does  not  see  me. 

What  do  you  give  him  (or  her)  ?  — 

Nothing. 
What  do  yon  give  them  ? 
I  give  thenl  money. 
I  do  not  wish  to  see  him. 

He  wishes  to  see  ns. 

Seeing  them  there,  I  spoke  to  them. 
Will  you  buy  it  ? 


172 


LESSON  30. 


Yo  no  quiero  comprarlo. 

Demelo. 

Los  ha  visto  V.  ? 

No  los  he  visto. 

El  no  me  ha  hablada 

Ellos  no  pueden  verse. 

Yo  le  veo  a  V. 


I  will  not  buy  it. 

Give  it  to  me. 

Have  you  seen  them  ? 

I  have  not  seen  them. 

He  has  not  spoken  to  me. 

They  cannot  see  each  other. 

I  see  you. 


Conmigo,        with  Tne, 
Contigo,  with  thee. 

Cousigo,  with  ones  self  Qiimselff  herself,  itself  or  themselves). 


Vocabulario, 
El  sombrerero,  the  hatter. 
El  tio,  the  uncle. 
Los  ves tides,  the  clothes. 
Aqui"  tiene  V.,  here  is. 
Comido,  eaten. 
Cortar,  1.  to  cut. 
Dado,  given. 
Debo,  /  owe. 


Dice,  says. 
Dicbo,  said. 
Doy,  I  give. 
Enviado,  sent 
Enviar,  1.  to  send. 
[Habla  V.?  sing.  \  do  you 
iHablanV.V.?  pi.  ispeak"^. 
Hallado,/owwc?. 


Vocabulary. 
Irse,  3.  to  go  away. 
iNecesitaV.I  doyouneedi 
Pide,  asksfm\ 
Prestar,  1.  to  lend. 
Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 
Sin,  unthout. 
Sin  embargo, /loz^^i^er. 
Visto,  seen. 


Exercise  59. 

1.  I  Quien  tiene  dinero  para  mi  ?  2.  Tengo  dinero  para  V.,  pero  no 
para  su  hermano.  3.  i  Para  qnien  es  eso  ?  4.  Para  V.,  si  Y.  qui  ere. 
5.  I  Ya  Y.  al  parque  con  los  muchachos  {children)  1  6.  Yoy,  pero  sin 
ellos.  7.  I  Ya  Y.  al  teatro  con  su  hermana  ?  8.  Yoy  con  ella.  9.  [  Es 
el  libro  para  mi  6  para  mi  hermano  ?  10.  No  es  ni  para  Y.  ni  para 
el.  11.  [  De  qnien  habla  Y.  1  12.  De  el  y  de  ella.  13.  i  Con  quien 
hablan  Y.  Y.  ?  14.  Con  ellas.  15.  [  Quien  era  rey  de  Francia  en 
1700?  16.  Era  {it  was)  Luis  Catorce,  hijo  de  Luis  Trece.  17.  i  Que 
le  da  Y.  a  este  hombre  ?  18.  Le  doy  algo  bueno.  19.  [  Conoce  Y.  a 
esta  senora  ?  20.  La  conozco  muy  bien.  21.  i  Los  ve  Y.  ?  22.  Los 
veo,  pero  no  les  hablo.  23.  i  Me  ha  visto  Y.  ?  24.  No  he  visto  k  Y., 
pero  he  visto  a  su  padre.  25.  |  Cuando  ha  escrito  Y.  a  su  tio  1  26.  Le 
he  escrito  esta  maiiana.  27.  i  Quien  le  da  a  Y.  dinero  1  28.  Carlos 
nos  da  un  peso.  29.  i  Ha  hallado  Y.  sus  libros  ?  30.  Los  he  hallado 
en  el  cuarto  de  Pedro.  31.  ^  Que  quiere  Y.  enviar  a  su  amigo? 
32.  Quiero  enviarle  el  dinero  que  me  pide.  33.  j  Ha  dicho  Y.  algo  d 
este  hombre  ?    34.  Le  he  dicho  de  {to)  irse. 


PEKSONAL  PRONOUNS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS  AND  VERBS.   173 

Exercise  60. 

1.  What  does  that  man  tell  you  ?  2.  He  tells  me  that  he  wishes  to 
speak  to  you.  3.  Has  the  tailoT  sent  me  my  clothes  I  4.  He  has  not 
sent  them  yet.  5.  Have  you  seen  Mrs.  Norris  ?  6.  I  saw  (have 
seen)  her  this  morning.  7.  Can  you  lend  me  twenty  dollars  ?  8.  I 
lent  (have  lent)  you  ten  dollars  yesterday  ;  why  do  you  want  twenty 
dollars  now  ]  9.  I  owe  money  to  my  hatter,  and  I  wish  to  pay  him. 
10.  I  have  no  m(mey  to-day.  11.  Will  you  cut  me  some  bread? 
12.  Yes,  if  you  will  lend  me  your  knife.  13.  To  whom  have  you 
written?  14.  I  have  written  to  him  and  to  her.  15.  Give  me  some- 
thing for  this  poor  man.  16.  I  have  given  him  something  already. 
17.  I  have  never  seen  my  uncle  ;  I  have  written  several  times  to  him, 
however.  18.  To  whom  will  you  give  this  beautiful  book  ?  19.  To 
him.  20.  Have  you  nothing  for  her?  21.  Yes,  I  have  something 
for  her  too.  22.  How  do  you  know  that  ?  23.  I  know  it,  because  he 
has  said  so.  24.  Have  you  eaten  all  the  apples  ?  25.  Charles  has 
eaten  them.  26.  Do  you  know  that  gentleman  ?  27.  I  don't  know 
him  very  well.  28.  Do  you  speak  German  ?  29.  I  speak  it  a  little, 
but  my  brother  speaks  it  better  than  I.  30.  Will  you  go  out  with 
me^  31.  I  cannot  go  out  now,  I  have  something  to  (que)  do. 
32.  Where  has  your  brother  bought  his  handkerchiefs  ?  33.  He  has 
bought  them  in  Paris.  34.  Have  you  learned  your  lesson  ?  35.  I 
have  learned  it,  but  I  don't  know  it  very  well. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

!•  The  Personal  Pronouns,  as  has  been  shown,  have  a  double 
form  in  the  dative  and  accusative. 

They  are  called  by  Spanish  grammarians  pronombres  indi- 
rectos,  and  pronombres  incliticos.  The  latter  are  used  without 
prepositions,  as  : 

Me  ama,         he  loves  me^  La  veo,         I  see  her, 

while  the  former  are  also  accompanied  by  prepositions  : 
Ami,         tome.  Para  ti,        for  thee, 

2.  The  direct  form  is  used  in  connection  with  the  verb,  that 
is,  when  the  verb  governs  its  object  without  a  preposition : 

Le  amo,  /  love  him. 


174  LESSON   30. 

The  indirect  form  is  used  when  the  pronoun  serves  as  the  com- 
plement of  the  verb  : 

Pienso  en  el,  /  think  of  him. 

La  carta  es  para  mi,  TJie  letter  is  for  rne. 

Or  when  the  pronoun  stands  alone  : 

i  A  quien  lo  ha  dicho  V.  ?  To  whom,  have  you  said  it  ? 

A  el,  a  ella,  To  him,  to  her. 

3*   The  pronouns  me,  nos ;  te,  os ;  le,  les,  la,  las,  lo,  los, 

when  connected  with  an  Infinitive,  the  Imperative  affirmative, 
the  Gerund,  and  the  participio  absoluto  (that  is,  a  Participle 
without  auxiliary),  are  placed  after  the  verb,  and  in  such  a  way 
that  the  verb  and  pronoun  form  but  one  word  : 

Vino  ayer  a  verme  —  a  socorrerte  —        He  came  yesterday  to  see  me  —  to 
a  banarse  —  a  renimos  —  a  casti-  help  thee  —  to  bathe  himself —  to 

garos  —  a  hablarles,  etc.,  scold  us  —  to  2)unish  you  —  to 

speak  to  them,  etc. 

4.  In  sentences  containing  the  Infinitive,  the  pronombres 
incliticos  may  either  be  placed  before  the  first  verb  or  after  the 
Infinitive  : 

El  me  quiere  ver  or  quiere  venne,         He  wishes  to  see  me. 

If  the  sentence  commences  with  the  verb,  the  pronoun  may 
also  be  joined  to  this  verb  : 

Queriame  ver,         He  wished  to  see  me. 

We  would  not  say,  however,  queriame  pasea7%  but  queria 
pasearme,  7  ivished  to  take  a  walk;  because  the  subject  is  the 
same  for  both  verbs. 

5.  The  same  pronouns  ought,  according  to  the  rule,  to  pre- 
cede the  verb  in  all  other  cases,  and  the  Spaniards  generally  say  : 

Le  hablo,  /  speak  to  him. 

La  he  visto,  /  have  seen  her. 

Le  estimo,  /  esteem  him. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  WITH  PREPOSITIONS  AND  VERBS.   175 

It  is,  however,  correct  to  place  the  pronouns  after  the  verb 
when  the  sentence,  or  one  of  the  sentences,  commences  with  the 
verb  :  ■ ' 

Sucediome  una  cosa  inesperada,  A71  unexpected  thing  Jiappened  to 

me. 

La  agricultura  siguio  la  triste  suerte  Agriculture  followed  the  sad  fate 
de  las  ciencias  ;  hizose  ignorante,  of  the  sciences ;  it  became  igtio- 

oscureciose  y  perdio  toda  su  gloria.  rant,  it  grew  obscure  and  lost  all 

—  RojAS.  its  glory. 

Observation.  —  The  pronombres  incliticos  ought  not,  however,  to  be 
placed  after  the  verbs,  when  the  latter  are  in  the  future  tense,  this  construc- 
tion being  against  the  euphony  of  the  language.  We  should  not  say,  there- 
fore, dareUf  cogerdmej  but :  le  dare,  /  will  give  him ;  me  cogera,  he  will 
catch  Tne. 

6.  The  pronombres  incliticos  are  placed  before  the  auxiliary 
in  compound  tenses  : 

Le  he  visto,  /  have  seen  him. 

Lo  hemos  comprado,         We  have  bought  it. 

©BSERVATION.  —  Evcu  in  the  last  case,  the  pronoun  may  be  placed  after 
the  auxiliary  :  hete  visto  ayer,  for  te  he  visto  ayer,  /  have  seen  you  (thee) 
yesterday. 

'      7t    The  pronoun  le  generally  accompanies  the  pronoun  in  the 
third  person,  and  consequently  V.  and  V.  V.     (See  p.  35.) 

Yo  le  doy  a  V.  {rather  than  Yo  doy  a  V.),         I  give  you. 

Yo  le  doy  a  su  hermano,  1  give  {to)  your  brother. 

8#  When  the  pronoun  nos  is  joined  with  the  first  person 
plural  of  a  verb,  the  latter  drops  the  s  :  Unimonos,  we  unite,  in- 
stead of  unimosnos. 

Observation.  —  Practice  alone  and  the  reading  of  classical  authors  will 
enable  the  student  in  this  case,  as  in  many  others  in  Spanish,  to  determine 
whether  he  must  strictly  adhere  to  the  rule,  or  if  the  genius  of  the  lan- 
guage will  allow  of  a  deviation  from  the  same. 

9.    The  Indirect  pronouns  may  be  added  to  the  pronombres 
incliticos  to  give  more  expression  to  the  sentence  : 
A  mi  me  vio,         lie  saw  me. 


176  LESSON    31. 

It  is  more  especially  the  case  : 

1.  When  the  verb  governs  more  than  one  object  : 

Le  amo  a  el,  a  su  hermano,  y  a  su        /  l(yve  hirriy  his  brother,  and  his 
hermana,  sister, 

2.  When  the  Dative  or  Accusative  are  emphasized  by  the 
word  self  or  selves : 

Te  Yi  a  ti  mismo,         I  saw  thee. 

3.  When  the  object  precedes  the  verb  : 

Los  mas  bellos  editicios,  los  he  visto  /  have  seen  the  finest  buildings  in 

en  Italia,  Italy. 

A  los   Franceses    les    han    costado  The  wars  of  the  French  have  cost 

mucho  sangre  sus  giierras,  them  much  blood, 

10,  When  mi,  ti,  si,  are  governed  by  the  preposition  con, 
vrith,  they  form  COnmigO,  with  me  ;  COntigO,  with  thee  ;  COnsigO, 
with  himself^  herself^  itself,  them ;  and  admit  no  change  for  either 
gender  or  number. 

1 1 ,  The  preposition  must  be  repeated  before  every  pronoun  : 

Este  dinero  es  para  ti,  para  el  y  para         This  money  is  for  you  (Ihee),  f5r 
ella,  him  and  for  her. 

12,  The  Genitive  case  takes  the  place  of  the  nominative  in 
exclamations  : 

i  Desdichado  de  mi !        /  unfortunate  creature  ! 


leccion  XXXI.  lesson  XXXI. 

THE  RESPECTIVE  PLACES  OF  PRONOUNS. 

Me  lo  (le  or  la),  it  to  me.  Me  los  (las),  them  to  me. 

Te  lo,  it  to  thee.  Te  los,  them  to  thee. 

Se  lo,  it  to  him  or  her.  Se  los,  them  to  him  or  her. 

Nos  lo,  it  to  us.  Nos  los,  them  to  us. 

Os  lo,             )  .,  ^  Os  los,             )  .7 

Se  lo  (a  Y.),  J         "^  Se  los  (a  V.),  J 

Se  lo  (a  ellos  or  ellas),   it  to     Se  los  (a  ellos  or  ellas),  them 

them.  to  them. 


PLACES   OF  PRONOUNS. 


177 


Ejemplos. 
il  me  lo  da. 
Ella  nos  lo  ha  dicho. 
I  Quien  se  lo  da  a  V.  ? 
EUos  me  lo  dan, 
I  Qiiiere  V.  darnielos  ? 
I  Me  los  qiiiere  V.  dar  ? 
Quiero  prestarselos  a  V. 
Se  los  quiero  prestar  a  V. 
Yo  se  los  doy  a  V. 
Yo  se  lo  doy  a  ellos. 


Examples. 

He  gives  it  to  me. 
She  has  said  it  to  us. 
Who  gives  it  to  you  ? 
They  give  it  to  me. 

Will  you  give  them  to  me  ? 

I  will  lend  them  to  you. 

I  give  them  to  you. 
I  give  it  to  them. 


Imperative  affirmative. 

Demelos  V.  Give  them  to  me. 

Deselo  V.  Give  it  to  him. 

Prestemelos  V.  Lend  them  to  me. 

Presteselo  V.  Lend  it  to  him. 

Comanselos  V.  V.  Eat  them. 

Imperative  negative. 

Ko  me  lo  de  V.  Do  not  give  it  to  me. 

No  nos  lo  de  V.  Do  not  give  it  to  us. 

No  me  los  mande  V.  Do  not  send  them  to  me. 

No  se  los  mande  V.  Do  not  send  them  to  him. 


Vocabulario. 

El  correo,  the  mail. 

El  cortaplumas,  the  pen- 
knife. 

El  crimen,  the  crime. 

El  jardinero,  the  gar- 
dener. 

La  muneca,  the  doll. 

i  Ama  V.  ?  do  you  love  l 

Amo,  /  love. 

Desea,  wishes. 

De  v.,  give. 


Devolver,  2.  to  return. 
Dice,  says,  tells. 
Diga  v.,  say,  tell. 
Doy,  /  give. 
Guillermo,  William. 
Hablado,  spoken. 
Hay,  tJiere  is. 
Llegado,  arrived. 
Mandar,  1.  to  send. 
Mande  V.,  send. 
Ma  tar,  1.  to  kill. 


Vocabulary. 
Mismo,  same. 
Necesita,  needs. 
Per  dido,  lost. 
Quieren,  wish. 
Recibido,  received. 
Bobar,  1.  to  steal,  to  rob. 
Traido,  brought. 
Traiga  V.,  bring. 
Ve,  sees. 
Vende,  sells. 


Exercise  61. 

1.  I  Quiere  V.  enviar  esta  carta  a  su  hermano  ?    2.  Yo  quiero  enviar- 
sela.    3.  I  Cuando  puede  V.  enviarsela  ?    4.  Se  la  puedo  enviar  maiiana 
12 


178  LESSON    31. 

por  la  mauana.  5.  i  Cuando  puede  V.  escribir  a  su  tio  ?  6.  Puedo 
escribirle  ahora,  si  V.  lo  quiere.  7.  ^  A  quien  quiere  V.  dar  este  libro  ? 
8.  Quiero  darselo  a  mi  hermanita.  9.  i  Quien  le  ha  dado  esto  d  V.  ? 
10.  Guillermo  me  lo  ha  dado.  11.  ^,  Como  sabe  V.  que  Juan  esta 
aqui?  12.  Mi  hermano  me  lo  ha  dicho.  13.  Si  V.  tiene  mi  libro, 
demelo.  14.  Yo  se  lo  he  dado  a  su  hermano.  15.  Los  muchachos 
quieren  sus  libros,  deselos  V.  16.  Se  los  he  dado  ya.  17.  Hay  un 
libro  en  mi  cuarto,  traigamelo  V.  18.  [Este  joven  necesita  un  corta- 
plumas  ;  tiene  V.  uno  ?  19.  El  mio  esta  sobre  la  mesa  ;  V.  puede 
prestarselo.  20.  Este  dinero  es  para  ti,  para  el  y  para  ella.  21.  Robar 
a  un  hombre  y  matarle  son  dos  crimenes.  22.  i  A  quien  ama  V.  ? 
23.  Le  amo  a  el,  a  su  hermano  y  a  su  hermana.  24.  [  Puede  V. 
decirme  quien  es  el  que  ha  hecho  esto  ?  25.  No  puedo  decirselo  a 
V.  ;  porque  yo  mismo  no  lo  se.  26.  No  le  de  V.  nada  a  ese  hombre, 
ya  ha  estado  aqui  esta  maiiana.  27.  No  es  el  mismo.  28.  Si  V. 
tiene  cartas  para  mi,  mandemelas  V.  a  mi  casa.  29.  No  puedo  man- 
darselas,  porque  no  tengo  nadie  con  quien  mandarlas.  30.  La  senora 
Castro  quiere  saber  si  V.  puede  darle  su  dinero  hoy.  31.  No  puedo 
darselo  hoy,  porque  todavia  no  lo  he  recibido.  32.  Hay  aqui  un 
hombre  que  desea  verle  a  V.  33.  No  tengo  tiempo  ahora,  tengo  que 
escribirle  a  mi  hermana.  34.  i  Sabe  V.  si  ha  llegado  el  correo  ? 
35.  Ha  llegado  esta  maiiana.         ^ 

Exercise  62. 

4 

1.  Who  can  give  me  money  for  that  1  2.  Your  brother  can  give  you 
some,  I  have  none.  3.  Who  gave  (has  given)  that  doll  to  Mary  ? 
4.  Her  mother  has  given  it  to  her.  5.  Can  you  lend  me  some 
money  ?  6.  I  can  lend  you  five  dollars  ;  when  can  you  return  them 
to  me  ?  7.  I  don't  know  yet  when  I  shall  be  able  (podr^)  to  return 
them.  8.  If  you  cannot  tell  me,  I  cannot  lend  you  anything.  9.  What 
w^ill  you  send  to  your  brother?  10.  I  will  send  him  two  letters- 
which  I  have  received  for  him.  11.  Bring  me  the  book  which  is  on 
the  little  table.  12.  What  has  that  man  said  to  you  ?  13.  He  has  not 
said  anything  to  me  ;  he  has  spoken  to  my  cousin,  masc.  14.  Have 
you  told  (to)  your  friend  that  his  father  was  (imperf.)  here  1  15.  I 
have  not  seen  him  yet.  16.  Can  the  gardener  send  us  some  flowers  ? 
17.  He  can  send  you  some  roses  if  you  wish  (it).  18.  If  you  see 
your  sister  tell  her  that  I  have  received  some  French  books.  19.  Sh^ 
knows  it  already.    20.  You  do  not  need  your  knife  now,  lend  it  to  me. 


PLACES   OF  PRONOUNS.  179 

21.  I  don't  wish  to  lend  it  to  you.  22.  Can  I  see  Mr.  Bravo?  23.  You 
cannot  see  him  now.  24.  Does  our  baker  sell  you  any  bread  1  25.  He 
does  not  sell  us  any.  26.  Do  you  know  if  the  tailor  has  sent  my 
coat  ?  27.  He  has  not  sent  it  yet.  28.  What  have  you  brought  us 
to-day  ]  29.  I  have  not  brought  anything  for  you,  but  I  have  some- 
thing for  the  children.  30.  Why  don't  you  tell  (to)  your  uncle  that 
you  have  lost  your  money  1  31.  I  am  afraid  to  tell  it  to  him.  32.  My 
friend  has  given  me  this  pencil,  and  I  give  it  to  you. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1.  When  a  verb  governs  two  personal  pronouns,  the  Dative 
must  precede  the  Accusative  whenever  the  latter  is  a  pronoun  of 
the  third  person  : 

El  me  lo  da,       he  gives  it  to  me.  Damelo,       give  it  to  me. 

2,  If  the  pronombres  incliticos  are  in  the  first  and  second 
person,  the  Accusative  must  precede  the  Dative  : 

Rendeteme,  Surrender  to  me. 

3*  The  pronoun  se  precedes  all  the  other  pronouns,  whether 
these  are  pJaced  before  or  after  the  verb  : 

Se  me  escapo,  He  escaped  from  me. 

Deselo  Y.,  Give  it  to  him. 

4t  When  both  pronouns  are  in  the  Third  Person,  the  pronoun 
in  the  Dative  case,  whether  singular  or  plural,  is  changed  into  se, 
and  we  say  therefore  : 

Se  lo,         it  to  him  or  her.  Se  los,         it  to  them. 

To  all  these  pronouns  we  may  add  the  indirect  pronouns  to 
give  more  expression  or  precision  to  the  sentence  : 

Se  lo  dire  a  el  —  a  ella  —  /  will  tell  it  to  him  —  to  her  —  to 

a  ellos  —  a  ellas,  them,  masc.  —  to  them,  fem. 


180 


LESSON  32. 


Leccion  XXXII.  Lesson  XXXII. 

REGULAR  VERBS. 

Present  Tenses  of  the  Indicative  Mood. 

1st  Conjugation,  2d  Conjugation.  Sd  Conjugation, 

Habl-ar,      to  speak.      Com-er,      to  eat.       Recib-ir,       to  receive. 

Habl-ando,  speaking.     Com-iendo,  eating.     Eecib-iendo,  receiving. 

Habl-ado,    spoken.         Com-ido,     eaten.       Recib-ido,     received. 


Terminations  of  the  Present  Indicative. 

Habl-0,        I  speak.  Com-0,         I  eat.  Eecib-o,  I  receive. 

Habl-as,       thou  speakest.  Com-es,       thoueatest.  Recib-es,  thou  receivest. 

Habl-a,        he  speaks.  Com-e,        he  eats.  Recib-e,  Jie  receives. 

Habl-amos,  ive  speak.  Com-emos,  we  eat.  Recib-imos,  we  receive. 

Habl-ais,     you  speak.  Com-eis,      you  eat.  Recib-is,  you  receive. 

Habl-an,      they  speak.  Corn-en,      they  eat.  Recib-en,  t?iey  receive. 


Vocabulario. 

El  agua,  f.  the  imter. 
El  almacen,  the  store. 
El  baile,  the  hall. 
El  gusto,  the  pleasure. 
El  paiio,  the  cloth. 
Las  tijeras,  the  scissors. 
Griego,  Greek. 
Latin,  Latin. 
Pues,  as. 


Aprender,  2.i  to  learn. 
Bailar,  1.  to  domce. 
Can  tar,  1.  to  sing. 
Comprender,    2.   to  un- 
derstand. 
Deber,  2.  to  owe. 
Estndiar,  1.  to  study. 
Gastar,  1.  to  spend. 


Vocabulary. 

Mandar.  1.  to  send. 
Pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Recibir,  3.  to  receive. 
Residir,  3.  to  reside. 
Tocar,  1.  to  play  on. 
Vender,  2.  to  sell. 
Viajar,  1.  to  travel. 
Vivir,  3.  to  live. 


3. 


Exercise  63. 

1.  [  Qiiien  ha  tornado  mi  libro  ?     2.  Yo  no  se  qui  en  lo  ba  tornado. 
[  A  que  bora  comen  V.  V.  1    4.  Comemos  d  las  seis  y  media  los 


1  The  number  put  after  each  Spanish  verb  given  in  this  vocabulary,  or 
in  the  following  vocabularies,  indicates  the  conjugation  to  which  that  verb 


belong 


KEGULAR  VERBS.  181 

dias  de  la  semana  ;  pero  los  domingos,  comemos  a  las  dos.  5.  i  Donde 
esta  su  hermano  ahora  ?  6.  Esta  viajando  en  Europa.  7.  Necesito 
zapatos  ;  donde  compra  V.  los  suyos  I  8.  Compro  mis  zapatos  en 
Broadway.  9.  i  Quien  vive  en  aquella  casa  ?  10.  El  senor  Robinson 
vive  alii  con  su  familia.  11.  [  Toca  V.  el  piano  ?  12.  No  toco  ningnn 
instmmento,  pero  canto  un  poco.  13.  i  Cantan  tanibien  sus  hernianas  ? 
14.  Ellas  cantan  muy  bien.  15.  i  Con  que  cortan  V.  V.  este  paiio  ? 
16.  Lo  cortamos  con  las  tijeras  grandes.  17.  [  Cuando  recibe  V.  su 
dinero  ?  18.  Lo  recibo  todos  los  meses,  y  asi  pago  lo  que  debo. 
19.  I  Quiere  V.  beber  algo  1  20.  No,  gracias,  he  bebido  ya.  21.  i  Cuan- 
do  llega  su  padre  1  22.  No  se,  el  no  ha  escrito.  23.  i  Va  V.  al 
baile  esta  noche  1  24.  No,  seiior,  yo  nunca  bailo.  25.  i  Quiere  V. 
comprar  libros  franceses,  nuestro  amigo  ha  recibido  niuchisimos. 
26.  No  puedo  comprar  ninguno  ahora,  he  gastado  todo  mi  dinero 
el  mes  pasado.  27,  i  Habla  V.  frances  ?  28.  Hablo  im  poco  ;  pero 
mi  hermano  lo  habla  muy  bien,  pues  ha  residido  mucho  tiempo  en 
Paris.  29.  i  Y  donde  vive  ahora  ?  30.  El  esta  en  Alemania,  donde 
esta  estudiando  el  aleman.  31.  [En  donde  ha  aprendido  V.  el 
italiano  ?  32.  Yo  no  hablo  italiano,  lo  comprendo  un  poco.  33.  i  Quiere 
V.  venderme  su  caballo  negro  ?  34.  Ya  lo  he  vendido,  pero  todavia 
no  he  recibido  el  dinero. 


Exercise  64, 

'  1.  Who  lives  now  in  your  old  house  ?  2.  Nobody  lives  there  now. 
3.  Does  your  brother  speak  Spanish  ?  4.  We  all  speak  (speak  all) 
Spanish  in  the  family.  5.  What  do  you  study  in  your  school  ?  6.  I 
study  Latin  and  Greek.  7.  Do  you  know  if  your  friend  has  received 
any  money  ?  8.  Yes,  he  receives  his  money  every  Monday.  9.  At 
what  time  does  your  father  dine  ?  10.  He  dines  at  six  o'clock. 
11.  Have  you  bought  anything  for  us?  12.  Yes,  I  have  bought 
apples  and  pears  for  you.  13.  AYhat  are  you  eating  ?  14.  I  am  eating 
bread  and  cheese.  15.  And  what  are  you  drinking  ?  16.  I  am  drink- 
ing water,  I  never  drink  wine  or  beer.  17.  Does  your  sister  sing  ? 
18.  She  sings  and  dances  very  well.  19.  Will  you  cut  me  a  piece  of 
bread  ?  20.  With  much  jdeasure ;  give  me  your  knife.  21.  Here  it  is, 
but  I  don't  know  if  it  cuts  well.  22.  Have  you  spent  all  your 
money  ?  23.  Not  yet,  1  have  spent  only  five  dollars.  24.  Will  you 
buy  a  handsome  little  dog  ?  25.  I  don't  spend  my  money  in  dogs. 
26.  Do  you  learn  French  ?    27.  We  learn  French  and  Italian.    28.  Do 


182  LESSON    32. 

you  speak  Italian  well  1  29.  We  don't  speak  it,  but  we  understand  it. 
30.  What  do  they  sell  in  that  store  1  31.  They  sell  sugar,  coffee  and 
tea.  32.  Do  you  receive  your  wine  from  France  ?  33.  We  receive 
some  from  France  and  some  from  Germany. 

Gramatiea.  Grammar. 

1,  The  Present  of  the  Indicative  expresses  in  Spanish,  as 
well  as  in  the  other  languages,  whatever  exists,  happens  or  is 
done :  Yo  SOy,  /  am ;  tu  escribes,  thou  writest ;  llueve,  it 
rains;  etc. 

2i  The  Present  of  the  Indicative  is  also  very  frequently  used 
instead  of  the  Future  Tense  to  express  a  proximate  futurity  : 

Mi  amigo  viene  al  instante,         My  friend  will  come  in  a  moment. 
Partimos  ma^ana.  We  will  leave  to-morrow. 

3t   The  same  tense  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  Fast 

Tense,  especially  in  a  narrative,  to  give  it  more  animation,  and 

to  place  it  vividly,  as  it  were,  before  the  reader  : 

Oye  el  general  que  el  enemigo  ha         The  general  Jieard  (hears)  that  tlie 

echado  el  puente,  y  al  pun  to  da  la  enemy  Jiad  (has)  huilt  the  bridge^ 

senal  de  la  pelea.  se  arma,  sube  a  and  he  immediately  gave  (gives) 

caballo  y   sale   al    f rente   de   sus  orders  for  tlie  battle,  armed  {ixvm^) 

tropas  a  encontrar  los  Franceses.  himself   mounted  (mounts)  his 

QuiNTANA.  horse,  and  sallied  (sallies)  forth 

to  'meet  the  French. 

4.  The  radical  part  or  the  root  of  the  verb  is  obtained  by 
dropping  the  two  last  letters  which  form  the  terminations  proper 
to  the  conjugation  to  which  the  verb  belongs,  namely  :  ar,  for 
the  first  conjugation  ;  er,  for  the  second  conjugation  ;  and,  ir  for 
the  third  conjugation. 

To  the  stem  are  added  to  form  the  Present  of  the  Indicative  of 
the  Eegular  Verbs,  and  of  many  Irregular  Verbs,  the  following 
terminations  : 

For  the  1st  Conjugatiqn :      o,        as,         a,        amos,         ais,         an. 

For  the  2d  Conjugation :      o,         es,         e,         emos,         eis,        en 

For  the  3d  Conjugation :      o,        es,         e,         imos,         is,  en. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  183 

5i   Observation  on  the  Present  of  the  Indicative  of  certain  Regular 

Verbs. 

a.  In  those  verbs  ending  in  the  Present  Infinitive  in  cer 
and  cir,  the  c  is  replaced  by  a  Z  before  0  and  a  to  preserve  the 
soft  sound : 

Veneer,       to  conquer.  Venzo,  /  coTigwcr ;  instead  of  wtico. 

Resarcir,     to  com23ensate.         "ResaTZSi,  he  compensates ;  instead  of  resarca. 

b.  Verbs  ending  in  the  Present  Infinitive  in  ger,  change  g  in- 
to j  before  0  and  a  for  the  same  reason  as  above  : 

Coger,     to  take.  Cojo, /to^^e;  instead  of  co^o. 

C.  Verbs  ending  in  the  Present  Infinitive  in  quir,  change  qu 
into  C  before  0  and  a : 

Ddinquir,      to  offend.  Delinco^  /  offend ;  instead  of  delinquo. 

d.  Finally,  those  verbs  ending  in  the  Present  Infinitive  in  nir 
change  the  i  into  y  before  a,  e,  0  : 

Atribuir,       to  attribute.  Atribuyo,  I  attribute  ;  instead  of  atribuio. 

Atribuye,  he  attributes  ;  instead  of  atribuie. 

Constituir,    to  constitute.  CoTLStitVLYO,  I  constitute  ;  matesid  of  constituio. 

Destruir,       to  destroy.  Destruyo,  /  destroy  ;  instead  of  destruio. 

Distribuir,    to  distribute.  Distribuyo,  I  distribute  ;  instead  of  distribuio. 

Huir,  to  flee.  Huyo,  I  flee  ;  instead  of  hicio. 

etc.  etc. 


Leccion  XXXIII,  Lesson  XXXIII. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  1st  CONJUGATION. 

Present  Tense  of  tlie  Indicative  Mood. 

1.  Calentar,  to  warm.  2.  Empezar,    to  begin. 

Caliento,  I  warm.  Empiezo,  I  begins 

Calientas,  thoic  warmest.  Empiezas,  thou  beginnest, 

Calienta,  he  ivarms.  Empieza,  he  begins. 

Calen tamos,  we  warm.  Empezamos,  ive  begin. 

Calentais,  you  warm.  Empezais,  you  begin. 

Calientan,  they  warm.  Empiezan,  they  begin. 


184 


LESSON    33. 


Principal  Irregular  Verbs  of  the 
the  e,  and  are  conjugated 
Apretar,  to  squeeze. 
Arrendar,  to  hii-e. 
Asentar,  to  j^lace. 
Atravesar,  to  cross. 
Cegar,  to  Mind. 
Cerrar,  to  shut. 
Comenzar,  to  commence. 
Concertar,  to  agree. 
Confesar,  to  confess. 
Despertar,  to  awake. 
Desterrar,  to  banish. 
Empedrar,  to  pave. 
Encerrar,  to  look  up. 
/  Encomendar,  to  recommend. 
Enmendar,  to  correct. 
Enterrar,  to  bury. 
Escarmentar,  to  take  warning. 

3.  Almorzar,  to  breakfast. 
Almuerzo,  I  breakfast. 
Almuerzas,  thou  breakfastcst. 
Almuerza,  he  breakfasts. 
Almorzamos,  we  breakfast. 
Almorzais,  yon  breakfast. 
Almuerzan,  they  breakfast. 

Principal  Irregular  Verbs  of  the 
ue,  and  are  conjugated 
Acordar,  to  remind. 
Amolar,  to  grind. 
Apostar,  to  bet. 
Aprobar,  to  approve. 
Avergonzar,  to  sJmme. 
Consolar,  to  console. 
Desollar,  to  skin. 
Encontrar,  to  meet, 
Forzar,  to  force. 
Hollar,  to  tread. 
Mostrar,  to  show. 
Poblar,  to  people. 


\st  conjugation  which  take  an  i  before 
like  calentar  and  empezar. 

Fregar,  to  rub. 

Gobemar,  to  govern. 

Helar,  to  freeze. 

Herrar,  to  shoe. 

Mentar,  to  mention. 

Negar,  to  deny. 

Nevar,  to  snow. 

Pensar,  to  think. 

Quebrar,  to  break. 

Eecomendar,  to  recommend. 

Reventar,  to  burst. 

Segar,  to  cut  down. 

Sembrar,  to  sow. 

Sentar,  to  set. 

Temblar,  to  tremble, 

Tentar,  to  tempt. 

Tropezar,  to  stumble, 

4.  Contar,  to  count, 
Cuento,  I  count. 
Cuentas,  thou  countest, 
Cuenta,  lie  counts. 
Contamos,  we  count. 
Contais,  you  count. 
Cuentaii,  they  count. 

1st  conjugation  vMch  change  the  o  intq^ 
he  almorzar  and  contar. 
v/Probar,  to  prove. 

Benovar,  to  renew, 

Bodar,  to  roll.  . 

Soldar,  to  solder. 

Soltar,  to  let  loose. 

Sonar,  to  sound. 

Sonar,  to  dream. 

Tostar,  to  toast. 

Trocar,  to  barter. 

Tronar,  to  thunder. 

Volar,  tofy. 

Volcar,  to  overturn. 


IKREGULAR  VERBS. 


185 


5.  Dar,  to  give. 
Doy,  I  give. 
Das,  thou  givest. 
Da,  he  gives. 
Damos,  we  give. 
Dais,  you  give. 
Dan,  they  give. 


6.  Jugar,  to  play. 
Jiiego,  I  play. 
Juegas,  thou  play  est. 
Juega,  he  plays. 
Jugamos,  we  play. 
Jugais,  you  play. 
Juegan,  they  play. 


Vocabulario. 
El  aire,  the  air. 
El  estado,  the  state. 
El  labrador,  the  farmer. 
El  trabajo,  the  work. 
La  cocinera,  the  eook. 
La  funcion,  the  ceremony. 
La  ignorancia,  the  ignorance. 
Despues,  afterwards. 
Imposible,  impossible. 
Temprano,  early. 
Anadir,  3.  to  add. 
Apostar,  1.  to  bet. 
Aprobar,  1.  to  approve. 
Calentar,  1.  to  warm. 
Cerrar,  1.  to  shut. 
Confesar,  1.  to  confess. 
Consolar,  1.  to  co7isole. 


Vocabulary. 
Creer,  2.  to  believe. 
Encerrar,  1.  to  lock  up. 
Encontrar,  1.  to  meet. 
Enterrar,  1.  to  bury. 
Helar,  1.  to  freeze. 
Ir,  3.  to  go. 
Mostrar,  1 .  to  show. 
Pasar,  1.  to  pass. 
Pensar,  1.  to  think. 
Poblar,  1.  to  people. 
Probar,  1.  to  prove. 
Recomendar,  1.  to  recommend. 
Sembrar,  1.  to  sow. 
Soiiar,  1.  to  dream. 
Temblar,  1.  to  tremble. 
Volar,  1.  tojly. 


Exercise  65. 

1.  I  Que  piensa  V.  de  eso  ?  2.  No  se  que  pensar.  3.  [  A  que  hora 
almuerzan  V.  V.  1  4.  Almorzamos  a  las  siete  de  la  manana. 
5.  [  Donde  estan  los  muchachos  1  6.  Estan  jugando  en  el  jardin. 
7.  I  Cuanto  dinero  da  V.  a  este  homhre  ?  8.  Yo  le  doy  cien  pesos. 
9.  [  A  que  hora  empieza  la  funcion  ?  10.  Creo  que  empieza  muv 
temprano.  11.  ^  Porque  tiembla  ese  muchacho  ?  12.  Porque  tiene 
miedo.  13.  El  principe  gobierna  sus  estados  con  inoderacion  y  jus- 
ticia.  14.  I  Cuanto  quiere  V.  apostar  que  puedo  hacer  eso  ?  15.  Yo 
nunca  apuesto  dinero.  16.  i  Como  pasan  V.  V.  el  tiempo  ?  17.  Al- 
morzamos temprano,  despues  estudiamos  ;  a  la  una  salimos  ;  a  las  seis 
comemos,  y  jugamos  hasta  las  diez.  18.  Confieso  que  no  se  nada  de 
eso.     19.  [  Como  piensan  V.  Y.  hacer  eso  1    20.  Pensamos  haceilo  asi. 


186  LESSON   33. 

21.  Los  pajaros  piieblan  los  aires.  22.  Apuesto  que  V.  no  enciien- 
tra  La  casa  de  mi  hermano  y  que  yo  encuentro  la  de  su  herinano 
de  V.  23.  Yo  no  apmebo  lo  que  V.  ha  hecho.  24.  Esos  hombres 
niuestran  mucha  ignorancia.  25.  Esta  mujer  encierra  todo  el  dinero 
que  tiene.  26.  i  I'iene  V.  algo  que  anadir  ?  27.  Si,  senor,  le  reco- 
miendo  a  V.  de  no  salir  de  la  casa.  28.  i  Ha  cerrado  V.  las  puertas  I 
29.  La  criada  las  cierra  todas  las  noches.     30.  Esta  helando. 


Exercise  G6. 

1.  I  meet  your  brother  every  day  in  our  street.  2.  Where  does 
your  brother  breakfast  ?  3.  He  never  breakfasts  (breakfasts  never) 
with  us.  4.  What  do  you  give  to  the  children  ?  5.  I  give  them 
apples  and  cakes.  6.  Why  do  you  not  commence  your  work  now  ? 
7.  I  cannot  commence  now  ;  I  have  some  letters  to  write.  8.  The 
general  has  l)een  buried  this  morning.  9.  Do  you  think  that  your 
brother  will  be  here  to-night?  10.  I  don't  think  so.  11.  I  recom- 
mend you  not  to  {de  no)  go  to  the  house  of  that  lady.  12.  Do  you 
approve  the  conduct  of  your  brother  ?  13.  I  do  not  approve  of  it ;  it 
is  impossible  to  approve  it.  14.  Do  you  dream  sometimes?  15.  I 
never  dream.  16.  What  does  this  prove?  17.  It  does  not  prove 
anything.  18.  You  show  your  ignorance  when  you  speak  so. 
19.  The  birds  fly  in  the  air.  20.  Who  warms  my  coffee  ?  21.  The 
cook  warms  it.  22.  He  bets  that  I  cannot  do  this,  and  I  bet  that  I 
can.  23.  We  give  all  our  money  to  that  poor  man.  24.  That  poor 
woman  cannot  console  herself  (se).  25.  Will  you  play  with  me  ?  26.  I 
never  play  when  I  have  to  study.  27.  The  farmers  sow  their  fields 
in  this  season.  28.  Why  do  you  tremble  ?  29.  I  do  not  tremble, 
you  tremble  yourself.     30.  It  was  freezing. 


Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1*  There  are  in  Spanish  several  kinds  of  irregularities  in  the 
verbs  of  the  three  conjugations ;  but  as  these  variations  are 
limited  in  most  cases  to  certain  moods,  tenses,  and  persons,  and 
almost  always  occur  in  the  same  places,  they  constitute  a  certain 
regularity  in  their  irregularity^  and  this  constant  repetition  of 
similar  irregularities  facilitates  the  task  of  the  student. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  187 

It  has  been  shown  by  the  conjugation  given  above  that  the 
irregularity  in  the  Present  Indicative  occurs  in  the  1st,  2d,  and 
3d  person  singular,  and  the  3d  person  plural.  It  will  be  shown 
hereafter  when  conjugating  other  tenses  that  the  irregularities 
of  the  verbs  of  the  1st  conjugation  will  be  the  same  throughout 
the  whole  conjugation,  excepting  four  verbs  which  will  be  men- 
tioned in  their  appropriate  time  and  place. 

2 1  Verbs  like  calentar  and  empezar  insert  an  i  before  the  e 
in  the  1st,  2d,  and  3d  persons  singular,  and  also  in  the  3d  per- 
son plural  of  the  Indicative,  while  verbs  like  almorzar  and 
contar  replace  the  o  by  ue  in  the  same  persons. 

Jugar  and  dar  stand  alone,  no  other  verbs  being  conjugated 
like  them,  unless  we  except  estar,  to  he,  which  has  in  the  Pres- 
ent Indicative  the  same  terminations  are  dar. 

3*  The  Present  Participle  and  the  Past  Particij^le  of  the 
irregular  verbs  of  the  1st  conjugation  are  formed  regularly  : 

Calent-ar,  to  warm  ;  calent-ando,  warming  ;  calent-ado,  warmed. 

Empez-ar,  to  begin  ;  empez-ando,  heginning  ;  empez-ado,  begun. 

Almorz-ar, tobreakfast;  alraorz-ando, breakfasting ;  alinorz-ado, breakfasted. 

Cont-ar,     to  count ;  cont-ando,     counting ;  cont-ado,      counted. 

D-ar,  to  give;  d-ando,  giving;  d-ado,  given. 

Jug-ar,       to  play ;  jug-ando,      playing;  jug-ado,       played. 
etc.                                    etc.  etc. 

4i  The  verb  errar,  to  err,  may  be  added  to  the  list  of  the 
irregular  verbs  already  given. 

This  verb  takes  a  y  before  itself  in  the  same  Tenses  and  Per- 
sons where  calentar,  to  warm,  inserts  an  i : 

Yerro,       /  err.  err  ar,       to  err. 

Yerras,      thou  errest. 

Yerra,       he  errs.  err  audo,  erring. 

Erramos,  we  err. 

Errais,      you  err.  err  ado,    erred, 

Yerran,     they  err. 


188 


LESSON   34. 


Leccion  XXXIV. 


Lesson  XXXIV. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  2d  CONJUGATION. 


1.  Conocer, 


!to  know, 
to  he  acquainted  with. 
Conozco,  I  know. 
Coiioces,  tliou  knowest. 
Conoce,  he  knows. 
Conocemos,  we  know. 
Conoceis,  you  know. 
Conocen,  they  know. 


2.  Nacer,  to  he  horn. 
Nazco,  /  am  horn. 
Naces,  thou  art  horn. 
Nace,  he  is  horn. 
Nacemos,  we  are  horn. 
Naceis,  yoit  are  horn. 
Nacen,  they  are  horn. 


3.  Perder,  to  lose. 
Pierdo,  /  lose. 
Pierdes,  thou  losest. 
Pierde,  lie  loses. 
Perdemos,  we  lose. 
Perdeis,  you  lose. 
Pierden,  they  lose. 


4.  Encender,  to  light. 
Enciendo,  /  light. 
Enciendes,  thou,  lightest. 
Enciende,  he  lights. 
Encendemos,  we  light. 
Encendeis,  yoit  light. 
Encienden,  they  light. 


5.  Hacer,  to  make,  to  do;  haciendo,  making,  doing ;     hecho,  made,  done. 

6.  Caer,  to  fall ;  cayendo,  falling  ;  caido,  fallen. 
Ha  go,  /  make  or  do.                                 Caigo,  I  fall. 

Haces,  thou  makest  or  doest.  Caes,  thoufallest. 

Hace,  he  makes  or  does.  Cae,  he  falls. 

Hacemos,  we  make  or  do.  Caemos,  ivefall. 

Ha.ceis,  you  make  or  do.  .         Caeis,  you  fall. 

Hacen,  they  make  or  do.  Caen,  tlmj  fall. 


7.  Poner,  to  put  ; 

8.  Querer,  to  wish,to  he  willing ; 
Pongo,  I  put. 

Pones,  thou  pnttest. 
Pone,  he  puts. 
Ponemos,  we  put. 
Poneis,  you  put. 
Ponen,  they  put. 


poniendo,  putting  :        puesto,  put. 
queriendo,  wishing  ;     querido,  wished. 

Quiero,  /  u'ish,  I  am  willing. 

Quieres,  thou  wishest,  etc. 

Qniere,  he  wisJies,  etc. 

Queremos,  we  wish,  etc. 

Qnereis,  you  wish,  etc. 

Quieren,  they  wish,  etc. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


189 


9.   Saber,  to  know,  to  know  how  to  ;  sabiendo,  knowing  ;    sabido,  known. 


10.  Poder,  to  be  able  ; 
Se,  I  know. 

Sabes,  thou  knowest. 
Sabe,  he  knows. 
Sabemos,  loe  know. 
Sabeis,  you  know. 
Saben,  they  know. 

11.  Cocer,  to  boil; 

12.  Traer,  to  bring ; 
Cuezo,  I  boil. 
Cueces,  thou  boilcst. 
Cueze,  he  boils. 
Cocemos,  we  boil. 
Coceis,  you  boil. 
Cuecen,  they  boil. 


pudiendo,  being  able  ;  podido,  been  able, 
Puedo,  /am  able,  I  can. 
Puedes,  thmi  art  able,  etc. 
Puede,  he  is  able,  etc. 
Podemos,  v)e  are  able,  etc. 
Podeis,  you  arc  able,  etc. 
Pueden,  they  are  able,  etc. 

cociendo,  boiling  ;  cocido,  boiled. 

trayendo,  bringing  ;  traido,  brought. 

Traigo,  I  bring. 

Traes,  thou  bringest. 

Trae,  he  brbigs. 

Traemos,  we  bring. 

Traeis,  you  bring. 

Traen,  they  bring. 


13.  Caber,  to  be  contained;  cabiendo,  being  contained;  cabido,  been  coniained. 

14.  Valer,  to  be  ivorth  ;      valiendo,  beiiig  worth  ;      valido,  been  worth. 
Quepo,  /  am  contained.  Valgo,  /  am  worth. 

Cabes,  thoic  art  contained.  Vales,  thou  art  worth. 

Cabe,  he  is  contained.  Vale,  he  is  worth. 

Cabemos,  we  are  contained.  Valemos,  we  are  worth. 

Cabeis,  you  are  contained.  Valeis,  you  are  worth. 

'  Caben,  tlicy  are  contained.  Valeii,  tJiey  are  worth. 


15.  Ver,  to  see  ; 

16.  Absolver,  to  absolve  ; 
Veo,  I  see. 

Ves,  thou  seest. 
Ve,  he  sees. 
Vemos,  we  see. 
Veis,  you  see. 
Ven,  they  see. 

17.  Volver,  to  return ; 

18.  Morder,  to  bite  ; 
Vuelvo,  I  return. 
Vuelves,  thoit  returnest. 
Vuelve,  he  returns. 
Vol  vemos,  we  return. 
Volveis,  you  returii. 
Vuelven,  they  return. 


viendo,  seeing  ;  vis  to,  seen. 

absolviendo,  absolving  ;      absuelto,  absolved. 

Absuelvo,  I  absolve. 

Absuelves,  thou  absolvest. 

Absuelve,  he  absolves. 

Absolvemos,  we  absolve. 

Absolveis,  yoic  absolve. 

Absiielven,  they  absolve. 


vol  viendo,  returning  ; 
mordiendo,  biting  ; 

Muerdo,  I  bite. 

Muerdes,  thou  bitest 

Muerde,  he  bites. 

Mordeinos,  ive  bite. 

Mordeis,  you  bite. 

Muerden,  they  bite. 


vuelto,  returned. 
mordido,  bitten. 


190 


LESSON    34. 


19.  Oler,  to  smell; 
Huelo,  I  smell. 
Hueles,  thou  smallest. 
Huele,  he  smells. 


oliendo,  smelling;        olido,  smelt. 
Olemos,  we  smell. 
Oleis,  you  smell. 
Huelen,  they  smell. 


Vocabulario. 

El  baul,  the  trunk. 
£1  diente,  the  tooth. 
El  gas,  the  gas. 
El  negocio,  the  business. 
El  olor,  the  smell. 
El  pueblo,  the  town. 
El  saco,  the  bag. 
La  estrella,  tlie  star. 
La  luna,  the  moon. 
La  nuez,  the  nut. 
La  ropa,  the  clothes. 
La  tarde,  the  afternoon. 
Algunas  veces,  sometimes. 
A  lo  menos,  at  least. 
Desde,  since. 
Durante,  during. 


Vocabulary. 

Generalmente,  generally. 
Manana,  to-morrow. 
Pasado    manana,   the  day  after  to- 
morrow. 
Ventajoso,  profitable. 
Devolver,  2.  to  return,  give  back. 
Disponer,  2,  to  dispose. 
Encender,  2.  to  light. 
Llover,  2.  to  rain. 
Morder,  2.  to  bite. 
Perder,  2.  to  lose. 
Proponer,  2.  to  propose. 
Traer,  2.  to  bring. 
Valer,  2.  to  be  worth. 
Ver,  2.  to  see. 


Exercise  67. 

1.  [  Sabe  V.  si  el  perro  miierde  1  2.  No  puede  morder,  es  demasia- 
do  viejo,  y  no  tiene  dientes.  3.  [  Cuanto  puede  valer  este  reloj  1 
4.  Si  es  de  oro,  vale  a  lo  menos  cien  pesos.  5.  i  Ve  V.  a  menudo  d  la 
senora  Marti  ?  6.  La  veo  todas  las  semanas.  7.  i  Como  hace  V.  esto  ? 
8.  Lo  liago  asi.  9.  i  Pueden  V.  V.  hacer  esto  tan  bien  como  nosotros  ? 
10.  Podemos  hacerlo  mejor.  11.  [  Que  quieren  V.  V.  ?  12.  Queremos 
dinero  para  ir  al  teatro.  13.  V.  sabe  muy  bien  que  el  teatro  esta 
cerrado.  14.  i  Que  pone  V.  en  el  baul  ?  15.  Pongo  mi  ropa  en  el 
baul  grande,  y  mis  libros  en  el  pequeiio.  16.  i  Cuando  piensa  V. 
volver  del  campo  ?  17.  Vuelvo  maiiana  6  pasado  manana.  18.  [  Co- 
noce  V.  a  este  cabal lero  ?  19.  Le  conozco  desde  muchos  anos. 
20.  I  Que  mal  olor  hay  en  este  cuarto  !  21.  Yo  no  huelo  nada. 
22.  I  Ha  perdido  V.  algo  1  23.  Nunca  pierdo  nada.  24.  i  Que  me 
propone  V.  ?  25.  Le  propongo  algo  de  muy  ventajoso  para  V. 
26.  [  Sabe  V.  lo  que  quieren  estos  muchachos  ?  27.  Yo  no  se  lo  qne 
quieren.     28.  i  Qu^  trae  V.  en  aquel  saco  1    29.  Traigo  manzanas  y 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  191 

nueces.  30.  Durante  la  noche  vemos  la  luna  y  las  estrellas.  31.  i  Que 
haceii  V.  V.  los  domingos  por  la  tarde  ?  32.  Salimos  generalmente. 
33.  [  A  quien  conoceii  V.  V.  en  el  pueblo  ?  34.  Conocemos  a  casi  todo 
el  mundo.     35.  Mi  amisro  no  sale  todavia. 


Exercise  68. 

1.  Will  you  do  this  for  me  ?  2.  I  don't  know  how  to  do  it,  I  have 
never  learned.  3.  Does  the  dog  bite  l  4.  He  barks,  but  he  never 
bites.  5.  Is  that  book  worth  anything?  6.  It  is  not  worth  any- 
thing. 7.  Whom  do  you  know  here  ?  8.  I  do  not  know  anybody. 
9.  Can  you  do  what  I  do  ?  10.  I  cannot  do  it.  11.  At  what  time  do 
you  light  the  gas  ?  12.  I  light  it  at  six  o'clock.  13.  AVhy  do  you 
not  return  the  money  to  that  man  1  14.  Because  I  have  no  money 
now.  15.  Does  it  rain?  16.  It  rains  a  little.  17.  Our  brothers 
return  to-morrow  from  the  city.  18.  Can  your  brother  go  with  me  ? 
19.  He  cannot  go  now,  but  I  can  go  with  you  if  you  wish.  20.  Where 
do  you  put  your  books  ?  21.  I  put  th^m  in  the  small  room.  22.  What 
do  you  wish  here  ]  23.  I  wish  to  see  your  father,  where  is  he  ? 
24.  I  don't  know  where  he  is.  25.  Can  you  bring  me  my  books  to- 
morrow ?  26.  I  bring  them  now  in  my  bag.  27.  Do  you  see  Mr. 
Brown  very  often  ?  28.  I  see  him  every  Thursday.  29.  Do  you 
know  this  lady  ?  30.  Yes,  I  see  her  sometimes  at  her  house.  31.  Of 
how  much  money  can  you  dispose  for  this  business '?  32.  I  can  dis- 
pose of  three  hundred  dollars,  but  not  of  one  cent  more.  33.  Edward 
will  not  come  with  us,  because  it  rains.  34.  Do  you  know  that  I 
wish  to  be  obeyed  ?     35.  I  don't  obey  any  one  here. 

Gr^matica.  Grammar. 

1,  Verbs  ending  in  acer,  ecer,  and  ocer  like  nacer,  to  be 
horn,  empobrecer,  to  grow  poor,  conocer,  to  hnoiv,  insert  a  z 
before  the  c  in  the  1st  person  singular  of  the  Present  of  the 
Indicative  : 

Nazco,  I  am  horn;        empobrezco,  I  grow  poor  ;        conozco,  I  know, 

2.  The  verbs  mecer,  to  stir,  to  rock  (which  is  a  regular  verb), 
and  hacer,  to  make,  to  do,  and  its  compounds,  as  deshacer,  to 


192  LESSON '  34. 

undo,  rehacer,  to  do  over,  contrahacer,  to  imitate,  etc.,  form  an 
exception  to  the  above  rule  : 

Mezo,  I  stir  ;  hago,  I  'make,  I  do. 

3t  Perder,  to  lose,  and  the  following  verbs  insert  an  i  before 
the  e  in  the  three  persons  singular  and  also  in  the  3d  person 
plural  of  the  Present  of  the  Indicative,  as  is  the  case  in  some 
verbs  of  the  1st  conjugation  : 

Ascender,  to  ascend.  En  tender,  to  understand. 

Atender,  to  mind.  Estender,  to  spread. 

Condescender,  to  condescend.  Hender,  to  split. 

Contender,  to  contend.  Reverter,  to  overflow. 

Defender,  to  defend.  Tender,  to  stretch. 

Desatender,  to  disregard.  Trascender,  to  transcend. 

Descender,  to  descend.  Verter,  to  spill. 
Encender,  to  light. 

4,  The  following  verbs  have  the  same  irregularity  as  poner, 
to  put  : 

Anteponer,  to  place  before.  Oponer,  to  oppose.* 

Componer,  to  repair.  Posponer,  to  postpone. 

Deponer,  to  depose.  Proponer,  to  propose. 

Descomponer,  to  discorapose.  Repoiier,  to  replace. 

Disponer,  to  dispose.  Sobreponer,  to  place  over. 

Esponer,  to  expose.  Suponer,  to  suppose. 

Imponer,  to  impose.  Trasponer,  to  transpose. 
Indisponer,  to  indispose. 

5*    Cocer,  to  boil,  and  escocer,  to  smart,  differ  from  the  verbs 
given  above  ending  in  acer,  ecer^  and  oce7' ;  and  instead  of  insert- 
ing a  z  before  the  c  like  conocer,  they  change  the  o  of  the  radical 
pari  into  ue  like  morder,  to  bite,  and  replace  the  c  by  a  z : 
Cuezo,  I  boil.  Escuezo,  I  smart. 

\^        .J) 
6f    Caber  corresponds  also  to  the  English  verb  to  contain,  to 

hold ;  but  in  order  to  use  caber  in  the  sense  of  these  verbs,  the 

English  accusative  must  become  the  Spanish  nominative,  while 

the  preposition  en  must  also  be  used  : 

En  este  teatro  cabe  mas  gente  que         This  theater  contains  more  people 
en  aquel,  than  that  one. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


193 


7.  The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  traer,  to  bring : 
Abstraer,  to  abstract.         Distraer,  to  distract.  Substraer,  \ 

A  traer,  to  aitract.  Estraer,  to  extract,       '       Sustraer,    \ 

Contraer,  to  cmitract.         Retraer,  to  retract. 

Detraer,  to  detract.  Retrotraer,  to  refer  toforiner  times. 

8.  Equivaler,  to  he  equal  to,  is  conjugated  like  valer,  to  he 
worth. 

9*  Volver,  to  return,  and  the  following  verbs,  change  the  o  of 
the  radical  into  ue  in  the  three  persons  singular,  and  also  in  the 
3d  person  plural  of  the  Present  of  the  Indicative,  like  almorzar, 
to  hreakfast,  of  the  1st  conjugation  : 


Condoler,  to  condole. 
Con  mover,  to  affect. 
Demoler,  to  demolish. 
Desen volver,  to  unfold. 
Devolver,  to  give  hack. 
Disolver,  to  dissolve. 


Doler,  to  ache. 
Envolver,  to  involve. 
Llover,  to  rain. 
Moler,  to  grind. 
Morder,  to  bite. 
Mover,  to  move. 


Oler,  to  smell. 
Remorder,  to  sting. 
Resolver,  to  resolve. 
Revolver,  to  revolve. 
Soler,  to  be  wont. 
Torcer,  to  twist. 


10.    The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  tener,  to  have, 
which  is  also  an  irre^^ular  verb  : 

Sostener,  to  sustain. 


Contener,  to  coniaini. 
Detener,  to  detain. 
,  Entretener,  to  entertain. 


Mantener,  to  maintain. 
Obtener,  to  obtain. 
Retener,  to  retain. 


leccion  XXXV.  Lesson  XXXT. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  3d  CONJUGATION. 
Present  of  tlie  Indicative. 

1.  Conducir,  to  conduct ;    conduciendo,  conducting  ;    conducido,  conducted. 

2.  Lucir,  to  shine  ;  luciendo,  shining  ;  lucido,  shined. 
Conduzco,  I  conduct.                               Luzco,  I  shine. 

Conduces,  thou  conductest.  Luces,  thou  shinest. 

Conduce,  he  conducts.  Luce,  he  shines. 

Conducimos,  we  conduct.  Luciraos,  we  shine. 

Conducis,  you  conduct.  Lucis,  you  shine. 

Conducen,  they  conduct,  Lncen,  they  shine. 


194 


LESSON   35. 


3.  Sentir,  to  feel; 

4.  Divertir,  to  amuse ; 
Sieiito,  I  feel. 
Sientes,  thou  feelest. 
Siente,  he  feels. 
Sentimos,  we  feel. 
Seiitis,  you  feel. 
Sienten,  they  feel. 

6.  Dormir,  to  sleep  ; 

6.  Morir,  to  die ; 
Duermo,  I  sleep. 
Duermes,  thou  sleepest. 
Duerme,  he  sleeps. 
Dormimos,  we  sleep. 
Dormis,  you  sleep. 
Duermen,  they  sleep. 

7.  Pedir,  toashfor  ; 

8.  Medir,  to  measure  ; 
Pido,  I  ask  for. 
Pides,  thou  askest  for. 
Pide,  he  asks  for. 
Pedimos,  we  ask  for. 
Pedis,  you  ask  for. 
Piden,  they  ask  for. 


sintiendo,  feeling :  sentido,  felt. 

divertiendo,  amusing  ;         divertido,  amused. 

Divierto,  I  amuse. 

Diviertes,  thou  amusest. 

Divierte,  he  amuses. 

Divertimos,  we  amuse. 

Divertis,  you  amuse. 

Divierten,  they  amuse. 

durmiendo,  sleeping  ;  dormido,  sle^jt. 

muriendo,  dying  ;  muerto,  dead. 

Muero,  I  die. 

Mueres,  thou  diest. 

Muere,  he  dies. 

Morimos,  we  die. 

Moris,  you  die. 

Mueren,  they  die. 

pidiendo,  asking  for  ;  pedido,  asked  for. 

midiendo,  measuring  ;  medido,  measured. 

Mido,  I  measure. 

Mides,  thou  measurest. 

Mide,  he  measures. 

Medimos,  we  measure. 

Medis,  you  measure. 

Miden,  they  measure. 


9.  Venir,  to  come; 

10.  Decir,  to  say,  to  tell ; 
Yen  go,  I  come. 

Vienes,  th^u  comest. 
Viene,  he  comes. 
Yenimos,  we  come. 
Yenis,  you  come. 
Yieiien,  they  come. 

11.  Salir,  to  go  out ; 

12.  Ir,  to  go  ; 
Salgo,  /  go  oMt. 
Sales,  thou  goest  out. 
Sale,  he  goes  out. 
Salimos,  we  go  out. 
Sal  is,  ywi  go  out. 
Salen,  they  go  out. 


viniendo,  coming , 
diciendo,  saying  ; 

Digo,  I  say. 

Dices,  thou  sayest. 

Dice,  he  says. 

Decimos,  we  say. 

Decis,  you  say. 

Dicen,  they  say. 


venido,  come. 
dicho,  said. 


saliendo,  going  mit ; 
yendo,  going  ; 

Voy,  I  go. 

Vas,  thou  goest. 

Va,  he  goes. 

Vamos,  we  go. 

Vais,  you  go. 

Van,  they  go. 


salido,  gone  out. 
ido,  gone. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


195 


13.  Oir,  to  Tiear ; 
Oigo,  I  hear. 
Oyes,  thou  hearest, 
Oye,  he  hears. 


oyendo,  hearing  ;  oido,  heard, 

Oimos,  we  hear, 
Ois,  you  hear. 
Oyen,  tliey  hear. 


Vocabulario. 
El  canto,  the  singing. 
El  cuento,  the  tale. 
El  estudiante,  the  student. 
La  aventtira,  the  adventure. 
Indiferente,  indifferent. 
Por  cierto,  certainly. 
Telemaco,  Telemachus. 
Aborrecer,  2.  to  hate. 
Bendecir,  3.  to  bless. 
Cantar,  1.  to  sing. 
Complacer,  2.  to  please. 
Conducir,  3.  to  conduct^  to  take* 
Desde  que,  since. 
Divertir,  3.  to  amuse. 


Vocabulary. 
Dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 
Esperar,  1.  to  wait,  to  hope, 
Ganar,  1.  to  earn. 
Ir,  3.  to  go. 

Man  teller,  2.  to  support, 
Medir,  3.  to  measure, 
Morir,  3.  to  die. 
Oir,  3.  to  hear. 
Pedir,  3.  to  ask  for. 
Podrir,  3.  to  rot. 

Provenir,  3.  to  come  from  {to  origi- 
nate). 
Bepetir,  3,  to  repeat. 
Tradncir,  3.  to  translate. 


Exercise  60. 

1.  [  A  que  hora  sale  V.  todos  los  dias  ?  2.  Salgo  generalinente  d 
las  diez  6  a  las  diez  j  media.  3.  [  Que  dice  este  hombre  ?  4.  No  se 
'  lo  que  dice,  habla  aleman.  5.  i  Que  libro  traducen  V.  V.  del  frances 
al  espanol  ?  6.  Traducimos  las  aventuras  de  Telemaco.  7.  [  Va  V. 
al  concierto  esta  noche  ?  8.  No,  seiior,  voy  al  teatro.  9.  [  Donde 
esta  Juan  ?  10.  Todavia  esta  durmiendo.  11-  [  Oye  V.  lo  que  digo  1 
12.  Oigo  muy  bien,  pero  no  puedo  hacer  lo  que  V.  quiere,  porque 
tengo  que  salir  ahora  misino  {this  very  minute).  13.  [  A  donde  van 
estos  muchachos  1  14.  Van  d  la  escuela.  15.  [  Quiere  V.  ir  por  pan  ? 
16.  Si,  senor,  quiero  ir.  17.  Los  estudiantes  van  cantando  por  las 
calles.  18.  Todas  las  manzanas  que  V.  ha  comprado,  estan  podridas. 
19.  [Como  puede  V.  decir  tal  cosa?  20.  Lo  digo  porque  lo  se. 
21.  [A  donde  conduce  V.  a  este  muchacho  1  22.  Le  conduzco  a  casa 
de  su  tio.  23.  i  Cuanto  pide  V.  por  este  caballo  ?  24.  No  pido  sino 
lo  que  vale.  25.  El  viejo  Andres  nos  divierte  todas  las  noches  con 
sus  cuentos.  26.  Dice  el  medico  que  mueren  muchos  ninos  en  este 
mes.  27.  i  Duerme  V.  1  28.  No,  serior,  no  duernio,  oigo  todo  lo  que 
V.  dica     29.  [  Ha  medido  V.  el  pano  %    30.  Voy  a  medirlo  ahora. 


196  LESSON    35. 

31.  I  Porque  aborreee  Y.  a  este  hombre  2  32,  Yo  no  le  aborrezco,  el 
lue  es  indiferente.  33.  i  Porque  no  me  obedece  Y.  ]  34.  Yo  le 
obedezco  a  Y.,  y  hago  todo  lo  que  puedo  para  coniplacerle  a  Y. 
35.  Este  pobre  hombre  no  puede  mantener  a  su  familia  con  lo  que 
gana.  36.  Yo  mantengo  a  mis  hermanitas  desde  que  mi  padre  ba 
muerto. 

Exercise  70 » 

1.  How  do  you  sleep  now?  2.  I  sleep  much  better,  tbank  you. 
3.  What  does  your  mother  tell  your  brother  1  4,  She  tells  him  that 
he  cannot  go  out  without  a  hat,  5.  Do  you  hear  the  music  from 
here  ?  6,  We  hear  the  music  and  the  singing  from  our  room.  7.  What 
do  you  wish  to-day  ?  8,  I  have  come  to  (a)  see  if  you  need  any- 
thing ?  9.  Yes ;  I  need  coffee,  sugar  and  tea.  10.  Do  you  (pL)  go  to 
(the)  church  every  Sunday]  11.  We  go  twice  on  (los)  Sundays,  and 
also  sometimes  in  the  week.  L2.  Do  you  go  out  to-day  ?  'l3.  I  never 
go  out  when  it  rains,  14,  Why  don't  you  measure  the  cloth  ?  15.  I 
have  measured  it  already,  16.  Who  takes  your  little  sister  to  school  I 
17,  I  take  her  sometimes,  but  she  generally  goes  (goes  generally) 
alone,  18.  Why  don^t  you  ask  that  man  for  your  money  ?  19.  He 
says  that  he  has  no  money  now,  and  that  I  must  wait  till  next  month. 
20.  Will  you  go  for  some  bread  for  me  ?  21.  I  cannot  go  now ;  will 
you  wait  a  few  minutes.  22.  Certainly,  you  may  go  in  a  half  hour  if 
you  wish.  23.  Are  the  children  still  sleeping  ?  24.  Yes,  they  are  all 
sleeping  yet.  25,  Why  don^t  you  tell  (to)  yovir  tailor  that  you  cannot 
pay  him  now  ?  26.  Who  says  that  I  cannot  pay  him  ?  I  can,  but  I 
will  noty  because  he  owes  money  to  my  brother  and  will  not  pay  him. 
27.  Can  you  translate  this  ?  28.  I  don't  translate  very  well  yet. 
29.  Will  you  repeat  what  he  has  said.  30.  Why  don't  you  repeat  it 
yourself?  31.  I  don't  understand  German.  32.  Where  does  it  come 
from  ?  33.  It  comes  from  the  old  house.  34.  The  father  blesses  his 
children.  35.  I  am  going  this  evening  to  the  city,  but  I  don't  know 
yet  if  my  friends  can  go  with  me. 

Gramdtiea,  Grammar. 

I,  Verbs  ending  in  Ucir,  like  condncir,  to  conduct,  to  take; 
lucir,  to  shine  J  etc.,  have  in  the  Present  of  the  Indicative  the 
same  irregularity  as  the  verbs  of  the  2d  conjugation  ending  in 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


197 


acer,  ocer,  and  ecer,  that  is,  they  insert  a  z  before  the  c  in  the 
first  person  singular  of  said  tense  : 

Conduzco,  I  conduct,  Luzco,  I  shine. 

2t  The  following  verbs  conjugated  like  sentir,  to  feel,  and 
divertir,  to  amuse,  have  in  the  Present  of  the  Indicative  the 
same  irregularities  as  the  verb  empezai^  to  begin,  of  the  1st  con- 
jugation, that  is,  they  insert  an  i  before  the  e  in  the  1st,  2d,  and 
3d  persons  singular,  and  in  the  3d  person  plural  of  said  tense : 
Adherir,  to  adhere.  Deferir,  to  defer.  Ingerir,  to  interfere. 

Adquirir,  to  acquire.  Desmentir,  to  belie.      Mentir,  to  lie. 

Advertir,  to  notice.  Diferir,  to  differ. 

Arrepentirse  (reflex.)  to  repent.   Digerir,  to  digest. 
A  sentir,  to  consent.  Disentir,  to  dissent. 

Conferir,  to  confer.  Herir,  to  wound. 

Consentir,  to  consent.  Hervir,  to  boil. 

Convertir,  to  convert.  Inferir,  to  infer. 

Observation.  —  The  same  verbs  change  the  e  into  an  i  in  the  Present 
Participle,  as:  smtiQudiO,  feeling ;  advirtiendo,  noticing;  etc. 


Pervertir,  to  pervert. 
Preferir,  to  i^refer. 
Presentir,  to  foresee, 
Proferir,  to  utter. 
Referir,  to  refer. 
Requerir,  to  notify. 


3*  Dormir,  to  deep,  and  morir,  to  die,  change  the  o  of  the 
radical  part  into  ue  in  the  same  cases  as  the  verb  almorzar  of 
the  1st  conjugation. 

The  0  is  also  changed  into  a  H  in  the  Present  Participle : 
Durmiendo,  sleeping.  Muriendo,  dying. 

4«  Pedir,  to  ask  for,  and  medir,  to  measure,  and  the  following 
verbs  change  the  e  into  i  in  the  1st,  2d,  and  3d  persons  singular, 
the  3d  person  plural,  and  the  Present  Participle  : 

Ceiiir,  to  gird. 
Colegir,  to  collect. 
Competir,  to  compete. 
Concebir,  to  conceive. 
Conseguir,  to  obtain. 
Constrenir,  to  force. 
Corregir,  to  correct. 
Derretir,  to  melt. 
Deservir,  to  harm. 
Despedir,  to  dismiss. 
Destenir,  to  discolor. 


Elegir,  to  elect. 
Erabestir,  to  attack. 
Envestir,  to  invest. 
Espedir,  to  forward. 
Freir,  to  fry. 
Gemir,  to  groan. 
Impedir,  to  prevent. 
Investir,  to  invest. 
Perseguir,  to  pursue. 
Proseguir,  to  continue. 


Regir,  to  rule. 
Reir,  to  laugh. 
Rendir,  to  surrender. 
Refiir,  to  fight,  to  scold, 
Repetir,  to  repeat. 
Seguir,  to  follow. 
Servir,  to  serve. 
Sonreir,  to  smile. 
Tenir,  to  dye. 
Vestir,  to  dress. 


198  LESSON   35. 

5*  The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  venir,  to  come^  of 
which  they  are  compounds  : 

A  venir,  to  happen.  Pre  venir,  to  arrange  beforehand, 

Contravenir,  to  transgress.  Provenir,  to  originate. 

Convenir,  to  agree.  Revenir,  to  return. 

Desa venir,  to  disagree.  Sobre venir,  to  come  between, 
Intervenir,  to  mterfere. 

Observation.  — Venir  por  means  to  comefm-^  to  fetch. 

6.  Predecir,  to  foretell,  contradecir,  to  contradict,  desdecir, 
to  retract,  and  bendecir,  to  bless,  have  in  the  Present  of  the  In- 
dicative the  same  irregularities  as  decir,  to  say,  to  tell: 

Predigo,  I  foretell.  Contradigo,  I  coivtradict. 

7.  Although  the  meaning  of  ir  is  to  go,  this  verb  accom- 
panied by  an  adverb  corresponds  also  to  the  verb  andar,  to 
walk  : 

Yoy  despacio,  /  walk  slowly,  Yoy  deprisa,  /  ivalk  quickly. 

Observation.  —  When  accompanied  by  the  preposition  por  the  verb  ir 
is  used  instead  of  bnscar,  to  fetch  : 

Yoy  por  pan,  I  go  for  bread,  I  fetch  bread. 

8.  The  verb  asir,  to  seize,  makes  asgo  in  the  1st  person  sin- 
gular of  the  Present  of  the  Indicative,  but  this  verb  is  hardly 
ever  used,  except  metaphorically. 

9i  The  verb  podrir,  to  rot,  of  which  the  Present  of  the  In- 
dicative is : 

Pudro,  /  rot.  Podrimos,  we  rot. 

Pudres,  thou  rotted.  Podris,  you  rot. 

Pudre,  he  rots.  Pudren,  they  rot. 

and  the  Present  Participle  pndriendo,  rotting,  is  hardly  ever 
used  except  in  the  Infinitive  and  the  Past  Participle  podrido, 
rotten.     The  regular  verb  pudrir  has  taken  its  place  in  all  other 


THE   IMPERFECT   TENSE,   INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


199 


Leccion  XXXVI. 


Lesson  XXXVI. 


THE  IMPERFECT  TENSE,  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

The  Imperfect  Indicative  is  formed  by  adding  the  following 
terminations  to  the  radical  part  of  the  verbs  : 


For  the  1st  Conjugation  : 

For  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations 

-aba 

-ia 

-abas 

-las 

-aba 

-ia 

-abamos 

-iamos 

-abais 

-iais 

-aban 

-ian 

Note.  —  The  verbs  ser,  2.  to  he,  ver,  2.  to  see,  and  ir,  3.  to  go,  are  the 
only  verbs  that  form  an  exception  to  the  rule  which  refers  to  all  other 
regular  and  irregular  verbs. 

1st  Conjugation. 

Habl-aba,  I  spoke  ov  I  was  speaking, 

Habl-abas,  thou  spokest  or  tlwu  wast  speaking. 

Habl-aba,  he  spoke  or  he  was  speaking. 

Habl-abamos,  we  spoke  or  we  were  speaking. 

Habl-abais,  you  spoke  or  you  were  speaking. 

Habl-aban,  they  spoke  or  they  were  speaking. 

2d  Conjugation. 

Vend-ia,  I  sold  or  I  was  selling. 

Vend-ias,  thou  soldest  or  thou  wast  selling. 

Vend-ia,  he  sold  or  lie  was  selling. 

Vend-iamos,  we  sold  or  we  were  selling. 

Vend-iais,  you  sold  or  you  were  selling. 

Vend-ian,  they  sold  or  they  were  selling. 

Zd  Conjugation. 

Ven-ia,  /  came  or  /  was  coming. 

Ven-ias,  thou  earnest  or  thou  wast  coming. 

Ven-ia,  he  came  or  he  was  coming. 

Ven- iamos,  we  came  or  we  were  coming. 

Ven-iais,  you  came  or  you  were  coming. 

Ven-ian,  they  came  or  they  were  coming. 


200 


LESSON   Sa. 

Exceptions:. 

1.  Iba, 

I  went  or  /  wag  goingr. 

Ibas, 

thou  wentest  or  thou  ivast  going. 

Iba, 

he  weTU  or  he  was  gohig. 

Ibaraos, 

we;-  tvent  or  we  were  going. 

Ibais, 

you  went  or  you  were  going. 

Iban, 

iliey  went  o¥  they  were  going. 

2>  Veia, 

I  saw  or  I  was  seeing. 

Veias, 

tliou  sawest  or  tJiou  wast  seeing. 

Veia, 

he  saw  or  he  was  seeing. 

VeiainoSy 

we  saiu  or  we  were  seeing. 

Veiais, 

you  suw  or  you  were  seeing. 

Veian, 

they  saw  or  they  were  seeing. 

3.  Era, 

I  was. 

Eras, 

thou  wast. 

Era, 

he  was. 

Eramos, 

we  were. 

Erais, 

you  were. 

Eran, 

they  were. 

7"ocabulario. 

Vocabulary. 

El  enemigo,  the  enemy. 

El  escritorio,  the  office. 

El  modo,  the  way. 

El  negocio,  the  business. 

El  oso,  the  hear. 

El  paraguas,  the  wnhrella. 

El  tiempo,  the  time. 

La  elegaucia,  the  elegance. 


La  fortaleza,  the  fortress. 
La  limonada,  the  lemonade. 
La  luz,  the  light. 
La  puerta,  the  door. 
Caro,  dear. 
Dife rente,  different: 
Creer,  2.  to  believe. 
Entrar,  1.  to  enter. 


Gas  tar,  1.  to  spend. 
Llamar,  1.  to  call. 
Lie  gar,  1.  to  arrive. 
Mandar,  1.  to  send. 
Mirar,  1.  to  look  at. 
Ocupar,  1.  to  occupy. 
Tocar,  1.  to  play  on. 
Vestir,  3.  to  dress. 


Exercise  71. 

1.  Yo  sabia  que  su  bermano  de  V.  estaba  malo  la  semana  pasada, 
pero  yo  creia  que  el  estaba  bueno  ahora.  2.  i  Estaba  V.  en  Francia 
en  aquel  tiempo  1  3.  Si,  senor,  yo  estaba  alii  desde  dos  anos.  4.  i  Que 
bacia  V.  entonces  ?  5.  Yo  estudiaba  para  ser  medico.  6.  i  Como 
estaban  vestidas  las  dos  seiioras  ?  7.  Estaban  vestidas  con  niucba 
elegancia.  8.  Yo  no  sabia  lo  que  querian  estos  bombres.  9.  Querian 
entrar  en  la  casa  para  robar.  10.  Hablabamos  muy  bien  el  frances 
cuando  eramos  jovenes.     11.  ^  Que  bacia  su  hermano  de  V.  cuando 


(  UNIV-KSITY 

IMPERFECT  TE^^,  JNDI^^ATiyjgMOOD.  201 

estaba  en  Inglaterra  ?  12.  No  hacia  nada,  pero  gastaba  mucho  dinero. 
13.  I  Cuanto  recibia  j)or  mes  ?  14.  Mi  padre  le  mandaba  doscientos 
pesos  todos  los  meses.     15.  ^  Que  estaban  V.  V.  mirando  en  la  calle  1 

16.  Estabamos   mirando   a   un   hombre   que    hacia    bailar   un   oso. 

17.  i  Que  le  decia  aquella  sefiora  a  V.?  18.  Me  decia  que  esperaba  a 
su  marido  y  a  sus  hijos  esta  noche.  19.  [  A  quien  conocian  V.  V.  en 
aquella  ciudad  ?  20.  No  conociamos  a  nadie.  21.  i  Que  querian 
estos  caballeros  ?  22.  Querian  verle  a  V.  23.  Juan  queria  comprar 
mi  caballito,  pero  no  tenia  bastante  dinero.  24.  [  A  que  hora  iba  V. 
a  casa  del  medico  1  25.  Yo  iba  todas  las  mananas  a  las  diez  y  media. 
26.  I  A  quien  veia  V.  en  su  casa  ?  27.  Yo  veia  a  su  seiiora  y  a  sus 
hijos.  28.  I  Que  vendia  aquella  mujer  ?  29.  Ella  vendia  muy  buenas 
peras.  30.  i  A  quien  daba  V.  todo  su  dinero  ?  31.  Yo  no  lo  daba  a 
nadie,  yo  lo  prestaba  a  mi  primo  que  hacia  muy  buenos  negocios. 

32.  Nuestros  soldados   ocupaban  todas  las  fortalezas  del  enemigo. 

33.  [  A  que  hora  almorzaban  V.  Y.  ?  34.  Almorzabamos  muy  tem- 
prano,  pero  comiamos  muy  tarde. 

Exercise  7 2, 

1.  Who  was  the  man  at  the  door  ?  2.  It  was  not  a  man,  it  was  a 
little  boy.  3.  What  did  he  want  ?  4.  He  wished  to  know  if  Mr. 
Charles  Marti  lived  in  this  house,  as  (pues)  he  had  a  letter  for  him. 
5.  Was  not  the  gentleman  in  his  room  ?  6.  He  was  there  this  morn- 
ing, but  he  has  gone  out.  7.  Did  you  not  know  that  my  brother  had 
arrived  ?  8.  I  did  not  know  it,  9.  Were  you  acquainted  with  Mr. 
Arroyo  ?  10.  I  knew  him  very  well  when  he  was  young.  11.  He 
was  very  poor  then,  but  now  he  is  very  rich.  12.  Why  did  you  not 
wish  to  buy  that  house  ?  13.  Because  it  was  too  dear,  and  I  had  not 
money  enough.  14.  With  whom  were  you  in  Paris  1  15.  I  was 
there  with  my  mother  and  sisters.  16.  Do  you  know  what  Charles 
was  telling  me  ?  17.  I  could  see  that  he  was  speaking  to  you,  but  I 
could  not  hear  a  word.  18.  He  was  telling  me  that  he  knew  who 
had  stolen  your  umbrella.  19.  Where  were  you  going  this  morning  ? 
20.  I  was  going  to  my  office  ;  I  go  there  now  very  early.  21.  To 
whom  were  you  writing  this  morning  ?  22.  I  was  writing  to  all  my 
friends.  23.  Could  you  see  any  one  in  the  house  ?  24.  I  could  see 
no  one,  because  there  was  no  light  in  the  room.  25.  Who  was  play- 
ing on  the  piano  ?  26.  My  sisters  were  playing,  and  my  brothers 
were  singing.     27.  Where  were  you  when  I  was  calling  you  ?     28.  I 


202  LESSON   36. 

was  in  the  garden  with  the  children.  29.  My  friend  used  to  come 
every  day,  but  I  don't  know  where  he  is  now.  30.  What  did  you 
drink  when  you  were  sick  ]    31.  I  drank  lemonade. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  use  of  the  Imperfect^  Past  Definite,  and  Past  Indefi- 
nite, which  in  many  cases  would  have  but  one  form  in  English, 
presents  one  of  the  greatest  difficulties  met  by  those  learning  the 
Spanish  language.  The  following  rules  are  calculated  to  facili- 
tate the  task  of  the  student.  Practice,  reading,  and  reasoning 
must  also  be  depended  upon  as  the  best  auxiliaries  for  the  correct 
use  of  the  Imperfect  Tense. 

1.  The  Imperfect  is  used  to  express  an  action  or  event  which 
has  already  occurred,  but  which  was  existing  or  going  on  when 
another  action  or  event  took  place : 

El  estudiaha  ciiaiido  entraron,         He  was  studying  when  they  entered. 

2.  This  Tense  is  also  used  to  express  what  was  customary  or 
habitual  at  a  certain  past  time,  and  in  that  case  may  generally  be 
rendered  in  English  by  prefixing  "  used  to "  to  the  Infinitive 
Mood,  as  : 

Cuando  viviamos  en  el  campo,  estu-         When  we  lived  (used  to  live)  in  the 
diabamos  mucho,  country  we  studied  (used  to  study) 

much. 
Observation.  —  We  should  not  use  the  Imperfect,  however,  in  speaking 

of  an  accidental  occurrence : 

Sin  embargo,  una  vez,  jugamos  todo         Once,  however,  we  played  the  whole 
el  dia,  day. 

3.  The  Imperfect  is  also  used  to  describe  the  qualities  of  per- 
sons or  things,  and  the  state,  place,  or  disposition  in  which  they 
were  in  past  time. 

This  Tense  may,  therefore,  be  called  the  Descriptive  Tense  of 
Spanish  : 
Las  muchachas  estaban  vestidas  de         The  girls  were  dressed  in  white,  and 

bianco,  y  tenian  flores  en  los  ca-  had  fiowers  in  their  hair. 

bellos, 


THE   PAST   DEFINITE   AND   INDEFINITE. 


203 


leccion  XXXVII. 


lesson  XXXVII. 


THE  PAST  DEFINITE  OR  PRETERITE,  AND  THE  PAST  INDEFINITE. 

1.    The  terminations  of  the  Past  Definite  are  the  following 
for  most  verbs  : 


For  the  1st  Conjugation. 

For  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations. 

-6 

-i 

-aste 

-iste 

-d 

-16 

-amos 

-imos 

-asteis 

-isteis 

-aron 

-idron 

Is^  Conjugation, 

Hablar,  to  speak. 
Habl-^,  /  spoke  or  I  did  speak. 

Habl-aste,  thou  spokest  or  thou  didst  speak. 

Habl-d,  he  spoke  or  he  did  speak. 

Habl-amos,  we  spoke  or  we  did  speak. 

Habl-asteis,         you  spoke  or  you  did  speak. 
Habl-aron,  they  spoke  or  they  did  speak. 

Amar,  to  love. 

Am-^,  /  loved  or  I  did  love. 

Am-aste,  thou  lovedst  or  thou  didst  love. 

Am-d,  he  loved  ot  he  did  love. 

Am-amos,  we  loved  or  we  did  love. 

Am-asteis,  you  loved  or  you  did  love. 

Am-aron,  they  loved  or  they  did  love. 


2d  Conjugation. 

Vender,  to  sell. 
Vend-i,  /  sold  or  /  did  sell. 

Vend-iste,  thou  soldest  or  thou  didst  sell, 

Yend-i6,  he  sold  or  he  did  sell. 

Vend-imos,  we  sold  or  we  did  sell. 

Yend-isteis,         you  sold  or  yoic  did  sell. 
Vend-ieron,         they  sold  or  they  did  sell. 


204 


LESSON    37. 


Com-i, 

Com-iste, 

CoQi-id, 

Com-imos,  - 

Com-isteis, 

Com-ieron, 


Comer,  to  eat. 
I  ate  or  /  did  eat. 
thou  atest  or  thou  didst  eat. 
he  ate  or  he  did  eat. 
we  ate  or  we  did  eaZ. 
you  ate  or  you  did  eat. 
they  ate  or  tluy  did  cat. 


3d  Conjugation. 
Becibir,  to  receive. 
Recib-i,  /  received  or  /  did  receive. 

Kecib-iste,  thou  receivedst  or  thou  didst  receive. 

Recib-io,  he  received  or  he  did  receive. 

Recib-imos,         we  received  or  we  did  receive. 
Recib-isteis,        you  received  or  you  did  receive. 
Recib-ieron,        they  received  or  they  did  receive. 

Salir,  to  go  out. 

Sal-if  /  went  out  or  /  did  go  out. 

Sal-is te,  thou  weiitest  out  or  thou  didst  go  out. 

Sal-i6,  he  went  out  or  he  did  go  out. 

Sal-imos,  we  went  out  or  we  did  go  out. 

Sal-isteis,  you  ivent  out  or  you  did  go  out. 

Sal-ieron,  they  went  out  or  they  did  go. out. 


He  hablado  —  vendido  —  recibido, 
etc. 

Has  hablado  —  vendido  —  recibido, 
etc., 

Ha  hablado  —  vendido  —  recibido, 
etc. 

Hem  OS  hablado  —  vendido  —  recib- 
ido, etc., 

Habeis  hablado  —  vendido  —  recib- 
ido, etc., 

Han  hablado —  vendido  —  recibido, 
etc.. 


Past  Indefinite. 

I  have  spoTcen  —  sold  —  received^  etc. 


thou  hast  spohen  —  sold  —  received, 

etc. 
he  has  spohen  —  sold  —  received,  etc. 

we  have  spoken  —  sold  —  received, 

etc. 
you  have  spoken  —  sold  —  received, 

etc.\ 
they  have  spoken  —  sold — received, 

etc. 


THE  PAST  DEFINITE  AND   INDEFINITE. 


205 


Vocabulario. 
El  bosque,  tlie  ivood. 
El  embajador,  the  ambassador. 
El  enemigo,  the  enemy. 
El  ladron,  the  thief. 
El  lugar,  the  place. 
El  veneno,  the  poison. 
La  deuda,  the  debt. 
La  fonda,  the  hotel. 
La  posteridad,  the  posterity. 
Cansado,  tired. 
Colon,  Columbus. 
Dios,  m   God. 
Romano,  Roman. 
Abrir,  3.  to  open. 
Aconsejar,  1.  to  advise. 


Vocabulary. 
Andar,  1.  to  walk. 
Asegurar,  1.  to  assure. 
Comprender,  2.  to  understand. 
Derrotar,  1.  to  defeat. 
Entrar,  1.  to  enter. 
Esperar,  1.  to  expect. 
Ofrecer,  2;  to  offer. 
Pelear,  1.  to  fight. 
Perder,  2.  to  lose. 
Preguntar,  1.  to  ask. 
Presentar,  1.  to  introduce. 
Prometer,  2.  to  j^romise. 
Responder,  2.  to  answer. 
Salir,  3.  to  leave,  to  go  out. 
Veneer,  2.  to  conquer. 


Exercise  73. 

1.  Don  Juan  me  pregunto  si  V.  estaba  en  su  cuarto  ?  2.  ^  Y  que 
respondio  V.  1  3.  Eespondi  que  yo  no  sabia,  pero  que  el  podia  subir 
a  ver.  4.  El  general  presento  los  oficiales  al  principe.  5.  Mi  padre 
vendio  su  casa  al  tio  de  V.  6.  i  Sabe  V.  lo  que  pago  por  ella  1 
7.  Pago  mucho  menos  de  lo  que  valia.  8.  i  Cuanto  dinero  recibieron 
V.  V.  ?  9.  Recibimos  como  trescientos  pesos.  10.  Dios  prometio  a 
Abrahan  una  grande  posteridad.  11.  i  Cofioce  V.  a  este  caballero  1 
12.  Le  he  conocido  en  Paris.  13.  [  Cuando  vio  V.  a  Carlito  ?  14.  Le 
vi  el  mes  pasado  en  Boston  donde  estaba  con  su  padre.  15.  [  A  que 
hora  comieron  Y.  Y.  ayer  ?  16.  Comimos  a  la  misma  hora  que  los 
otros  dias.  17.  [Con  quien  hablo  Y.  en  el  escritorio  ?  18.  liable 
con  el  dependiente  del  banquero.  19.  [  Han  escrito  Y.  Y.  sus  cartas  ? 
20.  Las  escribimos  anoche  ;  sabe  Y.  si  ha  salido  el  vapor  ?  21.  Salio 
ayer  a  las  cuatro  de  la  tarde.  22.  [  Quien  bebio  el  vino  1  23.  Yo  no 
se  quien  bebio  el  vino,  pero  se  muy  bien  quien  comio  los  hollos. 

24.  Los  enemigos  perdieron  diez  mil  hombres  en  aquella  batalla. 

25.  Jose  {Joseph)  me  aseguro  que  el  habia  pagado  todas  sus  deudas, 
pero  yo  le  respond!  que  no  lo  creia.  26.  Cuando  Anibal  vio  a  los 
embaj adores  romanos,  tomo  veneno.  27.  El  enfermo  queria  salir  esta 
maiiana,  pero  yo  le  aconseje  de  no  hacerlo.  28.  Los  muchachos 
abrieron  la  puerta  del  jardin  y  entraron  en  el.  29.  Colon  descubrio 
la  America  en  el  aiio  1492.     30.  El  pobre  Felipe  perdio  todo  su  dinero 


206  LESSON   37. 

en  aquella  especulacion.  31.  Los  ladrones  entraron  en  aquella  casa 
y  robaron  todo  lo  que  hallaron.  32.  Trabajamos  muchisimo  hoy,  y 
estamos  muy  cansados.  33.  i  A  quien  vieron  V.  V.  en  el  teatro  ? 
34.  Vimos  d  todos  nuestros  amigos.  35.  Los  Romanos  vencieron  a 
todas  las  naciones  del  mundo. 

Exercise  14:. 

1.  Why  did  you  not  write  to  your  brother?  2.  I  wrote  to  him, 
but  he  did  not  answer  me.  3.  Did  you  see  Mr.  Martin  ?  4.  I  did 
not  see  him,  I  was  not  in  the  city  when  he  was  here.  5.  The  general 
lost  the  battle,  but  his  soldiers  fought  with  much  courage.  6.  Have 
you  studied  your  lessons  ?  7.  We  studied  them  last  night.  8.  Did 
you  go  out  with  your  sister  when  she  w^as  here  ?  9.  We  went  out 
every  day.  10.  Who  took  my  book  1  11.  Nobody  took  it,  it  is  in 
the  same  place  yet.  12.  Did  you  receive  what  you  were  expecting  ? 
13.  We  have  not  received  anything  yet.  14.  Did  you  understand 
that  man  ?  15.  I  understood  everything,  although  he  spoke  French. 
16.  Did  you  ever  study  French  ?  17.  I  spoke  it  very  well  when  I 
was  younger.  18.  Did  your  brother  sell  his  horses  ?  19.  He  sold 
two  of  them,  and  he  sent  the  other  to  the  country.  20.  Why  did  he 
not  lend  it  to  you  ?  21.  Because  I  have  a  horse  myself.  22.  Why 
did  not  your  sister  dance  at  the  ball  ?  23.  Because  she  was  not  very 
well,  and  she  only  stayed  (se  quedo)  half  an  hour.  24.  Does  she  know 
how  to  dance  ?  25.  She  learned  all  the  new  dances  during  the  win- 
ter. 26.  The  thieves  killed  a  poor  man  in  the  forest.  27.  Our 
soldiers  defeated  the  enemy  and  took  their  principal  cities.  28.  That 
little  boy  ate  too  much  last  night  ;  and  to-day  he  is  sick.  29.  My 
brother  saw  your  mother  when  he  was  in  England  ;  did  she  reside 
a  long  time  in  that  country  1  30.  She  resided  there  for  two  years. 
31 .  The  man  killed  the  dog  because  he  bit  his  little  boy.  32.  Where 
did  you  breakfast  this  morning  1  33.  I  breakfasted  in  the  French 
hotel  where  you  saw  me  last  week.  34.  Did  you  drink  anything  at 
his  house  ?     35.  He  did  not  offer  us  anything. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

!•  The  Fast  Definite  or  Preterite  and  the  Past  Indefinite  are 
used  in  all  those  cases  of  past  time  where  the  Imperfect  cannot 


THE   PAST   DEHNITE   AND    INDEFINITE.  207 

be  used.  The  Preterite,  however,  is  used  more  especially  to  ex- 
press an  action  which  took  place  hut  once,  and  when  the  time  at 
which  the  action  took  place  has  entirely  elapsed. 

The  Preterite  is,  therefore,  especially  used  in  narrative  style, 
and  is  also  designated  as  the  Preterito  historico  : 
Pedro  el  Cruel  no  respeto  las  leyes,         Peter  the  Cruel  did  not  respect  the 

J  se  porto  mal  con  sus  aliados.         •        laws,  and  acted  wrongly  towards 

his  allies. 

2.    The  Preterite  may,  however,  be  used  when  there  is  con- 
tinuation of  time ;  but,  in  this  case,  the  action  must  have  taken 
place  at  a  remote  period,  and  the  time  must  be  designated  : 
llorna  fue  por  mas  de  dos  siglos  la        lio^ne  was  for  niore  than  two  centu- 

senora  del  orbe,  ries  the  mistress  of  the  world. 

3«  The  same  tense  is  also  very  often  used  to  express  cus- 
tomary and  repeated  actions  or  qualities,  when  it  is  intended 
to  express  the  time  rather  than  the  action.     When  we  say  : 

Napoleon  era  {iinperf.)  gran  guerrero,         Napoleon  was  a  great  warrior , 
we  express  the  quality,  but  when  we  say : 

Napoleon  fue  {preterite)  gran  guerrero, 
we  think  of  the  time  in  which  he  was  living. 

4,  The  Preterite  may  be  rendered  in  English  according  to 
the  meaning  of  the  sentence  by  its  corresponding  form,  or  by  the 
auxiliary  did  which  has  no  equivalent  in  Spanish  : 

Comimos  a3^er  en  su  casa,  We  dined  yesterday  at  his  house. 

No  sail  anoche,  /  did  not  go  out  last  night. 

5t  The  Past  Indefinite  is  also  used  to  express  a  past  action 
when  the  time  at  which  it  took  place  belongs  to  a  period  of  time 
(day,  week,  month,  year,  etc.)  not  entirely  elapsed  : 

Hoy  he  estado  en  la  iglesia,  /  have  been  to  church  to-day. 

No  he  ido  al  teatro  este  aho,  /  have  not  been  to  the  theater  this  year. 

6«  The  Past  Indefinite  is  also  used  to  express  an  action  but 
lately  performed  : 

He  leido  los  papeles,        /  have  read  the  papers. 


208  LESSON  37. 

It  is  furthermore  used  to  express  the  successes  or  merits  of  a " 
person  when  we  wish  to  give  more  expression  to  the  sentence  : 

Napoleon  ha  conquistado  en  poco        Napoleon  {has)  conquered  in  a  short 
tierapo  Itaha  y  Aleraania,  time  Italy  and  Germany. 

7.   General  Obse7'vat{ons  on  the  Imperfect,    Preterite,   and  Past 
Indefinite. 

The  Imperfect  can  seldom,  be  rendered  in  EngUsh  by  the  past  tense  which 
takes  did  as  an  auxihary  except,  when  in  interrogative  sentences,  did  is 
used  as  an  auxiliary  to  used  to,  either  expressed  or  understood. 

The  Preterite  never  corresponds  like  the  Imperfect  to  the  English  Imper- 
fect, composed  of  the  auxiliary  and  the  Present  Participle,  nor  can  it  be 
rendered  by  a  verb  preceded  by  used  to. 

The  three  Tenses  above  mentioned  offer  in  their  application  a  certain 
difficulty,  as  they  are  sometimes  obligatory,  and  sometimes  optional ;  or,  in 
other  words,  their  use  is  sometimes  a  question  of  grammar,  and  sometimes 
only  a  qusstion  of  style. 

When  several  sentences  concur  to  the  same  end,  as  in  the  following  nar- 
rative, it  is  not  always  an  easy  matter  to  determine  whether  the  student 
should  use  the  Imperfect  or  another  Tense,  ^the  Preterite  for  instance,  as  he 
has  to  take  into  consideration  not  only  the  special  shade  of  meaning  of  each 
verb,  but  also  the  general  tenor  of  the  other  sentences  forming  the  whole  of  the 
narration.  As  already  stated,  the  Imperfect  is  used  as  a  descriptive  tense, 
while  the  Preterite  is  only  used  as  a  iiarrativfi..,tense.    ^  ^ 

All  the  Imperfects  of  the  following  Spanish  translation  are  printed  in 

italics. 

Era  poco  mas  de  mediodia  cuando     It  was  a  little  over  mid-day  ichen 

entraron  los  Espaftoles  en  su  alo-  the  Spaniards  entered  their  lodg- 

jamiento,  y  hallaron  prevenido  un  ings,   and  found  a  delicate  and 

banquete    regalado    y   esplendido  splendid     banquet    prepared    for 

para   Gortes    y  los    cabos   de   su  Cortes  and    the    captains    of  his 

ejercito,   con    grande   abundancia  army,    and  at   the  same   time  a 

de  bastimentos   menos    delicados  g^^eat  abundance   of  less    delicati 

para  el  resto  de  la  gente,  y  mu-  provisions  for  the  remainder  of 

chos   Indios   de   servicio   que  su-  the  people,   while   many  Indians, 

ministraban  los    manjares   y  las  attending  to  the  service,  brought  in 

bebidas  con  igual  silencio  y  pun-  the    eatables    and   beverages  with 

tualidad.     Por  la  tarde  vino  Mo-  equal    silence    and    punctuality. 


IRREGULARITIES   OF  THE   PRETERITE. 


209 


tezuma  con  la  misma  pompa  y 
acompanamiento,  a  visitar  a 
Cortes,  que,  avisado  poco  antes, 
salio  a  recibirle  hasta  el  patio 
principal,  con  todo  el  obsequio 
debido  a  semejante  favor.  Acom- 
panole  hasta  la  puerta  de  su  cuar- 
to,  donde  le  hizo  una  profunda 
reverencia,  y  el  paso  a  tomar  su 
asiento  con  despejo  y  gravedad. 
Mando  luego  que  acercasen  otro  a 
Cortes  :  hizo  sena  para  que  se 
apartasen  a  la  pared  los  caballeros 
que  andaban  cerca  de  su  persona, 
y  Cortes  advirtio  lo  mismo  a  los 
capitanes  que  le  asistian. 


Llegaron  los  interpretes,  y  cuando 
se  prevenia  Cortes  pa,ra  dar  prin- 
cipio  a  su  oracion,  le  detuvo  Mote- 
zurna,  dando  a  entender  que  tenia 
que  hablar  antes  de  oir,  y  se  refiere 
que  discurrio  en  esta  sustancia  : 


Montezuma  came  m  the  afternoon 
with  the  same  pomp  and  retinue 
to  visit  Cortes,  and  the  latter  hav- 
ing been  informed  of  this  some  time 
before,  came  out  to  receive  him  as 
far  as  the  principal  court,  with  all 
the  courtesy  due  to  such  a  favor. 
Cortes  accompanied  him  as  far 
OS  the  door  of  his  room,  where  he 
made  a  deep  bow  to  him,  and 
Mmitezuma  passed  on  and  took  his 
seat  with  ease  and  gravity.  He 
then  ordered  tlmt  they  should  bring 
forward  another  seat  for  Cortes, 
and  made  a  sign  to  the  nobles  who 
icalked  near  his  person  to  with- 
draw as  far  as  tlw  wall,  ivhile 
Cortes  did  the  same  to  the  ca.ptains 
who  followed  him. 
The  interpreters  then  arrived,  and  as 
Cortes  teas  preparing  to  commence 
his  discourse,  Montezuma  stopped 
him,  giving  him  to  understand 
that  he  had  to  speak  before  he 
would  listen,  and  it  is  related  tlmt 
he  spoke  thus : 


Leccion  XXXTIII. 


Lesson  XXXYIII. 


IRREGULARITIES  OF  THE  PRETERITE. 


1.  Tener,  2.  to  have. 
Tuve,  /  had  {did  have), 
Tuviste,  thou  hadst. 
Tuvo,  he  had. 
Tuvimos,  we  had. 
Tuvisteis,  you  had. 
Tuvieron,  they  had. 
\i 


2.  Estar,  1.  to  be. 
Estuve,  I  was. 
Estuviste,  thou  wa^t. 
Estuvo,  he  was. 
Estuvimos,  we  were. 
Estuvisteis,  you  were. 
Estuvieron,  they  were. 


210 


LESSON  38. 


8.  Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do, 
Hize,  /  made  or  /  did  make. 
Hiciste,  thoic  madest, 
Hizo,  he  made. 
Hicimos,  we  made. 
Hicisteis,  you  made. 
Hicieron,  they  tnade. 


4.  Querer,  2.  to  wish,  to  he  willing. 
Quise,  /  wished  or  /  did  ivish. 
Quisiste,  thou  wished. 
Quiso,  he  wished. 
Quisimos,  we  wished. 
Quisisteis,  yoio  wished. 
Quisieron,  they  wished. 


6.  Poder,  2.  to  he  ahle. 
Pude,  /  was  ahle  or  /  could. 
Pudiste,  thou  wast  ahle. 
Pudo,  he  ivas  able. 
Pudiinos,  we  were  ahle. 
Pudisteis,  you  were  ahle. 
Pudieron,  they  were  ahle. 


6.  Poller,  2.  to  put. 
Piise,  I  put  or  /  did  put. 
Pusiste,  thou  didst  put. 
Puso,  he  put. 
Pusimos,  we  put. 
Pusiste  is,  you  2^ut. 
Pusieroii,  they  put. 


7.  Saber,  2.  to  know. 
Supe,  /  knew  or  /  did  know. 
Supiste,  thou  didst  know. 
Supo,  he  knew. 
Supinios,  loe  knew. 
Supisteis,  you  knevj. 
Supieron,  they  knew. 


8.  Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell. 
Dije,  /  said  or  /  did  say. 
Dijiste,  thou  saidst. 
Dijo,  lie  said. 
Diji'mos,  we  said. 
Dijisteis,  you  said. 
Dijerou,  they  said. 


9.  Haber,  2.  to  have  (auxiliary  and 

impersonal). 
Hube,  I  had  {did  have). 
Hubiste,  thou  hadst. 
Hubo,  he  had. 
Hubimos,  we  had. 
Hubisteis,  you  had. 
Hubieron,  they  had. 


10.  Andar,  1,  to  vmlk. 
Anduve,  /  walked  or  /  did  walk. 
Anduviste,  thou  didst  walk. 
Anduvo,  he  walked. 
Anduvimos,  we  walked. 
Anduvisteis,  you  walked. 
Anduvieron,  tliey  walked. 


11.  Caber,  2.  to  he  contained. 
Cupe,  /  ivas  contained. 
Cupiste,  thou  wast  contained. 
Cupo,  M  was  contained. 
Cupimos,  we  were  contained. 
Cupisteis,  you  were  contained. 
Cupieron,  they  were  coTitained. 


12.  Traer,  2.  to  hring. 
Traje,  /  brought  or  /  did  hring. 
Trajiste,  thou  didst  hring. 
Trajo,  he  brought. 
Trajinios,  we  brought. 
Trajisteis,  you  brought. 
Trajeron,  they  brought. 


IRREGULARITIES   OF  THE   PRETERITE. 


211 


13.  Conducir,  3.  to  conduct,  to  take. 
Condiije,  I  conducted  or  /  did  condioct. 
Condujiste,  thou  didst  conduct. 
Condujo,  lie  conducted. 
Condujimos,  ive  conducted. 
Condujisteis,  you  conducted. 
CondujeroD,  they  conducted. 


14.  Venir,  3.  to  come. 
Vine,  /  ca7)u  or  /  did  coine, 
Viniste,  thou  earnest. 
Vino,  he  came. 
Vinimos,  we  cams. 
Vinisteis,  you  came, 
Vinieron,  tJiey  cajne. 


XL 


1.  Dar,  1.  to  give, 
Di,  I  gave. 
Diste,  thou  gavest, 
Dio,  lie  gave. 
Dimos,  we  gave. 
Disteis,  you  gave. 
Dieron,  they  gave. 


2.  Ser,  2.  to  he,  and  Ir,  to  go. 

Fui,  /  wa^  ;  I  went  or  /  did  go. 
Fuiste,  tliou  wast ;  thou  wcntest. 
Fue,  he  was ;  lie  went. 
Fuimos,  we  were ;  we  went. 
Fuisteis,  you  were  ;  you  went. 
Fueron,  they  were  ;  they  went. 


in. 


1.  Sentir,  3.  to  feel. 
Senti,  I  felt  or  I  did  feel, 
Sentiste,  thou  feltest. 
Sintio,  he  felt. 
Sentimos,  we  felt. 
Sentisteis,  you  felt. 
Sintieron,  they  felt. 


2.  Pedir,  3.  to  ask  for. 
Pedi,  /  asked  or  /  did.  ask  for, 
Pediste,  thou  didst  ask  for. 
Pidio,  he  asked  for. 
Pedimos,  we  asked  for. 
Pedisteis,  you  asked  for. 
Pidieron,  tliey  asked  for. 


3.  Dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 
Dormi,  I  slept. 
Dormiste,  thou  didst  sleep, 
Dunnio,  he  slept. 
Dorminios,  we  slept. 
Dormisteis,  you  slept. 
Duniiieron,  they  slept. 


4.  Morir,  3.  to  die. 
Mori,  I  died  or  I  did  die. 
Moriste,  thou  diedst. 
Murio,  he  died. 
Morimos,  we  died. 
Moristeis,  you  died. 
Murieron,  they  died. 


212 


LESSON   38. 


Vocabulario. 
El  Arabe,  the  Arab. 
El  cartero,  the  postman. 
El  cielo,  the  heaven. 
El  huracan,  the  hurricane. 
El  instante,  the  instant. 
El  Bomano,  the  Roman, 
La  muerte,  the  death. 
La  nacion,  the  nation. 
Afuera,  out. 
A  pie,  on  foot. 
Cansado,  tired. 
Despues,  afterwards,  then. 
Dios,  m.  God. 
En  soguida,  immediately. 
Galileo,  Galileo. 


Vocabulary. 
Hasta,  till,  until,  as  far  as. 
Indomable,  i7idmnitdble. 
Mismo,  very,  self 
Ocupado,  busy. 
Romulo,  Romulus. 
Asolar,  1.  to  devastate. 
Caar,  2.  to  fall. 
Consolar,  1.  to  comfort. 
Dejar,  1.  to  leave. 
Derribar,  1.  to  upset. 
Echar  (1.)  a  pique,  to  founder. 
Nacer,  2.  to  be  born. 
Presentar,  1.  to  present. 
Sontir,  3.  to  feel,  to  regret. 
Someter,  2.  to  subdue. 


Exercise  75. 

1.  [  Donde  estuvo  V.  esta  maiiana  ?  2.  Estuve  todo  el  tiempo  en 
mi  cuarto.  3  i  Diirmio  bien  el  enfermo  1  4.  Durmio  hasta  las  cinco 
esta  manana,  y  despues  estuvo  mejor.  6.  En  el  ano  de  1846  liubo  en 
la  Habana  un  terrible  huracan  que  echo  a  pique  muchos  barcos,  derribo 
casas  y  asolo  muchas  haciendas.  6.  Mi  ainigo  vino  con  nosotros  hasta 
la  puerta,  pero  no  quiso  entrar.  7.  Tuvimos  muy  buen  tiempo  en 
nuestro  viaje.  8.  i  Porque  no  hablo  Y.  con  mi  padre  ?  9.  No  pude 
hablarle,  estaba  tan  ocupado  que  me  dijo  de  {to)  volver  esta  tarde. 
10.  [  Supieron  V.  Y.  sus  lecciones  hoy?  11.  Las  supimos  muy  bien. 
12.  [  Quien  le  dio  a  Y.  tanto  dinero  ?  13.  Pedi  cien  pesos  a  mi  padre, 
y  otros  cien  pesos  d  mi  tio,  y  me  los  dieron  en  seguida.  14.  [  Sabe 
Y.  donde  puse  mi  baston  ?  15.  Y.  lo  ha  dejado  en  el  otro  cuarto. 
16.  [  Quieii  trajo  esto  aqui  ?  17.  Nose,  pero  creo  que  es  el  hombre 
que  vino  anoche.  18.  [  Ha  venido  el  cartero  ?  19.  En  este  mismo 
instante  ;  ahi  tiene  Y.  las  cartas.  20.  [  Quien  fue  el  primer  re}^  de 
Roma  ?  21.  Eomulo  fue  el  primero.  22.  i  Creyo  Y.  esto  ]  23.  Si,  lo 
crei,  y  todo  el  mundo  lo  creyo  tambien.  24.  El  general  murio  en  la 
batalla.  25.  [  Estuvo  Y.  ajioche  en  el  teatro  ?  26.  No,  seiior  ;  estuve 
en  el  concierto.  27.  Los  hermanos  Rodriguez  estuvieron  aqui  ayer, 
sentimos  muchisimo  haber  Qiaving)  estado  afuera.  28.  i  Oyo  Y.  lo 
que  dijo  este  hombre  ?  29.  Oi  todo  lo  que  dijo.  30.  El  caballero 
que  vino  ayer  estd  todavia  durmiendo  ;  nos  dijo  cj^ue  venia  muy  can- 


IRREGULARITIES    OF   THE   PRETERITE.  213 

sado  del  viaje.  31.  Newton  nacio  en  el  mismo  aiio  en  que  murio 
Galileo.  32.  Porque  no  quiso  V.  ir  al  parque  con  los  otros  cabal- 
leros  ?  33.  Porque  no  quisieron  ir  a  pie.  34.  Mi  padre  vivio  en  este 
pais  cuando  tenia  veinte  anos.  35.  El  banquero  dio  un  baile  la 
semana  pasada. 

Exercise  76. 

1.  What  did  that  man  tell  you  ?  2.  He  told  me  that  he  had  no 
money,  and  that  he  could  not  pay  you.  3.  The  Arabs  were  always 
an  indomitable  nation  ;  the  Romans  themselves  could  not  subdue 
them.  4.  Louis  XIV.  was  a  great  king.  5.  He  read  the  letter  and 
gave  it  to  his  lather.  6.  The  general  presented  his  sons  to  the  king. 
7.  They  gave  all  their  money  to  the  poor.  8.  My  brother  went  first 
to  France  and  then  to  England.  9.  The  rain  fell  for  (durante)  three 
days.  10.  He  brought  a  great  deal  of  money,  and  bought  many  things 
for  his  friends.  11.  He  took  his  friend  by  the  hand  and  presented 
him  to  his  father.  12.  God  made  the  heaven  and  the  earth.  13.  We 
had  very  bad  weather  in  the  country.  14.  He  put  the  money  on  the 
table  and  went  out.  15.  Several  generals  died  in  that  battle.  16.  We 
felt  the  cold  more  this  year  than  last  year.  17.  What  did  your  sister 
do  when  she  heard  of  the  death  of  her  best  friend  ?  18.  She  wept  a 
great  deal,  and  we  could  not  comfort  her.  19.  The  children  went  to 
the  park  with  their  father.  20.  We  could  not  do  that,  and  nobody 
in  the  house  could  do  it.  21.  Why  could  you  not  write  to  him  ? 
22.  Because  I  did  not  know  what  to  write.  23.  The  boy  came  and 
brought  this  letter  for  you.  24.  My  father  gave  us  money  and  we 
went  to  the  theater.  25.  Why  did  you  not  come  earlier  ?  26.  We 
could  not  come  because  we  were  very  busy.  27.  What  did  you  do  in 
the  city  ?  28.  We  bought  all  the  things  that  we  needed.  29.  Napo- 
leon was  a  great  general.     30.   Did  you  ask  him  for  the  money  ? 

31.  I  only  asked  him  for  twenty  dollars,  and  he  gave  them  to  me. 

32.  We  were  very  well  received  by  your  family. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  As  seen  above,  the  verbs  tener,  2.  to  have;  estar,  1.  to  he ; 
hacer,  2.  to  make^  to  do ;  querer,  2.  to  wish,  to  he  'willing ;  poder, 
2.  to  he  ahle;  ponor,  2.  to  put;  sabcr,  2.  to  know;  decir,  3.  to  say; 
to  tell ;  haber,  2.  to  have  (auxiliary  and  impersonal)  ;  andar,  1.  to 


214  LESSON  38. 

walk;  caber,  2.  to  he  contained;  traer,  2.  to  bring;  conducir,  3.  to 
conduct,  to  take  ;  and  venir,  3.  to  come ;  have  the  same  termina- 
tions for  the  Preterite,  namely  : 

-e        -iste        -0        -imos        -isteis        -i^ron, 
having  a  sort  of  regularity  among  themselves  in  this  Tense. 

2«    The  verb  dar,   1.  to  give,  unlike  the  other  verbs  of  the 
1st  conjugation  takes,  for  the  Preterite,  the  terminations  of  the 
regular  verbs  of  the  2d  and  3d  conjugations,  namely  : 
-i        -iste        -16        -imos        -isteis        -ieron. 

3*  The  verbs  ser,  2.  to  he,  and  ir,  3.  to  go,  as  shown,  have  the 
same  Preterite,  namely  : 

f-ui        f-uiste        f-ue        f-uimos        f-uisteis        f-ueron. 

i.  Verbs  like  pedir,  3.  to  asTc  for ;  sentir,  3.  to  feel,  to  re- 
gret ;  etc.,  which  in  the  Gerund  change  the  e  into  i  (pidiendo, 
sintiendo,  etc.,)  change  also  the  same  letter  in  the  3d  person  sin- 
gular and  3d  person  plural  of  the  Preterite  (pidio,  pidieron ;  sin- 
tio,  sintieron,  etc.). 

Verbs  like  dormir,  3.  to  sleep ;  morir,  3.  to  die ;  etc.,  which 
in  the  Gerund  change  the  o  into  u  (durmiendo,  muriendo,  etc.), 
change  also  the  same  letter  in  the  3d  person  singular  and 
3d  person  plural  of  the  Preterite  (durmio,  durmieron ;  muri6, 
nmrieron,  etc.). 

5,  Verbs  ending  in  the  Infinitive  in  car,  change  in  the  Pre- 
terite c  into  qu  before  e:  tocar,  1.  to  touch;  toque,  /  touched  or 
/  did  touch  ;  etc. 

Verbs  ending  in  gar  insert  a  U  before  the  e  in  the  same  tense  : 
jugar,  1.  to  play  ;  jugue,  I  played  or  I  did  play  ;  etc. 

Verbs  ending  in  eer  change  the  i  into  y  before  the  0 :  creer, 
2.  to  helieve  ;  creyo,  he  believed ;  etc. 

Verbs  ending  in  uir  change  the  i  into  y  before  the  0  :  huir,  3. 
to  flee;  huyo,  he  fled  ;  etc. 

Observation.  —  The  changes  above  given  also  take  place  in  other  tenses 
and,  in  the  two  last  cases,  also  before  the  letters  a  and  o. 


THE   PAST   ANTERIOR  AND   THE   PLUPERFECT. 


215 


Leccion  XXXIX. 


Lesson  XXXIX. 


THE  PAST  ANTERIOR  AND  THE  PLUPERFECT. 


Past  Anterior. 
Hube  hablado,  /  had  spoken. 
Hubiste  hablado,  thou  Jiadst  spoken, 
Hubo  hablado,  he  had  spoken. 
Hubimos  hablado,  we  had  spoken. 
Hubisteis  hablado,  you  had  spoken. 
Hubieron  hablado,  they  had  spoken. 


Pluperfect. 
Habia  hablado,  /  had  spoken. 
Habias  hablado,  thou  hadst  spoken. 
Habia  hablado,  he  hoA  spoken. 
Habianios  hablado,  we  had  spoken. 
Habiais  hablado,  you  had  spoken. 
Habian  hablado,  tJicy  had  spoken. 


Vocabulario. 
El  heredero,  the  heir. 
El  nombre,  the  name. 
El  periodico,  th^e  newspaper. 
El  vapor,  the  steamer. 
La  noticia,  the  news. 
La  palabra,  the  ivord. 
La  urbanidad,  the  urbanity. 
Abierto,  opened. 
A  caballo,  on  horseback. 
Amistoso,  friendly. 
Apenas,  hardly,  no  sooner. 
Aun,  yet. 
Cuando,  ichen. 
Despues  que,  after. 
Que,  when. 
Triste,  sad. 


Vocabulary. 

Tan  pronto  como,  -| 

Luego  que, 

^   ,  (-as Soon  a 

Asi  que, 

Al  punto  que,       ^ 

Ya,  already. 

Comer,  2.  to  dine. 

Consul  tar,  1.  to  considt. 

Contener,  2.  to  contain. 

Entregar,  1.  to  hand. 

Llevar,  1.  to  take. 

Merecer,  2.  to  deserve. 

Montar,  1.  to  mount. 

Olvidar,  1.  to  forget. 

Pronunciar,  1.  to  pronounce. 

Tomar,  1.  to  take. 

Visitar,  1.  to  visit. 


Exercise  77. 

1.  [  Que  hizo  V.  cuando  hubo  almorzado  1  2.  Tan  pronto  conio 
hube  almorzado,  volvi  a  mi  escritorio.  3.  Asi  que  me  hubo  visto, 
me  dio  el  dinero.  4.  Apenas  me  hubo  dicho  estas  palabras,  cuando 
salio.  5.  Luego  que  hubo  leido  la  carta,  monto  a  caballo  y  salio  de 
la  ciudad.  6.  [  Donde  habia  olvidado  V.  su  baston  1  7.  Yo  no  habia 
olvidado  mi  baston,  habia  olvidado  mi  paraguas  ;  lo  que  era  peor, 
pues  comenzo  a  Hover  muchisimo.  8.  Cuando  hubo  vistado  la  casa. 
dijo  que  no  queria  comprarla.  9.  Yo  habia  salido  cuando  entraron 
los  ladrones  en  mi  cuarto.     10.  Cuando  hubieron  abierto  la  puerta, 


216  LESSON    39. 

vieron  que  no  habia  nada  que  robar.  11.  Guillermo  no  habia  apren- 
dido  su  leccion,  y  habia  sido  castigado  como  lo  merecia.  12.  Despues 
que  hubo  visto  a  su  amigo,  estuvo  mas  satisfecho.  13.  [  Habia  re- 
cibido  su  padre  la  carta  cuando  salio  1  14.  Aiin  no  la  habia  recibido. 
15.  Cuando  hubo  comido,  tomo  su  sombrero  y  dijo  que  tenia  que 
salir.     16.  Me  entrego  el  dinero  tan  pronto  como  lo  hubo  recibido. 

17.  Cuando    hubo    vendido    su    casa,    conipro    otra    mas    grande. 

18.  Cuando  le  hubo  dicho  mi  nombre,  me  recibio  con  la  mayor 
urbanidad.  19.  Al  punto  que  me  hubo  visto,  me  hizo  sena  de  (to) 
seguirle.      20.    Me   presto   el    libro    asi    que    le    hube    dado    otro. 

21.  Despues  que  hubo  llegado,  me  escribio  una  carta  muy  amistosa. 

22.  Luego  que  hubo  muerto  el  general,  vendieron  los  herederos  la 
casa.  23.  Ya  habia  yo  leido  la  carta  cuando  llego  mi  hermano. 
24.  I  Habia  hablado  V.  al  medico  1  25.  Si,  yo  le  habia  consultado 
varias  yeces. 

Exercise  78. 

1.  When  he  had  said  what  he  had  to  say,  he  left  (salio  de)  the 
house.  2.  As  soon  as  the  father  had  read  what  the  letter  of  his  son 
contained,  he  handed  it  to  me.  3.  Hardly  had  he  said  that  when  his 
friend  entered.  4.  What  did  you  do  when  you  had  dined  ?  5.  I 
went  to  my  friend's,  who  took  me  to  the  theater.  6.  When  I  had 
written  my  letters  I  went  out.  7.  As  soon  as  I  had  finished  my 
work  I  gave  it  to  him.  8.  After  he  had  visited  the  city  he  returned 
to  the  country.  9.  We  had  hardly  breakfasted  when  we  heard  the 
news.  10.  Had  you  seen  my  lawyer?  11.  I  had  seen  yours  and 
mine.  12.  The  children  had  told  me  that  you  had  gone  out.  13.  I 
wished  to  go  out,  but  I  had  no  umbrella  and  it  was  raining. 
14.  When  they  heard  that  I  had  received  good  news  they  all  came  to 
(a)  see  me.  15.  When  they  had  read  the  newspapers  they  wrote  their 
letters.  16.  After  they  had  seen  our  house  they  wished  to  buy  it, 
but  my  father  would  not  sell  it.  17.  The  steamers  had  arrived,  but 
we  had  not  received  any  letters.  18.  The  father  had  died  without 
seeing  (ver)  his  sons.  19.  Why  had  you  opened  the  door  ?  20.  Be- 
cause I  was  too  warm  with  the  door  closed.  21.  Mr.  Martin  had  not 
arrived  this  morning  when  I  was  at  his  house.  22.  Had  you  not 
heard  that  he  was  yet  in  Boston  1  23.  I  had  not  heard  anything. 
24.  To  whom  had  you  spoken  ?     25.  I  had  spoken  to  the  servants. 


THE   PAST   ANTERIOR  AND   THE   PLUPERFECT.  217 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

1,  Tlie  Past  Anterior  is  formed  from  the  Preterite  of  the 
auxiliary  haber,  to  have,  and  the  Past  Participle  of  the  verb ; 
while  the  Pluperfect  of  the  Indicative  is  composed  of  the  Imper- 
fect Indicative  of  the  same  auxiliary,  and  the  Past  Participle  of 
the  verb  : 
Cuando  liube  reconocido  {past  a7ite'         When  I  had  perceived  my  error,  I 

rior)  mi  error,  me  avergonze  de  lo  was  ashamed  of  what  I  Jiad  done. 

que  habia  hecho  {pluperfect). 

2#  The  Past  Anterior  generally  expresses  that  an  action  took 
place  immediately  before  another  2mst  action  or  event. 

This  Tense  is  principally  used  after  one  of  the  conjunctions  : 
despues  que,  after;  luego  que,  asi  que,  al  momento  que,  al 
punto  que,  as  soon  as  ;  apenas,  hardly ,  scarcely,  no  sooner  .\ 

Despues   que  —  asi  que  —  cuando        After  —  as  soon  as  —  wJien  he  had 

hubo  comido,  saUo,  diiud,  he  went  out. 

Se  embarco  luego  que  hubo  recibido        He  embarked  as  soon  as  he  had  re- 
el pasaporte,  ceived  the  passimrt. 
Ob.semvations.  — 1.  As  seen  by  the  examples  given,  the  verb  of  the  prin- 
cipal sentence  must  be  in  the  Preterite  when  the  tense  of  the  subordinate 
sentence  is  in  the  Anterior. 

2.   The  conjunctions  and  conjunctive  locutions  above  given  do  not  neces- 
sarily require  the  verb  to  be  put  in  the  Past  Anterior  tense  ;  they  may  be 
frequently  used  with  other  tenses  : 
Asi  que  hemos  comido,  vamos  a  pa-         As  soon  as  we  have  dined,  we  go  and 

sear,  take  a  walk. 

Apenas  tuvo  el  dinero  cuando  me        He  had  hardly  the  money  when  he 
pago,  paid  me. 


3,  The  Pluperfect  marks  an  action  or  event  not  only  as  past 
in  itself,  but  also  past  with  regard  to  some  other  past  action  or 
event  : 

Habiamos  pensado  que  V.  vendria         We  had  thought  that  you  woidd 
temprano,  come  early. 

Observation.  —  Nearly  all  the  rules  given  for  the  Imperfect  may  be 
applied  to  the  Pluperfect. 


218 


LESSON    40. 


Leccion  XL. 


Lesson  XL. 


THE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  ANTERIOR. 
Regular  Verbs. 

1st  Conjugation, 

Hablar,  to  speak. 
Hablar-e,  /  shall  or  ivill  speak. 
Hablar-as,  thou  shall  or  wilt  speak. 
Hablar-a,  he  shall  or  will  speak. 
Hablar-emos,  we  sJtall  or  will  S2)eak. 
Hablar-eis,  you  shall  or  vnll  speak. 
Hablar-an,  they  shall  or  will  speak. 


Amar,  to  love. 

Amar-^,  /  shall  or  icill  love. 
Amar-as,  thou  shall  or  wilt  love. 
Amar-a,  he  shall  or  will  love. 
Amar-emos,  we  shall  or  loill  love. 
Amar-^is,  you  shall  or  will  love. 
Amar-an,  they  shall  or  will  love. 


Comer,  to  eat. 

Comer-e,  I  shall  or  will  eat. 
Comer-as,  thou  shall  or  wilt  eat. 
Comer-a,  he  shall  or  will  eat. 
Comer-emos,  ?<;e  shall  or  ivill  eat. 
Comer-eis,  you  shall  or  will  eat. 
Comer-an,  they  shall  or  will  eat. 


2d  Conjugation. 

Beber,  to  drink. 
Beber-e,  /  shall  or  will  drink. 
Beber- as,  thoic  shall  or  wilt  drink. 
Beber-a,  he  shall  or  ivill  drink. 
Beber-emos,  tve  shall  or  will  drink. 
Beber-eis,  you  shall  or  will  drink. 
Beber-an,  tliey  shall  or  will  drink. 


Becibir,  to  receive. 
Recibir-e,  /  shall  or  will  receive. 
Recibir-as,  tlio^t  shall  or  wilt  receive. 
Recibir-a,  he  shall  or  will  receive. 
■  Recibir-emos,  we  shall  or  will  receive. 
Recibir-eis,  you  shall  or  will  receive. 
Recibir-an,  they  shall  or  will  receive. 


Zd  Conjugation. 

Partir,  to  depart. 
Partir-^,  /  shall  or  will  depart. 
Partir-as,  thou  shall  or  wilt  depart. 
Partir-a,  he  shall  or  will  depart. 
Partir-emos,  we  shall  or  will  depart. 
Partir-^is,  you  shall  or  will  depart. 
Partir-an,  they  shall  or  will  depart. 


Irregular  Futures. 


1.  Hacer,  2.  to  do,  to  make. 
Hare,  I  shall  or  will  do. 
Haras,  thou  shall  or  unit  do. 
Hard,  he  shall  or  will  do. 
Harem  OS,  we  shall  or  will  do. 
Hareis,  you  shall  or  will  do. 
Haran,  they  shall  or  will  do. 


2.  Poder,  2.  to  he  able. 
Podre,  /  shall  or  will  he  able. 
Podras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  be  able. 
Podra,  he  shall  or  will  be  able. 
Podremos,  we  shall  or  will  be  able. 
Podreis,  you  shall  or  will  be  able. 
Podran,  they  shall  or  will  be  able. 


THE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  ANTERIOR. 


219 


3.  Poner,  2.  to  p^U. 
Pondre,  /  shall  or  xcill  put. 
Pondras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  put. 
Pondra,  he  shall  or  will  put. 
Pondremos,  wc  shall  or  luill  put. 
Pondveis,  you  shall  or  will  put. 
Pondran,  they  sliall  or  will  put. 

6.  Saber,  2.  to  know. 
Sabre,  /  shall  or  will  know, 
Sabras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  know. 
Sabra,  he  shall  or  will  know. 
Sabremos,  wc  shall  or  loill  know. 
Sabreis,  you  shall  or  will  know. 
Sabran,  they  shall  or  will  know. 

7.  Venir,  3.  to  come. 
Vendre,  /  shall  or  will  come. 
Vendras,  thou  sh^lt  or  wilt  come. 
Vendra,  he  shall  or  will  come. 
Vendremos,  we  sJuill  or  will  come. 
Vendreis,  you  shall  or  will  come. 
Vendran,  they  shall  or  will  come. 

9.  Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 
Saldre,  /  shall  or  will  go  out. 
Saldras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  go  out. 
Saldra,  he  shall  or  will  go  out. 
Saldremos,  we  shall  or  will  go  out. 
Saldreis,  you  shall  or  will  go  out. 
Saldran,  they  shall  or  will  go  out, 

11.  Tener,  2.  to  have. 
Tendre,  /  shall  or  will  have. 
Tendras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  have, 
Tendra,  he  shall  or  will  have. 
Tendreinos,  we  shall  or  will  have. 
Tendreis,  you  shall  or  will  have. 
Tendran,  they  shall  or  will  have. 


4.  Qnerer,  2.  to  wish,  to  he  willing. 
Qnerriy  I  shall  or  will  wish. 
Querras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  wish, 
Querra,  he  shall  or  will  wish, 
Querremos,  we  sliall  or  will  wish. 
Querreis,  you  shall  or  loill  wish. 
Qaen'an,  they  shall  or  will  wish, 

6.  Valer,  2.  to  he  worth. 
Valdre,  /  sJiall  or  will  he  worth, 
Valdras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  he  worth, 
Yaldra,  he  shall  or  will  he  worth. 
Valdremos,  we  shall  or  will  he  worth, 
Valdreis,  you  shall  or  will  he  worth, 
Yaldran,  they  Shall  or  will  he  worth, 

8.  Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell. 
Dire,  /  shall  or  will  say. 
Diras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  say, 
Dira,  he  shall  or  will  say, 
Diremos,  we  shall  or  loill  say, 
Direis,  you  shall  or  will  say, 
Diran,  they  shall  or  will  say, 

10.  Ir,*  3.  to  go. 

Ire,  I  shall  or  will  go. 
Iras,  thou  shall  or  wilt  go. 
Ira,  he  shall  or  will  go. 
Iremos,  loe  sliall  or  will  go, 
Ireis,  you  shaJl  or  will  go. 
Iran,  they  shall  or  will  go, 

12.  Haber,  2.  to  have. 
Habre,  /  shall  or  will  have. 
Habras,  thou  slialt  or  wilt  have. 
Habra,  he  shall  or  will  have. 
Habremos,  we  shall  or  will  have. 
Habreis,  you  shall  or  will  have. 
Habran,  they  shall  or  will  have. 


*  The  verb  ir,  3.  to  go,  although  one  of  the  most  irregular  verbs  in  Span- 
ish, forms  its  future  regularly. 


220  LESSON    40. 


Vocabularia,  Vocabulary. 


'  El  merito,  the  merit. 
El  negocio,  the  business. 
La  procesion,  the  procession, 
Asi  que,  so  that. 
Junio,  m,  June. 
Necesario,  iiecessary. 


Pronto,  soon. 
Segun,  according  to. 
Siempre,  always. 
Acabar,  1.  to  finish. 
Asegurar,  1.  to  assure. 
Enriquecer,  2.  to  enrich. 

Exercise  79. 


Pasar,  1 .  to  pass. 
Pensar,  1.  to  think. 
Perdonar,  1.  to  forgive. 
Prometer,  2.  to  promise. 
Tratar,  1.  to  treat. 
Veneer,  2.  to  conquer. 


1.  I  Cuando  vendra  V.  a  veriios  ?  2.  Iremos  iin  dia  de  estos, 
cuando  no  estemos  tan  ocupados.  3.  i  Como  lo  sabra  V.  ?  4.  Mi 
hermana  me  lo  dira.  5,  Vere  miiy  pronto  si  V.  sabra  sus  lecciones. 
6.  Le  aseguro  a  Y.  que  las  sabre.  7.  El  panadero  vino  esta  manana 
y  dijo  que  no  podra  volver  hoy.  8.  [  Cviando  tendra  V.  el  dinero. 
9.  Lo  tendre  esta  tarde.  10.  A  que  bora  comeremos  hoy  ?  11.  Come- 
remos  niuy  temprano,  12.  i  Cuando  habra  V.  acabado  su  trabajo  ? 
13.  Lo  habre  acabado  manana  por  la  manana.  14.  i  Que  bebera  V.  1 
15.  Bebere  agxia  si  V.  no  tiene  vino.  16.  Hoy  recibiremos  todo  lo 
que  necesitamos.  17.  [Que  haran  V.  V.  si  no  tienen  dinero? 
18.  Haremos  lo  que  siempre  hemos  hecho.  19.  [Vendra  su  her- 
mano  de  V.  hoy  ?  20.  Yendra  si  tiene  tiempo.  21.  i  Que  dira  su 
padre  si  sabe  esto  ?  22.  Dira  que  V.  ha  hecho  muy  raal  en  no  con- 
sultarle.  23.  i  Cuando  saldran  los  muchachos  ?  24.  No  saldran  hoy, 
pues  el  tiempo  esta  malisimo.  25.  i  No  ira  V.  al  concierto  de  la 
senorita  Abel.  26.  No  podre  ir,  pues  no  estare  en  la  ciudad.  27.  Dios 
nos  tratara  segun  nuestros  meritos.  28.  V.  no  habra  acabado  su 
trabajo  manana,  porque  V.  no  trabaja  bastante  ;  y  yo  habre  acabado 
el  mio,  porque  trabajo  sin  perder  (losing)  un  momento.  29.  [  Cree  V. 
que  Juan  hara  lo  que  le  he  dicho  ?  30.  El  no  querra  hacerlo.  31.  Mis 
hermanas  ban  ido  al  campo,  pero  volveran  la  semana  que  viene. 
32.  Espero  que  mi  amigo  me  perdonara.  33.  V.  j)odra  salir  tan  pronto 
como  habra  acabado  lo  que  tiene  que  hacer.  34.  i  Que  diran  V.  V. 
a  estos  hombres  ?    35.  No  les  hablaremos. 

Exercise  80. 

1.  When  will  you  receive  letters  from  your  family  ?  2.  I  shall  re- 
ceive one  to-morrow.  3.  This  business  will  enrich  us  all.  4.  Will 
you  write  to  me  ?  5.  I  will  Avrite  to  you  every  week.  6.  When  will 
you  go  out  with  the  children?      7.  I  will  go  out  this  afternoon. 


THE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  ANTERIOR.       221 

8.  They  will  conquer  or  die.  9.  Will  you  be  able  to  do  it  without  me  ? 
10.  I  don't  know  if  I  shall  be  able  to  do  it.  11.  How  much  money 
w^ill  you  give  to  your  brother  ?  12.  I  will  give  him  enough  for  his 
journey.  13.  Will  it  be  necessary  to  tell  him  anything  ?  14.  It  will 
be  better  {valdrd  mas)  not  to  say  anything.  15.  If  we  go  to  his  house, 
he  will  treat  us  well.  16.  Do  you  think  that  I  shall  be  able  to  speak 
Spanish  in  two  years  ?  17.  You  will  speak  pretty  well,  if  you  are  will- 
ing to  study.  18.  When  will  the  procession  pass  ?  19.  It  will  pass 
at  three  o'clock.  20.  I  will  go  and  (a)  see  them  as  soon  as  I  shall 
have  finished  this  work.  21.  If  we  go  out  now,  our  teacher  will  see 
us.  22.  When  will  your  cousin  go  to  the  country  ?  23.  He  will  go  in 
the  month  of  June.  24.  When  will  you  send  me  the  book  that  you 
promised  me  ?  25.  I  will  send  it  to  you  to-morrow  morning. 
26.  Shall  you  be  at  home  this  afternoon.  27.  Yes,  sir,  I  shall  be 
(there).  28.  My  friend  has  not  received  any  letter,  so  that  he  will 
not  be  able  to  tell  you  anything.  29.  Will  it  be  necessary  to  go  to 
your  house  this  evening  1  30.  It  will  not  be  necessary.  31.  How 
much  money  shall  you  receive  ?  32.  I  don't  know  how  much  I  shall 
receive.  33.  Have  the  boys  finished  their  lessons  ?  34.  They  will 
soon  have  done  {finished).  35.  I  know  what  he  has  said,  but  I  shall 
not  say  a  word. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  The  Future  of  regular  verbs  is  formed  by  adding  to  the 
Present  Infinitive  the  following  terminations  : 

-e        -as        -a        -emos        -els        -an 

The  termination  of  the  Future  is  the  same  for  all  verbs, 
whether  regular  or  irregular,  the  radical  part  alone  being  changed 
for  the  latter. 

2.  The  verb  satisfacer,  2.  to  satisfy,  is  conjugated  like 
hacer,  2.  to  do,  to  make;  the  f  being,  however,  preserved 
through  the  conjugation  :  satisfago,  /  satisfy,  satisfare,  /  shall 
or  will  satisfy,  etc. 

3«  Caber,  2.  to  contain,  to  he  contained,  has  the  same  irregu- 
larity as  poder,  2.  to  he  able,  and  makes  cabre,  etc.,  in  the 
Future. 


222  LESSON    40. 

4«  All  the  other  verbs  which  form  their  Future  irregularly, 
have  been  given  above.  Their  derivatives  are  conjugated  in  the 
same  way. 

Thus  :  componer,  2.  to  mend,  deponer,  2.  to  lay  down,  dis- 
pone!, 2.  to  dispose,  oponer,  2.  to  oppose,  etc.,  are  conjugated  in 
the  Future  like  poner,  2.  to  put. 

Contener,  2.  to  contain,  detener,  2.  to  detain,  obtener,  2.  to 
obtain,  etc.,  are  conjugated  like  tener,  2.  to  have, 

Equivaler,  2.  to  he  equivalent,  is  conjugated  like  valer,  2.  to 
he  ivorth. 

Observation.  —  Valer  mas,  lit. :  to  he  worth  more,  is  rendered  in  Eng- 
lish by  to  be  better. 

Avenir,  3.  to  happen,  convenir,  3.  to  agree,  intervenir,  3.  to 

interfere,  etc.,  form  their  Future  like  venir,  3.  to  come. 

Predecir,  3.  to  foretell,  contradecir,  3.  to  contradict,  desdecir, 
3.  to  deity,  form  their  Future  like  decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell. 

Bendecir,  3.  to  bless,  and  maldecir,  3.  to  curse,  of  which  the 
Past  Participle  is  bendecido  (or  bendito),  and  also  maldito, 
form,  however,  their  Future  regularly  : 

Bendecire,  /  shall  or  will  bless.  Bendeciremos,  we  shall  or  ivill  bless. 

.  Bendeciras,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  bless.         Bendecireis,  you  shall  or  loill  bless. 

Bendecira,  he  shall  or  will  bless.  Bendeciran,  they  shall  or  will  bless. 

5f    The  Future  is  often  used  in  Spanish  instead  of  the  Im- 
perative : 
Iras  a  la  plaza  y  comprards  un  polio,      Go  to  the  w,arJcet  and  buy  a.  chicken. 

6f  The  Future  Anterior  is  formed  from  the  Past  Participle  of 
the  verb  conjugated  with  the  Future  of  the  auxiliary  haber,  to 

have : 

Habre  acabado  esta  noche,         /  shall  have  finished  to-night. 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD.  223 

Leccion  XLI.  Lesson  XLI. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

1st  Conjugution, 

Hablar,  1.  to  speak.  Comprar,  1.  to  buy,  Cantar,  1.  to  sing, 

Yo  habl-o,  /  speak  ;    \  ^^^^'^  ^-  (^^'^^•)  ^^  ^^^^'^-^T^  V.  V.  {pi),  speak  (you). 
\  Habl-emos,  let  us  speak. 

Yo  compr-o,  I  buy;   \  ^^^^Pi'-e  V.  (sing.)  or  compr-en  V.  V.  {pl.\  buy  {you). 
(  Compr-emos,  let  us  buy. 

Yo  cant-o,  Isiiig;      j  ^^"*-®  ^'-(^^^^^O  or  cant-en  V.  V.  (pi),  sing  (you), 
(  Cant-emos,  lei  u^  sing. 

'2d  and  3d  Conjugations, 
Comer,  2.  to  eat.  Beber,  2.  ^o  (^rm^.  Vender,  2.  jfo  5eZ?. 

Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell.         Venir,  3.  to  coirn.  Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 

Yo  com-o,  I  eat;         \  ^'^"^-a  V.  (sing.)  or  com-an  V.  V.  (pl.\  eat  (you), 
i  Com-amos,  let  us  eat. 

Yo  beb-o,  I  drink ;     \  ^^^-^  ^^  (sing.)  or  beb-an  V.  Y.  (pi.),  drink  (you). 
\  Beb-amos,  let  us  drink, 

Yo  vend-o,  I  sell ;       j  "^end-a  Y.  (sm^r.)  orvend-an  Y.  Y.  (pi),  sell  (you). 
(  Yend-amos,  let  us  sell 

r  Dig-a  Y.  (sing.),  say  or  tell  (you). 
Yodig.o,Isa7/,Itell;]  Dig-an  Y.  Y.  (pi),  say  or  tell  (ycm). 
^Dig-amos,  let  us  say  or  tell 

Yo  veng-o,  I  come  ;    j  ^eng-a  Y.  (sing.)  or  veng-an  Y.  Y.  (^^.),  cowe  (i/o^a). 
(  Yeng-amos,  let  us  come. 

Yo  salg-o,  I  go  out;  \  ^^^^'^  ^'  (sing.)  or  salg-an  Y.  Y.  (2^1),  go  (you)  out 
)  Salg-amos,  let  us  go  out. 

EuLE.  —  The  0  of  the  1st  Person  of  the  Present  Indicative  is 
changed  into  e  and  en  for  the  1st  Conjugation,  and  into  a  and 
aa  for  the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations. 


224 

Ser,  2.  to  he; 
Estar,  1.  to  he; 
Dar,  1.  to  give; 


LESSON   41. 

Exceptions. 

(sing.)  or  s 
'  Seamos,  let  us  he. 


I  Sea  V.  (sing.)  or  scan  V.  V.  (pL),  he  (you). 
SSe 


Este  V.  (sing.)  or  esteu  V.  Y.  (pL),  he  (you). 
Estemos,  let  us  he. 


!De  V.  (sing.)  c 
Demos,  let  us  give. 


or  den  Y.  Y.  (pi.),  give  (you), 
give. 

Saber,  2.  to  know;     \  ^P^  ^'  ^^"^'^  ^''  ^^P^^  ^'  ^'  ^^^'^'  ^^^  (2/^^). 
(  Sepamos,  let  its  know. 

Ir,  3.  to  go  ; 


Yaya  Y.  (sing.)  or  vayaii  Y.  Y.  (pL),  go  (you), 
Yayamos,  let  us  go. 

Imperative  with  Pronouns* 


Traigame  Y.  esto, 

No  se  lo  de  Y., 

Yendanos  Y.  su  caballo, 

Prestemelo  Y., 

Biisquelos  Y., 

Ko  lo  corte  Y., 

Yeiigan  Y.  Y.  esta  noche, 

No  salgan  Y.  Y.  ahora, 

D^amelo  Y., 

No  se  lo  diga  Y.  a  nadie, 

Salgamos  im  rato, 

Yen  aqui,  Juanito, 

Yuelva  Y.  esta  noche, 

No  hablen  Y.  Y.  tanto, 

Trahajemos, 

No  hagas  eso. 

Conform  ate  con  tu  suerte, 

Ponga  Y.  el  libro  sobre  la  mesa, 

Digale  Y.  a  Juan  que  su  padre  ha 

llegado, 
Hahlad  a  este  hombre. 


Bring  me  this. 
Do  not  give  it  to  him. 
Sell  us  your  horse. 
Lend  it  to  me. 
Look  for  them. 
Do  not  cut  it. 
Come  this  evening. 
Do  not  go  out  now. 
Tell  it  to  me. 
Do  not  tell  it  to  anyhody. 
Let  us  go  out  for  a  moment. 
Co'iue  here,  Johnny. 
Return  this  evening. 
Do  not  speak  so  much. 
Let  us  work. 
Do  not  do  that. 
Be  satisfied  with  your  lot. 
Put  the  hook  on  the  table. 
Tell  John  that  his  father  has  ar- 
rived. 
Speak  to  tliat  man. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


225 


Vocabulario. 

El  asunto,  the  matter. 

El  boticario,  the  drug- 
gist. 

El  coclie,  the  coach. 

El  correo,  the  post,  the 
mail. 

El  estado,  the  condition. 

El  favor,  the  favor. 

El  ruido,  the  noise. 

El  temor,  the  fear. 

La  cancion,  the  song. 

La  patria,  the  country. 


La  verdad,  the  truth. 
La  virtud,  the  virtue. 
Alto,  loud. 
Enfadado,  angry. 
Ligero,  quick. 
Pronto,  quickly. 
Quieto,  quiet. 
Turbulento,  boisterous. 
Amar,  1.  to  love. 
Abrir,  3.  to  ojjen. 
Cantar,  1.  to  sing. 
Correr,  2.  to  run. 


Vocabulary. 

Emplear,  1.  to  employ. 
Encender,  2.  to  light 
Llevar,  1.  to  take. 
Obedecer,  2.  to  obey. 
Oir,  3.  to  liear. 
Olvidar,  1.  to  forget. 
Pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Practical,  1.  to  practise. 
Prestar,  1.  to  lend. 
Salir,  3.  to  leave. 
Saltar,  1.  to  jump. 
Tomai)  1.  to  take. 


Exercise  81. 

1.  No  tenga  V.  niiedo,  el  perro  no  inuerde.  2.  Emplee  V.  bien  el 
tiempo.  3.  Amemos  nuestra  patria.  4.  Sepa  V.  sus  lecciones  inana- 
iia.  5.  No  digas  todo  lo  que  haces,  pero  hagas  todo  lo  que  dices. 
6.  Este  V.  quieto.  7.  Mandeme  V.  mis  libros  por  el  muchacho. 
8.  Seamos  aniigos.  9.  Denie  V.  esto,  lo  necesito.  10.  Pregunte  V.  si 
el  Seiior  Martinez  esta  en  casa.  11.  Yaya  V.  a  casa  del  Seiior  Gutier- 
rez y  digale  que  le  quiero  ver.  12.  Saiga  V.  de  aqui  y  no  vuelva 
mas.  13.  Yenga  V.  pronto,  yo  le  necesito  a  Y.  14.  Digame  Y.  quien 
ha  heclio  esto.  15.  Hagame  Y.  el  favor  de  {to)  decirme  donde  vive  el 
medico.  16.  Hay  uno  que  vive  en  esta  casa.  17.  Sepa  Y.  que  soy  el 
mejor  amigo  que  Y.  tiene.  18.  Tome  Y.  este  dinero  y  deselo  a  este 
pobre.  19.  Hable  Y.  sin  temor,  y  diga  la  verdad.  20.  Muchachos, 
no  jueguen  en  la  calle.  21.  Corra  Y.  pronto  y  traigame  mi  paraguas. 
22.  Hable  Y.  a  ese  horabre,  y  preguntele  lo  que  quiere.  23.  Hablele  Y. 
mismo,  yo  no  hablo  frances.  24.  Tome  Y.  un  coche,  si  Y.  no  quiere 
ir  a  pie.  25.  No  hagas  eso,  amiguito.  26.  Deme  Y.  la  mano  ;  muy 
bien,  ahora  salte  Y.  27.  No  me  hable  Y.,  estoy  enfadado  con  Y. 
28.  Digamos  siempre  la  verdad.  29.  Piense  Y.  en  {of)  mi.  30.  Es- 
cribame  Y.  de  Paris.  31.  Creame,  amigo,  la  cosa  no  es  asi.  32.  Sal- 
gamos,  ya  es  tarde.  33.  Denos  Y.  puestro  dinero,  lo  necesitamos. 
34.  Lleve  Y.  esa  carta  al  correo  ;  ya  es  tiempo.  35.  Yamonos  tem- 
prano.     36.  No  venga  Y.  tan  tarde  manana,  pues  tengo  que  salir. 


15 


226  LESSON    41. 

Exercise  82. 
1.  Take  this  key,  open  my  room,  and  bring  me  my  stick.  2.  Let 
us  write  our  letters,  the  mail  leaves  to-night.  3.  Come  early  to-mor- 
row morning,  we  have  a  great  deal  to  do.  4.  Do  not  go  out  without 
me.  5.  Write  to  us  every  week  from  Paris.  6.  Give  something  to 
that  poor  man  ;  he  is  hungry.  7.  Be  my  friend.  8.  Go  out,  I  don't 
need  you  here.  9.  Don't  speak  to  that  man,  he  is  not  your  friend. 
10.  Take  this  letter  to  your  father,  and  tell  him  that  I  wish  to  see 
him.  11.  Speak  louder,  I  cannot  hear  you.  12.  Do  me  the  favor  to 
{de)  give  me  a  piece  of  bread.  13.  Call  that  gentleman,  he  has  forgot- 
ten something.  14.  Give  me  something  to  {que)  drink,  I  am  very 
thirsty.  15.  Ask  that  woman  if  Mr.  Zamora  is  at  home.  16.  Do  not 
run  so  fast,  it  is  not  late.  17.  Do  not  believe  what  that  man  says,  he 
never  tells  the  truth.  18.  Light  the  gas ;  we  don't  see  anything  here. 
19.  Shut  the  door;  we  do  not  wish  to  be  seen.  20.  Don't  buy  that 
house,  it  is  in  very  poor  {mal)  condition.  21.  Take  this  and  give  it 
to  your  sister.  22.  Do  not  make  so  much  noise,  your  little  brother  is 
sleeping.      23.    Tell  me  all  that  you  know  about  {de)  this  matter. 

24.  Write  to  this  merchant  and  tell  him  that  we  need  blue  cloth. 

25.  Go  to  the  druggist's,  but  return  quickly.  26.  If  you  do  not  need 
your  book,  lend  it  to  me.  27.  I  will  tell  you  something,  but  do  not 
tell  it  to  anybody.  28.  Obey  your  masters.  29.  Let  us  love  and 
practise  virtue.  30.  Let  us  see  who  is  at  the  door.  31.  Here  is  a 
dollar,  take  it  and  pay  that  ijian.  32.  Do  not  be  so  boisterous,  your 
mother  is  not  well.  33.  Come  here,  I  have  something  to  tell  you. 
34.  Do  not  give  her  that,  she  is  too  small  yet.  35.  Let  us  sing  a 
Spanish  song. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  Those  verbs  which  insert  an  i  in  the  conjugation  of  certain 
tenses,  as  encender,  2.  to  light;  comenzar,  1.  to  commence;  etc. 
(L.  33,  E.  2),  and  those  which  change  o  into  ue,  as  almorzar,  1. 
to  breakfast;  morder,  2.  tohite;  etc.  (L.  33,  E.  2)  do  not  change 
their  radical  in  the  first  person  plural  of  the  Imperative  : 

Enciendo,  /  light ;  encendaraos,  let  us  light. 

Comienzo,  /  comnunce  ;        comeiizemos,  let  us  commence. 

Muerdo,  /  hite  ;  mordamos,  let  us  bite. 

Almuerzo,  /  breakfast  ;        almorzemos,  let  us  breakfast. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  227 

Note.  —  Pedir,  3.  to  ask,  sentir,  3.  to  feel,  and  a  few  others,  make 
pidamos,  let  us  ask,  sintamos,  let  us  feel,  etc. 

Dormir,  3.  to  sleep,  and  morir,  3.  to  die,  make  durmamos,  let  us  sleep, 
and  muramos,  let  us  die, 

2.  Verbs  ending  in  car  change  the  c  into  qu  before  an  e. 
Those  ending  in  gar  insert  a  u  after  the  g  and  before  an  e  : 

Busquelo  V.,  look  for  it.         Juegue  V.,  play. 
For  other  changes  required  by  the  rules  of  Pronunciation  see  Lesson  38. 

3.  The  pronouns  usted  (Y.),  and  ustedes  (V.  Y.)  must  ac- 
company the  Imperative  in  the  second  person  plural : 

Venga  V.,  come  ;        Vengan  V.V.,  come. 

a.  These  pronouns  may  be  left  out  if  there  exists  a  certain 
familiamty  between  the  speaker  and  the  person  addressed,  and 
we  can  say  : 

Venga  aqui,  come  here  ;  Vengan  aqui,  corae  here. 

Politeness  does  not  admit  of  this  omission,  however. 

h.  If  two  or  more  Imperatives  occur  in  the  same  sentence,  it 
is  sufficient  that  the  pronoun  should  accompany  the  first  Imper- 
ative : 

Vaya  V.  a  mi  cuarto,  y  traigame  mi         Go  to  my  room  arid  brincf  me  my 
libro,  hook. 

4t  For  rules  referring  to  the  place  of  the  pronouns  accom- 
panying the  Imperative  see  L.  22,  30,  31.  The  student  will 
have  to  bear  in  mind,  however,  that  the  pronouns  listed  and 
ustedes  are  always  placed  last  in  the  Imperative. 

5t  Besides  the  three  persons  of  the  Imperative  given  above, 
there  is  also  a  second  person  singular  which  is  used  as  the  pro- 
noun tli  when  speaking  to  friends,  relations,  children,  etc. 

The  verb  estar,  1.  makes  in  the  2d  person  singular  este,  he 
(thou),  ser,  2.  makes  se,  he  (thou). 

a.  Hablar,  1.  to  speak^  cortar,  1.  to  cut,  amar,  1.  to  love,  make 
in  the  imperative  hahla,  carta,  ama.     Vender,  2.  to  sell,  comer, 


228  LESSON   42. 

2.  to  eat,  beber,  2.  to  drink,  make  veiide,  come,  hehe.  Recibir,  3. 
to  receive,  dividir,  3.  to  divide,  abrir,  3.  to  open,  make  recihe,  di- 
vide, ahre, 

b.  Some  verbs  in  the  same  person,  end  with  an  e  instead  of 
an  a,  as  :  oye,  hear  (thou),  conduce,  conduct  or  take  {thou),  pide, 
ask  (thou),  etc.  Other  verbs  drop  the  last  letter  or  the  last  syl- 
lable of  the  second  person  plural :  ten,  have  (thou),  pen,  put 
(thou),  ven,  co7ne  (thou),  di,  sai/  (thou),  sal,  c/o  out  (thou),  etc. 

c.  The  Imperative  negative  of  the  second  person  singular  is 
expressed  by  means  of  the  subjunctive  : 

No  hables,  do  not  speak.  No  saigas,  do  not  go  out. 

No  veiigas,  do  not  come. 

6«    Besides  the  terminations  given,  there  are  also  two  others 

ending  for  the  2d  person  plural  of  the  Imperative,  namely  :  d, 

preceded  by  a,  e,  and  i,  and  is,  preceded  by  a  or  e  ; 

Sed,      )  No  seais,    , 

he  .  -vr       4.  '     i  he  not, 


I  be  1 


Estad,  )        '  No  esteisj 

Corned,  eat.  No  coniais,  do  not  eat. 

Venid,  come.  No  vengais,  do  not  come. 

These  forms  of  the  Imperative  are  used  with  vosotros  (see  the 
use  of  this  pronoun  L.  4,  R.  3) ;  the  second  form  being  used  in 
the  negative. 

7»  The  second  person  singular  is  generally  used  in  proverbs, 
maxims,  etc. : 

Ama  a  tu  projimo  coino  a  ti  mismo,         Love  thy  nxiighbor  as  thyself. 


Leccion  XLII.  Lesson  XLII. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Present. 

It    The  First  Person  Singular  or  Plural  of  the  Present  of  the 
Subjunctive  is  formed  in  the  same  way  as  the  Imperative  (see 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


229 


Lesson  41,  p.  223),  while  the  other  Persons  may  easily  be  con- 
jugated with  their  proper  terminations,  as  is  shown  below.  The 
same  exceptions  exist  in  this  tense  as  in  the  Imperative. 


Que  yo  habl-e, 

Que  tu  habl-es, 

Que  el  habl-e, 

Que  uosolros  habl-emos. 

Que  vosotros  habl-eis. 

Que  ellos  habl-en. 


1st  Conjugation. 
Hablar,  to  speak. 

that  I  may  speaJc. 

that  thou  maycst  speak. 

that  he  may  speak. 

that  we  may  speak. 

that  you  may  speak. 

iJiai  they  may  speak. 


Que  yo  vend-a, 

Que  tu  vend-as, 

Que  el  vend-a, 

Que  nosotros  vend-amos, 

Que  vosotros  vend-ais. 

Que  ellos  vend-an. 


2d  Conjugation. 
Vender,  to  sell. 

tJiat  I  may  sell. 

that  thou  may  est  sell. 

that  lie  may  sell. 

tliat  we  may  sell. 

that  you  may  sell. 

that  they  may  sell. 


Que  yo  recib-a, 

Que  tu  recib-as, 

Que  el  recib-a. 

Que  nosotros  recib-amos. 

Que  vosotros  recib-ais. 

Que  ellos  recib-an. 


Zd  Conjugation. 
Recibir,  .^0  receive. 

that  I  may  receive. 
that  thou  mayest  receive, 
that  he  may  receive, 
that  we  may  receive, 
that  you  may  receive, 
thai  they  may  receive. 


Exceptions. 
Ser,  2.  to  he. 
Que  yo  sea,  that  I  may  he. 


etc. 


etc. 


Estar,  1.  to  he. 
Que  yo  este,  that  I  may  he, 

etc.  etc. 


230 


LESSON   42. 


Haber,  2.  (auxiliary)  to  have. 
Que  yo  haya,  that  I  may  have, 

etc.  etc. 

Dar,  1.  to  give. 
Que  yo  de,  that  I  may  give, 

etc.  etc. 

Saber,  2.  to  knoiv. 
Que  yo  sepa,  that  I  may  know, 

etc.  etc. 

Ir,  3.  to  go. 
Que  yo  vaya,  that  I  may  go. 

etc.  etc. 


Vocabulario. 
El  carbon,  the  coal. 
El  ejercito,  the  army. 
El  empleo,  the  employment. 
El  invierno,  the  ivinter. 
El  memento,  the  moment. 
La  lengna,  the  language. 
La  lena,  the  loood. 
A  menos  que,  unless. 
Aunque,  although. 
Con  tal  que,  pi^ovided. 
Contrario,  contrary. 
Desgraciado,  unfortunate. 


Vocabulary. 


Hasta  que,  until. 
Listo,  ready. 
Menester,  necessary. 
Natural,  natural. 
For  mas... que,  liowever. 
Satisfecho,  satisfied. 
Sorprendido,  surprised. 
Tonto,  foolish. 
Buscar,  1.  to  look  for. 
Convenir,  3.  to  be  proper. 
Convidar,  1.  to  invite. 
Desear,  1.  to  desire. 


Esperar,  1.  to  wait. 
Marchar,  1.  to  march. 
Preferir,  3.  to  prefer. 
Preparar,  1.  to  p^'epare. 
Pretender,  2.  to  pretend. 
Querer,  2.  to  grant. 
Sentir,  3.  to  regret,     r  c 
Suplicar,  1.  to  entreat, 
Temer,  2.  to  fear. 
Ver,  2.  to  see. 


Exercise  83. 

1.  [Que  qiiiere  V.  que  yo  haga?  2.  Quiero  que  V.  escriba  a  su 
amigo  y  que  le  diga  de  venir.  3.  Me  alegro  (/  am  glad)  que  V.  este 
satisfecho  de  mi  trabajo.  4.  Estoy  sorprendido  de  que  V.  no  sepa 
nada  de  eso.  5.  Es  necesario  que  salgamos  temprano,  pues  debemos 
llegar  a  la  ciudad  antes  de  la  noche.  6.  Siento  que  V.  no  tenga  el 
dinero  que  V.  me  prometio.  7.  Es  posible  que  las  cartas  lleguen  hoy. 
8.  Es  de  desear  que  acabemos  hoy.  9.  Es  mejor  que  V.  no  le  diga  . 
nada.  10.  No  coiiviene  que  V.  hable  tanto.  11.  Deseo  que  V.  vaya 
en  seguida  a  su  casa.     12.  Dios  quiera  que  no  Ueguemos  demasiado 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  231 

tarcle.  13.  i  Cree  V.  que  el  pueda  venir  la  semana  que  viene  ?  14.  No 
creo  que  lo  pueda.  15.  Es  tiempo  que  acabe  el  iiivierno,  pues  ya  no 
tenemos  carbon  ni  leiia.  16.  Si  es  verdad  (true)  que  su  padre  llegue 
maiiana,  sera  menester  prepararle  un  cuarto.  17.  Denie  V.  una 
leccion  que  sea  mas  facil.  18.  i  Cuando  quiere  V.  que  yo  le  devuelva 
el  dinero  ?  19.  Devuelvamelo  tan  pronto  como  V.  pueda.  20.  He 
suplicado  a  mi  amigo  que  venga  a  mi  casa,  pero  el  prefiere  ir  a  la 
fonda.  21.  Este  hombre  pretende  que  le  den  un  empleo.  22.  Que 
venga  si  quiere.  23.  Queremos  que  V.  V.  trabajen  mas.  24.  El 
maestro  desea  que  aprendamos  la  lengua  inglesa.  25.  Tememos  que 
este  hombre  sea  nuestro  enemigo.  26.  No  apruebo  que  V.  saiga  todas 
las  noches.  27.  Puede  ser  que  el  vaya  a  Paris.  28.  Quiero  que  V. 
me  diga  lo  que  sea  la  verdad.  29.  Quiero  un  maestro  que  no  sea 
demasiado  joven.  30.  Nuestro  padre  no  quiere  que  durmamos  tan 
tarde.  31.  No  encuentro  ninguno  que  pueda  prestarme  el  dinero  que 
necesito.  32.  Don  Juan  Morales  es  el  raejor  hombre  que  conozca. 
33.  Este  es  el  mejor  vino  que  haya  bebido.  34.  El  me  dara  dinero 
hasta  que  yo  haya  encontrado  un  buen  empleo.  35.  Lo  hare  aunque 
no  sepa  muy  bien  hacerlo. 

Exercise  84. 

1.  Captain  Henry  is  the  bravest  officer  I  know  in  the  army.  2.  It 
is  the  best  bread  we  have  had  this  year.  3.  Here  is,  I  think,  the  last 
book  he  has  written.  4.  1  am  surprised  that  your  brother  should 
come  at  (en)  this  moment.  5.  He  wishes  me  to  return  to-morrow,  but 
I  don't  think  that  I  shall  be  able  to  do  it.  6.  It  is  unfortunate  that 
you  should  have  lost  all  your  money.  7.  It  is  better  for  you  to 
arrive  in  the  morning.  8.  Is  it  true  that  he  has  said  that  ?  9.  I  don't 
think  he  has  said  it.  10.  At  what  time  do  you  think  he  will  be 
here  ?  11.  I  don't  think  he  can  be  here  before  eleven.  12.  It  is  im- 
possible for  me  to  go  out  so  early.  13.  Although  he  is  poor  he  has 
more  friends  than  you.  14.  Do  you  think  that  I  am  foolish  enough 
to  believe  that  ?  15.  Is  it  possible  that  you  should  have  spent  so  much 
money  ?  16.  My  father  wishes  me  to  go  to  the  country  with  him. 
17.  We  wish  you  to  study  your  lessons.  18.  The  general  wishes  that 
every  soldier  be  ready  to  march.  19.  God  grant  that  he  may  live 
long  (mubchos  anos)  !    20.  I  wish  him  to  come  and  to  bring  the  money. 

21.  It  is  very  natural  that  he  should  think  that  I  am  his  friend. 

22.  It  is  well  (hueno)  that  he  should  know  it.     23.  I  am  looking  for  a 


232  LESSON   42. 

man  who  may  be  willing  to  lend  me  some  money.  24.  See  that 
ever^^thing  is  ready.  25.  I  do  not  believe  it,  although  he  may  say 
the  (lo)  contrary.  26.  Wait  till  he  comes.  27.  I  shall  go  out  unless 
it  rains.  28.  We  will  wait  for  you,  provided  you  do  not  come  too 
late.  29.  However  rich  he  may  be,  he  is  unhappy.  30.  Unless  he 
invites  me,  I  shall  not  go  to  his  house.  31.  I  will  buy  that  house 
when  I  have  money  enough.  32.  He  says  he  will  come  provided 
they  send  him  a  carriage.     33.  I  do  not  wish  you  to  speak  so. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  Spanish  Subjunctive  Mood  is  used  when  the  verb  of 
the  principal  proposition  expresses  command,  consent,  desire,  will, 
wish,  doubt,  fear  or  apprehension,  approbation,  duty,  ignorance, 
suspicion,  convenience,  entreaty,  surprise,  admiration,  joy,  wonder, 
necessity,  possibility,  denial,  advice,  proiiibition,  permission,  warn- 
ing, and,  in  general,  the  emotions  of  the  mind  ;  the  two  propo- 
sitions being  connected  by  the  conjunction  que,  that. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood,  being  always  subordinate  to  the  verb 
that  precedes  it,  its  tenses  are  regulated  by  this  verb. 

The  Present  Subjunctive  is  generally  used  when  the  preced- 
ing verb  is  in  the  Present  or  Future  Indicative,  and  in  the  Im- 
perative. 

Le  ruego  cjue  venga,  /  heg  him  to  come. 

Le  rogare  que  venga,  /  will  heg  him  to  come. 

Ruegale  V.  que  venga,  heg  him.  to  come. 

Quiero  que  V.  V.  trahajen,         /  wish  that  yozi  should  work. 

Es  posible  que  yo  vaya,  /  may  possibly  go. 

2t  The  first  proposition  may  be  understood  or  may  be  placed 
after  the  Subjunctive  : 


Que  venga  si  quiere,  or 

Si  quiere  que  venga, 

j  Dios  lo  quiera  !  May  God  grant  it  ! 


c-       •  i  Let  him  coTue  if  he  wishes. 

Si  quiere  que  venga,       ) 


Observation.  —  In  this  last  example  the  principal  proposition  is  under- 
stood, the  sentence  being  an  abbreviation  of : 

j  Deseo  que  Dios  lo  quiera  !         /  desire  that  God  may  grant  it  I 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  233 

3«  Spaniards  never  say  do  you  wish  or  require  me,  him, 
her,  us,  them,  etc.,  to  do  so  and  so,  etc.  Another  expression  with 
the  Subjunctive  Mood  is  used  in  such  cases,  and  instead  of  I  wish 
you  to  come,  the  Spaniards  say  : 

Deseo  t^ue  V.  venga,         /  wish  that  you  should  come. 

4.  The  conjunction  que,  that,  which  connects  the  two  propo- 
sitions, can  never  be  understood,  as  is  often  the  case  in  English, 
but  must  be  expressed  and  even  repeated  before  every  subordi- 
nate verb  : 

No  creo  que  venga,  /  do  not  think  he  will  come. 

Quiero  que  -venga  y  que  traiga  el        /  wish  him  to  come  and  to  bring  tlu 

dinero,  money. 

Observation.  —  It  does  not  follow  when  the  two  propositions  of  a  sen- 
tence are  joined  by  the  conjunction  que,  that,  that  the  verb  of  the  second 
proposition  must  be  put  in  the  Subjunctive  Mood.  It  requires  for 
this,  that  the  verb  of  the  first  proposition  should  express  as  said  in  Rule 
I,  an  idea  of  command,  consent,  etc.  Thus  we  should  say,  using  the  In- 
dicative : 

Yo  se  que  el  es  rico,  /  know  that  he  is  rich. 

Creo  que  tic7ie  razon,  /  believe  that  he  is  right. 

5i  The  subjunctive  is  generally  used  after  verbs  used  inter- 
rogatively or  negatively,  when  doubt  is  expressed.  Thus  if  we 
say,  using  the  Indicative  : 

Pienso  que  saldrd  hoy,         /  think  he  will  leave  to-day  ; 
we  should  say,  using  the  Subjunctive  : 

i  Piensa  V.  que  el  saiga  hoy  ?        Do  you,  think  lie  ivill  leave  to-day  ? 

This  rule  is,  however,  far  from  being  absolute,  for  we  can  say 
Avith  equal  propriety  : 

Creo      -^   que  el  saiga  niaiiana  /  believe  ~\ 

Espero  \  or  I  hope      V  that  he  will  leave  to-morrow. 

Pienso  )  que  el  saldrd  ma  nan  a         /  think    J 

a.    The  second  verb  may  in  some  cases  be  placed  in  the  Pre- 
terite perfecto,  Preterite  perfect,  of  the  Subjunctive,  or  in  the 
Future  perfecto,  Future  perfect,  of  the  Indicative  : 
Presumo  que  le  havan  encontrado,  or ) 
Presume  que  le  habran  encontrado,     j  ^ P''^^'"'^  ""^  t'^'V  *««  ^nct  hi,n. 


234 


LESSON   42. 


6.  There  are  certain  verbs  in  Spanish,  as  pretender,  2.  to  pre- 
tend, which  require  the  Present  Indicative  or  the  Subjunctive, 
according  to  their  meaning  : 

Mi  hermano  pre  ten  de  que  le  den  un 
empleo, 


Este  horabre  pretende  que  le  ha  da- 
do a  V.  el  dinero. 


My  brother  pretends  {is  of  opinion) 
that  they  should  give  him  a  situ- 
ation. 

This  man  pretends  {insists)  that  he 
has  given  you  the  money. 


7.  The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  in  Spanish  after  an  Imper- 
sonal verb  expressing  an  idea  of  volition,  douht,  necessity,  contin- 
gency,  uncertainty,  etc.     (See  Eule  I.),  as  : 

Es  propio  (conveniente  or  a  proposito),         It  is  proper. 

Es  de  desear,  It  is  desirable. 

Conviene,  It  becomes. 

Es  bueno,  It  is  proper  or  luelL 

Es  malo,  It  is  wrong. 

Es  necesario,  i 

Es  menester,  }  ^^  ^'  necessary. 

Es  lastima,  It  is  a  pity. 

Es  sorprendente,  It  is  surprising. 


Es  facil, 
Es  imposible, 
Es  tiempo, 
Es  sufieiente. 
Es  natural, 
etc. 


Basta, 


It  is  easy  or  possible. 
It  is  impossible. 
It  is  time. 
It  is  sufficient. 
It  is  natural, 
etc. 


8t  The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  when  the  verb  of  the  second 
proposition  expresses  some  contingent  ov  fuiure  effect : 

Lo  comprare  cuando  tenga  dinero,         I  will  buy  it  when  I  have  money. 
Le  hablare  asi  que  le  vea,  I  will  speak  to  him  when  I  see  him. 

Lo  hare  antes  que  el  venga,  /  will  do  it  before  he  comes. 

9t  A  Relative  Pronoun  either  used  alone  or  preceded  by  a 
noun,  and  any  of  the  words  solo,  alo7ie,  ninguno,  no,  none,  no 
one,  pocos,  few,  cualquiera,  whatever,  quienquiera,  whoever,  na- 
die,  nobody,  no  one,  linico,  only  thing,  primero,  first,  ultimo,  last, 
mas,  more,  mejor,  best,  requires  the  Subjunctive  when  there  is 
an  idea  of  uncertainty : 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


235 


Busco  a  un  hombre  que  quiera  pres- 

tarme  dinero, 
Esto  es,  creo,  lo  linico  que  le  per- 

tenezca, 
Hay  pocos  que  lo  sepan, 
Quienquiem    que   lo   vea,    pensara 

como  yo, 
Cualquiera  que  sea  su  fortuna,  el 

niorira  pobre, 


I  am  looking  for  a  man  willing  to 

lend  me  money. 
This  is,  I  think,  the  only  thing  he- 

longing  to  him. 
There  are  few  who  know  it. 
Whoe«^er  sees  it  will  think  as  I  do. 

Whatever  he  his  fortune,  he  will 
die  poor. 


10 1    A  few  Conjunctive  expressions  require  the  Subjunctive 
Mood  when  they  express  a  doubt  or  uncertainty.     Such  are  : 


A  fin  que,  in  order  tlmt. 
A  menos  que,  unless. 
Antes  que,  before. 
Aunque,  although. 
Ann  cuando,  although. 
Bien  que,  though. 
En  case  que,  in  case  that. 
Con  tal  que,  pwided  that. 


Hasta  que,  iintil. 
Lejos  de  ({UBi  far  from. 
Por  poco  que,  however  little. 
Por  mucho  que,  |  ^^^^^ 
Por  mas  que,      ) 
Para  que,  m  order  that. 
Siempre  que,  vjhenever. 
Supuesto  (iMm^sumosing  that. 


\  Ojala !  would  to  God  ! 

11,  For  those  verbs  which  change  c  into  qu,  and  for  those 
which  insert  a  H  after  the  g  and  before  an  e^  and  for  other  obser- 
vations which  refer  to  the  Subjunctive,  as  well  as  to  the  Impera- 
tive, see  grammatical  part  of  Lesson  XLI. 

12.  The  Perfect  of  the  Subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  Pres- 
ent of  the  Subjunctive  of  the  auxiliary  haber,  2.  to  have,  and  the 
Past  Participle  of  the  verb  : 

Que  yo  haya  hablado,         That  I  may  have  spoken. 
Que  hayamos  salido,  That  we  may  have  gone  out. 

Observation.  —  All  the  general  rules  given  on  the  use  of  the  Present 
Subjunctive  apply  to  the  Perfect  of  the  Subjunctive. 


236 


LESSON   43. 


Leccion  XLIII. 


Lesson  XLIII. 


IMPERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Regular  Verbs. 


1st  Conjugation. 


Que  yo  habl-ara  or  habl-ase, 
Que  tu  habl-aras  or  liabl-ases, 
Que  el  habl-ara  or  habl-ase, 
Que  uosotros  habl-aramos  or  habl- 

asemos, 
Que    vosotros    habl-arais   or  habl- 

aseis, 


that  I  might  or  should  speak, 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  speaTc. 
that  he  might  or  should  speak, 
that  loe  might  or  should  speak. 

that  you  might  or  should  speak. 


Que  ellos  habl-aran  or  habl-asen,         that  they  might  or  should  speak. 


2d  Conjugation. 

^  Vender,  to  sell. 

Que  yo  vend-iera  or  veud-iese, 
Que  tu  vend-ieras  or  vend-ieses, 
Que  el  vend-iera  or  vend-iese, 
Que  nosotros  vend-ieramos  or  vend- 

iesemos, 
Que  vosotros  vend-ierais  or  vend- 

ieseis, 
Que  ellos  vend-ieran  or  vend-iesen. 


that  I  might  or  should  sell, 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  sell, 
that  he  anight  or  should  sell, 
that  tve  might  or  should  sell. 

that  you  might  or  should  sell. 

that  they  might  or  should  sell. 


3^  Co7ijugation. 
Kecibir,  to  receive. 


Que  yo  recib-iera  or  reeib-iese, 
Que  tu  reeib-ieras  or  recib-ieses, 
Que  el  reeib-iera  or  reeib-iese. 
Que  nosotros  recib-i^ramos  or  recib- 

i^semos, 
Que  vosotros  recib-ierais  or  recib- 

ieseis. 
Que  ellos  recib-ieran  or  recib-iesen, 


that  I  might  or  should  receive, 
that  thou  m/tghtest  or  shouldst  receive, 
that  he  m.ight  or  should  receive, 
that  we  might  or  should  receive. 

that  you  might  or  should  receive. 

that  they  might  or  should  receive. 


IMPERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


237 


Irregular  Verbs. 

Tener,  2.  to  have. 

Que  yo  tuviera  or  tiiviese, 

Que  tu  tuvieras  or  tuvieses, 

Que  el  tuviera  or  tuviese, 

Que  uosotros  tuvieramos  or  tuvie- 

semos, 
Que  vosotros  tuvierais  or  tuvieseis, 
Que  ellos  tuvieran  or  tuviesen, 


that  I  might  or  should  have, 
that  tho2c  raightcst  or  shouldst  have, 
that  he  inight  or  should  have, 
that  we  might  or  should  have. 

that  you  might  or  should  have, 
that  they  might  or  should  have. 


Haber,  2.  (auxiliary)  to  have. 


Que  yo  hubiera  or  hubiese, 

Que  tu  hubieras  or  hubieses, 

Que  el  hubiera  or  hubiese, 

Que  uosotros  hubieramos  or  hubie- 

semos, 
Que  vosotros  hubierais  or  hubieseis, 
Que  ellos  hubieran  or  hubiesen, 


that  I  might  or  should  have, 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  have, 
that  he  might  or  should  have, 
that  we  might  or  should  have. 

that  you  might  or  slwuld  have, 
that  they  might  or  should  have. 


Estar,  1.  to  he. 


Que  yo  estuviera  or  estuviese, 
Que  tu  estuvieras  or  estuvieses, 
Que  el  estuviera  or  estuviese, 
Que  uosotros  estuvieramos  or  estu- 

viesemos, 
Q  ue  vosotros  estu  vierais  or  estuvieseis, 
Que  ellos  estuvieran  or  estuviesen, 


tliat  I  might  or  should  he. 
that  thou  mightest  or  shoiddst  he. 
that  he  might  or  should  he. 
tliat  we  might  or  should  he. 

that  you  might  or  should  he. 
that  tliey  might  or  should  he. 


Ser,  2.  to  he, 

Que  yo  fuera  or  fuese. 

Que  tu  fueras  or  fueses, 

Que  el  fuera  or  fuese, 

Que  uosotros  fueramos  or  fuesemos, 

Que  vosotros  fuerais  or  fueseis. 

Que  ellos  fueran  or  fuesen, 


that  I  might  or  should  he. 
that  thou  mightest  or  shouldst  he. 
that  he  'might  or  should  he. 
that  we  might  or  should  he. 
that  you  might  or  should  he. 
that  they  might  or  should  he. 


Que  yo  diera  or  diese, 
etc. 


Dar,  1.  to  give. 

that  I  might  or  should  ( 
etc. 


238  LESSON   43. 

Andar,  1.  to  walk. 
Que  yo  anduviera  or  anduviese,  that  I  might  or  should  walk, 

etc.  etc. 

Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do. 
Que  yo  hiciera  or  hiciese,  that  I  might  or  should  do. 

etc.  etc. 

Caer,  2.  to  fall. 
Que  yo  cay  era  or  cayese,  that  I  might  or  should  fall. 

etc.  etc. 

Poder,  'I.  to  he  able. 
Que  yo  pudiera  or  pudiese,  that  I  might  or  should  he  ahle. 

etc.  etc. 

Poner,  2.  ^o;m^. 
Que  yo  pusiera  or  pusiese,  that  I  might  or  should  put. 

etc.  etc. 


Querer,  2.  ^o  he  willing. 
Que  yo  quisiera  or  quisiese,  that  I  might  or  should  he  willing. 

etc.  etc. 

Saber,  2.  ^o  A:?io2^. 
Que  yo  supiera  or  supiese,  that  I  might  or  should  hiow. 

etc.  etc. 

Traer,  2.  to  hring. 
Que  yo  trajera  or  trajese,  that  I  might  or  should  hring. 

etc.  e^c. 

Valer,  2.  ^o  5e  worth. 
Que  yo  valiera  or  valiese,  that  I  might  or  should  he  worth. 

etc.  e^c. 

Conducir,  3.  to  conduct,  to  take. 
Que  yo  condujera  or  condujese,  that  I  might  or  should  conduct. 

etc.  etc. 

Pedir,  3.  to  ask  for. 
Que  3^0  pidiera  or  pidiese,  that  I  might  or  should  ask  for. 

etc.  e^c. 


IMPERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE.     239 


Venir,  3.  to  come. 
Que  yo  viniera  or  viniese,  that  I  might  or  should  come, 

etc.  etc. 

Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell. 
Que  yo  dijera  or  dijese,  that  I  might  or  should  say, 

etc.  etc. 

Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 
Que  yo  saliera  or  saliese,  that  I  might  or  should  go  out. 

etc.  etc. 


Que  yo  fuera  or  fuese, 
etc. 


Ir,  3.  to  go. 

that  I  might  or  should  go. 
etc. 


Vocabulario. 

El  articulo,  the  article. 
El  asunto,  the  business. 
El  espejo,  the  mirror. 
El  gas  to,  the  expense. 
El  idioma,  the  language. 
El  lugar,  the  spot. 
El  medio,  the  means,  the  way. 
Aprobar,  1.  to  approve. 
Arreglar,  1.  to  arrange. 
Convidar,  1.  to  invite. 
Dedicar,  1.  to  devote. 
Devolver,  2.  to  give  hack. 
Dudar,  1.  to  doubt. 


Vocabulary. 

Encontrar,  1.  to  meet. 
Enganar,  1.  to  deceive. 
Fabricar,  1.  to  manufacture. 
Llorar,  1.  to  weep,  to  cry. 
Permitir,  3.  to  alloio. 
Recomendar,  1.  to  recommend. 
Suplicar,  1.  to  entreat. 
Suponer,  2.  to  suppose. 
A  credito,  on  credit. 
En  seguida,  immediately. 
En  tiempo  pasado,  formerly. 
Per  precision,  by  necessity. 
Teoretico,  theoretical. 


Exercise  85. 

1.  Mi  maestro  queria  que  yo  aprendiese  una  leccion  mavS  larga. 
2.  I  Que  queria  V.  que  el  hiciera  sin  dinero  ?  3.  Que  cornprase  las 
mercancias  a  credito.  4.  Estos  dos  caballeros  querian  que  yo  les 
vendiese  mi  caballo.  5.  Yo  no  creia  que  fuese  tan  tarde.  6.  [  Temia 
Y.  que  el  saliese  sin  nosotros  1  7.  Lo  linico  que  yo  temia  era  que  el 
no  nos  esperase.  8.  Era  el  linico  almacen  donde  pudieramos  hallar 
este  articulo.  9.  El  queria  que  yo  le  dijera  lo  que  yo  debia,  antes 
que  me  diera  el  dinero.     10.   i  Dudaba  Y.  que  el  viniera  como  lo 


240  '    LESSON   43. 

habia  prometido  ?  11.  ^  Aprobaba  V.  que  el  me  hablase  asi  ? 
12.  Era  menester  que  gastasemos  muchisimo  dinero  para  arreglar 
nuestra  casa.  13.  Yo  no  creia  que  V.  engaiiase  d  sus  amigos. 
14.  Era  el  unico  medio  que  nos  quedase,  pues  nuestros  asuntos  no 
permitian  que  bicieramos  nuevos  gastos.  15.  Cuando  sali  para 
Francia,  mi  padre  me  recomendo  que  viviese  con  personas  que  no 
bablasen  otro  idioma  mas  que  el  frances,  y  con  quienes  tuviese  que 
bablarlo  por  precision,  bien  6  mal.  16.  Tambien  que  leyese  algunos 
buenos  autores,  y  hecbo  todo  esto  por  algun  tiempo,  me  dedicase 
entonces  al  estudio  teoretico.  17.  \  Quien  bubiera  pensado  que  nos 
encontrariamos  en  un  lugar  como  este,  despues  de  tanto  tiempo  que 
no  nos  benios  visto  !  18.  Yo  le  habia  escrito  a  fin  de  que  viniera. 
19.  He  comido  mucho,  y  mas  de  lo  que  bubiera  debido.  20.  Yo  iba 
todas  las  maiianas  a  su  casa  para  que  me  diera  una  leccion  de  espaiiol. 
21.  Cantaban  aunque  tuviesen  gana  de  llorar.  22.  El  deseaba  que 
yo  fuese  en  seguida  a  su  casa.  23.  Yo  le  habia  suplicado  que  viniese 
temprano,  pero  llego  el  ultimo  de  todos.  24.  Aquel  hombre  pretend ia 
que  le  pagasen  mucho  mas  de  lo  que  habia  ganado.  25.  El  estaba 
muy  sorprendido  de  que  no  supiesemos  nada  de  esto. 


Exercise  86. 

1.  What  did  you  wish  me  to  do?  2.  I  wished  that  you  should 
write  to  your  friend,  and  that  you  should  tell  him  to  return.  3.  I 
was  surprised  that  he  had  not  sent  me  the  money.  4.  It  was  to  be 
desired  that  they  should  finish  in  time.  5.  When  did  he  wish  us  to 
return  the  money  ?  6.  He  wished  that  you  should  return  it  as  soon 
as  possible.  7.  I  did  not  think  that  he  was  so  ill.  8.  Our  teacher 
wished  that  we  would  come  earlier  to  school.  9.  We  were  afraid 
that  it  would  rain  the  whole  day.  10.  He  was  looking  for  a  man 
who  would  lend  him  money.  11.  I  went  to  his  house,  although  I 
was  very  tired.  12.  Our  father  did  not  wish  that  we  should  go  out 
so  late.  13.  He  was  the  best  friend  I  had  in  the  city.  14.  It  was 
the  best  wine  that  I  had  ever  drank.  15.  It  was  very  unfortunate 
that  he  had  lost  all  his  money.  16.  Although  he  was  poor,  he  had 
many  friends.     17.    It  was  very  natural   that   he   should  speak  so. 

18.  He  could  not  spend  so  much  money,  however  rich  he  might  be. 

19.  I  would  not  go  to  his  house  unless  he  invited  me.     20.  He  said 
he  would  come  (vendria)  provided  you  would  send  him  a  carriage. 


IMPERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE.     241 

21.  The  Venetians  were  formerly  the  only  people  who  manufactured 
and  sold  mirrors.  22.  I  was  afraid  he  would  come  without  his 
brother.  23.  I  did  not  think  that  you  were  so  foolish.  24.  It  was 
necessary  for  us  to  go  every  evening  to  his  house.  25.  We  did  not 
think  that  it  was  so  late.  26.  Mr.  Martin  did  not  wish  me  to  go  out 
without  him.  27.  He  was  the  only  one  who  spoke  Spanish.  28.  We 
did  not  suppose  he  would  arrive  in  time.  29.  My  mother  wished  us 
to  sing  for  her. 

Gr^matica.  Grammar. 

1 ,    The  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  has  three  forms  : 
The  first  ending  in  : 

-ra        -ras        -ra        -ramos        -rais        -ran 

the  second  in  : 

-ria        -rias        -ria        -riamos        -rials        -rian 

and  the  third  in  : 

-se        -ses        -se        -semos        -sets        -sen 

The  1st  and  3d  forms,  vrhich  are  treated  in  this  lesson,  are 
formed  from  the  3d  person  plural  of  the  Past  Definite,  by  chang- 
ing the  termination  ion  into  the  terminations  given  above. 

Examples. 

Tuvie-ron,  they  had;  S  t^^ie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran.  ; 

\  tuvie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

Hubie-ron,  they  had;  \  ^^^^^'^^^  -^^s,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 

(  hubie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

Estuvie-ron,  they  were  ;  \  ^^tuvie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 

\  estuvie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

Fue-ron,  they  ivere  ; 

Habla-ron,  they  spoke ;  S 

* 
Comie-ron,  tUy  ate;  \  ^^^^i^-^a,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 

\  comie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 
16 


fue-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
fue-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

habla-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
habla-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 


242  LESSON    43. 

Eecibie-ron,  they  received  ;        I  ™«bie-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
I  recibie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

Pudie-ron,  Ihey  were  able  ;        \  P"die-ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 
(  pudie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  seis,  -sen. 

Supie-ron,  tlicy  knew;  I  su^^-^a,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais,  -ran. 

I  supie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

Dije-ron,  tluy  said;  \  ^^J^"^*'  '^^^'  -^^'  "^^^o^'  -^^is.  -ran. 

(  dije-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

Yinie-ron,  they  came  ;  1  ^'"^'^-"''  -'"'  ■'^»'  "'"""o"'  -«»"-  -'»"• 

I  viuie-se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 

.  etc.  etc. 

Note. — The  second  form  of  the  Subjunctive  will  be  treated  in  the  fol- 
lowing lesson. 

2.  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  used  when  the  verb  of  the 
1st  proposition  which  requires  a  Subjunctive  after  it,  is  in  one 
of  the  Past  tenses  of  the  Indicative  : 

Yo  queria  >.  I  wished  ■>, 

Yo  desee  I   que  el  viniera  /  desired  I  that  he  would 

Yo  he  solicitado        \       6  viniese.  I  have  entreated  [       come. 

Yo  habia  solicitado  -^  I  had  entreated  ^ 

Obsekvation.  —  All  the  general  mles  given  on  the  use  of  the  Present 
Subjunctive,  apply  to  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

3«  The  Present  Subjunctive  may,  however,  be  used  after  the 
Past  Definite,   when  the  time  of  the  action  is  not  definitely 
stated  : 
Le  he  suplicado   que  venga  a  mi  /  have  entreated  him  to  come  to  my 

casa.  house. 

4.  The  Present  or  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  maybe  used 
when  the  verb  of  the  1st  proposition  is  in  the  Futuro  perfecto  : 
iX  habra  pretendido  que  le   dejen        He  will  have  pretended  that  they 

(dejaran  6  dejasen)  libre.  should  let  him  free. 

5t  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  used  instead  of  the  Present 
when  followed  by  a  conditional  clause  : 
i  Cree  V.   que  me  lo  diesen,   si  les        Do  you  think  they  would  give  it  to 

pidiera  ?  me^  if  I  should  ask  them. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    (continued). 


243 


6*  The  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  Imperfect 
Subjunctive  of  the  auxiliary  haber,  to  have  ;  and  the  Past  Parti- 
ciple of  the  verb : 

Que  yo  hubiera  or  hiibiese  hablado ;         that  I  might  have  spoken. 
Que  el  hubiera  or  hubiese  salido  ;  that  I  might  have  gone  out. 


Leccion  XLIY. 


Lesson  XLIY. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  (CONTINUED). 


Conditional  and  Potential  Mood* 

2d  Terinination  of  the  Subjunctive. 


Yo  hablar-ia, 

I  should  or  would  speak. 

Tii  hablar-ias, 

Thou  shouldst  or  wouldst  speak. 

El  hablar-ia, 

He  should  or  would  speak. 

Nosotros  hablar-iamos, 

We  should  or  vjould  speak. 

Vosotros  hablar-iais, 

You  should  or  would  speak. 

EUos  hablar-ian, 

They  should  or  would  speak. 

Yo  come-ria, 

I  should  or  would  eat. 

Tu  come-rias, 

Thou  shouldst  or  wouldst  eat. 

El  come-ria, 

He  should  or  would  eat. 

Nosotros  come-riamos, 

We  should  or  would  eat. 

Vosotros  come-riais, 

You  should  or  would  eat. 

Ellos  come-rian, 

They  should  or  would  eat. 

Yo  recibi-ria, 

I  should  or  would  receive. 

Tu  recibi-rias, 

Thou  shouldst  or  wouldst  receiv 

El  recibi-ria. 

He  should  or  icould  receive. 

Nosotros  recibi-riamos, 

We  should  or  would  receive. 

Vosotros  recibi-riais, 

You  should  or  would  receive. 

Ellos  recibi-rian, 

They  should  or  would  receive. 

Yo  daria, 

I  should  or  would  give. 

etc. 

etc. 

Yo  tendria, 

I  should  or  would  have. 

etc. 

etc. 

244 


LESSON   44. 

Yo  habria. 

/  should  or  would  have. 

etc. 

etc. 

Yo  estaria. 

I  should  or  would  he. 

etc. 

•  etc. 

Yo  seria. 

I  should  or  would  he. 

etc- 

etc. 

Yo  baria. 

I  should  or  would  make  (or  do). 

etc. 

etc. 

Yo  sabria. 

I  should  or  would  know. 

etc 

etc. 

Yo  pondria. 

I  should  or  would  put. 

etc. 

etc. 

Yopodria, 

I  should  or  would  he  ahle. 

ete. 

etc. 

Yo  querria. 

I  should  or  would  he  willing. 

etc 

etc. 

Yo  raldriai. 

I  should  or  would  he  icorth. 

€te» 

etc. 

Yo  dhia. 

I  should  or  would  say. 

etc. 

etc. 

Yo  saldria. 

I  should  or  icould  go  out. 

etc. 

ete. 

Yo  rendria. 

I  should  or  would  coine. 

etc. 

etc. 

rico? 
i  Que  Laria  V.  si  V.  fuese  rico  ? 


Eiemplos^  Examples. 

i  Qiiien  diria  qne  este  honibre  es  tan        Who  would  say  that  that  man  is 

so  rich  ? 
What  would  you  do  if  you  were 

rich? 
Yo  compraria  una  casa  grande.  I  would  buy  a  large  house. 

Si  yo  supiera  hacerlo,  lo  haria.  If  I  knew  how  to  do  it,  I  would 

do  it. 
Yo  escribiria  en  ingles  si  pudiera.  I  would  write  in  English  if  I  could. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   (continued) 


245 


Yo  daria  mucho  para  saber  la  ver- 

dad. 
I  Que  le  escribiria  V.  ? 
Yo  le  escribiria  todo  lo  que  he  oido. 
I  Cuanto  dinero  necesitaria  V.  ? 
Yo  necesitaria  a  lo  menos  cien  pesos. 

I  Estaria  V.  aqui  si  V.  pudiera  salir  ? 

Yo  saldria  en  seguida. 

V.  deberia  venir  conmigo. 

Yo   qiiisiera  saber   donde  esta    mi 

hermano. 
Deheriamos  haber  salido  mas  tem- 

prano. 

Vocabulario. 

El  concepto,  the  opinion. 

El  motivo,  the  ^native. 

El  precio,  the  price. 

El  socorro,  the  assistance. 

El  viento,  the  luind. 

La  clase,  the  class. 

La  cosa,  the  matter  of  importance. 

La  deuda,  the  debt. 

La  fresa,  the  strawberry. 

La  mentira,  the  falsehood. 

La  recompensa,  tlie  recompense. 

Las  senas,  the  direction. 

Cansado,  tired. 

Hasta,  until,  as  far  as. 

Haragan,  lazy. 


I  would  give  much  to  know  the 

truth. 
What  would  you  write  to  him  ? 
I  would  write  all  I  have  heard. 
How  much  money  would  you  need  ? 
I  would  need  at  least  one  hundred 

dollars. 
Would  you  be  here  if  you  could 

go  out  ? 
I  would  go  out  immediately. 
You  ought  to  come  witli  me. 
I  should  like  to  know  where  my 

brother  is. 
We  oicght  to  have  gone  out  sooner. 


Vocabulary. 

;  Ojala !  would  to  God  / 
Por  cierto,  certainly. 
Adelantar,  1.  to  be  fast. 
Cambiar,  1.  to  exchange. 
Descubrir,  3.  to  discover. 
Dirigir,  3.  to  direct. 
Examinar,  1.  to  examine. 
Formar,  1.  to  form. 
Jugar,  1.  to  play. 
Marchar,  1.  to  go. 
Molestar,  1.  to  trouble. 
Obligar,  1.  to  oblige. 
Pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Pegar,  1.  to  strike. 
Bepetir,  3.  to  repeat. 


Exercise  87, 

1.  Yo  aprenderia  el  frances  si  tiiviera  tiempo  de  estudiar.  2.  Colon 
prometio  una  recompensa  al  primero  que  descubriera  la  tierra.  3.  Si 
y.  fuera  al  campo  este  aiio,  yo  iria  tambien.  4.  Los  muchachos  habri- 
an  comido  todas  las  fresas  si  no  hubieran  tenido  niiedo  de  ser  castiga- 
dos.  5.  V.  podria  saber  la  verdad  si  V.  quisiera.  6.  Yo  le  habria 
mandado  su  carta,  si  hubiera  sabido  donde  V.  vivia.  7.  i  Querria  V. 
hacerine  un  favor  1    8.  Con  mucho  gusto  ;  que  desea  Y.  ?     9.  Quisiera 


246  LESSON   44. 

que  V.  me  lie  vase  esta  carta  al  correo.  10.  Nada  mas  facil,  deme  V. 
la  carta.  11.  i  Podria  V.  hacer  eso  sin  mi?  12.  Podria  hacerlo  si  no 
estuviese  tan  cansado.  13.  Lloveria  si  no  hiciera  tanto  viento. 
14.  Seria  bueno  que  V.  fuese  a  verle.  15.  Si  hubieramos  recibido  el 
dinero  que  esperabamos,  habriamos  salido  con  el  vapor  frances.  16.  Si 
V.  supiera  lo  que  el  ha  dicho  de  su  amigo,  V.  no  estaria  satisfecho. 
17.  [Cree  V.  que  si  el  no  viniese,  iria  yo  a  verle?  18.  j  Ojala  no 
hubiera  yo  perdido  mi  dinero  !  19.  Si  lloviese  esta  tarde,  y  no  pu- 
dieramos  ir  al  canipo,  iriamos  al  teatro  esta  noche.  20.  Este  b ombre 
tendria  mas  dinero,  si  no  hubiese  jugado.  21.  ^unque  fuesemos 
ricos,  no  pagariamos  el  precio  que  nos  pide.  22.  Beberiamos  si 
tuviesemos  mejor  agua.  23.  El  S.  D.  Pedro  Molina  me  dijo  que 
dejaria  a  V.  sus  senas  para  dirigirle  sus  cartas  en  Paris,  y  con  este 
motivo  me  he  tomado  la  libertad  de  molestar  a  V.  24.  Yo  no  cam- 
biaria  mi  caballo  por  el  suyo.  25.  Quisiera  que  V.  examinase  mi  reloj, 
pues  no  marcha  bien.  26.  [  Marchaba  bien,  antes  ?  27.  Adelantaba 
un  poco,  pero  no  era  cosa ;  cinco  minutos  cad  a  veinticuatro  horas. 
28.  [  Porque  no  me  escribio  V.  cuando  estaba  en  Paris  ?  29.  Yo  le 
hubiera  escrito,  si  no  hubiese  pensado  que  Y.  habia  salido  de  la 
ciudad.     30.  Si  tuvieramos  tiempo,  iriamos  con  Y.  hasta  la  ciudad. 

Exercise  88. 

1.  What  would  you  do,  if  you  were  invited  to  that  ball  ?  2.  I 
should  certainly  not  go.  3.  I  should  tell  a  falsehood  if  I  said  that. 
4.  Would  you  like  to  go  with  me  ?  5.  I  would  go,  if  I  had  time. 
6.  That  poor  man  would  have  died  without  assistance,  if  I  had  not 
come  in  time.  7.  Would  you  have  received  my  letter  in  time,  if  I 
had  written  to  you  ?  8.  No,  your  letter  would  have  arrived  too  late. 
9.  What  would  you  have  done,  if  he  had  struck  you  ?  10.  He  never 
would  have  struck  me  ;  he  is  afraid  of  me.  11.  Would  you  repeat 
what  he  said  ?  12.  I  would  repeat  it,  if  you  wished.  13.  We  would 
buy  that  house,  if  it  were  not  too  small  for  us.  14.  Would  you  buy 
mine  ?  15.  I  would  buy  it,  if  you  sold  it.  16.  You  would  be  now  in 
the  first  class,  if  you  had  not  been  so  lazy.  17.  I  should  like  to  see 
your  brother,  where  is  he  now  ?  18.  He  must  be  in  his  room,  if  he 
has  not  gone  out.  19. .You  ought  to  have  spoken  to  that  man  when 
he  was  here.  20.  Were  you  not  afraid  that  he  would  go  out  without 
you  ?    21.  Yes,  I  was  afraid  he  would  forget  me.     22.  I  should  wish 


SUBJUNCTIVE  (continued).  247 

them  to  be  here  to-morrow  morning  early.  23.  It  would  be  necessary 
for  him  to  give  me  at  least  two  hundred  dollars.  24.  I  wish  that  I  had 
never  known  him.  25.  Had  I  seen  the  new  comedy,  I  would  have 
told  you  how  it  was.  26.  If  you  always  worked  as  much  as  to-day, 
you  would  soon  be  rich.  27.  What  opinion  would  you  have  formed 
of  me,  if  I  had  done  what  they  wished  me  to  do  1  28.  That  young 
man  would  not  pay  his  debts,  if  he  were  not  obliged.  29.  If  I  had 
thought  that  you  were  sick,  I  would  not  have  gone  out.  30.  I  would 
not  speak  to  that  man,  although  he  were  rich. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1 ,  The  Second  form  of  the  Subjunctive  ending  in 

-ia,        -ias,        -ia,        -iamos,        -iais,        -ian, 
is  formed   from  the   First  person  singular  of  the  Future,   by 
changing  the  termination  e  into  the  terminations  given  above  : 

Hablare,     /  shall  or  will  speak.  Hablaria,  /  should  or  would  speak. 

Comere,      /  shall  or  will  eat.  Comeria,  /  should  or  would  eat. 

Recibire,    /  shall  or  will  receive.  Recibiria,  /  should  or  would  receive. 

etc.  etc. 

This  Second  form  of  the  Subjunctive  has  therefore  all  the 
irregularities  of  the  Future. 

2,  The  Second  form  of  the  Subjunctive,  as  well  as  the  First 
form,  which  ends  in 

-ra,        -ras,        -ra,        -ramos,        -rais,        -ran, 

is  also  used  in  conditional  phrases,  corresponding  to  the  verb 
with  should  or  would  in  English.  These  forms  are  therefore 
called  sometimes  Imperfect  Conditionals. 

In  phrases  in  which  these  forms  are  used  with  the  Potential, 
there  are  generally  two  sentences,  one  of  which  is  the  principal 
and  the  other  the  subordinate.  In  Spanish,  the  verb  of  the  prin- 
cipal sentence  takes  the  second  termination  in  -ia,  -ias,  -ia, 
-iamos,  -iais,  -ian ;  while  the  verb  of  the  subordinate  sentence 
takes  either  the  first  termination  in  -ra,  -ras,  -ra,  -ramos,  -rais, 
-ran,  or  the  third  termination  in  -se,  -ses,  -se,  -semos,  -seis,  -sen. 


248  LESSON   44. 

These  forms  are  generally  preceded  or  followed  in  English  by 
the  conjunction  if,  d  ;  with  a  verb  in  the  Imperfect  tense  : 

Si    recibiesemos    {or    recibieramos)        If  we  should  receive  money^   we 
dinero,  saldriamos  para  la  ciudad,  would  leave  for  the  city. 

■  3«    The  conjunction  si,  if ;  although  sometimes  understood  in 
English,  should  be  expressed  in  Spanish  : 
Si  yo  estuviera  {or  estuviese)  bueno,         Were  I  (if  I  were)  in  good  healthy 

yo  iria  con  Y.,  I  would  go  with  you. 

Observation.  — Although  there  are  cases  in  Spanish  where  the  conjunc- 
tion may  be  left  out,  the  student  will  do  well  to  adhere  to  the  rule,  as 
the  omission  of  the  conjunction  cannot  be  determined  by  definite  rules.     ^ 

4,  The  sentence  may  commence  in  Spanish  either  by  the 
conjunction  si,  if ;  or  by  the  principal  proposition  : 

Iria  con  V.  si  tuviese  {or  tuviera)  dinero,    )  /  would  go  with  you  if  I  had 
Si  tuviese  {or  tuviera)  dinero,  iria  con  V. ,  S  money. 

If,  however,  the  sentence  does  not  commence  with  the  conjunc- 
tion, the  principal  verb  must  take  the  termination  -ra  or  -ria, 
that  is,  the  first  termination  or  that  of  the  Conditional.  The 
termination  se  could  not  be  used  correctly  : 

Tuviera  or  tendria    mas    dinero   si        He  would  have  more  money  if  he 
fuese  mas  prudente,  were  inore  prudent. 

5,  When  expressing  a  wish,  without  a  preceding  conjunction, 
the  termination  -ra  or  -ria  must  be  used  : 

;  Daria  todo  lo  que  tengo  para  verle  !        I  would  give  all  I  hrtve  to  see  him  ! 
i  Cuanto  me  alegrara  de  verle  !  Hoio  glad  I  would  he  to  see  him  I 

6«    If  an  interjection  precedes  the  wish  expressed  the  termi- 
nation -ra  or  -se  must  be  used  : 
I  Ojala  no  le  hubiera  {or  hubiese)  yo         Would    to   God   that   I  had  not 

conocido  !  known  him  ! 

7.  Although  the  conjunction  is  generally  left  out  in  Spanish 
in  the  second  sentence,  as  is  the  case  in  English,  it  may,  how- 
ever, be  repeated  if  we  wish  to  emphasize  what  we  express  : 


SUBJUNCTIVE  (continued).  249 

Si  lloviese   y  no  pudieramos   ir  al  If  it  rained  and  we  could  not  go  to 

campo,  iriamos  al  teatro,  the  country ,  we  would  go  to  the 

theatre. 

Aun    cuando   V.    tuviese    todo    el  Even  if  you  had  all  the  money  in 

dinero  del  mimdo,  y  aun  cuando  the  world  and  you  would  give  it 

V.  me  lo  diese  para  que  le  descu-  to  me  to  reveal  this  secret  to  you, 

briera  este  secreto,  no  lo  haria,  /  would  not  do  it, 

8.    The  Present  Indicative  may  also  govern  the  Conditional, 
if  this  tense  is  followed  or  preceded  by  another  sentence  in  the 
Imperfect  Subjunctive  : 
i  Cree  V.  que  iria  yo  a  verle  sin  que        Bo  you  think  that  I  would  go  and 

el  viuiese  ?  or  i  Cree  V.  que  si  el  see  him  without  his  coming  ? 

no  viniese  iria  yo  a  verle  ? 

9»  AVhen  the  determining  verb  is  in  one  of  the  Preterites  of 
the  Indicative,  it  governs  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  or  the  Con- 
ditio7ial  : 

Creyo  )  que  le  pidieran  (pidiesen     He  thought  (or  had  thought)  that 

Habia  pensado  )  or  pedirian)  una  fianza,  they  would  ask  him  for  a  se- 

curity. 

The  Pluperfect  or  the  Past  Conditional  may  also  be  used  : 
Creiamos  que  ya  hubiera  (hubiese  or         We  thought  that  he  would  already 
habria)  acabado  su  trabajo,  have  finished  his  work. 

10#  Other  conjunctions  implying  a  condition  such  as  aunque, 
bien  que,  although,  though;  dado  que,  granting ;  require  also 
the  Subjunctive  : 

Aunque  fuese  toi  aifiigo  no  le  per-         Though  he  were  my  friend  I  would 
donaria,  not  forgive  him. 


lit    Potential  Mood. 

1.  May  and  can  may  be  translated  either  by  the  Present  In- 
dicative or  by  the  Present  Subjunctive  of  the  verb  poder,  2.  to  be 
able  ;  and  also  by  the  Present  Subjunctive  of  the  verb  used  in  the 
sentence  : 

Puedo  venir,  /  can  come. 

Se  puede  que  venga,  /  unay  come. 


250  LESSON    44. 

Deme  Y.  el  dinero  para  que  pueda        Give  me  the  money,  that  I  may 
pagar  lo  que  deho,  or  Deme  V.  el  jpay  what  I  owe. 

dinero  para  que  pague  lo  que  debo, 

2.  Could,  might,  should,  would. 

Could  is  rendered  by  the  Conditional  of  the  verb  poder,  when 
a  condition  is  implied,  and  by  the  Imperfect  or  Preterite  of  the 
same  verb  when  it  implies  power  : 

Yo  podria  ir  si  quisiera,  /  could  go  if  I  ivished. 

Yo  no  podia  ir  solo,  )  j  ^^^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^  ^^^  ^^  ^^^^^^ 

Yo  no  pude  ir  solo,    ) 

3.  Might  is  translated  by  the  Conditional  of  the  verb  poder 
when  power  is  implied  : 

El  podria  venir  si  quisiera,         He  might  come  if  he  wished. 
When  implying  possibility  it  is  expressed  in  the  same  way  as 
may: 

Se  puede  que  venga,         He  may  or  might  come. 

4.  Should,  implying  duty,  or  meaning  ought  to,  is  rendered 
by  the  Conditional  of  the  verb  deber  : 

Y.  deberia  venir  conmigo,  You  ought  to  come  with  me. 

Deberian  obedecer.  They  should  obey. 

5.  Should  like  to  is  rendered  by  the  first  or  second  form  of 
the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  the  verb  querer : 

Quisiera  or  querria  verle,         /  should  like  to  see  him. 

6.  Would,  implying  willingness,  is  rendered  by  the  Imperfect 
Indicative  or  Preterite  of  the  verb  querer : 

No  queria  (or  no  quiso)  hablar,         He  would  not  speak. 

7.  Might  have  and  should  have  are  in  most  cases  translated 
by  the  Conditional  of  the  verbs  poder  and  deber  with  the  In- 
finitive of  haber : 

El  podria  haber  venido,  He  might  have  come. 

El  deberia  haber  veuido,         He  should  have  come. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   FUTURE  AND   FUTURE   PERFECT. 


251 


Leccion  XLV. 


Lesson  XLV. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT. 


1.  Haber,  2.  — 

Hubiere  —  tuviere, 
Hubieres  —  tuvieres, 
Hubiere  —  tuviere, 
Hubieremos  —  tuviereraos, 
Hubiereis  —  tuviereis, 
Hubieren  —  tuvieren, 


Tener,  2.  to  have. 
I  shall  or  will  have, 
thou  shall  or  wilt  have, 
he  shall  or  will  have, 
we  shall  or  will  have, 
you  sJmll  or  will  have, 
they  shall  or  will  have. 


3.  Estar,  1.  — 

Estuviere  —  fuere, 
Estuvieres  —  fueres, 
Estuviere  —  fuere, 
Estuvieremos  —  fueremos, 
Estuviereis  —  fuereis, 
Estuvieren  —  fueren, 


Ser,  2.  to  be. 
I  shall  or  will  be. 
thou  shall  or  wilt  be. 
he  shall  or  will  be. 
ive  shall  or  loill  be. 
you  shall  or  will  be. 
tliey  shofll  or  will  be. 


5.  Hablar,  1.  to  speak.        6.  Comer,  2.  to  eat.        7.  Recibir,  3.  to  receive. 


Hablare  —  comiere  —  recibiere, 
Hablares  —  coinieres — recibieres, 
Hablare  —  comiere  —  recibiere, 
Hablaremos  —  comieremos  —  re- 

cibieremos, 
Hablareis  —  comiereis  —  recibie- 

reis, 
Hablaren  —  comieren  —  recibie- 

reu, 


I  shall  or  will  speak  —  eat  —  receive. 
thou  shall  or  wilt  speak — eat — receive, 
he  shall  or  will  speak  —  eat  —  receive, 
we  shall  or  will  speak —  eat  —  receive. 

you  shall  or  will  speak  —  ecU  —  receive. 

they  shall  or  vnll  speak  —  eat  —  re- 
ceive. 


Vocabulario. 
El  alojamiento,  tJie  lodging. 
El  invierno,  tlie  ivinter. 
El  lugar,  the  place. 
La  amistad,  the  friendship. 
La  noticia,  the  neios. 
Frio,  cold. 
Acabar,  1.  to  finish. 


Vocabulary. 
Aconsejar,  1.  to  advise. 
Acontecer,  2.  to  happen. 
Encontrar,  1.  tofindj  to  meet. 
Mandar,  1.  to  order. 
Olvidar,  1.  to  forget. 
Padecer,  2.  to  suffer. 
Prescribir,  3.  to  prescribe. 


252  LESSON    45. 


Exercise  89. 

1.  Si  el  proximo  invierno  fuere  tan  frio  como  el  ultimo,  los  pobres 
.padeceran  mucliisimo.  2.  [  Ira  V.^a  pasar  el  domingo  conmigo  en  el 
campo  ?  3.  Si  yo  hiibiere  acabado  lo  que  tengo  que  hacer,  ire  con 
mucho  gusto.  4.  Tu  padre  me  ha  dicho  que  si  tu  estudiares  bien,  te 
dara  un  bonito  reloj.  5.  No  saldre  manana,  si  el  tiempo  fuere  tan 
malo  como  hoy.  6.  Si  viere  V.  a  su  padre  maiiana,  no  olvide  lo  que  le 
he  dicho.     7.  Llevaremos  a  su  hermano  con  nosotros,  si  fuere  posible. 

8.  Comprare  la  casa  en  que  vivo,  cuando  tuviere  dinero.  9.  Si  al- 
morzare  temprano  manana,  ire  a  ver  a  mi  amigo.  10.  No  olvidare- 
mos  nada  de  lo  que  la  amistad  prescribiere. 

Exercise  90. 

1.  They  have  promised  to  tell  me  all  that  shall  happen  while  I  shall 
be  (am)  absent.  2.  Tell  your  friend  when  you  (shall)  meet  him,  that  I 
have  good  news  for  him.  3.  If  you  breakfast  to-morrow  at  {en)  the 
same  place,  bring  me  the  umbrella  which  I  forgot  there.  4.  You 
must  do,  my  friend,  all  that  your  father  (shall)  commands  you. 
5.  The  physician  has  advised  me  {de)  not  to  go  to  the  country,  if  the 
weather  is  not  any  better.  6.  If  you  are  unwell  in  the  country,  come 
back  to  the  city.  7.  If  we  should  have  money  next  month,  we  will 
send  you  some.     8.  When  I  find  a  good  teacher,  I  will  learn  Spanish. 

9.  We  will  write  to  you  if  we  should  be  satisfied  with  {de)  our  new 
lodging.     10.  We  will  go  out,  when  we  have  dined. 

Gramatica.  Grammar. 

I,  The  Future  of  the  Subjunctive,  of  which  the  termina- 
tions are 

-re,        -res,        -re,       -remos,        -reis,       -ren, 

expresses  a  positive  future  conditional  action,  and  is  therefore 
used  'in  conditional  phrases  with  si,  if,  to  denote  a  future  time. 
It  is  also  used  with  cuando,  when,  and  other  relatives,  when 
future  time  is  expressed. 

The  rules  given  for  the  use  of  the  Present  of  the  Subjunctive 
are  applicable  to  the  Future  of  the  Subjunctive  when  the  sense 
is  conditional  or  future.     The  Future  of  the  Subjunctive  is  not 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 


253 


of  freqiieDt  use,  and  occurs  in  the  sentence  to  give  more  energy 
and  precision  to  the  idea  expressed. 

The  Future  Perfect  of  the  Subjunctive  is  formed  from  the 
Future  of  the  Subjunctive  of  the  auxiliary  haber,  to  have  ;  and. 
the  Past  Participle  of  the  verb. 


Leccion  XLYI. 


Lesson  XLVI. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


I,    Government  of  the  Infinitive  without  Preposition  : 
Principal  verbs  requiring  no  Preposition  before  the  following  Infinitive : 


Aconsejar,  1.  to  advise. 
Acostumbrar,  1.  to  accustom. 
Afirmar,  1.  to  affirm. 
Concebir,  3.  to  conceive, 
Confesar,  1.  to  confess. 
Contar,  1.  to  relate. 
Creer,  2.  to  believe. 
Declarar,  1.  to  declare. 
Deber,  2.  to  owe,  must. 
Dejar,  1.  to  let^  to  leave. 
Desear,  1.  to  dxsire. 
Esperar,  1.  to  hope. 
Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do. 
Imaginar,  1.  to  imagine. 
Intentar,  1.  to  intend. 
Mandar,  1.  to  order. 
Manifestar,  1.  to  manifest, 
etc.  etc 


Necesitar,  1.  to  need. 
Negar,  1.  to  deny. 
Oir,  3.  to  hear. 
Parecer,  2.  to  appear. 
Pensar,  1.  to  think,  to  intend. 
Poder,  2.  to  be  able. 
Preferir,  3.  to  prefer. 
Presumir,  3.  to  2iresume. 
Pretender,  2.  to  pretend. 
Prohibir,  3.  to  forbid. 
Prometer,  2.  to  promise. 
Protestar,  1.  to  protest. 
Querer,  2.  to  be  loilling. 
Sentir,  3.  to  feel,  to  regret. 
Soler,  2.  to  be  accustomed. 
Temer,  2.  to  fear. 
Ver,  2.  to  see. 
etc.  etc. 


EJempIos. 

Deseo  tener  dinero. 

El  afirma  liaber  dicho  la  verdad. 

Temo  ver  a  mi  amigo. 

Voo  venir  mucha  gente. 

Ose  decirle  la  verdad. 

Oigo  llairiar  a  la  puerta. 


Examples. 

I  wish  to  have  money. 
He  affirms  that  he  has  told  the  truth. 
I  fear  to  see  my  friend. 
I  see  many  people  coming. 
I  dared  to  tell  him  the  truth. 
I  hear  (some  one)  knocking  at  the 
door. 


254 


LESSON    46. 


2.    Government  of  the  Infinitive  with  the  Preposition  a  : 
Principal  verbs  requiring  the  Preposition  a  before  the  following  Infinitive : 
Animar,  1.  to  encourage, 
Aprender,  2.  to  learn. 
Aspirar,  1.  to  aspire. 
Ayudar,  1.  to  help. 
Comenzar,  1.  to  comynence. 
Condenar,  1.  to  condemn, 
Consentir,  3.  to  consent, 
Convidar,  1.  to  invite, 
etc.  etc. 


Empezar,  \.  to  \ 
Ensenar,  1.  to  teach. 
Habituar,  1.  to  accustom, 
Inclinar,  1.  to  incline, 
Invitar,  1.  to  invite. 
Salir,  3.  to  go  out. 
Tender,  2.  to  aim, 
Venir,  3.  to  come. 
etc.  etc. 


Ejemplos. 
Autorizo  a  V.  d  hablar. 
El  vino  d  visitarme, 
SaH  d  ver  los  soldados. 
El  me  ensena  d  cantar. 
Nos  convido  d  comer  con  el. 


^EiXamples. 
I  authorize  you  to  speak. 
He  came  to  visit  me. 
I  went  out  to  see  the  soldiers. 
He  teaches  me  to  sing. 
He  invited  us  to  dine  with  him. 


3.    Government  of  the  Infinitive  with  the  preposition  de  : 

Principal  verbs  requiring  the  Preposition  de  before  the  following  In- 
finitive : 
Cesar,  1.  to  cease.  Escusar,  1.  to  excuse. 

Disuadir,  3.  to  dissuade.  Eximir,  3.  to  free. 

Encargar,  1.  to  commission.         Rabiar,  1.  to  rage, 
etc.  etc.  etc.         etc. 


Ejemplos.  Examples. 

Ceso  de  venir  aqui.  He  ceased  coming  here. 

Me  encargo  de  darle  a  V.  esta  carta.      He  requested  me  to  give  you  this 

.   letter. 

4»    Government  of  the  Infinitive  with  the  preposition  para : 
Lo  hago  para  complacerle  a  V.  I  do  it  to  please  you. 

Trabajo  para  ganar  dinero.  I  work  to  earn  money. 

5«    Government  of  the  Infinitive  with  the  preposition  en : 
Le  ocupo  en  escribir  una  carta.  I  employ  him  to  write  a  letter. 

Persiste  en  querer  salir.  He  insists  on  going  out. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


255 


6i  •  Government  of  the  Infinitive  with  the  preposition  con : 

Le  entretengo  con  leerle  algo  in-         I  amuse  him  by  reading  something 
teresante.  interesting  to  him. 


7.    The  Infinitive  used  with 

Mucho  temo  el  verle  venir. 

El   perfecto  tocar  de  este  miisico 

me  encanta. 
No  es  tan  facil  el  escrihir  un  buen 

poema. 
A\  verle,  me  fui. 
Al  salir,  recibio  una  carta. 
Enfermo  del  mucho  heber. 
Al  ir  a  verle,  le  encontre. 


the  Article : 

I  much  fear  to  see  him  come. 

The  perfect  playing  of  this  musician 

delights  me. 
It  is  not   so  easy  to  write  a  good 

poem. 
On  seeing  him  I  went  away. 
On  going  out,  he  received  a  letter. 
He  became  sick  from  much  drinking. 
In  going  to  see  him,  I  met  him. 


Vocabulario. 
El  centavo,  the  cent* 
El  paseo,  the  walk. 
El  viaje,  the  journey. 
La  autorizacion,  the  authorization. 
La  dificultad,  the  difficulty. 
La  intencion,  the  intention. 
La  pagina,  the  page. 
La  traducion,  the  translation. 
Bajo,  loiu. 

Dispuesto,  disposed. 
Inocente,  innocent. 
Seguro,  sure. 
Tal,  such  as. 

Acostumbrar,  1.  to  accustom. 
Acusar,  1.  to  accuse. 
Autorizar,  I.  to  aiithorize. 
Ayudar,  1.  to  help. 
Complacer,  2.  to  please. 
Consistir,  3.  to  consist. 
Copiar,  1.  to  copy. 


Vocabulary. 
Dar  (1.)  un  paseo,  to  take  a  walk. 
Deber,  2.  must. 
Descansar,  1.  to  rest. 
Dibujar,  1.  to  draw. 
Encargar,  1.  to  charge. 
En  tender,  2.  to  understand. 
Escusar,  1.  to  excuse. 
Esperar,  1.  to  expect. 
Gobernar,  1.  to  'inanage,  to  goveim. 
Gritar,  1.  to  cry. 
Inducir,  3.  to  induce. 
Obligar,  1.  to  compel. 
Osar,  1.  to  dare. 
Partir,  3.  to  leave. 
Pensar,  1.  to  intend. 
Resolver,  2.  to  resolve. 
Soler,  2.  to  he  in  the  habit. 
Visitar,  1.  to  visit. 
Volver  (2.)  a  hacer,  2.  to  do  again. 


Exercise  91. 

1.  Creo  haher  visto  a  sii  hermano  en  el  concierto,  pero  no  estoy 
seguro  si  era  el.  2.  [  Me  promete  V.  venir  manana  ?  3.  Yo  se  lo  pro- 
meto  a  V.     4.  Acostumbro  comer  y  dormir  poco.    5.  V.  no  me  deja 


256  LESSON   46. 

trabajar  con  su  mucho  hablar.  6.  No  podremos  salir  hoy,  porque 
tenemos  inucliisimo  que  liacer.  7.  Su  ainigo  de  V.  debe  saber  a  que 
bora  llega  el  correo.  8.  i  Quien  le  ha  autorizado  a  V.  a  hacer  eso  ? 
9.  Nadie  me  ha  autorizado,  pero  yo  creia  poder  hacerlo  sin  autoriza- 
cion.  10.  No  estoy  acostumbrado  a  corner  tanto.  11.  Mi  amigo  vino 
a  visitarme  ayer,  pero  no  estabamos  en  casa.  12.  El  comenzo  hablando 
bajo  y  acabo  gritando.  13.  Mi  padre  me  ha  encargado  de  decirle  a  V. 
que  sentia  mucho  no  poder  mandarle  el  dinero  hoy.  14.  Nunca  le 
escusare  de  haber  hablado  asi.  15.  Vengo  a  ver  si  ha  llegado  de  la 
Habana  el  seiior  Alvarez.  16.  No  puedo  decirselo,  porque  no  lo  se. 
17.  [  Porque  trabaja  V.  tan  tarde  ]  18.  Lo  hago  para  complacerle  a  mi 
padre.  19.  Este  hombre  no  entiende  gobernar  su  casa.  20.  He 
resuelto  no  salir  de  la  ciudad  este  verano.    21.  [  A  donde  va  V.  ah  oral 

22.  Voy  a  visitar  a  algunos  amigos  que  han   llegado  de  Francia. 

23.  La  dificultad  consiste  en  saber  donde   hallar  al   senor  Eomero. 

24.  Anduve  todo  el  dia  para  ver  si  encontraba  ui^p,  casa  bastante 
grande  para  mi  familia.  25.  Preste  dos  libros  a  su  amigo  de  V.,  pero 
el  no  ha  vuelto  a  traermelos.  26.  Acabo  de  ver  al  Seiior  Juliano 
en  la  calle.  27.  Me  dijo  que  acababa  de  llegar  de  Europa.  28.  Mis 
hijas  aprenden  a  dibujar  con  el  Senor  Rondel.  29.  El  banquero 
nos  convido  a  comer,  pero  no  pudimos  ir.  30.  Aquel  profesor  fue  el 
que  me  enseno  a  hablar  ingles. 

Exercise  92. 

1.  We  went  out  this  morning  to  see  the  procession,  but  we  did  not 
see  anything  ;  for  we  arrived  too  late.  2.  My  brother  begins  to  speak 
Spanish.  3.  I  went  to  see  your  brother  last  Sunday,  but  they  told 
me  that  he  was  not  in  (the)  town.  4.  I  am  working  now  to  rest  this  - 
evening.  5.  I  intend  to  leave  at  the  end  of  this  week.  6.  What  have 
you  resolved  to  do  ?  7.  I  have  resolved  to  sell  my  house,  and  to  buy 
a  larger  one.  8.  When  are  you  going  to  bring  me  my  books  ?  9.  I 
am  going  to  bring  them  to-morrow.  10.  The  physician  has  advised 
me  not  to  go  out  to-day.  11.  He  continued  to  sing  and  I  to  write. 
12.  I  am  in  the  habit  of  writing  every  week  to  my  family.  13.  If 
you  will  helj)  me  to  finish  my  translation,  I  will  help  you  to  copy 
these  pages..  14.  You  cannot  compel  me  to  do  this.  15.  I  am  dis- 
posed to  pay  what  is  right,  but  not  one  cent  more.  16.  Nothing  will 
induce  me  to  visit  him.  17.  He  thought  that  he  could  do  it  without 
me,  but  he  very  soon  saw  that  it  was  impossible.     18.  I  dared  to  tell 


INFINITIVE  MOOD.  257 

him  the  truth,  and  he  forgave  me.  19.  We  were  invited  to  go  to  the 
country,  but  we  could  not  leave  our  work.  20.  If  I  do  it,  it  is  only 
to  please  you,  21.  AVe  wish  to  have  money  to  go  to  the  theater. 
22.  He  protests  that  he  never  had  such  an  intention.  23.  I  fear  not 
to  have  money  enough  for  my  journey.  24.  Will  you  promise  me 
never  to  do  that  again  ?  25.  I  cannot  promise  that.  26.  Will  you 
tell  your  brother  that  we  expect  him  to-morrow  ?  27.  We  are  going 
to  take  a  walk  this  evening,  will  you  come  with  us  1  28.  We  cannot 
go,  we  have  too  much  to  do.  29.  Do  you  know  how  to  speak  French  ? 
30.  No,  sir,  I  only  speak  English.  31.  He  accuses  me  of  having  done 
that,  but  I  assure  you  that  I  am  innocent. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1.  Some  Spanish  verbs  require  no  preposition  before  another 
verb  in  the  Infinitive  Mood.  Such  are  principally  the  verbs 
which  indicate  desire,  wish,  fear,  doubt,  need,  duty,  and  also 
those  which  express  a  thought  or  speech,  command,  advice,  prohi- 
bition, and  a  few  others  as  given  above.  Many  of  these  verbs 
may  also  be  used  with  the  Present  Indicative  and  the  conjunc- 
tion que : 

,  El   cuenta   que   ha   ganado  niucho        He  says  tJoat  he  has  earned  much 
diiiero,  money. 

2,  Although  according  to  the  Spanish  Academy  the  verb 
decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell,  must  never  be  followed  by  an  Infinitive, 
many  writers  do  not  adhere  to  this  rule  : 

Afiadian    el    perjuicio    que    decian         They  added  the  prejudice   which 
recibir.  —  Quintana.  they  said  they  were  receiving. 

Note.  —  The  verb  decir  requires  in  other  cases  the  preposition  a  be- 
fore a  person,  and  de  before  a  verb. 

Dije  a  mi  hermano  de  venir,         /  told  my  brother  to  coone. 

3f  Other  verbs  require  in  Spanish  the  preposition  a  before 
another  verb  in  the  Infinitive  Mood. 

Such  are  principally  those  Avhich  express  a  destination,  encour- 
agement, habit,  propriety,  etc.,  and  others  given  above. 
17 


258  LESSON    46. 

Verbs  which  indicate  motion,  as  venir,  3.  to  come  ;  salir,  3.  to 

go  out ;  belong  to  the  same  category. 

4,  The  verb  comenzar,  1.  empezar,  1.  and  acabar,  1.  require 
the  preposition  por  in  the  sense  of  to  begin  with,  and  to  end  by  : 

La  diversion  comenzo  por  cantar,  y         The  amusement  began  with  singing 
acabo  por  llorar,  and  ended  with  crying. 

Note.  —  In  cases  hke  the  above,  the  Gerund  is  more  generally  used  : 
Comenzo    hablando    bajo    y    acabo        He  began  sioeaking  low  and  ended 
gritando,  by  shouting. 

5t  Those  verbs  which  govern  the  Infinitive  with  the  preposi- 
tion de  are  principally  those  which  express  distance,  cessation, 
accusation,  discussion,  and  a  few  others  : 

Note.  —  The  preposition  de  is  also  used  when  the  Infinitive,  as  genitivo 
partitivo,  genitive  2^ctrtitive,  is  governed  by  a  noun  : 

Tengo  el  honor  de  saludar  a  Y.,         I  have  the  honor  to  salute  you. 

6«    The  preposition  para  is  used  before  the  Infinitive  to  ex- 
press more  forcibly  an  intention,  and  whenever  the  English  prej)o- 
sition  to  may  be  rendered  by  in  order  to : 
Trabajo  ahora  para  descansar  luego,        /  am  working  noiv  to  rest  later. 

7t  Those  verbs  which  express  occupation  or  insistance  require 
the  preposition  en  before  the  Infinitive  : 

Me  ocupa  en  leer.  He  occupies  me  in  reading. 

Persiste  en  decirlo,  He  persists  in  saying  so. 

8.  The  preposition  COn  governs  in  the  Infinitive  those  verbs 
which  indicate  entertainment,  diversion,  amusement,  etc.  : 

Le  entretengo  con  contarle  cuentos,         I  amuse  him  by  telling  him  stories. 
Note.  —  The  Gerund  is  oftener  used,  however,  in  such  cases : 
Le  divierto  tocando  el  piano,         I  amuse  him  by  playing  on  the  piano. 

9.  Some  verbs  may  take  or  omit  either  of  the  prepositions 
according  to  their  meaning  : 

Este  hombre  no  entiende  hacer  eso.  That  man  does  not  understand  how 

to  do  that. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD.  259 

No  entiendo  de  meterme  en  negocios        /  dcniH  mean  to  meddle  with  other 

ageiios,  peoples  hasiness. 

Acerte  a  verle  al  ir  a  su  casa,  /  succeeded  in  seeing  him  mi  goivg 

to  his  house. 
He  acertado  en  hablar  con  el,  /  have  done  right  in  speaking  to 

him. 

KoTE.  —  There  are  even  verbs  which  have  different  meanings  with  the 
same  preposition  : 

Dejo  de  escribir  cuando  entre,        He  ceased  ivriting  when  I  entered, 
No  deje  V.  de  escribirme,  Do  not  neglect  ivriting  to  me. 

10.  The  following  rules  for  the  guidance  of  the  student  in 
the  use  of  Prepositions  require  special  attention  : 

1.  When  the  Infinitive  occurs  in  the  sentence  as  subject  or 
object  of  the  determining  verb,  it  is  used  without  a  preposition 
when  the  question  who  ?  or  what  ?  may  be  asked  : 

He  resuelto  salir  hoy,         /  have  resolved  (what  ?)  to  go  out  to-day. 
El  ofrecio  ayudarme.  He  offered  (what  ?)  to  help  me. 

2.  When  the  question  to  what?  or  where  to?  may  be 
asked,  the  preposition  a  must  be  used  : 

Yo  le  animare  a  hacerle,         /  loill  encourage  him  (to  what  ?)  to  do  it. 
Voy  a  visitar  mi  tio,  I  am  going  (where  to  ?)  to  visit  my  uncle. 

3.  The  preposition  de  is  used  in  answer  to  the  questions  of 
what?  from  what?  at  what?  from  where? 

Se  espanto  de  verle  tan  palido.  He  was  alarmed  (at  what  ?)  at  seeing 

him  so  pale. 
Su  pobreza  proviene  de  su  gastar.         His  poverty  is  the  result  (of  what  ?)  of 

his  expenses, 

4.  The  preposition  en  is  used  in  answer  to  the  questions  in 
what?  on  what? 

La  dificultad  consiste  en  hallarle,         The  difficulty  consists  (in  what  ?)  in 

finding  him. 
YA  iiisiste  en  salir,  He  insists  (on  what  ?)  on  going  out. 


260  LESSON   46. 

5.  The  preposition  con  is  used  in  answer  to  the  questions 
with  what  ?  by  what  ? 

Este  hombre  ha  destruido  su  salud  This  man  has  destroyed  his  health  (by 
con  mucho  beber,  what  ?)  by  much  drinking. 

Note.  —  Although  there  are  many  cases  in  which  the  right  use  of  the 
Preposition  cannot  be  indicated,  the  rules  given  above  may  be  followed  in 
most  cases. 

11.  The  verb  acabar,  1.  to  end,  to  fiiiish,  followed  by  the 
preposition  de  and  an  Infinitive,  expresses  an  action  which  has 
just  taken  place  : 

Acabo  de  verle,  /  have  just  seen  him. 

Acababa  de  comer  cuando  yo  entre,         He  had  just  dined  when  I  entered. 

12.  The  verbs  mandar,  1.  to  send,  to  order,  and  hacer,  2.  to 
make,  to  do,  followed  by  an  Infinitive,  have  the  meaning  of  the 
English  verbs  to  cause,  to  let,  to  have  : 

Hago  hacer  iin  sombrero,  I  have  a  hat  made. 

Mando  lavar  mi  ropa,  /  have  my  clothes  washed. 

Hace  tenir  el  paiio,  He  has  the  cloth  dyed. 

13.  The  Infinitive  may  be  used  in  Spanish  as  a  Substantive 
and  as  the  subject  or  object  of  the  verb.  It  may,  therefore,  be 
preceded  in  this  case  by  the  article  or  by  any  other  part  of 
speech : 

No  he  olvidado  el  insoportable  I  have  not  forgotten  the  insupiwrt- 
hablar  de  este  hombre,  able  talking  of  that  man. 

Al  avanzar  nuestro  ejercito  se  re-  Our  army  having  advanced,  the 
tiraron  los  enemigos,  enemy  retired. 

No  ganara  V.  nada  con  ese  hablar,  You  will  gain  nothing  by  this  talk. 

14.  There  are  cases  where  the  Infinitive  may  be  used  with  or 
without  the  article : 

Es  injusto  acusar  {or  el  acusar)  este  It  is  unjust  to  accuse  this  man  of 
hombre  de  este  crimen,  this  crime. 


THE  INFINITIYE   GOVERNED  BY   PREPOSITIONS. 


261 


Leccion  XLVII. 


Lesson  XLVII. 


THE  INFINITIVE  GOVERNED  BY  PREPOSITIONS. 

A  mas  de. 


Ademas  de, 

Sobre, 

Tras  de, 

A  menos  de, 

A  pesar  de,  1 

Sin  embargo  de,    I 

No  obstante  de,    J 

Despues  de, 

Antes  de. 

Sin, 

En  cuanto  a, 

Por, 

En  consecuencia  de. 


Besides^  altliough^ 

Unless. 

Notxoithstaiiding^  however. 

After. 

Before. 

Without. 

As  for. 

On  account  of  for,  instead  of 

In  consequence  of 


Ejemplos. 

A  mas  de    )  haberle    visto,     le    he 
Ademas  de  )  hablado, 
A  pesar  de         ^  haberle  yo  pagado 
Sin  embargo  de  >  no  estuvo   satisfe- 
No  obstante  de  >*  cho, 
Antes  de  salir,  comio, 
Despues  de  haber  comido,  salio, 
Sail  sin  nadie  verme. 

No  fue  admitido  por  ser  estrangero, 

Tras  de  no  pagarme,  me  insiilta, 

Sobre  ser  Ingles,   quiere  pasar  por 

Americano. 
En  cuanto  a  dar  dinero,  no  lo  hare. 

Ko  se  como  acabar  eso. 


Examples. 

Besides  seeing  him,    I   spoke  to 

him. 
Notwithstanding  that  I  paid  him, 

he  was  not  pleased. 

He  dined  before  going  out. 

He  went  out  after  having  dined. 

I  went  out  without  anybody  see- 
ing me. 

He  was  not  admitted  {on  accouiU 
of  his)  being  a  stranger. 

Besides  not  paying  me,  he  iu' 
suits  me. 

Although  he  is  an  Englishman,  he 
wishes  to  pass  for  an  American. 

As  for  giving  money,  I  shall  not 
do  it. 

I  don't  know  how  to  finish  that. 


262 


LESSON    47. 


Vocabulario. 

El  ga&to,  the  expense. 
El  obrero,  the  workman. 
El  vestido,  the  dress. 
La  colocacion,  the  situation. 
La  divinidad,  the  divinity. 
La  pregunta,  tlie  question. 
Generoso,  generous. 
Tal,  such  as. 


Vocabulary. 


j  Atacar,  1.  to  attack. 

Castigar,  1   to  punish. 
i  Cons'ultar,  1.  to  consult. 

Contestar,  1.  to  answer. 

Continuar,  1.  to  continue. 

Descansar,  1.  to  rest. 

Entrar,  1.  to  enter. 

Examinar,  1.  to  examine. 


luvocar,  1.  to  invoice. 
Obedecer,  2.  to  obey. 
Obtener,  2.  to  obtain. 
Ofender,  3.  to  offend. 
Pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
Seguir,  3.  to  follow. 
Trabajar,  1.  to  imrk. 
Volver,  2.  to  return. 


Exercise  93. 

1.  Despiies  de  haber  yo  leido  el  libro,  se  lo  preste  a  mi  amigo. 
2.  A  pesar  de  no  bien  trabajar,  quiere  que  le  paguen  bien.  3.  Ademas 
de  ser  haragan,  gasta  miicho.  4.  Sin  embargo  de  ser  muy  pobre,  quiere 
pasar  por  rico.  5.  Antes  de  consentir  yo  a  lo  que  el  quiere,  debo 
examinar  si  el  tiene  razon.  6.  Perdono  a  sus  enemigos,  antes  de 
morir.     7.  En  consecuencia  de  haberle  yo  dicho  que  viniera,  vino. 

8.  En  cuanto  a  tener  yo   que  hacer  todos  los  gastos,  lo   veremos. 

9.  [  Que  contestar  a  tal  pregunta  ?  10.  [  Como  saber  si  mi  amigo  esta 
en  la  ciudad  ?  11.  A  donde  ir  para  encontrarle?  12.  Este  hombre 
me  ha  ofendido  demasiado  por  poder  perdonarle  yo.  13.  El  muchacho 
tomo  el  libro  sin  darselo  yo.  14.  Sin  verme  nadie,  entre  en  mi 
cuarto.  15.  No  haga  V.  nada  antes  de  consultarme.  16.  [  Porque 
hizo  V.  eso  ?  17.  Lo  hize  sin  saber  lo  que  estaba  haciendo.  18.  Ade- 
mas de  ser  el  mi  amigo,  lo  es  tambien  de  V.  19.  Quiero  hacerlo  sin 
decirselo  a  nadie.     20.  Le  di  la  carta  por  creer  que  era  para  el. 


Exercise  94. 

1.  After  having  written  his  letters,  he  went  out.  2.  You  cannot 
obtain  that  situation,  unless  you  speak  Spanish  and  English.  3.  Do 
not  go  out  without  seeing  me.  4.  Michael  (Miguel)  is  punished  for 
having  spoken.  5.  Do  not  speak  without  knowing.  6.  Besides  being 
very  rich,  he  is  also  very  generous.  7.  Notwithstanding  that  I  told 
him  not  to  do  it,  he  would  not  obey  me.  8.  How  shall  I  do  that  ? 
9.  Where  shall  I  look  for  my  books?  10.  He  could  not  follow  us 
(on  account  of  his)  being  too  old.  11.  Before  going  away,  he  said  that 
he  would  not  return.  12.  Although  he  works  badly  (mal),  he  wishes 
to  be  paid  like  a  good  workman.     13.  After  he  had  rested,  he  con- 


THE  INFINITIVE   GOVERNED   BY   PREPOSITIONS.  263 

tinned  his  jonrney.  14.  Besides  his  not  reading  the  letter,  he  tore  it 
to  pieces  {la  hizo  pedazos).  15.  Besides  receiving  him  in  my  house, 
I  gave  him  money  and  clothes.  16.  They  invoked  their  divinities 
before  attacking  the  enemy.  17.  He  took  the  money  without  my  giv- 
ing it  to  him.  18.  He  is  sick  on  account  of  having  eaten  too  much. 
19.  Besides  not  paying  us,  he  says  that  we  owe  him  money.  20.  I 
wish  you  to  do  it  without  saying  a  word  to  him. 

Gram^tiea.  Grammar. 

1.  Some  of  the  prepositions  given  above  which  govern  the 
Infinitive  have  different  meanings. 

Por,  for  instance,  has  the  meaning  of  on  account  of  or  because 
in  the  following  sentence  : 

No  fue  admitido  por  sei*  estrangero,         He  was  not  admitted  on  account  of 

his  being  a  stroMger, 

while  in  the  next  sentence  it  is  to  rendered  by  instead  of: 

Le  di  mi  libro  por  darle  el  suyo,        /  gave  him  my  hook  instead  of  giviny 

him  his  own, 

2t  The  Infinitive  is  often  governed  also  by  the  Conjunctions 
como,  how,  and  que,  that,  by  the  adverb  d6nde,  where,  and  by 
the  Interrogative  Pronouns  : 

No  se  como  acabar  esto,  /  do'iiut  know  how  to  finish  that, 

Le  traigo  que  comer,  /  bring  yoic  to  eat, 

i  Como  decir  lo  que  siento  !  How  shall  I  say  what  I  feel .? 

j  No  sabe  V.  a  quien  vender  su  Do  yon  not  knoiv  to  wh^m  you  could 
caballo  ?  sell  your  horse  ? 

Note. — The  above  examples  can  only  be  explained  by  an  elHpsis,  by 
which  the  natural  object  of  the  Infinitive  is  omitted  : 

No  se  como  (puedo)  acabar  esto,  /  don't  know  how  {I  can)  finish  that. 

i  Como  (podre)  decir  lo  que  siento  !         How  (shall  I  be  able)  to  say  wJiat  I 

feel. 
Le  traigo  (algo  que  V.  pueda)  co-         /  bring  you   {so^nething  that  you 
mer,  can)  eat. 


264 


LESSON   48. 


3*    The  Infinitive  sentences  may  also  be  rendered  in  Spanish 

by  the   Present   Indicative    or  by  the   Subjunctive  Mood,   by 

adopting  a  different  construction  : 

Despues  de  haberle  dado  el  dinero  sa-  \  ^ ,     ,    . 

T  ,       T^  1    -u  X.    ^  J     ^  I  After  I  had  given  him  the  money,  he 

no  or  Despues  que  le  hube  dado  el  v    *'  ^  '^^ 

J.  V '  \      went  out, 

dinero,  salio,  ; 

Tras  de  no  pagarme,  no  me  saluda  or  \  Besides  not  paying  me,  he  does  not 

Tras  de  que  no  me  paga  no  me  saluda,  J      salute  me. 


Sail  sin  verme  el  or 
Sail  sin  que  el  me  vieraj 


iera,  ) 


I  went  out  without  his  seeing  Tne. 


Leccion  XLVIII. 


Lesson  XLVIII. 


THE  GERUND  OR  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 


1.  Amar,  1.  to  love ; 
Causar,  1.  to  caiise; 
Habitar,  1.  to  inhabit  ; 
Participar,  1.  to  participate  j 
Tocar,  1.  to  touch , 
Obedecer,  2.  to  obey  ; 
Pertenecer,  2.  to  belong  ; 
Seguir,  3.  to  follow  ; 


amando,  amante,  loving. 
causando,  causante,  causing. 
babitando,  habitante,  inhabiting. 
participando,  participante,  participating. 
tocando,  tocante,  touching. 
obedeciendo,  obediente,  obeying. 
perteneciendo,  perteneciente,  belonging. 
siguiendo,  siguiente,  folloiving. 


Vocabulario. 

El  almirante,  the  admi- 
ral. 

El  capitan,  the  captain. 

El  colegio,  the  college. 

El  enemigo,  the  enemy. 

El  estudio,  tlie  study. 

El  dervis,  the  dervis. 

El  habitante,  the  inhab- 
itant. 

El  lado,  the  side. 

El  ojo,  the  eye. 

El  palacio,  the  palace. 

El  precepto,  the  precept. 

El  puente,  the  bridge. 


El  reino,  the  kingdom. 

La  capital,  the  caioital. 

La  equivocacion,  the  mis- 
take. 

La  escuadra,  tlie  squad- 
ron. 

La  guerra,  the  war. 

La  bora,  the  time. 

La  imprenta,  the  jyress. 

La  posada,  the  inn. 

La  posesion,  the  posses- 
sion. 

La  Tartaria,  Tartary. 

La  victoria,  the  victory. 


Vocabulary. 

Dentro  de,  within. 
Por,  through. 
Atravesar,    1.    to    cross 

over. 
Construir,  3.  to  construct. 
Desobedecer,  2.  to  disobey. 
Explicar,  1.  to  explain. 
Licenciar,  1.  to  disband. 
Montar,  1.  to  mount. 
Beir,  3.  to  laugh. 
Sacar,  1.  to  draw. 
Salir  (2)  de,  <o  leave. 
Sublevar,  1.  to  revolt. 
Suspender,  2.  to  suspend. 


THE   GERUND   OR  PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  265 

Exercise  95. 

1.  liOS  muchachos  llegaron  llorando  de  la  escuela,  pues  habian 
sido  castigados.  2.  Hablando  de  otra  cosa,  como  esta  su  padre  de  V.  1 
3.  Esta  muy  bien  hoy,  gracias.  4.  Pasando  el  otro  dia  por  la  calle 
nueva,  vi  a  su  amigo  de  V.  5.  Saliendo  yo  de  la  iglesia,  entraba  el. 
6.  No  sabiendo  que  hacer,  dormi  todo  el  dia.  7.  Los  estudiantes  de 
nuestro  colegio  acabaran  sus  estudios  dentro  de  pocos  dias.  8.  El 
entro  riendo,  pero  salio  llorando.     9.  Diciendo  esto,  salio  del  cuarto. 

10.  Estando  el  padre  en  Francia,  murio   el  hijo  en   Nueva  York. 

11.  Habiendo   el   general    ganado    la  victoria,   tomo    la    fortaleza. 

12.  Temiendo  el  emperador  que  volviese  a  enipezar  la  guerra,  licencio 
solo  una  parte  de  su  ejercito.  13.  Habiendo  el  rey  mandado  que 
suspendiesen  la  libertad  de  imprenta,  se  sublevo  el  pais.  14.  Habi- 
endo sabido  que  su  liermano  no  habia  venido,  mando  por  el.  15.  Los 
hombres  habiendo  de  temer  a  Dios,  desobedecen  sus  preceptos. 
16.  Los  habitantes  de  esta  ciudad  son  muy  industriosos.  17.  Creyendo 
yo  encontrar  a  mi  amigo,  fui  muy  temprano  a  su  casa.  18.  Los  hijos 
de  este  pobre  honibre  son  muy  obedientes.  19.  Habiendo  el  general 
hecho  construir  un  puente,  paso  todo  el  ejercito  al  otro  lado  del  rio. 
20.  Cuando  entre,  estaba  el  durmiendo.  21.  ^Que  estaban  haciendo 
los  muchachos  en  el  cuarto  ?  22.  Algunos  estaban  jugando,  y  otros 
estudiando.  23.  Queriendo  sacar  su  reloj,  vio  que  se  lo  habian  robado. 
24.  Siendo  capitau  el  almirante  Blake,  fue  mandado  con  una  pequena 
escuadra  contra  las  posesiones  espaiiolas.  25.  Viajando  un  dervis 
por  la  Tartaria  llego  a  la  capital  del  reino  y  por  equivocacion  tomo  el 
palacio  del  rey  por  una  posada  piiblica. 

Exercise  96. 

1.  To  whom  were  you  writing  this  morning?  2.  I  was  writing  to 
my  brother  in  Paris.  3.  My  father  having  heard  that  you  were  in 
town,  has  sent  me  to  invite  you  to  his  house.  4.  As  we  were  passing 
through  your  street,  we  met  Miss  Mary.  5.  While  we  were  in  Paris, 
we  heard  that  your  father  was  very  sick.  6.  Not  knowing  what  to 
do^  w^e  wrote  to  our  friends.  7.  When  he  opened  his  eyes,  he  saw  his 
brother  near  his  bed.  8.  I  have  been  reading  the  whole  morning. 
9.  I  saw  the  boys  stealing  the  apples  in  the  garden.  10.  If  you  ex- 
plain, our  lesson  to  us,  we  will  understand  it.  11.  To-morrow  at  this 
time,  we  shall  be  travelling.      12.  If  I  have  time,  I  will  do  it. 


266  LESSON   48. 

13.  The  general,  having  defeated  the  enemy,  was  received  by  the 
king.  14.  The  captain  having  mounted  his  horse,  left  the  city. 
15.  When  he  saw  the  soldiers  coming,  he  called  me.  16.  Hannibal 
having  crossed  the  Alps,  defeated  the  Romans.  17.  Having  studied 
the  English  language  for  several  years,  I  speak  it  well  now.  *6.  My 
brother  is  a  student  in  that  college.  19.  When  my  father  gave  me  the 
money,  I  paid  all  my  debts.  20.  As  he  was  travelling  through  Eng- 
land, he  met  all  our  friends.  21.  Those  children  are  very  disobedi- 
ent. 22.  He  has  annoyed  us  by  talking  too  much.  23.  As  I  was  not 
able  to  do  it  alone,  I  told  my  brother  to  help  me.  24.  Why  are 
these  little  girls  crying  ?    25.  Because  they  have  lost  their  mother. 

Gramatica,  Grammar. 

1,  The  use  of  the  Gerund  or  Present  Participle  is  considered 
in  Spanish  as  most  elegant,  and  it  is  therefore  of  frequent  occur- 
rence in  writing  and  in  speaking. 

Many  Spanish  verbs  have  two  forms  in  the  Gerund,  the  one 
ending  in  .ante  or  ente,  and  the  second  in  ando  or  iendo ;  the 
first  form  being  called  participios  de  presente,  Participles  of  the 
Present ;  or  participios  activos,  Active  Particijjles. 

There  were  formerly  more  Participios  de  presente  with  the 
same  object  as  their  verbs,  than  there  are  now,  but  the  use  of 
these  participles  as  Adverbial  Adjectives,  Adjectives  and  Nouns, 
having  become  more  and  more  frequent,  they  no  longer  govern 
their  verbs.  The  use  of  the  Gerund  has  probably  become  more 
frequent  than  that  of  the  Participios  de  presente,  although 
both  Participles  have  often  the  same  meaning,  on  account  of  the 
greater  euphony  of  the  Gerund.  The  Participio  de  presente 
only  occurs  now  in  certain  verbs,  and  is  therefore  not  mentioned 
in  the  Infinitive  Mood. 

2.  We  refer  the  student  to  Lesson  19  for  the  formation  of  the 
Gerund  and  for  some  of  the  Eules  relating  to  this  tense. 

3t  There  are  cases  when  the  Gerund  and  the  Infinitive  may 
be  used  alike  : 

Le  VI  cazando  or  cazar,         /  saw  him  hunting  or  hunt. 


THE   GERUND   OR   PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  267 

4.  When  a  motion  is  expressed,  either  the  Gerund  of  the  verb 
ir,  3.  to  go ;  or  that  of  andar,  1.  to  walk ;  may  precede  the  other 
verbs  : 

Yeiido^or  Andandome  paseando,  le        Going  to  take,  a  walk  I  inet  Mm, 
encontre, 

5t    The  Gerund  is  also  used  : 

1st.  When  it  indicates  the  state  of  the  subject : 

Habla  durmiendo,         He  speaks  while  he  sleeps. 

2d.  When  the  verb  expresses  the  cause  of  an  action  : 

Teniiendo  el  que  le  atacasen  tomo        Fearing  that    tliey  would   attack 
sus  pistolas,  himy  he  took  his  pistols. 

Note.  —  In  sentences  like  the  above,  the  Gerund  may  be  replaced  by 
the  Infinitive  with  por :  For  temer  el  que  le  atacasen,  etc. 

3d.    When  the  verb  expresses  means  or  instrumentality  : 
Estudiando  se  aprende,         One  learns  by  studying. 

Note.  —  The  Infinitive  preceded  by  con,  with,  may  be  used  in  the  above 
sentence  :  Con  estudiar  se  aprende. 

6t    The, Compound  Gerund  or  Participio  de  Preterito  is  of 

the  same  nature  as  the  Gerund  and  is  used  in  the  same  way : 

Habiendo  el  hi  jo  perdido  a  su  padre.         The  son,  having  lost  his  father,  re- 
volvio  a  su  pais,  titrned  to  his  country. 

7t  The  Gerund  is  often  used  in  Spanish  in  cases  where  the 
English  use  the  Conjunctions  as,  since,  if,  and  the  adverbs 
when,  while,  whilst: 

Siendo  asi,  no  saldre,  Since  it  is  so,  I  shall  not  go  out. 

No  teniendo  dinero,  no  puedo  ir  al        As  I  have  no  money,  I  cannot  go  to 

teatro,  the  theater. 

Yieudome    tan    triste,    se    puso  a         When  he  saw  me  so  sad,  he  began 

11  ova  r,  to  cry. 

Habiendo  el  de  venir  aca,  se  fue  al         While  he  was  to  come  here,  he  went 

teatro,  to  tlu  theater. 


268  LESSON  48. 

Note.  —  Many  sentences  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  Gerund  might, 
however,  be  used  as  in  English  with  the  tenses  of  the  Indicative  or  of  the 
Subjunctive  with  such  words  as  como,  as ;  luego  que,  as  soon  as;  cuando, 
asi  que,  loJien  ;  etc. 

Viendonie  or  Asi  que  me  vio,         When  he  saw  me. 

8.  The  Gerund  (simple  or  compound)  is  most  elegantly  used 
in  Spanish  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  especially  in  short 
narrations,  the  subject  being  sometimes  separated  from  its  verb  : 

Paseando  un   dia  por    la    calle    el  As  President    Jefferson    ivas    one 

Presidente  Jefferson,   con  un   eo-  day  walking  through  the  street 

merciante,  contesto  al  saludo  de  ,    with  a  merchant^  he  answered 

un  negro  que  pasaba. — ^Porque,  le  the  salutation  of  a  passing  ne- 

pregunto  el  comerciante,  se  presta  gro.  —  Why  does   your  Excel- 

V.    a    saludar   a  un   esclavo  ?  —  lency  deign  to  salute  a  slave  ? 

Sentiria  mucho,  contesto  el  Presi-  asked  the  merchant.  —  /  should 

dente,  que  un  esclavo  me  escediese  he  very  sorry,  answered  the  Presi- 

en  urban idad,.  dent,  that  a  slave  should  surpass 

me  in  politeness. 

9#  Verbs  of  the  3d  Conjugation  ending  in  -cMr,  -Uir  and 
-nir  form  their  Gerund  in  endo  and  not  in  lendo,  as  the  dip- 
thong  ie  very  seldom  stands  after  ch,  11  and  n.  We  must  there- 
fore say  :  ciiiendo,  from  cenir,  3.  to  gird ;  hinchendo,  from 
henchir,  3.  to  fill ;  riendo,  from  reir,  3.  to  laugh. 

The  i  is  also  omitted  for  the  same  reason  in  the  3d  Persons  of 
the  Preterite  of  the  Indicative  and  in  all  the  Persons  of  the 
Subjunctive  of  the  same  verbs  :  rino,  from  renir,  3.  to  quarrel ; 
engnlleres,  from  engullir,  3.  to  ingulf ;  etc. 

The  verb  volver,  2.  followed  by  the  Preposition  a  before  an 
Infinitive,  expresses  the  repetition  of  an  action  : 

Vuelvo  a  salir,         /  go  out  again. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE. 


269 


Leccioii  XLIX. 


Lesson  XLIX. 


THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 


Ejemplos. 

Este  libro  esta  bien  escrito. 

Estos  libros  estan  bien  escritos. 

La  casa  esta  acabada. 

Las  casas  estan  acahadas. 

He  recibido  una  carta  de  Paris. 

Henios  visto  el  teatro  nuevo. 

Los  muchachos   ban   comido   las 

manzanas. 
Nuestros  soldados  ban  derrotado 

al  enemigo. 
La  leccion  que  V.  nos  ha  dado,  es 

muy  dificil. 
El    enemigo    atacado    por    todas 

partes,  se  retiro. 
Bien  sabido  es,  que  este  liombre 

es  rico. 
Llamado  un  cirujano,  examino  la 

lierida. 


Examples. 

This  book  is  well  written. 

These  books  are  well  written. 

The  house  is  finished. 

The  houses  are  finished. 

I  have  received  a  letter  from  Paris. 

We  have  seen  the  new  theater. 

The  boys  have  eaten  the  apples. 

Our  soldiers  have  defeated  the  enemy. 

The  lesson  which  you  have  given  us 

is  very  difficult. 
The   enemy   being   attacked   on   all 

sides,  retired. 
It  is  well  known  that  this  man  is 

rich. 
A  surgeon  having  been   called,   he 

examined  the  wound. 


Irregular  Participles. 

Abrir,  3.  to  open  ; 
Cubrir,  3.  to  cover ; 
Decir,  3.  to  say,  to  tell ; 
Escribir,  3.  to  write  ; 
Hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do ; 
Morir,  3.  to  die  ; 
Poner,  2.  to  put ; 
Resolver,  2.  to  resolve  ; 
Ver,  2.  to  see; 
Volver,  2.  to  return; 


abler  to,  opened. 
cubierto,  covered. 
dicho,  said,  told. 
escrito,  written. 
hecho,  made,  done. 
xnuerto,  died. 
puesto,  put. 
resuelto,  resolved. 
visto,  seen. 
vuelto,  returned. 


Participles  liaviiig  often  an  active  meaning. 

Acostumbrado,  accustomed.  Atrevido,  hold. 

Agradecido,  grateful.  Bien  hablado,  ivell  spoken. 


270 


LESSON   49. 


Callado,  reserved. 
Cansado,  tiresome, 
Comedido,  well  behaved. 
Desesperado,  despairing. 
Disimulado,  dissimulated. 
Entendido,  exjjerienced. 
Esforzado,  bold. 
Leido,  well  read.  . 
Medido,  prudeiit. 
Mirado,  considerate. 
Moderado,  moderate. 
Osado,  bold. 
Parado,  slow. 


Parecido,  resembling. 
Partido,  liberal. 
Pansado,  cautious. 
Porfiado,  obstinate. 
Precavido,  cautious. 
Preciado,  vain. 
Presuniido,  conceited. 
Recatado,  wise. 
Sabido,  learned. 
Sentido,  sensible. 
Sufrido,  2^(^iie7it. 
Trascendido,  acute. 
Valido,  influential. 


Vocabulario. 

El  congreso,  the  Congress. 

El  caadro,  tlie  picture. 

El  desuso,  the  desuetude. 

El  dia  festive,  the  holiday. 

El  grande,  the  grandee. 

El  Moro,  the  Moor. 

El  mundo,  the  world. 

El  refresco,  the  refreshment. 

La  atencion,  the  attention. 

La  cena,  the  supper. 

La  comida ,  the  eating. 

La  discordia,  the  discord. 

La  inocencia,  tlie  innocence. 

La  ley,  the  law. 

La  memoria,  the  memory. 

La  ociosidad,  the  idleness. 

La  palabra,  the  word. 

La  perdida,  the  loss. 

La  prerogativa,  the  prerogative. 

La  salida,  the  exit. 


Vocabulary. 

Agradable,  agreeable. 
Cierto,  certain. 
Enorme,  enormous. 
Fernando,  Ferdinand. 
Isabel,  Isabella. 
Por  desgracia,  unfortunately. 
Porfiado,  obstinate. 
Presumido,  conceited. 
Atrasar,  1.  to  delay. 
Casar,  1.  to  marry. 
Concluir,  3.  to  conclude. 
Convencer,  2,  to  convince. 
Defender,  2.  to  defend. 
Establecer,  2.  to  establish. 
Ofrecer,  2.  to  offer. 
.  Pintar,  1.  to  depict. 
Reinar,  1.  to  reign. 
Reparar,  1.  to  compensate, 
Sufocar,  1.  to  suffocate. 
Volver,  2.  to  turn. 


Exercise  97, 

1.  Concluida  la  cena,  todo  el  mundo  salio.  2.  Sali  de  la  casa 
resuelto  a  verle.  3.  Derrotados  los  enemigos,  volvieron  d  pasar  el  rio. 
4.  I  Ha  recibido  V.  la  carta  que  yo  lo  he  escrito  ?  5.  La  he  recibiJo 
esta  manana.     6.  Vi  a  su  aniigo  de  V.  a  la  salida  del  teatro.     7.  La 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE.  271 

comida  es  muy  buena  en  este  hotel.  8.  Debemos  considerar  como 
perdidos  los  dias  que  pasamos  en  la  ociosidad.  9.  La  discordia  ha 
siempre  reinado  en  el  universe.  10.  Las  puertas  estaban  abiertas  y 
entraban  todos  los  que  querian.  11.  [  Ha  oido  V.  cantar  aquella 
seiiora  ?  12.  La  oi  cantar  el  domingo  pasado  en  nuestra  iglesia. 
13.  I  Ha  visto  V.  los  cuadros  que  mi  hermano  ha  comprado  ?  14.  To- 
davia  no  los  he  visto.  15.  Esta  ley  ha  sido  establecida  por  el  Con- 
greso.  16.  Le  hemos  mandado  a  V.  todos  los  libros  que  V.  nos  ha 
pedido.  17.  Las  cartas  estaban  tan  mal  escritas  que  no  pudimos 
leerlas.  18.  Este  h ombre  es  muy  honrado,  siempre  me  ha  devuelto 
el  dinero  que  le  he  prestado.  19.  ^  Es  verdad  que  ha  muerto  Pedro  ? 
20.  Por  desgracia  es  cierto.  21.  [Ha  padecido  mucho  1  22.  No 
puede  V.  imaginar  lo  que  ha  padecido.  23.  Es  V.,  amigo  Pablo,  el 
hombre  mas  porfiado  del  mundo.  24.  No  podremos  comprar  hoy  lo 
que  necesitamos,  pues  los  dias  festivos  estan  cerrados  los  almacenes. 

25.  Tengo  una  hermana  casada  en  Madrid,  con  am  medico  espafiol ;  y 
como  la  visite  el  ano  pasado,  he  aprendido  a  hablar  un  poco  espanol. 

26.  Me  habian  pintado  el  viaje  como  bastante  desagradable  ;  pero 
fue  al  contrario  muy  agradable,  menos  el  hal^ernos  atrasado  unas  ocho 
horas  en  el  camino.  27.  Don  Juan  ha  dado  el  brazo  d  mi  madre  hasta 
el  coche.  28.  No  se  como  reparar  la  enorme  perdida  que  he  hecho. 
29.  Las  prerogativas  de  los  grandes  de  Espaiia  han  sido  muchas,  pero 
todas  han  caido  en  desuso.  30.  Estamos  sofocados  con  el  calor  que 
tenemos  aqui  desde  que  principio  el  verano. 

Exercise  98. 

1.  These  things  have  passed  from  my  memory.  2.  We  have  read 
all  the  books  you  have  lent  us  ;  have  you  received  any  others  ? 
3.  We  can  lend  you  those  we  bought  the  other  day.  4.  Where  have 
you  been  ?  5.  I  have  been  to  the  ball.  6.  Why  have  not  the  chil- 
dren gone  to  school  to-day  ?  7.  Because  one  of  their  teachers  has 
died.  8.  I  don't  know  where  I  have  put  my  gloves,  will  you  do  me 
the  favor  to  look  for  them  for  me  1  9.  I  believe  that  you  have  left 
them  in  your  room.  10.  Do  you  know  what  your  father  has  re- 
solved ?  11.  He  has  not  resolved  anything  yet.  12.  Whom  have 
you  seen  in  that  house  ?  13.  I  have  not  seen  anybody.  14.  You 
must  not  leave  your  windows  open  during  the  night.  15.  John  is 
loved  by  no  one,  because  he  is  too  conceited.  16.  My  friend  will 
come  after  (the)  dmner.     17.  The  war  with  Portugal  being  concluded, 


272  LESSON   49. 

Ferdinand  and  Isabella  turned  their  attention  to  the  Moors  of  Grana- 
da. 18.  I  have  lost  one  of  my  books,  I  don't  know  how.  19.  That 
soldier  has  lost  his  arm  while  defending  his  country.  20.  Have  you 
heard  what  that  man  has  said  ?  21.  I  have  heard  every  word. 
22.  Have  you. offered  anything  to  those  ladies?  23.  Yes,  sir,  I  have 
offered  them  refreshments.  24.  Have  you  seen  our  new  theater? 
25.  I  have  not  seen  anything  yet,  I  have  not  been  out  for  (desde)  three 
days.  26.  How  w^ere  your  sisters  dressed  for  the  ball  ?  27.  They 
were  dressed  in  (de)  w^hite.  28.  I  have  been  so  busy  this  morning, 
that  I  have  not  been  able  to  write  to  your  father.  29.  Our  friends 
arrived  this  morning,  but  we  have  not  seen  them  yet.  30.  Being 
convinced  of  his  innocence,  I  defended  him. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1.  The  Past  Participle  of  the  verbs  of  the  1st  Conjugation,  as 
has  been  already  said  (L.  17,  E.  5),  ends  in  ado  ;  and  those  of 
the  2d  and  3d  Conjugations  end  in  ido,  the  Irregular  participles 
being  given  above. 

2$  The  Past  Participle  as  ivell  as  the  Gerund  is  at  the  same 
time  an  Adjective,  being  derived  from  the  verb  and  participating 
of  its  meaning,  as  in  this  sentence  : 

Una  carta  hien  escrita,         A  ivell  iDvittcn  letter. 

3.  The  Past  Participle,  called  pasivo  in  Spanish,  is  not  lim- 
ited to  a  certain  definite  time,  but  may  refer  to  any  time, 
according  to  the  tense  with  which  it  is  combined.  It  loses  its 
passive  signification  when  connected  with  the  verb  haber,  2.  to 
have  ;  to  form  the  tenses  of  the  verbo  active,  active  verb. 

With  Intransitive,  Unipersonal,  and  Reflective  verbs,  it  can 
only  have  an  active  signification,  as  these  verbs  do  not  admit  the 
passive  form. 

4.  It  has  already  been  observed  (L.  18,  R.  1),  that  the  Past 
Participle  joined  to  the  verb  haber,  2.  to  have ;  is  invariable, 
although  it  had  formerly  a  feminine  termination,  and  agreed  with 
its  object. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE.  273 

Joined  with  the  verbs  ser,  2.  to  6e,  and  estar,  1.  to  he;  the 
Past  Participle  is  considered  as  an  Adjective,  and  agrees  in  gen- 
der and  number  with  its  subject  : 

La  casa  esta  acabada,  The  house  is  finished. 

Los  buenos  muchachos  son  amados,  Good  hoys  are  loved. 

5t  The  Past  Participle  often  occurs  in  Spanish  with  its  own 
subject,  and  corresponds  then  to  the  Latin  Ablative  absolute.  In 
such  cases  it  is  only  an  abbreviation  of  the  Gerund  and  is  gener- 
ally placed  before  the  noun,  with  which  it  agrees  in  gender  and 
number  : 

Aprovechadas  estas  ventajas  se  fa-  By  profiting  of  these  advantages, 

cilita  el  aprender,  learning  is  made  easier. 

Note.  —  The  subject  may,  however,  precede  the  Participle,  when  both 

sentences  have  the  same  subject  : 

El  enemigo  atacado  de  todas  partes,  The  enemy  being  attacked  on  all 

se  retiro,  sides,  retired. 

6*    A  Preposition  may  sometimes  precede  the  Past  Participle  : 

Despues  de  restablecida  la  paz  flo-        After  peace   is   re-tstahlished  the 
reeeran  las  artes,  arts  will  fiourish. 

Note.  —  As  seen  by  the  above  examples,  the  Participle  is  in  one  case  an 

abbreviation   of  the  Gerund,   while  in  the  other  the   auxiliary  verb   is 

omitted  :   Siendo  aprovechadas  estas  ventajas,  etc.,  despues  de  ser  resta- 

bleeida  la  paz,  etc. 

7i    Past  Participles  used  as  Adjectives  may  govern  the  prepo- 
sition de  or  por,  the  preference  being  generally  given  to  de : 
Es  un  hombre  despreciado  de  todos.         He  is  a  man  despised  by  all. 

8i  Those  Participles  which  have  an  active  meaning,  have  also 
a  passive  one  : 

Active  sense.  Passive  sense. 

Hombre  leido,  a  well  read  man.  Libro  leido,  a  book  read. 

Mujer  leida,  a  well  read  wmimn.  Carta  leida,  a  letter  read. 

9.  Many  Past  Participles  are  used  as  nouns  in  the  feminine 
form  :  bebida,  drink,  beverage  ;  entrada,  entrance  ;  salida,  exit, 
departitre  ;  llegada,  arrival  ;  comida,  dinner,  eating  ;  medida, 
measure  ;  corrida,  race  ;  mirada,  look  ;  vista,  sight ;  etc. 


274 


LESSON   50. 


Leccion  L. 


Lesson  L. 


THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE  {Continued). 
Principal  Spanisb  Verbs  having  two  Participles. 


Abstraer,  2.  to  abstract  ; 
Aceptar,  1.  to  accept ; 
Astringir,  3.  to  contract  ; 
Atender,  2.  to  heed  ; 
Bendecir,  3   to  bless; 
Compeler,  2.  to  compel ; 
Completar,  1.  to  complete ; 
Comprender,  2.  to  understand ; 
Comprimir,  3.  to  compress ; 
Conduir,  3.  to  conclude  ; 
Confesar,  1.  to  confess ; 
Confundir,  3.  to  confound ; 
Contentar,  1.  to  content ; 
Contraer,  2.  to  contract ; 
Convencer,  2.  to  convince  ; 
Convertir,  3.  to  convert ; 
Corregir,  3.  to  correct ; 
Corromper,  2.  to  corrupt ; 
Cultivar,  1.  to  cultivate; 
Desertar,  1.  to  desert ; 
Desnudar,  1.  to  lay  bare ; 
Despertar,  1.  to  aioake; 
Difundir,  3.  to  diffuse  ; 
Dirigir,  3.  to  direct ; 
Dispersal,  1.  to  disperse; 
Distinguir,  3.  to  distinguish; 
Dividir,  3.  to  divide  ; 
Elegir,  3.  to  elect ; 
Enjugar,  1.  to  wipe  ; 
Erigir,  3.  to  erect ; 
Esceptuar,  1.  to  except ; 
Escluir,  3.  to  exclude  ; 
Espeler,  2.  to  expel ; 
Espresar,  1 .  to  express  ; 
Estender,  2.  to  extend ; 
Estinguir,  3.  to  extinguish  ; 


abstraido,  abstracto,  abstracted. 
aceptado,  acepto,  accepted. 
astringido,  astricto,  contracted. 
atendido,  atento,  heeded. 
bendecido,  bendito,  blessed. 
compelido,  compulso,  compelled. 
completado,  complete,  comp)leted. 
comprendido,  comprenso,  understood. 
comprimido,  compreso,  compressed. 
concluido,  concluso,  concluded. 
confesado,  confeso,  confessed. 
confundido,  confuso,  confounded. 
contentado,  contento,  contented. 
contraido,  contracto,  contracted. 
convencido,  convicto,  convinced. 
convertido,  converse,  converted. 
corregido,  correct©,  corrected. 
corrompido,  corrupto,  corrupted. 
cultivado,  culto,  cultivated. 
desertado,  deserto,  deserted. 
desnudado,  desnudo,  laid  bare. 
despertado,  despierto,  aivaTced. 
difundido,  difuso,  diffused. 
dirigido,  directo,  directed. 
dispersado,  disperse,  dispersed.. 
distinguido,  distinto,  distinguished. 
dividido,  diviso,  divided. 
elegido,  electo,  elected. 
enjugado,  enjuto,  wiped. 
erigido,  erecto,  erected. 
esceptuado,  escepto,  excepted. 
escluido,  escluso,  excluded.. 
espelido,  espulso,  expelled. 
espresado,  espreso,  expressed. 
estendido,  estenso,  extended. 
estinguido,  estinto,  extinguished. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE. 


275 


Estraer,  2.  to  extract ; 
Exentar,  1 .  to  exempt ; 
Favorecer,  2.  to  favor  ; 
Fijar,  1.  to  fix  ; 
Fingir,  3.  to  feign  ; 
Freir,  3.  to  fry  ; 
Hartar,  1.  to  satiate  ; 
Imprimir,  3.  to  impress  ;  to 
Improvisar,  1.  to  extemporize  ; 
Incluir,  3.  to  include  ; 
Infectar,  1.  to  infect; 
Inscribir,  3.  to  inscribe  ; 
Inserir,3.    K^^^.^^. 
Insertar,  1.  ) 
Invertir,  3.  to  invert ; 
Juntar,  1.  to  join  ; 
Limpiar,  1.  to  clear ; 
Maldecir,  3.  to  curse ; 
Manifestar,  1.  to  manifest ; 
Marchitar,  1.  to  fade  ; 
Nacer,  2.  to  he  horn  ; 
Ooultar,  to  conceal ; 
Omitir,  3.  to  omit ; 
Oprimir,  3,  to  oppress  ; 
Perfeccionar,  1.  to  perfect ; 
Pervertir,  3.  to  pervert ; 
Poseer,  2.  to  x>ossess  ; 
Prender,  2.  to  catch; 
Prescribir,  3.  to  prescribe  ; 
Presumir,  3.  to  presume  ; 
Pretender,  2.  to  pretend  ; 
Profesar,  1.  to  profess  ; 
Proscribir,  3.  to  proscribe; 
Proveer,  to  provide; 
Repletar,  1.  to  fill ; 
Romper,  2.  to  break ; 
Salvar,  1.  to  save; 
Secar,  1.  to  dry  ; 
Sepultar,  1.  to  bury ; 
Situar,  1.  to  place  ; 
Sol  tar,  1.  to  let  loose  ; 
Sujetar,  1.  to  subject ; 


estraido,  estracto,  exiraded. 
exentado,  exento,  exemijted. 
favorecido,  favorite,  favored. 
fijado,  fijo,  fixed. 
fingido,  ficto,  feigned. 
freido,  frito,  fried. 
hartado,  liar  to,  satiated. 
imprimido,  impreso,  hnpressed^  printed. 
improvisado,  improviso,  extemporized. 
incluido,  incluso,  included. 
infectado,  infecto,  infected. 
inscribido,  inscrito,  inscribed, 

inserido,  inserto,  inserted. 

invertido,  inverto,  inverted.       » 
juntado,  junto,  joined. 
limpiado,  limpio,  cleared. 
maldecido,  maldito,  cursed. 
manifestado,  manifesto,  tnanifested. 
marchitado,  marcbito,  faded. 
nacido,  nato,  been  born. 
ocultado,  oculto,  concealed. 
omitido,  omiso,  omitted. 
oprimido,  opreso,  oppressed. 
perfeccionado,  perfecto,  perfected. 
pervertido,  perverso,  perverted. 
poseido,  poseso,  possessed. 
prendido,  preso,  caught. 
prescribido,  prescrito,  prescribed. 
presumido,  presunto,  presumed. 
pretendido,  pretenso,  pretended. 
profesado,  profeso,  professed. 
proscribido,  proscrito,  proscribed. 
proveido,  provisto,  provided. 
repletado,  repleto,  filled. 
rompido,  roto,  broken. 
salvado,  salvo,  saved. 
secado,  seco,  dried. 
sepultado,  sepulto,  buried. 
situado,  sito,  placed. 
Eoltado,  suelto,  let  loose. 
sujetado,  sujeto,  subjected. 


276 


LESSON    50. 


Suprimir,  3.  to  suppress  ; 
Suspender,  2.  to  suspend; 
Sustituir,  3.  to  substitute  ; 
Tender,  2.  to  spread  ; 
Tenir,  3.  to  dye  ; 
Torcer,  2.  to  twist ; 
Vaciar,  1.  to  empty ; 


suprimido,  supreso,  suppressed, 
suspendido,  suspense,  suspended. 
substituido,  substitute,  substituted. 
tendido,  tenso,  sj^rcad. 
tenido,  tinto,  dyed. 
torcido,  tuerto,  twisted. 
vaciado,  vacio,  emptied. 


Vocabulario. 

El  accidente,  the  accident. 

El  cielo,  the  heaven. 

El  cdlera,  the  cholera.. 

El  monte,  the  tiiountain. 

El  monumento,  the  monument. 

El  tnuro,  the  imll. 

El  pescuezo,  the  neck. 

El  populacho,  the  mob. 

El  servicio,  the  service. 

La  bagetela,  the  trifle. 

La  carcel,  the  prison. 

La  cuenta,  the  account. 

La  estatua,  the  statue.  > 

La  invitacion,  the  invitation. 


Vocabulary. 

La  liberalidad,  the  liberality. 

La  lista,  the  list. 

La  maxima,  the  maxim. 

La  opinion,  the  opinion. 

La  obra,  the  ivork. 

La  ruina,  the  ruin. 

La  silla,  the  chair. 

Bajo,  under. 

Delante,  before. 

Junto,  together. 

Liberal,  liberal. 

Militar,  military. 

Vacio,  empty. 


Exercise  99. 

1.  I  Quien  ha  abierto  la  puerta  y  ha   puesto  una  silla  delante  1 

2.  I  No  le  he  dicho  yo  a  V.  que  habia  visto  a  su  hermana  en  el  teatro  1 

3.  He  escrito  todo  lo  que  V.  me  ha  prescrito.  4.  Estoy  convencido 
que  mi  amigo  llegara  hoy  mismo.  5.  El  colera  ha  infectado  a 
mucha  gente,  y  todavia  hay  muchos  que  estan  infectos.  6.  El  cocinero 
ha  torcido  el  pescuezo  de  la  gallina.  7.  El  buque  esta  provisto  de  todo 
lo  necesario.  8.  Los  ladrones  estaban  ocultos  en  el  monte,  pero  han 
sido  prendidos  por  los  soldados.  9.  Aunque  estuviese  yo  despieito, 
el  pretende  que  me  ha  despertado.  10.  El  cielo  ha  bendecido  sus 
obras.  11.  Estoy  tan  confuso  que  no  se  lo  que  estoy  haciendo. 
12.  No  me  han  permitido  salir  todavia.  13.  Este  cuadro  no  esta 
todayia  completo.  14.  Todavia  no  hemos  comprendido  lo  que  el 
queria  decir.  15.  Hemos  corregido  todos  los  ejercicios,  y  ahora  estan 
correctos.  16.  Son  los  hombres  mas  corruptos  que  hemos  conocido. 
17.    No   comprendo  lo  que  esta  inscrito  en  {on)  este   monumento. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE.  277 

18.  Fue  un  accidente  imprevisto,  y  a  nadie  podemos  culpar.  19.  To- 
das  las  mesas  en  la  casa  estan  rotas.  20.  Estos  libros  han  sido 
impresos  en  Paris. 

Exercise  lOO, 

1.  My  friend  invited  me  to  dine  with  him,  but  I  could  not  accept 
his  invitation.  2.  I  was  awake  when  your  friends  arrived  in  the 
night.  3.  These  two  friends  are  always  together.  4.  The  flowera 
you  bought  for  your  sister  are  already  faded.  5.  The  roads  are  not 
dry  yet,  and  we  will  have  to  take  a  carriage.  6.  Fill  the  empty 
glasses  with  (de)  wine.  7.  More  than  fifty  mefi  were  buried  under 
the  ruins  of  the  old  church.  8.  The  thieves  were  caught  and  taken 
to  (the)  prison.     9.   The  mob  has  been  dispersed  by  the  soldiers. 

10.  We  have  included  all  our  expenses  in  the  account  we  gave  you, 

11,  Do  you  know  if  the  fire  has  been  extinguished]  12.  It  was  ex- 
tinguished when  I  passed  through  the  street,  13.  This  young  man 
has  been  exempted  from  military  service,  14.  He  has  confessed  that 
he  has  spent  all  his  money  in  buying  trifles.  15.  The  inhabitants  of 
the  city  have  erected  a  statue  to  that  great  man.  16.  I  have  been 
obliged  to  sell  my  favorite  horse.  17.  All  these  maxims  were  in- 
scribed on  the  walls  of  our  school.  18.  These  men  have  been  expelled 
from  their  country  for  their  liberal  opinions. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  Many  verbs  have  in  Spanish  two  Past  Participles,  a  regu- 
lar and  an  irregular  one.  The  regular  Participle  of  such  verbs 
must  be  used  in  compound  tenses  with  the  verb  haber,  2.  to 
have  ;  or  when  the  sentence  is  passive  :       ^ 

Le  hem  OS  convencido  de  su  error,  JFe  have  convinced  him  of  his  error. 

Fue  espulsado  del  pais,  He  was  expelled  from  the  country. 

The  irregular  participle  is  used  as  an  Adjective  or  when 
standing  alone,  and  with  the  exception  of  preso,  prescrito, 
proscrito,  provisto,  roto,  injerto,  opreso,  impreso,  and  supreso, 

can  never  be  accompanied  by  the  auxiliary  haber,  2,  to  have. 
In  the  case  of  these  nine  verbs,  either  of  the  Participles  may  be 
used,  and  we  can  as  w^ell  say  ha  preso  as  ha  prendido.  Boto 
is  of  more  frequent  occurrence  than  rompido. 


278 


LESSON    51. 


Leccion  LI. 


Lesson  LI. 


THE  PASSIVE  VERB  (VOZ  PASIVA). 
Ser  alabado,  to  be  praised. 


Infinit.  Pres.  : 
Pret.  Perf.  : 
FuTURO : 

Part,  pas.: 
Gkrundio  : 
Part.  pret.  : 
Part,  futuro: 
Indic.  pres.  : 

Pret.  imperf.: 
Pret.  definido; 
Pret.  indefin.  : 
Pret.  anterior  : 
Pret.  pluscuamp 
Futuro  imperf.  : 
Futuro  perf.  : 

Imperative  : 
subj.  pres.: 
SuBJ.  imperf.: 

COND.  SLMP. : 

Pret.  perf.: 

Pluscuamperf.  : 

cond.  comp.  : 

Futuro  imp.  : 
Futuro  comp.  : 


Ser  alabad-o,  -a,  -os,  -as,         to  he  praised. 
haber  sido  alabad-o,  -a,  -os,  -as,  to  have  been  praised. 
haber  de  ser  alabad-o,  -a,  -OS, 


to  have  to  be  praised, 
praised, 
being  praised, 
having  been  praised, 
having  to  he  praised, 
I  am  praised. 


-as, 
alabad-o,  -a,  -os,  -as, 

siendo  alabado, 
habiendo  sido  alabado, 
habiendo  de  ser  alabado, 
yo  soy  alabado  (a), 
nosotros(as)somosalabados(as),  we  are  praised. 
yo  era  alabado,    \ 
yo  fui  alabado,    \ 
yo  he  sido  alabado, 
yo  hube  sido  alabado,    i 
:  yo  habia  sido  alabado,   \ 
yo  sere  alabado, 
yo  habre  sido  alabado, 


sea  alabado, 

que  yo  sea  alabado, 

que  yo  fuere  or  fuese  alabado, 

5^0  seria  alabado,      ♦; 

que  yo  haya  sido  alabado, 

que  yo  bubiera  i 

,    ,  .       >  sido  alabado, 
que  yo  hubiese  j  * 

yo  habria  sido  alabado, 

yo  fuere  alabado, 

yo  hubiere  sido  alabado. 


/  was  praised, 

I  have  been  praised. 

I  had  been  praised. 

I  shall  or  will  be  praised, 
I  shall  or  will  have  been 

praised, 
be  praised. 

that  I  may  be  praised, 
that  I  might  be  praised, 
I  should  or  would    be 

praised, 
that   I  may   have   been 

praised, 
that  I  might  have   been 

praised. 
I  should  or  would  have 

been  praised. 
I  shall  be  praised.  ^ 
I  shall  have  been  2^raised. 


Ejemplos. 

La  casa  del  general  esta  vendida. 
Los  enemigos  han  sido  derrotados. 


Examples. 

The  general's  house  is  sold. 
The  enemy  has  been  defeated. 


THE  PASSIVE  VERB. 


279 


El  pueiite  esta  construido. 
Mi  conducta  ha  sido  aprobada. 
J^a  carta  ha  sido  escrita  por  el. 
Los  muchachos  han  sido  castigados. 
Mi  sombrero  esta  perdido. 
Henios  sido  engafiados. 
El  es  estiinado  y  amado. 
Queremos  ser  obedecidos. 


The  bridge  is  built. 

My  conduct  has  been  approved. 

The  letter  has  been  written  by  him. 

The  boys  have  been  punished. 

My  hat  is  lost. 

We  have  been  deceived. 

He  is  esteemed  and  loved. 

We  wish  to  be  obeyed. 


Examples  with  the  pronoun  se : 


Esto  se  ve  a  menudo. 
El  cafe  se  vende  bien. 
Se  ama  al  hombre  de  bien. 
Se  adniira  la  sabiduria  de  Socrates. 
Esto  no  se  puede  hacer  asi. 
A  qui  se  habla  espahol. 
No  se  puede  ver  cosa  mas  mara- 
villosa. 

Vocabulario. 

El  diputado,  the  deputi/. 
.  El  gobi^no,  the  government. 
El  objeto,  the  object. 
El  retrato,  the  picture. 
El  terremoto,  the  earthquake. 
La  cantatriz,  the  singer. 
La  ciencia,  the  science. 
La  comedia,  the  comechj. 
La  conjuracion,  the  conspiracy. 
La  juventud,  the  youth. 
La  licencia,  the  license. 
La  muerte,  the  death. 
La  necesidad,  the  necessity. 
La  obra,  the  work. 
La  sentencia,  the  tnaxim. 


That  is  often  seen. 

Cofl'ee  sells  well. 

The  honest  man  is  loved. 

The  wisdom  of  Socrates  is  admired. 

That  cannot  be  done  so. 

Spanish  is  spoken  here. 

Nothing  more  wonderful  can  be  seen.-ix 


Vocabulary. 

La  tienda,  the  shop. 
Barato,  cheap. 
Escipion,  Scipio.    . 
Alabar,  1.  to  praise 
Alquilar,  1.  to  let 
Arruinar,  1.  to  ruin. 
Componer,  2.  to  compose^ 
Destruir,  3.  to  destroyt 
Escoger,  2.  to  select. 
Eligir,  3.  to  elect. 
Favorecer,  2.  to  favor. \ 
Eeconocer,  2.  to  know.  - 
Representar,  1.  to  play: 
Reprimir,  3.  to  repress. 
Restablecer,  2.  to  re-establish. 


Exercise  101. 

1.  Este  paiio  se  vende  en  la  tienda  del  Seiior  Palma.  2.  Se  han 
adniirado  mucho  las  sentencias  de  Seneca.  3.  Las  ciencias  han 
siempre  sido  favorecidas  por  los  buenos  gobiernos.  4.  Este  principe 
no  sera  alabado  despues  de  su  muerte.     5.  La  cantatriz  ha  sido  muy 


280  LESSON   51. 

aplaudida  anoche.  6.  Mi  amigo  ha  sido  eligido  diputado  de  su 
ciudad.  7.  [  Que  se  dice  en  la  ciudad  ?  8.  Se  dice  que  el  azucar  se 
vendera  muy  bien  este  ailo.  9.  Este  retrato  ha  sido  hecho  por  uno 
de  nuestros  mejores  pintores.  10.  Esta  senora  es  amada  y  estimada 
de  todos  los  que  la  conocen.  ll.  Se  ve  que  V.  esta  coiitento  hoy. 
12.  No  engariamos  a  nadie,  pero  somos  enganados  muy  a  menudo. 
l£^stos  muchachos  han  sido  alabados  por  sus  niaestros.  14.  No 
hei^ffo^ido  convidados  por  su  herraano,  y  asi  no  hemos  ido  a  su  casa. 
15.^*]^!^  hubiera  descubierto  la  conjuracion  de  Catilina,  si  Ciceron  no 
hubifes^  sido  consul  ?  16.  Se  reconoce  al  verdadero  amigo  en  la  necesi- 
dad.  17.  [  Sabe  V.  si  se  vende  esa  casa  ?  18.  No,  sen  or,  se  alquila. 
19.  Esta  obra  ha  sido  compuesta  por  mi  amigo.  20.  La  hacienda  ha 
sido  vendida  despues  de  la  muerte  del  dueiio.  21.  La  licencia  fue 
repriniida  y  la  paz  restablecida  en  el  pais.  22.  Estas  cosas  han  sido 
escogidas  por  mi  hermano  cuando  estaba  en  Paris.  23.  No  se  puede 
saber  como  le  fue  posible  al  ladron  entrar  en  la  casa.  24.  Estoy  seguro 
que  esta  carta  no  ha  sido  escrita  por  el.  25.  Se  cree  que  el  Presidente 
Uegara  esta  manana. 

Exercise  102. 

1.  These  goorfs  have  been  received  from  England.  2.  Where  have 
these  objects  been  found  ?  3.  They  have  been  found  in  a  carriage. 
4.  Those  gla^s  have  been  broken  by  the  children.  5.  Those  houses 
have  been^old  very  cheap.  6.  The  general  had  been  wounded  sev- 
eral times  in  his  youth.  7.  This  letter  has  been  written  by  one  of 
our  friends.  8.  What  would  you  have  done  if  you  had  known  that  1 
9.  I  would  have  done  the  same  thing  that  I  have  done.  10.  If  you 
go  to  his  house,  you  will  be  very  well  received.  11.  This  comedy 
has  been^ayed  twice  at  (en)  the  large  theater.  12.  Have  the  thieves 
been  caught  ?  13.  Two  of  them  have  been  caught.  14.  If  I  had 
been  invited  to  the  ball,  I  would  have  gone  with  my  sister.  15.  It 
is  said  that  there  has  been  a  great  fire  in  the  city.  16.  It  was  said 
yesterday  that  the  general  had  died.  17.  That  city  has  been  de- 
stroyed by  an  earthquake.  18.  I  think  that  coffee  will  sell  very  well 
this  year.  19.  Such  things  are  often  seen.  20.  French  goods  are 
sold  in  that  store.  21.  Hannibal  was  conquered  by  Scipio.  22.  The 
beautiful  house  of  the  banker  will  be  sold  this  week.  23.  Your 
brother  is  seen  every  afternoon  in  the  park.  24.  They  speak  only 
French  in  that  school.    25.  Our  friends  have  been  ruined  by  the  war. 


•    THE  PASSIVE.  VERB.  281 

26.  All  the  sugar  lias  })een  ba^jyi  by  that  merchant.  27.  1  have 
been  deceived  several  timef%^natinan.  28.  That  child  is  loved  by 
everybody. 


Gram  atica.  Grammar. 

1,  Passive  verbs  are  conjugated  in  all  their  tenses  with  the  ' 
auxiliary  verb  ser,  2.  to  he.     To  this  auxiliary  the  Past  Partidple 
of  active  or  transitive  verbs  is  added,  the  same  agreeing  in  gender' 
and  number  with  the  subject : 

El  muchacho  es  amado.  The  hoy  is  loved. 

La  muchacha  es  amada,  The  girl  is  loved. 

Los  ninchachos  son  amados,  The  hoys  are  loved. 

Las  muchachas  son  amadas,  The  girls  are  loved. 

2.  Active  verbs  are  often  used  passively  with  the  pronoun  se 
in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural : 

Estos   libros   se  venden  en  aquella         Those  hooks  are  sold  in  that  hooTc- 

libreria,  store. 

No  se  puede  ver  nada,  Nothing  can  he  seen. 

El  cafe  se  vende  bien,  Coffee  sells  well. 

3*  It  is  to  be  noticed,  however,  that  when  a  passive. sentence 
is  formed  with  the  pronoun  se,  this  sentence  may  preserve  the 
construction  of  the  active  : 

Se  ama  al  hombre  de  bien,         The  honest  man  is  loved. 

4.  The  verb  remains  invariable  in  the  singular  when  the  pas- 
sive subject  is  a  person,-  and  the  acting  ablative  is  not  expressed  : 

Es  dolor  el  ver  como  se  aprecia  mas        It  is  painful  to  see  that  infamous 
a  los  infames  aduladores  que  a  flatterers  are  more  esteemed  than 

los  hombres  honrados,  honorahle  men. 

5,  The  Past  Participle  remains  invariable  with  the  compound 
tense  of  the  verb  : 

Se  ha  amado  a  Maria  por  sus  vir-        Mary  has  heen  loved  for  Iter  virtues. 
tudes, 


282 


LESSON    62. 


a  thing,  or  when  tlie 


6«    When  the  object  of  thl^|^e 
acting  ablative  is  expressed,  the  verl^  ^^|gs  with  the  object, 
although  the  Past  Participle  remains  invariable  : 


i  Oh  siglo  miserable,  en  el  cual  se 

estiman  las  virtudes  por  bicocas, 

r,     cuando  las  aconipana  la  pobreza ! 

Se  han  adinirado  mucho  las  senten- 

cias  de  Seneca  por  siis  proprios 

enemigos, 


0  miserable  century y  in  which  virtue 
is  considered  as  nothing  when  ac- 
companied by  poverty  J 

The  maxitiu  of  Seneca  have  been 
much  admired,  even  by  his  ene- 
mies. 


7f  The  verbs  quedar,  1.  to  remain,  and  ir,  3.  to  go,  may 
sometimes  be  used  instead  of  ser  to  give  more  expression  to  the 
sentence  : 


Ha  quedado  verificado  que  eso  no 

es  verdad, 
Va  demostrado  que  la  tierra  rotura 

alrededor  del  sol, 


It  has  been  proved  that  this  is  not 

true. 
It  is  ptfoved  that  the  earth  revolves 

around  the  sun. 


Leccion  LII.  Lesson  LII. 

REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 
Pronouns  accompanying  the  Beflective  Verbs* 

Me,  •    myself. 

Te,'  thyself. 

Se,  himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves,  yourself,  yourselves. 

Nos,  oiirselves. 

Os,  yourselves. 

Alabarse,  to  praise  one^s  self 

Infinitive. 
Alabarse,  to  praise  one's  self. 

Past. 

Haberse  alabado,  to  have  praised  one's  self. 

Past  Participle. 
Alabadose,  praised  one's  self. 


REFLEi 


Alabandose, 
Habieiidose  a' 


Me  alabo, 
Te  alabas, 

Se  alaba, 


VERBS. 


283 


praising  ones  self, 
luiving  praised  one's  self. 

Indicative  Present. 

I  praise  myself, 
thou  praisest  thyself. 


Nos  alabamos, 
Os  alabais, 
Se  alaban, 
V.  se  alaba  (siiig.)^ 
V.  V.  se  alaban  (pi.), 
etc. 


She  praises  hitnself. 
she  praises  herself. 
ive  praise  ourselves, 
you  praise  yourselves, 
they  p7'aise  themselves, 
you  praise  yourself, 
you  praise  yourselves, 
etc. 


Past  Indefinite. 


Me  he  alabado, 
Te  has  alabado, 

Se  ha  alabado, 

Kos  hemos  alabado, 
Os  habeis  alabado, 
Se  han  alabado, 
V.  se  ha  (sing,)  alabado, 
V.  V.  se  han  (pi.)  alabado, 
etc. 


/  Jiave  praised  myself 
thou  hast  praised  thyself, 
he  has  praised  himself, 
she  has  praised  herself, 
we  have  praised  ourselves, 
you  have  praised  yourselves, 
they  have  pi^aised  themselves, 
you  have  praised  yourself 
you  have  praised  yourselves, 
etc. 


Imperative. 

Alabate,  praise  thyself. 

Alabese,  let  Mm  praise  himself. 

Alabemonos,  let  us  praise  ourselves. 

Alabaos,  praise  yourselves. 

Alabense,  let  them,  praise  themselves, 

Alabese  V.,  praise  yourself. 

Alabense  V.  Y.,  praise  yoicrselves. 

Reflective  verb  conjugated  with  another  verb. 


Yo  quiero  alabar-me, 
Tu  quieres  alabar-te, 
El  quiere  alabar-se, 
Ella  quiere  alabar-se, 
Nosotros  queremos  alabar-nos, 


/  will  praise  myself 
thoit  wilt  praise  thyself, 
he  will  praise  himself 
she  loill  praise  herself 
we  will  praise  ourselves. 


284 


LESSON   52. 


Vosotros  quereis  alabar-os, 

y.  quiere  (sing.)  alabar-se, 
Y.  V.  qiiieren  (^Z.)  alabar-se, 


you  will  ijraise  yourself, 
you  will  praise  yourselves. 


Ejemplos. 

Llamarse,  1.     i  Como  se  llama  V.  ? 

—  Me  llamo  Jose. 
Equivocarse,  1.     V.  se  equivoca. 
Sentarse,  1.     Sientese  V.,  senora. 
Levantarse,  1.     ^  A  que  hora  se  le- 

vanta  V.  ?  —  Me  leyaiito  a  las  seis. 
Acostarse,  1.     i  Porque  no  se  acues- 

tan  los  muchachos  ? —  Se  acostaran 

pronto. 
Pasearse,  1.      i  Quiere  V.  pasearse 

conmigo  ?  —  No  tengo  tiempo  de 

pasearme. 
Divertirse,  3.     Me  divierto  mucho 

aqui, 
Enfadarse,  1.     No  se  enfade  Y. 
Cor  tar  se,  1.     Los  muchachos  se  han 

cortado. 
Vestirse,  3.      Nos  vestiremos  mas 

tarde. 
Calentarse,  1.     Calientese  Y. 
Verse,  2.     No  puedo  verme  en   el 

espejo. 
Arrepentirse,  3.     El   se   arrepintio 

antes  de  morir. 
Dirigirse,  3.     i  A  quien  debo  diri- 

girme  ?  —  Y.  puede  dirigirse  a  mi. 

Ellas  se  han  escrito. 
No  nos  hemos  hablado. 


Examples. 

What  is  your  name  ?  —  My  name 

is  Joseph. 
You  are  mistaken. 
Sit  down,  madam. 
At  what  time  do  you  rise  ?  —  I  rise 

at  six  o'clock. 
Why  do  not  the  boys  go  to  bed  ? 

—  They  will  soon  go  to  bed. 

^  Will  you  take  a  walk  with  me  ?  — 
I  have  no  time  to  walk. 

I  amuse  myself  very  much  here. 

Do  not  get  angry. 

The  boys  have  cut  themselves. 

We  will  dress  later. 

Warm  yourself. 

I  cannot  see  myself  in  the  looking- 
glass.  • 
He  repented  before  dying. 

To  whom  must   I   apply  ?  —  You 
may  apply  to  me. 

They  have  written  to  each  other. 
We  have  not  spoken  to  each  other. 


REFLECTIVE  VEEBS. 


285 


Vocabulario. 

El  mercader,  the  merchant. 
La  colocacion,  the  situation. 
La  cuenta,  the  account. 
La  miseria,  the  misery. 
Ligero,  quick. 
Far  ado,  standing. 
Acordarse,  1.  to  remember. 
Acostarse,  1.  to  go  to  bed. 
Apoderarse,  1.  to  take  possession. 
Banarse,  1.  to  hathe. 
Burlarse,  1.  to  laugh  at. 
Caerse,  2.  to  fall. 
Calentar,  1.  to  warm. 
Casarse,  1.  to  marry. 
Comportarse,  1.  to  belmve. 


Vocabulary. 

Defender,  2.  to  defend. 
Desmayarse,  1.  to  faint. 
Despertarse,  1.  to  awake. 
Divertirse,  3.  to  amuse  mie's  self. 
Dormirse,  3.  to  fall  asleep. 
Enfadarse,  1.  to  get  angry. 
Equivocarse,  1.  to  make  a  mistake. 
Llamarse,  1.  to  he  called. 
Levantarse,  1.  to  rise. 
Pasearse,  1.  to  take  a  walk, 
Quedarse,  1.  to  remain. 
Quejarse,  1.  to  complain. 
Quemar,  1.  to  hum. 
Bendirse,  3.  to  surrender. 
Sentarse,  1.  to  sit  down. 


Exercise  103. 

1.  I  Porque  no  se  sienta  V.  ?  2.  No  estoy  cansado,  prefiero  que- 
darnie  parado.  3.  i  Se  divierten  V.  V.  en  el  campo '?  4.  Nos  diverti- 
mos  muchisimo  ahi.  5.  ^  No  se  equivoca  V.  cuando  V.  dice  eso  ? 
6.  No  me  eqiiivoco.  7.  i  Porque  ne  se  pasea  V.  todas  las  mananas  1 
8.  Me  paseo  cuando  el  tiempo  esta  bueno.  9.  [  Se  levanta  V.  tem- 
prano  ?  10.  Me  levanto  tan  pronto  como  me  despierto.  11.  Si  V. 
tiene  frio,  calientese.  12.  No  se  queme  V. ;  el  plato  esta  muy  ca- 
liente.  13.  No  se  lo  que  tengo,  pero  no  puedo  dormir  cuando  me 
acuesto  por  la  noche.  14.  Es  porque  V.  se  acuesta  demasiado  tem- 
prano,  y  se  levanta  demasiado  tarde.  15.  [  Como  se  llama  su  amigo 
de  v.?  16.  Se  llama  Juan,  y  su  hermana  se  llama  Maria.  17.  [  Porque 
no  va  V.  al  jardin  a  divertirse  con  los  muchachos  ?  18.  No  me  siento 
Lien,  quiero  ir  a  acostarme.  19.  Los  enemigos  se  apoderaron  de  una 
de  nuestras  fortalezas.  20.  Toda  la  familia  esta  en  el  campo  ;  yo  me 
he  quedado  solo  en  la  ciudad.  21.  [  Se  acuerda  V.  de  lo  que  dijo  este 
liombre?  22.  Me  acuerdo  de  todo  le  que  dijo.  23.  Digale  V.  al 
mercader  que  se  equivoco  en  la  cuenta  que  nos  mando.  24.  i  Porque 
se  queja  V.  de  mi  ?  25.  Yo  no  me  quejo  de  nadie.  26.  i  Se  ban 
bablado  estas  senoras  ?  27.  Creo  que  no  se  ban  bablado.  28.  [  Donde 
ba  conocido  V.  a  este  caballero  1  29.  Nos  bemos  conocido  en  Madrid. 
30.  ^Porque  se  burlan  V.  V.  de  este  bombre?  31.  Porque  es  muy 
ridiculo.     32.  El  hi  jo  de  Juan  se  esta  muriendo.     33.  'La  pobre  madre 


286  LESSON   52 

se  desmayo  cuando  le  hablaron  de  la  muerte  de  su  hijo.  34.  Mi  her- 
mano  se  casara  cuando  tenga  una  buena  colocacion.  35.  Si  V.  no 
hubiese  corrido  tan  ligero,  no  se  habria  caido. 

Exercise  104. 

1.  Why  do  not  the  children  go  to  bed  ?  2.  They  will  not  go  to 
bed.  3.  How  is  that  said  in  Spanish  ?  4.  I  don't  know  how  it  is 
said.  5.  What  is  your  name,  my  friend  ?  6.  My  name  is  Edward. 
7.  Why  does  not  brother  get  up  ;  is  he  sick  1  8.  He  is  not  sick,  but 
he  always  gets  up  late.  9.  Sit  down,  I  will  be  ready  in  a  moment. 
10.  Will  you  take  a  walk  with  us  ?  11.  With  pleasure  ;  where  do  you 
wish  to  go  ?  12.  Let  us  go  to  the  park.  13.  Why  do  you  get  angry  so 
quickly  1  14.  You  are  mistaken ;  I  never  get  angry.  15.  Will  you  not 
go  to  the  concert  with  us  ?  16.  I  am  so  tired  that  I  am  afraid  to  fall 
asleep.  17.  When  I  was  in  the  country  I  rose  very  early,  but  since  I 
have  been  (am)  in  town  I  rise  very  late.  18.  Have  the  children 
taken  a  walk  ?  19.  Yes,  sir,  they  take  a  walk  every  morning  early. 
20.  What  did  you  say  when  he  complained  to  you  1  21.  I  did  not  say 
anything.     22.  He  believed  himself  rich,  but  he  was  far  from  being  so. 

23.  Thet;e  soldiers  defended  themselves  with  the  greatest   courage. 

24.  That  officer  covered  himself  with  glory.  25.  Where  have  you 
known  each  other  ?  26.  We  have  known  each  other  in  France. 
27.  The  enemy  has  surrendered.  28.  The  children  have  taken  a  bath 
in  the  river.  29.  Don't  laugh  at  that  man,  because  he  is  poor  and  old. 
30.  I  have  never  laughed  at  him.  31.  That  boy  has  behaved  very 
badly.  32.  She  fainted  on  hearing  that.  33.  You  have  made  a  mis- 
take in  saying  that.  34.  After  having  lost  his  fortune,  he  saw  him- 
self in  the  greatest  misery.     35.  My  sister  will  be  married  next  week. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

!•  Eeflective  or  Pronominal  verbs  are  conjugated  in  Spanish 
with  two  Personal  Pronouns  of  the  same  Person,  the  first  (ex- 
pressed or  understood)  being  the  subject,  and  the  second,  accord- 
ing to  the  active  or  neuter  meaning  of  the  verb,  the  direct  or 
indirect  object  : 

Yo  me  divierto  or  me  divierto,  /  amuse  myself.  - 

El  se  alaba  or  se  alaba,  He  praises  himself. 


REFLECTIVE  \^ERBS.  287 

Note.  —  The  indirect  pronoun  may  also  be  placed  after  the  verb  and 
form  but  one  word  with  the  same  : 

Divertimonos  muchisimo,  JFe  amuse  ourselves  much. 

2.  Eeflective  verbs  are  either  essentially  reflective,  that  is, 
they  cannot  be  used  without  the  two  personal  pronouns,  as  arre- 
pentirse,  3.  to  repent ;  acordarse,  1.  to  remember,  etc.,  or  acci- 
dentally reflective,  that  is,  they  may  be  formed  as  in  English, 
from  active  or  neuter  verbs  :  quemarse,  1.  to  hum  oiie's  self, 
from  quemar,  1.  to  hum ;  calentarse,  1.  to  warm  one^s  self,  from 
calentar,  1.  to  warm,  etc. 

The  number  of  verbs  essentially  reflective  is  limited,  but 
accidentally  reflective  verhs  are  unlimited,  since  in  Spanish,  as 
well  as  in  English,  almost  any  verb  may  be  used  reflectively, 

3«  Many  verbs  which  are  reflective  in  Spanish,  are  not  so  in 
English.     Such  are  among  others,  the  verbs  : 

Quejarse,  1.  to  complain.  Arrepentirse,  3.  to  repent. 

Acordarse,  1.  to  remember.  Apoderarse,  1.  to  take  possession, 

etc.  etc. 

4«  A  reflective  verb,  conjugated  with  another  verb,  takes  the 
corresgonding  personal  pronoun  before  the  Infinitive  : 

Quiero  divertirme,  I  loish  to  amuse  myself. 

Vamos  a  baharnos,  We  are  going  to  take  a  bath. 

Note.  —  It  is  to  be  observed  that  in  this  case  also  the  indirect  pronoun 
may  precede  the  first  verb  :  Me  quiero  divertir.  /  ivish  to  amicse  myself ; 
nos  vamos  a  banar,  we  are  going  to  take  a  bath,  etc. 

5 1  In  compound  tenses,  the  indirect  pronoun  is  placed  before 
the  auxiliary  : 

Me  he  cortado,  I  have  ctit  myself. 

Se  han  burlado  de  V.,  They  have  made  fun  of  you. 

El  se  ha  comprado  una  casa,  He  has  bought  himself  a  house. 

6f  Eeflective  verbs,  when  used  with  plural  persons,  also  ex- 
press in  Spanish  a  reciprocal  or  mutual  action  : 
Se  vieron,  pero  no  se  hablaron,  They  saw  each  other,  hut  they  did 

not  speak  to  each  other. 


238  LESSON   53. 

Se  han  escrito  muchas  cartas,  They  have  written  many  letters  to 

each  other. 

Ti  The  s  of  the  first  person  plural,  and  the  d  of  the  second 
person,  are  dropped  in  the  Imperative  of  Reflective  verbs  : 
Amemonos  instead  of  am^mosnos.         Let  us  love  each  other. 
Amaos  instead  of  amados,  Love  each  other. 

8.  Accidentally  reflective  verbs  have  often  a  different  meaning 
from  that  of  the  primitive  verb,  as  for  instance  : 

Burl  arse  de  uno,  To  make  fan  of  some  one. 

Burlar  las  esperanzas  de  uno,  To  destroy  the  hopes  of  some  one. 

Dormirse,  3.  to  fall  asleep.  Dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 

Desmayarse,  1.  to  faint.  Desmayar,  1.  to  lose  courage. 

Caerse,  2.  to  fall.  Caer  en   una  falta,   to  commit  a 

fault. 

9t  There  are  many  Spanish  verbs  which  may  be  nsed  either 
reflectively  or  not,  without  altering  their  meaning  : 

Fiarse  or  fiar  de  alguno,  To  trust  somebody. 

Chancearse  or  cliancear  con  alguno,  To  joke  with  some  one. 

Reirse  or  reir  de  alguno,  To  laugh  at  some  one. 

Se  ha  muerto  or  Ha  muerto,  He  Itas  died. 


Leccion  LIII.  Lesson  LIII. 

REFLECTIVE  VERBS  {Continued). 

Irse,  3.  to  go  away. 

Yo  me  voy,  /  am,  going  away. 

Tu  te  vas,  TJiou  art  going  away. 

iX  se  va.  He  is  going  away. 

Ella  se  va,  She  is  going  away. 

Nosotros  nos  vamos.  We  are  going  away. 

Vosotros  OS  vais.  You  are  going  away. 

Ellos  (m.)  se  van,   |  rpj^^  ^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^^y^ 
Ellas  (/ )  se  van,    ) 

V.  {sing.)  se  va,         |  you  are  going  away. 
V.  V.  {pi.)  se  van,    ) 


EEFLECTIVE  VERBS  (CONTINUED) 


289 


0,      J 


Keflective  Verbs  referring 

Cortarse  la  mano, 
Yo  me  corto  la  mano, 
Tu  te  cortas  la  mano, 
El  se  corta  la  mano, 
Ella  se  corta  la  mano, 
Nosotros  nos  cortamos  la  mano, 
Vosotros  OS  cortais  la  mano, 
Ellos  {m.)  se  cortan  la  mano, 
Ellas  (/.)  se  cortan  la  mano, 
V.  (sivg.)  se  corta  la  mano, 
V.  V.  ipl.)  se  cortan  la  mano, 


Ponerse  el  sombrero, 

Yo  me  pongo  el  sombrero, 

Tu  te  pones  el  sombrero. 

El  se  pone  el  sombrero, 

Ella  se  pone  el  sombrero, 

Nosotros  nos  ponemos  el  sombrero, 

Vosotros  OS  poneis  el  sombrero, 

Ellos  (m.)  se  ponen  el  sombrero, 

Ellas  (/.)  se  ponen  el  sombrero, 

V.  {sing.)  se  pone  el  sombrero, 

V.  V.  (pi.)  se  ponen  el  sombrero. 


Ponerselo, 

Yo  me  lo  pongo, 

Tu  te  lo  pones, 

El  se  lo  pone, 

Ella  se  lo  pone, 

Kosotros  nos  lo  ponemos, 

Vosotros  OS  lo  poneis, 

Ellos  (m. )  se  lo  ponen, 

Ellas  (/.)  se  lo  ponen, 

V.  (sing,)  se  lo  pone, 

V.  V.  {pi. )  se  lo  ponen. 


J 


to  parts  of  the  Body. 

To  cut  one's  hand. 
I  cut  my  hand. 
Thou  cuttest  thy  hand. 
He  cuts  his  hand. 
She  cuts  her  hand. 
We  cut  our  hand. 
You  cut  your  hand. 

They  cut  their  hand. 
You  cut  your  fuind. 

To  put  on  one's  hat. 
I  put  on  my  hat. 
Thou  imttest  on  thy  hat. 
He  puts  on  his  hat. 
She  puts  on  lier  hat. 

We  put  on  our  hat. 

You  put  on  your  Imt. 

They  put  on  their  hats. 
You  put  on  your  hat. 

To  put  it  on. 
I  put  it  on. 
Thou  2iuttest  it  on. 
He  puts  it  071. 
She  puts  it  07b. 
We  put  it  071. 
You  put  it  on. 

Tliey  put  it  on. 


You  put  it  071. 


Compound  Tenses. 

Yo  me  he  cortado  la  mano,  /  have  cut  my  hand. 

Tu  te  has  cortado  la  mano.  Thou  hast  cut  thy  Jiand. 

El  se  ha  cortado  la  mano,  He  has  cut  his  hand. 

Ella  se  ha  cortado  la  mano.  Slie  has  cut  her  hand. 
19 


290 


LESSON   53. 


Nosotros  nos  hemos  cortado  la  mano, 
Vosotros  OS  habeis  cortado  la  mano, 
Ellos  (m.)  se  han  cortado  la  mano, 
Ellas  (/.)  se  lian  cortado  la  mano, 
V.  (sing.)  se  ha  cortado  la  mano, 
V.  V.  (pi. )  se  han  cortado  la  mano, 

Yo  me  he  puesto  el  sombrero, 
etc. 

Yo  me  lo  he  puesto, 
etc. 


,.i 


JFe  have  cut  our  hand. 
You  have  cut  your  hand. 

They  have  cut  their  hand. 
You  have  cut  your  hand. 

I  have  put  on  my  hat. 
etc. 

I  have  put  it  mi. 
etc. 


Ejemplos. 

Mateo  se  ensucio  los  dedos. 

Nos  hemos  quemado  la  mano. 

i  Se  ha  quitado  V.  los  zapatos  ? 

No  me  los  he  quitado. 

i  Se  pondra  Y.  el  sombrero  nuevo  ? 

Me  pondre  el  viejo. 

i  Quien  le  corta  a  V.  las  unas  ? 

Mi  madre  me  las  corta. 

Cuando  se  va  Y.  ? 

Me  voy  ahora. 


Examples. 

Matthew  soiled  his  fingers. 
We  have  burned  our  hand. 
Have  you  taken  off  j^our  shoes  ? 
I  have  not  taken  them  off. 
Will  you  put  on  your  i)ew  hat  ? 
I  will  put  on  the  old  one. 
Who  cuts  your  nails  ? 
My  mother  cuts  them  for  me. 
When  are  you  going  away  ? 
I  am  going  away  now. 


Vocabulario. 
El  dedo,  thefnger. 
El  guante,  the  glove. 
La  bota,  the  hoot. 
La  cama,  tlie  bed. 
La  camisa,  the  shirt. 
La  cara,  the  face. 
La  casaca,  the  coat. 
La  media,  the  stocking. 
La  pierna,  the  leg. 
La  una,  the  nail, 
Adios,  good  by. 


Vocabulary, 
Afuera,  out. 
Hinchado,  swollen. 
Pues,  ivell. 
Afeitar,  1.  to  shave. 
Lavar,  1.  to  wash. 
Marcharse,  1.  to  depart. 
Ponerse,  2.  to  put  on. 
Quitarse,  1.  to  take  off. 
Seguir,  3.  to  continue. 
Sentar,  1.  to  beconie. 


Exercise  105. 

1.  Vayase  V.  de  aqui,  Y.  hace  deniasiado  ruido.     2.  Me  ire  en  iin 
momento.     3.   i  Se  ha  lavado  Y.  las  manos  ?     4.    Me  he  lavado  las 


KEFLECTIYE  VERBS    (CONTINUED).  291 

manos  y  la  cara.  5.  [  Cuando  se  marcha  su  hermauo  de  V.  ?  6.  Se 
marchara  esta  noche  a  las  ocho.  7.  i  Porque  no  se  corta  V.  las  unas  ? 
8.  Me  las  corto  todas  las  semanas.  9.  Los  hombres  quiereii  irse. 
10.  Pues,  que  se  vayaii.  11.  [  Porque  no  se  quita  V.  las  nicdias  antes 
de  acostarse  1  12.  Yo  me  las  quito  en  la  cama.  13.  Quitese  V.  el 
sombrero  cuando  V.  entra  en  el  cuarto.  14.  Yo  siempre  me  lo  quito. 
15.  Vamonos,  ja,  es  tarde.  16.  No  puedo  irme  ahora  ;  tengo  todavia 
demasiado  que  hacer.  17.  No  puedo  ponerme  los  zapatos,  tengo  los 
pies  hinchados.  18.  Ese  muchacho  se  va  a  cortar  los  dedos  si  sigue 
jugando  con  el  cuchillo.  19.  Pongase  V.  otra  camisa,  la  que  V.  tiene 
no  esta  limpia.  20.  El  pobre  Juan  se  rompio  la  pierna,  cuando  cay6 
de  su  caballo.  21.  [  Cuantas  veces  se  afeita  V.  ?  22.  Me  afeito  todos 
los  dias.  .  23.  [  Porque  no  se  quita  V.  las  botas  ?  24.  No  puedo 
quitarmelas.     25.  ^dios,  amigo,  me  voy. 

Exercise  106. 

1.  Why  do  you  go  away  so  soon  ?  2.  I  have  to  go  away,  it  is 
already  late.  3.  Johnny  is  a  bad  boy,  he  would  not  take  off  his  hat 
in  Mrs.  Riera's  house.  4.  Wash  that  child's  face  and  take  him  out. 
5.  I  cannot  write,  I  must  first  warm  my  hands.  6.  Do  not  go  away 
yet,  I  need  you.  7.  When  can  I  go  away  1  8.  You  may  go  away  in 
half  an  hour.  9.  Would  you  go  away  if  you  could  remain  longer  ? 
10.  I  would  not  go  away  if  I  had  not  so  much  to  do.  II.  Wash  your 
hands  and  come  with  me.  12.  Do  not  take  off  your  hat,  you  have  to 
go  out  yet.  13.  I  cannot  put  on  these  gloves,  they  are  too  small  for 
me.  14.  Poor  Mr.  Castro  broke  his  arm  the  other  day.  15.  Which 
coat  will  you  put  on  ?  16.  I  will  put  my  blue  coat  on.  17.  Let  us 
go  away,  my  father  is  waiting  for  us.  18.  Which  of  your  brothers  is 
going  away  next  week  1  19.  They  are  both  going  away.  20.  Take 
off  that  hat,  it  does  not  become  you.  21.  Good  by,  sir,  we  are  going 
away.  22.  If  you  fall  down,  you  will  break  your  head.  23.  I  have 
burned  my  hand,  and  I  cannot"  work  to-day.  24.  He  put  on  his 
hat  and  coat,  and  went  away  without  saying  a  word.  25.  Felipe 
will  not  put  on  his  shoes  ;  he  says  that  he  has  sore  feet.  26.  Our 
friends  are  going  away  to-morrow.  27.  Why  do  you  not  go  with 
them  ?  28.  You  know  very  well  that  I  am  obliged  to  remain  in 
town  ? 


292 


LESSON   54. 


Gram&tica. 


Grammar. 


1  •  The  reflective  pronoun  is  used  in  Spanish  when  the  ohject 
of  the  verb  is  a  part  of  the  body,  and  in  such  cases  the  article 
takes  the  place  of  the  possessive  adjective  before  the  noun  : 

Yo  me  corto  el  dedo,  /  cut  my  finger. 

El  se  lava  la  cara,  He  washes  his  face. 

2.  The  verbs  ponerse,  2.  to  put  on,  and  quitarse,  1.  to  tahe 
off,  follow  the  same  rule  as  above  when  referring  to  articles  of 
clothing  and  others  when  destined  for  parts  of  the  body  : 

Me  pongo  el  sombrero,  I  put  on  my  hat. 

Me  quito  los  guantes,  /  take  off  my  gloves. 


leccion  LIT. 

lesson  LIT. 

PERIPHRASTIC  VERBS. 

Hacerse, 

Haber  de,                   ^ 

Meterse, 

Tener  de. 

Ponerse, 

Haber  menester  de. 

'  must,  shall. 

Volverse, 

Tener  menester  de, 

Llegar  a  ser. 

'  to  become. 

Deber  de. 

Veiiir  a  ser, 

Iree  hacieudo, 

Placer,  2.      a 

Venir  a  ser, 

Gustar,!.       V  to  like,  to  please. 

Venir  a  parar,    , 

Agradar,  1.  J 

Conjugation. 
Hacerse,  2.  meterse,  2.  ponerse,  2.  volverse,  2.  to  become. 

Present  Indicative. 
/  become. 


Yo  me  hago, 
Tu  te  haccs, 
El  se  hace, 
Ella  se  liace, 
Nosoti'os  nos  hacemos, 
Vosotros  OS  haceis. 


thou  becmnest. 
he  becomes, 
she  becomes, 
we  become, 
you  becmne. 


PERIPHRA.STIC   VERBS. 


293 


Ellos  (m.)  se  hacen, 
Ellas  (/.)  se  hacen, 
V.  {sing.)  se  hace, 
V.  V.  {pi.)  se  hacen. 


,1 


they  become, 
you  become. 


Preterite  Indefinite. 


Me  he  hecho, 
Te  has  hecho, 
El  se  ha  hecho, 
Ella  se  ha  hecho, 
Nosotros  nos  hemos  hecho, 
Vosotros  OS  habeis  hecho, 
Ellos  (m.)  se  han  hecho, 
Ellas  (/.)  se  han  hecho, 
V.  {sing.)  se  ha  hecho,        ) 
V.  V.  {pi.)  se  han  hecho,  ) 


I  have  become, 
thou  hast  become, 
he  has  become, 
she  has  become, 
we  have  become. 
y(m  have  become. 

they  have  becoine. 
you  have  become. 


Yo  llego  a  ser, 
Yo  vengo  a  ser, 
etc. 


Llegar,  1.  venir  a  ser. 
Present  Indicative. 
/  become, 
etc. 


He  llegado  a  ser, 
He  venido  a  ser. 


Preterite  Indefinite. 

I  have  become. 

Irse  haciendo. 


Present 
Yo  me  voy  haciendo, 
Tu  te  vas  haciendo, 
El  se  va  haciendo, 
Ella  se  va  haciendo, 
Nosotros  nos  vanios  haciendo, 
Vosotros  OS  vais  haciendo, 
Ellos  (w.)  se  van  haciendo, 
Ellas  (/.)  se  van  haciendo, 
V.  {sing.)  se  va  haciendo, 
V.  V.  (pi.)  se  van  haciendo, 


Indicative. 

/  am  becoming, 
thou  art  becoming, 
he  is  becoming, 
she  is  becoming.  . 
we  are  becoming, 
you  are  becoming. 

they  are  becoming, 
you  are  becoming. 


294  LESSON   54. 

Preterite  Indefinite. 

Me  lie  ido  haciendo,  /  have  become. 

Te  has  ido  haciendo,  thou  hast  hecotne. 

Se  ha  ido  haciendo,  he  or  she  has  become. 

Nos  hemos  ido  haciendo,  we  have  become. 

Os  habeis  ido  haciendo,  you  have  become. 

Se  han  ido  haciendo,  they  have  become. 

V.  (sing. )  se  ha  ido  haciendo,       )  ,        , 

-17   -\r   /    7  \       -u       '^    X.     '    \     (         2/ow  have  become. 

V.  V.  {pi.)  se  han  ido  haciendo,  ) 

Haber,  2.  tener  menester  de,  haber  de,  deber  de. 

Present  Indicative. 

-    Yo  he  menester  de  salir,  /  7nust  go  out. 

etc.  etc. 

Preterite  Indefinite. 

He  habido  menester  de  salir,  /  have  been  obliged  to  go  out. 

etc.  etc. 

Gustar,  1.  placer,  2.  agradar,  1.  to  like,  to  please. 

Present  Indicative  (affirmatively). 

Me  gusta  or  gustan,  /  like  or  like  to. 

Te  gusta  or  gustan,  thou  likest  or  likest  to. 

Le  gusta  or  gustan,  he  or  she  likes  or  likes  to. 

Nos  gusta  or  gustan,  we  like  or  like  to. 

Os  gusta  or  gustan,  you  like  or  like  to. 

Les  gusta  or  gustan,  they  like  or  like  to. 

A  V.  le  gusta  or  gustan  (sing.),  |      ^^^  ^.^^  ^^.  ^.^^  ^^_ 

A  V.  V.  les  gusta  or  gustan  {pi.),  * 

Present  Indicative  (interrogatively). 

I  Me  gusta  {or  gustan)  a  mi  ?  do  I  like  (or  do  I  like  to)  ? 

i  Te  gusta  {or  gustan)  a  ti  ?  dost  thou  like  (or  like  to)? 

I  Le  gusta  {or  gustan)  a  el  ?  does  he  like  (or  like  to)  ? 

i  Le  gusta  {or  gustan)  a  ella  ?  does  she  like  (or  like  to)  ? 


PERIPHRASTIC   VERBS. 


295 


I  Nos  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  nosotros  ? 
i  Os  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  vosotros  ? 
I  Les  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  ellos  (m.)  ? 
i  Les  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  ellas  (/.)  ? 
i  Le  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  V.  (sing.)  ? 
j  Les  gusta  (or  gustan)  a  V.  V.  (^Z.)  ? 


c?o  M7e  Zfc^e  (or  like  to)  ? 
do  you  like  (or  like  to)  ? 

do  they  like  (or  like  to)  ? 
do  you  like  (or  like  to)  ? 


Vocabulario. 
El  clialeco,  tJie  vest. 
£1  precio,  tJie  price. 
El  prisionero,  the  prisoTier. 
El  sastre,  the  tailor. 
La  Uuvia,  the  rain. 
Los  padres,  the  parents. 
Debil,  loeak. 
De  repente,  suddenly. 
Despacio,  sloidy. 
Honrado,  honest. 
Loco,  insane. 
OrguUoso,  proud. 


Vocabulary. 
Otra  cosa,  something  else. 
Sobre,  about. 
Afusilar,  1.  to  shoot. 
Concluirse,  3.  to  end. 
Construir,  3.  to  build, 
Correr,  2.  to  run. 
Echarse,  1.  to  begin. 
Gritar,  1.  to  scream. 
Llamar,  1.  to  call. 
Odiar,  1.  to  hate. 
Bespetar,  1.  to  respect. 
Seguir,  3.  to  continue-. 


Exercise  107. 

1.  Mi  hermano  se  ha  hecho  negociante.  2.  Eete  hombre  no  sabe 
nada,  y  se  ha  meticlo  a  medico.  3.  Por  sus  talentos  llego  aquel 
oficial  a  ser  general.  4.  El  tiempo  se  ha  puesto  tan  malo,  cjue  no 
henios  podido  marcharnos.  5.  Juan  se  puso  tan  malo,  que  creianios 
que  se  iba  a  morir.  6.  Yo  no  se  en  que  vendra  a  parar  esta  disputa. 
7.  Me  es  preciso  salir  manana  muy  temprano.  8.  Si  el  enfermo 
sigue  malo,  habra  que  llamar  al  medico.  9.  El  hijo  debe  y  ha  de 
respetar  a  sus  padres.  10.  El  general  mando  afusilar  a  los  prisioneros. 
11.  Sobre  eso,  hay  mucho  que  decir.  12.  El  muchacho  se  echo  a 
correr  despues  de  haber  robado  las  manzanas.  13.  [  Le  gusta  d  V.  la 
cerveza?  14.  No  me  gusta  mucho.  15.  j  Que  se  hard  de  nosotros  si 
no  recibimos  dinero  !     16.  Hemos  menester  de  salir  antes  de  las  tres. 

17.  Nuestro  amigo  Felipe   trabaja   mucho,   y  se  va   haciendo   rico. 

18.  Estando  en  la  calle,  se  puso  a  gritar.  19.  Muchos  de  mis  amigos 
se  han  hecho  ricos  en  America.  20.  No  me  gustan  estos  libros,  y  asi 
no  los  leo.     21.  Se  dice  que  el  padre  de  Enrique  se  ha  vuelto  loco. 

22.  Aquel  hombre  se  volvio  tan  'orgulloso  que  era  odiado  de  todos. 

23.  Tendremos   que  pagarle  a  este   hombre    el   precio  que   pide. 


296  LESSON   54. 

24.  Mejor  qniero  ser  pobre  que  robar.  25.  El  ano  que  vieiie  me 
hare  construir  una  casa  mas  grande.  26.  No  me  agrada  la  conducta 
de  este  hombre.  27.  Vamos  mas  despacio,  a  mi  no  me  gusta  andar 
tan  ligero.  28.  i  A  que  ha  venido  a  parar  aquello  ?  29.  Todavia  no 
se  sabe.  30.  No  nos  place  que  V.  V.  hagan  eso.  31.  Deje  V.  entrar 
a  este  hombre. 

Exercise  108. 

1.  My  brother  would  have  become  a  general  if  the  war  had  not 
ended.  2.  What  will  become  of  those  two  men  ?  3.  A  bad  prince 
seldom  becomes  a  good  king.  4.  Being  in  the  street,  he  became  very- 
sick.  5.  The  poor  man  became  so  weak  that  he  could  not  walk. 
6.  John  is  getting  richer  every  day.  7.  I  do  not  like  this  man,  I 
don't  believe  he  is  honest.  8.  You  will  have  to  give  him  all  the 
money  he  asks.  9.  The  thief  began  to  run  when  he  saw  us.  10.  What 
will  become  of  those  poor  children  ?  11.  You  will  get  sick  if  you  are 
not  more  prudent.  12.  When  iron  is  exposed  to  rain  it  becomes  rusty. 
13.  What  w^ould  you  like  to  eat  ?  14.  I  should  like  to  eat  some 
chicken.  15.  I  believe  that  man  has  become  insane.  16.  He  has 
become  a  physician  after  having  studied  several  years  in  Paris. 
17.  You  will  have  to  speak  to  him,  if  he  comes  again.  18.  I  am 
having  a  new  vest  .made  by  my  tailor.  19.  If  you  don't  like  this 
wine,  I  will  give  you  something  else.  20.  The  weather  has  suddenly 
become  very  cold.  21.  I  don't  know  what  will  become  of  that  man. 
22.  Napoleon  the  First  became  great  by  his  victories.  23.  I  have  to 
stay  at  home  until  my  brother  returns.  24.  He  began  to  laugh  when 
I  told  him  that.  25.  Are  we  going  to  read  or  to  write  ?  26.  You 
are  to  read  first.  27.  If  I  call  you,  come  immediately,  and  don't  keep 
me  waiting  (make  me  wait).  28.  Next  year  we  are  going  to  have  a 
house  built.  29.  Henry  has  become  rich  in  a  few  years.  30.  My 
sister  says  that  she  does  not  like  her  new  house. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1  •  There  are  verbs  besides  the  auxiliary  verbs  already  men- 
tioned which  may  be  called  periphrastic  verbs,  because  they 
are  used  not  only  to  form  the  compound  tenses  of  other  verbs, 
but  also  to  circumscribe  the  sentence.  The  verbs  haber,  2.  and 
tener,  2.  followed  by  the  preposition  de,  belong  to  this  category, 


PERIPHRASTIC  VERBS.  297 

and  so  do  certain  active  and  neuter  verbs  taken  reflectively  or  fol- 
lowed by  the  preposition  a,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  list  above. 

2.  The  verb  to  become,  when  expressing  a  change  of  condi- 
tion or  profession  by  the  subject,  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by 
hacerse,  2.  ponerse,  2.  and  meterse,  2.  : 

Se  ha  hecho  \ 

Se  ha  puesto  >  a  medico,  He  has  become  a  physician. 

Se  ha  metidoj 

3*  When  the  change  of  condition  is  not  performed  by  the 
subject,  but  is  a  consequence  of  its  merits,  llegar  a  ser,  venir 
a  ser,  or  ser  hecho  are  then  used  : 

Por  sus  talentos  llego  a  ser  (vino  a  ser        By  his  talents  he  became  physician 
or  fue  hecho)  medico  de  camara,  of  the  court. 

Note.  —  Irse  haciendo  is  used  to  express  a  progressing  action. 

4,  To  become  or  to  get  is  translated  by  ponerse,  2.  to  ex- 
press a  change  in  health,  and  by  the  same  verb  and  by  vol- 
verse,  2.  or  hacerse,  2.  if  we  express  a  change  in  the  physical  or 
moral  condition  of  a  person,  animal,  or  thing  : 

Se  ha  puesto  enfermo,  He  has  become  sick. 

Se  volvio  loco,  He  became  insane. 

5,  To  result  is  best  translated  by  ser,  salir  de,  or  venir 
a  parar : 

Yo  no  se  en  que  vendra  a  parar  (que        I  don't  know  what  the  result  of  this 
saldra  or  que  sera)  de  esta  disputa,  dispute  will  be. 

6*  To  commence,  when  governing  an  Infinitive  and  ex- 
pressing a  motion,  or  the  feeling  of  joy  and  sadness,  is  ren- 
dered by  empezar,  1.  ponerse,  2.  and  echarse,  1.  with  the 
preposition  a : 

Empezo  a  correr,  He  began  to  run. 

Se  puso  a  reir,  He  began  to  laugh. 

Se  echo  a  llorar,  He  began  to  cry. 


298 


LESSON   65. 


Leccion  LV. 


Lesson  LV. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


Llover,  2.  to  rain. 


Llueve, 

Llovia, 

Llovio, 

Llovera, 

Lloveria, 

Que  llueva, 

Que  lloviese  or  lloviera. 

Ha  llovido, 

Habia  llovido, 

Hubo  llovido, 

Habra  llovido, 

Habria  llovido. 

Que  haya  llovido, 

Que  hubiese  |  j]^^,j^^^ 

Que  hubiera  ) 

Habierido  llovido, 

Helar,  1.  to  freeze; 
Granizar,  1.  to  hail ; 
Deshelar,  1.  to  thaw  ; 
Nevar,  1.  to  snow  ; 
Tronar,  1.  to  thunder ; 
Lloviznar,  1.  to  drizzle  ; 
Relampaguear,  1.  to  lighten; 
Ventear,  1.  to  blow ; 
Amaneoer,2.  K^^^. 
Alborear,  1.    ) 
Anochecer,  2.  to  grow  dark  ; 


It  rains. 

It  was  raining. 

It  did  rain. 

It  will  rain. 

It  should  or  would  rain. 

That  it  may  rain. 

That  it  might  rain. 

It  has  rained. 

It  had  been  raining. 

It  had  rained. 

It  will  have  rained. 

It  should  or  would  have  rained. 

That  it  may  have  rained. 

That  it  might  have  rained. 

Having  rained. 

hiela,  it  freezes. 
graniza,  it  hails. 
deshiela,  it  thaws. 
nieva,  it  snows. 
truena,  it  thunders. 
llovizna,  it  drizzles. 
relampaguea,  it  lightens. 
ventea,  it  blows. 

^^^^^'^^  \  it  damis. 
alborea,     ) 

anochece,  it  grows  dark. 


Hacer,  2.  and  Haber,  2.  impersonally. 
i  Que  tiempo  hace  ?         •  How  is  the  weather  ? 

Hace  buen  tiempo,         \  j^  .^  ^^^  weather. 


Hace  hermoso  tiempo, 
Hace  mal  tiempo, 
Hace  calor, 
Hace  frio, 


It  is  bad  weather. 
It  is  warm. 
It  is  cold. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


299 


Hace  viento, 
Hace  sol,  ( 
Hay  sol,    ) 
Hay  luna, 
Hace  lodo. 
Hay  polvo, 
Hace  dia, 
Hace  noche, 

Acaecer,  2, 
Acontecer,  2. 
Suceder,  2. 
etc. 


It  is  windy. 
The  sun  shines. 

The  moon  shines. 
It  is  muddy. 
It  is  diisty. 
It  is  daylight. 
It  is  night. 

Importar,  1.  to  he  important, 
to  happen,  Parecer,  2.  to  appear,  to  seem. 

Convenir,  3.  to  be  proper. 
etc. 


Vocabulario. 

El  invierno,  the  lointer. 

El  lodo,  the  mud. 

El  puerto,  the  port. 

El  quitasol,  the  sunshade. 

El  sobretodo,  the  overcoat. 

El  trineo,  the  sleigh. 

El  trueno,  the  thunder. 

La  carreta,  the  cart. 

La  estacion,  h 

La  luna,  the  moon. 

La  milla,  the  mile. 


Vocabulary. 

La  sociedad,  the  society. 
La  ventana,  the  window. 
Algo,  rather. 
A  menudo,  often. 
Comedido,  ^oZi^e. 
Humedo,  damp. 
Oscuro,  dark. 
Preciso,  necessary. 
Singular,  si7igidar. 
Alegrarse,  1.  to  rejoice. 
Vestirse,  3.  to  dress. 


Exercise  109. 

1 .  [  Que  hermoso  tiempo  hace  hoy,  no  es  verdad  ?  2.  Si,  hace  un 
tiempo  de  primavera.  3.  [  Hace  calor  en  su  pais  de  V.  ?  4.  No  hace 
tanto  calor  como  aqui.  5.  Hoy  llueve  demasiado,  los  muchachos  no 
podran  salir.  6.  Esta  noche  habra  luna,  podremos  dar  un  paseo  en  el 
parque.  7.  [  Si  sigue  la  lluvia,  habra  mucho  lodo  en  las  calles. 
8.  [  Que  tiempo  hard  manana  ?  Y.  puede  estar  seguro  que  hard  mal 
tiempo.  9.  Hay  mucho  sol ;  tome  V.  su  quitasol.  10.  Ayer  hizo 
bastante  frio.  11.  No  hizo  demasiado  frio.  12.  [  Que  fue  lo  que 
sucedio?  13.  Sucedio  que  nadie  tenia  dinero,  cuando  fue  preciso 
pagar.  14.  Si  hace  frio,  pongase  Y.  el  sobretodo.  15.  Nunca  hace 
demasiado  frio  para  mi.  16.  Ni  para  ml  tampoco.  17.  Ha  nevado 
muy  d  menudo  este  invierno.  18.  Abra  Y.  la  ventana,  y  vea  Y.  que 
tiempo    hace.      19.    Esta   helando.      20.    Kelampagueo    muchisimo 


300  LESSON    55. 

anoche.  21.  Conviene  ser  comedido  en  la  sociedad.  22.  Importa 
que  salgamos  temprano  maiiana.  23.  Acaece  muchas  veces  que 
llueve  y  hiela  al  inismo  tiernpo.  24.  Es  verdad  que  su  hermano  me 
ha  dicho  esto,  pero  yo  no  lo  creo.  25.  Yo  amaneci  en  Toledo  y 
anocheci  en  Madrid.  26.  Me  acaecieron  muchas  cosas  en  el  viaje. 
27.  Anochece  muy  temprano  ahora.  28.  i  Estii  tronando  ;  oye  V.  el 
trueno  ?  29.  No  es  el  trueno,  es  una  carreta  que  esta  pasando  en  la 
calle.  30.  Si  hace  buen  viento,  llegaremos  maiiana  temprano  al 
puerto. 

Exercise  110. 

1.  It  is  important  to  know  who  was  the  last  person  who  entered 
the  room.  2.  A  singular  thing  has  occurred.  3.  It  seems  as  if  you 
had  nothing  to  say.  4.  As  soon  as  it  dawns  we  will  dress  and  leave 
the  house.  5.  If  I  had  known  that  it  was  so  cold,  I  should  not  have 
gone  out.  6.  It  was  so  hot  here  last  summer  that  we  all  went  to  the 
country.  7.  It  hailed  last  night,  and  I  thought  that  it  would  also 
hail  to-day.  8.  It  thundered  and  lightened  the  whole  day,  but  it  did 
not  rain.  9.  Did  it  snow  this  morning  1  10.  No,  but  it  will  either 
snow  or  rain  in  a  moment.     11.  It  dawns  very  early  in  this  season. 

12.  I  wish  it  would  snow  every  day,  that  we  might  go  in  a  sleigh. 

13.  How  many  miles  are  there  from  here  to  B.  ?  14.  It  is  too  late  to 
go  there  to-day.  15.  Dear  friend,  how  glad  I  am  to  see  you  again. 
16.  It  is  too  damp  to-day  to  go  out.  17.  It  is  very  dark  here,  open 
the  windows.  18.  It  is  not  daylight  yet.  19.  It  was  very  fine 
weather  yesterday.  20.  It  was  rather  cold.  21.  Was  it  cold  when 
you  were  in  the  country  ?  22.  It  was  colder  there  than  last  year  at 
the  same  time.  23.  I  think  that  it  will  be  very  warm  this  summer. 
24.  Do  you  know  what  happened  to  my  brother  ?  25.  Yes,  John 
told  me  what  happened  to  him.  26.  It  is  very  muddy,  put  on  your 
other  shoes.  27.  If  it  rains,  I  will  lend  you  my  umbrella.  28.  It 
was  raining,  but  it  does  not  rain  now.  29.  It  is  very  windy. 
30.  They  say  that  it  is  just  as  warm  in  the  country  as  in  the  city. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,    Impersonal  verbs  can  only  be  used  in  the  Infinitive  or  in 
the  third  person  singular  without  any  pronoun  : 
Llueve,  it  rains  ;        graniza,  it  hails. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  VERBS. 


301 


2»  Impersonal  verbs  are  either  essentially  impersonal^  that 
is,  cannot  be  used  otherwise,  as  Hover,  2.  to  rain  ;  nevar,  1.  to 
snow ;  etc.,  or  they  are  accidentally  impersonal,  that  is,  they 
may  be  formed  from  any  active  or  neuter  verb, 

3*  The  verbs  amanecer,  1.  to  daivn,  and  anochecer,  2.  to  grow 
darky  when  used  as  neuter  verbs,  may  be  conjugated  with  all 
persons.     We  may  therefore  say  : 

Amanecimos  en  Toledo,  y  anocheci- 
mos  en  Madrid, 


It  was  daylight  when  we  reached  To- 
ledo, and  night  vjhen  we  reached 
Madrid. 


4,  The  impersonal  verbs  acaecer,  2.  acontecer,  2.  convenir,  3. 
importar,  1.  parecer,  2.  suceder,  2.  admit  a  subject  and  agree 
with  the  same  when  accompanied  by  the  pronouns  me,  te,  le,  etc. : 

Me  acaecieron  muchas  cosas,  Many  things  happened  to  me. 

Le  sucedleron  varias  desgracias,         Several  misfortunes  happeiied  to  him. 


Leccion  LYI.  Lesson  LVI. 

GOVERNMENT  OF  VERBS. 
Verbs  requiring  Prepcsitioiis  after  them. 


Ejemplos. 

V.  abusa  de  nuestra  amistad. 
El  se  acerca  de  (a)  la  ventana. 
Yo  me  aeiierdo  de  el. 
Me  alegro  de  ver  a  V. 
El  se  aleja  de  nosotros. 

El  se  inelina  al  vicio. 

Yo  adhiero  a  mi  opinion. 

El  esta  acostumbrado  a  la  limpieza. 

Ha  sido  condenado  d  la  prision. 

El  pais  abunda  en  hierro. 
El  ha  caido  e7i  en*or. 
Yo  confio  671  V.  . 


Examples. 

You  abuse  our  friendship. 
He  approaches  the  window. 
I  remember  him. 
I  am  glad  to  see  you. 
He  goes  away  from  us. 

He  inclines  towards  vice. 

I  adhere  to  my  opinion. 

He  is  accustomed  to  cleanliness. 

He  has  been  sentenced  to  prison. 

The  country  is  abundant  in  iron. 
He  has  fallen  into  a  mistake. 
I  trust  to  you. 


302 


LESSON   56. 


Hemos  convenido  en  esto. 
Yo  no  creo  en  eso. 

Se  caso  cmi  mi  liermana. 
Cuniplo  con  mi  obligacion. 
Me  he  escusado  coii  el. 
Me  molesta  con  sus  visitas. 

El  calla  por  miedo. 
Me  doy  por  vencido. 
Estoy  po7'  el. 
Pecamos  por  orguUo. 


We  have  agreed  to  that. 
I  do  not  believe  in  that. 

He  married  my  sister. 

I  do  my  duty. 

I  have  apologized  to  him. 

He  annoys  me  with  his  visits. 

He  is  silent  through  fear. 

I  consider  myself  as  conquered. 

I  abide  by  him. 

We  sin  through  pride. 


Vocabulario. 

El  avaro,  the  miser. 
El  beneficio,  the  benefit. 
El  consejo,  the  advice. 
El  pleito,  the  lawsuit. 
El  reo,  the  culprit. 
La  costa,  the  expense. 
La  fiebre,  the  fever. 
La  friolera,  the  trifle. 
La  lagrima,  the  tear. 
La  sentencia,  the  judgiiient. 
La  yerba,  the  grass. 
Acostumbrado,  accustoyned. 
Agradecido,  thank f\d. 
Bordado,  trimmed. 
Acer  car  se,  1.  to  approach. 


Vocabulary. 

Adherir,  3.  to  adhere. 
Alejarse,  1.  to  leave. 
Apartar,  1.  to  remove. 
Apelar,  1.  to  appeal. 
Censurar,  1.  to  censure. 
Colmar,  1.  to  overwhelm. 
Condenar,  1 .  to  condemn. 
Bedicar,  1.  to  devote. 
Besconfiar,  1.  to  distrust. 
Embarcar,  1.  to  engage. 
Entender,  2.  to  understand. 
Formalizarse,  1.  to  get  veoced. 
Habituarse,  1-  to  accustom  one's  self. 
Interesarse,  1.  to  take  interest; 
Jactarse,  1.  to  boast. 


Exercise  111. 

1.  Si  V.  adhiere  d  mi  opinion,  adherire  yo  d  la  snya.  2.  El  reo  ha 
sido  condenado  a  muerte.  3.  Acuerdese  V.  de  mi.  4.  El  rey  colmo 
d  su  ministro  de  beneficios.  5.  Este  hombre  padece  de  fiebres. 
6.  Censuran  d  este  rico  de  avaro.  7.  Con  mis  consejos  le  he  apartado 
de  malas  compafLias.  8.  Mi  hermano  ha  sido  condenado  en  las  costas 
del  pleito.  9.  No  se  acerque  V.  de  la  ventana,  pues  hace  frio. 
10.  Estoy  acostumbrado  a  estos  trabajos.  11.  V.  no  tiene  razon  de 
acusarme  de  esto.  12.  Estoy  agradecido  d  los  beneficios  que  he 
recibido.  13.  Me  aleje  de  aquella  tierra  con  las  lagrimas  en  los  ojos. 
14.  Me  alegro  de  verle  d  V.  bueno.     15.  El  negociante  ha  apelado  de 


GOVERNMENT   OF  VERBS.  303 

la  sentencia.  16.  El  trage  de  la  reina  estaba  bordacio  de  oro.  17.  V. 
no  deberia  builarse  de  este  hombre.  18.  Yo  no  me  burlo  de  nadie. 
19.  He  cambiado  mi  caballo  por  otro.  20.  Nos  hemos  cansado  del 
viaje.  21.  El  se  casara  con  aquella  senora  tan  rica.  22.  Aquel  joven 
dedica  todo  su  tienipo  al  estudio.  23.  Desconfio  de  este  hombre  sin 
conocerle.  24.  Temo  que  Y.  se  embarque  en  malos  negocios.  25.  No 
entendemos  nada  de  eso.  26.  Y.  Y.  se  ban  formalizado  por  una  frio- 
lera.  27.  No  tiene  Y.  razon  de  gloriarae  de  esa  accion.  28.  No 
hemos  podido  habituarnos  a  ese  pais.  29.  Nos  hemos  interesado  en 
este  joven,  pero  el  nos  ha  enganado.  30.  El  pobre  hombre  se  man- 
tenia  de  frutas  y  de  yerbas. 

Exercise  11 2. 

1.  If  you  make  fun  of  me,  1  will  tell  it  to  your  father.  2.  Has  the 
soldier  been  sentenced  to  death  ?  3.  He  has  been  sentenced  to  (the) 
prison.  4.  He  boasts  of  a  thing  of  which  he  ought  to  be  ashamed. 
5.  Our  teacher  takes  great  interest  in  our  studies.  6.  Do  you  remem- 
ber my  brother  ?  7.  I  remember  him  very  well,  but  I  don't  remem- 
ber your  cousin.  8.  I  am  doing  something  now  to  which  I  am  not 
accustomed.  9.  Why  do  you  not  come  near  the  fire  ?  10.  I  am  not 
cold,  I  am  very  well  here.  11.  I  am  very  glad  to  know  that  you 
have  not  lost  your  money  in  that  business.  12.  We  have  exchanged 
our  coffee  for  tea.  13.  I  do  not  understand  anything  about  this  mat- 
ter. 14.  You  are  wrong  to  distrust  that  man,  he  is  your  friend. 
15.  He  accuses  me  of  having  deceived  him,  but  he  does  not  tell  the 
truth.  16.  I  adhere  to  what  I  have  said.  17.  If  you  engage  in  that 
business  you  will  lose  all  your  money.  18.  That  young  man  sup- 
ports his  family  with  his  work.  19.  Remember  what  I  told  you 
w  hen  you  see  your  brother.  20.  We  are  thankful  for  the  benefits  we 
have  received.  21.  Do  not  go  away  from  the  window.  22.  He  is 
very  glad  to  see  that  his  brother  studies  so  much.  23.  If  you  appeal 
from  the  judgment,  you  will  be  condemned  a  second  time.  24.  I 
have  become  tired  of  that  house.  25.  Do  you  think  that  Mr.  Mar- 
tinez will  marry  Miss  Kuiz  ?  26.  I  think  he  will  marry  her  next 
month. 

Gram&tica.  Grammar. 

1.  Many  verbs  which  sometimes  in  English  are  not  followed 
by  any  preposition,  govern  in  Spanish  either  the  genitive,  the 


304  LESSON   57. 

dative,  or  the  ablative,  with  the  prepositions  de,  a,  COn,  por, 
para,    sobre,   etc.      Some   of  these   verbs   may  even,   without 
changing  their  meaning,  govern  different  prepositions,  as  : 
Instruir  a  alguno  dc,  en  otsohre  algo,         To  inform  some  one  of  something. 
Other  verbs  change  their  meaning  according  to  the  preposition 
which  follows  them : 

Creo  en  el,  /  believe  in  him. 

Me  creo  de  esta  cosa,  /  am  convinced  of  that  thing. 

2.  Most  reflective  verbs,  and  those  which  express  the  move- 
ments of  the  soul  or  mind,  want,  fulness,  separation,  accusation, 
blame,  etc.,  generally  govern  the  preposition  de. 

Observation.  —  It  would  be  difficult  to  give  definite  rules  for  the  govern- 
ment of  the  other  prepositions.  The  Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Academy  con- 
tains a  long  list  of  verbs  with  their  corresponding  prepositions.  We  have 
omitted  the  same,  as  we  consider  that  the  student  will  have  to  depend  princi- 
pally on  practice  and  reading  to  master  these  as  v/ell  as  other  difficulties. 


Leccion  LYII.  Lesson  LVII. 

GOVERNMENT  OF  ADJECTIVES. 
Ejemplos.  Examples. 

Este  hombre  es  digno  de  su  posicion.  This  man  is  worthy  of  his  position. 

Estoy  deseoso  de  verle.  I  am  anxious  to  see  him. 

Mi  hermano  es  alto  de  cuerpo.  My  brother  is  tall  in  size. 

Aquella  sehora  es  palida  de  color.  That  lady  has  a  pale  complexion. 

Nuestra    casa   esta    cercana    de    la  Our  house  is  near  the  city. 

ciudad. 

Estoy  cierto  de  su  venida.  I  am  sure  of  his  coming. 

Este  vino  es  agrio  al  gusto.  This  wine  is  sour  to  the  taste. 

El  es  amable  a  todos.  He  is  amiable  towards  everybody. 

Esto  es  benefico  a  la  salud.  This  is  good  for  the  health. 

El  es  fiel  a  sus  amigos.  He  is  faithful  to  his  friends. 

El  esta  triste  por  la  muerte  de  su  He  is  sad  about  the  death  of  his 

hermano.  brother. 

Estoy  alegre  cou  la  llegada  de  mi  I  am  glad  at  the  arrival  of  my 

hermano.  brother. 


GOVERNMENT   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


305 


Vocabulario. 
El  compaiiero,  the  companion. 
El  heroe,  the  Jiero. 
El  pesar,  the  grief. 
El  poder,  the  poicer. 
El  principio,  the  principle. 
El  temor,  the  fear. 
La  alabanza,  the  praise. 
La  botella,  the  bottle. 
La  costumbre,  the  manner. 
La  mina,  the  mine. 
La  naranja,  the  orange. 
La  razon,  the  reason. 
La  ruina,  the  ruin. 
La  siiplica,  tlie  entreaty. 
Aceptable,  acceptable. 
Ansioso,  eager. 
Codicioso,  greedy. 
Conforme,  conforrmxMy. 


Vocabulary. 
Despreciado,  despised. 
Digno,  worthy. 
Encendido,  red. 
Exento,  exempted. 
Favorable,  favorable. 
Incapaz,  incapable. 
Indigno,  unworthy. 
Inmdvil,  immovable. 
Lleno,  full. 
Maduro,  ripe. 
Penoso,  hard,  painfid. 
Foderoso,  powerful. 
Fropenso,  inclined. 
Fropicio,  propitious. 
Sorprendido,  surprised. 
Descascarar,  1.  to  peel. 
Obrar,  1.  to  act. 


Exercise  113. 

1.  Este  hombre  es  muy  codicioso  de  dinero.  2.  V.  esta  lleno  de 
soberbia,  y  V.  no  tiene  motivo  para  ello.  3.  Mi  hermano  ha  sido 
exento  del  servicio  militar.  4.  Es  una  cosa  facil  de  hacer,  y  sin 
embargo  V.  la  hace  muy  mal.  5.  Los  habitantes  de  aquella  isla  son 
puros  de  costumbres.  6.  Es  penoso  de  ver  a  ese  hombre  correr  a  la 
ruina.  7.  Hemos  obrado  conforme  a  la  razon.  8.  Don  Pedro  es  un 
hombre  despreciado  de  todos  y  indigno  del  empleo  que  ocupa.  9.  Esta 
fruta  no  es  buena  para  comer.  10.  V.  es  incapaz  de  comprender 
nuestras  ideas.  11.  Estoy  oontento  con  lo  que  tengo,  y  no  deseo  nada 
mas.  12.  La  proposicion  que  V.  nos  hace  es  aceptable  para  todos. 
13.  La  pobre  mujer  se  quedo  inmovil  de  temor.  14.  La  accion  de 
ese  hombre  es  digna  de  alabanza.  15.  La  vida  humana  esta  Uena  de 
pesares.  16.  El  heroe  esta  siempre  ansioso  de  gloria  ;  y,  el  avaro, 
codicioso  de  dinero.  17.  Este  muchacho  es  muy  bonito  de  cara. 
18.  Esta  lengua  es  facil  de  aprender.  19.  Aquel  pais  es  rico  en 
granos,  pero  pobre  en  minas.  20.  Estoy  cierto  de  mi  asercion. 
21.  El  hombre  verdaderamente  liberal  es  fiel  a  sus  principios.  22.  La 
libertad  es  j)ropicia  a  las  ciencias  y  a  las  artes.  23.  ^  Porque  esta  V. 
tan  encendido  de  cara  ?  24.  Porque  acabo  de  correr,  y  tengo  mucho 
calor.  25.  La  naranja  madura  es  facil  de  descascarar. 
20 


306  '  LESSON   57. 

Exercise  114. 

1.  That  fruit  is  not  good  to  eat,  it  is  not  ripe  yet.  2.  If  you  act  in 
(de)  that  way  you  will  be  despised  by  everybody.  3.  You  ought  to 
be  satisfied  with  what  you  have.  4.  I  am  anxious  to  see  your  brother, 
when  does  he  arrive  I  5.  He  will  be  here  to-morrow.  6.  That  action 
is  unworthy  of  an  honest  man.  7.  The  mighty  are  inclined  to  abuse 
their  power.  8.  It  is  easy  to  say  that,  but  it  is  not  so  easy  to  do  as 
you  think.  9.  I  am  certain  of  what  I  say.  10.  The  wreath er  is  very 
favorable  for  our  journey.  II.  That  bottle  is  full  of  wine.  12.  That 
country  is  very  rich  in  gold  mines.  13.  We  are  most  anxious  to 
know  the  truth.  14.  I  knew  that  you  were  incapable  of  acting  thus. 
15.  That  child  is  beloved  by  all  his  companions.  16.  They  have 
acted  according  to  (the)  reason.  17.  Life  is  full  of  misery.  18.  I  am 
tired  of  the  conduct  of  this  man.  19.  We  are  not  accustomed  to  see 
so  many  people  in  our  small  town.  20.  I  am  surprised  at  what  that 
man  has  told  us.  21.  He  is  deaf  to  all  our  entreaties.  22.  Those 
men  are  poor  in  means,  but  rich  in  credit.  23.  They  are  very  sad 
about  the  death  of  their  father.  24.  Your  father's  proposition  is  ac- 
ceptable to  everybody.  25.  The  poor  servant  was  all  his  life  faithful 
to  his  master. 

Gram^tiea.  Grammar. 

1,  Many  adjectives  have  in  Spanish  a  meaning  by  them- 
selves, while  others  require  a  complement  to  their  meaning,  as 
dignO)  worthy ;  propenso,  inclined ;  comparable,  comparable ; 
etc.  : 

Es  una  accion  digna  {of  what  ?)  de  It  is  an  action  worthy  of  praise. 

elogio, 

Los    poderosos    son    propensos    {to  The  mighty  are  inclined  to  abuse 

what?)  a  abusar  de  su  poder,  their  power. 

2.  An  adjective  may  govern  a  noun,  an  Infinitive,  or  a  sen- 
tence in  the  Subjunctive  mood  : 

Fiel  a  sus  amigos,  Faithful  to  his  friends, 

Diestro  en  saltar,  Skilful  in  jumping. 

El  es  indigno  de  que  le  compaclezcan,        He  is  unworthy  of  being  pitied. 

3«  Those  adjectives  which  express  worthiness ^  unworthinesSy 
facility,  difficulty,  fulness,  want,  scarcity,  eagerness,  anxiety,  de- 


GOVERNMENT   OF  ADJECTIVES.  307 

5^Vv,  exception,  moral  or  physical  qualities,  moral  or  physical  sepa- 
ration, distance,  proximity,  certainty,  uncertainty,  danger,  etc., 
generally  govern  the  preposition  de : 

Digno  de  recompensa,  Worthy  of  reward. 

Indigno  de  perdon,  Unworthy  of  pardon. 

Facil  de  hacer,  Easy  to  do. 

Penoso  de  hacer,  Difficidt  to  do. 

Lleno  de  soberhia,  Full  of  pride, 

Escaso  de  conceptos.  Poor  in  ideas. 

Deseoso  de  trabajar,  Desirous  of  working. 

Codicioso  de  diiiero,  Eager  for  money. 

Gordo  de  talle,  Stout  in  body. 

Blando  de  corazoii,  Soft  in  heart. 

Inseparable  de  sus  aniigos,  Inseparable  from  his  friends. 

Cercano  de  la  eiudad,  Near  the  city. 

Lejano  de  la  eiudad,  Far  from  the  city. 

Cierto  de  su  venida,  Certairi  of  his  arrival. 

Seguro  de  peligro,  Sure  of  danger. 

etc.  etc. 

4t    Adjectives  expressing  the  feelings  of  the  soul  or  mind 
take  the  prepositions  de,  por,  or  COn : 

Inmovil  de  tomor,  Immovable  with  fear. 

Triste  por  su  muerte.  Sad  at  his  death. 

Alegre  con  su  llegada,  Pleased  at  his  arrival. 

Note.  —  When  the  adjective  precedes  a  verb  in  the  Infinitive  mood,  the 
preposition  de  may  always  be  used  : 

Contento  de  ver,  Glad  to  see  you. 

5«    In  most  other  cases  the  adjectives  require  the  same  prepo- 
sitions as  in  English. 

6«    Past  Participles  used  as  adjectives  may  govern  de  or  por : 

Es  un  hombre  despreciado  de  (por)        He  is  a  man  despised  by  all. 
todos, 

7t    There  are  also  adjectives  which  vary  in  meaning,  accord- 
ing to  the  preposition  which  follows  them  : 

Esta  fruta  es  buena  para  comer,  This  fruit  is  good  to  eat. 

Esta,  naranja  es  buena  de  descascarar.         This  orange  is  easy  to  peel. 


308 


LESSON   58. 


Leccion  LYIII.  Lesson  LVIII. 

THE  ADVERB. 


Adverbs  of  Place. 


Alii,  there. 
Aqui,  aca,  iiere. 
Alii,  there. 
Alia,  ymider. 
Cerca  (de),  near, 
Lejos  (de),  far, 
Donde,  where, 
Adonde,  whereto. 
Dedonde,  whcrefrom. 
Adentro,  within, 
etc. 


Dentro  (de),  in. 
Fuera  (de),  out. 
Arriba,  up. 
Abajo,  down. 
Adelante,  fm^ward. 
Atras,  hack. 
Delante  (de),  before.^ 
Detras  (de),  behind. 
Encima  (de),  upon, 

etc. 


Adverbs  of  Time. 

Hoy,  to-day.  Pronto,  soon. 

Manana,  to-morrow.  Siempre,  always. 

Ahora,  now.  Nunca, 

Luego,  afterwards.  Jamas, 

Tarde,  late.  Ya,  already. 

Temprano,  early.  Mientras,  whilst. 

Presto,  quick.  Aiin,  yet,  still, 
etc.  etc. 

Adverbs  of  Manner. 

Bieri,  well.  Eecio,  loud. 

Mai,  badly.  Despacio,  slowly. 

Asi,  so,  thus.  Depriesa,  quickly, 

Bajo,  low.  Alto,  loud, 
etc.  etc. 

Adverbs  of  Quantity. 

Mucho,  much.  Miiy,  very. 

Poco,  little.  Tfin,  so,  as. 

Sobrado,    \  Tan  to,  so  much,  as  much. 

Harto,       >  enough.  Cuanto,  how  miich. 

Bastante,  )  Demasiado,  too  rmcch. 
etc.  etc. 


THE   ADVERB. 


309 


Adverbs  of  Comparison. 

Mas,  trior e.  Mejor,  better. 

Menos,  less.  Peor,  worse. 

etc.  etc. 

♦  Adverbs  of  Order. 

Primeramente,  first.  Sucesivamente,  successively, 

Ultimamente,  lastly.  Antes  (de),  before. 

Despues  (de),  after. 

Adverbs  of  Affirmation. 

Si,  yes.  Verdaderamente,  verily. 

Ciertamente,  certainly.  Indudableniente,  icndoubtedly. 

etc.  etc. 

Adverbs  of  Negation. 

No,  710.  Nada,  nothing,  not  anything. 

Tampoco,  neither,  not  eitJier.  De  ninguna  manera,  nowise. 

etc.  etc. 


Tal  vez, 
Quiza, 
Qiiizas, 
etc. 


Adverbs  of  Uncertainty. 

Acaso, 
perhaps.  Por  ventura, 

Por  fortuna, 
etc. 

Adverbial  Expressions. 


i  perhaps  (in  interro- 
I     gati&ns). 


Sobre  poco  mas  6  menos, 

A  lo  menos, 

A  diesti-a  y  siniestra, 

A  duras  penas. 

De  a  qui  para  alli,    ^ 

De  aca  para  alia,      I 

A  qui  y  alli,  f 

Aca  y  alia,  aculla,  j 


Abotit,  more  or  less. 
At  least. 
Right  and  left. 
With  great  trouble. 

Here  and  there. 


Formation  of  Adverbs  vrith  mente  (ly). 


Facil,  facil mente, 
Constante,  constantemente, 
Triste,  tristemente, 
Alegre,  alegremente, 
Elegante,  elegantemente, 
Sabio,  sabiamente. 


JEasy,  easily. 
Constant,  constantly. 
Sad,  sadly. 
Joyful,  joyfully. 
Elegant,  elegantly. 
Wise,  wisely. 


310 


LESSON   58. 


Delicado,  delicadamente, 
Claro,  claraniente, 
Verdadero,  verdaderamente. 


Delicate,  delicately. 
Clear,  clearly. 
True,  truly. 


Vocabulario, 
£1  baston,  the  cane. 
La  desgracia,  the  misfortune. 
La  fuerza,  the  strength. 
La  groseria,  the  rudeness. 
La  tarde,  the  afternoon. 
Acaso,  perhaps. 
Afuera,  without. 
Amargo,  Utter. 
BajOy  low. 
Callado,  silent. 
Giego,  blind. 
Claro,  clear. 
Conciso,  concise. 
Cortes,  polite. 


Vocabulary. 
Cruel,  cruel. 

Despues,  after,  afterward. 
Probable,  probable. 
Tal  vez,  perhaps. 
Acompanar,  1.  to  accompany. 
Arrepentirse,  3,  to  repent. 
Conseguir,  3.  to  obtain. 
Escuchar,  1.  to  listen  to, 
Faltar,  1.  to  fail, 
Oir,  3.  to  hear. 
Provenir,  3.  to  result. 
Referir,  3.  to  relate. 
Eesponder,  2.  to  answer. 


Exercise  115. 

1.  I  Como  me  ha  enganado  este  honibre  !  2.  Hemos  sieinpre  sabido 
nuestra  leccion  desde  que  vamos  a  la  escuela.  3.  He  venido  aca  tem- 
prano  para  ver  a  su  hermano  de  V.  4.  Ciceron  hablo  sabia  y  elo- 
cuentemente.  5.  Cesar  escribio  clara,  concisa  y  elegantemeiite.  6.  Yo 
le  hable  cortesmente  y  el  me  respondio  con  groseria.  7.  Los  mucha- 
chos  entraron  calladitamente,  pues  la  madre  estaba  mviy  mala. 
8.  Jamas  vi  tal  cosa.  9.  Si  V.  qiiiere,  iremos  manana  al  teatro. 
10.  Le  referire  a  V.  la  historia,  si  ya  no  la  sabe  V.  11.  Yo  creo  (j^ue 
V.  podra  conseguir  facilmente  el  dinero  que  V.  necesita.  12.  Esta 
casa  debe  haber  costado  mucho  dinero.  13.  Vengo  de  afuera,  y  be 
visto  una  cosa  muy  curiosa.  14.  Aqui  mataron  a  un  hombre,  segun 
he  oido.  15.  Primero  vino  su  hermano  de  V.  y  despues  los  otros 
amigos.  16.  [  Acaso  vendra  su  padre  hoy?  17.  Vendra  tal  vez  esta 
noche  d  las  diez.  18.  El  anda  de  aqui  para  alii  sin  saber  donde  sen- 
tarse.  19.  V.  ha  sido  muy  imprudente,  y  de  ahi  proviene  su  desgra- 
cia. 20.  [A  que  hora  vendrd  el  medico?  21.  Ya  viene.  22.  Lo 
hare  si  ya  no  me  faltan  las  fuerzas.  23.  No  ire  alia,  pues  estoy  mejor 
donde  estoy.  24.  j  Que  tristisimamente  llora  esta  mujer  !  25.  Hable 
V.  claro,  si  V.  quiere  que  yo  le  comprenda.  26.  Nunca  volvere  a  ver 
a  mi  querido  amigo. 


THE  ADVERB.  311 

Exercise  116. 

1.  If  yoii  do  not  pay  him,  you  will  repent  it  bitterly.  2.  These 
two  friends  are  constantly  together.  3.  You  must  act  prudently  if 
you  do  not  wish  to  lose  your  money.  4.  Your  friend  has  treated  his 
sister  very  cruelly.  5.  Your  exercise  is  not  well  done  ;  you  have 
written  it  badly.  6.  You  would  have  acted  more  wisely  if  you  had 
not  answered  that  man.  7.  I  could  not  listen  politely  to  all  he  said 
about  you.  8.  I  have  blindly  followed  your  instructions.  9.  Speak 
low,  my  friend,  there  is  somebody  in  the  other  room.  10.  How  do 
you  do  to-day?  11.  I  am  pretty  well,  thank  you.  12.  When  will 
your  sister  arrive  ?  13.  She  will  probably  arrive  this  afternoon. 
14.  Look  for  my  cane,  I  wish  to  go  out  now.  15.  Shall  you  accom- 
pany your  friends  to  Paris?  16.  I  shall  perhaps  accompany  them. 
17.  If  you  come  to-morrow,  do  not  come  too  late.  18.  I  shall  not  be 
able  to  come  before  nine  o'clock.     19.  Our  house  is  already  finished. 

20.  They  walk  the  whole  day  here  and  there  without  doing  anything. 

21.  Do  not  speak  so  loud,  I  have  the  headache.  22.  I  was  near  him 
when  he  was  wounded.  23.  He  was  before  me,  and  my  brother  was 
behind  me.  24.  Come  quick,  I  have  something  to  tell  you.  25.  This 
author  writes  very  well.  26.  We  walked  very  slowly  and  arrived  too 
late. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1.    Place  of  the  Adverb. 

1.  The  Adverb  is  generally  placed  in  Spanish  after  the  verb. 
In  compound  tenses  it  is  placed  after  the  participle,  and  never 
between  the  same  and  the  auxiliary  : 

El  discipulo  ha  siempre  estudiado         The  scholar  has  always  studied  his 
su  leccion,  lesson. 

Although,  according  to  the  rules  of  syntax,  we  may  deviate  from 
this  rule,  the  student  would  do  well  to  adhere  to  the  same,  and 
thus  avoid  the  mistakes  which  may  result  from  any  deviation. 

2.  A  few  adverbs  must  always  stand  before  the  verb,  as  no, 
etc.,  and  the  adverbs  of  exclamation  :  cuanto,  cuan,  como,  etc. : 

i  Como  me  ha  enganado  !  Hov)  he  has  deceived  me  ! 

The  following  abverbs  also  precede  the  verb :  apenas,  hardly  ; 
CUando,   xohen;  luego   que,   as  soon  as;   asi  que,  so  soon  as; 


312  LESSON   58. 

mientras  que,  whilst;  dbnde,  where;  de  donde,  whence,  and 
a  few  others. 

2.    Formation  of  Adverbs. 

1.  Adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  two  different  ways  : 
Adjectives  having  the  same  termination  for  both  genders  add 

mente  (corresponding  to  the  Englisli  termination  ly)  to  form  the 

adverb  : 

Facil,  facilmente,  Easy,  easily. 

Dulce,  dulcemente,  Sweet,  sweetly. 

FeHz,  feUzmente,  Happy,  happily. 

Igual,  igualmente,  Equal,  equally. 

2.  Adjectives  having  a  different  form  for  the  masculine  and 
feminine  add  mente  to  the  feminine  form  : 

Sabio,  sabianiente,  Wise,  wisely. 

Claro,  claraiiiente,  Clear,  clearly. 

Honrado,  honradamente,  Honest,  honestly. 

Rico,  ricamente,  Rich,  richly. 

3.  Superlatives  may  be  formed  from  all  adverbs  ending  in 
mente : 

Tristisimamonte,  Most  sadly. 

Dulcisimainente,  Most  sweetly. 

4.  When  several  adverbs  follow  each  other  in  the  same  sen- 
tence, it  is  sufficient  to  add  the  termination  mente  to  the  last 
adverb,  while  all  the  preceding  adverbs  take  the  form  of  the 
feminine  of  the  adjective  : 

El  habla  sabia  y  elocuentemente,  He  speaks  wisely  and  eloquently. 

El  escribe  clara,  concisa  y  elegan-         He  writes  clearly,   concisely ,  and 
temente,  elegantly. 

The  same  rule  is  to  be  observed  for  the  superlative. 

5.  When  different  adverbs  in  mente  occur  in  the  same  sen- 
tence without  modifying  the  same  verb,  it  is  preferable,  for  the 
sake  of  euphony,  to  replace  one  of  the  adverbs  by  a  noun  con- 
nected with  the  preposition  Con : 

Hable  cortesmente  y  el  respondio        /  spoke   courteously  and   he    an- 
con  groseria,  swered  rudely  (with  nideness). 


THE   PREPOSITION.  313 

6.  Adverbs  ending  in  mente  govern  the  same  prepositions  as 
the  adjectives  from  which  they  are  formed  : 

Anteriormente  a,  etc.  Anterior  to,  etc. 

7.  Adverbs  cannot  be  formed  from  all  adjectives.  Such  are  : 
verde,  green;  azul,  blue;  enfermo,  ill;  poco,  little;  mucho, 
much,  etc. 

8.  A  few  adverbs  may  be  used  diminutively  or  augmenta- 
tively,  but  only  in  a  familiar  way : 

Se  entro  calladitamente  y  la  tomo        He  entered  very  quietly  and  took 
suavitam elite  por  la  mano,  her  very  gently  hy  the  hand. 

9.  Certain  adjectives  may  be  used  in  Spanish  as  adverbs,  and 
remain  then  invariable.  Such  are  the  adjectives  :  claro,  clear, 
clearly;  OSCUro,  obscure,  obscurely ;  derecho,  straight;  torcido, 
twisted ;  fuerte,  strong,  strongly,  etc. 

10.  The  adverb  ya,  which  is  generally  rendered  by  already, 
is  sometimes  rendered  by  indeed,  since,  now,  etc.  : 

Ya  ha  llegado,  He  has  already  arrived. 

Ya  de  dia,  ya  de  iioche,  Now  in  daytime,  now  at  night. 

Ya  que  V.  lo  sabe,  Since  you  know  it. 

Ya  se  arrepeiitira  V. ,  You  will  indeed  repent  it. 


Leccion  LIX.  Lesson  LIX. 

THE  PREPOSITION. 

A,  to,  at.  Hacia,  towards,  to. 

Ante,  before.  Hasta,  as  far  as,  until,  till,  ei 

Con,  with.  Para,  for,  in  order  to,  to. 

Contra,  against.  Por,  hy,  through,  for. 

De,  of,  from.  Segun,  according  to,  as. 

Besde,  from,  since.  Sin,  without. 

En,  in.  Sobre,  on,  upon,  about,  above, 

Entre,  between,  ammig.  Tras,  behind,  besides. 


314 


LESSON   59. 


Prepositions  and  Prepositional  Plirases  requiring  de  after  them. 


Ademas,  besides. 
Alrededor,  around. 
Antes,  before  (ref.  to  time). 
A  pesar,  notwithstanding. 
Cerca,  near. 
Debajo,  under. 
Delante,  before. 


Dentro,  in. 
Despues,  after. 
Detras,  behind. 
Encima,  on,  tcpon. 
Enfrente,  opposite. 
Fuera,  out. 
Por  medio,  by  means, 


Prepositions  followed  by  d. 

En  cuanto,  as  far.  Junto,  next. 


Ejemplos. 
Vendre  a  las  ocho. 
Comparecio  ante  el  juez. 
Estoy  con  mi  padre. 
Estamos  contra  V. 
Se  liabla  de  V. 
Saldre  en  el  mes  de  Agosto. 

Eran  entre  quinze  a  veinte  hombres. 

Mire  V.  hdcia  el  norte. 

Voy  hdsta  mi  casa. 

Trabajo  para  ganar. 

Va  a  Madrid  por  un  ano. 

Lo  digo  segwi  me  lo  han  dicbo. 

Vive  sin  trabajar. 

El  libro  esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

Voy  tras  V. 

Vendre  despues  de  las  tres. 

El  esta  detras  de  mi. 

El  perro  esta  debajo  de  la  mesa. 


Examples. 
I  will  come  at  eigbt  o'clock. 
He  appeared  before  the  judge. 
1  am  with  my  father. 
We  are  against  you. 
They  speak  of  you. 
1   shall    leave    in   the   month  of 

August. 
There   were    between   fifteen   and 

twenty  men. 
Look  towards  the  north. 
I  am  going  as  far  as  my  house. 
I  work  to  earn. 
He  goes  to  Madrid  for  a  year. 
I  tell  it  as  they  told  me. 
He  lives  without  working. 
The  book  is  on  the  table. 
I  go  behind  you. 
I  will  come  after  three  o'clock. 
He  is  behind  me. 
The  dog  is  under  the  table. 


Vocabulario. 

El  empleo,  the  employment,  situation. 

El  grito,  the  outcry. 

El  marinero,  the  sailor. 

El  numero,  the  number. 

El  principiante,  the  begimner. 


Vocabulary, 

El  real,  the  shilling. 
El  reo,  the  culprit. 
El  sueno,  tlie  dream. 
El  verso,  the  verse. 
La  bondad,  the  kindness. 


THE   PREPOSITION.  315 


La  cadena,  the  chain. 
La  caridad,  the  charity. 
La  comida,  the  dinner. 
La  gota,  the  drop. 
La  insolencia,  the  insolence. 
La  mascara,  the  mask. 
La  prueba,  the  proof. 
La  vara,  the  yard. 
Abundante,  abundant. 
Borracho,  intoxicated. 
Cor  to,  short. 
Culpado,  guilty. 
Derecho,  right. 


Sentado,  seated. 
Gojear,  1.  to  limpy  to  be  lame. 
Comparecer,  2.  to  appear. 
Contar,  1.  to  count. 
Costar,  1.  to  cost. 
Dirigir,  3.  to  direct. 
Disputar,  1.  to  dispute. 
Esceder,  2.  to  eocceed. 
Mover,  2  to  move,  to  turn. 
Far  arse,  1.  to  stand. 
Freg^ntar,  1.  to  inquire. 
Suministrar,  1,  to  offer. 


Exercise  117. 

1.  Esta  carta  va  dirigida  a  mi  hermano.  2.  Andamos  de  calle  d 
calle  sin  saber  donde  vamos.  3.  Este  paiio  se  vende  a  veinte  reales  la 
vara.  4.  He  tornado  el  dinero  a  tres  por  ciento.  5.  El  vino  se  per- 
dio  gota  a  gota.  6.  El  reo  comparecio  ante  el  juez,  y  fue  condenado  a 
la  carcel  por  veinte  aiios.  7.  Con  enseiiar  tambien  se  aprende.  8.  La 
vida  del  honibre  con  ser  tan  corta,  nos  suministra  abundantes  prnebas 
de  que  no  es  un  sueiio.  9.  Esta  casa  esta  cerca  de  la  de  mi  hermano. 
10.  Este  vino  es  de  diez  anos.  11.  Mi  amigo  cojea  del  pie  derecho. 
12.  Nos  vestimos  de  marineros  para  ir  al  baile  de  mascaras.  13.  Yo 
hare  esto  para  V.,  pero  no  de  balde.  14.  Yo  iria  de  buena  gana  al 
campo  con  V.  15.  Tengo  un  empleo  y  gano  desde  ayer.  16.  Nadie 
le  escedia  a  este  hombre  en  bondad.  17.  Entre  otras  cosas  he  visto 
un  cuadro  muy  hermoso  en  la  casa  del  medico.  18.  Quintana  cuenta 
con  razon  a  Herrera  entre  (or  en)  el  numero  de  los  primeros  autores 
espaiioles.  19.  Este  hombre  hasta  tuvo  la  insolencia  de  venir  bor- 
racho a  mi  casa.  20.  Para  principiante,  no  ha  hecho  V.  mal  este  trabajo. 
21.  La  caridad  es  sobre  todas  las  virtudes.  22.  Se  disputa  sobre  el 
sentido  de  este  verso.  23.  Moviose  la  conversacion  sobre  vinos  f ran- 
ceses.  24.  Tras  ser  culpado,  es  el  que  mas  levanta  el  grito.  25.  Este 
reloj  me  cuesta  cien  pesos  sin  la  cadena.  26.  Los  hombres  estaban 
sentados  al  rededor  de  la  mesa. 

Exercise  118. 

1.  That  lady  comes  from  Europe.  2.  She  used  to  live  at  our  house 
before  the  death  of  her  husband.     3.  What  were  you  doing  under  the 


316  LESSON   59, 

table?  4.  I  was  looking  for  my  pen.  5.  We  can  do  nothing  without 
money.  6.  Will  you  go  as  far  as  the  church  for  me  ?  7.  I  will 
accompany  you  as  far  as  that  street.  8.  You  speak  without  knowing 
what  you  say.  9.  Here  are  some  apples  for  you.  10.  My  sister  lives 
far  from  us.  11.  Do  you  know  the  lady  who  lives  opposite  your 
house]  12.  Yes,  she  is  an  English  lady.  13.  Why  do  those  boys 
walk  behind  us  i  14.  They  are  going  to  the  school  next  to  our  house. 
15.  My  brother  will  come  first,  and  I  will  go  afterwards.  16.  My 
father  is  in  his  room  and  is  writing  to  my  mother.  17.  Do  nothing 
without  consulting  me.  18.  Come  and  (a)  see  us  this  evening  with 
your  friends.  19.  Do  not  stand  before  me,  I  cannot  see  anything. 
20.  His  sons  were  seated  around  the  table.  21.  Those  two  ladies 
live  opposite  the  church.  22.  Let  us  go  as  far  as  the  park.  23.  The 
dog  is  under  the  table.  24.  There  is  a  garden  behind  the  house,  and 
a  church  behind  the  garden.  25.  I  was  seated  next  to  my  brother, 
and  my  sister  next  to  him.  26.  Here  is  money  for  your  din- 
ner. 27.  I  received  these  goods  by  railroad.  28.  Has  anybody  in- 
quired for  me  ?  29.  There  came  a  man  who  inquired  for  you,  and 
who  went  away  when  he  heard  that  you  were  not  at  home.  30.  We 
must  stay  here  until  to-morrow. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1*    The  preposition  a,  which  has  the  same  meaning  in  Span- 
ish as  the  English  prepositions  to  and  at,  is  also  used  to  express : 

1.  The  way  in  which  something  is  done  : 

A  pie,  On  foot. 

2.  The  manner,  usage,  or  form  of  a  thing  : 

A  la  moda,  In  the  fashion. 

3.  The  motive  or  aim  of  an  action  : 

I A  que  proposito,  To  what  end  ? 

4.  The  instrument  used  to  perform  an  action  : 

Le  eche  a  palos,  /  drove  him  away  with  a  stick. 

5.  Superiority  or  advantage  : 

Le  gane  a  correr,  /  heat  him  running. 


THE   PREPOSITION.  317 

6.  Amusement  or  entertainment : 

Juega  a  las  cartas,  He  plays  cards. 

7.  Repetition  of  an  interrupted  but  continued  action  : 

Gota  a  gota,  Drop  by  drop. 

8.  To  form  a  great  number  of  adverbial  locutions  : 

A  la  verdad,  Truly. 

A  lo  menos,  At  least. 

2.  The  preposition  ante,  before,  means  in  the  presence  of : 

Ante  el  juez,  Before  the  judge. 

It  often  takes  the  place  of  antes  que  or  antes  de,  and  indi- 
cates the  preference  of  one  thing  or  action  over  another  : 
Ante  todo  or  antes  de  todo,         Before  everything. 

3.  The  preposition  con,  with,  may  also  mean  although  or  by 
when  accompanied  by  the  Infinitive  : 

Con  ensehar  tambien  se  aprende,  By  teaching  one  also  learns. 

La  Vida   del   hombre,   con   ser  tan         The  life  of  man,  although  short, 
corta,  etc.  etc. 

Con  is  also  used  to  form  certain  locutions  : 

Con  que  V.  ha  llegado,  So  you  have  arrived. 

4*    The  preposition  de,  which  is  generally  rendered  by  of  or 
from,  is  also  used  : 

1.  To  express  the  time  at  which  a  thing  happens  : 

De  dia,  In  daytime. 

2.  The  proper  time  to  do  a  thing  : 

Es  tiempo  de  dormir,  It  is  tinu  to  sleep. 

3.  Abundance  or  scarcity  : 

Abundante  de  trigo,  Abundant  in  grain. 

4.  When  standing  between  an  adjective  and  an  Infinitive, 
and  when  rendered  in  English  by  the  preposition  to : 

Dificil  de  alcanzar,  Difficult  to  reach. 

5.  Between  two  nouns  referring  to  the  same  object : 

El  bribon  del  criado,  That  rogue  of  a,  servant. 


S18  LESSON    59. 

6.  In  exclamations  of  sorrow  and  pity  : 

j  Pobre  de  mi  padre  !  My  poor  father  ! 

7.  The  age: 

El  vino  era  de  dos  afios,      The  wine  was  two  years  old. 

8.  To  designate  the  part  affected  in  referring  to  a  physical  or 
moral  infirmity  : 

Cojea  del  pie  derecho,         He  is  laine  in  the  right  foot, 

9.  The  way  of  dressing  : 

Vistidse  de  marinero,  He  dressed  as  a  sailor. 

Estaba  de  Into,  He  was  in  mourning. 

10.  When  the  word  pedazo,  piece,  or  another  noun  is  under- 
stood : 

Probe  del  asado,  I  tasted  (a  piece  of)  the  roast  meat. 

Dame  de  vestir,  Give  ine  (clothes)  to  dress. 

11.  To  form  many  adverhial  locutions  : 

De  balde,  for  nothing  ;  de  veras,  truly. 

De  modo  que,  so  that ;  de  buena  gana,  willingly. 

The  preposition  de  may  finally  stand  sometimes  for  por  or  con  ; 

Lo  hizo  de  {or  por)  miedo,  He  did  it  out  of  fear. 

Lo  hize  de  {or  con)  buen  corazon,         /  did  it  with  a  good  heart, 

5$    The  preposition  en,  m,  is  also  used  : 

1.  Eefore  the  gerund  : 

En  diciendo  eso,  Saying  that. 

2.  To  express  a  continued  and  repeated  act : 

De  rato  en  rato,  From  inoment  to  mojnent. 

This  preposition  always  governs  the  ablative. 

6t    The  preposition  para,  for,  to  (in  order  to\  also  expresses 
an  act  ready  to  be  performed : 

Estoy  para  partir,  /  am  about  leaving. 

7»    The  preposition  por,  for,  by,  though,  also  expresses  : 
1.    The  means,  etc.  : 

Casarse  por  procurador,  To  marry  by  proxy. 


DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


319 


2.  The  motive,  etc.  : 

Lo  hace  por  fuerza,  He  does  it  hy  force,. 

3.  The  price,  etc.  : 

Por  poco  dinero,  For  little  trvoney, 

4.  Equality,  etc.  : 

Uno  vale  por  dos,  Otu  is  worth  tivo. 

5.  What  happens  in  favor  of  a  person  or  thing  : 

Empeiiarse  por  el,  To  occupy  one's  self  for  him, 

6.  What  is  done  in  place  of  a  person  or  thing  : 

Trabajo  por  el,  I  work  in  his  place, 

7.  Exchange  : 

Le  doy  mi  sombrero  por  el  suyo,  I  give  you  my  hat  for  yours, 

8.  The  estimation  in  which  a  person  or  thing  is  held  : 

Esta  tenido  por  bueno.  He  is  considered  as  a  good  man. 


Leccion  LX. 


Lesson  LX, 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS, 


\st  Conjugation, 
Antojarse,  to  occur  to  the  mind  (only  used  in  the  third  person). 
Pesar,  to  repent  (only  used  in  the  third  person  singular). 


2d  Conjugation. 


Facer,  to  graze. 
Placer,  to  please. 
Baer,  to  rub  off. 
Boer,  to  gnaw. 


Beponer,  to  reply. 
Soler,  to  be  accustomed. 
Taner,  to  play. 
Yacer,  to  lie. 


3d  Conjugation. 
Abolir,  to  abolish.  Asir,  to  seize. 

Arrecirse,  to  be  benumbed  with  cold.        Erguir,  to  erect. 


320  LESSON   60. 

Gram^tica.  Grammar. 

1,  Pacer,  2.  to  graze ;  raer,  2.  to  rub  off;  and  roer,  2.  to 
gnaw  ;  are  not  used  in  the  first  person  singular  of  the  Fresente 
de  indicativo  nor  of  the  suhjuntivo,  unless  we  except  the  verb 
roer,  which,  according  to  some  grammarians,  makes  in  these 
tenses  roa,  roas,  roa,  and  according  to  others  roya,  royas,  roya. 

2.  Reponer,  2.  in  the  sense  of  to  reply,  is  only  used  in  the 
Preterito  definido  of  the  Indicative  :  repuse,  repusiste,  repuso, 
etc. 

3t  Soler,  2.  is  generally  only  found  in  the  following  tenses 
and  persons  : 

Suelo,  /  am  accustomed  to;  sueles,  suele,  solemos,  soleis, 
suelen. 

Solia,  /  ivas  accustomed  to;  solias,  solia,  soliamos,  soliais, 
solian. 

The  other  tenses  are  used  very  seldom,  the  first  Tmperfecto  de 
suhjuntivo,  soliera,  and  the  second  Condicioncd,  soldria,  never 
occur. 

4.  Taiiir,  3.  to  play,  has  no  first  person  singular,  as  it  had 
formerly,  namely  tango,  derived  from  the  Latin. 

3«    Yacer,  2.  to  lie,  is  conjugated  thus  : 

Gerundio  :  Yaciendo. 

Indicativo  presente  :  Yazgo,  yace. 

Imperfecto  :  Yacia,  etc. 

FuTURO  :  Yacere,  etc. 

Imperfecto  subjuntivo  :  Yaciera,  etc. 

CoNDicioNAL  :  Yaceria,  etc. 

Presents  :  Yazga  or  yazca. 

FuTURO  DE  SUBJUNTIVO  :  Yaclere. 

Imperativo  :  Yaz  tu,  yaced  vost)tros. 

6t  Salve  and  vale  are  only  used  in  the  second  person  singu- 
lar of  the  Imperative  of  the  Latin  verbs  salveo,  valeo,  the  for- 
mer meaning  /  greet  thee  and  the  second  fare  thee  well.  These 
expressions  are,  however,  considered  nowadays  as  obsolete. 


AGREEMENT   OrpHE^yj|^^fg|jH^  THE   SUBJECT.       321 


Leccion  LXI. 


Lesson  LXI. 


AGREEMENT  OF  THE  VERB  WITH  ITS  SUBJECT. 


Vocabulario. 

El  creador,  the  creator. 

El  movimiento,  the  movement. 

El  padrino,  the  godfather. 

El  raton,  the  mouse. 

El  sol,  the  sun. 

La  causa,  the  caitse,  the  case. 

La  especie,  the  species. 

La  fiesta,  the  feast. 

La  grandeza,  the  greatness. 

La  humanidai,  the  humanity. 

La  marcha,  the  march. 

La  mayor  parte,  the  most. 

La  mitad,  the  half. 

La  navegacion,  navigation. 

La  necesidad,  necessity. 

La  obra,  the  work. 


Vocabulary. 

La  planta,  the  plant. 
Cesar,  Ccesar. 
Pompeyo,  Pompey. 
Distinto,  distinct. 
Supremo,  supreme. 
Aguardar,  1.  to  expect,  to  aioait. 
Auunciar,  1.  to  announce. 
Arruinar,  1.  to  ruin. 
Conversar,  1.  to  converse. 
Decidir,  3.  to  decide. 
Divertir,  3.  to  amuse. 
Escapar,  1.  to  escape. 
Instruir,  3.  to  instruct. 
Interesar,  1.  to  interest. 
Juzgar,  1.  to  judge. 
Sentir,  3.  to  feel. 


Exercise  121. 

1.  Pedro,  Juan  y  yo  hemos  estado  aqui  esta  manana.  2.  El  padre 
y  el  hijo  han  salido  esta  manana.  3.  Ni  el  teatro  ni  la  musica  me 
divierten.  4.  El  ejercito  de  Francia  e  Inglaterra  estaban  en  marcha. 
5.  El  estudiar  y  conversar  con  los  sabios  instruye  al  hombre.  6.  Dar 
y  saber  dar  son  dos  cosas  muy  distintas.  7.  La  justicia,  la  religion  y 
la  humanidad  quieren  que  V.  obre  de  otro  modo.  8.  Los  cielos  y  la 
tierra,  el  sol  y  las  estrellas,  todo  nos  anuncia  la  grandeza  del  supremo 
creador.  9.  La  mitad  de  los  soldados  se  ha  ido.  10.  Es  la  obra  y  no 
la  persona  que  interesa  la  posteridad.  11.  Juzgar  y  sentir  no  son  la 
misma  cosa.  12.  Seran  V.  V.,  senores,  quienes  decidiran  en  esta 
causa.  13.  Son  trenta  pesos  que  V.  me  debe.  14.  El  mimero  de  las 
especies  de  animales  es  mas  grande,  segun  dicen,  qne  el  niimero  de  las 
especies  de  plantas.  15.  Su  padre  de  V.  6  su  tio  sera  el  padrino  de 
mi  hermanito.  16.  El  padre  de  Juan  es  uno  de  los  que  han  sido 
arruinados  por  la  ultima  guerra.  17.  Ni  V.  ni  el  lo  saben.  18.  De 
mis  conocidos  no  todos  serian  mis  amigos.  19.  La  agricultura,  las 
21 


322  LESSON   61. 

artes,  el  comercio  y  la  navegacion,  todo  estd  perdido  en  aquel  pobre 
pais.     20.  La  mayor  parte  de  mis  amigos  esta  esta  noche  en  el  teatro. 

Exercise  122. 

1.  My  brother  and  I  will  leave  to-morrow  for  the  country.  2.  Have 
not  most  of  your  friends  left  for  Paris  ?  3.  Most  of  them  intend  to 
remain  in  town  this  summer.  4.  Neither  Caesar  nor  Pompey  was  to 
be  an  emperor.  5.  John  and  Henry  are  very  good  friends.  6.  Great, 
rich,  poor,  little,  no  one  escapes  death.  7.  Fear  or  necessity  are  the 
cause  of  all  the  movements  of  the  mouse.  8.  One  half  of  the  chil- 
dren of  that  school  are  Germans.  9.  It  is  we  who  are  responsible  for 
your  conduct.  10.  Your  brother  and  I  will  go  to  the  same  school 
next  year.  11.  I  am  sure  that  it  is  you  who  have  said  that.  12.  A 
great  number  of  strangers  were  present  at  that  feast.  13.  He  and  I 
are  brothers.  14.  Neither  you  nor  your  friend  will  arrive  in  time. 
15.  It  was  your  father  and  not  your  mother  who  was  here.  16.  He 
or  she  will  have  the  book.  17.  This  gentleman  and  I  have  travelled 
together.  18.  It  is  not  the  son  but  the  daughter  who  has  died. 
19.  There  are  three  gentlemen  at  the  door.  20.  It  is  they  we  are 
expecting.  21.  Charles  and  I  are  poor,  but  Peter  and  his  brother  are 
rich. 

Gram^tiea.  Grammar. 

1,  When  the  subject  is  composed  of  two  or  more  nouns  joined 
by  a  conjunction,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  plural : 

El  padre  y  el  hijo  han  estado  aqui,         The  father  mid  the  smi  have  been  here. 

2.  "When  the  subjects  are  connected  by  ni,  neither,  or  by  d, 
or,  the  verb  must  also  be  put  in  the  plural.  Usage  and  euphony 
allow,  however,  the  use  of  the  singular,  and  we  can  say  : 

Ni  la  miisica  ni  el  teatro  le  divier-        Neither  micsic  nor  the  theatre  amtcse 

ten  or  divierte,  him. 

This  sentence  may  also  have  the  subjects  at  the  end  of  the  sentence : 
"So  le  divierte  ni  la  mtisioa  ni  el  teatro. 

3«  The  verb  must  likewise  be  in  the  plural  when  one  subject 
alone  is  expressed  and  the  other  or  others  are  understood  : 

El  ejercito  de  Valencia  y   Murcia  The  armies  of  Valencia  and  Mur- 

estaban  en  niarcha,  cia  were  on  their  anarch. 


AGREEMENT  OF  THE  VERB  WITH  THE  SUBJECT.   323 

4i  If  the  subjects  are  not  of  the  same  Person,  the  verbs  agree 
with  the  person  which  has  the  priority.  The  first  Person  has 
the  priority  of  the  second,  and  the  second  of  the  third  : 

V.  y  yo  lo  sabemos,  Vote  and  I  know  it. 

Y.  y  el  lo  saben,  You  and  he  know  it. 

5%  The  verb  is  put  in  the  singular  when  the  subject  is  com- 
posed of  two  infinitives  : 

El  estudiar  y  coiiversar   con  los         St^idying  and  conversing  with  wise 
sabios  instruye  al  honibre,  men  instruct  inan. 

6«  When  a  verb  has  several  subjects  not  connected  by  any 
conjunction,  it  is  put  in  the  singular,  unless  the  sentence  begins 
with  the  verb.     In  this  case  the  verb  is  put  in  the  plural : 

La  jnsticia,  la  religion,  la  humani-        Justice,   religio7i,    and    huma^iity 
dad,  lo  reclama,  or  Lo  reclaman  demand  it, 

la  justicia,  la  religion  y  la  hu- 
manidad, 

7.  When  a  word  occurs  in  the  sentence  which  embraces  all 
the  others,  the  verb  must  agree  with  this  word  : 

Los  cielos  y  la  tierra,  el  sol  y  las         The  heavens  and  the  earth,  the  sun 
estrellas,   todo  nos  anuncia  la  and  the  stars,  all  announce  the 

grandeza  de  Dios.  greatness  of  God  to  us. 

8t  When  the  verb  has  for  its  subject  a  general  collective 
noun,  it  agrees  with  the  latter : 

El  ejercito  esta  Men  organizado.  The  army  is  well  organized. 

If  the  collective  is  partitive,  the  verb  may  either  agree  with  the 
same,  or  with  the  noun  which  follows  it,  and  which  is  governed 
by  the  preposition  de : 

La  mitad  de  los  soldados  se  lia  ido        One  half  of  the  soldiers  have  gone 
or  se  ban  ido,  away. 


324 


LESSON    62. 


Leccion  LXII.  Lesson  LXII. 

CONJUNCTIONS  AND  INTERJECTIONS. 
Conjunctions. 

The  Conjunctions  most  generally  used  are  : 


Y,  and. 

Ni . . .  ni ,  neither . . .  nor. 

6,  or. 

Ya...ya,  now... now. 

Sea... sea,  either... or. 

Pero,  hut. 

Sin  embargo,  however. 

No  obstante,  notwithstanding. 

A  menos  que,  unless. 

Si,  if^  wMther^  so. 

Con  tal  que,  provided. 

Para  que,  in  order  that. 

Porque,  why. 


Porque,  because. 

Ya  que,  since. 

Bespecto,  regarding. 

Por  eonsiguiente,  consequently/. 

Por  eso,  therefore. 

Sobre,  thereupon. 

Algo,  somewhat. 

Pues,  ^ince. 

Mien tr as,  ivhilst. 

Conforme,  as. 

Antes  que,  he/ore, 

Aun,  ever. 

Por  miedo,  for  fear. 


Ah,  ah !    Ah,  ah  ! 
Ah,  que  alegria ! 
Ay  que  gozo ! 
Bueno !     Good  1 


What  a  joy  I 


Interjections. 

Of  Joy. 

Gracias  a  Dios  !     Thank  God  ! 
Bendito  sea  Dios  !  )  God  he 
Alabado  sea  Dios !  )  praised  / 
Vaya,  vaya !     Well,  now  ! 


Of  Sadness. 
Ah,  ay !    Jh,  ay  !  Dios  mio !     Good  heavens ! 

kj  qu^  pena !     What  a  pain  !  Valgame  Dios !    May  God  help  me  ! 

Aydemi!     Woe  to  me!  Virgen  santisima!    Holy  Virgin! 

Aydemi!     Poor  me!  Ave  Maria!     Godforhid! 

Of  Approbation  and  Surprise. 


Muy  bien !     Very  well ! 

Bien  hecho  !     Well  done  ! 

Me  alegro  mucho !    lam  very  glad  ! 

Grandemente !     Splendid  ! 

Escelente !    Excellent ! 

Esunpasmo!         \seatdiful! 
£s  una  maravilla !  ) 


Caspita ! 

Chispas ! 

Cascaras  \    x   r,       ■,   , 
,     .  }  Zounds  ! 
Caracoles ! 

Fuego !         I 

Ascuas !      >' 

Bravo !    Bravo  ! 


INTERJECTIONS. 


325 


Esta  muy  bien  !    It  is  very  well ! 
Es  milagro  !     Wonderful  I 
Guapo !     Magnificent ! 
Viva,  viva !     Hurrah^  hurrah  ! 


Oiga !   calle  !     You  dont  say  so  ! 
Hola!     Hallo! 
Mire  V. !     Do  you  see  ! 
Caramba !     Plague  ! 


Otra  vez !     Another  time !    Encore!        Toma!     Indeed!     (Ironically.) 
Of  Contempt,  Blame,  and  Disgust. 


Dios  mio  !     Good  heavens  ! 

Eso  no  vale  nada !     That  is  good  for 

nothing  ! 
Eso  es  bueno !     That  is  good  indeed! 
Vaya,  vaya!     Well,  now! 
Que  asco  !     How  disgusting  ! 
Grande  hazana !    A  great  feat ! 


Guapa  cosa  !     A  fine  thing  ! 

Que  vergUenza  !     Wluit  a  shame  ! 

Quita  alia !     Get  away  ! 
Oxte!     Shame! 

Calle,  que  es  bueno  I  )  That  is  very 
Vaya  en  gracia !        )  fine  !  (Iron. ) 


Of  Anger, 


f 


Voto  a !  si  me  enfado !    DonH  make 

me  mad  ! 
Voto  a  chapiro  !     /  tell  you,  sir  ! 

iThe  plague  take  you  ! 


Diantre  !    Hang  it  (J 

Anda  enhoramala ! 
Vaya  V.  a  pasear ! 
Ascuas  !     That 's  too  had  ! 


Get  aivay ! 


Of  Exhortation  and  Encouragement. 


VsLja.,  vaya  I     Bravely  ! 

Vamos,  vamos  !     Come  on  ! 

Alerta !     Wide  awake  ! 

Ea,  venga  alguien !     Somebody  here! 

Ea  pues  !     Well,  now  ! 

Ea,  animo  !     Courage  ! 

Basta,  basta !    Enough  ! 

Quedo,  quedo !     Gently  ! 


Guar  da,  guar  da !    Look  out! 
£  un  ladito  !     Step  aside  ! 
Cuidado  !     Take  care  ! 
Fuera,  fuera  !     Out  with  him  ! 
Fuego,  fuego  !     Fire  ! 
Ay,  que  me  matan  !    Murder  ! 
C6gele,  cogele !    Hold  him  ! 
Acabose !     It  is  all  over  ! 


Calla,  calla !    Be  silent ! 
Que  callen !     Quiet  ! 


Of  Silence. 

Silencio !     Silence  ! 
Chito,  Chiton!    Hush! 


326 


TABLE  OF 


TlBULA  DE  LAS  TERMINACIONES 


DE   LAS   TEES   CONJUGACIONES   EEGULAEES 


EN  LOS  TIEMPOS  SIMPLES. 


i 

< 
o 

o 
o 

Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

Past 
Participle. 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

am-|^ 

am-o 

am-aba 

am-as 

am-abas 

am-aste 

1..AR 

AM-AB 

am-ando 

am -ado 

ani-d^ 
am-amoa 
ani-aia 
am-an 

am-aba 
am-dbamos 

am-aban 

am-o 
am-dmos 
ani-asteis 
am-iron 

com-o 

com-ia 

com-i 

com-es 

com-ias 

com-iste 

2.   ER 

COM-ER 

com-lendo 

com-ldo 

com-e 

COm-MBOS 

com-eis 

com-ia 
com-iamos 
com-lals  , 

com-io 

com-ifios 

com-lsteis 

com-en 

com-lan 

com-Wron 

recib-o 

recib-ia 

recib-i 

• 

recib-e» 

recib-ias 

recib-lste 

8.    IR 

RECIB-IR 

recib-lendo 

recib-ldo 

recib-e 
recib-imos 
recib-ls 
recib-Mi 

recib-Ia 
recib-lamos 
i-ecib-iais 
recib-iau 

recib-i<S 
recib-imos 
recib-isteis 
recib-Wnm 

TERMINATIONS. 


327 


TABLE   OF   TERMINATIONS 


OF   THE   THREE   EEGULAR   CONJUGATIONS 


\ 


IN  THEIR  SIMPLE  TENSES. 


^FVtuke.  ,, 

1                    "• 

^MPER.\TIVE. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

termination 
1.               ^2^         •  8. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

am-wft       *" 

am-a 

am-e 

am-^a 
am-aras 

•aria         -ase 

am-are 

ani-ar&s 

aiu-es 

am-es 

•arias       -ases 

am -ares 

ani-arA 

am-e  ~ 

am-e 

am-ara 

•aria         -ase  *«^ 

h  am-are 

ani-ar^mos 

am-emos 

am-emos 

am-aramos 

-ariamos  -^emos 

am-4remos 

am-ar^is 

am- ad 

am-eia 

am-i&rais 

•ariais      -dseis 

am-ama 
'am»aren 

am-artLn 

am -en 

am-en. 

am-aran 

•arian       -asen 

coni-ert 

com-e 

com -a 

com-iera 

-eria        -iese 

com-lere 

com-erta 

com -as 

com-as 

com-ieras 

•erias       -ieses    <r 

^cem-ieres     — ■ 

com-eri 

com -a 

com-a 

com-lera 

-eria        •iese 

com-lere 

coni-er^moB 

com-amos 

com-amos 

com-i<ramos 

•erlamos  -idsemos 

com-iiremos 

com-er^is 

com-ed 

com-ais 

com-idrais 

•erlais      -idseis 

com-idreia 

com-eria 

com-aa 

com-an 

com-ieran 

-erian      -iesen 

com-ieren 

recib-ird 

recib-e 

recib-a 

recib-iera 

•iria         -iese 

recib-iere 

recib-lris 

recib-as 

recib-as 

recib-ieras 

-irias       -ieses 

recib-ierea 

recib-iri 

recib-a 

recib-a   , 

recib-iera 

-iria        -iese 

recib-iere 

recib-irtoos 

recib-amos 

recib-amos 

recib-Wramoi 

•iriamos  -idsemos 

recib-Idremos 

recib-ireis 

recib-id 

recib-ais 

recib-Wrais 

-iriaia      -idseis 

recib-idrcis 

recib>^iran 

recib-an 

recib-an 

recib-ieran 

-irian      -iesen 

recib-ieren 

-ft 


r^ 


328 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 


TlBULA  ALFABETICA  DE  LOS 
PEmCIPALES  VERBOS  IREEGULARES  6  DEFECTIVOS. 


NoTA.  —  El  numero  colocado  despues  del  Presente  ^el  Infinitive  de  cada  verbo  indica  la 
Conjugacion  a  la  que  perteuece  este  verbo. 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

i 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Abrir,  3. 

to  open. 

Regular  in  all 
the  other 
tenses. 

abierto 

Absolver,  2. 

to  ahsolce. 

conjugated 
like  Mover. 

absuelto 

Abstraer,  2. 

to  abstract. 

conjugated 
like  Traer. 

Acertar,  1. 

to  hit  the  aim. 

conjugated 

like 

Acrecentar. 

Acordar,  1. 

to  agree. 

acordando 

acordado 

acuerdo 

acuerdas 

acuerda 

acordamos 

acordais 

acuerdan 

acordaba 

acordabas 

acordaba 

acordabamos 

acordabais 

acordaban 

acorde 

acordaste 

acordo 

acordamos 

acordasteis 

acordaron 

Acostar,  1. 

to  lay  down. 

conjugated 
like  Acordar. 

■ 

Acrecentar,  1. 

to  increase. 

acrecentando 

acrecentado 

acreciento 

acrecientas 

acrecienta 

acrecen  tamos 

acrecentais 

acrecientan 

acrecentaba 
acrecentabas 
acrecentaba 
acrecentaba- 

mos 
acrecentabais 
acrecentaban 

acrecente 

acrecentaste 

acrecento 

acrecentamos 

acrecentas- 

teis 
acrecentdron 

Adestrar,  1. 

to  guide. 

conjugated 

like 

Acrecentar. 

Adherir,  3. 

to  adhere. 

conjugated 
.like  Asentlr. 

lEREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


329 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE  OP  THE 
PRINCIPAL  lEREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


Note.  —  The  number  put  after  the  Present  Infiniti\'e  of  each  verb  indicates  the  Conjugation 
to  which  that  verb  belongs. 


PUTUEE. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 

1.                2.             .S. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

acordare 

acordaras 

acordara 

acordaremos 

acordareis 

acordaran 

acuerda 

acuerdes 

acuerde 

acordemos 

acordad 

acuerden 

acuerde 

acuerdes 

acuerde 

acordemos 

acordeis 

acuerden 

acord-ara          -aria          -ase 
acord-aras         -arias        -ases 
acord-ara          -aria          -ase 
acord-aramos    -ariamos    -asemos 
acord-arais       -ariais        -aseis 
acord-aran        -arian        -asen 

acordare 

acordares 

acordare 

acordaremos 

acordareis 

acordaren 

acrecentare 
acrecentaras 
acrecentara 
acrecentare- 

mos 
acrecentareis 
acrecentaran 

acrecienta 

acrecientes 

acre^ientj^ 

acrecentemos 

acrecentad 

acrecienten 

acreciente 

acrecientes 

acreciente 

acrecentemos 

acrecenteis 

acrecienten 

acrecent-ara        -aria       -ase 
acrecent-aras       -arias      -ases 
acrecent-ara        -aria        -ase 
acrecent-aramos  -ariamos  -dsemos 
acrecent-arais     -ariais     -aseis 
acrecent-aran     -arian      -asen 

acrecentare 

acrecentares 

acrecentare 

acrecentaremos 

acrecentareis 

acreceutaren 

330 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF  THE   PRINCIPAL 


Present 

iNriNITIVE. 

Gerund. 

i 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Adquirir,  3. 

to  acquire. 

adquiriendo 

adquirido 

adquiero 

adquieres 

adquiere 

adquirimos 

adquiris 

adquieren 

adquiria 

adquirias 

adquiria 

adquiriamos 

adquiriais 

adquirian 

adquiri 

adquiriste 

adquirio 

adquirimos 

adquiristeis 

adquirieron 

Aduoir,  3. 

to  convey. 

See 
Condncir. 

Advertir,  3. 

to  advise. 

See 
Asentir. 

Agorar,  1. 

to  divine. 

See 
Acordar. 

Alentar,  1. 

to  encouragp. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Almorzar,  1. 

to  breakfast. 

See 
Acordar. 

Andar,  1. 

to  walk. 

andando 

andado 

an  do 

andas 

anda 

andamos 

andais 

andan 

andaba 

andabas 

andaba 

andabamos 

andabais 

andaban 

anduve 

auduviste 

anduvo 

anduvimos 

anduvisteis 

anduvieron 

Apacentar,  1. 

to  graze. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Apostar,  1. 

to  bet. 

See 
Acordar. 

Aprobar,  1. 

to  approve. 

See 
Acordar. 

Apretar,  1. 

to  tighten. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Arguir,  3. 

to  argue. 

See 
Instrulr. 

Arrecirse,  3. 

to  be  benumbed. 

See 
Pedir. 

Arrendar,  1. 

to  rent. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


331 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 
1.                    3.                 3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

adquirire 

adquiriras 

adquirira 

adquiriremos 

adquirireis 

adquiriran 

adquiera 

adquiere 

adquiera 

adquiramos 

adquirid 

adquieran 

adquiera 

adquieras 

adquiera 

adquiramos 

adquirais 

adquieran 

adquir-iera         -iria         -lese 
adquir-ieras        -iriaa       -ieaes 
adquir-iera         -iria        -iese 
adquir-ieramos  -iriamos  -iesemos 
adquir-ierais      -iriais      -ieseis 
adquir-ieran       -irian       -iesen 

adquiriere 

adquirieres 

adquiriere 

adquirieremos 

adquiriereis 

adquirieren 

' 

andare 

andaras 

andara 

andaremos 

andareis 

andaran 

ande 

anda 

ande 

andemos 

audad 

anden 

ande 

audes 

ande 

andemos 

andeis 

anden 

and-uviera         -aria       -uviese 
and-uvieras       -arias      -uvieses 
and-uviera         -aria        -uviese 
and-uvieramos  -ariamos  -uviesemos 
and-uvierais      -ariais     -uvieseis 
and-uvieran       -arian      -uviesen 

anduviere 

auduvieres 

anduviere 

anduvieremos 

anduviereis 

anduvieren 

- 

- 

332 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF  THE   PRINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

< 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Arrepentirse,  3. 

to  repent. 

See 
Asentir. 

Ascender,  2. 

to  ascend. 

See 
Atender. 

Asentar,  1. 

to  establish. 

See 
Acrecentaj. 

Asentir,  3. 

to  acquiesce. 

asintiendo 

asentido 

asiento 

asientes 

asiente 

asentinios 

asentis 

asienten 

asentia 

asentias 

asentia 

asentianios 

asentiais 

asentian 

asenti 

ast'iitiste 

aseutio 

asentimos 

asiiitisteis 

asiutierou 

Aserrar,  1. 

to  saw. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Asestar,  1. 

to  aim. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Asir,  3. 

to  seize. 
This  verb  is  used  only 
in    a    metaphorical 
sense. 

asiendo 

asido 

asgo 

ases 

ase 

asimos 

asis 

asen 

asia 

asias 

asia 

asiamos 

asiais 

asian 

asi 

asiste 

asio 

asimos 

asisteis 

asieron 

Asolar,  1. 

to  devastate. 

See 
Acordar. 

Atender,  2. 

to  mind. 

atendiendo 

atendido 

atiendo 

atiendes 

atiende,*^ 

atendemos 

atendeis 

atenden 

atekdia 

atendias 

atendia 

atendiamos 

atendiais 

atendian 

ateudi 

atendiste 

atendio 

atendimos 

atendisteis 

atendieron 

Atentar,  1. 

to  attempt. 

See 

Aterrar,  1. 

to  prostrate. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Atestar,  1. 

to  crowd. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Atraer,  2. 

to  attract. 

See 
Traer. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


333 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

termination 

1.                       2.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

asentire 

asentiras 

asenlira 

asentiremos 

asentireis 

asentiran 

asiente 

asienta 

asiente 

asientemos 

asentid 

asieuten 

asiente 

asientes 

asiente 

asentemos 

asenteis 

asienten 

asint-iera  asent-iria  asint-iese 
asint-ieras         -irias        -ieses 
asint-iera          -iria         -iese 
asint-ieramos    -iiiamos   -iesemos 
asint-ierais       -iriais       -ieseis 
asint-ieran        -irian        -iesen 

asintiere 

asintieres 

asintiere 

asintieremos 

asintiereis 

asintieien 

asire 
asiras 
asira 
asire  mos 
asire  is 
asiran 

asga 

asgase 

asga 

asgamos 

asid 

asgan 

asga 

asgas 

asga 

asgamos 

asgais 

asgan 

asiera            asiria          asiese 
asieras          asirias        asieses 
asiera            asiria          asiese 
asieramos     asiriamos    asiesemos 
asierais         asiriais       asieseis 
asieran         asirian        asiesen 

asiere 

asieres 

asiere 

asieremos 

asiereis 

asieren 

atendere 

atenderas 

atenderd 

atendere  mos 

atendereis 

atenderaa 

atienda 

atiende 

atienda 

atendamos 

atended 

atiendan 

atienda 

atiendas 

atienda 

atendamos 

atendais 

atiendan 

atend-iera          -eria        -iese 
atend-ieras        -erias       -ieses 
atend-iera          -eria        -iese 
atend-ieramos  -eriamos  -iesemos 
atend-ierais       -eriais      -ieseis 
atend-ieran        -erian       -iesen 

atendiere 

atendieres 

atendiere 

atendierenios 

atendiereis 

atendieren 

334 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 


Present 

Present 

Imperfect 

Gebund. 

<        1 

Preterite. 

Infinitive. 

^  u 
^ 

Indicative. 

Indicative. 

Atravesar,  1. 

See 

to  cross  over. 

Acrecentar. 

Aventar,  1. 

See 

to  fan. 

Acrecentar. 

Avergonzar,  1. 

See 

to  shame. 

Acordar. 

Bendecir,  3. 

to  bless. 

bendiciendo 

bendito 

bendigo 

bendeeia 

bendije 

bendecido 

bendices 

bendeciaa 

bendijiste 

bendice 

bendeeia 

bendijo 

bendeciraos 

bendeciamos 

bendijimos 

bendecis 

bendeciais 

bendijisteis 

bendicen 

bendecian 

bendije  ron 

Caber,  2. 

cabiendo 

cabido 

quepo 

cabia 

cupe 

to  be  contained. 

cabes 

cabias 

cupiste 

cabe 

cabia 

■cupo 

cabemos 

cabiamos 

cupiraos 

cabeis 

cabiais 

eupisteis 

caben 

cabian 

cupieron 

Caer,  2. 

cayendo 

caido 

caigfl^ 

caia 

cai 

to/all. 

caes 

caias 

caiste 

cae 

caia 

cayo  ' 

caemos 

caiamos 

caimos 

caeis 

caiais 

caisteis 

caen 

caian 

cay  e  ron 

Galentar,  1. 

See 

to  warm. 

Acrecentar. 

Cegar,  1. 

See 

to  blind. 

Acrecentar. 

Cenir,  3. 

See 

to  gird. 

Pedir. 

Cerner,  2. 

See 

to  sift.. 

Atender. 

Cerrar,  1. 

See 

to  close,  to  shut. 

Acrecentar. 

Cimentar,  1. 

See 

' 

to  ground. 

Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


335 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive, 
termination 

1.                      2.                  8. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

bendecire 

bendeciras 

bendecira 

bendeciremos 

bendecireis 

bendeciran 

bendiga 

bendice 

bendiga 

bendigamos 

bendecid 

bendigan 

bendiga 

bendigas 

bendiga 

bendigamos 

bendigais 

bendigan 

bend-         bend-          bend- 
-ijera          -eciria          -ijese 
-ijeras         -ecirias        -ijeses 
-ijera          -eciria         -ijese 
-ijeramos  -eciriamos   -ijesemos 
-ijerais       -eciriais       -ijeseis 
-ijeran        -ecirian        -ijesen 

bendijere 

bendijeres 

bendijere 

bendijeremos 

bendijereis 

bendijeren 

cab  re 

cabras 

cabra 

cabremos 

cabreis 

cabran 

quepa 

cabe 

quepa 

quepamos 

cabed 

quepan 

quepa 

quepas 

quepa 

quepamos 

quepais 

quepan 

cupiera        cabria        cupiese 
cupieras       cabrias      cupieses 
cupiera        cabria        cupiese 
cupieramos  cabriamos  cupiesemos 
cupierais      cabriais     cupieseis 
cupiei-an      cabrian     cupiesen 

cupiere 

cupieres 

cupiere 

cupieremos 

cupiereis 

cupieren 

Caere 

caeras 

caera 

caeremos 

Caere  is 

caeran 

caiga 

cae 

caiga 

caigamos 

caed 

caigan 

caiga 

caigas 

caiga 

caigamos 

caigais 

caigan  , 

cayera          caeria         cayese 
cayeras         caerias       cayeses 
cayera          caeria         cayese 
cayeramos  caeriamos  cayesemos 
cayerais       caeriais      cayeseis 
cay  e  ran        caerian       cayesen 

cayere 

cayeres 

cayere 

cayeremos 

cayereis 

cayeren 

336 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE  OF  THE  PKINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

»5          O 

< 

Ph 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Cocer,  2. 

to  boil. 

cociendo 

cocido 

cuezo 

cueces 

cuece 

cocemos 

coceis 

cuecen 

cocia 

cocias 

cocia 

cociamos 

cociais 

cocian 

coci 

cociste 

coci6 

cocimos 

cocisteis 

cocieron 

Colar,  1. 

to  strain. 

See 
Acordar. 

Colegir,  3. 

to  collect. 

See 
Pedir. 

- 

Colgar,  1. 

to  hang. 

See 
Acordar. 

Comedirse,  3. 

to  govern  one's  self. 

See 
Pedir. 

Comenzar,  1. 

to  commence. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Competir,  3. 

to  compete. 

See 
Pedir. 

Concebir,  3. 

to  conceive. 

See 
Pedir. 

Concernir,  3. 

to  concern. 

See 
Asentir. 

Concertar,  1. 

to  concert. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Concordar,  1. 

to  agree. 

See 
Acordar. 

Condescender,  2. 

to  condescend. 

Atender. 

Condolerse,  2. 

to  condole. 

See 
Mover. 

Conducir,  3. 

to  conduct. 

conduciendo 

conducido 

conduzco 

conduces 

conduce 

conducimos 

conducis 

conducen 

conducia 

conducias 

conducia 

conduciamos 

conduciais 

conducian 

conduje 

condujiste 

condujo 

condujinios 

condujisteis 

condujcron 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


337 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

termination 
1.               2.             3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

cocere 

coceras 

cjrera 

cocei-emos 

cocere  is 

coceran 

cueza 

cuece 

cueza 

cozanios 

coced 

cuezan 

cueza 

cuezas 

cueza 

cozaraos 

cozais 

cuezan 

cociera        coceria        cociese 
cocieras       cocerias      cocieses 
cociera        coceria        cociese 
cocieramos  coceriamos  cociesemos 
cocierais     coceriais     cocieseis 
cocieran      cocerian     cociesen 

cociere 

cocieres 

cociere 

cocieremos 

cociereis 

cocieren 

conducire 

conduciras 

conducira 

conduciremos 

conducireis 

conduciran 

conduzca 

conduce 

conduzca 

conduzcamos 

conducid 

conduzcan 

conduzca 

conduzcas 

conduzca^ 

conduzcamos 

conduzcais 

conduzcan 

condu-jera        -ciria         -jese 
condu-jeras      -cirias      -jeses 
condu-jera        -ciria        -jese 
condu-jeranios  -ciriamos  -jesemos 
condu-jerais     -ciriais      -jeseis 
condu-jeran      -cirian       -jesen 

condujere 

condujeres 

condujere 

condujerenios 

condujereis 

condujeren 

22 


338 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF  THE   PKINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

i 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Conferir,  3. 

to  confer. 

See 
ABentir. 

Confesar,  1. 

to  confess. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

conociendo 

Conocer,  2. 

to  know,    to   be  ac- 
quainted with. 

conocido 

8  8  8  8  8  8 

conocia 

conocias 

conocia 

conociamos 

conocia  is 

conocian 

conoci 

conociste 

conocio 

conociraos 

conocisteis 

conocieron 

Conseguir,  3. 

to  obtain. 

See 
Pedir. 

Consentir,  3. 

to  consent. 

See 
Asentir. 

Consolar,  1. 

to  comfort. 

See 
Acordar. 

ConstreMr,  3. 

to  constrain. 

See 
Pedir. 

Contar,  1. 

to  count. 

See 
Acordar. 

Contener,  2. 

to  contain. 

See 
Tener. 

Contender,  2. 

to  contend. 

See 
Atender. 

Contradecir,  3. 

to  contradict. 

See 
Decir. 

Controvertir,  3. 

to  controvert. 

See 
Asentir. 

Contraer,  2. 

to  contract. 

Traer. 

Convertir,  3. 

to  convert. 

See 
Asentir. 

Corregir,  3. 

to  correct. 

See 
Pedir. 

Cubrir,  3. 

to  cover. 

cubierto 

Rej^ular  in 
all  other 
tenses. 

IRREGULAR  OR   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


339 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive, 
termination 

1.                       2.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

conocere 

conoceras 

conocei-a 

conocereraos 

conocere  is 

conoceran 

conozca 

conoce 

conozca 

conozcamos 

conozcais 

conozcan 

conozca 

conozcas 

conozca 

conozcamos 

conozcais 

conozcan 

conoc-iera         -eria         -iese 
conoc-ieras       -erias       -ieses 
conoc-iera         -eria        -iese 
conoc-ieraraos  -eriamos  -iesemos 
conoc-ierais      -eriais     -ieseis 
conoc-ieran       -erian      -iesen 

conociere 

conocieres 

conociere 

conocieremos 

conociereis 

conocieren 

340 


ALPUABETICAL  TABLE  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

Past 
Participle. 

Present 
[ndicative. 

Impereect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Dar,  1. 

to  give. 

dando 

dado 

doy 

da3 

da 

damos 

dais 

dan 

daba 

dabas 

daba 

dabamos 

dabais 

daban 

di 

diste 

dio 

dimos 

disteis 

dieron 

Decaer,  2. 

to  decay. 

See 
Ca«r. 

Decentar,  1. 

to  commence  with. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Decir,  3. 

to  telly  to  say. 

dicieiido 

dicho 

digo 

dices 

dice 

decimos 

decis 

dicen 

decia 

decias 

decia 

deciamos 

deciais 

decian 

dije 

dijiste 

dijo 

dijimos 

dijisteis 

dijeron 

Deducir, 

to  deduct. 

See 
Conducir. 

Defender^  2. 

to  defend. 

See 
Atender. 

Deferir,  3. 

to  defer. 

See 
Asentir. 

DegoUar,  1. 

to  behead. 

See 
Acordar. 

Demoler,  2. 

to  demolish. 

See 
Mover. 

Demostrar,  1. 

to  demonstrate. 

See 
Acordax. 

Denegar,  1. 

to  deny. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Denostar,  1. 

to  abuse. 

See 
Acordar. 

Derrengar,  1. 

to  hate. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

See 
Pedir. 

Derretir,  3. 

to  melt. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


341 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 

I.               2.             3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

dare 

daras 

dara 

daremos 

dare  is 

daran 

de 

da 

des 

demos 

dad 

den 

de 

des 

de 

demos 

deis 

den 

diera            daria            diese 
dieras           darias           dieses 
diera           daria           diese 
dieramos     darianios      diesemos 
dierais         dariais         dieseis 
dieran          darian          diesen 

diere 

dieres 

diere 

dieremos 

diereis 

dieren 

dire 

diras 

dira 

diremos 

direis 

diran 

diga 

di 

diga 

digamos 

decid 

digan 

diga 

digas 

diga 

digamos 

digais 

digan 

dijera           diria           dijese 
dijeras         dirias         dijeses 
dijera           diria           dijese 
dijeramos     diriamos      dijesemos 
dijerais         diriais         dijeseis 
dijeran         dirian          dijesen 

dijere 

dijeres 

dijere 

dijeremos 

dijereis 

dijeren 

342 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF   THE  PKINCIPAL 


Peesent 
Iniinitive. 

Gerund. 

< 

Pi 

PllESElVT 

Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Desavenir,  3. 

to  disagree. 

See 
Venir. 

Descender,  2. 

to  descend. 

See 
Atender. 

DescoUar,  1. 

to  exceed. 

See 
Acordax. 

Descordar,  1. 

to  uncord  an  instru- 
ment. 

See 
Acordar. 

Descomedirse,  3. 

to  be  rude. 

See 
Fedir. 

Describir,  3. 

to  describe. 

descrito 

Regular    in 
all  the  oth- 
er tenses. 

Desflocar,  1. 

to  remove  flakes. 

See 
Acordar. 

Deshacer,  2. 

to  undo. 

See 
Hacer. 

Deshelar,  1. 

to  thaw. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Desleir,  3. 

to  dilute. 

See 
Veir. 

Besolar,  1. 

to  desolate. 

See 
Acordar. 

DesoUar,  1. 

toflay. 

See 
Acordar. 

Desovar,  1. 

to  spawn. 

See 
Acordar. 

Despedir,  3. 

to  dismiss. 

See 
Fedir. 

Despernar,  1. 

to  break  or  cut   off 
one's  legs. 

See 

Despertar,  1. 

to  awake. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Desterrar,  1. 

to  banish. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR   OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


343 


Future. 

Impeeative. 

Pbesent 
Subjunctive 

Impeefect  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 

1.               3.            3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

344 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF  THE   PRINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

i 
%  1 

< 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Besplegar,  1^ 

to  unfold. 

See 
Acrecentax. 

Desvergonzarse, 

2.  to  act  impudently. 

See 
Acordar. 

Bezmar,  1. 

to  tithe. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Diferir,  3. 

to  dday. 

See 
Asentir. 

Digerir,  3. 

to  digest. 

See 
Asentir. 

Discernir,  3. 

to  discern. 

See 
Asentir. 

Discordar,  1. 

to  disagree. 

See 
Acordar. 

Disolver,  2. 

to  dissolve. 

See 
Mover. 

Divertir,  3. 

to  amuse. 

See 
Asentir. 

Doler,  2. 

to  ache. 

See 
Mover. 

Dormir,  3. 

to  sleep. 

durmiendo 

dormido 

duermo 

duermes 

duerme 

dormimos 

dormis 

duermen 

dormia 

dormias 

dormia 

dormiamos 

dormiais 

doi-mian 

dornii 

dormiste 

durmio 

dormimos 

dormisteis 

durmieron 

Elegir,  3. 

to  elect. 

See 
Pedir. 

Embestir,  3. 

to  attack,  to  assail. 

See 
Pedir. 

Empedrar,  1. 

to  pave. 

See 

Empezar,  1. 

to  begin. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Emporoar,  1. 

to  dirt. 

See 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


345 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
subjunctivk 

Ialperfect  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 
1.                       2.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

• 

% 

dormire 

dormiras 

dormira 

dormiremos 

dormireis 

dormiran 

duerma    ' 

duerme 

duerma 

dormamos 

Hirmid 

duerman 

duerma 

duermas 

duerma 

dbrmaraos 

dormais 

duerman 

dofm-iera           -iria        -iese 
dorra-ieras         -irias       -ieses 
dorm-iera           -iria        -iese 
dorm-ieramos    -iamos    -iesemos 
dorm-ierais         -iais        -ieseis 
dorm-ieran         -ian        -iesen 

dormiere 

dormieres 

dormiere 

d6Tmieremos 

dormiereis 

doi-mieren 

346 


ALPHABETICAL   TABLE   OF   THE  PRINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

< 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Encender,  2. 

to  light. 

See 
Atender. 

Encensar,  1. 

to  perfume  {with  in- 
cense). 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Encerrar,  1. 

to  shut  in,  to  enclose. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Encomendar,  1. 

to  recommend. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Encontrar,  1. 

to  meet. 

See 
Acordar. 

Encordar,  1. 

to  put   strings  and 
cords    (to   an    in- 
strument). 

See 
Acordar. 

Engreirse,  3. 

to  adorn  one's  self. 

See 
Keir. 

Engrosar,  1. 

to  fatten. 

See 
Acordar. 

Enmendar,  1. 

to  correct. 

See 

# 

Enrodar,  1. 

to  break  on  the  wheel. 

See 
Acordar. 

Ensangrentar,  1. 

to  stain  with  blood. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Entender,  2. 

to  understand. 

See 
Atender. 

Enterrar,  1. 

to  bury. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Envestir,  3. 

to  invest. 

See 
Pedir. 

Erguir,  3. 

to  hold  up  the  head. 

irguiendo 

erguido 

yergo 

yergues 

yergue 

erguimos 

erguis 

yerguen 

erguia 

erguias 

erguia 

erguiamos 

erguiais 

erguian 

ergui 

erguiste 

irgui6 

erguimos 

erguisteis 

irgui^ron 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


347 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

iMPERrECT  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 
1.                       2.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

erguire 

erguiras 

erguira 

erguiremos 

erguire  is 

erguiran 

yerga 

yergue 

yerga 

irgamos 

erguid 

yergan 

yerga 

yergas 

yerga 

irgamos 

irgais 

yergan 

irgu-             ergu-         irgu- 
-iera             -iria           -iese 
-ieras            -irias         -ieses 
-iera              -iria           -iese 
-ieramos       -riamos     -iesemos 
-ierais           -riais         -ieseis 
-ieran           -rian          -iesen 

irguiere 

irguieres 

irguiere 

irguieremos 

irguiereis 

irguieren 

348 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 


Peesent 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

i 

PL, 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Errar,  1. 

to  err. 

errando 

errado 

yeri-o 

yerras 

yerra 

erramos 

errais 

yerran 

erraba 

errabas 

erraba 

errabaraos 

errabais 

erraban 

erre 

erraste 

erro 

erramos 

errasteis 

erraron 

Escarmentar,  1. 

to  correct. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Escocer,  2. 

to  irritate. 

See 
Cocer. 

Escribir,  3. 

to  write. 

Regular  in  all 
the     other 
tenses. 

escrito 

Esforzar,  1. 

to  strengthen. 

See 
Acordar. 

Estar,  1. 

to  he. 
(See  Auxiliary  Verbs, 
p.  152). 

Excluir,  3. 

to  exclude. 

See 
Instroir. 

Estrenir,  3. 

to  bind. 

See 
Pedir. 

Extender,  2. 

to  extend. 

See 
Atender. 

Ezpedir,  3. 

to  expedite. 

See 
Pedir. 

Forzar,  1. 

to  force. 

See 
Acordar. 

Fregar,  1. 

to  cleanse. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Freir,  3. 

tofry. 

See 
Reir. 

frito 
irr.  part. 

Gemir,  3. 

to  groan. 

See 
Pedir. 

Gobernar,  1. 

to  govern. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR  OR   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


349 


FUTUKE. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 

1.               2.             3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

errare 

erraras 

errara 

erraremos 

errare  is 

erraran 

yerre 

yerra 

yerre 

errenios 

errad 

yerran 

yerre 

yerres 

yerre 

errenios 

erreis 

yerren 

errara         erraria         errase 
erraras        errarias       errases 
errara         erraria         errase 
erraraiuos  errarianios  errase  mos 
errarais       errariais      erraseis 
erraran       errarian      errasen 

eriare 

errares 

errare 

erraremos 

errareis 

erraren 



350 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gekund. 

Peesent 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Haber,  2. 

to  have. 
(See  Auxiliary  Verbs, 
p.  136.) 

Hacer,  2. 

to  make,  to  do. 

haciendo 

liecho 

liago 

haces 

hace  f 

haceraos 

haceis 

hacen 

hacia 

hacias 

hacia 

haciamos 

haciais 

hacian 

hice 

hiciste 

hizo 

hicimos 

hicisteis 

hicieron 

Heder,  2. 

to  stink. 

See 
Atender. 

Helar,  1. 

to  freeze. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Henchir,  3. 

to  stuff. 

See 
Pedir. 

Hender,  2. 

to  split. 

See 
Atender. 

Henir,  3. 

to  knead. 

See 
Pedir. 

Herir,  3. 

to  wound. 

See 
Asentir. 

Herrar,  1. 

to  shoe. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Hervir,  3. 

to  boil. 

See 
Asentir. 

Holgar,  1. 

to  rest. 

See 
Acordar. 

Hollar,  1. 

to  depress. 

See 
Acordar. 

Impedir,  3. 

to  impede. 

See 
Pedir. 

Imprimir,  3. 

to  print. 

See 
Inrtmir. 

impreso 
irr.  part. 

Re{?ular  in  all 
the     other 
tenses. 

Incensar,  1. 

to  incense. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


351 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

iMPERrECT  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 
1.                       2.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

hare 

haras 

hara 

haremos 

hare  is 

haran 

haga 

haz 

haga 

hagamos 

haced 

hagaa 

haga 

hagas 

haga 

hagamos 

hagais 

hagatt 

Iiiciera          haria         hiciese 
hicieras        harias        hicieses 
hiciera          haria         hiciese 
hicieramos   hariamos  hiciesemos 
hicierais       hariais      hicieseis 
hicieran       harian       hiciesen 

liiciere 

hicieres 

hiciere 

liicieremos 

hiciereis 

hicieren 

352 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 


Present 

i 

Present 

Imperfect 

Gerund. 

%     2 

Preterite. 

Infinitive. 

^     5 

Indicative. 

Indicative. 

Incluir,  3. 

See 

to  include. 

Instruir. 

Inducir,  3. 

See 

to  induce. 

Conducir. 

Inferir,  3. 

See 

to  infer. 

Asentir. 

Inquirir,  3. 

See 

to  inquire. 

Instruir,  3. 

Adquirir. 

instruyendo 

instruido 

instruyo 

instruia 

instrui 

to  instruct. 

instruyes 

instruias 

instruiste 

instruye 

instruia 

instruyo 

instruimos 

instruiamos 

instruimos 

instruis 

instruiais 

instruisteis 

instruyen 

instmian 

instruyeron 

Introducir,  3. 

See 

to  introduce. 

Conducir. 

Invernar,  1. 

See 

to  winter. 

Acrecentar. 

Invertir,  3. 

See 

to  invert. 

Asentir. 

Investir,  3. 

See 

to  invest. 

Pedir. 

Ingerir,  3. 

See 

to  intermeddle. 

Asentir. 

Ir,  3. 

yendo 

ido 

voy 

i])a 

fui 

toga. 

vas 

ibas 

fuiste 

va 

iba 

fue 

vamos 

ibamos 

fuimos 

vais 

ibais 

fuisteis 

van 

iban 

fueron 

Jugar,  1. 

jugando 

jugado 

juego 

jugaba 

jugue 

to  play. 

juegas 

jugabas 

jugaste 

juega 

jugaba 

.lugo 

jugamos 

jugabamos 

jugamos 

jugais 

jugabais 

jngasteis 

juegan 

jugaban 

jugaron 

Llover,  2. 

See 

to  rain. 

Mover. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


353 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive, 
termination 

1.                       2.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

instruire 

instruiras 

instruira 

instruiremos 

instruireis 

instruiran 

instruya 

instruye 

instruya 

instruyamos 

instruid 

instruyan 

instruya 

mstruyas 

instruya 

instruyamos 

instruyais 

instruyan 

instru-yera        -iria        -yese 
instru-yeras      -irias      -yeses 
instru-yera        -iria        -yese 
instru-yeramos  -iriamos  -yesemos 
instru-yerais     -iriais     -yeseis 
instru-yeran      -irian      -yesen 

instruyere 

instruyeres 

instruyere 

instruyeremos 

instruye  reis 

instruyeren 

ire 

iras 

ira 

iremos 

ireis 

iran 

vaya 

ve 

vaya 

vayamos 

id 

vayan 

vaya 

vayas 

vaya 

vayamos  . 

vayam«S2|/> 

vayan 

fuera               iria            fucse 
fueras             irias          fueses 
fuera              iria            fuese 
fueramos        iriamos      fuesemos 
fuerais             iriais         fueseis 
fueran             irian          fuesen 

fuere 

fueres 

fuere 

fueremos 

fuereis 

fueren 

jugar6 

jugards 

jugara 

jugaremos 

jugareis 

jugaran 

juega 

juege 

juega 

juguemos 

jugad 

juegen 

juege 

juegues 

iuege 

juguemos 

jugueis 

jueguen 

jugara         jugaria        jugase 
jugaras       jugarias       jugases 
jugara         jugaria        jugase 
jugaramos  jugariamos  jugasemos 
jugarais      jugariais     jugaseis 
jugaran       jugarian      jugasen 

jugare  * 

jugares 

jugare 

jugaremos 

jugareis 

jugaren 

23 


354 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF  THE   PKINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Geeund. 

i 

< 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Maldecir,  3. 

to  detract. 

See 
Hendecir. 

Manifestar,  1. 

to  manifest. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Mantener,  2. 

to  support. 

See 
Tener. 

Medir,  1. 

to  measure. 

See 
Pedir. 

Mentar,  1. 

to  mention. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Mentir,  3. 

to  lie. 

See 
Asentir. 

Merendar,  1. 

to  take  a  collation. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Moler,  1. 

to  grind. 

See 
Mover. 

Morder,  3. 

to  bite. 

See 
Mover. 

Morir,  3. 

to  die. 

niuriendo 

muerto 

muero 

mueres 

muere 

morimos 

moris 

mueren 

mona 

morias 

moria 

moriamos 

moriais 

morian 

mori 

moriste 

murio 

morimos 

moristeis 

murieron 

Mostrar,  1. 

to  show. 

See 
Acordar. 

Mover,  2. 

to  move. 

moviendo 

movido 

muevo 

mueves 

mueve 

raoveraos 

moveis 

mueven 

movia 

movias 

movia 

moviamos 

moviais 

movian 

movi 

moviste 

movio 

movimos 

movisteis 

movieron 

Negar,  1. 

to  deny. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Nevar,  1. 

to  snow. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR  OK  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


355 


Future. 

IMPEKATIVE. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

termination 
1.               2.             3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

morire 

moriras 

morira 

moriremos 

morireis 

moriran 

muera 

m.uere 

muera 

muramos 

morid 

mueran 

muera 

mueras 

muera 

muramos 

murais 

mueran 

nmr-           mor-           mur- 
-iera           -iria            -iese 
-ieras          -irias           -ieses 
-iera           -iria             -iese 
-ieramos     -iriamos      -iesemos 
-ierais         -iriais          -ieseis 
-ieran         -irian          -iesen 

muriere 

murieres 

muriere 

murieremos 

muriereis 

murieren 

movere 

moveras 

movera 

moveremos 

movereis 

moveran 

mueva 

mueve 

mueva 

movamos 

moved 

muevan 

mueva 

muevas 

mueva 

movamos 

movais 

muevan 

mov-iera          -eria          -iese 
mov-ieras         -erias        -ieses 
mov-iera          -eria          -iese 
mov-ieramos    -eriamos    -iesemos 
niov-ierais        -eriais       -ieseis 
mov-ieran        -erian        -iesen 

moviere 

movieres 

moviere 

movie  remos 

moviereis 

movieren 

356 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF  THE  PKINCIPAL 


H 

Present 

e< 

Present 

Imperfect 

Gerund. 

OT          O 

Preterite. 

Infinitive. 

Indicative. 

Indicative. 

Oir,  3. 

oyettdo 

oido 

oigo 

oia 

Ol' 

to  hear. 

oyes 

oias 

oiste 

oye 

oia 

oyo 

oiinos 

oiamos 

omios 

ois 

oiais 

oisteis 

oven 

oian 

oye ion 

Oler,  2. 

oliendo 

olido 

huelo 

olia 

oil 

to  smell. 

hueles 

olias 

oliste 

huele 

olia 

olio 

olemos 

oliaraos 

olimos 

oleis 

oliais 

olisteis 

liuelen 

oliau 

olieron 

Pedir,  3. 

pidiendo 

pedido 

pido 

pedia 

pedi 

to  ask  for. 

pides 

pedias 

pediste 

pide 

pedia 

pi^o 

pedimos 

pediamos 

pedimos 

pedis 

pediais 

pedisteis 

piden 

pedian 

pidieron 

Pensar,  1. 

See 

to  think. 

Acrecentar. 

Perder,  2. 

See 

to  lose. 

Atender. 

Pervertir,  3. 

See 

to  pervert. 

Asentir. 

Placer,!  2. 

me  places 

me  placia2 

me  plugo  2 

imp.,  to  please. 

te  place 

te  placia 

te  pi  ago 

le  place 

le  placia 

le  plugo 

nos  place 

nos  placia 

nos  plugo 

OS  place 

OS  placia 

OS  plugo 

les  place 

les  placia 

les  plugo 

Plegar,  1. 

See 

to  plait  or  fold. 

Acrecentar. 

Poblar,  1. 

See 

to  people. 

Acordar. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


357 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 

Imperfect  Subju 

nctive. 

Future 

Subjunctive 

Subjunctive. 

1. 

TERMINATION 

2.             3. 

oire 

oiga 

oiga 

oyera 

oiria 

oyese 

oyere 

oiras 

oye 

oigas 

oyeras 

oinas 

oyeses 

oyeres 

oira 

oiga 

oiga 

oyera 

oiria 

oyese 

oyere 

oireraos 

oiganios 

oigamos 

oyerainos 

oinamos 

oyesemos 

oyerenios 

oireis 

oid 

oigais 

oyerais 

oiriais 

oyeseis 

oyereis 

oiian 

oigan 

oigan 

oyeran 

oinan 

oyesen 

oyeren 

olere 

huela 

huela 

oliera 

oleria 

olicse 

oliere 

olei-as 

huele 

huelas 

olieras 

olerias 

olieses 

olieres 

olera 

liuela 

huela 

oliera 

oleria 

oliese 

oliere 

olere  mos 

olanios 

olamos 

olieramos 

oleriamos 

oliesemos 

olierenios 

olereis 

oled 

olais 

olierais 

oleria  is 

olieseis 

oliereis 

oler^n 

liuelan 

huelan 

olieran 

olerian 

olieseu 

olieren 

pedire 

pida 

pida 

pidiera 

pediria 

pidiese 

pidiere 

pediras 

pide 

pidas 

pidieras 

pedirias 

pidieses 

pidieres 

pediia 

pida 

pida 

pidiera 

pediria 

pidiese 

pidiere 

pediremos 

pidamos 

pidamos 

pidieramos  pediriamos 

pidiesemos 

pidieremos 

pedireis 

pedid 

pidais 

pidierais 

pediriais 

pidieseis 

pidiereis 

pediran 

pidan 

pidan 

pidieran 

pediriau 

pidiesen 

pidieren 

plejrue  or 
pluga  3 

plegue 

plugiera 

pluguiese 

pluguiere 

1  This  verb  mnv  also  be 

used  as  a  r 

egular  verb  in  the  future  of  the 

Indicative:  yo 

plncere^  tn  placerds,  etc. 

2  In  the  plural,  me  placet 

3  Martinez  de  la  Rosa  us 

,  etc.,  me  plac 
es  also  plazga 

'an,  etc.,  me  phignieron,  etc. 
and  plazca. 

358 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF   THE   PKINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

< 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Poder,  2. 

to  be  able. 

pudiendo 

podido 

puedo 

puedes 

puede 

poderaos 

podeis 

pueden 

podia 

podias 

podia 

podiamos 

podiais 

podian 

pude 

pudiste 

pudo 

pudimos 

pudisteis 

pudieron 

Podrir,  3. 

to  rot. 

pudriendo 

podrido 

pudro 

pudres 

pudre 

podrinios 

podris 

pudren 

podria 

podrias 

podria 

poJriamos 

podriais 

podrian 

podri 

podriste 

pudrio 

podrinios 

podristeis 

pudrieron 

Poner,  2. 

to  put. 

poniendo 

puesto 

pongo 

pones 

pone 

ponemos 

poneis 

ponen 

ponia 

ponias 

ponia 

poniamos 

poniais 

ponian 

puse 

pusiste 

pusQ 

pusimos 

pusisteis 

pusieron 

Preferir,  3. 

lo  prefer. 

See 
Asentir. 

Prescribir,  3. 

to  prescribe. 

prescrito 
irr.  part. 

Regular  in  all 
the     other 
tenses. 

Probar,  1. 

to  try. 

See 
Acordar. 

Producir,  3. 

to  produce. 

See 
Condncir. 

Proferir,  3. 

to  vr offer. 

See 
Asentir. 

Proscribir,  3. 

to  proscribe. 

proscrito 
irr.  part. 

Regular  in  all 
the     other 
tenses. 

Quebrar,  1. 

to  break. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR   OK  DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


359 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 
1.                       2.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

podre 

podi-as 

podra 

podremos 

podreis 

podran 

pueda 

puedas 

pueda 

podamos 

podais 

puedan 

pud-            pod-           pud- 
-iera            -ria            -iese 
-ieras          -rias           -ieses 
-iera            -ria             -iese 
-ierainos      -riamos      -iesemos 
-ierais          -riais          -ieseis 
-ieran          -rian          -iesen 

pudiere 

pudieres 

pudiere 

pudieremos 

pudiereis 

pudieren 

podrire 
podnrds 
pod  lira 
podrirenios 
podrire  is 
podriran 

pudra 

pudre 

pudra 

pudramos 

podrid 

pudran 

pudra 

pudras 

pudra 

pudramos 

pudrais 

pudran 

pud-           pod-           pud- 
-riera         -riria          -riese 
-rieras        -ririas       -rieses 
-riera         -riria         -riese 
-rieramos  -ririamos   -riesemos 
-rierais       -ririais       -rieseis 
-rieran       -ririan        -riesen 

pudriere 

pudrieres 

pudriere 

pudrieremos 

pudriereis 

pudrieren 

pondre 

pondras 

pondra 

pondremos 

pondreis 

pondran 

ponga 

pon 

ponga 

pongamos 

poned 

pongan 

ponga 

pongas 

ponga 

pongamos 

pongais 

pongan 

pus-            pon-            pus- 
-iera           -dria           -iese 
-ieras          -drias          -ieses 
-iei-a           -dria           -iese 
-ieramos     -driamos     -iesemos 
-ierais         -driais         -ieseis 
-ieran         -drian         -iesen 

pusiere 

pusieres 

pusiere 

pusieremos 

pusiereis 

pusieren 

360 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 


Present 
Inyinitive. 

Gerund. 

Present 
Indicative. 

iMPHRrECT 

Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Querer,  2. 

to  will. 

queriendo 

querido 

quiero 
quieres 

queria 
qu  arias 

quise 
quisiste 

quiere 

queria 

qu'so 

querenios 
quereis 

quenamos 
queriais 

quisiraos 
quisisteis 

quiereu 

querian 

quisieron 

Raer,  2. 

See 

to  scrape. 

Caer. 

Recomendar,  1. 

to  recommend. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Recordar,  1. 

See 

to  re  mini. 

Acordar. 

Rdcostar,  1. 

See 

to  recline. 

Acordar. 

Raducir,  3. 

See 

to  reduce. 

Conducir. 

Referir,  3. 

See 

to  refer. 

Asentir. 

Regar,  1. 

to  water. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Regir,  3. 

to  rule. 

See 
Pedir. 

Rsgoldar,  1. 

to  belch. 

See 
Acordar. 

Reir,  3. 

to  laugh. 

riendo  or 
riyendo 

reido 

rio 
ries 

reia 
reias 

rei 
reiste 

rie 

reia 

rio 

reimos 

reiamos 

reimos 

reis 

reiais 

reisteis 

rien 

reian 

rieron 

Remendar,  1. 

See 

to  mend. 

Acrecentar. 

Rendir,  3. 

to  surrender. 

See 
Pedir. 

Renovar,  1. 

See 

to  renew. 

Acordar. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


361 


Flture. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

termination 
1.               2.             3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

querre  • 

querras 

querra 

querremos 

querreis 

queriau 

quiera 

quieras 

quiera 

queramos 

querais 

quieran 

quis-            quer-         quis- 
-iera             -ria            -iese 
-ieras           -rias           -ieses 
-iera            -ria            -iese 
-ieramos      -riaraos      -iesemos 
-ierais          -riais          -ieseis 
-ieran           -rian          -iesen 

quisiere 

quisieres 

quisiere 

quisieremos 

quisiereis 

quisieren 

reire 

reiras 

reira 

reiremos 

reireis 

reiran 

ria 

rie 

ria 

riamos 

reid 

rian 

ria 

rias 

ria 

riamos 

riais 

rian 

riera            reiria            riese 
rieras           reirias           rieses 
riera            reiria            riese 
rieramos      reiriaraos      rieseraos 
rierais          reiriais          rieseis 
rieran          reirian          riesen 

riere 

rieres 

riere 

rieremos 

riereis 

rieren 

362 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF  THE   PKINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

i 

CO          O 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Renir,  3. 

to  wrangle. 

See 
Pedlr. 

Bspetir,  3. 

to  repeat. 

See 
Pedir. 

Bequebrar,  1. 

to  court. 

See 
Acrecentax. 

Bequerir,  3. 

to  notify. 

See 
Asentir. 

— "' 

Bescontrar,  1. 

to  compensate. 

See 
Acordar. 

Besollar,  1. 

to  respire. 

See 
Acordar. 

Beventar,  1. 

to  burst. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Bevolcar,  1. 

to  wallow. 

See 
Acordar. 

Bodar,  1. 

to  roll. 

See 
Acordar. 

Boer,  2. 

to  gnaw. 

See 
Caer. 

Bogar,  1. 

to  entreat. 

See 
Acordar. 

Saber,  2. 

to  know. 

sabieudo 

sabido 

se 

sabes 

sabe 

sabemos 

sabeis 

saben 

sabia 

sabias 

sabia 

sabiamos 

sabiais 

sabian 

supe 

supiste 

supo 

supimos 

supisteis 

supieron 

SaUr,  3. 

to  grant. 

saliendo 

salido 

salgo 

sales 

sale 

salimos 

sails 

salen 

salia 

salias 

salia 

saliamos 

saliais 

salian 

sail 
saliste 
salio 
V  salimos 
salisteis 
salieron 

Satisfacer,  2. 

to  satisfy. 

See 
Hacer. 

But   cliang:- 
ing  the  h 
to/. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE  VERBS.. 


363 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

iMPERrECT  Subjunctive. 

TERMINATION 
1.                       2.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

sabre 

sabras 

sabra 

sabremos 

sabreis 

sabran 

HIIII 

o 

sepa 

sepas 

sepa 

sepamos 

sepais 

sepan 

supiera        sabria       supiese 
supieras       sabrias      supieses 
supiera        sabria       supiese 
supieramos  sabriamos  supiesemos 
supierais     sabriais     supieseis 
supieran      sabrian     supiesen 

supiere 

supieres 

supiere 

supiereraos 

supiereis 

supieren 

saldre 

saldras 

saldra 

saklremos 

saldr^is 

saldran 

saiga 

sal 

saiga 

salgamos 

salid 

salgan 

saiga 

saigas 

saiga 

salgamos 

salgais 

salgan 

saliera        saldria         saliese 
salieras       saldrias       salieses 
saliera        saldria         saliese 
salieramos  saldriamos  saliesemos 
salierais      saldriais      salieseis 
salieran       saldrian      saliesen 

saliere 

salieres 

saliere 

salieremos 

saliereis 

salieren 

satisface   or 
satisfaz  (2d 
pers.  sing.). 

364 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


Present 

iNriNITIVE. 

Gekund. 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Segar,  1. 

to  reap. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Seguir,  3. 

to  follow . 

See 
Pedir. 

Sembrar,  1. 

to  sow. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Sentar,  1. 

to  become. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Sentir,  3. 

to  feel. 

See 
Asentir. 

Ser,  2. 

to  be. 
(See  Auxiliary  Verbs, 
p.  136.) 

Servir,  3. 

to  serve. 

See 
Pedir. 

Serrar,  1. 

to  saw. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Soldar,  1. 

to  solder. 

See 
Acordar. 

Soler,  2. 

to  be  accustomed. 

Solver,  2. 

to  solve. 

See 
Mover. 

suelto 
irr.  part. 

Soltar,  1. 

to  loosen. 

See 
Acordar. 

suelto 
irr.  part. 

Sonar,  1. 

to  sound. 

See 
Acordar. 

Sonar,  1. 

to  dream. 

See 
Acordar. 

Sosegar,  1. 

to  appease. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Soterrar,  1. 

to  bury. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Sugerir,  3. 

to  suggest. 

See 
Asentir. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


365 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

termination 
1.               2.             3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

366 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE   OF   THE   PRINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

i 

I  i 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

Temblar,  1. 

to  tremble. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Tender,  2. 

to  expand. 

See 
Atender. 

Tener,  2. 

to  have. 
(See  Auxiliary  Verbs, 
p.  139.) 

Tenir,  3. 

to  dye. 

See 
Pedir. 

Tentar,  1. 

to  touch. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Torcer,  2. 

to  twist. 

Tostar,  1. 

to  toast. 

See 
Cocer. 

See 
Acordar, 

Traducir,  3. 

to  translate. 

See 
Conducir. 

Traer»  2. 

to  bring. 

trayeiido 

«(  ti-l^ido 

traigo 

traes 

trae 

traemos 

traeis 

traen 

traia 

traias 

traia 

traiamos 

traiais 

traian 

traje 

ti-ajiste 

trajo 

trajimos 

trajisteis 

trajeron 

Trascender,  2. 

to  transcend. 

See 
Atender. 

Trascordarse,  1. 

to  forget. 

See 
Acordar. 

Trasegar,  1. 

to  overact. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

Trbnar,  1. 

to  thunder. 

See 
Acordar. 

Tropezar,  1. 

to  stumble. 

See 
Acrecentar. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE   VERBS. 


367 


Future. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive, 
termination 

1.      •                3.                   3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

# 

traere 

traeras 

traera 

traeremos 

traereis 

traeiaii 

traiga 

trae 

traiga 

traigamos 

traed 

traigan 

traiga 

traigas 

traiga 

traigamos 

tragais 

traigan 

trajera        traeria        trajese 
trajeras      traerias       trajeses 
trajera        traeria        trajese 
trajeramos  traeriamos  trajesenios 
trajerais     traeriais      trajeseis 
trajeran      traerian      trajesen 

trajere 

trajeres 

trajere 

trajeremos 

trajereis 

trajeren 

" 

368 


ALPHABETICAL  TABLE  OF  THE  PKINCIPAL 


Present 
Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

i 

Present 
Indicative. 

Imperfect 
Indicative. 

Preterite. 

& 

Valer,  2. 

valiendo 

valido 

valgo 

valia 

vail 

to  be  worth. 

vales 

V  alias 

valiste 

vale 

valia 

valio 

valemos 

valiamos 

valismos 

valeis 

valiais 

valisteis 

vaien 

valian 

valieron 

Venir,  3. 

to  come. 

viniendo 

venido 

vengo 

venia 

vine 

vienes 

venias 

viniste 

viene 

venia 

vino 

venimos 

veniamos 

venimos 

venis 

veniais 

venisteis 

vienen 

venian 

vinieiffjh 

Ver,  2. 

vieudo 

visto 

veo 

veia 

vi 

to  see. 

ves 

veias 

viste 

ve 

veia 

vio 

vemos 

veiamos 

vimos 

% 

veis 

veiais 

visteis 

ven 

veian 

vieron 

Verter,  2. 

See 

to  spill. 

Atender. 

Vestir,  3. 

See 

to  dress. 

Pedir. 

Volcar,  1. 

See 

to  overset. 

Acordar. 

Volar,  1. 

See 

to  fly. 

Acordar. 

Volver,  2. 

to  return. 

Regular  in  all 
the     other 
tenses. 

vuelto 

Yacer,  2. 

/o  /i>  down. 

(See  Defective  Verbs, 
p.  319.) 

Zaherir,  3. 

to  censure. 

See 
Asentir. 

IRREGULAR   OR   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


369 


FU'IURE. 

Imperative. 

Present 
Subjunctive 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

termination 
1.               2.             3. 

Future 
Subjunctive. 

valdre    ( 

valga 

valga 

\aliera 

valdria 

valiese 

valiere 

valdvas 

vale 

valgas 

valieras 

valdiias 

vali.s3s 

valieres 

valdra 

valga 

valga 

valiera 

valdria 

valiese 

valiere 

valdremos 

valgamos 

valgamos 

valieramos  valdriamos  valiesemos 

valieremos 

valdreis 

valid 

valgais 

valierais 

valdriais 

valieseis 

valiereis 

valdran 

valgan 

valgan 

valieran 

valdrian 

valiesen 

valieren 

vin- 

ven- 

vin- 

vendre 

venga 

venga 

-lera 

-dria 

-iese 

viniere 

vendras 

ven 

vengas 

-leras 

-drias 

-ieses 

vinieres 

vendra 

venga 

venga 

-iera 

-dria 

-iese 

viniere 

vendienios 

venganios 

vengaiuos 

-ieramos     -driamos 

-iesemos 

vinieremos 

veudreis 

venid 

vengais 

-ierais 

-driais 

-ieseis 

viniereis 

vendran 

vengan 

vengan 

-ieran 

-drian 

-iesen 

vinieren 

vere 

vea 

vea 

viera 

veria  ' 

viese 

viere 

veras 

ve 

veas 

viei'as 

verias 

V ieses 

..vieres 

vera 

vea 

vea 

viera 

vena 

viese 

viere 

veremos 

veamos 

veamos 

vieramos 

verianios 

viesemos 

vieremos 

vereis 

ved 

veais 

vierais 

vermis 

vieseis 

viereis 

veran 

vean 

vean 

vieran 

verian 

viesen 

vieren 

. 



24 


FORMACION  DE  LA  LENGUA  CASTEL- 
LANA. 

La  lengua  castellana  consta  de 
palabras  fenicias,  griegas,  goticas, 
arabes,  y  de  otras  lenguas  de  las  que 
por  dominacion  o  por  comercio  habi- 
taroii  o  frecueiitaron  estas  partes. 
Pero  principalmente  abunda  de  pala- 
bras latinas  eateras  6  adulteradas. 


Los  Romanos  estuvieron  en  Espana 
600  anos  a  lo  menos,  aunque  no  se 
cuenten,  si  no  desde  el  de  216  antes  de 
Cristo  en  que  vinieron  la  primera  vez 
con  ejercito,  hasta  el  416  despues  de 
Cristo  en  que  fue  la  entrada  de  los 
Godos ;  y  si  esta  cuenta  se  hace  hasta 
el  ano  623  de  Cristo,  en  que  los  Ro- 
manos acabaron  de  perder  lo  que 
tenian  en  Espana,  saldra  que  estu- 
vieron mas  de  800  afios. 

En  este  tiempo  introdujeron  aqui 
su  lengua  vulgar,  que  era  la  latina, 
como  lo  hicieron  en  todas  las  demas 
provincias  que  conquistaron. 

Con  la  decadencia  del  imperio  ro- 
mano  y  venida  de  los  Godos  se  fue 
adulterando  la  lengua  latina  6  romana 
porque  como  los  vencidos  necesitaban 
acomodarse  a  la  lengua  de  los  ven- 
cedores,  y  estos  deseaban  y  procuraban 
aprender  la  de  los  vencidos,  con- 
tribuyeron  unos  y  otros  a  estragar  la 
lengua  latina. 

Los  Godos  hallaron  dificultad  en  la 
declinacion  de  los  nombres  latinos,  y 


FORMATION  OF  THE  SPANISH  LAN- 
GUAGE. 

The  Castilian  (Spanish)  language 
is  composed  of  words  derived  from 
the  Phoenician,  Greek,  Gothic,  and 
Arabic,  and  also  from  the  languages 
of  other  nations  which  inhabited  or 
visited  Spain,  intent  on  conquest  or 
commerce.  It  abounds  principally, 
however,  in  Latin  words,  either  pure 
or  adulterated. 

The  Romans  occupied  Spain  for  at 
least  600  years,  if  we  date  their 
occupation  from  the  year  216  b.  c, 
when  their  first  army  appeared  there, 
until  416  A.  D.,  when  the  Goths  in- 
vaded the  country.  But  if  we  ex- 
tend our  calculation  to  the  year  623 
A.  D.,  when  the  Romans  finally  lost 
what  they  still  possessed  in  Spain,  the 
time  of  their  occupation  exceeds  800 
years. 

They  introduced  their  language  in 
the  country,  namely,  the  Latin  lan- 
guage, as  they  did  in  aU  the  other 
provinces  which  they  conquered. 

The  Latin  or  Roman  language  be- 
came adulterated  at  the  fall  of  the 
Roman  empire  and  at  the  time  of  the 
invasion  of  the  Goths,  as  the  con- 
quered nation  had  to  adapt  itself  to 
the  language  of  the  conquerors,  while 
the  latter  desired  and  endeavored  to 
learn  the  language  of  the  conquered. 
These  reasons  contributed  to  the  al- 
teration of  the  Latin  language. 

The  Goths  found  difficulty  in  the 
declension  of  the   Latin  nouns,  and 


FORMATION   OF  THE   SPANISH  LANGUAGE. 


371 


la  dejarou  enteramente  supliendo  los 
casos  con  preposiciones.  En  los  ver- 
bos  siguieron  en  parte  las  coujuga- 
ciones  latinas,  pero  dejaron  del  todo 
la  voz  pasiva,  y  usaron  para  suplirla, 
de  los  participios  pasivos  con  el  verbo 
sustantivo  se)\ 

Esta  lengua  latina,  asi  adulterada, 
se  empezo  a  Uamar  romance  por  su 
derivacion  de  la  romana  6  latina,  para 
distinguir  la  de  la  gotica. 

Con  la  irrupcion  de  los  Arabes  el 
alio  714  padecio  tambien  alteracion  el 
romance ;  pero  como  los  Espaiioles 
empezaron  desde  luego  a  sacudir  el 
nuevo  yugo,  a  pro2)orcion  de  las  ven- 
tajas  que  iban  consiguiendo,  iba  tam- 
bien la  lengua  cobrando  fuerza  y  cul- 
tura. 

El  rey  Don  Alonso  el  Sabio  mando 
que  cesase  el  uso  de  escribir  en  latin 
los  privilegios,  donaciones  reales  y 
escrituras  publicas.  Entre  varias 
obras  que  compuso,  o  hizo  componer 
en  romance,  merece  singular  aprecio 
y  elogio  la  de  las  Leyes  de  las  Parti- 
das,  en  la  cual  la  lengua  ostento  toda 
la  riqueza  y  majestad  que  habia  adqui- 
rido  hasta  entonces,  y  en  que  Uevo 
grandes  ventajas,  no  solo  a  otras  obras 
antei-iores  y  conteraporaneas,  sino  aun 
a  muchas  posteriores. 

Siguieron  su  ejemplo  D.  Juan 
Manuel,  hijo  del  infante  D.  Manuel, 
y  el  rey  D.  Alonso  el  XI.  El  primero 
compuso  el  libro  del  Conde  Lucanor, 
el  segundo  el  de  monteAa,  ambas  dig- 
namente  estimados. 

Escribieronse  tambien  las  Cronicas 


abandoned  it,  supplying  the  cases 
with  prepositions.  They  partly  fol- 
lowed the  Latin  conjugations  of  the 
verbs,  but  entirely  rejected  the  pas- 
sive voice,  which  they  replaced  by 
passive  participles  accompanied  by  the 
substantive  verb  ser. 

The  Latin  language,  thus  adulter- 
ated, began  then  to  be  called  the  Ro- 
mance, from  its  derivation  from  the 
Roman,  and  in  order  to  distinguish  it 
from  the  Gothic. 

The  Romance  underwent  some  al- 
teration after  the  irruption  of  the 
Arabs  in  the  year  714,  but  as  the 
Spaniards  soon  began  to  shake  off  the 
new  yoke,  their  language  acquired 
strength  and  culture,  the  latter  keep- 
ing pace  with  the  advantages  obtained 
in  warfare. 

King  Don  Alonzo  the  Wise  or- 
dered that  the  Latin  language 
should  not  be  used  any  longer  for 
charters,  royal  grants,  and  public 
deeds.  Among  different  works  which 
he  composed  himself  or  superintended 
in  the  Romance  language,  special 
mention  and  praise  is  due  to  the 
Laws  of  Castile,  in  which  the  rich- 
ness and  majesty  which  the  language 
had  acquired  are  shown  to  greater 
advantage  than  in  any  previous  or 
contemporaneous,  or  even  in  many 
subsequent  works. 

D.  Juan  Manuel,  son  of  the  infante 
D.  Manuel,  and  king  D.  Alonzo  XI. 
followed  his  example.  The  former 
wrote  a  work  called  Count  Lucanor^ 
and  the  latter  a  treatise  on  Hunting ; 
both  works  are  greatly  esteemed. 

At  that  time  were  also  written  the 


372 


FORMATION   OF   THE   SPANISH   LANGUAGE. 


del  Santo  Ret/  Don  Fernando,  de 
Hon  Alonso  el  Sdbio,  de  Don  Sancho 
el  IV.,  de  Don  Fernando  el  IF.,  y  de 
Don  Alonso  el  XI. 

Pedro  Lopez  de  Ayala,  ya  con  estilo 
mas  adornado,  escribio  las  Cronlcas 
del  rey  Don  Pedro,  de  Don  Enrique 
II.,  y  de  Don  Juan  el  I.  Alvar 
Garcia  de  Santa  Maria,  y  Feruan 
Perez  de  Guzman,  compusieron  la  de 
Don  Juan  el  II.  Juan  de  Mena,  la 
obra  de  las  Tresctentas,  y  la  Corona- 
cion.  El  BachiUer  Fernan  Gomez  de 
Ciudad  Real,  el  Centon  epistolario, 
que  contiene  unas  admirables  cartas 
sobre  los  principales  sucesos  del  reina- 
do  de  D.  Juan  el  II.  D.  Alonso 
Tostado,  Obispo  de  Avila,  publico 
varias  obras  en  castellano  ;  Hernando 
del  Pulgar,  su  celebre  Cronlca  de  los 
reyes  catolicos,  y  algo  mas  adelante, 
el  doctor  Francisco  de  Villalobos,  en 
sus  Problemas,  y  otros  tratados  que 
compuso  en  romance,  dio  a  conocer 
la  gracia  y  primor  de  que  la  lengua 
castellana  es  capaz. 


La  publication  de  estas  y  otras 
obras  semejantes,  y  la  particular  aten- 
cion  con  que  se  dedicaron  a  cultivar 
la  lengua  castellana  muchos  escritores 
insignes  que  ban  florecido  desde  el 
rein  ado  de  los  Reyes  Catolicos,  la 
fueron  puliendo  y  perfeccionando, 
hasta  ponerla  en  el  estado  en  que 
boy  se  balla. 


Chronicles  of  the  Holy  King  D.  Fer- 
nando, of  D.  Alonzo  the  Wise,  of  i). 
Sancho  IV.,  of  D.  Fernando  IV.,  and 
of  D.  Alotizo  XL 

Pedro  Lopez  de  Ayala,  in  a  more 
ornate  style  wrote  the  Chronicles  of 
king  D.  Pedro,  of  D.  Enrique  II., 
and  of  D.  Juan  I.  Alvar  Garcia  de 
Santa  Maria  and  Fernan  Perez  de 
Guzman  composed  the  Chronicles  of 
D.  Juan  II. ;  Juan  de  Mena,  a 
work  on  the  Three  Hundred  and 
on  The  Coronation.  Fernan  Gomez 
de  Ciudad  Real  wrote  the  Epistola 
Cento,  which  contains  admirable  let- 
ters on  the  principal  events  of  the 
reign  of  D.  Juan  II.  D.  Alonzo 
Tostado,  Bishop  of  Avila,  published 
several  works  in  the  Castilian  lan- 
guage ;  also  Hernando  del  Pul- 
gar his  celebrated  Chronicle  of  the 
Catholic  Monarchs,  and  somewhat 
later,  Dr.  Francisco  de  Villalobos,  in 
his  Problems  and  other  treatises 
which  he  composed  in  the  Romance 
language,  showed  the  grace  and  ele- 
gance of  which  the  Castilian  language 
is  susceptible. 

The  publication  of  these  and  other 
works,  and  the  special  attention  paid 
to  the  cultivation  of  the  Castilian 
language  by  many  eminent  writers 
who  have  flourished  since  the  reigns 
of  the  Catholic  Monarchs,  have  pol- 
ished and  perfected  the  language  to 
the  point  at  which  it  has  arrived  in 
our  day. 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY 


mCLUDIXG  ALL  THE  WORDS  CONTAINED  IN  THE  PRECEDING  VOCABUURIES. 


abajo,  dovm  stairs. 

abanico,  m.  fan. 

abierto,  opened. 

abogado,  m.  laimjer. 

aborrecer,  2.  to  hate. 

abrir,  3.  to  open. 

abundante,  abundant. 

a  caballo,  on  horseback. 

acabar,  1.  to  finish. 

a  casa,  to  the  house. 

acaso,  perhaps. 

accidente,  m.  accident. 

accion,  f.  action. 

aceite,  m.  oil. 

aceptable,  acceptable. 

acercarse,  1.  to  approach. 

acompailar,  1.  to  accom- 
pany. 

aconsejar,  1.  to  advise. 

acontecer,  2.  to  hapjien. 

acordarse,  1.  to  remem- 
ber. 

acostarse,  \.  to  go  to  bed. 

acostumbrado,    accus- 
tomed. 

acostumbrar,  1.  to  accus- 
tom. 

a  credit© ,  on  credit. 

acusar,  1.  to  accuse. 


I.    Spanish-English. 

adelantar,  1.  to  be  fast. 
adberir,  3.  to  adhere. 
adios,  good  bij. 
admitido,  admitted. 
afable,  affable. 
afeitar,  1.  to  shave. 
afuera,  out,  without. 
afusilar,  1.  to  shoot. 
agradable,  agreeable. 
agradecido,  thankful. 
agrio,  sour. 
agua,  f.  water. 
aguardar,  1.  to  expect,  to 

luait. 
ahora,  now. 
ahi,  there. 
aire,  ni.  air. 
alabanza,  f,  praise. 
alabar,  1.  to  praise. 
albanil,  m.  mason. 
al  contrario,  on  tlie  con 

trary. 
aldea,  f.  village. 
alegrarse,  1.  to  rejoice. 
alegre,  lively. 
alejarse,  1.  to  leave. 
Aleman,  m.  German. 
Alemania,  f.  Germany. 
algo,     something,     any 

thing,  rather. 


algodon,  m.  cotton. 

alguien,  somebody,  any- 
body. 

alguna  parte,  some- 
ivhere,  anywhere. 

algunas  veces,  some- 
times. 

alguno,  some,  any,  some 
one,  any  one,  somebody, 
anybody. 

alii,  there. 

almacen,  m.  store. 

almirante,  m.  admiral. 

almorzar,  1.  to  breakfast. 

almuerzo,  ra.  breakfast. 

alojamiento,  m.  lodging. 

a  lo  menos,  at  least. 

al  punto  que,  as  soon  as. 

alquilar,  1.  to  Jet. 

alto,  high,  tall,  loud. 

amado,  loved. 

amar,  1.  to  love. 

amargo,  bitter. 

I  ama  V.  %  do  you  love  ? 

a  menos  que,  unless. 

a  menudo,  often. 

Americano,  m.  Ameri- 
can. 

amigo,  \n.  friend. 

amistad,  f.  friendship. 


374 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


amistoso,  friendly. 

amo,  Hove, 

amo,  ra.  master. 

amor,  m.  love. 

andar,  1.  to  walk. 

animal,  m.  animal. 

anoche,  last  night. 

ansioso,  eager. 

antes  de,  before. 

anunciar,  1.  to  announce. 

anadir,  3.  to  add. 

ano,  m.  year. 

apartar,  1.  to  remove. 

apelar,  1.  to  appeal. 

apenas,  hardly^  no  soon- 
er. 

a  pi^,  on  foot. 

apoderarse,  1.  to  take 
possession. 

apostar,  1.  to  bet. 

aprender,  1.  to  learn. 

aprendido,  learned. 

aprobar,  1.  to  approve. 

aquello,  that,  that  thing. 

aqui,  here. 

aqui  tiene  V.,  here  is. 

Arabe,  m.  Arab. 

arbol,  m.  tree. 

arce,  m.  maple. 

armario,  m.  closet. 

arreglar,  1.  to  arrange. 

arrepentirse,  3.  torepent. 

arriba,  up  stairs. 

arruinar,  1.  to  ruin. 

articulo,  m.  article. 

asegnrar,  1,  to  assure. 

asi,  thus,  so,  therefore. 

asi  que,  so  that,  as  soon  as. 

asolar,  1.  to  devastate. 

asunto,  m.  matter,  busi- 
ness. 


atacar,  1.  to  attack. 

atencion,  f.  attention. 

atento,  attentive. 

atrasar,  1.  to  delay. 

atravesar,  1.  to  cross 
over. 

aun,  even,  yet. 

aunque,  although. 

ansente,  absent. 

autor,  m.  author. 

autorizar,!.  to  authorize. 

autorizacion,  f.  authori- 
zation. 

avaro,  m.  miser. 

aventura,  f.  adventure, 

ayer,  yesterday. 

ayudar,  1.  to  help. 

azucar,  m.  sugar. 

azul,  blue. 


B. 

bagatela,  f.  trifle. 
bailar,  1.  to  dance. 
baile,  m.  ball. 
bailo,  I  dance. 
bajar,  1.  to  cotne  dozen. 
bajo,  low,  under. 
banco,  m.  bank. 
banquero,  m.  banker. 
banarse,  1.  to  bathe. 
h&T&to,  cheap. 
barco,  m.  vessel. 
bastante,  enough. 
baston,  m.  walking-stick, 

cane. 
bastonazo,  ni.  blow  (with 

a  stick). 
batalla,  f.  battle. 
baul,  m.  trunk. 


bebo,  I  drink. 

bendecir,  3.  to  bless. 

beneficio,  m.  benefit. 

benefice,  benevolent. 

biblioteca,  f.  library. 

bien,  good,  well. 

billar,  m.  billiards. 

bianco,  white. 

boca,  f.  mouth. 

bocoy,  m.  hogshead. 

bodega,  f.  cellar. 

boUo,  ni.  cake. 

bondad,  f.  kindness. 

bonito,  pretty. 

bordado,  trimmed. 

borracho,  intoxicated. 

bosque,  ni.  wood. 

beta,  f.  boot. 

botella,  f.  bottle. 

boticario,  m.  druggist. 

bo  ton,  m.  button. 

buenas  nocbes,   good 
night. 

bueno,  good,  well. 

buenos  dias,  good  morn- 
ing, good  day. 

buey,  m.  ox. 

bnque,  m.  ship,  vessel. 

burlarse,  1.  to  laugh  at. 

buscar,  1.  to  look  for. 


caballeria,  f.  cavalry. 
caballeriza,  f.  stable. 
caballero,  m.  gentleynan. 
caballo,  rn.  horse. 
cada,  each. 
cadena,  f.  chain. 
caer,  2.  to  fall. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


375 


caerse,  2.  to  fall, 
cafe,  ni.  coffee. 
caja,  f.  safe,  box. 
cajon,  m.  drawer. 
calentar,  1.  to  warm. 
caliente,  war^m. 
callado,  silent. 
calle,  f.  street. 
callejuela,  f.  Ia7ie» 
cama,  f.  bed. 
cambiar,  1.  to  exchange. 
camino,  m.  road. 
camisa,  f.  shirt. 
campo,  m.  country. 
cancion,  f.  song. 
cans  ado,  tired. 
canta,  sings. 
cantar,  1.  to  sing, 
cantatriz,  f.  singer. 
canto,  m.  singing. 
caua,  f.  cane. 
caoba,  f.  mahogany. 
capital,  f.  capital. 
cap! tan,  m.  captain. 
capitulo,  m.  chapter. 
cara,  f.  face. 
carbon,  m.  coal. 
carcel,  f.  prison. 
caridard,  f.  charity. 
Carlos,  Charles. 
came,  f.  m^at. 
came  (f. )  de  vaca,  f.  beef. 
camicero,  in.  butcher. 
carpintero,  m.  carpenter. 
cartero,  m.  j^ostman. 
caro,  dear. 
Carolina,  Caroline, 
carreta,  f.  cart. 
carta,  f.  letter. 
casa,  f.  house. 
casaca,  f.  coat. 


casar,  1.  to  Tnarry. 
casarse,  1.  to  marry. 
castigar,  1.  to  punish. 
causa,  f.  cause,  case. 
oazador,  m.  hunter. 
celebre,  celebrated. 
cena,  f.  supper. 
censurar,  1.  to  censure. 
centavo,  m.  cent. 
cerca,  near. 
cerca  de,  nearly. 
cereza,  f.  cherry. 
cerrado,  closed,  shut. 
cerrar,  1.  to  shut. 
cerveza,  f.  beer. 
Cesar,  Ccesar, 
ciego,  blind. 
cielo,  m.  heaven, 
ciencia,  science, 
cierto,  certain. 
ciudad,  f.  city, 
claro,  clear, 
clase,  f.  class. 
clavel,  m.  pink. 
clima,  m.  climate, 
cocina,  f.  kitchen. 
cocinera,  f.  cook. 
cocinero,  m.  cook. 
coche,  m.  coach. 
codicioso,  greedy. 
cojear,  1.  to  limp,  to  bal- 
ance. 
colegio,  m.  college, 
odlera,  m.  cholera, 
colmar,  1.  to  overwhelm. 
colocacion,  f.  situation. 
Colon,  Columbus. 
Colorado,  red. 
comedia,  f.  comedy. 
oomedido,  polite. 
comedoT,m,  dining-room. 


comemos,  we  dine. 

i  come  V.  ?  do  you  dine  ? 

comer,  2.  to  dine,  to  eat, 

comerciante,    m.    mer- 
chant. 

comido,  eaten. 

comida,  f.  eating,  dinner, 

como,  about,  how. 

companero,  m.  compan- 
ion. 

comparecer,  2.  to  appear, 

complacer,  2,  to  please, 

componer,  2.  to  compare, 

comportamiento,  m.  be- 
havior. 

comportarse,    1.    to   be- 
have. 

comprado,  bought. 

icompra  V.  1    do  you 
buy  ? 

comprender,  2.  to  under- 
stand. 

compro,  /  buy. 

comun,  ordinary,  low, 

con,  with. 

concepto,  m.  opiiiimi, 

concierto,  m.  concert, 

conciso,  concise. 

concluir,  3.  to  conclude, 
to  finish. 

concluirse,  3.  to  end. 

conde,  m.  count. 

condenar,  1.  to  condemn. 

condesa,  f.  countess. 

condiscipulo,  m.  fellow- 
scholar. 

condncir,  3.  to  conduct, 
to  take. 

conducta,  f.  conduct. 

confesar,  1.  to  confess. 

confer  me,  conformably. 


376 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


congreso,  m.  congress. 

conjuracion,    f.    con- 
spiracy. 

conmigo,  ivith  me. 

conocer,  2.  to  know. 

i  conoce  N.'\  do  you  know 
are     you     acquainted 
with  ? 

conocido,   m.    acquaint- 
ance. 

conocido,  knoivn. 

conozco,  1  know,  I  am 
acquainted  with. 

conseguir,  3.  to  obtain. 

consejo,  m.  advice. 

consistir,  3.-  to  consist. 

consolar,  1.  to  console^  to 
comfort. 

construir,  3.  to  construct, 
to  build. 

consul tado,  consulted. 

consultar,  1.  to  consult. 

con  tal  que,  provided. 

contar,  1.  to  count. 

contener,  2.  to  contain. 

contento,  pleased^  satis- 
fied. 

contestar,  1.  to  ansiver. 

contiene,  contains. 

continuar,  1.  to  continue. 

contornos,    m.    pL    the 
suburbs. 

contrario,  contrary. 

convencer,  2.  to  convince. 

convenir,  3.  to  be  prop- 
er. 

conversar,    1.     to    con- 
verse. 

convidar,  1.  to  invite. 

copiar,  1.  to  copy. 

coronel,  m.  col&nel. 


correo,  m.  post^  mailj 
post-ofiice. 

correr,  2.  to  run. 

cortado,  cut. 

cortaplumas,  m.  pen- 
knife. 

cortar,  1.  to  cut. 

cortes,  p^olite. 

cor  to,  short. 

cosa,  f.  thing,  matter  of 
importance. 

costa,  f.  expense. 

costar,  1.  to  cost. 

cos  tumble,  f.  manner. 

creador,  m.  creator. 

credito,  m.  credit. 

creer,  2.  to  believe. 

creo,  /  believe. 

criada,  f.  servant-girl. 

criado,  m.  servant. 

crimen,  m.  crime. 

cruel,  cruel. 

cruz,  f.  cross. 

cuaderno,  m.  copy-book. 

cuadro,  m.  picture. 

cuando,  when. 

cuanto,  how  much. 

cuarto,  m.  room. 

cuatro,  foitr. 

cuenta,  f.  account. 

cuento,  m.  tale. 

cuchillo,  m.  knife. 

culpado,  guilty. 


CH. 

chaleco,  m.  vest. 
champana,     f.     cham- 

jKtgne. 
cMquito,  little. 


D. 

da,  gives. 

dado,  given. 

danza,  f.  dancing. 

dar,  1.  to  give. 

dar  (1.)  un  paseo,  to  take 

a  walk. 
de,  of 
debo,  I  owe. 
debe,  owes. 

deber,  2.  to  oive,  must. 
debil,  weak. 
decidir,  3.  to  decide. 
decir,  3.  to  telly  to  say. 
dedicar,  1.  to  devote. 
dedo,  m.  finger. 
de  este   modo,    in    this 

way. 
defender,  2.  to  defend. 
dejar,  1.  to  leave. 
delante,  before. 
demasiado,  too,  too  much, 

too  many. 
deme  V.,  give  me. 
demolido,  pulled  down. 
dentro  de,  within. 
dependiente,  m.  clerk. 
I  de  quien  ?  luhose  ? 
derecho,  right. 
de  repente,  suddenly. 
derribar,  1.  to  upset. 
derrotar,  1.  to  defeat. 
dervis,  m.  dervis. 
descansar,  1.  to  rest. 
descascarar,  1.  to  peel. 
desconfiar,  1.  to  distrust. 
descubrir,  3.  to  discover. 
desde,  since. 
desde  que,  since. 
desea,  wishes. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


377 


deseamos,  we  loish. 

desear,  1.  to  desire. 

desgracia,   f.    misfor- 
tune. 

desgraciado,    unfortu- 
nate. 

desmayarse,  1.  to  faint. 

desobedecer,  2.  to  diso 
bey. 

desobediente,   disobedi- 
ent. 

despacio,  sJowhj. 

despertarse,  1.  to  awake. 

despreciado,  despised. 

despues,    aflerwards^ 
then,  after. 

despues  de,  after. 

despues  que,  after. 

dsstruir,  3.  to  destroy/. 

desuso,  m.  desuetude. 

deuda,  f.  debt. 

de  v.,  f/ive. 

devolver,   2.   to  return, 
give  back. 

dia,  m.  day. 

dia  festive,  hoHday. 

dibujar,  1.  to  draw. 

dibujo,  m.  drawing. 

dice,  says^  teJls. 

dicha,  1".  luck. 

dicho,  said. 

dicboso,  happy. 

diente,  m.  tooth. 

diferente,  different. 

dificil,  difficult. 

dificultad,  f.  difficulty. 

diga  v.,  say,  tell. 

digno,  worthy. 

diner 0,  ni.  m<yney. 

Bios,  m.  God. 

diputado,  in.  deputy. 


dirigir,  3.  to  direct. 
discipulo,    m.  pupil, 

scholar. 
discordia,  f.  discord. 
disponer,  2.  to  dispose. 
dispuesto,  disposed. 
disputar,  1.  to  dispute. 
distinto,  distinct. 
divertir,  3.  to  amuse. 
divertirse,  3.   to  amuse 

ones  self. 
divinidad,  f.  divinity. 
docena,  f.  dozen. 
\  dolor  de  cabeza,  f.  head- 

aclie. 
donde,  where. 
dormir,  3.  to  sleep. 
dormirse,    3.    to  fall 

asleep. 
dos,  two. 
doy,  I  give. 
dudar,  1.  to  doubt. 
dueno,  m.  oioner. 
dulce,  sweet. 
durado,  lasted. 
durante,  during. 


E. 

echar  a  pique,  to  foun- 
der. 

ecbarse,  1.  to  begin. 

edad,  f.  age. 

Eduardo,  Edward. 

ejemplo,  examiple. 

ejercito,  m.  army. 

elegancia,  f.  elegance. 

eligir,  3.  to  elect. 

embajador,  m.  ambassa- 
dor. 


embarcar,  1.  to  engage. 

emperador,  ni.  emperor. 

emplear,  1.  to  employ. 

empleo,  m.  employment, 
situation. 

en,  in. 

encargar,  1.  to  charge. 

en  casa,  at  home  (at  the 
house  of). 

encender,  2.  to  light. 

encendido,  red. 

encerrar,  1.  to  lock  up. 

encontrar,  1.  to  find,' to 
'ineet. 

encontrara,  will  find. 

enfadado,  amgry. 

enfadarse,  1.  to  get  angry. 

enemigo,  m.  enemy. 

enf ermo ,  m  .patientiiAiik ) . 

enfermo,  ill,  sick. 

enganar,  1.  to  deceive. 

enorme,  enormous. 

Enrique,  Henry. 

enriquecer,  2.  to  enrich: 

en  seguida^immediately. 

enseiia,  teacJics. 

entender,  2.  to  under- 
stand. 

enterrar,  ].  to  bury. 

entrar,  1.  to  enter. 

entre,  between. 

entregar,  1.  to  hand. 

enviado,  sent. 

enviar,  1 .  to  send. 

equivocacion,  f.jmistake. 

equivocarse,  1.  to  make 
a  mistake. 

era,  u'as. 

es,  is. 

escapar,  1.  to  escape. 

esceder,  2.  to  exceed. 


378 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


esoelente,  excellent. 
Escipion,  Scipio. 
escoger,  2.  to  select. 
escribe,  writes. 
i  escribe  V.?    do  you 

'write  ? 
escribir,  3.  to  write. 
escribe,  I  wHte. 
escritura,  f.  writing. 
escrito,  ivritten. 
escritorio,  m.  office. 
escuadra,  f.  squadron. 
escuchar,  1.  to  listen  to. 
escuela,  f.  school. 
escusar,  1.  to  excuse. 
eso,  that. 
Espaiia,  f.  Sjmin. 
Espaiiol,  Spanish,  S2'>an 

iard. 
especie,  f.  species. 
especulacion,  f.  specula 

tion. 
espejo,  m.  mirror. 
esperar,  1.  to  expect,  to 

wait,  to  hope. 
esperanza,  f.  hope. 
estacion,  f.  season. 
establecer,2.  to  establish, 
estado,  m.  state,  condi 

tion. 
estar,  1.  to  be. 
estatua,  f.  statue. 
esto,  this,  this  thing. 
estrangero,  m.  stranger. 
estrella,  f.  star. 
estudiado,  studied. 
estudiamos,  we  study. 
estudiante,  m.  student. 
i  estudian  V.  V.  ?  do  you 

study  ? 
estudiar,  1.  to 


estudio,  m.  sticdy. 

estudioso,  studious. 

eterno,  eternal. 

Europa,  Europe. 

examinar,  1,  to  examine. 

excepto,  except. 

exento,  exempted. 

experiencia,  f.  experi- 
ence. 

explicar,  1.  to  explain. 

extinguidor,  m.  extin- 
guisher. 

r. 

fabricante,  m.  manufac- 
turer. 

fabricar,  1.  to  manufac- 
ture. 

facil,  ea^y. 

faltar,  1.  to  fail. 

familia,  f.  family. 

favor,  m.  favor. 

favorable,  favorable. 

favorecer,  2.  to  favor. 

fe,  f.  faUh. 

Felipe,  Philip. 

feliz,  happy. 

femenil,  effeminate. 

feo,  togly,  homely. 

Fernando,  Ferdinand. 

ferro  carril,  ni.  railroad. 

fiebre,  f.  fever. 

fiel,  faithful. 

fiesta,  f.  feast,  holy  day, 

filial,  filial. 

fin,  m.  end. 

flor,  f.  flower. 

fonda,  f.  hotel. 

formalizarse,  1.    to  get 


for  mar,  1.  to  form. 
fortaleza,  f.  fortress. 
fortuna,  f.  fortune. 
Frances,  in.  Frenchman. 
Francia,  f.  France. 
fresa,  f.  strawberry. 
fresco,  cool. 
frio,  cold. 
friolera,  f.  trifle, 
fruta,  f.  fruit. 
fuego,  m.  fire. 
fuerte,  strong, 
fuerza,  f.  strength. 
funcion,  f.  ceremmiy. 
fusil,  m.  gun. 


Galileo,  Galileo. 

gallina,  f.  fowl,  chicken. 

gana,  earns. 

ganar,  1.  to  earn. 

gas,  m.  gas. 

gasta,  spends. 

gas  tar,  1.  to  spend. 

gasto,  m.  expoise. 

gener  almente  ^generally. 

generoso,  generous. 

gente,  f.  people. 

gloriosamente,    glori- 
ously. 

gobernar,  1.  to  manage, 
to  govern. 

gobierno,m.  government. 

gota,  f.  drop. 

gracias,  thank  you. 

grande,  rn.  grandee. 

grandeza,  f.  greatness. 

Griego,  Greek. 

gritar,    1.    to  cry,    to 
scream. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


379 


grito,  m.  outcry. 
groserla,  rudeiuss. 
guante,  m.  glove. 
guardar,  1.  to  keep. 
guerra,  f.  war. 
Guillermo,  William, 
i  le  gusta  a  V.  1    do  you 

like  ? 
me  gusta,  /  like,  I  am 

fond  of. 
gusto,  m.  pleasure. 


H. 

habil,  skilful. 
habitante,m.  inhabitant. 
habituar  se  ,\.to  accustom 

one's  self. 
habla,  speaks. 
hablado,  spoken. 
hablan,  they  speak. 
i  habla  V.  1         )do  you 
i  hablan  V.  V.  ?  i  speak  ? 
hablo,  I  speak. 
hacer,  2.  to  make,  to  do. 
i  hace  V.  ?  do  you  do  ? 
hacienda,  f.  estate. 
hallado,  found. 
hallar,  1.  to  find. 
haragan,  lazy. 
hasta,  till,  until,  as  far 

as. 
hasta  que,  until. 
hay,  there  is. 
hecho,  done. 
helar,  1.  to  freeze. 
heredar,  1.  to  inherit. 
heredero,  m.  licir. 
herido,  wounded. 
hermana,  f.  sister. 


hermano,  m.  brother. 
hermoso,  handsome,  fine. 
heroe,  m.  hero. 
hierro,  m.  iron. 
hija,  f.  daughter. 
hijo,  m.  son. 
hinchado,  swollen. 
historia,  f.  history. 
hombre,  m.  man. 
honrado,  hoiust. 
hora,  f.  hour,  time. 
hormiga,  f.  ant. 
hotel,  m.  hotel. 
hoy,  to-day. 
huevo,  m.  egg. 
humanidad,f.  humanity. 
humedo,  damp. 
huracan,  m.  hurricane. 


idioma,  m.  language. 

iglesia,  f.  church. 

ignorancia,  f.  ignorance. 

ignorante,  ignorant. 

impaciente,  impatient. 

importante,  imj)ortant. 

imposible,  impossible. 

imprenta,  f.  press,  im- 
pinnt. 

incapaz,  incapable. 

incendio,  m.  conflagra- 
tion. 

indiferente,  indifferent. 

indigno,  unworthy. 

indomable,  indomitable. 

inducir,  3.  to  induce. 

industrioso,  industrious. 

infeliz,  unhappy. 

ingenio,  m.  genius. 

Inglaterra,  England. 


Ingles,  m.  Englishman. 

inmovil,  immovable. 

inocencia,  f.  innocence. 

inocente,  innocent. 

insolencia,  f.  insolence. 

ins  tan  te,  m.  instant. 

instruir,  3.  to  instruct. 

instrumento,  m.  instru- 
ment. 

inteligente,  intelligent. 

intencion,  f.  intention. 

interesante,  interesting. 

interesar,  1.  to  interest. 

interesarse,  1.  to  take 
interest. 

iniitil,  useless. 

invierno,  m.  winter. 

invitacion,  f.  invitatim. 

invocar,  1.  to  invoke. 

ir,  3.  logo. 

irse,  3.  to  go  away. 

Isabel,  Isabella. 

isla,  f.  island. 

Italia,  f.  Italy. 

J. 

jactarse,  1.  to  boast. 
jamas,  ever,  never. 
jamon,  m.  ham. 
jardin,  m.  garden. 
jardinero,  m.  gar  denier. 
joven,  young. 
joyero,  in.  jeweller. 
Juan,  John. 
jugar,  1.  to  play. 
Julio,  Julius. 
Junio,  m.  June. 
junto,  together. 
juventad,  f.  ijouth. 
juzgar,  1.  to  judge. 


380 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


L. 

labrador,  m.  fanner. 
lado,  m.  side. 
ladron,  m.  tliicf. 
lagrima,  f.  tear. 
lampara,  f.  larivg. 
largo,  long. 
Latin,  Latin. 
lavandera,   f.    washer- 
woman. 
lapiz,  m.  pencil. 
lavar,  1.  to  wash. 
leccion,  f.  lesson. 
leche,  f.  milk. 
leer,  2.  to  read. 
legua,  f.  league. 
legumbre,  f.  vegetable. 
leido,  read. 
lejos,  far. 

lengua,  f.  language. 
lena,  f.  wood. 
leon,  m.  lion. 
levantarse,  1.  to  rise. 
ley,  f.  law. 
liberal,  liberal. 
liberalidad,  f.  liberality. 
libertad,  f.  liberty. 
libra,  f.  pound. 
libro,  m.  book. 
licencia,  f.  license. 
licenciar,  1.  to  disband. 
ligero,  quick. 
limonada,  f,  lemonade. 
limpio,  clean. 
lista,  f.  list. 
lis  to,  ready. 
loco,  insane. 
lodo,  m.  mud. 
Londres,  London. 
luego  que,  as  soon  as. 


lugar,  m.  place, 
Luisa,  Louisa. 
luna,  f.  moon. 
luz,  f.  light. 


LL. 

llamar,  1.  to  call. 
llamarse,  1.  to  be  called. 
Have,  f.  key. 
llega,  arrives. 
llegar,  1.  to  arrive. 
llegado,  arrived. 
Ueno,  fall. 
llevar,  1.  to  take. 
llora,  weeps. 
llorar,  1.  to  cry,  to  weep. 
Hover,  2.  to  rain. 
lluvia,  f.  rain. 


M. 

madre,  f.  mother. 
madrina,  f.  godmother. 
maduro,  ri;;c. 
maestro,  ni.  teacher. 
magnifico,  splendid. 
malo,  bad,  ill,  unwell. 
mandar,   1.   to  send,   to 

order. 
mande  V.,  send. 
mano,  f.  hand. 
mantener,  2.  to  support. 
manzana,  f.  apple. 
manana,  f.  7norning. 
manana,  to-morrow. 
marcba,  f.  inarch. 
marchar,    1.    to  go,   to 

march. 


marcharse,  1.  to  depart. 
marido,  m.  husband. 
mariner 0,  m.  sailor. 
mas,  more. 
mascara,  f.  mask. 
matar,  1.  to  kill. 
maxima,  f.  maxim. 
la  mayor  parte,  the  most. 
media,  f.  stocking. 
medico,  m.  j)hysician. 
medio,  m.  means,  way. 
medir,  3.  to  measure. 
memoria,  f.  memory. 
menester,  necessar'y. 
mentira,  f.  falsehood. 
mercader,  m.  merchant. 
mercancias,  f.  pi.  goods. 
merecer,  2.  to  deserve. 
merito,  m.  merit. 
mes,  rn.  month. 
mesa,  f.  table. 
mi,  my. 

militar,  military. 
milla,  f.  mile. 
mina,  mine. 
minuto,  m.  minute. 
mirar,  1.  to  look  at. 
miser ia,  f.  misery. 
mismo,  same,  very,  self. 
mi  tad,  f.  half. 
modo,  m.  way. 
moles  tar,  1.  to  trouble. 
memento,  m.  moment. 
montar,  1.  to  mount. 
monte,  m.  mountain. 
monumento,  m.   monu- 
ment. 
morder,  2.  to  bite. 
morir,  3.  to  die. 
More,  m.  Moor. 
mostrar,  1.  to  show. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


381 


motivo,  m.  viotive. 
mover,    2.    to    move,   to 

turn. 
movimiento,   m.    7nove- 

ment. 
muchacha,  f.  girl. 
mucliaclio,  m.  boi/. 
muchas  gracias,  /  (or 

we)  thank  you. 
mucho,  mucha,  much. 
muchos,  muchas,  7)iany. 
mucho  tiempo,  longtime. 
muerte,  f,  death. 
muerto,  died. 
mujer,  f.  tuoman,  wife. 
mundo,  m.  ivorld. 
muiieca,  f.  doll. 
murid,  died. 
muro,  m.  wall. 
musica,  f.  music. 
may,  very. 


N. 

nacer,  2.  to  he  horn. 

nacion,  f.  nation. 

nada,  nothing,  not  any- 
thing. 

nadie,  nobody,  not  any- 
body, no  one. 

naranja,  f.  orange. 

natural,  natural. 

navegacion,   f.   naviga- 
tion. 

necesidad,  f.  necessity. 

necesita,  needs. 

i  necesita  V.  1    do  you 
nerd  ? 

necesitar,  1,  to  need. 

necesito,  I  need. 


necesario,  necessary. 
negocio,  m.  business. 
negro,  black. 
ni,  neither,  nor. 
nieve,  f.  soioiv. 
ninguno,  not  any,  none, 

no. 
nino,  m.  child. 
no,  no. 

noche,  f.  night. 
no... mas,  no... more. 
nombre,  m.  name, 
norte,  m.  north. 
nosotros,  ive,  us. 
noticia,  f.  news. 
novela,  f.  novel. 
nuevo,  new. 
nuez,  f.  nut. 
niimero,  m.  number. 
nunca,  never. 


obedecer,  2.  to  obey. 
obediente,  obedient. 
objeto,  111.  ohject. 
obligar,  1.  to  oblige,  to 

compel. 
obra,  f.  work. 
obrar,  1.  to  act. 
obrero",  in.  workman. 
obtener,  2.  to  obtain. 
ocasion,  f.  occasion. 
ociosidad,  f.  idleness. 
ocupado,  busy. 
ocupar,  1.  to  occupy. 
odiar,  ] .  to  hate. 
ofender,  2.  to  offend. 
oficial,  m.  officer. 
ofrecer,  2.  to  offer. 


oir,  3.  to  hear. 

\  ojala !  would  to  Ood  ! 

ojo,  m.  eye. 

olor,  m.-  smell. 

olvidar,  1.  to  forget. 

onza,  f.  ounce. 

opinion,  f.  opinion. 

orguUoso,  proud. 

oro,  m.  gold. 

osar,  1.  to  dare. 

oscuro,  dark. 

oso,  m.  bear. 

otra  cosa,  something  else. 

otro,  other,  anotJier. 


P. 

paciencia,  f.  patience. 
padecer,  2.  to  suffer. 
padre,  ni.  father. 
padres,  m.  pi.  parents. 
padrino,  ni.  godfather. 
pagar,  1.  to  pay. 
pagina,  f.  page. 
pais,  in.  country. 
pajaro,  ni.  bird. 
palabra,  f.  loord. 
palacio,  m.  palace. 
pan,  in.  bread. 
panadero,  m.  baker. 
paiio,  m.  cloth. 
panuelo,    m.    handker- 
chief. 
papel,  m.  paper. 
paquete,  m.  package. 
para,  for. 
parado,  standing. 
paraguas,  m.  icmbrella. 
pararse,  1.  to  stand. 
parecen,  seem. 


382 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


par  que,  m.  park. 
parte,  f.  part. 
partir,  3.  to  leave. 
pasado,  past^  last. 
pasado  mailana,  the  day 

after  to-morrow. 
pasar,  1.  to  pass. 
pasearse,    1.    to  take  a 

walk. 
paseo,  m.  walk. 
paternal,  paternal. 
patio,  m.  yard. 
patria,  f.  country. 
pavo,  m.  turkey. 
paz,  f.  ycace. 
pedazo,  m.  iiiece. 
pedir,  3.  to  ask  for. 
Pedro,  Peter. 
pegar,  l.  to  strike. 
pelea,  f.  fight. 
pelear,  1.  to  fight. 
peligroso,  dangerous. 
pelo,  m.  hair. 
penoso,  hard,  painful. 
pensar,   1.   to  think,   to 

intend. 
pequeHo,  small,  little. 
per  a,  f.  pear. 
perder,  2.  to  lose. 
perdida,  f.  loss. 
perdido,  lost. 
perdonar,  1.  to  forgive. 
periodico,  m.  newspaper. 
permitir,  3.  to  allow. 
pero,  hut. 
perro,  m.  dog. 
persona,  f.  person. 
pertenece,  belongs. 
pesar,  m.  grief. 
pescuezo,  m.  neck. 
peso,  111.  dollar. 


picaro,  m.  rogue. 

pide,  asks  for. 

pie,  1)1.  foot. 

i  piensa  V.  ?  do  you  in- 
tend ? 

pierna,  f.  leg. 

pieza,  f.  piece. 

pin  tar,  1.  to  depict. 

pintura,  f.  painting. 

pio,  pious. 

pizarra,  f.  slate. 

planta,  f.  plant. 

plata,  f.  silver. 

pleito,  m.  lawsuit. 

plomo,  in.  lead. 

poblar,  1.  to  people. 

pobre,  p)oor. 

poco,  adv.  little. 

pocos,  few. 

poder,  m.  ptowcr. 

poderoso,  poir^crful. 

podrir,  3.  to  rot. 

polio,  m.  chicken. 

Pompeyo,  Vompey. 

ponerse,  2.  to  jjut  07i. 

populacto,  m.  mob. 

por,  through,  by. 

por  cierto,  certainly. 

por  desgracia,  ^infortu- 
nately. 

porfiado,  obstinate. 

por  mas... que,  however. 

por  precision,  by  neces- 
sity. 

porque,  beca,use. 

iporqu^?  v:hy? 

por  supuesto,  of  course. 

posada,  f.  inn. 

posesion,  f.  ^possession. 

posible,  possible. 

posteridad,  'posferity. 


I  pozo,  m.  well. 

practicar,  1.  to  practise. 

precepto,  in.  precept. 

precio,  ni.  price. 

precise,  necessary. 

preferir,  3.  to  prefer. 

pregunta,  f.  question. 

preguntar,  1.  to  inquire, 
to  ask. 

preparar,  1.  to  prepare. 

prerogativa,  f.  p)reroga- 
tive. 

prescribir,3.  to  prescribe. 

presentar,  1.  to  present, 
to  introduce. 

pre  star,  1,  to  lend. 

presumido,  conceited. 

pretender,  2.  to  pretend. 

prima,  f.  cousin. 

primavera,  f.  s-pring. 

primero,  first. 

prime,  m.  cousin. 

principe,  m.  prince. 

principiante,  ni.   begin- 
ner. 

principio,  m.  principle. 

prisionero,  m.  prisoner. 

privilegio,  m.  jn'ivilcge. 

probable,  probable. 

probablemente,   proba- 
bly. 

probar,  1.  to  prove. 

procesion,  f.  procession. 

profesor,  m.  professor. 

profundo,  deep. 

prometer,  2.  to  j^romise. 

pronto,  soon,  quickly. 

pronunciar,    1.    to  pro- 
nounce. 

prepense,  inclined. 

propicio,  propitious. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


383 


propiedad,  f.  j^foperty. 

proponer,  2.  to  propose. 

provenir,  3.  to  come  from 
(to  originate),  to  re- 
sult. 

proximo,  next. 

prueba,  f.  proof. 

l  puede  V.  1  can  you  ? 

puedo,  I  can. 

publico,  public. 

pueblo,  m.  town,  vil- 
lage. 

puente,  m.  bridge. 

puerta,  f.  door. 

puerto,  m,  port. 

pues,  as,  iccll,  for. 

puesto,  put. 

pulpero,  m.  grocer. 

puialada,  f.  stab  (with*  a 
poniard). 


Q. 

que,  ivhich,  what. 
que,  icJien. 

quedarse,  1.  to  remain. 
quejarse,  1.  to  complain. 
quemar,  1.  to  burn. 
querer,  2.  to  grant. 
queso,  in.  cheese. 
quien,  ivho,  ichom. 
quiere,  icishcs. 
i  quiere  V.  ?    will  you 

have  ?  do  you  wish  ? 
quieran,  ivish. 
quioro,   /  loish,   I  icill 

have. 
quieto,  quiet. 
qui  tar  se,  1.  to  take  of. 
quitasol,  ni.  sunshade. 


B. 

raro,  rare. 

raton,  m.  moicse. 

razon,  f.  reason. 

real,  m.  shilling. 

recibido,  received. 

recibir,  3.  to  receive. 

recomendar,  1.  to  recom- 
mend. 

recompensa,    f.    recom- 
pense. 

reconooer,  2.  to  know. 

referir,  3.  to  relate. 

refresco,  m.  refreshment. 

regimiento,  m.  regiment. 

reina,  f.  queen.' 

reinar,  1.  to  reign. 

reino,  m.  kingdom. 

reir,  3.  to  laugh. 

rendirso,   3.   to  surren- 
der. ^ 

reo,  m.  culprit. 

reparar,    1.    to  coTiipen- 
scde. 

rapetir,  3.  to  repeat. 

representar,  1.  to  play. 

reprimir,  3.  to  reprress. 

residir,  3.  to  reside. 

resolver,  2.  to  resolve. 

respetar,  1.  to  respect. 

responder,  2.  to  answer. 

restablecer,  2.  to  re-es- 
tablish. 

retrato,  m.  picture. 

rey,  in.  ling. 

ricachon,  m.  a  very  rich 
man. 


rico,  rich. 
lie,  laughs. 
rienda,  f.  bridle. 


rincon,  m.  corner. 
rio,  m.  river. 
robar,  1.  to  steal. 
Romano,  m.  Roinan. 
Bomulo,  Romulus. 
ropa,  f.  clothes. 
rosa,  f.  rose. 
rubio,  fair,  blond. 
ruido,  m.  noise. 
ruina,  f.  ruiii. 
Eusia,  Russia. 
Euso,  Russian, 


S. 

sabana,  f.  slwet. 

saba,  knows. 

I  saba  V.  T  do  you  know  ? 

sabiamente,  wisely. 

sabio,  wise. 

sable,  m.  saber. 

sacar,  1.  to  draio. 

saco,  m.  bn.g. 

sagrado,  sacred. 

sale,  goes  out,  com.es  out, 

leaves. 
i  sale  V.  1  do  you  go  out  ? 
salida,  f.  exit. 
salir,  3.  to  leave,  to  go 

out. 
salir  de,  to  leave. 
sal  tar,  1.  to  jump. 
salubre,  healthy. 
sastre,  m.  tailor. 
satisfecbo,  satisfied. 
seda,  f.  silk. 
en  8egTii6La.,immed  lately. 
seguir,  3.  to  continue,  to 

follow. 
segun,  according  to. 


384 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


seguro,  sure. 

semana,  f.  iveek. 

la  semana  que  viene,7ie£c^ 

loeek. 
sembrar,  1 .  to  sow. 
sentado,  seated. 
sentar,  1,  to  become. 
sentarse,  1.  to  sit  down. 
sentencia,   f.    inaxwi, 

judgment. 
sentir,  3.  tofeel^  to  regret. 
senas,  f.  pL  direction. 
seilor,  sir,  Mr. 
seilora,  madam,  Mrs. 
ser,  to  be. 

servicio,  m.  service. 
servido,  served. 
si,  if. 
si,  yes. 

siempre,  always. 
lo  siento,  I  am  sorry  for 

it. 
sig^en,  follow. 
silla,  f.  cliair,  saddle. 
sin,  witlwut. 
sin  embargo,  however. 
singular,  singular. 
sino,  but. 
soberbio,  haughty. 
sobre,  on,  iipon,  about. 
sobretodo,  m.  overcoat. 
sociedad,  f.  society. 
socorro,  m.  assistance. 
sol,  m.  sun. 
solamente,  only. 
soler,   2.    to  be  in  the 

habit. 
solo,  alone. 

sombrerero,  m.  liatter. 
sombrero,  m.  hat. 
someter,  2.  to  subdue. 


son,  are. 

sonar,  1.  to  dream. 
sopa,  f.  soup. 
sordo,  deaf. 

sorprendido,  surprised. 
su,  his,  her. 
sublevar,  1.  to  revolt. 
sucio,  dirty. 
sueiio,  m.  dream. 
suerte,  f.  fate. 
sufocar,  1.  to  suffocate. 
suministrar,  1.  to  offer. 
suplica,  f.  entreaty. 
suplicar,  1.  to  entreat. 
suponer,  2.  to  suppose. 
supremo,  supreme. 
suspender,  2.  to  suspend. 


T. 

tal,  such  as. 
talento,  m.  talent. 
tal  vez,  perhaps. 
tambien,  too,  also. 
tampoco,    not    either, 

neither. 
tan,  so. 
tan  pronto  como,  as  soon 

as. 
tarde,  f.  afternoon. 
tarde,  late. 
Tartaria,  f.  Tartary. 
t^,  m.  tea. 
teatro,  m.  theater. 
Telemaco,  Telemachus. 
temblar,  1.  to  tremble. 
temer,  2.  to  fear. 
temor,  m.  fear. 
temprano,  early. 
tener,  2.  to  hold,  to  have. 


teologal,  theological. 

teoretico,  theoretical. 

terremoto,  earthquake. 

tia,  f.  aunt. 

tio,  m.  uncle. 

tiempo,  m.  time. 

en  tiempo  pasado,  for- 
merly. 

tie n da,  f.  shop. 

tiene,  has. 

tienen,  have. 

tierra,  f.  earth. 

tigre,  m.  tiger. 

tijeras,  f.  pi,  scissors. 

timido,  timid. 

tintero,  m.  inkstand. 

tocar,  1 .  to  play  on. 

todavia,  yet. 

t*do,  all,  everything. 

todo   el   mundo,    every- 
body. 

tomar,  1.  to  take. 

tomo,  m.  volume. 

tonto,  foolish,  silly. 

torre,  f.  tower. 

trabaja,  works. 

trabajar,  1.  to  work. 

trabajo,  m.  work. 

traducion,  f.  translation. 

traducir,  3.  to  translate. 

traer,  2.  to  bring. 

traido,  brought. 

traiga  V.,  bring. 

traje,  ni.  dress. 

trasparente,  transpar- 
ent. 

tratar,  1.  to  treat. 

tres,  three. 

trineo,  m.  sleigh. 

tripulacion,  f.  crew. 

triste,  sad. 


SPANISH-ENGLISH. 


385 


tmeno,  m.  thunder. 
turbulento,  boisterous. 


ultimo,  last. 
unos  pocos,  afeio. 
una,  f.  nail. 
urbanidad,  f.  urbanity. 
litil,  useful. 

V. 

va,  goes. 
vaca,  f.  cow. 
vacio,  empty. 
valiente,  brave. 
valer,  2.  to  be  icorth. 
valor,  m.  courage. 
vapor,  ni.  steam,  steamer. 
vara,  f.  yard. 
varios,  as,  several. 
vaso,  m.  glass  (to  drink 

in). 
i  va  V.  ?  are  you  going  ? 
ve,  sees. 

veneer,  2.  to  co7iquer. 
vende,  sells. 


vender,  2.  to  sell. 
i  vende  V.  1  do  you  sell  ? 
vendido,  sold. 
vendo,  I  sell. 
veneno,  ni.  poison. 
veo,  I  see. 
venir,  3.  to  come. 
ventajoso,  profitable. 
ventana,  f.  ivindow. 
ver,  2.  to  see. 
verdad,  f.  truth. 
verde,  green. 
verso,  m.  verse. 
vestido,  m.  dress. 
vestidos,  m.  pi.  clotlies. 
vestir,  3.  to  dress. 
vestirse,  3.  to  dress. 
i  ve  V.  ?  do  you  see  ? 
vez,  f.  time. 
viajar,  1,  to  travel. 
viaje,  m.  journey. 
victoria,  f.  victory. 
vida,  f.  life. 
vidrio,  m.  glass. 
viejo,  old. 
viene,  comes. 
viento,  m.  wind. 


vigilante,  watchful. 

vino,  m.  xvine. 

virtud,  f.  virtue. 

visitar,  1.  to  visit. 

vis  to,  seen. 

vive,  lives. 

vivir,  3.  to  live. 

volar,  1.  tofiy. 

volver,  2.  to  turn,  to  re- 
turn. 

volver  a  bacer,  2.  to  do 
again. 

voy,  /  am  going. 

vuelva  v.,  return, 

Y. 

y,  and. 
ya,  already. 
ya  no,  no  longer. 
yerba,  f.  grass. 
yo  se,  I  know. 

Z. 

zapatero,  m.  shoemaker. 
zapato,  m.  shoe. 


25 


386 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


II.   English-Spanish. 


A. 

absent,  ausente. 
about,  sohre,  como. 
abundant,  abundante. 
acceptable,  aceptabU. 
accident,  accidente,  m. 
to  accompany,  acom- 

2)cmar,  1. 
according  to,  segun, 
account,  cueiita,  f. 
to  accuse,  acusar,  1. 
to  accustom,  acostum- 

hr<i7%  1. 
accustomed,   acostum- 

brado,  1. 
to  accustom  one's  self, 

habifAtarsc,  1 . 
acquaintance,    conocido, 

in. 
are    you    acquainted 

with  1  conoce  V.  ? 
I  am  acquainted  with, 

conozco. 
to  act,  obrar,  1. 
action,  accion,  f. 
to  add,  anadir,  3. 
to  adhere,  adherir,  3. 
admiral,  almirante^  m. 
admitted,  admitido. 
adventure,  aventura,  f. 
advice,  conscjo,  m. 
to  advise,  aconsejar,  1. 
afEable,  afable. 
after,  dcsimcs^  despues  dc, 

despues  que. 
afternoon,  tarde,  f. 


afterward,  despues. 
afterwards,  despues. 
age,  edadj  f. 
agreeable,  agradable. 
air,  aire,  m. 
all,  todo. 

to  allow,  permitir,  3. 
alone,  solo, 
already,  ya. 
also,  tambicn. 
although,  aunque. 
always,  siemprc. 
ambassador,  embajador, 

m. 
American,   Ame7Hcano, 

m. 
to  amuse,  divcrtii\  3, 
to  amuse  one's  self,  di- 

vertirse,  3. 
and,  y. 

angry,  enfadado. 
animal,  anmial,  m. 
to  announce,  anunciar. 

1. 
another,  otro. 
to  answer,  cmitestar,  1. 

respond,er,  2. 
ant,  hormiga,  f. 
any,  alguno. 
anybody,   alguien,    al- 
guno. 
any  one,  alguno. 
anything,  algo. 
anywhere,  alguna parte. 
to  appeal,  apelar,  1. 
to  appear,   comparecevy 

2. 


apple,  manzana,  f. 

to  approach,    acercarsCy 

1. 
to  approve,  aprobar,  1. 
Arab,  Arabe,  m. 
are,  5071. 

to  arrange,  arreglar,  1. 
army,  ejercito,  m. 
to  arrive,  7%a?%  1. 
arrived,  llcgado. 
arrives,  Z%a. 
article,  articulo,  m. 
as,  piie5. 
as  far,  hasta. 
as  far  as,  hasta. 
to  ask,  preguntar,  1. 
to  ask  for,  7?cc??V,  3. 
asks  for,  pide. 
assistance,  socorro,  m. 
as  soon  as,    tan  pronto 

como,    luego   que,    asi 

que,  al  punto  que. 
to  assure,  asegurar,  1. 
at    (the    house    of),    en 

casa. 
at  home,  en  casa. 
to  attack,  atacar,  1. 
attention,  atcncion,  f. 
attentive,  atento. 
aunt,  tia,  f. 
author,  autor,  m. 
authorization,  autoriza- 

cion,  f. 
to  authorize,  aiUoriza.r, 

1. 
to  awake,   despertarse, 

1. 


ENGLISH- SPANISH. 


387 


B. 

bad,  malo. 

bag,  scicOj  m. 

baksr,  jianadero,  ni. 

to  balance,  pesar,  1. 

ball,  bcUky  m. 

bank,  bancoj  in. 

banker,  hanquero,  m. 

to  bathe,  haharsc,  1. 

battls,  hataUa,  f. 

to  ba,  cs^a?',  1.  ser,  2. 

bear,  0.90,  ni. 

bacanse,  porqitc. 

to  bsoome,  sentar,  1. 

b3d,  cama,  f. 

b38f,  came  (f.)  c?c  vaca,  f. 

beer,  ccrvez'i^  f. 

before,  dclantc,  antes  de. 

to  b3gin,  echarse,  1. 

beginner,  i^rincipiante, 

in. 
to  bojiave,   coinportarsc, 

2. 
behavior,  cornportamien- 

to,  m. 
to  belisve,  crecr,  2. 
I  believe,  creo. 
bslongs,  pertenece. 
benefit,  henejicio,  ni. 
benevolent,  benejico. 
to  bat,  apostaVf  1. 
between,  c?t^rc. 
billiard,  ^>i7Z«?%  ra. 
bird,  pdjaro,  m. 
to  bite,  mordcr,  2. 
bitter,  nmarrjx 
black,  ?ic7?'o. 
to  bless,  benclccir,  Z 
blind,  ciego. 
blond,  rubio. 


blow  (with  a  stick),  fe^s- 

tonazo,  111. 
blue,  a::;ziZ. 
to  boast,  jactarse^  1. 
boisterous,  turbulento. 
book,  Zt&?-o,  m. 
boot,  6oto,  f. 
to  be  born,  nacer,  2. 
bottle,  botella,  f. 
bought,  comprado. 
box,  ci?;a,  f. 
boy,  muchachoj  m. 
brave,  valiente. 
bread,  ^^a?^  m. 
breakfast,  almuerzo,  m. 
to  breakfast,  almorzar^ 

1. 
bridge,  puente^  m. 
bridle,  rienda,  f. 
to  bring,  ^r<xer,  2. 
bring,  ^nri^^i^  V. 
brother,  herm-ano^  ra. 
brought,  traido. 
to  build,  cmistruiVy  3. 
to  burn,  quemar,  1. 
to  bury,  enterrar^  1. 
business,   lugocio,    m. 

asuntOy  m. 
busy,  ociipado. 
but,  jocro,  5mo. 
butcher,  carnicero^  m. 
button,  fto^oTi,  m. 
do  you  buy?    icompra 

v.? 

I  buy,  com  pro, 
by,  ^or. 

C. 

cake,  &0ZZ0,  ra. 
to  call,  llarnavj  1. 


to  be  called,  llamarse,  1. 
can  you?  ^picedc  V.  ? 
I  can,  puedo. 
cane,  ca/7<z,  f.  hastoiiy  m. 
capital,  capital,  f. 
captain,  capitan,  m. 
Caroline,  Carolina. 
carpenter,  carpintero,m, 
cart,  carrcta,  f. 
case,  causa,  f. 
cause,  causa,  f. 
cavalry,  caballeria,  f. 
celebrated,  cilebre. 
cellar,  bodega,  f. 
to  censure,  censurar,  1. 
cent,  centavo,  m. 
ceremony,  funcion,  f. 
certain,  aer^o. 
certainly,  jpor  cierto. 
chain,  cadena,  f. 
chair,  si7/«,  f. 
champagne,   chamimfia, 

f. 
chapter,  capitulo,  m. 
to  charge,  encargar,  1. 
charity,  caridad,  f. 
Charles,  Carlos. 
cheap,  barato. 
cheese,  queso,  ra. 
cherry,  cereza,  f. 
chicken,  pollp,  ra.  ^aZZi- 

?ia,  f. 
child,  7iz/lo,  ra. 
cholera,  colera,  ra. 
church,  iglcsia,  f. 
city,  dudad,  f. 
class,  cZas^,  f. 
clean,  Hmpio. 
clear,  c^aro. 
clerk,  dependiente,  m. 
climate,  cMina,  m. 


388 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


closed,  cerrado. 
closet,  arinario,  m. 
cloth,  paiio,  m. 
clothes,  ropa,  f.  vesiidos, 

m.  pi. 
coach,  cochey  m. 
coal,  carboiiy  m. 
coat,  casaaiy  f. 
Caesar,  Cesar. 
coffee,  cafe,  m. 
cold,  frio. 
college,  colegio,  m. 
Columbus,  Colon. 
colonel,  cormiel,  m. 
to  come,  venir,  3. 
to  come  down,  bajar,  1. 
comedy,  comedla,  f. 
to  come  from  (to  origi 

nate),  provenir,  3. 
comes,  viene. 
comes  out,  sale. 
to  comfort,  consolavy  1. 
companion,  comimnero, 

m. 
to  compare,  componer,  2. 
to  compel,  ohligar,  1. 
to  compensate,  reparar, 

1. 
to  complain,  qucjarse,  1. 
conceited,  prcsumido. 
concert,  concicrto,  m. 
concise,  conciso. 
to  conclude,  concluir,  3. 
to  condemn,  coiid^nar,  1. 
condition,  estado,  m. 
conduct,  conduda,  f. 
to  conduct,  conducir,  3. 
to  confess,  confesar,  1. 
conflagration,  incendio, 

in. 
conformably,  conforme. 


congress,  congreso,  m. 
to  conquer,  veneer ,  2. 
to  consist,  cansistir,  3. 
to  console,  consotar,  1. 
conspiracy,  conjuracion, 

f. 
to  construct,   eonstruir. 

3. 
to  consult,  coiisidtar,  1. 
consulted,  consuUado. 
to  contain,  contener,  2. 
contains,  contiene. 
to  continue,  seguir,  3. 

continuar,  1. 
contrary,  contrario. 
on  the  contrary,  aZ  coti- 

to  converse,  cOTit'cr^a?',  1. 
to  convince,  cwii;c?ice?%  2. 
cook,  cocinero,  ni. 
cook,  cocinera,  f 
cool,  fresco. 
to  copy,  copiar,  1. 
copy-book,  cuaderno,  m. 
corner,  rincoii,  m. 
to  cost,  costar,  1. 
cotton,  algodon,  m. 
count,  conde,  m. 
to  count,  contar,  1. 
countess,  condesa,  f. 
country, j[?a^rm,f.  campo^ 

m.  pais,  m. 
courage,  valor,  m. 
of  course,  jocr  supuesto. 
cousin,  pri'tno,  in. 
cousin,  prima,  f. 
cow,  i;<2cn^,  f. 
creator,  creador,  ni. 
credit,  eredito,  m. 
on  credit,  <:^  eredito. 
crew,  tripulacion,  f. 


crime,  crimen,  m. 

cross,  cri^z,  f. 

to  cross  over,  dtravesar, 

1. 
cruel,  c?'i6cZ. 
to  cry,  llorar,  1.  gritar, 

1. 
culprit,  7-co,  m. 
to  cut,  corta^r,  1. 
cut,  cortado. 


D. 

damp,  hihnedo. 

to  dance,  bailar,  1. 

I  dance,  J«i7o. 

dancing,  danza,  f. 

dangerous,  jjeligroso. 

to  dare,  (?5rtr,  1. 

dark,  osciiro. 

daughter,  7«}'a,  f. 

day,  6?in!,  m. 

the  day  after  to-mor- 

•   row,  pasado  manaiia. 

deaf,  sordo. 

dear,  ccw^o. 

death,  muerte,  f. 

debt,  dcuda,  f. 

to  deceive,  enganar,  1. 

to  decide,  decidir,  3. 

deep,  profundo. 

to  defeat,  derrotar,  1. 

to  defend,  defender,  2. 

to  delay,  atrasar,  1. 

to  depart,  marcharse,  1. 

to  depict,  pintar,  1. 

deputy,  diputado,  m. 

dervis,  dervis,  m. 

to  deserve,  merccer,  2. 

to  desire,  desear,  1, 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


389 


despised,  des'prcciado. 
to  destroy,  dcstrioir,  3. 
desuetude,  desuso,  m. 
to  devastate,  asolar^  1. 
to  devote,  dedicar,  1. 
to  die,  morir,  3. 
died,  miirid,  muerto. 
different,  difercnte. 
difficult,  dificil. 
difficulty,  dificultad,  f. 
to  dine,  comer,  2. 
do  you  dine  ?  ^  come  V.  ? 
we  dine,  comcmos. 
dining-room,   comedor, 

m. 
dinner,  comida,  f. 
to  direct,  dirigir,  3. 
direction,  senas,  f.  pi. 
dirty,  siicio. 
to  disband,  Ucenciar,  1. 
discord,  discordia,  f, 
to  discover,  descubrir,  3. 
diisolaedientfdesobediente. 
to  disobey,    desobedecer, 

2. 
to  dispose,  disponer,  2. 
disposed,  dispueslo. 
to  dispute,  disputar,  1. 
distinct,  distinto. 
to  distrust,  descmifiar,  1 . 
divinity,  dwinidxtd,  f. 
to  do,  tiacer^  2. 
do  you  do  ?  ^'  A«ce  F.  .^ 
to  do   again,    volver  a 

hacer. 
dog,  peiTo,  m. 
doll,  mufieca,  f. 
dollar,  ^;c5o,  m. 
done,  hecho. 
door,  piierta,  f. 
to  doubt,  diidar,  1. 


down  stairs,  abajo. 

dozen,  docena,  f. 

to  draw,  sacar,  1.  c?^i^- 

/(xr,  1. 
drawer,  c«;'o7i,  ni. 
drawing,  dibujo,  m. 
dream,  sueilo,  m. 
to  dream,  5o/iar,  1. 
dress,  ^raje,  m.  vestido, 

m. 
to  dress,  vestirsCj  3. 
I  drink,  &e6o. 
drop,  ^o^«,  f. 
druggist,  boticario,  m. 
during,  durante. 


E. 

each,  c«6?«. 
eager,  ansioso. 
early,  tcmprano. 
to  earn,  ganar,  1. 
earns,  ^a?i«. 
earth,  tierra,  f. 
earthquake,   terremoto, 

m. 
easy,  /<7,ct7. 
to  eat,  comer,  2. 
eaten,  comido. 
eating,  comida,  f. 
Edward,  Eduardo. 
effeminate,  femenil. 
^%%i  huevo,  m. 
elegance,  elegancia,  f. 
to  elect,  e%2>,  3. 
emperor,  emperador,  m. 
to  employ,  emplear,  1. 
employment,  empleo,  in. 
empty,  vacio. 
end,  j^??,,  m. 


to  end,  concluirse,  3. 
enemy,  enemigo,  m. 
to  engage,  embarcar,  1. 
England,  Inglatcrra,  f. 
Englishman,  /^iryZcs',  m. 
enormous,  eiiorme. 
enough,  bastante. 
to  enrich,  enriquecer,  2. 
to  enter,  entrar,  1. 
to  entreat,  silplicar,  1. 
entreaty,  suplica,  f. 
to  escape,  escapar,  1. 
to  establish,   establccer, 

2. 
estate,  hacienda,  f. 
eternal,  eierno. 
Europe,  Europa,  f. 
even,  aw^i. 
ever,  jamas. 
everybody,  ^oc?o  eZ  w^m- 

everything,  jfo^o. 

example,  ejempio,  m. 

to  examine,  examinar,!. 

to  exceed,  esceder,  2. 

excellent,  escelente. 

except,  excepto. 

to  exchange,  cambiar,  1. 

to  excuse,  escusar,  1. 

exempted,  exento. 

exit,  salida,  f. 

to   expect,  esperar,    1. 

aguardar,  1. 
expense,  costo,  f.  gastOy 

m. 
experience,  experiencia, 

f. 
to  explain,  explicar,  1. 
extinguisher,  extingui- 

dor,  m. 
eye,  ojo,  m. 


390 


GENERAL    VOCABULARY. 


F. 

fac8,  cara^  f. 

to  f ail, /altar,  1. 

to  faint,  desmayarsey  1. 

fair,  rubio, 

faith,  fe,  f. 

faithful,  fiel. 

to  fall,  caer,  2.  cacrse,  2. 

to  fall  asleep,  dorinirse, 

3. 
family,  familiaf  f. 
fan,  abanicOj  in. 
far,  Zyos. 

farmer,  lahrador,  m. 
falsehood,  mcntira,  f. 
to  be  fast,  adelantar,  1. 
■  fate,  suerte,  f. 
father,  2>cidre,  m. 
favor,  favor,  m. 
to  favor,  favorccer,  2. 
favorable,  favoi-aUe. 
fear,  temor,  m. 
to  fear,  ^(37?icr,  2. 
feast,  fiesta. 
to  feel,  seiitir,  3. 
fellow-scholar,  condiscl- 

2ml 0,  m. 
Ferdinand,  Fernando. 
feYeT,fiehre,  f. 
few,  pocos. 
a  few,  ««to5  ^oco5. 
fight,  pelea,  f. 
to  fight,  pelear,  1. 
filial,  /ZmZ. 
to  find,  hallar,  1.  encon- 

trar,  1. 
fine,  hermoso. 
finger,  c?ec?o,  m. 
to  finish,   concluir,    3. 

acahar,  1. 


txe,  fuego,  m. 

first,  primero. 

fiower, /or,  f. 

to  fly,  volar,  1. 

to  follow,  seguir,  3. 

follow,  siguen. 

I  am  fond  of,  me  gusta. 

foolish,  ^071^0. 

foot,  jt?ie,  in. 

on  foot,  a  ^ie. 

for,  ji;ara,  jt?t<cs. 

to  forget,  olvidar,  1. 

to  forgive,  perdonar,  1. 

to  form,  for  mar,  1. 

formerly,  g?t  tienipo  pa- 

sado. 
fortress,  fortaleza,  f. 
fortune,  fortuna,  f. 
found,  hallado. 
to  founder,    ec/iar  (i 

four,  cuatro. 
fowl,  gallina,  f. 
France,  Francia,  f. 
to  freeze,  helar,  1. 
Frenchman,  Frances,  m. 
friend,  amigo,  m. 
friendly,  arnistoso. 
friendship,  aynistad,  f. 
fruit, /rw^a,  f. 
full,  ZZe?io. 


Galileo,  Galileo. 
garden,  jardin,  m. 
gardener,  jardinero,  m. 
gas,  ^Trts,  m. 

generally,  generalmente. 
generous,  generoso. 


genius,  mgenio,  m. 
gentleman,  caballero,  m. 
German,  Alcinan,  m. 
Germany,  Alemania,  f, 
to  get  angry,  enfadarse, 

1. 
to   get  vexed,  formali- 

zarse,  1. 
girl,  muchacha,  f. 
to  give,  c?a?',  1. 
I  give,  cZo?/. 

to  give  back,  devolver,  2. 
give,  o?e  F". 
give  me,  c?e»2e  F". 
given,  c?acZ(?. 
gives,  cZn^. 
glass,  V'idrio,  m. 
glass  (to  drink  in),  vrt5'0, 

m. 
gloriously,     gloriosa- 

mente. 
glove,  guante,  m. 
to  go,  ir,  3.  mar  char,  1. 
to  go  away,  trse^  3. 
God,  7Jzo5,  m. 
godfather,  padrino,  m. 
godmother,  madrina,  f. 
goes,  t^a. 
goes  out,  sale. 
are  you  going  ?  ^'  27a  F.  /* 
I  am  going,  voy. 
gold,  oro,  ni. 
good,  hueno.  Men. 
good  by,  <x(^zo5. 
good  day,  huenos  dias. 
good  morning,   huenos 

dias. 
good  night,    buenas 

noches. 
goods,  mercancias,  f.  pi. 
to  go  out,  salir,  3. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


591 


do  you  go  out?    isalc 

V.  ? 
to  go  to  bed,  acostarsc^  1. 
to  govorn,  gohernar,  1. 
government,   gobiemo, 

m. 
to  grant,  qucrer,  2. 
grandee,  grande,  m. 
grass,  ycrba,  f. 
greatness,  grandcza,  f. 
greedy,  codicioso. 
Greek,  griego. 
green,  verdc. 
grief,  iKsar^  ni. 
grocer,  pxdpero,  m. 
guilty,  cidpado. 
gun,  fusil,  m. 


to  be  in  the  habit,  soler, 

2. 
hair,  2MlOy  m. 
half,  mitadj  f. 
ham,  jamon,  m. 
hand,  mano,  f. 
to  hand,  entrcgar,  1 . 
handkerchief,  paiiicelo, 

ni. 
handsome,  hermoso. 
to  happen,  acontece7%  2. 
happy,  dichoso,  feliz. 
hard,  pe^ioso. 
hardly,  apenas. 
has,  ^ic?ze. 
hat,  sombrero,  m. 
to  hate,  ocular,  1.  a&or- 

rcccr,  2. 
hatter,  sombrerero,  m, 
haughty,  soberbio. 


to  have,  ^c?i^r,  2. 
have,  ticncn. 
headache,    cl  dolor  de 

cabeza. 
healthy,  salubre. 
to  hear,  oir,  3. 
heaven,  cielo,  m. 
heir,  hcrcdcro,  m. 
to  help,  ayudar,  1. 
Hanry,  Enrique. 
her,  sii, 
here,  «g'?ti. 
here  is,  rt^wi  ^2e?ie  K 
hero,  heroe,  m. 
high,  aZ/Jo. 
his,  szi. 

history,  histoHa,  f. 
hogshead,  &oco?/,  m. 
to  hold,  teller,  2. 
holiday,  c^ia  festivo. 
holy  day,  ^c^to,  f. 
at  home,  en  casa. 
homely,  feo. 
honest,  honrado. 
hope,  esperanza,  f. 
to  hope,  esp)erar,  1. 
horse,  caballo,  m. 
on  horseback,  d  caballo. 
hotel,  hotel,  m.  fonda,  f. 
hour,  hora,  f. 
house,  casa,  f. 
to  the  house,  d  casa. 
how,  C0W7.0. 
how  much,  cuanto. 
however,  por  mas... que, 

sin  embargo. 
humanity,  humanidad, 

f. 
hunter,  cazador,  m. 
hurricane,  huracan,  m. 
husband,  mxirido,  m. 


idleness,  ociosidad,  f. 
if,  SI. 

ignorance,  ignorancia,i. 
ignorant,  ignorante, 
ill,  enfermw,  vialo. 
immediately,   cii  segui- 

da. 
immovable,  inmovil. 
impatient,  impaciente. 
important,  imjwrtante. 
impossible,  imptosible. 
in,  en. 

incapable,  incapaz. 
inclined,  proptcnso. 
indiiferent,  indiferente. 
indomitable,  indomable. 
to  induce,  indticir,  3. 
industrious,  industrioso. 
inhabitant,  habitante,m. 
to  inherit,  hercdar,  1. 
inkstand,  tintero,  m. 
inn,  2)osada,  f. 
innocence,  inocencia,  f. 
innocent,  inocente. 
to  inquire,  pregitntar,  1. 
insane,  loco. 
insolence,  insolenda,  f. 
instant,  instante,  m. 
to  instruct,  instruir,  3. 
instrument,  instrumen- 

to,  m. 
to  intend,  pensar,  1. 
do  you  intend?  ^piensa 

v.? 

intelligent,  inteligente. 
intention,  intencion,  f. 
interesting,  interesante. 
in  this  way,   de  este 
rrwdo. 


392 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


to  interest,  interesaVf  1. 
intoxicated,  horracho. 
to  introduce,  presaitar, 

1. 
invitation,  invitacion,  f. 
to  invite,  convidar,  1. 
to  invoke,  invocar,  1. 
iron,  hierrOf  m. 
is,  es. 

Isabella,  Isabel. 
island,  isla,  f. 
Italy,  Italia^  f. 

J. 

jeweller,  joyeroy  m. 
John,  Juan. 
journey,  viaje,  m. 
judgment,  scntenciay  f. 
to  judge,  juzgaVy  1. 
Julius,  Julio. 
to  jump,  saltar,  1. 
June,  JuniOj  m. 

K. 

to  keep,  guardar,  1. 
key,  Z^aije,  f. 
to  kill,  TTiatar,  1. 
kindness,  hondad,  f. 
king,  re?/,  m. 
kingdom,  reino,  m. 
kitchen,  cocina,  f. 
knife,  cuchillo,  m. 
to  know,  conocer-,  2.  5«- 

&er,  2.  reconocer,  2. 
do  you  know?     /saJe 

F.  z'  ^'  conoce  V.  ? 
I  know,  con.ozco,  yo  se. 
known,  conocido. 
knows,  sahe. 


lamp,  Idmparaj  f. 
language,    idiomay   m. 

lengua,  f. 
lane,  callejuela,  f. 
last,  uUirno,  pasado. 
lasted,  durado. 
last  night,  anoche. 
late,  ^a?'c^c. 
Latin,  Latin. 
to  laugh,  mr,  3. 
to  laugh  at,  burlarse,  1 
laughs,  rie. 
law,  Ze?/,  f. 
lawsuit,  2^lcitOy  m. 
lawyer,  abogado,  m. 
lazy,  haragan. 
lead,  pi 07)10,  m. 
leaguje,  Zc^i^a,  f. 
to  learn,  aprender,  2. 
learned,  a2:)rendido. 
at  least,  <f  ^o  meiios. 
to  leave,  saZzr,  3.  s«Z?> 

r?c,  dejar,  1.  alejarse, 

1.  partir,  3. 
leaves,  .9aZe. 
leg,  pierna,  f. 
lemonade,  limonada,  f. 
to  lend,  prestar,  1. 
lesson,  Icccion,  f. 
to  let,  alquilar,  1. 
letter,  car^n^,  f. 
liberal,  liheral. 
liberality,    liberalid^d, 

f. 
liberty,  lihertad,  f. 
library,  hiblioteca,  f. 
license,  licencia,  f. 
life,  i;zV/r^  f. 
light,  Zw^,  f.  ' 


to  light,  encendcr,  2. 
do  you  like  1  ^'  Ze  ^itsto 

a  r.  ? 
I  like,  ??ie  ^?«5^a. 
to  limp,  cojeavy  1. 
lion,  /co?t,  m. 
list,  /25to,  f. 
to  listen  to,  escuchavy  1. 
little,  pcqueTiOy  chiqidto. 
little,  2)ocOy  adv. 
to  live,  vivivy  3. 
lively,  alegre. 
lives,  vive. 

to  lock  up,  enccrraTy  1. 
lodging,  alojamientOy  m. 
London,  Londres. 
long,  largo. 

long  time, m?«cAo  tiempo. 
to  look  at,  inirary  1. 
to  look  for,  buscar,  1. 
to  lose,  pe7-der,  2. 
loss,  perdida,  f. 
lost,  pierdido. 
loud,  aZ^o. 
Louisa,  Luisa. 
love,  ci'?/?or,  in. 
to  love,  amaVy  1. 
do  you  love  ?  ^"  ama  F. .? 
I  love,  ai/io. 
loved,  amado. 
low,  fea/o,  comun. 
luck,  c?ic/ia,  f. 


madam,  scnora. 
mahogany,  cr/oJa,  f. 
mail,  corrcOy  m. 
to  make,  7?accr,  2. 
to    make    a    mistake, 
equivocarsey  1. 


ENGLISH- SPANISH. 


393 


manner,  costumbre^  f. 
manufacturer,  fabri- 

cante. 
man,  hombre,  m. 
to  manage,  (jobcrnar,  1 
to   manufacture,  fabri- 

car,  1. 
many,  mucJios,  muchas. 
maple,  arce,  m. 
march,  marcha,  f. 
to  march,  7)iarc/iar,  1. 
to  marry,  casar^  1.  ca- 

sarse,  1. 
mask,  mclscara,  f. 
mason,  albahil^  m. 
mastsr,  amo,  m. 
matter,  asunto,  m. 
matter  of  importance, 

cosn,  f. 
maxim,  maxima,  f.  sen- 

tencia,  f. 
means,  medio,  m. 
to  measure,  medir,  3. 
meat,  came,  f. 
to  meet,  encontrar,  1. 
memory,  memoHa,  f, 
merchant,    comerciante, 

m.  mercoidcr,  in. 
merit,  merito,  m. 
mil  3,  milla,  f. 
military,  militar. 
milk,  /ec/ie,  f. 
mine,  mina,  f, 
minute,  minuto,  m. 
mirror,  espejo,  m. 
miser,  avaro,  m. 
misery,  miseria,  f. 
misfortune,  desgracia,  f. 
mistake,  equivocacion,  1". 
mob,  jjopula.cho,  m. 
moment,  momento,  m. 


money,  diner o,  m. 
month,  mc5,  m. 
monument,  monumento, 

ra. 
moon,  Zitwa,  f. 
Moor,  moro,  m. 
more,  m:<5. 
morning,  manana,  f. 
the   most,    Za   m/xyor 

parte. 
mother,  madre,  f. 
motive,  motivo,  m. 
to  mount,  montar,  1. 
mountain,  7;io?i^e,  m. 
mouse,  r^iJo?^,  m. 
mouth,  6ocn^,  f. 
to  move,  mover,  2. 
movement,  movimiento, 

m. 
Mr.,  ASij/Tor, 
Mrs.,  Sehora. 
much,  mitcho,  mucha. 
mud,  ^^(?,  m. 
music,  musica,  f. 
must,  c^cZ)cr,  2. 
my,  mi. 

N. 
nail,  w;ia,  f. 
name,  nombre,  m. 
nation,  nacion,  f. 
natural,  natural 
navigation,  navegacion, 

f. 
near,  ^erca. 
nearly,  r;crcf7  f?c. 
necessary,  predso,    me- 

nester,  necesario. 
necessity,  necesid^d,  f. 
by  necessity,  ^or  ^^rc- 


neck,  pescuezo,  m. 
to  need,  necesitar,  1. 
do  you  need "?  ^'  necesita 

v.? 

I  need,  necesita. 
needs,  necesita. 
neither,  tampoco,  ni. 
never,  nunca,  jamas. 
new,  nuevo. 
news,  noticia,  f. 
newspaper,  j^eriodico,  m. 
next,  proximo. 
next  week,    Za  semanot 

que  viene. 
night,  noche,  f. 
no,  no,  ninguno. 
nobody,  nadie. 
noise,  ruido,  m. 
no  longer,  ya  no. 
no... more,  no... mas. 
none,  ninguno. 
no  one,  nadie. 
nor,  ni. 

north,  norte,  m. 
no  sooner,  apmas. 
not  any,  ninguno. 
not  anybody,  9i^f?zc. 
not  anything,  nada. 
not  either,  tampoco, 
nothing,  nada. 
novel,  novela,  f. 
now,  ahora. 
number,  numero,  m. 
nut,  nuez,  f. 


obedient,  obedienfe. 
to  obey,  obedeccr,  2. 
object,  ohjeto,  m. 
to  oblige,  obligar,  1. 


394 


GENERAL  VOCABULARY. 


obstinate,  porjiado. 
to   obtain,    obtciier,    2. 

cmiscguir^  3. 
occasion,  ocasimi,  f. 
to  occupy,  ocupar^  1. 
of,  de. 

to  offand,  ofendcr,  2. 
to  offer,   ofrecer,   2.  5z^- 

ininistrary  1. 
officer,  ojicialf  m. 
office,  escritoriOf  m. 
often,  a  menudo. 
oil,  aceite,  m. 
old,  nejo. 
on,  5o6rc. 
only,  solamente, 
to  open,  a^rir,  3. 
opened,  abierto. 
opinion,  ojunioiif  f.  co?i- 

cc^^^o,  m. 
orange,  naranja,  f. 
to  order,  inandar,  1. 
ordinary,  coimtiu 
other,  o^ro. 
ounce,  wi;:;«,  f. 
out,  nfuera, 
outcry,  grito,  m. 
overcoat,  sobretodo,  m. 
to  overwhelm,  colmar,!. 
to  owe,  deber,  2. 
I  owe,  debo. 
owes,  debe. 
owner,  diteno,  m. 
ox,  buey,  m. 


package,  pnquete,  m. 
page,  pdf/ina,  f. 
painful,  penoso. 


painting,  pintura,  f. 
palace,  palacio^  m. 
paper,  papel,  m. 
parents,  padres,  m.  pi. 
park,  parque,  m. 
part,  parte,  f. 
to  pass,  pasar,  1. 
past,  pasado, 
paternal,  paternal. 
patience,  pacicncia,  f. 
patient    (sick   person), 

enfermo,  m. 
to  pay,  pagar,  1. 
peace,  j!;«;2,  f. ' 
pear,^7crrt,  f. 
to  peol,  descascarar,  1. 
pencil,  Za/?22;,  m. 
penknife,   corta2)lumas, 

m. 
people,  (7c?i?'e,  f. 
to  people,  ptoblar,  1. 
perhaps,  acaso,  ^aZ  i-^^;. 
person,  persona,  f. 
Peter,  Pc^^ro. 
Philip,  Felipe. 
physician,  medico,  m. 
picture,  7xtrato,  m.  cwa 

piece,  pieza,   f.  pedazo, 

m. 
pink,  clavel,  m. 
pious,  joio. 
place,  hi  gar ^  m. 
plant,  planta.,  f. 
to  play,  jicgar,  1.  reprc- 

senfar,  1. 
to  play  on,  jfocr«r,  1 . 
to  please,  complacer,  2. 
pleased,  contento. 
pleasure,  r/zesi^o,  m. 
poison,  veneno,  m. 


polite,  corses,  comedido, 
Pompey,  Pompeyo. 
poor,  pobre. 
port,  piterto,  m. 
possession,  'posesion,  f. 
possible,  posible. 
post,  correo,  m. 
posterity,  posteritad,  f. 
postman,  cartero,  m. 
post-office,  correo,  m, 
pound,  Zi6ra,  f. 
power,  poder,  m. 
powerful,  p)ode7'oso. 
to  practise,  practicar,  1. 
praise,  alabanza,  f. 
to  praise,  alabar,  1. 
precept,  prcceptto,  m. 
to  prefer,  preferir,  3. 
to  prepare,  preparar,  1. 
prerogative,   preroga- 

tiva,  f. 
to  prescribe,  prcscribir, 

3. 
to  present,  presentar,  1. 
press,  inijjrenta,  f. 
to  pretend,  jyretender,  2. 
pretty,  bonito. 
price,  2jrecio,  m. 
prince,  jirincijje,  m. 
principle,  jjrincijno,  m. 
prison,  carcel,  f. 
prisoner,  prisionero,  m. 
privilege,  privilcgio,  m. 
probable,  p^robable. 
•proh&'blY,  probableme^ite. 
procession,  jirocesion,  f. 
professor,  profcsor, 
profitable,  vcntajoso. 
to  promise,  prometer,  2. 
to  pronounce,  pronun- 

ciar,  1. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


395 


proof,  prucha,  f. 

to  be  proper,  convenir. 

3. 
property,  jpropUdad.  f. 
propitious,  iiro-picio. 
to  propose,  j^^oponer,  2. 
proud,  orgidloso. 
to  prove,  2J^'obarj  1. 
providsd,  con  tal  que. 
public,  publico. 
pulled  down,  demolido. 
to  punish,  castigar^  1. 
pupil,  discipulo,  ni. 
to  put  on,  poncrsc,  2. 
put,  pues'o. 


a. 

queen,  reiua,  f. 
question,  pregunta,  f. 
quick,  ligero. 
quiokly,  ^yronio. 
quiet,  quieto. 


railroad,  ferro  carril,  m. 
rain,  lluvia,  f. 
to  rain,  llovci\  2. 
rare,  raro. 
rath3r,  algo. 
to  read,  leer,  2. 
rDad,  leidc. 
ready,  listo. 
reason,  7'azon,  f. 
to  reseiva,  recibir,  3. 
received,  rccihldo. 
to  recommend,  recom^n- 
dar,  1. 


recompense,  recompensaf 

f. 
red,  Colorado,  encendido. 
to  re-establish,  restable- 

cer,  2. 
refreshment,  refresco,  m. 
regiment,  regimiento,m. 
to  regret,  sentir,  3. 
to  reign,  rei7iar,  1. 
to  rejoice,  alcgrarsc,  1. 
to  relate,  referir,  3. 
to  remain,  quedarse,  1. 
to  remember,  ac'ordarse, 

1. 
to  remove,  ctpartar,  1. 
to  repeat,  repetir,  3. 
to  repent,  arrepentirse^ 

3. 
to  repress,  rcprimir,  3. 
to  reside,  residir,  3. 
to  resolve,  resolver,  2. 
to  rest,  descansar,  1. 
to  respect,  respctar,  1. 
to  result,  provcnir,  3. 
to  return,  wZrer,  2.  £^c- 

volver,  2. 
return,  vuelva  V. 
to  revolt,  suhlevar,  1. 
rich,  ?^ico. 
a  very  rich  man,  Wm- 

c^o??.,  m. 
right,  derecho. 
ripe,  rnaduro. 
to  rise,  levantarsc,  1. 
river,  rw,  ra. 
road,  camino,  m. 
rogue,  pizaro,  m. 
Roman,  Romano,  m. 
Romulus,  Rdmulo. 
room,  cuarto,  m. 
rose,  r(;sa,  f. 


to  rot,  podrir,  3. 
rudeness,  groseria,  f. 
ruin,  ruina,  f. 
to  ruin,  arruinar,  1. 
to  run,  correr,  2. 
Russia,  Rusia. 
Russian,  ii^o. 


S. 

saber,  sa&Ze,  m. 

sacred,  sagrado. 

sad,  iris'^e. 

saddle,  ^i7Z«,  f. 

safe,  c»;'a^,  f. 

said,  cZtcAo. 

sailor,  marinero,  m. 

same,  mismo. 

satisfied,  satisfecho,  con- 

tento. 
to  say,  c?2a>,  3. 
cay,  c?/j.'*  F. 
says,  eZicc. 

scholar,  discipuh,  m. 
school,  escuela,  f. 
science,  ciencia,  f. 
Scipio,  Escip>wn. 
to  scream,  gritar,  1. 
season,  cstacion,  f. 
seated,  scntado. 
scissors,  tijeras,  f.  pi. 
to  see,  t^er,  2. 
do  you  see  ?  ^-  ije  F.  i* 
I  see,  rco. 
seem,  parecen. 
seen,  vw^o. 
sees,  re. 

to  select,  escoger,  2. 
self,  mismo. 
to  sell,  vender,  2. 


396 


GENERAL  VOCABULABY. 


do  you  sell  ?  i  vende  F.  ? 

I  sell,  vcndo. 

sells,  vcnde. 

to  send,  mandar,  1.  en- 

viar,  1. 
send,  mande  V. 
sent,  cnviado. 
servant,  criado,  m. 
servant-girl,  crvida,  f. 
served,  scrvido. 
service,  servicio,  m. 
several,  varios,  m.    va- 

riaSj  f. 
to  shave,  afeitar,  1. 
sheet,  sdhana,  f. 
shilling,  real,  m. 
ship,  biiqiiej  m. 
shirt,  camisa,  f. 
shoe,  zapato,  m. 
shoamaker,  zaiKdero,  m. 
to  shoot,  afasilar,  1. 
shop,  tienda,  f. 
short,  cor^o. 
to  show,  mostrar,  1. 
to  shut,  cerrar,  1. 
shut,  cerrado. 
sick,  enfernio. 
side,  Zao?o,  m. 
silent,  callado. 
silk,  5cc?a,  f. 
silly,  ^wi^Jo. 
silver,  ;j>Za^rt^,  f. 
since,  c?<^6'<Zc,  fZcsn?^  ^'ite. 
to  sing,  cantar,  1. 
singer,  cantatriZj  f. 
singing,  ca7fc^o,  m. 
sings,  canfa. 
singular,  singular. 
Sir,  seylar. 
sister,  hnvriana,  f. 
to  sit  down,  sentarse,  1. 


situation,   empleo,    m. 

colocacion,  f. 
skilful,  M6^7. 
slate,  piza,rra,  f. 
to  sleep,  dormir,  3. 
sleigh,  trinco,  m. 
slowly,  dcspacio. 
smoXly  pequefio. 
smell,  oZor,  m. 
snow,  7WCVC,  f. 
so,  asl,  tan. 
society,  sociedad,  f. 
sold,  vendido. 
some,  alguno. 
somebody,  alguien,    al 

guno. 
some  one,  alguno. 
something,  algo. 
something  else,   otra 

cosa. 
sometimes,    algunas 

veces. 
somewhere,    alguna 

parte. 
son,  Jiijo,  m. 
song,  cancion,  f. 
soon,  pronto. 
I  am    sorry  for  it,    lo 

sicnto. 
so  that,  asi  que. 
soup,  sopa,  f. 
sour,  agrio. 
to  sow,  sembrar,  1. 
Spain,  Espafia,  f. 
Spaniard,  Espanol,  m. 
Spanish,  espanol. 
do  you  speak  ? 

ihahla  V.  ?  sing. 

^-  Aa&/a7i  r.  V.  ?  pi. 
I  speak,  hallo. 
they  speak,  hablan. 


speaks,  habla. 
species,  csp>ecie,  f. 
speculation,    especula- 

cion,  f. 
to  spend,  gastar,  1. 
spends,  gasta. 
splendid,  iriagnifico. 
spoken,  Imblado. 
spot,  Ingar,  m. 
spring,  primavera,  f. 
squadron,  escuadra,  f. 
stab    (with   a   poniard), 

jnmalada,  f. 
stable,  caballeriza,  f. 
to  stand,  par  arse.,  1. 
standing,  parado. 
star,  estrella,  f. 
state,  estado,  m. 
statue,  estdtua,  f. 
to  steal,  robar,  1. 
steam,  vapor,  m. 
steamer,  vapor,  ni. 
stocking,  media,,  f. 
store,  almacen,  m. 
stranger,  estrangero,  m. 
strawberry,  //Tsa,  f. 
street,  ca/Zc,  f. 
strength,  fuerza,  f. 
to  strike,  ^;6r/ar,  1. 
strong,  fuerte. 
student,  estudiante,  m. 
studied,  estudiado. 
studious,  estudioso. 
study,  estudio,  'm. 
to  study,  estudiar,  1. 
do  you  study  1  ^estudian 

V.  V.  r 
we  study,  estudiamos. 
to  subdue,  someter,  2. 
suburbs,  contornos,  m. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH. 


397 


such  as,  tal. 
suddenly,  de  rcpente. 
to  suffer,  padccer,  2. 
to  suffocate,  safocavy  1, 
sugar,  aziicar,  m. 
sun,  sol,  m. 
sunshade,  quUasol,  m. 
supper,  cena,  f. 
to  support,  mantener,  2. 
to  suppose,  suponcr,  2. 
supreme,  supremo. 
sure,  seguro. 
surprised,  sorprendido. 
to   surrender,    rendirse, 

3. 
to   suspend,    suspender^ 

2. 
sweet,  didce. 
swollen,  hinchado. 


T. 

table,  mesa,  f. 

tailor,  sastre,  m. 

to  take,  tomar,  1.  llevar, 

1.  conditcir,  3. 
to  take  a  walk,  «iar  «7i 

paseo,  pasearse,  1 . 
to  take  interest,  intere- 

sarse,  1. 
to  take  off,  quitarse,  1. 
to  take  possession,  «2?o- 

dcrarse,  1. 
tale,  cuento,  in. 
talent,  talento,  m. 
tall,  aZ^o. 

Tartary,  Tartaria,  f. 
tea,  /e,  m. 

teacher,  maestro^  m. 
teaches,  ensefia. 


tear,  Idgrimxt,  f. 
Telemachus,  Telemaco. 
to  tall,  c?ec/r,  3. 
tell,  r%.7-  F. 
tells,  f/icc. 

thankful,  agradecido. 
thank  you,  gracias. 
I   (or    we)   thank  you, 

tibmihas  gracias. 
that,  aquello,  eso. 
that  thing,  aqitello. 
theatre,  teatro,  m. 
then,  despues. 
theological,  teologal. 
theoretical,  teoretico. 
there,  a/u'.  aZZ«. 
therefore,  asi. 
there  is,  /i,<72/. 
thief,  ladron„m.. 
thing,  cosa,  f. 
to  think,  pensar,  1. 
this,  esto. 
this  thing,  esto. 
thre3,  tres. 
through,  por. 
thunder,  trueno,  m. 
thus,  asi. 
tigar,  tigre,  in. 
till,  hasta. 
time,  tiempo,  m.  Aora,  f. 

V6';i;,  f. 
timid,  timido. 
tired,  cansado. 
to-day,  ho7/. 
together,  junto. 
to-morrow,  manana. 
too,  demasiado,  tamhien. 
too  many,  demnsiados. 
too  much,  demasiado. 
tooth,  dicnte,  m. 
tower,  tovi^e,  f. 


town,  pueblo,  m. 

to  translate,  traducir,  3. 

translation,  traducion, 

f. 
transparent,  ^?'<]r52:>ar<??i^c. 
tQ  travel,  viajar,  1. 
to  treat,  tratar,  1. 
tree,  dr^oZ,  m. 
to  tremble,  temblar,  1. 
trifle,  hagatela,  f.  /rw- 

Zera,  f. 
trimmed,  bordado. 
to  trouble,  molestar,  1. 
trunk,  ftaz^Z,  m. 
truth,  verdad,  f. 
turkey,  ^7n^i;o,  m. 
to  turn,  mover,  2.  volver^ 

2. 
two,  r(?06'. 


xr. 

Tigiy»  /CO. 

umbrella,  pardguas,  m. 

uncle,  ^/o,  m. 

under,  ftr/^'o. 

to  understand,  entcnder, 

2.  comprendcr.  2. 
unfortunate,    desgra- 

ciado. 
unfortunately,  por  dcs- 

gracia. 
unhappy,  infeliz. 
unless,  d  menos  que. 
until,  hasta,  hasta  que. 
unwell,  maJo. 
unworthy,  indigno. 
upon,  sobre. 
to  upset,  derribar,  1. 
up  stairs,  arriba. 


398 


GENERAL   VOCABULARY. 


urbanity,  urbanidad,  f. 
us,  nosntros. 
useful,  4tiL 
useless,  intitiL 


V. 

vegetable,  legumbre,  f. 
verse,  verso,  m. 
very,  muij,  mismo. 
vessel,  buque,  m.  barco, 

m. 
vest,  cha-cco,  m. 
victory,  victoria,  f. 
village,  ^7 wcWo,m.  aldca^ 

f. 
virtue,  virtud,  f. 
to  visit,  visitar,  1. 
volume,  tomo,  m. 


\7. 

to  wait,    cspcrar,    1. 

a^uardir,  1. 
walk,  ;msco,  m. 
to   walk,  andar,  1. 
walliinrj-stick,    bccsion, 

in. 
wall,  7«zi?^o,  m. 
war,  gucrra,  f. 
warm,  crrliente. 
to  warm,  calentar,  1. 
was,  era. 
to  wash,  Zazjar,  1. 


washerwoman,    lavan- 

dera,  f. 
watchful,  vigilante. 
water,  dgua,  f. 
way,  modo,  m.  medio. 
weak,  c^e^?7.  ^ 

week,  scmana,  f. 
to  weep,  /^o?'ar,  1. 
weeps,  Uora. 
well,  ^Mso,  m. 
well,  bien,  ^yiCes,  bueno. 
what,  que. 
when,  cuando,  que. 
where,  donde. 
which,  q7i3. 
whito,  bianco. 
who,  quien. 
whom,  quien. 
whose  ?  ^  de  quien  ? 
why  1  I  ^?(?r{726i  ? 
wife,  mujer,  f. 
will  find,  eiicontrard. 
I  will  have,  quiero. 
William,  Guillermo. 
will  you  have  ?  ^  quierc 

V.  ? 
wind,  viento,  m. 
window,  ventana,  f. 
wine,  vino,  m. 
winter,  invierno,  m. 
wis3,  .<?/x6?0. 
wisely,  snbiamente. 
wish,  qui  even. 
do  you  wish?    iquiere 

v.? 

I  wish,  quiero. 


iCr"^ 


wo  wish,  dcMamos. 
wishes,  quicre,  desea. 
with,  co?i. 
within,  dcntro  de. 
with  me,  conmigo. 
without,  afucra,  sin. 
woman,  mujer,  f. 
wood,  hosqiic,  m.  lena,  f. 
word,  imlabra^  f. 
work,  trabajo,  m.  obra,  f. 
to  work,  trabajar,  1. 
workman,  obrero,  m. 
works,  trabaja. 
world,  mundo,  m. 
to  be  worth,  i-aZcr,  2. 
worthy,  digno. 
would  to  God !  OjaZa  .^ 
wounded,  herido. 
to  write,  escribir,  3. 
do  you  write?    ^ escribe 

v.? 

I  write,  escriho. 
writes,  escribe. 
writing,   cscritura,  f. 
written,  cscrito. 


Y. 

yard,  ^.^aho,  m.  wt?'«,  f. 
year,  ano,  m. 
yes,  51. 

yesterday,  ayer. 
yet,  todavia,  aim. 
young,  joven. 
youth,  juventud,  f. 


H 


alTV 


De  esta  segunda  edici6n  de   "Las  Tardes",    (depurada 

ligeramente  en  la  forma),   se  han  tirado   diez   ejem- 

plares    sobre    papel    de    hilo    Calpe-Ledger    nume- 

rados    del    1    al    10    y    firmados    por    el    autor. 

Terminose    de    imprimir    en    los    talleres    gr&- 

ficos    Porter    Hermanos,    para    la    editorial 

"Babel",    el    31    de    Diciembre    de    1927. 

La  justificacion  del  tiraje  que  dibujara 

Guillermo    Korn    para    la    circulacion 

inicial,     aut6ntica,     asimismo,     los 

ejemplares      de      la     presente 

edici6n. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  PINE  OP  25  CENTS 


\WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
/THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
(will  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 

DAY    AND    TO    $t.OO    ON    THF    sgyflMTY     DAY 

OVERDUE. 


lClr(N) 


^AAY    4   1939 


FEB17!84H1 


-^ 


*J94f^ 


SEP   18  ^ 


C:i5 


MAR   30  iS48 


OCT  14,  i^m 


^or  u  m 


REC'^ 


SEP  6'67"igPM 


LOAN  DEPT. 


LD  21 


VB  00986 
U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDD33ES37E 


/ 


786 


THE 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


